GIFT  or 
m.    ■  v.. 


■I 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/bellumhelveticumOOjanerich 


'       '  '    '       c    c'    c    '  c  «^         c    c    c  r  c   c^    c    S  < 


m  Vpii 


Zb'c  !JLaF?e  Classical  Series 


BELLUM    HELVETIC  UM 


A  BEGINNER'S  BOOK  IN  LATIN 


(REVISED  EDITION) 


BY 
ARTHUR  L.  JANES 

BOYS'    HIGH   SCHOOL,    BROOKLYN,   N.  Y. 
AND 

PAUL  R.  JENKS 

FLUSHING   HIGH   SCHOOL,    LONG    ISLAND,   N.   Y. 


WITH 

GRAMMATICAL   APPENDIX 

BY 

ARTHUR  TAPPAN  WALKER,  Ph.  D. 

UNIVERSITY   OF  KANSAS 


SCOTT,  FORESMAN  AND  COMPANY 
CHICAGO  NEW  YORK 


^a'    X 


h*^    9  VJU-J2^  .^ 


COPYRIGHT,    1906,    1913 
BY    SCOTT,    FORESMAN    AND    COMPANY 


PEEFACE 

The  experience  of  many  teachers  has  proved  the  excellence 
of  Bellum  Helveticum.  It  has  been  found  interesting  and 
stimulating  to  both  teachers  and  classes  during  the  actual 
time  of  using  the  book ;  and  the  advantage  of  using  it 
appears  still  more  clearly  when  the  student  advances  to  his 
second  year's  work.  The  chasm  between  the  beginner's 
book  and  Caesar  does  not  exist  when  the  student  has  been 
reading  Caesar  from  almost  his  first  lesson  in  Latin. 

But  these  teachers  have  suggested  many  improvements 
which  have  led  to  the  revision  and  rearrangement  of  the 
book.  Furthermore,  since  the  last  edition,  Professor  Lodge's 
studies  in  vocabulary  and  Mr.  Byrne's  studies  in  syntax 
have  appeared,  and  these  have  been  used  as  a  basis  in  the 
present  edition. 

The  leading  features  of  the  present  revision  are: 

First:  The  text  of  Chapters  1-3  of  Caesar's  Gallic  War 
is  given  in  simplified  form,  Chapters  4-14  in  both  simplified 
and  original  form,  and  Chapters  15-29  in  the  original  form 
only.  Caesar's  great  work  presents  a  model  of  perfect 
Latinity,  sufficiently  simple  in  form  and  structure  for  the 
beginner,  when  it  is  taken  slowly.  It  affords  an  illustration 
of  the  most  important  principles  of  the  language,  and 
prepares  the  pupil  for  a  further  study  of  Latin. 

Second:  Sixteen  lessons  preliminary  to  the  text  have 
been  given  in  order  to  inculcate  a  real  knowledge  of  forms 
before  the  translation  of  the  narrative  is  begun.  Throughout 
the  book  practically  no  form  or  construction  occurs  in  the 
text  until  it  is  understood  by  the  pupil. 

3 

417190 


4  FREFi^CE 

Third:  In  the  notes  on  the  text,  only  such  material  has 
been  included  as  is  necessary  for  translation.  Paradigms  of 
inflection  and  the  principles  of  syntax  are  introduced 
gradually  and  logically — not  depending  on  their  chance 
occurrence  in  the  text — thus  giving  a  thorough  grammar 
method  based  upon  connected  narrative.  The  sentences 
almost  without  exception  are  new,  and  are  based  upon  the 
vocabulary  of  the  text  and  upon  the  principle  taught  in 
the  lesson.  Nothing  has  been  included  in  the  body  of  the 
book  which  is  not  needed  for  the  second  yearns  work,  as 
shown  by  Byrne's  Syntax  of  High  School  Latin.  Each 
construction  is  reviewed  in  at  least  three  successive  lessons. 

Fourth :  In  the  first  half  of  the  book,  vocabularies  have 
been  so  arranged  that  new  words  are  used  in  the  short 
Latin-English  and  English-Latin  sentences  before  they  are 
met  in  the  text.  It  is  expected  that  the  student  will  master 
the  words  of  each  lesson,  so  that  he  will  recognize  them  as 
they  occur  again  in  the  text.  This  saves  the  time  of  the 
student — often  wasted  in  looking  up  the  same  words  re- 
peatedly— strengthens  the  memory,  cultivates  the  attention, 
and  secures  accurate  knowledge. 

Fifth:  The  vocabulary  of  the  body  of  the  book  (which 
includes  Chapters  1-13,7)  contains  519  words.  Such  of 
these  words  as  are  assigned  by  Professor  Lodge  to  the 
prescribed  list  for  the  first  year  (with  a  very  few  additions) 
are  repeated  in  the  vocabularies  of  the  review  lessons.  Of 
these,  the  365  which  are  the  most  common  are  made  the 
basis  of  the  English-Latin  sentences,  and  are  also  repeated 
in  the  English-Latin  vocabularies  of  the  review  lessons. 

Sixth :  When  Lesson  LXXXV  has  been  reached,  the  pupil 
will  have  had  all  the  forms,  syntax,  and  vocabulary  needed 
for  starting  his  second  year's  work.  Provision  is  made, 
however,  in  the  lessons  based  upon  Chapters  13  and  14,  for 
those  teachers  who  want  additional  forms  and  syntax.    For 


PREFACE  D 

those  who  wish  more  translation,  Chapters  15-29  have  been 
added,  with  copious  notes.  Upon  these  chapters  are  based 
sentences  which  review  the  forms  and,  in  related  groups, 
the  principles  of  syntax  of  the  earlier  lessons. 

Seventh:  Lessons  upon  word  formation  have  been 
added,  treating  all  the  affixes  which  can  profitably  be 
studied  in  the  first  year. 

Eighth :  Derivation  of  English  words  has  received  atten- 
tion throughout,  and  various  methods  of  treating  this 
valuable  part  of  Latin  study  have  been  suggested. 

Ninth:  The  vocabularies  are  fuller  than  is  usual,  and 
much  information  generally  placed  in  the  notes  has  been 
inserted,  with  the  idea  that  the  pupil  may  be  encouraged 
to  use  the  vocabulary  rather  than  the  notes. 

Tenth:  A  classroom  edition  is  supplied,  containing  the 
exercises  which  the  pupil  has  prepared,  but  no  information ; 
supplementary  sentences  for  each  section,  to  give  additional 
matter  for  drill  and  for  sight  work,  if  desired ;  also  material 
for  impromptu  oral  practice. 

The  work  of  rewriting  has  been  very  materially  assisted 
by  suggestions  from  many  teachers,  for  whose  kindness 
hearty  thanks  are  extended.  It  w^as  impossible  to  carry 
out  all  the  suggestions,  but  none  was  passed  over  without 
consideration,  and  all  the  changes  made  are  in  accord  with 
what  seemed  to  be  the  general  trend  of  opinion. 

Arthur  L.  Janes. 

Paul  R.  Jenks. 

New  York  City, 
June,  1913. 


PUBLISHERS'  ANNOUNCEMENT 

Bellum  Helvetium,  by  Professors  C.  M.  Lowe  and 
Nathaniel  Butler,  was  published  in  1889.  The  book  was 
revised  by  the  same  authors  and  published  under  the  title  of 
Bellum  Helveticum  in  1892.  Both  authors  having  gone  into 
other  fields  of  study  and  work  in  1897,  an  arrangement  was 
made  with  Professor  Arthur  Tappan  Walker,  of  the  Univer- 
sity of  Kansas,  to  rewrite  the  Grammatical  Appendix,  and 
recast  somewhat  the  lessons  in  the  body  of  the  book.  This 
was  done,  and  the  book  immediately  took  on  new  life,  increas- 
ing its  sale  four-fold. 

Two  years  ago,  Messrs.  Janes  and  Jenks,  of  the  Boys'  High 
School,  Brooklyn,  where  the  book  had  been  used  since  1891, 
began  working  out  some  modifications  and  improvements,  as 
they  believed,  on  the  Bellum  Helveticum  for  their  class  reci- 
tations. An  arrangement  was  made  with  them  to  embody 
these  changes  in  a  new  edition  of  the  book,  to  be  published 
over  their  names,  and  Professor  Walker  was  to  provide  the 
Grammatical  Appendix.  The  book,  with  this  successful  career, 
and  with  the  benefit  of  this  experienced  and  scholarly  author- 
ship, is  given  to  the  teaching  public  by  the  publishers  with 
great  confidence  in  its  worth. 

June,  1906. 

June,  1913. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 

Lesson.  Page. 

Introductory  19 

I.     First  Declension   25 

II.     First  Declension  (continued) 27 

III.  Present  Indicative  Active  of  the  First  Conjugation.  ..  29 

IV.  Second  Declension 33 

V.     Present  Indicative  Active  of  Second  Conjugation.,,.  35 

VI.     Second  Declension  (continued) 37 

VII.     Gender    38 

VIII.     Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second  Declension   (con- 
tinued).    Present  Indicative  of  sum 41 

First  Review 43 

IX,     Third  Declension    45 

X.     Third  Declension   (continued)     48 

XI.     Third  Declension   (continued)     50 

XII.     Third  Declension  (continued) 51 

XIII.  Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension 54 

XIV.  Comparison  of  Adjectives.    Use  of  Prepositions 56 

XV.     Present  Indicative  Active  of  the  Third  Conjugation. .  59 

XVI.     Present  Indicative  Active  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation 

and  of  the  Third  Conjugation  in  -io 60 

Second  Eeview   62 

XVII.     The  Demonstratives  hie  and  ille 64 

XVIII.     The  Demonstrative  is 66 

XIX.     The  Eelative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns 68 

XX.     Imperfect  and  Future  Indicative  of  sum 71 

XXI,     Imperfect  and  Future  Indicative  Active  of  the  First 

and  Second   Conjugations 73 

XXII.     Imperfect  and  Future  Indicative  Active  of  the  Third 

and   Fourth   Conjugations 76 

XXIII.     Present   Indicative   Passive   of   the   First   and   Second 

Conjugations    79 

7 


8 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


XXIV.     Imperfect  and  Future  Indicative  Passive  of  the  First 

and  Second  Conjugations 81 

XXV.     Perfect,    Pluperfect,    and    Future    Perfect    Indicative 

Passive  of  the  Third  and  Fourth  Conjugations...  84 

Third  Review 87 

XXVI.     Perfect,    Pluperfect,    and    Future    Perfect    Indicative 

of  sum    88 

XXVII.     Principal  Parts  and  Their  Uses.   Perfect  Active  System  91 

XXVIII.     Principal  Parts    (continued) 95 

XXIX.     Perfect,    Pluperfect,    and    Future    Perfect    Indicative 

Passive    97 

XXX.     Simple  and  Compound  Verbs 100 

Fourth  Review 102 

XXXI.     Adjectives  with  Genitive  in  ius 101 

XXXII.     Fourth  Declension    106 

XXXIII.  Fifth  Declension  108 

XXXIV.  Ablative  of  Agent   110 

XXXV.     Ablative  of  Means 112 

XXXVI.     Ablative  of  Time  114 

XXXVII.     Accusative  of  Extent    115 

XXXVIII.     Subjunctive  of  sum    117 

XXXIX.     Subjunctive  Active  of  the  First  and  Second  Conjuga- 
tions       119 

XL.     Subjunctive  Active  of  the  Third  and  Fourth  Conjuga- 
tions    122 

XLI.     Subjunctive  Passive  of  all  Conjugations 125 

XLII.     Indirect  Questions.     Sequence  of  Tenses 128 

XLIII.     Infinitives 131 

Fifth  Review 134 

XLIV.     Participles    136 

XLV.     Ablative  Absolute 139 

XL VI.     The  Intensive  and  Reflexive  Pronouns 141 

XL VII.     Purpose  Clauses   144 

XLVIII.     Deponent  Verbs    147 

XLIX.     Subjunctive  with  Verbs  of  Fearing 150 

L.     Subjunctive  of  Result 153 

LI.     Gerunds.    Impersonal  Verbs 155 

Sixth  Review 158 

LII.     Declension  of  domus 159 

LIII.     Conjugation  of  eo 162 

LIV.     Place  in  which 165 


TABLE  OF   CONTENTS 


LV.     Declension  of  idem 168 

LVI.     Possessive  and  Partitive  Genitives 170 

LVII.     Declension  of  vis 173 

LVIII.     Declension  of  duo.    Conjugation  of  possum 176 

Seventh  Keview  179 

LIX.  Infinitive  in  Indirect  Discourse.    Subject  Accusative..  181 

LX.     Dative  with  Special  Verbs 183 

LXI.     Dative  with  Compound  Verbs 186 

LXII.     Dative  of  Purpose.    Dative  with  Adjectives 188 

LXIII.     Personal  Pronouns.    Possessive  Adjectives 191 

LXIV.     Conjugation  of  volo,  nolo,  malo 195 

LXV.     Comparison  of  Adjectives  in  er  and  lis 198 

LXVI.     Comparison  of  Certain  Irregular  Adjectives 200 

LXVII.     Formation  and  Comparison  of  Adverbs 204 

LXVIII.     Comparison  of  Certain  Irregular  Adverbs 207 

LXIX.     Direct  Questions 210 

Eighth  Eeview  213 

LXX.     Ablative  of  Separation.    Ablative  of  Cause 215 

LXXI.  Ablative  of   Comparison.      Ablative    of    Measure    and 

Difference    218 

LXXII.     Ablative  of  Manner 221 

LXXIII.     Conjugation  of  fid 223 

LXXV.     Ablative  and  Genitive  of  Description 228 

LXXVI.     Ablative  of  Specification 230 

Ninth  Keview 233 

LXXVII.     Imperative   Mood.     Commands 234 

LXXVIII.     Gerunds  and  Gerundives 238 

LXXIX.     Causal  Clauses  with  quod  and  with  cum 243 

LXXX.     Temporal  Clauses  with  cum 246 

LXXXI.     Numerals    248 

LXXXII.     Conjugation  of  fero.    Declension  of  deus 251 

LXXXIII.     Periphrastic  Conjugations 255 

LXXXIV.     Supines 259 

Tenth  Review 263 

LXXXV.     Indirect  Discourse 265 

LXXXVI.     Conditions 268 

LXXXVII.     Conditions  (continued)    272 

LXXXVIII.     Wishes    277 

LXXXIX.     Word  Formation 280 

XC.     Word  Formation  (continued) 284 

Eleventh   Review    287 


10  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

Annotated  Text,  Chapters  15-29 289 

Connected  Text,  Chapters  1-29 317 

Selected   Rules    334 

Appendix  ' 339 

Latin — English  Vocabulary   385 

English — Latin  Vocabulary  424 


TO  TEACHERS 

1.  In  the  present  edition  of  Bellum  Helveticum  it  has 
been  the  constant  endeavor  of  the  authors  to  put  nothing 
before  the  pupil  that  he  does  not  need  to  know  and  under- 
stand. Consequently  the  lessons  should  be  taken  up  in  the 
order  in  which  they  occur,  and  nothing  should  be  omitted. 

2.  The  most  important  thing  at  the  outset  is  the  accurate 
acquirement  of  forms.  When  the  declension  of  porta  has 
been  assigned,  it  should  be  written  in  full  by  each  pupil, 
corrected,  and  returned.  If  forms  are  learned  accurately 
and  thoroughly  when  first  assigned,  they  are  easily  retained; 
if  not,  a  pupil  becomes  more  and  more  confused  as  each 
new  declension  occurs. 

In  the  teacher's  class-book  the  section  number  of  the 
written  matter  should  be  noted  at  the  head  of  the  column 
in  which  the  marks  are  recorded  (e.g.,  §16  for  porta),  and 
the  pupils  who  fail  to  get  this  perfectly  should  repeat  it  in 
subsequent  recitations  until  a  check  mark  in  the  class-book 
indicates  that  it  has  been  given  perfectly  at  least  once.  The 
indiscriminate  oral  recitation  of  forms  is  of  little  use. 

3.  It  is  a  common  mistake  for  teachers  to  think  that  mere 
rapidity  in  giving  forms  is  an  end  in  itself.  Accuracy  is 
the  proper  aim.  When  a  pupil  has  attained  accuracy  in 
giving  a  certain  set  of  forms,  time  is  wasted  in  trying  to 
attain  rapidity,  because  he  is  gaining  no  mental  power,  and 
because  the  time  is  better  spent  in  teaching  him  to  use  these 
forms  in  sentences.  The  true  pedagogical  object  is  to  train 
him  to  think  directly  to  a  certain  form  (e.g.,  a  genitive 
plural),  rather  than  to  have  him  "run  down"  a  declension 

11 


12  TO   TEACHERS 

till  he  gets  the  desired  form.  And  there  is  no  advantage  in 
having  a  pupil  give  a  single  form  without  associating  with 
it  its  case  and  number,  or  tense,  mood,  voice,  etc.,  for  other- 
wise it  is  not  truly  apperceived.  Consequently,  at  the  start 
it  is  well  to  have  the  names  of  the  cases  written  with  the 
Latin,  and  to  have  the  declension  given  orally. 

4.  During  the  first  few  weeks  no  effort  or  time  should  be 
spared  in  showing  pupils  how  to  reason  out  translations 
from  the  endings  of  Latin  words.  Strange  as  it  seems  to 
many  teachers,  a  large  number  of  pupils  are  absolutely 
incapable  of  grasping  without  assistance  the  mental  proc- 
esses that  lie  behind  the  art  of  translation;  and  too  many 
teachers  forget  that  to  explain  such  matters  is  at  once  their 
duty  and  their  greatest  opportunity  to  win  gratitude  and 
confidence.  For  it  is  a  fatal  mistake  to  allow  a  pupil  to  get 
the  idea  that  translation  is  a  combination  of  guess^vork  and 
memory. 

5.  The  assignment  of  the  next  lesson  should  be  made 
absolutely  definite  and  should  be  gone  over  with  the  cjass, 
so  that  new  or  difficult  points  may  be  thoroughly  under- 
stood.   Time  spent  in  this  way  is  saved  many  times  over. 

6.  The  suggestions  about  the  derivation  of  English  words 
will  not  be  left  unused  by  the  live  teacher.  They  are  capable 
of  much  adaptation  and  extension.  Teachers  who  believe 
that  the  formation  of  Latin  words  should  be  employed  as  an 
aid  in  acquiring  and  holding  a  vocabularj^,  wall  find  in 
Lessons  LXXXIX  and  XC  the  material  they  require.  These 
lessons  have  'been  so  planned  that  they  can  be  used  for 
reference  or  studied  in  part  at  any  time  during  the  year. 

7.  In  the  treatment  of  syntax,  an  effort  has  been  made  to 
get  the  synthetic  point  of  view  (the  pupil's)  rather  than 
the  analytic  (the  college  professor's).  About  all  the  prac- 
tical advantage  that  the  average  pupil  sees  in  learning  the 
different  uses  of  the  ablative  is  that  he  finds  out  about  the 


TO    TEACHERS  13 

uses  of  prepositions  in  his  composition.  He  will  very  likely 
see  that  it  is  a  help,  in  translating  Latin,  to  know  about  the 
dative  with  special  verbs,  the  ablative  with  certain  deponent 
verbs,  and  some  uses  of  the  partitive  genitive.  But  deal 
gently  with  him  if  he  fails  to  display  much  interest  in  the 
objective  genitive,  or  occasionally  cannot  tell  whether  an 
ablative  denotes  cause  or  means  or  specification  or  accordance. 

8.  In  the  English-Latin  exercises  the  authors  have  tried  to 
furnish  enough  material  for  teachers  who  believe  in  exten- 
sive work  along  this  line.  But  it  is  their  opinion,  based 
upon  experience  with  both  methods,  that  one  sentence  of 
Latin  composition  reviewed  is  more  profitable  than  two 
sentences  taken  up  but  once,  and  they  would  recommend 
that  the  assigned  sentences  be  thoroughly  mastered  and  that 
the  additional  sentences  found  in  the  classroom  edition  be 
used  for  training  in  translation  as  suggested  in  4,  above. 

9.  The  review  lessons  should  be  taken  up  in  the  most 
thorough  manner,  according  to  the  directions  given  in  them. 

10.  It  is  perfectly  feasible  for  teachers  who  think  that 
the  original  text  of  Caesar  is  too  difficult  for  first  year 
pupils  to  omit  the  regular  Caesar  text,  and  use  only  the 
simplified  text  to  be  found  at  the  beginning  of  each  lesson. 


CAESAR  AND  THE  HELVETIAN  WAR 

The  name  of  Gaius  Julius  Caesar  has  been  called  the 
greatest  in  history.  He  was  Rome's  greatest  general.  He 
laid  the  foundation  of  an  empire  which  ruled  the  world  for 
centuries,  and  from  which  have  sprung,  in  a  large  degree, 
the  modern  nations  of  Europe.  Although  continually  occu- 
pied with  war  and  politics,  he  was  great  also  in  literature. 
We  possess  his  two  most  important  works,  the  "Commen- 
taries on  the  Gallic  War,''  which  describe  the  conquest  of 
Gaul,  and  the  ''Commentaries  on  the  Civil  War,"  which 
record  his  struggles  with  Pompey.  The  style  of  his  works 
is  characterized  by  great  simplicity,  conciseness,  and  vigor. 
Written  in  the  purest  Latin,  they  furnish  excellent  models  for 
the  study  of  the  language. 

When  Caesar  was  forty-four  years  old — that  is,  in  the 
year  58  b.  c. — he  set  out  for  Gaul,  ostensibly  for  the  purpose 
of  protecting  Roman  territory,  but  as  the  event  showed,  for 
the  subjugation  of  the  land.  In  nine  years  he  subdued  the 
whole  of  Gaul,  and  converted  it  into  a  Roman  province. 
In  the  campaigns  of  these  nine  years  he  disciplined  and 
attached  to  himself  an  army  which  afterward  made  him  the 
master  of  Rome.  The  first  Gallic  people  whom  Caesar 
encountered  were  the  Helvetians,  the  inhabitants  of  modern 
Switzerland.  The  Helvetians  thought  their  country  was  too 
small,  and,  besides,  were  harassed  by  the  neighboring  tribes 
of  Germany,  and  so  resolved  to  seek  wider  limits  and  a  more 
peaceful  home  to  the  west,  on  the  borders  of  the  ocean. 
Before  leaving  their  country  they  provided  themselves 
plentifully  with  provisions,   and  burned  all  their  houses, 

14 


CAESAR  AND   THE   HELVETIAN   WAR  15 

some  four  hundred  villages,  and  twelve  walled  towns.  By 
appointment  they  met  at  the  southern  end  of  Lake  Geneva. 
There  they  assembled,  in  the  spring  of  58  b.  c,  to  the  number 
of  three  hundred  and  sixty-eight  thousand,  of  whom  ninety- 
two  thousand  were  fighting  men.  Under  modern  civiliza- 
tion, the  same  country  now  supports  a  population  of  over 
three  millions. 

At  Lake  Geneva  the  Helvetians  found  their  advance 
opposed  by  Caesar.  Their  most  natural  course  was  to  cross 
the  Rhone,  passing  through  a  corner  of  the  Roman  province 
in  southeastern  Gaul.  They  sent  a  deputation  asking  per- 
mission to  pass  through  the  province  without  damage.  To 
gain  time,  Caesar  put  them  off  to  a  second  conference,  spent 
the  interval  in  constructing  a  line  of  fortifications  along  the 
Rhone,  and  then  formally  forbade  their  passage. 

After  vainly  endeavoring  to  force  a  passage  of  the  Rhone, 
the  Helvetians,  by  arrangement  with  the  Sequanians,  their 
neighbors  on  the  northwest,  proceeded  to  cross  the  Saone 
instead  of  the  Rhone,  and  thence  to  march  northwest. 
Caesar  added  five  fresh  legions  to  the  one  already  at  his 
disposal,  and  after  about  three-fourths  of  the  Helvetian 
troops  had  crossed  the  Saone,  fell  upon  the  remainder  and 
cut  them  to  pieces.  Efforts  on  the  part  of  the  Helvetians 
to  procure  terms  of  peace  satisfactory  to  themselves  proved 
unavailing,  and  after  some  minor  contests,  the  final  decisive 
battle  was  fought  near  the  Aeduan  town  Bibracte,  now  Mont 
Beuvray.  Caesar  acknowledges  that  the  battle  was  closely 
contested  and  for  a  long  time  doubtful,  but  in  the  end  Roman 
arms  and  discipline  won  a  victory  that  ended  all  the  hopes 
of  the  Helvetians.  At  the  command  of  Caesar  they  returned 
to  their  desolated  homes,  but  with  the  loss  of  more  than 
two  thirds  of  their  entire  number.  Remains  of  skeletons, 
ornaments  and  arms  have  been  unearthed  on  the  field  of 
the  great  battle  noar  Autun. 


PRINCIPLES   OP   GRAMMAR 

SENTENCES 

A  sentence  is  a  complete  thought  expressed  in  words. 

Sentences  are  classed  according  to  their  meaning  as 
declarative,  interrogative,  and  imperative. 

A  declarative  sentence  is  a  statement. 

An  interrogative  sentence  is  a  question. 

An  imperative  sentence  is  a  command. 

The  subject  is  that  about  which  something  is  stated  (in  a 
declarative  sentence),  asked  (in  an  interrogative  sentence), 
or  commanded  (in  an  imperative  sentence). 

The  predicate  is  that  which  is  stated,  asked,  or  commanded 
about  the  subject. 

A  clause  is  a  group  of  words  containing  a  subject  and  a 
predicate. 

Sentences  are  classed  according  to  their  clauses  as  simple, 
complex,  or  compound. 

A  simple  sentence  contains  only  one  clause. 

A  complex  sentence  contains  at  least  two  clauses,  one  of 
which  (the  subordinate  clause)  modifies  or  depends  upon 
some  word  or  words  in  the  other  (the  principal  clause). 

A  compound  sentence  contains  at  least  two  clauses  of 
equal  rank  or  value  in  the  sentence  {coordinate  clauses). 

THE    PARTS    OF   SPEECH 

A  noun  is  the  name  of  a  person,  place,  or  thing. 
Nouns  have  two  numbers,  singular  and  plural;    and  (in 
English)  three  cases,  nominative,  possessive,  and  objective. 
The  nominative  is  the  form  which  is  the  subject  of  a  clause. 

16 


PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAMMAR  17 

[There  are  also  the  predicate  nominative,  the  nominative  by 
direct  address,  the  nominative  absolute  (in  English),  and  the 
nominative  in  apposition.] 

The  possessive  is  the  form  which  indicates  possession  or 
ownership,  and  modifies  another  noun. 

The  objective  is  the  form  which  is  the  object  of  a  verb 
or  preposition.  [There  are  also  the  adverbial  objective,  the 
objective  complement,  the  objective  subject  of  an  infinitive, 
and  the  objective  in  apposition.] 

A  pronoun  is  a  word  used  in  place  of  a  noun. 

Pronouns  have  number  and  case  like  nouns;  gender,  to 
indicate  sex ;  and  person. 

The  first  person  indicates  the  speaker ;  the  second  person, 
the  person  spoken  to ;   the  third  person,  that  spoken  of. 

Substantive  is  the  name  given  to  any  word  or  group  of 
words  used  as  a  noun. 

An  adjective  is  a  word  which  limits  or  describes  a 
substantive.^ 

Adjectives  have  three  degrees  of  co^nparison,  positive, 
comparative,  and  superlative. 

A  verb  is  a  word  that  can  declare  something. 

Verbs  have  tefise,  mood,  voice,  person,  and  number. 

Tense  indicates  the  time  of  the  statement. 

Mood  indicates  the  manner  of  the  statement. 

Voice  indicates  whether  the  subject  acts  or  is  acted  upon. 

Person  in  verbs  represents  the  person  of  the  subject  (see 
pronouns). 

Number  in  verbs  represents  the  number  of  the  subject. 

An  adverb  is  a  word  used  to  modify  a  verb,  adjective,  or 
another  adverb. 

Adverbs  have  the  same  three  degrees  of  comparison  as 
adjectives. 

A  preposition  shows  the  relation  between  a  following 
substantive  (its  object)  and  some  other  word  in  the  clause. 


18  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

A  preposition  with  its  object  forms  a  prepositional  phrase. 

A  phrase  may  be  used  as  an  adjective,  an  adverb,  or  a  noun. 

A  conjunction  is  a  word  which  connects  sentences  or  parts 
of  sentences. 

A  coordinate  conjunction  connects  words,  phrases,  or 
clauses  of  equal  rank  or  value. 

A  subordinate  conjunction  connects  a  subordinate  clause 
with  a  principal  clause,  or  with  some  word  in  a  principal 
clause. 

A  conjunctive  adverb  is  one  that  serves  at  the  same  time 
as  an  adverb  and  a  subordinate  conjunction. 

INFLECTION 

The  changes  undergone  by  a  word  by  which  it  expresses 
its  meaning  and  its  relation  to  other  words  are  called  its 
inflection. 

In  nouns,  pronouns,  and  adjectives,  inflection  is  called 
declension.  In  verbs  it  is  called  conjugation.  Adjectives  and 
adverbs  may  also  have  comparison  (see  above). 


INTRODUCTORY   LESSON 

This  lesson  is  to  be  read  over  in  class  and  thoroughly  explained, 
not  assigned  for  recitation.  Eeference  should  be  made  to  it  con- 
tinually during  the  early  lessons.  But  no  amount  of  explanation  or 
rules  can  teach  correct  pronunciation.  It  can  be  done  only  by 
correct  and  constant  practice,  following  the  accurate  pronunciation 
of  the  teacher. 

The  Latin  language,  the  language  of  the  ancient  Romans, 
derives  its  name  from  the  Latins,  who  once  inhabited  Latium 
in  Italy.  The  modern  languages  of  Italy,  France,  Spain, 
and  Portugal  are  mainly  derived  from  the  Latin,  and  about 
sixty  per  cent  of  the  v^ords  of  the  English  tongue  have  a 
similar  origin. 

THE  ALPHABET 

1.  The  alphabet  is  the  same  as  ours,  except  that  there  is 
no  j  or  w.  The  vowels  are  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  y.  The  rest  of  the 
letters  are  consonants. 

METHODS   OF  PRONUNCIATION 

2.  In  the  English  method  the  letters  are  given  sounds 
selected  from  the  many  sounds  belonging  to  them  in 
English.  The  Roman  method  is  now  almost  universally 
adopted  in  this  country,  and  is  to  be  recommended.  It  is 
as  close  an  approximation  as  can  now  be  made  to  the 
pronunciation  of  the  Romans  themselves.  In  ordinary 
practice  we  recognize  no  exceptions  in  the  pronunciation 
of  individual  words,  but  follow  fixed  rules. 

19 


20  BELLUM    IIELVETICUM 

QUANTITY   OF   VOWELS 

3.  The  quantity  of  a  vowel  is  the  length  of  time  given 
to  its  pronunciation.  Compare  the  first  syllables  in  alight 
and  twilight.  The  a  is  short,  and  the  i  long.  In  Latin  every 
vowel  is  either  short  or  long.  The  long  vowels  take  twice 
as  long  to  pronounce  as  the  short.  This  point  in  Latin 
pronunciation  is  too  likely  to  be  neglected,  because  we  do 
not  make  much  of  quantity  (in  this  sense)  in  English.  In 
this  book  every  long  vowel  is  marked  (").  Diphthongs  are 
always  long  and  are  unmarked.  Otherwise  unmarked 
vowels  are  short.  The  student  should  be  very  careful  to 
give  twice  as  much  time  to  the  long  vowels  as  to  the  short. 

SOUNDS    OF   VOWELS 

4.  It  will  be  noticed  in  the  following  table  that  in  some 
cases  the  short  and  long  vowels  have  the  same  sound,  in 
others  a  slightly  different  sound. 

a  =  first  vowel  in  aha'  a  =  second  vowel  in  aha' 

e  =  e  in  net  e  =  ey  in  they 

i  =  i  in  pin  i  =  i  in  machine 

0  =  0  in  obey  o  =  oh 

u  =  00  in  foot  u  =  00  in  hoot 

y  =  French  u  or  German  U,  intermediate  between  oo  and  ee. 

SOUNDS   OF   DIPHTHONGS 

5.  The  following  are  the  diphthongs  which  appear  in 
Latin : 

ae  =  ai  in  aisle  ai  =  ai  in  aisle 

oe  =  oi  in  oil  ei  =  ei  in  eight 

au  =  ow  in  how  oi  =  oi  in  oil 

eu  has  no  English  equivalent.  Eun  together  in  one  syllable  the 
sounds  eh'-oo. 


INTRODUCTORY    LESSON  21 

ui  has  no  English  equivalent.  Eun  together  in  one  syllable  the 
sounds  oo'-ee.     The  diphthong  appears  in  huius,  huic,  cuius,  and  cui. 

When  the  consonant  i  (=j)  stands  between  two  vowels,  as  in 
huius,  eius,  cuius,  and  maior,  though  i  was  written  only  once,  it  was 
pronounced  twice,  as  if  the  spelling  were  huiius,  eiius,  cuiius,  and 
maiior.  The  first  i  makes  a  diphthong  with  the  preceding  vowel. 
The  second  i  is  the  consonant,  pronounced  like  y  in  yet. 


SOUNDS    OF    CONSONANTS 

6.  The  consonants  are,  in  general,  pronounced  as  in 
English;    but  the  following  points  should  be  noted: 

c  and  g  are  always  hard,  as  in  can,  go 

i  (consonant)  =  2/  in  yet 

n  before  c,  g,  q,  and  x  =  ng  in  sing 

r  pronounced  distinctly. 

s  as  in  ilfiis,  never  as  in  tlnese 

t  as  in  iin,  never  as  in  nation 

v  =  w 

x  =  'ks 

ch,  ph,  th  =  c,  p,  t 

bs,  bt  =  ps,  pt 

qu  =  qu  in  quart 

ngu  =  ngu  in  anguish 

su  in  suadeo,  suavis,  suesco,  and  their  compounds  =  sw. 

When  consonants  are  doubled,  as  in  mitto,  annus,  both  consonants 
should  be  sounded,  as  they  are  in  out-talk,  pen-lnife.  In  English,  we 
sound  only  one  consonant  in  ditty,  penny. 


7.  i  is  generally  a  consonant  between  vowels,  and  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  word  before  a  vowel.  In  compounds  of  iacio,  the  form  icio 
was  written.  It  is  commonly  believed  that  in  these  words  the  eon- 
sonant  i  was  pronounced,  though  not  written,  before  vowel  i;  as  deicio, 
pronounced  as  if  deiicio;  abicio,  as  if  abiicio. 


22  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

SYLLABLES 

8.  Every  Latin  word  has  as  many  syllables  as  it  has 
vowels  or  diphthongs. 

a.  A  single  consonant  between  two  vowels  is  pronounced  with  the 
second  vowel.    For  example,  fe-ro,  a-go,  mo-ne. 

6.  The  combination  of  a  mute  and  a  liquid  (b,  c,  d,  g,  p,  t,  ch,  ph, 
or  th,  followed  by  1  or  r)  is  pronounced  together  so  easily  that  it 
goes  with  the  following  vowel  like  a  single  consonant.  For  example, 
pa-tris,  a-gri.  Compare  this  division  of  syllables  with  the  English 
word  consecrate. 

c.  Any  other  combination  of  two  or  more  consonants  is  divided 
before  the  last  consonant  or  before  the  combination  of  a  mute  and  a 
liquid;  as  mit-to,  dic-tus,  magis-ter,  magis-tri. 

QUANTITY    OF    SYLLABLES 

9.  Syllables  are  long  or  short,  according  to  the  time 
taken  in  pronouncing  them. 

a.  A  syllable  is  long  by  nature  if  it  contains  a  long  vowel  or  diph- 
thong.    For  example,  both  syllables  of  laudo. 

h.  A  syllable  is  long  by  position  if  its  vowel  is  followed  by  any 
two  consonants  except  a  mute  and  a  liquid,  or  by  one  of  the  double 
consonants,  X  and  z.  For  example,  the  first  syllable  of  lingua,  the 
first  two  syllables  of  appello,  and  ex. 

Note.  The  quantity  of  a  short  vowel  is  not  changed  by  this 
position:  est  is  est;  the  syllable  is  long,  but  the  vowel  is  short.  The 
time  taken  in  pronouncing  a  consonant  at  the  end  of  the  syllable 
before  the  consonant  at  the  beginning  of  the  next  syllable  (§8,  c), 
lengthens  the  syllable.  This  will  be  felt  if  the  consonants  are 
pronounced  distinctly  in  mit-to  (§6),  an-nus,  dic-tus,  par-tes,  nos-ter. 

ACCENT 

10.  Words  of  two  syllables  are  accented  on  the  first 
syllable.    For  example,  om'nis. 


INTRODUCTORY   LESSON  23 

11.  Words  of  more  than  two  syllables  are  accented  on 
the  penult  (the  syllable-  next  to  the  last)  if  it  is  long,  other- 
wise on  the  antepenult  (the  syllable  before  the  penult).  For 
example,  divi'sa,  appel'lo,  in'colunt. 

12.  When  an  enclitic  (a  word  that  has  no  accent  of  its 
own)  is  joined  to  another  word,  the  accent  falls  on  the 
syllable  immediately  preceding  the  enclitic.  For  example, 
Gallia'que. 


EXERCISES   IN   PRONUNCIATION 

13.  In  the  following  passage  divide  each  word  into  syllables,  tell 
the  quantity  of  each  syllable,  and  if  long,  in  which  way  it  is  long 
(see  §9,  a,  ft),  determine  what  syllable  is  accented,  pronounce  each 
syllable  separately,  and  finally  the  whole  word,  properly  accented. 

The  first  few  lines  should  be  taken  up  in  the  classroom  with  the 
pupils;  this  may  be  done  either  before  or  after  the  rules  of  the  lesson 
have  been  learned. 

Gallia  est  omnis  divisa  in  partes  tres,  quarum  unam 
incolunt  Belgae,  aliam  AquitanT,  tertiam  qui  ipsorum  lingua 
Celtae,  nostra  Galli  appellantur.  Hi  omnes  lingua,  insti- 
ttitis,  legibus  inter  se  differunt.  Gallos  ab  AquTtanIs 
Garumna  fltimen,  a  BelgTs  Matrona  et  Sequana  dividit. 
Horum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae,  propterea  quod  a 
cuM  atque  humanitate  provinciae  longissime  absunt, 
minimeque  ad  eos  mercatores  saepe  commeant  atque  ea 
quae  ad  effeminandos  animos  pertinent  important;  proxi- 
mique  sunt  Germanis,  qui  trans  Rhenum  incolunt,  quibus- 
cum  continenter  bellum  gerunt.  Qua  de  causa  Helvetii  quo- 
que  reliquos  Gallos  virtute  praecedunt,  quod  fere  cotidianTs 
proeliTs  cum  Germanis  contendunt,  cum  aut  suTs  flnibus  eos 
prohibent  aut  ipsi  in  eorum  finibus  bellum  gerunt. 


24  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

PRACTICAL  DIRECTIONS  FOR  PRONUNCIATION 

1.  Gal'-li-a:  all  vowels  short;  both  a's  like  final  a  as  in  Cuba; 
both  I's  sounded,  est:  just  as  -est  in  digest;  the  syllable  is  long  (§9,  h), 
but  this  does  not  make  the  vowel  long  (compare  §3  and  §9,  Note). 
om'-nis:  om-,  as  in  obey;  i  as  in  pin.  di-vi'-sa:  dee-wee' -sa;  s  as  in 
said;  a  as  in  Cuba,  in:  as  in.  par'-tes:  par-  as  in  party,  but  with  a  very 
clearly  sounded  r;  -tes  as  tas-  in  taste,    tres:  as  trace. 

2.  qua'-rum:  Tcwah'-room;  oo  as  in  foot,  u'-nam:  oo'-nam;  oo  as  in 
boot;  a,  see  §4.  in'-co-lunt:  for  vowels  see  §4.  Bel'-gae:  bel-  as  bell; 
-gae  as  guy.  a'-li-am:  for  vowels  see  §4.  A-qui-ta'-ni:  a-kwee-tah'-nee; 
first  a  short,  ter'-ti-am:  e  has  its  regular  sound,  as  in  net;  English 
pronounces  er,  ir,  ur  all  alike^  Latin  gives  the  proper  sound  to  each 
vowel;  both  t's  hard,  qui:  Jcivee.  ip-s6'-rum:  for  vowels  see  §4. 
lin'-gua:  lin'-gwah;  a  as  final  a  in  aha'.  Cel'-tae:  c  hard;  -tae  as  tie. 
nos'-tra:  a,  see  lingua,  ap-pel-lan'-tur:  sound  both  p's  and  both  I's; 
the  p's  should  be  distinct;  the  I's  should  be  run  together. 

3.  hi:  as  he.  om'-nes:  es  as  ace.  in-sti-tu'-tis:  in-,  een;  -tis,  with 
i=ee.  le'-gi-bus:  le-  as  lay;  g  hard;  -bus  not  as  in  omnibus,  but 
with  u  =  oo,  as  in  foot,  in'-ter:  -ter  as  first  syllable  in  tertiam;  see 
above,  se:  as  say.  dif'-fe-runt:  both  f's  are  sounded,  but  are  run 
together. 


BELLUM  HELVETICUM 


LESSON   I 

FIRST  DECLENSION 

THE   LATIN   CASES 

14.     Latin  nouns   have   six   cases.     The  names   of  these 
cases  and  their  general  English  equivalents  are  as  follows: 


I ATIN    CASES 

ENGLISH   EQUIVALENTS 

Nominative 

Nominative 

Genitive 

J  Possessive 

\  Objective  with  of 

Dative 

C  Indirect  Objective 
\  Objective  with  to  or  for 

A  causative 

Objective 

Vocative 

Nominative  by  Direct  Address 

Ablative 

Objective  with  dy,  from,  in,  or  with 

The  English  equivalents  of  the  genitive  are  merely  different  ways 
of  expressing  the  same  idea;  thus,  the  hoy's  father  =  the  father  of 
the  hoy. 

The  same  thing  is  true  of  the  equivalents  given  for  the  dative; 
thus,  he  gave  his  son  the  hook  =  he  gave  the  hooJc  to  his  son. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  ablative  may  represent  any  one  of  several 
different  ideas. 

25 


26 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 
DECLENSION    OF   NOUNS 


15.  There  are  five  declensions  of  Latin  nouns.  The  end- 
ing of  the  genitive  indicates  to  what  declension  a  noun 
belongs. 


16. 


FIRST    DECLENSION 


porta,  gate 


CASE 


FORM 


Norn,  porta 

Gen.  portae 

Dat.  portae 

Ace.  portam 

Voc.  porta 

Abl.  porta 


ENGLISH  TRANSLATION 
SINGULAR 

(a,  the)  gate;  subject 

{(a,  the)  gate's  ^ 
of  (a,  the)  gate  J 
fto  (a,  the)  gate  "1 
\for  (a,  the)  gate  j 
(a,  the)  gate;  object 
0  (or  you)  gate 
by,  from,  in,  with  (a,  the)  gate 


CASE  ENDING 


-a 

-ae 

-ae 

-am 

-a 

-a 


Nam.  portae 

Gen.  portarum 

Dat.  portis 

Ace.  portas 

Voc.  portae 

Abl.  portis 


PLURAL 


(the)  gates;  subject 
J  (the)  gates'      ^ 
\of  (the)  gates  J 
fto  (the)  gates   ^ 
Xfor  (the)  gates] 

(the)  gates;  object 

0  (or  you)  gates 

by,  from,  in,  with  (the)  gates 


-ae 
-arum 

-is 

-as 
-ae 

-is 


17.     Notice  that  certain  forms  are  alike, — 


Nom.   sing.1 
Voc.     sing.  J 


port-a 


Gen.  sing. 
Dat.  sing. 
Nom.  plu. 
Voc.    plu. 


port-ae 


Dat.  plu.^ 
Abl.  plu.]"'"*- 


is 


LESSON   II  27 

18.  The  base  of  a  word  is  the  part  that  remains  un- 
changed in  inflection.    The  base  of  porta  is  port. 

19.  The  various  endings  that  are  added  to  the  base  in 
declension  are  called  the  case  endings.  The  case  endings  of 
the  first  declension  are  printed  in  heavy  type  in  the  above 
table. 


LESSON   II 

FIRST   DECLENSION— Continued 

20.  VOCABULARY 

Belga,  -ae,  a  {the)  Belgian. 
causa,  -ae,  reason. 
Celta,  -ae,  a  {the)  Celt. 
copia,  -ae,  plenty,  supply. 
fuga,  -ae,  flight. 

Gallia,  -ae,  Gaul,  the  name  of  the  country  which,  roughly  speaking,  is 

now  modern  France, 
lingua,  -ae,  language. 
porta,  -ae,  gate. 
provincia,  -ae,  province. 
silva,  -ae,  forest. 

ENGLISH   DERIVATIVES 

21.  One  great  value  of  the  study  of  Latin  is  that  it  helps 
one  to  understand  the  meaning  of  many  English  words. 
For  example,  we  may  recognize  the  fact  that  certain 
English  words  are  derived  from  certain  Latin  words;  or, 
again,  if  we  know  the  Latin  word  from  which  a  particular 
English  word  is  derived,  we  recognize  the  original  and, 
approximately,  the  present  meaning  of  the  English  word. 

Thus,  in  the  above  list,  the  first  three  words  should  sug- 


28  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

gest  the  English  words  Belgian,  cause,  Celt.  What  English 
words  are  derived  or  descended  from  porta  and  prdvincia? 
The  English  words  copious  and  linguist  are  indirectly- 
derived  from  words  in  this  list.  What  would  you  judge 
to  be  their  approximate  meaning? 


EXERCISES 

22.  1.  Write  the  declension  of  any  three  of  the  words 
in  §20,  placing  a  hyphen  between  the  base  and  the  ending. 

2.  Write    the    meaning  ,of    each    form    of    one    of    them. 

3.  Write  the  nominative   and  genitive,   both  singular  and 
plural,  of  each  of  the  nouns  in  §20. 

23.  Of  the  following  forms,  give  first  the  number  and 
case,  and  then  translate: 

1.  Galliam. 

This  is  shown  by  the  ending  to  be  accusative  singular,  and  the 
translation  will  therefore  be  Gaul,  objective.  If  it  were  in  a  sentence 
the  English  equivalent  Gaul  would  be  made  objective  by  putting  it 
after  the  verb. 

2.  Provinciae. 

This  form  may  be  genitive  singular,  dative  singular,  nominative 
plural,  or  vocative  plural;  there  is  no  way  of  telling  which  it  is  here. 
In  such  cases  always  give  a  separate  translation  for  each  one  of  their 
possible  forms. 

Note..  If  this  word  were  in  a  sentence,  we  could  probably  tell 
which  one  of  these  four  forms  it  would  be.  So  in  English,  if  we  see 
the  word  ** sheep"  standing  alone,  we  do  not  know  whether  it  is 
singular  or  plural,  nominative  or  objective.  But  if  the  word  "sheep" 
is  used  with  the  word  **are,"  we  say  at  once  that  it  is  nominative 
plural. 


LESSON    III  29 

3.  Belgarum.  4.  Silva.  5.  Fuga.  6.  Celtis.  7.  Causas. 
8.  Lingua.     9.  Portae.     10.  Copiam. 

24.  Write  the  Latin  for  the  following  words  and  phrases, 
first  noting  the  number  and  the  Latin  case  that  will  trans- 
late the  English  case  or  phrase : 

1.  To  the  Belgians. 

The  noun  in  this  phrase  is  plural,  hence  the  Latin  word  will  be 
plural.  No  separate  word  is  needed  in  Latin  for  "to,"  because  the 
dative  case  may  be  translated  by  to  with  the  objective.  So,  just  as 
this  phrase  might  be  expressed  without  a  preposition  in  English  by 
making  it  an  indirect  object  (he  gave  this  to  the  Belgians  =  he  gave 
the  Belgians  this),  the  single  Latin  word,  the  dative  plural  of  Belga, 
translates  the  whole  English  phrase. 

2.  Of  the  Celts.  3.  By  a  gate.  4.  The  flight  (objective). 
5.  Gaul  (nominative).  6.  In  the  language.  7.  The  forests 
(objective).  8.  0  Celts.  9.  With  reasons.  10.  The  prov- 
ince's. 11.  Of  the  supply.  12.  Languages  (nominative). 
13.  For  the  Celt. 


LESSON   III 

PRESENT   INDICATIVE    ACTIVE    OF    THE   FIRST 
CONJUGATION 

25.  There  are  four  conjugations  of  Latin  verbs.  The 
first  person  singular  present  indicative  and  the  present  in- 
finitive, taken  together,  indicate  to  what  conjugation  a  verb 
belongs.  These  two  forms  constitute  the  first  two  principal 
parts  of  a  Latin  verb,  and  must  be  known  in  order  to  con- 
jugate it. 


30  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

26.  PRESENT    INDICATIVE    ACTIVE    OF    THE 

FIRST    CONJUGATION 

Principal  parts:    laudd,  laudare,  praise 

Singular:     laudo,  /  praise,  am  praising,  do  praise 

laudas,  you  praise,  are  praising,  do  praise 
laudat,  he  (she,  it)  praises,  is  praising,  does  praise 

Plural:  laudamus,  we  praise,  are  praising,  do  praise 
laudatis,  you  praise,  are  praising,  do  praise 
laudant,  they  praise,  are  praising,  do  praise 

27.  The  vowel  before'  the  re  in  the  second  of  the  prin- 
cipal parts  of  a  verb  is  the  sign  of  the  conjugation.  If  this 
vowel  is  a,  the  verb  belongs  to  the  fi^st  conjugation. 

28.  The  present  base  of  this  verb  is  laud,  found  by 
dropping  the  last  three  letters  from  the  present  infinitive 
active  (the  second  principal  part). 

29.  Except  in  the  first  person  singular,  the  endings  con- 
sist of  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  conjugation,  a  (§27), 
and  the  personal  endings  given  below  (§30). 

30.  The  personal  endings  are  so  called  because  they  take 
the  place  of  personal  pronouns.  They  are  nearly  alike  for 
all  tenses  and  all  conjugations,  and  should  be  learned  sep- 
arately, as  follows: 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

First  person         *o,  *m,  I  mus,  we 

Second  person       s,  (thou)  you  tis,  you 

Third  person        *t,  he,  she,  it  *nt,  they 


•A  vowel  before  these  endings  is  always  short. 


LESSON   III  31 

LATIN    CASE    ENDINGS    COMPARED    WITH    ENGLISH 
WORD    ORDER 

31.  The  case  of  a  noun  in  English  is  generally  deter- 
mined by  its  position  in  the  sentence ;  e.  g., 

the  Belgians  (nom.)  praise  the  Celts  (obj.) 

the  Celts  (nom.)  praise  the  Belgians  (obj.)  ' 

But  in  Latin  the  case  is  denoted  by  the  ending;  e.  g., 

Belgae  laudant  Celtas 
Celtas  laudant  Belgae 

In  both  these  sentences  Belgae  is  nominative  and  Celtas 
accusative,  and  therefore  the  meaning  of  both  sentences  is 
the  same. 


RULES 

The  following  rules  of  syntax  are  almost  the  same  in 
Latin  as  in  English: 

32.  RULE.     The    subject   of   a    finite    verb    is   put    in    the 
nominative  case.* 

33.  RULE.      The   direct   object   of   a    verb   is   put   in    the 
accusative  case, 

34.  RULE.     A  finite  verb  agrees  with  its  subject  in  person 
and  number.^ 

35.  RULE.     A  noun  which  modifies  another  noun  and  does 
not  mean  the  same  person  or  thing  is  put  in  the  genitive. 


*  A  finite  verb  is  one  that  has  person  and  number. 
tNouns  arc  third  person. 


32  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

36.  VOCABULARY 

appello,  appellare,  call. 

comparo,  ccmparare,  prepare. 

laudo,  laudare,  praise. 

occupo,  occupare,  seize. 

supero,  superare,  overcome,  conquer. 

What  English  word  is  derived  from  occupo?  What  does 
the  word  appellation  mean  ?     What  is  a  laudatory  speech  ? 

EXERCISES 

37.  1.  Write  the  conjugation  of  the  present  indicative  of 
any  three  of  the  verbs  in  §36,  placing  a  hyphen  between 
the  base  and  the  ending.  2.  Write  the  meaning  of  each 
form  of  one  of  them. 

38.  Translate    the    following    sentences    into    English: 

1.  Appellant;  superatis;  occupamus.  2.  Linguam  laudat. 
3.  Superant.     4.  Belgae  superant. 

Note.  When  translating  a  Latin  verb  that  has  its  subject  expressed, 
omit  the  English  pronoun  which  would  be  the  subject  if  the  verb 
stood  alone.  Thus  superant  means  they  conquer,  but  Belgae  superant 
means  the  Belgians  conquer. 

5.  Belgae  provinciam  superant.  6.  Portas  Celtae  occu- 
pant. 7.  Pr5vinciam  Galliam  appellatis.  8.  Celtae  provin- 
cias  superant.     9.  Silvas  laudas.     10.  Copiam  comparo. 

39.  Translate  the  following  sentences  into  Latin.  In  a 
Latin  sentence  the  verb  is  usually  placed  last. 

1.  You  (sing.)  are  preparing.  2.  You  (plu.)  are  conquer- 
ing. 3.  The  Celts  are  conquering.  4.  They  are  conquering 
Gaul.  5.  I  am  seizing  the  province.  6.  He  praises  the 
forest.     7.  They  call  Gaul  a  province. 


LESSON   IV 


33 


LESSON   IV 


40. 


SECOND   DECLENSION 

murus,  wall 


CASE 

SINGULAR 

CASE  ENDING 

Nom, 

murus 

-US 

Gen, 

muri 

-i 

Bat. 

muro 

-6 

Ace, 

murum 

-um 

Voc. 

mure 

-e 

Abl. 

muro 

-6 

PLURAL     C. 

ASE  ENDIN 

muri 

-i 

murdrum 

-orum 

muris 

-is 

muros 

-OS 

muri 

-y 

muris 

-is 

The  base  of  this  noun  is  mur.    See  §18. 

The  cases  have  the  same  meanings  in  all  declensions,  and  the  pupil 
may  therefore  translate  the  different  forms  for  himself. 

Note  1.     In   all  Latin  nouns  the  vocative  is  like  the   nominative 
except  in  the  singular  of  nouns  declined  like  murus. 

Note  2.     Nouns    ending    in    -ius    often    form    the    genitive    and 
vocative  singular  with  -i  (instead  of  -ii  and  -ie). 


41. 


VOCABULARY 


amicus,  -i,  friend. 
Germanus,  -i,  a  {the)  German. 
gladius,  -i,  sword. 
Helvetius,  -i,  a  (the)  Helvetian, 
or  ancient  Swiss. 

legatus,  -i,  lieutenant,  st a f -officer. 
murus,  -i,  wall. 
numerus,  -i,  numher. 

et,  coordinate  conjunction,  and. 


MURUS  GALLICUS 


34  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

Give  an  English  word  derived  from  numerus,  and  de- 
fine it.  Give  the  meaning  of  the  italicized  words  in  the 
following  expressions:  an  amicable  agreement;  a  mural 
painting ;    the  gladiators  of  Rome. 


EXEBCISES 

42.  1.  Write  the  declension  of  any  two  of  the  nouns  in 
§41,  placing  a  hyphen  between  the  base  and  the  endings. 

2.  Write  the  declension  of  the  expression  porta  et  murus. 

3.  Write  the  declension  of  the  expression  legatus  et  Belga. 

4.  Write  the  nominative  and  genitive,  both  singular  and 
plural,  of  all  the  nouns  in  §41. 

43.  Translate  into  English: 

1.  Helvetio;  murorum ;  GermanTs.  2,  Gladios;  numeri; 
amicum.  3.  Helvetius  Germanum  laudat.  4.  Belgas  laudat 
legatus.  5.  Celtam  gladio  superat.  6.  Muros  Helvetii 
occupant.  7.  Numerum  Helvetiorum  et  Germanorum  com- 
paramus.     8.  Helvetios  amicos  appellas. 

44.  Translate  into  Latin: 

1.  To  the  German;  to  the  Belgian.  2.  With  a  sword; 
with  a  reason.  3.  Of  the  lieutenant;  of  the  lieutenants. 
4.  With  walls.  5.  I  am  praising  the  Helvetians.  6.  You 
(sing.)  are  praising  a  number  of  friends.  7.  We  are  seizing 
the  walls  and  the  gates. 


LESSON  V 


35 


LESSON   V 

SECOND    DECLENSION— Continued 

PRESENT    INDICATIVE    ACTIVE    OF    THE    SECOND 
CONJUGATION 


45. 


SECOND    DECLENSION— Continued 
ager,  field  puer,  hoy  vir,  man       case  endings 


SINGULAR 

Nom. 

ager 

puer 

vir 

Gen. 

agri 

pueri 

viri 

-i 

Bat. 

agrd 

puero 

viro 

-5 

Ace. 

agrum 

puerum 

virum 

-um 

Voc. 

ager 

puer 

vir 

AM. 

agro 

puero 

PLURAL 

viro 

-5 

Nom. 

agri 

pueri 

viri 

-I 

Gen. 

agrorum 

puerorum 

virorum 

-drum 

Bat. 

agris 

pueris 

viris 

-is 

Ace. 

agros 

pueros 

viros 

OS 

Voc. 

agri 

pueri 

viri 

i 

All. 

agris 

pueris 

viris 

-is 

Notice  that  except  for  the  nominative  and  vocative  singular,  the 
endings  of  these  nouns  are  the  same  as  those  of  murus;  that  the  bases, 
agr,  puer,  and  vir,  are  found  in  the  genitive  singular  (see  §18);  and 
that  the  vocative  singular  is  like  the  nominative  singular  (see  §40, 
Note  1). 


PRESENT    INDICATIVE    ACTIVE    OF   THE    SECOND 
CONJUGATION 


46.  Prrncipal  parts:  mone5,  monere,  warn 

moneo,  1  warn,  am  warning,  do  warn 

mones,  you  warn,  etc. 

monet,  he  {she,  it)  warns,  etc. 


monemus,  we  warn,  etc, 
monetis,  you  warn,  etc. 
monent,  they  warn,  etc. 


36  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

The  e  before  the  final  re  of  the  second  principal  part  is  the  sign  of 
the  second  conjugation. 

The  present  base  of  this  verb  is  mon.    See  §28. 

The  personal  endings  are  the  same  as  in  the  first  conjugation,  but 
the  vowel  before  them  is  different. 


47.  VOCABULARY 

ager,  agri,  field,  farm. 
puer,  pueri,  hoy. 
vir,  viri,  man. 

habeo,  habere,  have. 

moneo,  monere,  tvarn. 

prohibeo,  prohibere,  Tceep  away. 

teneo,  tenere,  hold.  '  caesar 

video,  videre,  see. 

Give  English  words  derived  from  the  bases  of  ager  and 
prohibeo.  What  are  the  approximate  meanings  of  the 
adjectives  puerile  and  virile?    Of  monitor f    Of  tenacious? 


EXERCISES 

48.  "Write,  with  the  meanings,  the  conjugation  of  the 
present  tense  of  teneo  and  of  habeo,  placing  a  hyphen  be- 
tween the  base  and  the  endings.  2.  Write  the  conjugation 
of  the  present  tense  of  appello  et  video. 

49.  Translate  into  English: 

1.  Tenet;  prohibemus;  vides.  2.  Habetis;  monent.  3. 
Legatus  murum  tenet.  4.  Puer  Germanum  videt.  5.  Viri 
pueros  agris  prohibent.  6.  Fugam  Helvetiorum  video. 
7.  Belgae  agros  habent.  8.  Copiam  habemus.  9.  Silvas  et 
agros  provinciae  videtis. 


LESSON  VI 

50.     Translate  into  Latin: 


37 


1.  You  (sing.)  are  warning;  we  see.  2.  You  (plu.)  have; 
she  holds.  3.  I  have  a  field.  4.  The  lieutenant  is  holding 
the  walls  and  the  gates.  5.  He  sees  the  boy's  friends. 
6.  "We  are  keeping  away  the  men  from  the  province. 


LESSON   VI 


51. 


SECOND   DECLENSION— Continued 
bellum,  war 


SINGULAR 

CASE  ENDINGS 

PLURAL 

CASE  ENDINGS 

Nom. 

bellum 

-um 

bella 

-a 

Gen. 

belli 

-i 

bellorum 

-drum 

Bat. 

bello 

-6 

bellis 

-is 

Ace. 

bellum 

-um 

bella 

-a 

Voc. 

bellum 

-um 

bella 

-a 

Ahl. 

bello 

-6 

bellis 

-is 

The  base  of  this  noun  is  "bell.     Compare  its  endings  carefully  with 
those  of  murus. 


52.  VOCABULARY 

bellum,  -i,  war. 
frumentum,  -i,  grain. 
initium,  -i,  beginning. 
oppidum,  -i,  town. 
proelium,  -i,  battle. 

n6n,  adverb,  not. 

do,  dare,  give.  This  is  inflected  like  a  verb  of  the  first  conjugation, 
except  that  the  a  is  usually  short.  The  present  is  do,  das,  dat; 
damus,  datis,  dant. 

What  is  the  meaning  of  initial?    Of  initiation f 


38  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

53.  RULE,  The  indirect  object  of  a  verb  is  put  in  the 
dative, 

EXERCISES 

54.  1.  Write  the  declension  of  frumentum  and  of  proeli- 
um,  placing  a  hyphen  between  the  base  and  the  endings. 
2.  "Write  the  declension  of  the  expression  murus  et  porta  et 
bellum.  3.  AYrite  the  nominative  and  genitive,  both  singu- 
lar and  plural,  of  the  nouns  in  §52. 

55.  Translate  into  English: 

1.  Initium  proeliT ;  copia  frumenti ;  agri  provinciae.  2. 
Frumentum  puer5  do.  3.  Oppida  Galliae  tenemus.  4.  Viros 
oppidis  non  prohibent.  5.  Gladium  habet  vir.  6.  Frumen- 
tum viri  amico  dat.     7.  Initium  belli  vides. 

56.  Translate  into  Latin: 

1.  With  grain;    by  wars;    the  beginnings  of  the  battles. 

2.  Provinces  and  towns  (nom.)  ;   provinces  and  towns  (ace). 

3.  They  do  not  see  the  grain.     4.  He  is  giving  the  sword  to 
a  friend.    5.  You  (plu.)  give  a  supply  of  grain  to  the  boys. 


LESSON   VII 

GENDER 

ADJECTIVES    OF    THE    FIRST-AND-SECOND    DECLENSION 

57.  There  are  three  genders  in  Latin  as  in  English, — 
masculine,  feminine,  and  neuter.  In  English  we  have  only 
what  is  called  natural  gender,  masculine  and  feminine  nouns 
being,  as  a  rule,  only  those  which  are  names  of  objects  that 
have  sex. 


LESSON   VII 


39 


58.  In  Latin  there  is  this  natural  gender  in  the  case  of 
many  words;  but  in  the  case  of  most  words  there  is 
grammatical  gender.  The  nouns  of  this  latter  class  are 
masculine,  feminine,  or  neuter  according  to  rules  which 
appear  to  us  to  be  arbitrary. 

RULES    FOR    GENDER 

59.  Nouns  of  the  first  declension  are  feminine,  except 
names  of  mate  beings. 

Thus  Belga  and  Celta  are  masculine. 

60.  Nouns  of  t/ie  second  declension  ending  In  -um  are 
neuter:  others  are  masculine. 


61. 


DECLENSION   OF   ADJECTIVES 


In  English  an  adjective  does  not  vary  its  form 
most  adjectives  have  gender,  number,  and  case. 


in  Latin 


longus,  -a,  -um,  long 

Masculine 

Feminine 

SINGULAR 

Neuter 

Nom. 

longus 

'               longa 

longum 

Gen. 

long! 

longae 

longi 

Bat. 

longo 

longae 

longo 

Ace. 

longum 

Ion  gam 

longum 

Voc. 

longe 

longa 

longum 

AU. 

longo 

longa 

PLURAL 

longS 

Nom. 

longi 

longae 

longa 

Gen. 

longorum 

longarum 

longorum 

Dat. 

longis 

longis 

longis 

Ace. 

longos 

long§,s 

longa 

Voc. 

longi 

longae 

longa 

AU. 

longis 

longis 

longis 

40  BELLUM    HELVETIC UM 

It  is  evident  at  once  that  in  an  adjective  of  this  sort  the 
masculine  has  the  endings  of  murus,  the  feminine  the  endings  of 
porta,  and  the  neuter  the  endings  of  bellum. 

This  is  therefore  called  an  adjective  of  the  first-and-second 
declension.     Its  base  is  long. 


62.  VOCABULARY 

altus,  -a,  -um,  high,  deep. 
latus,  -a,  -um,  tcide,  hroad. 
longus,  -a,  -um,  long. 
magnus,  -a,  -um,  great,  large. 
proximus,  -a,  -um,  nearest,  very  near. 
tertius,  -a,  -um,  third. 

Give   English    words    derived    from  altus,    latus,    longus 
and  magnus.    What  is  the  meaning  of  proximity  f 


63.  USE   OF   ADJECTIVES 

RULE.  Adjectives  agree  with  their  nouns  in  gender,  number , 
and  case. 

Write  in  Latin:   the  nearest  Belgians  (nom.). 

Since,  according  to  the  rule,  the  form  of  the  adjective  will  depend 
upon  the  noun,  write  first  the  noun  in  its^  proper  case  and  number: 
Belgae.  This  is  masculine  (§59),  plural,  nominative.  The  adjective 
required  will  therefore  be  the  masculine,  plural,  nominative  of 
proximus,  -a,  -um,  which  is  proximi.  Therefore  Belgae  proximi  is 
the  required  Latin. 

Other  examples.  To  the  third  Celt:  Celtae  (mas.  sing,  dat.)  tertio. 
Of  the  great  icars:  bellorum  (neut.  plu.  gen.)  magnorum.  The  nearest 
gates  (ace.)  :   portas  (fem.  plu.  ace.)  proximas. 


EXERCISES 

64.    Decline  together  longus  murus ;  lata  porta;  magnum 
oppidum;   ager  latus;   Belga  proximus. 


LESSON   VIII 

65.     Translate  into  English: 


41 


1.  AgrI  lati.  2.  Oppidi  magni.  3.  Oppida  magna.  4. 
Celtae  proximl.  5.  Celtae  proximo.  6.  Proximorum  puero- 
rum.  7.  Numeros  magnos.  8.  GJadio  longo.  9.  Causam 
tertiam.    10.  Altis  murls. 

66.     Translate  into  Latin: 

1.  Of  the  third  man.  2.  With  a  long  wall.  3.  The  great 
gates  (nom.).  4.  The  nearest  Helvetians  (nom.).  5.  The 
nearest  Celts  (nom.).  6.  By  wide  forests.  7.  Of  the  great 
battles.  8.  To  the  nearest  Belgian.  9.  Of  the  high  walls. 
10.  The  nearest  towns  (ace). 


LESSON  vin 


ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  FIRST-AND-SECOND  DECLENSION- 

Continued 

PRESENT    INDICATIVE    OF   SUM 

67.    ADJECTIVES  IN  -ER  OF  THE  FIRST-AND-SECOND 
DECLENSION 

aeger,  aegra,  aegrum,  ill,  sick 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Bat. 
Ace. 

VOG. 

AU. 


Mas. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Mas. 


Fein. 


aeger  aegra  aegrum 

aegri  aegrae  aegri 

aegro  aegrae  aegro 

aegrum  aegram  aegrum 

aeger  aegra  aegrum 

aegro  aegra  aegro 


Neut 

aegri  aegrae  aegra 

aegrorum  aegrarum  aegrorum 

aegris  aegris  aegris 

aegros  aegras  aegra 

aegri  aegrae  aegra 

aegris  aegris  aegris 


42 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 
liber,  libera,  Uberum,  free 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 


Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

liber 

libera 

liberum 

liberi 

liberae 

libera 

Gen. 

liberi 

liberae 

liberi 

liberorum 

liberarum 

liberor 

Dat. 

libero 

liberae 

libero 

liberis 

liberis 

liberis 

Ace. 

llberum 

liberam 

liberum 

liberos 

llberas 

libera 

Voc. 

liber 

libera 

liberum 

liberi 

liberae 

libera 

Abl 

libero 

libera 

libero 

liberis 

liberis 

liberis 

68.  The  only  forms  in  the  declension  of  aeger  and  liber  that  are 
different  in  endings  from  longus  are  the  nominative  and  vocative 
singular  masculine. 

The  bases  are  aegr  and  liber,  which  are  shown  in  the  feminine  and 
neuter  forms  of  the  nominative  singular. 


PRESENT   INDICATIVE   OF  SUM 
sum,  esse,  he 


SINGULAR 


sum,  I  am 

es,  (thou  art)  you  are 

est,  he  (she,  it)  is,  there  is 


PLURAL 

sumus,  we  are 

estis,  you  are 

sunt,  they  are,  there  are 


70. 


VOCABULARY 


aeger,  aegra,  aegrum,  ill,  sicTc. 

cotidianus,  -a,  -um,  daily. 

divisus,  -a,  -um,  divided. 

liber,  libera,  liberum,  free. 

noster,  nostra,  nostrum,  our. 

reliquus,  reliqua,  reliquum,  remaining,  the-rest-of. 

sum,  esse,  he. 

Give  words  derived  from  divisus  and  liber.     What  is 
the  meaning  of  relic? 


FIRST   REVIEW   LESSON  43 

EXERCISES 

71.  Decline  together  ager  noster;  aeger  amicus;  liber 
puer;  liber  Belga. 

72.  Translate  into  English: 

1.  Helvetius  est  aeger;  Helvetii  sunt  aegri.  2.  Silva 
magna  provineiae;  silva  magnae  provinciae.  3.  Sumus 
amici  proximorum  Germanorum ;  sumus  amid  proximi  Ger- 
manorum.  4.  OppidTs  nostris  Helvetios  non  prohibemus. 
5.  Belgae  reliquT  sunt  llberT.  6.  Proelia  belli  sunt  cotidiana. 
7.  Gallia  est  divisa.     8.  Gladium  longum  viro  damus. 

73.  Translate  into  Latin: 

1.  He  is  the  sick  friend  of  the  Helvetian.  2.  He  is  the 
friend  of  the  sick  Helvetian.  3.  He  is  warning  the  nearest 
Belgians.  4.  He  is  giving  fields  to  our  friends.  5.  The  Celt 
sees  the  nearest  German.  6.  The  nearest  Celt  sees  the 
German.  7.  There  are  daily  battles.  8.  The  Belgians  are 
divided.  9.  The  lieutenant  is  free.  10.  We  are  giving  the 
men  the  remaining  grain. 


FIRST   REVIEW   LESSON 

74.     Memory  Work. 

1.  Rules  for  quantity  of  syllables  (§9). 

2.  Rules  for  accent  (§§10-12). 

3.  First  declension  (nouns)   (§16). 

4.  Second  declension  (nouns)   (§§40,  45,  51). 

5.  Adjectives  of  the  first-and-second  declension  (§§61,67), 

6.  Rules  for  gender  (§§59,  60). 


44 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


7.  Present  indicative  of  sum  (§69). 

8.  Present  indicative  active  of  first  conjugation   (§26). 

9.  Present  indicative  active  of  second  conjugation  (§46). 

75.     Latin-English  Vocabulary. 

1.  Give  the  nominative  singular,  genitive  singular,  gender, 
and  meaning  of  the  following  nouns : 


ager 

frumentum 

initium 

porta 

amicus 

fuga 

legatus 

proelium 

Belga 

Gallia 

lingua 

provincia 

bellum 

Germanus 

murus 

puer 

causa 

gladlus 

Humerus 

silva 

Celta 

Helvetius 

oppidum 

vir 

2.  Give  the  entire  nominative  singular  and  the  meaning 
of  the  following  adjectives: 

aeger,    altus,    cotidianus,    divisus,    latus,    liber,    longus,    magnus, 
noster,  proximus,  reliquus,  tertius. 

3.  Give  the  first  two  principal  parts  and  the  meaning  of 
the  following  verbs: 

appello,  compare,  do,  habeo,  laudo,  moneo,  occupo,  prohibeo,  sum, 
supero,  teneo,  video. 

76.     English-Latin  Vocabulary, 

Give  the  first  form  of  the  Latin  for  the  following  words: 


am 

flight 

keep  away 

reason 

and 

forest 

language 

remaining 

are 

free 

large 

the  rest  of 

battle 

friend 

lieutenant 

see 

beginning 

gate 

long 

seize 

Belgian 

boy 

broad 

call 

Celt 

conquer 

daily 

deep 

divided 

field 


LESSON   IX 

Gaul 

man 

German 

nearest 

give 

not 

grain 

number 

great 

our 

have 

overcome 

Helvetian 

plenty 

high 

praise 

hold 

prepare 

is 

province 

45 

sick 

supply 

sword 

third 

town 

very  near 

wall 

war 

warn 

wide 


LESSON   IX 


THIRD    DECLENSION 


FIRST   DIVISION— GENITIVE   PLURAL  IN  -UM 


11, 


MASCULINE   AND   FEMININE   NOUNS 


c5nstQ,  M.,        mercator,  m.,        homd,  m.,  f.,    legid,  f.,        case 
consul  trader  human  being     legion       endings 


Norn. 

consul 

mercator 

homo 

legio 

Gen. 

consulis 

mercatoris 

hominis 

legionis 

-is 

Dat. 

consul! 

mercatori 

homini 

legioni 

-i 

Ace, 

consulem 

mercatorem 

hominem 

legionem 

-em 

Foe. 

consul 

mercator 

homo 

legio 

Ahl. 

consule 

mercatore 

homine 

legione 

-e 

Nom. 

eonsules 

mercatores 

homines 

legiones 

-es 

Gen. 

consulum 

mercatorum 

hominum 

legionum 

-um 

Dat. 

consulibus 

mercatoribus 

hominibus 

legionibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

eonsules 

mercatores 

homines 

legiones 

-es 

Voc. 

eonsules 

mercatores 

homines 

legiones 

-es 

Ail.      consulibus       mercatoribus       hominibus        legionibus      -ibus 


46 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


lex,  P., 

civitas,  p., 

virtus,  p., 

miles,  M., 

CASE 

law 

state 

manliness 

soldier 

ENDINGS 

Norn. 

lex 

civitas 

virtiis 

miles 

-s* 

Gen, 

legis 

civitatis 

virtutis 

militis 

-is 

Bat. 

legi 

civitati 

virtiiti 

militi 

-i 

Ace. 

legem 

civitatem 

virtutem 

militem 

-em 

Voc. 

lex 

civitas 

virtus 

miles 

-s* 

AU. 

lege 

civitate 

virtute 

milite 

-e 

Norn. 

leges 

civitates 

virtutes 

milites 

-gs 

Gen. 

legum 

civitatum 

virtutum 

militum 

-um 

Bat. 

legibus 

civitatibus 

virtutibus 

militibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

leges 

civitates 

virtutes 

milites 

-es 

Voc. 

leges 

civitates 

virtutes 

milites 

-es 

AU. 

legibus 

civitatibus 

virtutibus 

militibus 

-ibus 

78.  In  the  third  declension  both  the  nominative  and  the 
genitive  singular  must  be  committed  to  memory  in  order 
to  be  able  to  decline  a  word. 

The  base  is  found  by  dropping  the  ending  is  from  the  gen- 
itive singular.  After  the  base  is  found,  the  same  endings 
are  added  to  it  as  for  consul.  The  vocative  is  always  like 
the  nominative. 


79. 


VOCABULARY 


civitas,  civitatis,  f.,  state. 

consul,  consulis,  m.,  consul,  the  title  given  to  each  of  the  two  execu- 
tive officers  of  the  Roman  republic. 

homd,  hominis,  m.  or  f.,  man,  in  the  sense  of  human  heing. 

legio,  legionis,  f.,  legion;  a  division  of  the  Eoman  army  which  in 
actual  service  had  about  3600  men. 

lex,  legis,  f.,  law. 

mercator,  mercatoris,  m.,  trader. 

miles,  militis,  m.,  soldier. 

virtus,  virtutis,  f.,  manliness,  bravery. 


*  In  lex,  x=g's. 


LESSON  IX  47 

Give  English  words  derived  from  the  bases  of  lex  and 
miles,  and  from  virtus  and  mercator. 

EXERCISES 

80.  1.  Decline  together  the  words  meaning  our  legion; 
the  nearest  man  (homo)  ;  a  great  state.  2.  Give  the  memo- 
randa* of  all  the  words  in  §79. 

81.  1.  C5nsuli;  mercatorem.  2.  Lege;  hominum.  3. 
Legionibus;  milites.  4.  Civitatis;  virtute.  5.  Virtutem 
militis  laudamus.  6.  Consul  portas  oppidi  legione  oceupat. 
7.  Homines  Celtas  lingua  Galliae  appellatis.  8.  Reliquae 
civitates  sunt  liberae.  9.  Leges  Galliae  non  laudas.  10. 
Hominibus  c5nsul  frumentum  dat. 

82.  1.  To  the  trader ;  with  the  legions.  2.  Of  the  man ; 
of  the  laws.  3.  To  the  consuls ;  the  states.  4.  The  divided 
states  (nom.) ;  the  divided  states  (ace).  5.  Our  consuls 
and  our  laws.  6.  He  is  giving  grain  to  the  soldier.  7.  The 
bravery  of  the  legions  is  not  great. 


^Memoranda  is  the  term  which  will  be  used  to  designate  the  nominative 
singular,  genitive  singular,  gender,  nominative  plural,  genitive  plural,  and 
meaning. 


48. 


BELLUM    IIELVETICUM 


LESSON   X 

THIRD    DECLENSION-Continued 
FIRST  DIVISION   (Continued)— GENITIVE  PLURAL  IN  -UM 
83.  NEUTER   NOUNS 


flumen,  n., 

opus,  N., 

tempus,  N., 

iter,  N., 

CASE 

river 

icorTc 

time 

journey 

ENDINGS 

Norn. 

flumen 

opus 

tempus 

iter 



Gen. 

flu  minis 

operis 

temporis 

itineris 

-is 

Bat. 

flumini 

operi 

tempori 

itineri 

i 

Ace. 

flumen 

opus 

tempus 

iter 

Voc. 

flumen 

opus 

tempus 

iter 

AU. 

flumine 

opere 

tempore 

itinere 

-e 

Norn. 

flumina 

opera 

tempera 

itinera 

-a 

Gen. 

fluminum 

operum 

temporum 

itinerum 

-um 

Dat. 

fluminibus 

operibus 

temporibus 

itineribus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

flumina 

opera 

tempera 

itinera 

-a 

Voc. 

flumina 

opera 

tempera 

itinera 

-a 

AU. 

fluminibus 

operibus 

temporibus 

itineribus 

-ibus 

84.  In  the  declension  of  these  nouns  two  principles  are 
involved : 

1.  In  the  third  declension  both  the  nominative  and  the 
genitive  singular  must  be  committed  to  memory.     See  §78. 

2.  In  all  neuter  nouns  (of  whatever  declension)  the 
nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  are  alike,  and  in  the 
plural  they  end  in  short  a. 

Compare  the  declension  of  bellum,  §51. 


85.      RULE.     An  appositive  or  a  predicate  noun  agrees  in 
case  with  the  word  it  explains. 


LESSON  X  49 

86.  VOCABULARY 

flumen,  fluminis,  n.,  river. 

iter,  itineris,  n.,  journey,  march,  road. 

opus,  operis,  n.,  work. 

tempus,  temporis,  n.,  time. 

Garumna,  -ae,  *m.,  the  Garonne,  a  river  in  southwestern  Gaul. 
Matrona,    -ae,    *m.,    the   Marne,    a   tributary    of    the    Seine    from   the 

northeast. 
Sequana,  -ae,  *m.,  the  Seine,  on  which  modern  Paris  is  situated. 

Give  the  meanings  of  the  words,  flume,  itinerary,  operate, 
temporary ,  and  show  their  connection  with  words  in  the 
vocabulary. 


EXERCISES 

87.  1.  Decline  together  the  words  meaning  our  work; 
the  river  Seine;  a  long  march.  2.  Give  the  memoranda  of 
all  the  words  in  §86. 

88.  1.  Flumine;  itinera.  2.  Operibus;  temporum.  3. 
Itinera  legionum ;  opus  mercatorum.  4.  Opus  est  magnum, 
et  tempus  reliquum  non  longum  est.  5.  Legatus,  amicus 
consulis,  est  proximus.  6.  Gallia  est  divlsa  fluminibus.  7. 
Garumna  et  Matrona  et  Sequana  sunt  flumina  Galliae. 

89.  1.  Of  the  river;  for  the  journey.  2.  Work  (ace); 
times  (ace).  3.  The  beginning  of  our  work.  4.  The  river 
is  wide.  5.  Our  time  is  divided.  6.  We  are  warning  the 
traders,  our  friends.    7.  The  Gauls  are  not  our  friends. 


*  All  names  of  rivers  are  masculine  in  Latin, 


50  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


LESSON   XI 


THIRD    DECLENSION-Continued 
SECOND    DIVISION— GENITIVE    PLURAL    IN    -lUM 
90.  MASCULINE   AND   FEMININE   NOUNS 


pars,  F.,  part 

hostis,  M.  or  r.,  enemy 

Nom. 

pars 

/                   hostis 

Gen. 

partis 

hostis 

Dot 

parti   . 

hosti 

Ace. 

partem 

hostem 

Voc. 

pars 

hostis 

Ahl. 

parte 

hoste 

Nom. 

partes 

hostes 

Gen. 

partium 

hostium 

Dat. 

partibus 

hostibus 

Aec. 

partes  (-is) 

hostes  (-is) 

Voc. 

partes 

hostes 

All. 

partibus 

hostibus 

91.  Notice  that  nouns  whose  genitive  plural  ends  in  -ium 
may  also  have  the  ending  -is  in  the  accusative  plural.  Some 
also  have  the  ending  -im  in  the  accusative  singular,  and 
-i  in  the  ablative  singular.  These  forms  will  be  noted  as 
they  occur. 

Note.  Rules  will  be  given  later  for  determining  what  nouns  have 
the  ending  -ium  in  the  genitive  plural.  All  the  nouns  in  the  vocabulary 
below  are  declined  like  pars  or  hostis. 


92.  VOCABULARY 

collis,  collis,  m.,  Mil. 

finis,  finis,  m.,  abl.  fine  or  fini,  end,  boundary;   plural,  territory. 
hostis,  hostis,  m.  or  f.,  enemy.    Not  a  collective  noun  in  Latin, 
navis,  navis,  f.,  abl.  often  navi,  ship. 


LESSON   XII  ,  51 

mons,  mentis,  m.,  mountain. 
pars,  partis,  f.,  part. 
pons,  pontis,  m.,  bridge. 

Give  English  words  derived  from  the  last  six  Latin  words. 

EXERCISES 

93.  Decline  the  expressions  collis  et  mons;  navis  et 
mercator;   pars  magna. 

94.  1.  Navibus;  collium.  2.  Pontis ;  monte.  3.  Finis; 
fines ;  finis.  4.  Ilostes  oppida  occupant.  5.  Partem  navium 
video.  6.  Colles  provinciae  non  magni  sunt.  7.  Hostes 
ponte  prohibemus.  8.  Montes  Galliae  videtis.  9.  Partem 
frumenti  nostri  hostibus  damus.  10.  Belgae  hostes  gladiis 
superant. 

95.  1.  Of  the  hill;  with  the  ships.  2.  By  the  bridge; 
of  the  mountains.  3.  The  end  (ace.)  ;  territory  (ace).  4. 
Part  of  the  great  work;  a  great  part  of  the  work.  5.  The 
ships  of  the  enemy  (plu.) ;  the  nearest  mountains.  6.  The 
bridges  are  long.     7.  Our  territory  is  wide. 


LESSON   XII 

THIRD    DECLENSION-Continued 
SECOND   DIVISION    (Continued)— GENITIVE   PLURAL  IN  -lUM 
96.  NEUTER    NOUNS 


mare,  n., 

vectigal,  n., 

mille, 

sea 

tax 

thousand 

CASE  ENDINGS 

Nom. 

mare 

vectigal 

-e,— 

Gen. 

maris 

vectigalis 

(mille,  an 

-is 

Bat. 

mari 

vectigali 

adj.  in  the 

-i 

Ace. 

mare 

vectigal 

singular.) 

-e,— 

Voe. 

mare 

vectigal 

-e,— 

Ahl 

mari 

vectigali 

-i 

52  BELLUM    HELVETIC  UM 


Nom. 

maria 

vectlgalia 

milia 

-la 

Gen. 

mariuin 

vectigalium 

milium 

-inm 

Bat. 

maribus 

vectigalibus 

milibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

niaria 

vectlgalia 

milia 

-la 

Voc. 

maria 

vectlgalia 

milia 

-la 

Ahl. 

maribus 

vectigalibus 

milibus 

-ibus 

97.  RULES  FOR  THE  GENITIVE  PLURAL  IN  -lUM 

The  nouns  that  have  -ium  in  the  genitive  plural  are: 

1.  Those   that   end   in   -is    (or   -es)    and   have   no   more 
syllables  in  the  genitive  than  in  the  nominative. 

2.  Those  that  end  in  -s  or  -x  preceded  by  a  consonant. 

3.  Neuters  that  end  in  -e,  -al  or  -ar. 

98.  RULES  FOR   GENDER  IN  THE   THIRD   DECLENSION 

1.  Masculine  are  names  of  male  beings,  and  nouns  ending 
in  -or,  -OS,  -er,  -es. 

2.  Feminine  are  names  of  female  beings,  and  nouns  end- 
ing in  -o,  -as,  -es,  -is,  -us,  -x,  and  ' '  consonant-and-s. " 

3.  Neuter  are  those  ending  in  -c,  -i,  -t,  -y,  -1,  -a,  -n,  -e; 
-ar,  -ur,  -us. 

99.  VOCABULARY 

mare,  maris,  n.,  sea. 

mille,    indeclinable    in    the    singular,   which    is   usually    an   adjective, 

a  thousand;  plural,  milia,  milium,  n.,  thousands. 
vectigal,  vectigalis,  n.,  tax. 

Aquitanus,  -i,  m.,  an   {the)   Aquitanian,  an  inhabitant  of  southwestern 

Gaul. 
Gallus,  -i,  m.,  a  {the)  Gaul,  an  inhabitant  of  the  country  called  Gallia. 
Sequanus,  -i,  m.,  a  {the)  Sequanian,  a  member  of  a  powerful  tribe  in 

central  Gaul. 

Give  English  words  derived  from  mare. 


LESSON  xm 


53 


EXERCISES 

100.  1.  Decline  the  expressions  flumen  et  mare;  lex  et 
vectigal;  coUis  et  navis  et  mare.  2.  Give  the  memoranda 
of  all  the  nouns  in  §99.  3.  Give  the  rules  for  the  gender 
of  nouns  of  the  first  and  the  second  declensions.  4.  Give 
the  gender  of  the  following  nouns  according  to  the  rules 
given  in  §98:  civitas,  consul,  flumen,  homo,  hostis,  legio, 
lex,  mercator,  mare,  milia,  navis,  opus,  pars,  vectigal,  virtus. 
5.  Give  the  gender  of  the  following  nouns,  which  are  excep- 
tions to  the  rules  given  in  §98 :  iter,  coUis,  finis,  mons,  pons. 


101.  1.  Marl;  vectTgali- 
um.  2.  Mille;  mllia.  3. 
Vectigalia  Gallorum  non 
magna  sunt.  4.  Mllle  Ger- 
manos  video.  5.  Milia  Ger- 
manorum  video.  6.  Consul 
est  vir  magnae  virtiitis.  7. 
Sequani  et  Gall!  reliqui  sunt 
hostes  Germanorum.  8.  Aqui- 
tani  partem  Galliae  tenent. 
9.  Partem  navium  Sequani 
vident.  10.  Colles  et  montes 
nostri  sunt  alti. 

102.  1.  The  sea  (ace); 
with  taxes.  2.  A  thousand 
Gauls;   thousands   of   Gauls. 

3.  The  remaining  taxes  are  large.  4.  The  enemy  (plu.) 
hold  our  territory.  5.  You  (plu.)  praise  the  bravery  of  the 
legions.     6.  We  are  keeping  the  Gauls  away  from  the  sea. 


\Zj--^^-^^^^^     — 


ROMAN    GALLEY 


54 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


LESSON   XIII 

ADJECTIVES    OF    THE    THIRD    DECLENSION 

103.  Adjectives  of  the  third  declension  may  have  one, 
two,  or  three  different  forms  for  the  nominative  singular. 
Apart  from  this  it  will  be  seen  that  there  is  little  difference 
between  the  adjectives  whose  declension  is  given  below. 


oriens,  rising 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

oriens 

oriens 

oriens 

orientes 

orientes 

orientia 

Gen. 

orientis 

orientis 

orientis 

orientium 

orientium 

orientium 

Vat. 

orient! 

orient! 

orienti 

orientibus 

orientibus 

orientibus 

Ace. 

orientem  orientem  oriens 

orientes  (-is 

)  orientes  (-is)  orientia 

Voc. 

oriens 

oriens 

oriens 

orientes 

orientes 

orientia 

All, 

orient! 

orient! 

orienti 

orientibus 

orientibus 

orientibus 

fortis,  brave 

Nom. 

fortis 

fortis 

forte 

fortes 

fortSs 

fortia 

Gen. 

fortis 

fortis 

fortis 

fortium 

fortium 

fortium 

Bat. 

forti 

forti 

forti 

fortibus 

fortibus 

fortibus 

Ace. 

fortem 

fortem 

forte 

fortes  (-is) 

fortes  (-is) 

fortia 

Voc. 

fortis 

fortis 

forte 

fortes 

fortes 

fortia 

Ail. 

forti 

forti 

forti 

fortibus 

fortibus 

fortibus 

acer,  sharp,  Jceen 


Nom. 

acer 

acris 

acre 

acres 

acrgs 

acria 

Gen. 

acris 

acris 

acris 

acrium 

acrium 

acrium 

Bat. 

aeri 

acri 

acri 

acribus 

acribus 

acribus 

Ace. 

acrem 

acrem 

acre 

acres  (-is) 

acres  (-is) 

acria 

Voc. 

acer 

acris 

acre 

acres 

acres 

acria 

All. 

acri 

acri 

acri 

acribus 

acribus 

acribus 

LESSON   XIII 


55 


104.  The  declensions  of  fortis  and  oriens  may  be  abbreviated  by 
writing  the  masculine  and  feminine  together  as  one  column,  as  given 
in  App.  37,  38.     Thus: 

M.  and  F.  N. 

Nom,    fortis  forte 

Gen.      fortis  fortis 

Dat.      forti  forti 

elc. 

105.  -^^^  three  may  be  abbreviated  by  writing  only  one  form 
each  for  the  genitive,  dative,  and  ablative,  which  are  alike  for  all 
three  genders.     Thus: 

Nom.     acer         acris         acre 
Gen.  acris 

Dat.  acri 

etc. 


106. 


DECLENSION    OF    TRES 

Tres  (base  tr-)  is  declined  like  the  plural  of  fortis. 
tres,  three 


Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

tres 

tres 

tria 

Gen. 

trium 

trium 

trium 

Dat. 

tribus 

tribus 

tribus 

Ace. 

tres  (tris) 

tres  (tris) 

tria 

Voc. 

tres 

tres 

tria 

AU. 

tribus 

tribus 

tribus 

107.  VOCABULARY 

acer,  acris,  acre,  sharp,  Tceen. 

celer,  celeris,  celere,  quiclc,  swift. 

fortis,  forte,  hrave. 

nobilis,  nobile,  noted,  'prominent. 

omnis,  omne,  all. 

oriens,  genitive  orientis,  rising. 

tres,  tria,  three. 

sol,  solis,  m.,  sun.  scutum 

Give  English  words  which  you  think  are  derived  from 
each  of  the  above,  then  look  them  up  in  the  dictionary  and 
see  if  you  are  right. 


56  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

EXERCISES 

108.  Decline  the  Latin  for  the  expressions  a  hrave  soldier; 
a  noted  river;  the  rising  sun. 

109.  1.  Celeres  naves;  Helvetius  nobilis.  2.  Acris  viri; 
Germanorum  fortium.  3.  Leges  omnes  civitatum;  leges 
omnium  civitatum.  4.  Solem  orientem  video.  5.  Omnia 
oppida  hostes  tenent.  6.  Consul  tres  legatos  laudat.  7. 
German!  acres  omnes  Gallos  superant.  8.  Pueri  sunt  fortes. 
9.  Sunt  tria  itinera.'    10.  Proelium  est  acre. 

110.  1.  A  sharp  battle  (ace.)  ;  of  the  brave  lieutenant. 
2.  Of  the  noted  consuls;  of  the  rising  sun.  3.  All  the  boys 
(nom.) ;  three  friends  (ace).  4.  The  Belgian  is  brave;  the 
Belgians  are  brave  men.  5.  "We  hold  all  the  roads.  6.  They 
see  the  soldier's  bravery.     7.  I  see  a  swift  ship. 


LESSON   XIV 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES      USE   OF   PREPOSITIONS 
111.  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES 

The  comparative  of  an  adjective  is  regularly  formed  by 
adding  -lor,  and  the  superlative  by  adding  -issimus,  to  the 
base  of  the  positive.    E.  g., 


fort-is, 

fort-ior. 

fort-issimus 

brave, 

braver, 

bravest  or  very  brave 

long-US, 

long-ior, 

long-issimus 

long, 

longer, 

longest  or  very  long 

All  comparatives  are  declined  like  fortior  (§112). 
All  superlatives  are  declined  like  longus  (§61). 


LESSON    XIV  57 

112.  DECLENSION   OF   COMPARATIVES 

fortior,  braver 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

Mas.  Fern.  Neut.  Mas.  Fern.  Neut. 

Nom.  fortior  fortior  fortius  fortiores      fortiores      fortiora 

Gen.  fortioris  fortioris  fortioris  fortiorum    fortiorum    fortiorum 

Dat.  fortiori  fortiori  fortiori  f ortioribus  f ortioribus  f ortioribus 

Ace.  fortiorem  fortiorem  fortius  fortiores      fortiores      fortiora 

Voc.  fortior  fortior  fortius  fortiores      fortiores      forti5ra 

Ahl.  fortiore  fortiora  fortiora  f ortioribus  f ortioribus  f ortioribus 


113.  USE   OF  PREPOSITIONS 

Latin  prepositions  are  divided  into  three  classes: 

1.  Those  used  with  the  accusative  only. 

2.  Those  used  with  the  ablative  only. 

3.  Those  used  with  either  the  accusative  or  the  abla- 
tive. With  these  there  is  a  difference  in  meaning  according 
to  the  case  used. 


114.  VOCABULARY 

ad,  prep,  with  ace,  to,  toward. 
inter,  prep,  with  aec,  'between. 

a  or  ab  (before  vowels  or  h),  prep,  with  abl.,  (away)  from;   hy. 

cum,  prep,  with  abl.,  with. 

de,  prep,  with  abl.,  {down)  from;    concerning. 

e  or  ex  (before  vowels  or  h),  prep,  with  abl.,  {out)  from,  out  of. 

in,  prep.;  with  aec,  intoj  with  abl.,  in,  on. 

Note  that,  as  the  ablative  case  alone  is  translated  by  from,  with, 
hy,  in,  so  the  Latin  prepositions  that  mean  from,  with,  hy,  in,  are 
used  with  the  ablative  case. 


58  BELLUM   HELVETICUM 

State  the  meaning  of  the  prefix  in  each  of  the  following 
words:    intervene,  absent,  induce,  descend,  exit,  addition. 


EXERCISES 

115.  1.  Like  fortis  and  longus  (§111),  compare  altus, 
latus,  and  nobilis.  2.  Decline  the  expression  for  a  longer 
river.     3.  Decline  nobilis  and  its  comparative. 


116.  1.  Ad  fortem  consulem;  ad  forti5rem  consulem. 
2.  Inter  fltimina  lata;  inter  flumina  latissima.  3.  A  flu- 
mine;  ab  oppidis.  4.  In  provinciam;  in  provincia.  5.  De 
monte  alto;  de  montibus  altissimls.  6.  Cum  legionibus 
fortioribus;  cum  legione  fortissima.  7.  E  finibus  nostris; 
ex  oppidis  omnibus.  8.  Gallia  est  omnis  divTsa  in  partes 
tres.  9.  German!  longos  gladios  habent;  gladios  longiores 
habemus.     10.  Belgas  cum  Germanis  superamus. 


117.  Note.  In  the  following  sentences,  and  in  all  tlie  English-Latin 
exercises  in  the  following  lessons  (until  special  rules  are  learned 
in  Lesson  XXXIV  and  after),  use  a  preposition  when  one  is  used 
in  English,  except  when  a  whole  prepositional  phrase  may  be  trans- 
lated into  Latin  by  the  genitive  or  by  the  dative  of  indirect  object 
with  the  verb  do. 

1.  Into  the  towns;  in  the  towns;  to  (ad)  the  towns.  2. 
The  brave  Gauls;  the  braver  Gauls;  the  bravest  Gauls. 
3.  Among  the  brave  Gauls;  among  the  braver  Gauls.  4. 
By  the  brave  man ;   by  a  braver  man ;   by  the  bravest  man. 

5.  Down  from  the  hill ;   out  of  the  forest ;  with  our  legions. 

6.  I  see  a  man  of  great  bravery.     7.  He  is  on  a  very  wide 
river.     8.  The  road  is  longer. 


LESSON   XV  59 

LESSON   XV 

PRESENT    INDICATIVE    ACTIVE    OF    THE    THIRD 
CONJUGATION 

118.  duco,  ducere,  lead 

duco,   I  lead,  am  leading,   do  lead.  ducimus,  we  lead,  etc. 

ducis,   you  lead,   etc.  ducitis,    you  lead,    etc. 

ducit,    he  (she,  it)  leads,  etc.  ducunt,    they  lead,    etc. 

The  short  e  before  the  final  re  of  the  second  principal  part  is  the 
sign  of  the  third  conjugation. 

The  present  base  of  this  verb  is  due. 

The  personal  endings  are  the  same  as  in  the  first  and  second 
conjugations,  but  the  vowel  before  them  is  different.  Here  it  is 
not  the  conjugation  vowel  as  it  appears  in  the  second  principal  part 
(short  e)^  but  short  i,  except  in  the  third  person  plural,  where  it  is  u. 

119.  VOCABULARY 

contends,  contendere,  (struggle);   fight;   hasten. 

divido,  dividere,  divide,  separate. 

duco,  ducere,  lead. 

gero,  gerere,  carry  on,  do. 

incolo,  incolere,  inhabit,  live  (in). 

mitto,  mittere,  send. 

EXERCISES 

120.  1.  Write  the  conjugation  of  the  phrase  appello  et 
moned  et  mittd.  2.  Write  the  ablative  singular  and  the 
genitive  plural  of  the  positive,  comparative,  and  super- 
lative of  fortis.  3.  Decline  the  Latin  for  a  ivide  river;  a 
wider  river. 

121.  1.  Ducitis;  incolo;  gerunt.  2.  Mittis;  dividit;  con- 
tendimus.     3.  Altior  mons;    montes  altissiml.     4.  Legiones 


60  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

fortes;  legiones  fortissimae.  5.  Homines  nobilissimos  in 
Galliam  dticit.  6.  Bellum  magnum  in  Gallia  gerimus.  7. 
Garumna  flumen  Gallos  ab  Aquitanis  dividit.  8.  Belgae 
partem  Galliae  incolunt.  9.  Lingua  nostra  Celtas  Gallos 
appellamus.     10.  Ex  provincia  consul  contendit. 

122.  1.  Long  walls ;  longer  walls ;  the  longest  walls.  2. 
He  leads ;  you  send ;  I  hasten.  3.  They  are  carrying-on  war 
with*  a  very  brave  enemy.  4.  A  wider  river  separates  the 
Gauls  from*  the  Germans.  5.  The  Sequanians  inhabit  a 
part  of  Gaul.  6.  "We  are  not  sending  men  out  of*  the 
province  into  Gaul. 


LESSON   XVI 

PRESENT   INDICATIVE   ACTIVE   OF   THE   FOURTH 

CONJUGATION,   AND    OF   THE   THIRD 

CONJUGATION  IN  -10 

123.  PRESENT  INDICATIVE  ACTIVE  OF  THE 

FOURTH  CONJUGATION 

audio,   audire,   hear 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

audio,  I  hear,  I  am  hearing,   I  do  hear  audimus,  we  hear,  etc. 

audis  auditis 

audit  audiunt 

The  present  base  of  this  verb  is  aud. 

The  i  in  the  present  infinitive  is  the  sign  of  the  fourth  conjugation. 


♦  See  §117,  Note. 


LESSON   XVI  61 

124.  PRESENT    INDICATIVE    ACTIVE    OF    THE 

THIRD    CONJUGATION    IN    -/CF 

A  few  verbs  are  partly  like  the  third  conjugation  and 
partly  like  the  fourth  in  their  inflection.  The  first  two 
principal  parts  indicate  this;  e.g.,  capio,  capere,  take.  The 
first  form  would  apparently  indicate  a  verb  of  the  fourth 
conjugation,  but  the  short  e  of  the  second  principal  part 
marks  it  as  belonging  to  the  third  conjugation.  Such  a  verb 
is  described  as  belonging  to  the  third  conjugation  in  -id. 

125.  Verbs  belonging  to  the  third  conjugation  in  -io 
have  fourth  conjugation  forms  where  the  fourth  conjuga- 
tion endings  have  two  successive  vowels,  but  elsewhere  they 
have  third  conjugation  forms. 

capio,*  1  take,  etc.  capimus 

capis  capitis 

capit  capiunt* 

126.  VOCABULARY 

audio,  audire,  hear. 
impedio,  impedire,  hinder. 
munio,  munire,  fortify. 
venio,  venire,  come. 

capio,  capere,  talce. 
facio,  facere,  maTce,  do. 

Give  English  words  derived  from  audio,  impedio,  and 
capio. 

EXERCISES 

127.  Conjugate  in  the  present  indicative  active  prohibeo 
et  supero;  teneo  et  facio;  veni5  et  laudo. 


*  Fourth  conjugation  endings. 


025  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

128.  1.  Audit ;  impedio  ;  facimus.  2.  Veniimt ;  capitis ; 
munis.  3.  Hostes  ad  oppidum  itfer  faciunt.  4.  Naves  nostras 
capit  legatus.  5.  Ad  fltimina  latiora  venlmus.  6.  Celtae 
tertiam  partem  Galliae  incolunt.  7,  Oppida  omnia  mtinT- 
mus.  8.  Viros  nobilissimos  impeditis.  9.  Murum  longiorem 
facit.     10.  Fltimen  Sequana  Gallos  a  Belgis  dividit. 

129.  1.  You  hear;  you  take.  2.  We  hinder;  we  make. 
3.  They  fortify;  they  take.  4.  "We  are  coming  down-from 
the  higher  mountains.  5.  You  are  fortifying  three  towns. 
6.  They  are  making  a  very  long  bridge. 


SECOND   REVIEW   LESSON 


130.  Memory  Work. 

1.  Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension  (§§77,  83,  90,  96). 

2.  Rules  for  the  Genitive  Plural  of  Third  Declension 
Nouns  (§97). 

3.  Rules  for  the  Gender  of  Third  Declension  Nouns  (§98). 

4.  Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension  (§§103,112). 

5.  The  Comparison  of  Adjectives  (§111). 

6.  Present  Indicative  Active  of  the  Third  and  Fourth 
Conjugations  (§§118,123-125). 

131.  Latin-English  Vocabulary. 

1.  Give  the  memoranda  (the  nominative  singular,  genitive 
singular,  gender,  nominative  plural,  genitive  plural,  and 
meaning)   of  the  following  nouns: 


SECOND   REVIEW   LESSON 


63 


Aquitanus 

homo 

mercator 

pars 

cxvitas 

hostis 

miles 

pons 

coUis 

iter 

milia 

Sequanus 

consul 

legio 

mons 

sol 

finis 

lex 

navis 

tempus 

flumen 

mare 

opus 

virtus 

Gallus 

2.  Give  the  entire  nominative  singular  and  the  meaning  of 
acer,  celer,  fortis,  nobilis,  omnis,  and  oriens ;  the  entire  nomi- 
native plural  and  the  meaning  of  tres.  Compare  altus, 
fortis,  latus,  longus,  and  nobilis. 

3.  Give  the  first  two  principal  parts  and  the  meaning  of  the 
following  verbs : 

audio,  capio,  contends,  divido,  duco,  facio,  ger5,  impedio,  incolo, 
mitto,  munio,  venio. 

4.  Give  the  meanings  of  the  following  prepositions,  and 
the  case  used  with  each : 

a  or  ab,  ad,  cum,  de,  e  or  ex,  in,  inter. 


132.     English-Latin  Vocabulary. 

Give  the  first  form  of  the  Latin  for  the  following  words: 


all 

fortify 

manliness 

ship 

Aquitanian 

from  (til 

iree  words) 

march 

soldier 

away  from 

Gaul  (a : 

person) 

mountain 

state 

between 

hasten 

noted 

struggle 

brave 

hear,  hear  of 

on 

sun 

bravery- 

hill 

out  from 

swift 

bridge 

hinder 

out  of 

take 

hy 

in 

part 

territory 

carry  on 

inhabit 

prominent 

three 

come 

into 

quick 

thousand 

concerning 

journey 

rising 

thousands 

consul 

keen 

river 

time 

64 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


divide 

law 

road 

to 

do 

lead 

sea 

toward 

down  from 

legion 

send 

trader 

end 

live  in 

separate 

with 

enemy 

make 

Sequanian 

work 

fight 

man  (not  vir) 

sharp 

LESSON  XVII 

THE  DEMONSTRATIVES  HIC  AND  ILLE 

133.  TEXT 

Gallia  est  omnis  divisa  in  partes  tres ;  unam^  partem 
incolunt  Belgae,  aliam^  AquTtani,  tertiam  Celtae.  Nostra 
lingua  Celtas  Gallos  appellamus.     (1-3,*  Ch.  1.) 

NOTE 

1.  unam,  aliam:  these  forms  are  the  feminine  singular  accusative 
of  the  adjectives  unus,  one,  and  alius,  another,  which  are  slightly 
irregular  in  their  declension   and  will  be   given  later. 


134. 


THE   DEMONSTRATIVES  HIC  AND  ILLE 

hie,  this,  plu.  these 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nam. 

hie 

haec 

hoc 

hi 

hae 

horum 

Gen. 

huius 

huius 

huius 

horum 

harum 

his 

Dat. 

huic 

huic 

huic 

his 

his 

haec 

Ace. 

hunc 

hanc 

hoc 

hos 

has 

haec 

Abl. 

hoc 

hac 

hoc 

his 

his 

his 

For 

the  pronunciation 

of  the  genitive 

and  dative  singular, 

see  §5. 

*  The  references  after  the  text  are  to  the  lines  as  numbered  in  the  con- 
tinuous text,  pages  317-333. 


LESSON    XVII 

65 

135. 

ille,  that, 

plu. 

those 

SINGUT,AR 

PLURAL 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom.    ille 

ilia 

illud 

illi 

illae 

ilia 

Gen.      illius 

iUius 

illius 

illorum 

illarum 

illorum 

Dat.      illi 

illi 

illi 

illis 

illis 

illis 

Ace.      ilium 

illam 

illud 

iUos 

illas 

ilia 

Abl.      illo 

ilia 

illo 

illis 

Ulis 

illis 

136.     These  demonstratives  have  two  uses. 

1.  When  used  like  an  adjective,  hie  means  this  in  the  sin- 
gular and  these  in  the  plural,  and  ille  means  that  in  the 
singular  and  those  in  the  plural. 

2.  When  used  like  a  pronoun  (or  substantive),  the  masculine 
of  hie  means  this  man,  the  feminine  this  womaiif  the  neuter 
this  thing  (plural  these  men,  these  women,  these  things)  ;  and 
the  masculine  of  ille  means  that  man,  the  feminine  that  woman, 
the  neuter  that  thing  (plural  those  men,  those  women,  those 
things). 

Both  these  pronouns  however  are  often  to  be  translated 
by  emphatic  personal  pronouns  of  the  third  person,  he,  she,  it, 
they,  and  their  other  cases. 


137. 


VOCABULARY 


hie,  haec,  hoc,  this,  plu.  these;  see  §§134, 136. 
ille,  iUa,  illud,  that,  plu.  those;  see  §§135, 136. 

institutum,  -i,  n.,  custom. 


diflferunt,  present  indicative  active,  third  plural,  of  the  irregular  verb 
differo,  differ,  he  diferent. 


66  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

EXERCISES 

138.  Decline  hie  vir;  illud  iter;  haec  magna  navis. 

139.  1.  Hic  consul;  ille  mercator.  2.  Hums  mstituti; 
illius  legis.  3.  Ilia  tempora;  haec  opera.  4.  Instituta  nostra 
laudant.  5.  Galli  institutis  differunt.  6.  Ad  illas  silvas 
venimus.  7.  Hoc  opus  est  longum.  8.  Hos  impeditis.  9. 
Haec  facimus.     10.  Illas  video. 

140.  1.  These  parts  (nom.)  ;  of  those  mountains.  2.  Those 
rivers  are  in*  the  mountains.  3.  I  am  giving  grain  to*  these 
(men).  4.  We  are  making  that  bridge.  5.  They  are  leading 
the  legions  into  that  state.     6.  He  is  taking  this  (thing). 

LESSON   XVIII 

THE   DEMONSTRATIVE  IS 

141.  TEXT 

Gallia  est  omnis  dIvTsa  in  partes  tres ;  Unam  partem  in- 
colunt  Belgae,  aliam  AquTtani,  tertiam  Celtae.  Nostra 
lingua  Celtas  Gallos  appellamus.  Hi  omnes  lingua,  insti- 
tutis, legibus  differunt.     (1-4,  Ch.  1.) 

142.  THE  DEMONSTRATIVE  IS 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut 

Nom.    is 

ea 

id 

ei  (ii) 

eae 

ea 

Gen.      eius 

eius 

eius 

eorum 

earum 

eorum 

Bat.      ei 

ei 

ei 

eis  (iis) 

eis  (iis) 

eis  (iis) 

Ace.      eum 

earn 

id 

e5s 

eas 

ea 

Abl.      eo 

ea 

eo 

eis  (iis) 

eia  (iis) 

eis  (iis) 

For  the  pi 

•onunciation  of  the  genitive  singular,  gee  §5,  a. 
Note. 

♦  See  §117, 

LESSON    XVIII  67 

143.  The  demonstrative  is  has  two  uses. 

1.  When  it  agrees  with  a  noun  in  gender,  number,  and 
case,  it  is  a  demonstrative  adjective  meaning  either  this  or 
that,  plural  these  or  those. 

2.  When  it  does  not  so  agree,  it  is  used  as  the  personal 
pronoun  of  the  third  person,  the  singular  meaning  he,  she, 
or  it,  according  to  the  gender  of  the  noun  to  which  it  refers, 
and  the  plural  theij. 

Thus,  ei  mercatores,  these  (or  those)  traders;  eos  mercatores  moneo, 
/  am  warning  these  (or  those)  traders.  But  ei  alone,  they,  eorum, 
earum,  their,  etc.;  eos  video,  I  see  them,  earn  video,  I  see  her,  id 
vide5,  I  see  it.  Notice  carefully  the  sentence,  est  mSns  proximus, 
atque  ad  eum  Gallos  duco,  there  is  a  mountain  very  near,  and  to  it 
/  am  leading  the  Gauls;  here  eum  is  masculine  in  Latin  because  it 
refers  to  mons,  while  its  English  equivalent  is  neuter  because  the 
word  mountain  is  neuter. 

144.  VOCABULARY 

imports,  importare,  import. 

is,  ea,  id,  he,  she,  it,  they,  etc.;  this,  that,  etc.;    see  §§142,  143. 

propterea,  adv.,  on  this  account. 

quod,  subordinate  conjunction,  because. 

saepe,  adv.,  often. 

EXERCISES 

145.  1.  Decline  hie  and  ille.  2.  Decline  id  altum  mare; 
is  latus  pons;  ea  nobilis  silva. 

146.  1.  Eum  video;  eam  video;  eos  audio.  2.  Eorum 
civitas;  eius  frumentum.  3.  Id  ad  Gallos  importamus. 
4.  Eos  mllites  in  Galliam  ducunt.  5.  Saepe  bellum  eum 
Gallls  gerimus,  propterea  quod  in  provinciam  veniunt. 
6.  Saepe  in  nostros  fines  haec  Galli  important.  7.  Insti- 
tuta  ilia  differunt.  8.  Belgae  fortissimi  sunt  Gallorum 
propterea  quod  cum  GermanTs  saepe  contendunt.  9.  Homi- 
nes ad  id  oppidum  mitto.     10.   Eius  gladium  habeo. 


68 


BELLUM    IIELVETICUM 


147.  1.  He  sees  it.  2.  They  hear  her.  3.  I  see  their 
father.  4.  AVe  often  come  to  him.  5.  We  are  fortifying 
that  part  of  the  town.  6.  A  bridge  separates  them.  7.  His 
legions  are  on  the  march. 


LESSON   XIX 


THE    RELATIVE    AND    INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS 

148.  TEXT 

Gallos  ab  AquItanTs  Garumna  flumen  dividit;    Gallos  a 
Belgis  Matrona  et  Sequana  dividit.^     (4-6,  Ch.  1.) 

NOTE 

1  The  two  rivers  formed  one  boundary,  and  the  verb  is  therefore 
singular. 


149. 


THE  ENGLISH  RELATIVE  PRONOUN 


M.,F. 

N.                M 

.,  F.,  N. 

'  Norn. 

who 

which 

that 

Singular  and  plural 

-    Poss. 

whose 

Obj. 

whom 

which 

that 

150. 

THE   LATIN   RELATIVE    PRONOUN 

qui,  who,  which 

SINGULAR 

PLUEAL 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Norn,     qui 

quae 

quod 

qui 

quae 

quae 

Gen,      cuius 

cuius 

cuius 

quorum 

quarum 

quorum 

Bat.       cui 

cui 

cui 

quibus 

quibus 

quibus 

Ace.       quern 

quam 

quod 

quos 

quas 

quae 

Ahl.       quo 

qua 

quo 

quibus 

quibus 

quibus 

For  the  pronunciation  of  the  genitive  and  dative  singular,  see  §5. 


LESSON   XIX  by 

151.  SYNTAX  OF  THE  RELATIVE  PRONOUN 

Model 

Germanos,  qui  trans  Rhenum  incolunt,  video,  I  see  the 

Germans,  who  live  across  the  Rhine. 

Note.  German5s  is  masculine  plural  accusative,  while  qui  is  mascu- 
line plural  nominative.  The  same  is  true  of  the  English  words  Germans 
and  who.     The  rule  then  is  evidently  the  same  in  the  two  languages. 

152.  RULE.  A  relative  pronoun  agrees  with  its  antecedent 
in  gender  and  number,  but  its  case  depends  on  its  construction 
in  its  own  clause, 

153.  Model  for  Parsing.  Qui  is  a  relative  pronoun, 
agreeing  with  its  antecedent  Germands  in  masculine  gender, 
plural  number;   it  is  nominative  case,  subject  of  incolunt. 


154. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

AU. 


DECLENSION    OF    THE    INTERROGATIVE 
PRONOUN  AND  ADJECTIVE 

quis  (qui),  who?  what? 


SINGULAR 

PLUEAL 

Mas. 

Fern.           Neut. 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

quis  (qui) 

(quae)    quid  (quod) 

qui 

(quae) 

quae 

cuius 

(cuius)    cuius 

r^uorum 

(quarum) 

quorum 

cui 

(cui)       cui 

quibus 

(quibus) 

quibus 

quern 

(quam)  quid  (quod) 

quos 

(quas) 

quae 

quo 

(qua)      quo 

quibus 

(quibus) 

quibus 

The  forms  in  parentheses  are  used  as  adjectives  only. 
Thus : 


But: 


Who  is  coming  ?     Quis  venit 
What  do  you  see?    Quid  vides 

What  man  is  coming?     Qui  vir  venit 
What  river  do  you  see?    Quod  flumen  vides 


70  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

155.  VOCABULARY 

qui,  quae,  quod,  relative  pronoun,  icTio,  which,  etc.;  see  §§149-152. 
quis,  quae,  quid,  interrogative  pronoun  and  adjective,  who,  what,  etc.; 
see   §154. 

ab-sum,  ab-esse,  he  from,  he  away;  conjugated  like  sum.  Tn  trans- 
lating an  adverb  with  this  word,  put  the  adverb  before  the  word 
fr^m  or  away;    e.  g.,  longe  abesse,  to  he  far  away. 

humanitas,  humanitatis,  f.,  refinement. 

longe,  adv.,  far;  superlative  longissime,  farthest,  very  far. 

What  is  the  English  noun  derived  from  hiimanitas,  and 
what  is  its  usual  meaning  ?  Can  you  see  its  connection  with 
homo,  from  which  humanitas  is  derived  ? 

EXERCISES 

156.  Decline  the  words  meaning  this  river;  a  hrave  man; 
that  soldier, 

157.  1.  Video  hominem  qui  venit.  2.  Homo  quem  video 
vcnit.  3.  Video  hominem  cuius  virtus  est  magna.  4.  Video 
hominem  cui  frumentum  dant.  5.  Video  homines  quorum 
frumentum  est  in  hoc  oppido.  6.  Quis  eum  videt?  7.  Quem 
audis?  8.  Belgae  longissime  absunt.  9.  Belgae  sunt  for- 
tissimi  omnium  Gallorum  propterea  quod  a  provincia  lon- 
gissime absunt.  10.  Humanitas  provinciae  est  magna. 
11.  Consul  est  vir  magnae  humanitatis.  12.  Quem  hominem 
audis  ? 

Note.  In  translating  English  into  Latin,  use  forms  of  is  to  mean 
this  or  {hat  only  when  a  relative  pronoun  is  to  follow.  In  other  places 
use  hie  or  ille. 

158.  1.  The  man  whom  you  see.  2.  The  men  whom  you 
see.     3.   The  town  which  you  see.    4.   The  towns  which  are 


LESSON   XX  71 

large.  5.  The  mountain  which  you  see.  6.  The  ships  which 
you  see.  7.  Those  (things)  which  we  import.  8.  The  part 
which  the  Celts  inhabit  is  far  away.  9.  Whom  do  you  see? 
10.  What  is  he  making  ?    11.  What  men  do  you  see  ? 


LESSON   XX 

IMPERFECT  AND  FUTURE  INDICATIVE  OF  SUM 

159.  TEXT 

Gallos  ab  AquTtanis  Garumna  flumen  dividit;  Gallos  a 
BelgTs  Matrona  et  Sequana  dividit.  Horum  omnium  for- 
tissimi  sunt  Belgae,  propterea  quod  ab  htimanitate  provin- 
ciae  longissime  absunt.     (4-7,  Ch.  1.) 


160.         PRESENT     (reviewed),     IMPERFECT,    AND 
FUTURE  INDICATIVE   OF  SUM 

sum,  esse,  he 
Present 

SINGULAB  PLURAL 

sum,  I  am  sumus,  we  are 

es,  you  are  estis,  you  are 

est,  he  is,  there  is  sunt,  they  are,  there  are 

Imperfect 

eram,  I  was  eramus,  ive  were 

eras,  you  were  eratis,  you  were 

erat,  he  was,  there  was  erant,  they  were,  there  were 

Future 

ero,  7  shall  he  erimus,  we  shall  he 

eris,  you  will  he  eritis,  you  will  he 

erit,  he  will  he,  there  will  he  erunt,  they  will  he,  there  will  he 


72  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

161.  Imperfect  is  the  name  given  to  the  Latin  tense  that 
is  equivalent  to  the  English  past  progressive  or  the  simple 
past.  In  the  verb  sum  the  imperfect  is  regularly  translated 
by  the  simple  past. 

Notice  that  the  future  has  the  same  endings  as  the  present  of  duco. 


162.  VOCABULARY 

animus,  -i,  m.,  mind,  energy,  courage. 

commeo,  commeare,  resort. 
eflfemino,  eflfeminare,  weaken. 
specto,  spectare,  face,  stretch. 

Give  English  words  derived  from  effemino  and  specto. 

EXERCISES 

163.  1.  Write  the  declension  of  the  vrords  meaning: 
What  soldier?  What  law?  What  work?  2.  Write  the  declen- 
sion of  the  masculine  of  is,  and  translate  each  form. 

164.  1.  Es;  eras;  eris.  2.  Erunt;  erant.  3.  Legio  quam 
vides  fortissima  erat.  4.  Mercatores  non  saepe  ad  Belgas 
commeant.  5.  Ad  reliquos  Gallos  mercatores  saepe  com- 
meant.  6.  Mercatores  important  ea  quae  animos  Gallorum 
effeminant.  7.  Provincia  ad  orientem  solem  spectat.  8. 
Quern  in  oppidum  ducitis? 

165.  1.  We  are;  we  were;  we  shall  be.  2.  The  man 
whom  you  see  was  our  friend.  3.  The  men  whom  you  see 
will  be  in  the  province.  4.  Those  (things)  which  we  import 
weaken  our  minds.  5.  I  see  towns  which  are  large.  6.  This 
was  the  nearest  road  into  Gaul. 


LESSON  XXI  73 


LESSON   XXI 

IMPERFECT  AND  FUTURE  INDICATIVE  ACTIVE  OF  THE 
FIRST  AND  SECOND  CONJUGATIONS 

166.  TEXT 

Horum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae,  propterea  quod 
ab  humanitate  provinciae  longissime  absunt,  et  non  saepe 
mercat5res  ad  eos  commeant  et  ea  quae  animos  effeminant 
important.     (6-9,  Ch.  1.) 


PRESENT   (reviewed),  IMPERFECT,  AND  FUTURE  INDICATIVE 
ACTIVE   OF   THE   FIRST   AND   SECOND   CONJUGATIONS 

167.  FIRST    CONJUGATION 

Present 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

1.  laudo,  I  praise,  I  am  praising,       laudamus,  we  praise 

I  do  praise 

2.  laudas,  you  praise  laudatis,  you  praise 

3.  laudat,  he  praises  laudant,  they  praise 

Imperfect 

1.  laudabam,  I  was  praising,  laudabamus,  tve  were  praising, 

I  praised  we  praised 

2.  laudabas,  you  were  praising,  laudabatis,  you  were  praising, 

you  praised  you  praised 

3.  laudabat,  he  was  praising,  laudabant,  ihcy  were  praising, 

he  praised  they  praised 

Future 

1.  landabo,  I  shall  praise  laiidabimus,  we  shall  praise 

2.  laudabis,  you  will  praise  laudabitis,  you  will  praise 

3.  laudabit,  he  will  praise  laudabunt,  they  will  praise 


74  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

168.  SECOND    CONJUGATION 

Present 

1.  moneo,  7  warn,  I  am  warning,         monemus,  wc  warn,  etc. 

2.  mones  [7  do -warn        monetis 

3.  monet  monent 

Imperfect 

1.  monebam,  7  was  warning,  monebamus,  we  were  warning, 

2.  monebas  [7  warned  [we  warned 

3.  monebat  monebant 

Future 

1.  monebS,  7  shall  warn  monebimus,  we  shall  warn 

2.  monebis  monebitis 

3.  monebit  monebunt 

169.  After  the  conjugation  vowel  in  the  imperfect  and 
future  comes  the  tense  sign,  which  in  the  imperfect  is  ba, 
in  the  future  bi.  These  are  followed  by  the  usual  personal 
endings. 

The  endings  of  the  future  are  the  same  as  in  the  present  of  duco. 
See  §118.  ' 

DRILL    EXERCISES 

170.  Decline  the  Latin  for  a  keen  mind;  three  traders. 

171.  Model  for  verb  analysis:  (1)  laudabam,  (2)  laudabis. 
1.  laud  is  the  present  base,  a  is  the  conjugation  vowel,  ba  is  the  sign 
of  the  imperfect  tense,  and  m  is  the  ending  of  the  first  person 
singular  active.  2.  laud  is  the  present  base,  a  is  the  conjugation 
vowel,  bi  is  the  sign  of  the  future  tense,  and  s  is  the  ending  of  the 
second  person  singular  active. 

172.  Analyze  the  following  forms,  as  above,  and  translate. 
1.  Superat;    superabat;    superabit.     2.  Tenebit;    tenebat. 


LESSON   XXI  75 

3.  Appellabam;  appellabunt.     4.  Videbit;  habebis.     5.  Pro- 
hibemus;  occupabitis. 

173.  Give  the  tense,  voice,  person,  and  number  of  the 
following  forms,  and  translate: 

1.  We  shall  conquer.  2.  We  shall  have.  3.  You  were 
seizing  the  town.  4.  You  were  holding  the  tow^n.  5.  We 
are  preparing.     6.  They  see. 


174.  VOCABULARY 

continenter,  adv.,  continually. 

Ehenus,  -i,  m.,  the  Bhine. 
Rhodanus,  -i,  m.,  tJie  Bhone. 

trans,  preposition  with  accusative,  across. 

Give  English  words  in  which  trans-  is  used  as  a  prefix, 
and  tell  their  meaning. 

TRANSLATION  EXERCISES 

175.  1.  Trans  Rhenum  Germanos  videbamus.  2.  Omnia 
oppida  trans  Rhodanum  habebitis.  3.  Belgae  sunt  proximi 
Germanis  qui  trans  Rhenum  incolunt.  4.  Belgae  sunt 
proximi  Germanis  quibuscum"*  bellum  saepe  gerunt.  5. 
Belgae  continenter  cum  Germanis  bellum  gerunt. 

176.  1.  This  is  the  Rhine;  that  is  the  Rhone.  2.  We 
were  far  rway  from  the  sea.  3.  I  shall  see  the  rivers  which 
you  are  praising.  4.  There  were  very  brave  men  in  that 
legion.     5.  Our  soldiers  were  on  a  longer  march. 


*  In  this  phrase  cum  is  enclitic,  1.  e.,  it  is  appended  to  the  word  which  it 
governs.     Translate  it  before  qtUbus.     See  §12. 


76 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


LESSON   XXII 

IMPERFECT  AND  FUTURE  INDICATIVE  ACTIVE  OF  THE 
THIRD  AND  FOURTH  CONJUGATIONS 


177. 


TEXT 


Horum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae,  propterea  quod 
ab  humanitate  provinciae  longissime  absunt,  et  non  saepe 
mercatores  ad  eos  commeant  et  ea  qua'e  animos  effeminant 
important;  et  proximi  sunt  Germanis,  qui  trans  Khenum 
ineolunt,  quibuseum  continenter  bellum  gerunt.  (6-11, 
Ch.  1.) 


PRESENT    (reviewed),  IMPERFECT,  AND  FUTURE  INDICATIVE 
ACTIVE  OF  THE  THIRD  AND  FOURTH  CONJUGATIONS 

178. 


THIRD    CONJUGATION 

Present 

SINGULAE 

PLURAL 

duco,   I  lead,  etc. 

ducimus 

ducis 

ducitis 

ducit 

ducunt 

Imperfect 

ducebam,    I  was  leading,    I  led 

ducebamus 

ducebas 

ducebatis 

ducebat 

ducebant 

Future 

ducam,   I  shall  lead 

due  emus 

duces 

ducetis 

ducet 

ducent 

179. 


LESSON    XXII 
FOUETH    CONJUGATION 


77 


Present 


audio,    I  hear,  etc. 

audis 

audit 


audimus 

auditis 

audiunt 


Imperfect 

audie"bam,   1  was  hearing,  I  heard  audiebamus 

audiebas  audiebatis 

audiebat  audiebant 


Future 


180. 


audiam,    I  shall  hear 

audiemus 

audies 

audietis 

audiet 

audient 

THIRD    CONJUGATION    IN 

-i6 

Present 

capio,    I  take,^  etc. 

capimus 

capis 

capitis 

capit 

capiunt 

Imperfect 

capiebam,  I  was  talcing,  I  tooTc 

capiebamus 

capiebas 

eapiebatis 

capiebat 

capiebant 

Future 


capiam,    7  shall  take 

capies 

capiet 


capiemus 

capietis 

capient 


78  BELLUM    IIELVETICUM 

DRILL  EXERCISES 

181.  Give  a  synopsis*  of  video  et  supero  in  the  third 
person  plural.  2.  Give  a  synopsis  of  gero  et  faci5  in  the 
third  person  singular.  3.  Conjugate  in  the  future  occupo 
et  habeo.     4.  Conjugate  in  the  imperfect  facid  et  gero. 

182.  Analyze  the  following  forms,  as  in  §170,  and 
translate : 

1.  Ducit;  ducebat;  ducet.  2.  Munies;  muniebas.  3. 
Capient ;  capiunt.  4.  Tenet ;  mittet.  5.  Geretis ;  incole- 
batis;  facitis. 

183.  Give  the  tense,  voice,  person,  and  number  of  the 
following  forms,  and  translate: 

1.  I  am  fortifying;  I  was  fortifying;  I  shall  fortify. 
2.  You  (sing.)  are  sending;  you  (sing.)  were  sending;  you 
(sing.)  will  send.  3.  He  sees;  he  hears.  4.  We  shall  hear; 
we  shall  hold.  5.  You  (plu.)  will  take;  we  inhabited; 
they  w^ere  importing. 

184.  VOCABULARY 

ol),  preposition  with  ace,  on  account  of. 

prae-cedo,  prae-cedere,  literally,  go  before,  i.  e.,  surpass, 

quoque,  'adverb,  also. 

What  is  the  English  verb  derived  from  praecedo? 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

185.  1.  Helvetii  quoque  sunt  fortes.  2.  Ob  earn  causam 
Helvetii  quoque  reliquos  Gallos  virtute  praecedunt.  3. 
Homines  quos  vides  capiemus.  4.  Ob  eas  causas  homines 
continenter  ex  proximTs  civitatibus  veniebant.  5.  Montes 
erant  altiores  et  flumina  latissima. 


*  A  synopsis  of  a  verb  consists  of  the    forms    of    the    same   person    and 
number  from  each  tense. 


LESSON   XXIII  79 

186.  1.  The  lieutenant  was  coming  to  that  river.  2.  We 
shall  make  a  march  to  the  river  Rhine  also.  3.  They  will 
lead  to  the  Rhone  the  men  that  they  see.  4.  You  will  see 
the  men  that  they  are  leading.  5.  (There)  will  be  daily 
battles  in  the  mountains. 


LESSON  xxni 

PRESENT   INDICATIVE    PASSIVE    OF    THE    FIRST    AND 
SECOND  CONJUGATIONS 

187.  TEXT 

Ob  earn  causam  Helvetii  quoque  reliquos  Gallos  virtute 
praecedunt.     (11,  12,  Ch.  1.) 

PRESENT   INDICATIVE   PASSIVE    OF    THE   FIRST   AND 
SECOND   CONJUGATIONS 

188.  FIRST    CONJUGATION 

laudor,    I  am  called,   am  'being  called         laudamur,   ice  are  called,  etc. 
laudaris  laudamini 

laudatur  laudantur 


189. 


SECOND    CONJUGATION 


moneor,  I  am  warned,  am  being  teamed  monemur,  we  are  warnedy  etc. 

moneris  monemini 

monetur  monentur 

190.      The  personal  endings  of  the  passive  voice  are  as  follows: 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

First  person        *or,  *r  mur 

Second  person      ris  mini 

Third  person        tur  *ntiir 


*A  vowel  before  these  endings  is  always  short. 


80  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

DRILL    EXERCISES 

191.  1.  Decline  the  Latin  for  all  the  supply.  2.  Make  is 
agree  with  the  following  nouns,  and  then  decline  the 
expressions:  tempus;  virtus;  legatus. 

192.  Analyze  the  following  verb  forms,  and  translate. 
1.  Laudo;    laudor.     2.  Vides;    videris.     3.  Miles   laudat; 

miles   laudatur.     4.  Hostes   prohibemus;    hostes   prohiben- 
tur.     5.  Hostes  capiemus;  hostes  audiebamus. 

193.  Give  the  tense,  voice,  person,  and  number  of  the 
following  forms,  and  translate : 

1.  I  see;  I  am  seen.  2.  You  are  conquering;  you  are 
being  conquered.  3.  They  are  praising  the  troops;  the 
troops  are  being  praised.  4.  You  are  called  brave.  5.  We 
shall  see  and  hear. 

194.  VOCABULARY 

atque,  coordinate  conjunction,  and;    emphasizing  what  follows. 

copia,  -ae,  f.,  plenty,  supply ;    plural,  forces,  troops. 

fere,  adv.,  almost. 

undique,  adv.,  from  all  sides,  on  all  sides. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

195.  1,  Celtae  lingua  nostra  Galll  appellantur.  2.  Hel- 
vetii  fere  cotidianis  proeliTs  contendunt.  3.  Copiae  hostium 
undique  videntur.  4.  Portae  nostrae  atque  murl  occupan- 
tur.  5.  AnimI  Gallorum  effeminantur.  6.  Laudamur  prop- 
terea  quod  Helvetios  praecedimus. 

196.  1.  The  towns  which  you  see  are  held  by  the  enemy 
(plu.).     2.  The  Belgians  are  called  the  bravest  of  the  Gauls. 


LESSON   XXIV  81 

3.  On  all  sides  were  those  high  mountains.  4.  We  shall 
send  our  troops  into  Gaul.  5.  You  were  carrying  on  war  in 
almost  all  the  towns. 


LESSON   XXIV 

IMPERFECT  AND  FUTURE  INDICATIVE  PASSIVE  OF  THE 
FIRST  AND  SECOND  CONJUGATIONS 

197.  TEXT 

Ob  eam  causam  Helvetii  quoque  reliquos  Gallos  virtute 
praecedunt,  quod  fere  cotldianis  proelils  cum  Germanis 
contendunt.     (11-13,  Ch.  1.) 


PRESENT   (reviewed),  IMPERFECT,  AND  FUTURE  INDICATIVE 
PASSIVE  OF  THE  FIRST  AND  SECOND  CONJUGATIONS 

198.  FIRST    CONJUGATION 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

Present 

laudor,    I  am  (being)  called  laudamur 

laudaris  or  -re  laudamini 

laudatur  laudantur 

Imperfect 

laudabar,   I  was  (being)  called  laudabamur 

laudabaris  or  -re  laudabamini 

laudabatur  laudabantur 

Future 

laudabor,   I  shall  he  called  laudabimur 

laudaberis  or  -re  laudabimini 

laudabitur  laudabuntur 


82  BELLIJM    IIELVETICUM 

199.  SECOND    CONJUGATION 

Present 

moneor,    /  am  (heing)  warned  monemur 

moneris  or  -re  monemini 

monetur  monentur 

Imperfect 

monebar,    I  was  {heing)  warned  monebamur 

monebaris  or  -re  monebamini 

monebatur  monebantur 

Future 

monebor,   I  shall  he  warned  monebimur 

moneberis  or  -re  monebimini 

monebitur  monebuntur 

200.  In  these  tenses  a  form  of  the  passive  differs  from 
the  corresponding  form  of  the  active  only  in  the  personal 
endings;  except  that  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the 
future,  the  vowel  before  the  personal  ending  is  i  in  the 
active  and  e  in  the  passive,  e.  g., 

Active      laudab-i-s  moneb-i-s 

Passive     laudab-e-ris  moneb-e-ris 

201.  Therefore  the  follovring  statements  are  true  for  the 
passive  as  for  the  active: 

ba  is  the  sign  of  the  imperfect  tense,  and  is  always  pre- 
ceded by  a  long  vowel ; 

bi  is  the  sign  of  the  future  tense  in  the  first  and  second 
conjugations,  and  is  always  preceded  by  a  long  vowel. 

DRILL  EXERCISES 

202.  1.  Give  a  synopsis  in  the  third  person  plural  passive 

of  prohibeo  et  comparo.    2,  Conjugate  in  the  future  passive 
appello  et  teneo. 


LESSON   XXIV  83 

203.  1.  Appellor;  appellabar;  appellabor.  2.  Teneba- 
tur;  tenebitur.  3.  Prohibeberis ;  prohibebamim.  4.  Op- 
pida  occupabantur ;  oppida  occupabuntur.  5.  Mtinient; 
faciebatis. 


204.  1.  I  am  held;  you  (sing.)  were  held;  he  will  be 
held.  2.  We  shall  be  conquered;  you  (plu.)  were  being 
conquered;  they  are  being  conquered.  3.  You  (sing.)  will 
see;  you  (sing.)  will  be  seen.  4.  They  are  imported;  they 
were  imported ;  they  will  be  imported.  5.  I  shall  take ;  he 
will  take. 


205.  VOCABULARY 

aut,  coordinate  conjunction,  or ;   aut  .  .  .  aut,  either  .  .  .  or. 

cum,  subordinate  conjunction,  when,  since,  although.     If  it  introduces 

a  verb  in  the  indicative,  it  means  when. 
suus,  -a,  -um,  possessive  adjective,  his   (own),  her   (own),  its   (own), 

their  {own),  according  to  the  subject  of  its  clause  or  sentence. 


TRANSLATION  EXERCISES 

206.     1.  Helvetil   aut   Germanos   prohibent   aut   cum   els 
contendunt.     2.  Helvetil  Germanos  finibus  suls  prohibent. 

3.  Helvetil   cum  Germanis  contendunt  cum  eos  prohibent. 

4.  Helvetil   in   finibus   Germanorum   saepe   bellum   gerunt. 

5.  Fere  cotidianis  proeliis  cum  hostibus  contendebant. 


207.  1.  He  sees  his  (own)  forces.  2.  They  see  their 
(own)  friend.  3.  Fields  will  be  given  to  the  men.  4.  We 
shall  send  the  grain  which  is  held  in  the  town.  5.  You 
have  plenty  of  grain. 


84 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


LESSON   XXY 

PRESENT,    IMPERFECT,    AND    FUTURE    INDICATIVE 

PASSIVE  OF  THE  THIRD  AND  FOURTH 

CONJUGATIONS 


208. 


TEXT 


Ob  earn  causam  Helvetii  quoque  reliquos  Gallos  virtiite 
praecedunt,  quod  fere  cotidianis  proelils  cum  GermanTs 
contendunt,  cum  aut  suTs  finibus  eos  prohibent,  aut  in 
Germanorum  finibus  bellum  gerunt.     (11-14,  Ch.  1.) 


PRESENT,   IMPERFECT,   AND   FUTURE   INDICATIVE  PASSIVE 
OF    THE    THIRD    AND    FOURTH    CONJUGATIONS 


209. 


THIRD   CONJUGATION 


SINGULAR 


Present 


ducor,   1  am  {teing)  led 
duceris  or  -re 
ducitur 


PLURAL 


ducimur 
ducimini 
ducuntur 


Imperfect 


ducebar,    I  was  (being)   led 
duceljaris  or  -re 
dueebatur 


ducebamur 
dueebamini 
ducebantur 


Future 


ducar,   7  shall  he  led 
duceris  or  -re 
ducetur 


ducemur 
ducemini 
ducentur 


1.  imperator  2.   Ie(jatu8  3.  centurio 

Jf.  Gallic  icarrior  5.  Gallic  standard  hearer  6.  Gallic  chief 

Roman  Officers  and  Gauls 


210. 


T.-RSSON   XXV 

FOURTH    CONJUGATION 

Present 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

audior,    I  am  {being)   heard 

audimur 

audiris  or  -re 

audimini 

auditur 

audiuntur 

Imperfect 

audiebar,    I  was   (heing)   heard 

audiebamur 

audiebaris  or  -re 

audiebamini 

audiebatur 

audiebantur 

Future 

audiar,    I  shall  he  heard 

audiemur 

audieris  or  -re 

audiemini 

audietur 

audientur 

85 


211. 


THIRD    CONJUGATION    IN    -16 

Present 


SINGULAR 

capior,    I  am  {being)  taTcen 

caperis  or  -re 

capitur 

Imperfect 
capiebar,    I  was  (being)  taTcen 
capiebaris  or  -re 
capiebatur 


Future 


capiar,    I  shall  be  taken 
capieris  or  -re 
caDietur 


PLURAL 

capimur 
capimini 
capiuntur 

capiebamur 
capiebamini 
capiebantur 

capiemur 
capiemini 
capientur 


212.  In  these  tenses  a  form  of  the  passive  differs  from 
the  corresponding  form  of  the  active  only  in  the  personal 
endings;  except  that  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the 
third  conjugation  present,  the  vowel  before  the  personal 
ending  is  i  in  the  active  and  e  in  the  passive,  e.  g., 


86  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

Active  duc-i-s  cap-i-s 

Passive  duc-e-ris         cap-e-ris 

213.  Therefore  the  following  statements  are  true  for  the 
passive  as  for  the  active : 

ba  is  the  sign  of  the  imperfect  tense  in  all  conjugations, 
and  is  always  preceded  by  a  long  vowel ; 

a  is  the  sign  of  the  future  in  the  first  person  singular, 
and  e  elsewhere,  in  the  third  and  fourth  conjugations. 

DRILL  EXEECISES 

214.  1.  Give  a  synopsis  in  the  second  person  plural 
passive  of  mitto  et  impedio.  2.  Conjugate  in  the  present 
passive  capi5  et  munio. 

215.  1.  Capitur;  duceris;  audietur.  2.  Incolebatur; 
impedimus;  mittentur.  3.  Oppidum  munietur;  bella  gere- 
bantur.     4.  Duceris;  impedimur.     5.  Facietis;   veniebamus. 

216.  1.  I  Lm  led;  you  (sing.)  were  being  led;  he  will  be 
led.  2.  We  are  heard ;  we  were  heard ;  we  shall  be  heard. 
3.  They  are  coming;  they  are  hindered.  4.  You  (sing.) 
are  holding;  you  (sing.)  will  be  held.  5.  You  (sing.)  are 
being  sent;  you  (sing.)  will  be  sent.  6.  They  are  led; 
they  will  be  given. 

217.  VOCABULARY 

coniuratio,  coniurationis,  f.,  conspiracy. 
imperium,  -i,  n.,  rule,  control. 

nobilitas,  nobilitatis,  f.   [nobilis,  noted,  nohle],  nobility,  often  in  the 
sense  of  a  collective  noun,  1.  e.,  the  nobles. 

ob-tineo,   ob-tinere,   hold   (stronger  than  teneo).     For  pronunciation, 
see  §6. 

Give  an  English  adjective  derived  from  imperium. 


THIRD   REVIEW   LESSON  87 

TRANSLATION  EXERCISES 

218.  1.  Una  pars  a  Gallls  obtinetur.  2.  Imperium  viri 
fortes  obtinent.  3.  Nobilitas  Helvetiorum  coniurationem 
faciebat.  4.  Hostes  fltimine  impediebantur.  5.  Gallia  initium 
capit  a  flumine  Rhodano. 

219.  1.  A  long  time  will  be  given  to  the  men.  2.  We 
are  making  a  conspiracy.  3.  We  were  fighting  with  the 
legions.  4.  The  control  of  Gaul  will  be  held  by  the  nobility 
of  the  Helvetians.  5.  The  legions  which  you  see  are  coming 
from  Gaul. 


THIRD    REVIEW   LESSON 

.     Memory  Work. 

1.  Declension,  meanings,  and  uses  of  hie,  ille,  is,  and  qui 
(§§134-136,  142,  143,  150-152). 

2.  Present,  imperfect,  and  future  indicative,  active  and 
pa.  .live  (App.  66-71). 

121.     Latin-English  Vocabulary. 

1.  Give  the  memoranda  of  the  following  nouns: 

animus,     coniuratio,     imperium,     institutum,     nobilitas,     Rhenus, 
Rhodanus. 

2.  Give  the  entire  nominative  singular  and  four  meanings 
of  suus. 

3.  Give  the  first  two  principal  parts  and  the  meaning  of 
the  following  verbs: 

absum,  importo,  obtineo,  praecedo,  specto. 


88 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


4.  Give  the  meaning  of  ob  and  trans,  and  the  case  used 
with  each. 

5.  Give  the  meaning  of  each  of  the  following  words,  and 
tell  what  part  of  speech  it  is : 

atque,  aut,  continenter,  cum  (conjunction),  fere,  longe,  longissimg, 
propterea,  quod,  quoque,  saepe,  undique. 

222.     English-Latin  Vocabulary. 

Give  the  first  form  of  the  Latin  for  the  following  words: 


across 

far 

it 

surpass 

almost 

very  far 

its 

that 

also 

farthest 

its  (own) 

their 

and    (two  words) 

from  all  sides 

mind 

their    (own) 

be  away 

he 

nobility 

them 

be  from 

her  (poss.) 

often 

these 

because 

her  (obj.) 

on  all  sides 

they 

bring  in 

her  (own) 

on   this  account 

this 

conspiracy 

him 

or 

those 

continually 

his 

Rhine 

when 

control 

his  (own) 

Rhone 

who 

custom 

hold  (two  words) 

rule 

whom 

either 

import 

she 

whose 

LESSON   XXVI 


PERFECT,  PLUPERFECT,  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT 
INDICATIVE  OF  SUM 


223. 


TEXT 


Horum   omnium  una  pars,  quam  Galli  obtinent,  initium 
capit  a  flumine  Rhodano.     (14-16,  Ch.  1.) 


LESSON    XXVI  89 

PERFECT,    PLUPERFECT,    AND    FUTURE 
PERFECT   INDICATIVE   OF   SUM 


sum,  esse,  /wi, 

he 

Perfect 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

fu%  1  was,  I  have  been 

fuimus 

fuistl 

fuistis 

fait 

fueiunt,  fuere 

Pluperfect 

fuernm,  I  had  been 

/"weramus 

/weras 

/"weratis 

/werat 

/"Mcrant 

Future  Perfect 

fueio,   I  shall  have  been 

fuevimus 

fueiis 

/"weritis 

/werit 

fueTint 

125.     The  endings  of  the  perfect  indicative  active  are: 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

First  person         -i  -imus 

Second  person      -isti  -istis 

Third  person        -it  -erunt,  -ere 

226.     The  formation  of  the  tenses  may  be  described  as 
follows: 

perfect  =  fu  (perfect  base)  +  a  special  set  of  personal  endings, 
pluperfect  =  fu  (perfect  base)  -f-  era  (=  had,  sign  of  past  perfect) 

+  the  regular  personal  endings, 
iuture  perfect  = /w  (perfect  base)  -|-  eri  (=  shall  or  will  have,  sign  of 
future  perfect)  +  the  regular  personal  endings. 

Notice  that  the  i  is  retained  in  the  third  person  plural  of  the  future 
perfect,  fuerint. 

i^otice  the  two  translations  of  the  perfect,  I  was  and  I  have  been. 


90  BELLUM    IJELVP^TICUM 

DRILL  EXERCISES 

227.  1.  Give  a  synopsis  of  sum  through  the  indicative 
in  the  first  singular,  third  singular,  and  third  plural.  2. 
Decline  the  Latin  for  a  great  conspiracy, 

228.  1.  Es;  eratis;  fuimus.  2.  Fueritis;  sunt;  eramus. 
3.  FuistI;   fueratis;    eritis.     4.  Fuerint;    fuerant;   fuerunt. 

5.  Tenetur;  tenebantur.     6.  Mittemus;  mittemur. 

229.  1.  I  have  been;  you  had  been;  he  v^ill  have  been. 
2.  You  were ;  you  will  be ;  you  will  have  been.  3.  We 
have  been;  you  (plu.)  had  been.  4.  You  will  be  seen; 
you  will  be  sent.     5.  I  shall  make;   you  (sing.)  will  make. 

6.  It  was  held;  they  will  be  held. 

230.  VOCABULARY 

contineo,  continere,  hound. 

etiam,  adverb,  also. 

extremus,  -a,  -um,  superlative,  most  distant,  farthest. 

Oceanus,  -i,  m.,  the  Ocean. 

Give  the  English  verbs  from  obtineo  (§217)  and  contineo. 
What  is  our  word  from  extremus? 


TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

231.  1.  Una  pars  Galliae  fluminibus  continetur.  2.  Gal- 
lia ad  Oceanum  etiam  spectabat.  3.  Extrema  pars  Galliae 
a  Belgis  incolebatur.  4.  Extremi  Galli  reliquos  virtute 
praecedebant.  5.  Ea  quae  a  mercat5ribus  importantur 
animos  effeminant. 


LESSON    XXYll  '  91 

232.  1.  All  parts  of  Gaul  were  bounded  (by)  rr^ers. 
2.  The  Belgians  were  the  most  distant.  3.  The  Helvetians 
also  are  brave.  4.  The  rule  of  Gaul  will  be  held  by  the 
Helvetians.     5.  You  were  making  a  conspiracy. 


LESSON   XXVII 

PRINCIPAL  PARTS  AND  THEIR  USES 
PERFECT    ACTIVE    SYSTEM 

233.  TEXT 

Horum  omnium  una  pars,  quam  Galli  obtinent,  initium  capit 
a  flumine  Rhodano ;  continetur  Garumna  flumine,  Oceano, 
flnibus  Belgarum.     (14-17,  Ch.  1.) 

PRINCIPAL  PARTS 

234.  The  principal  parts  of  a  Latin  verb  are  as  follows: 

pres.  indie,  act.  pres.  infin.  act.  perf.  indie,  act.  supine 

first  singular  first  singular 

laudo  laudare  laiiddvi         laudatuiii 

235.  The  first  of  the  principal  parts  shows  how  the 
conjugation  begins.  It  is  always  convenient  to  know  the 
first  form  (this  is  the  form  by  which  the  verb  is  desig- 
nated), and  it  is  necessary  in  the  third  conjugation,  to 
distinguish  the  ordinary  verb  of  this  conjugation  (like 
dtico)  from  the  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  in  -io  (like 
capio). 


92  ■  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

236.  The  second  of  the  principal  parts  gives  the  present 
base  (see  §240),  and  tells  to  what  conjugation  the  verb 
belongs  by  the  characteristic  vowel  that  precedes  the  final 
-re,  e.  g., 

12  3  4  3 

laud  a-re         mon-e-re         dtic-e-re         aud-i-re         cap-e-re 

237.  The  third  of  the  principal  parts  gives  the  perfect 
base  (see  §241). 

238.  The  fourth  of  the  principal  parts  gives  the  supine 
base  (see  §242). 

BASES 

239.  Three  bases  are  used  in  the  conjugation  of  a  verb  — 
the  present,  the  perfect,  and  the  supine. 

240.  In  any  regular  verb  the  present  base  is  found  by 
dropping  the  last  three  letters  from  the  present  infinitive 
active. 

241.  In  any  verb  the  perfect  base  is  found  by  dropping 
the  last  letter  from  the  perfect  indicative  active. 

242.  In  any  verb  the  supine  base  is  found  by  dropping 
the  last  two  letters  from  the  supine. 

PERFECT,  PLUPERFECT,  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT  INDICATIVE 
ACTIVE  OF  ALL  VERBS 

243.  To  conjugate  the  perfect,  pluperfect,  and  future 
perfect  indicative  active  of  any  verb,  obtain  the  perfect 
base  from  the  principal  parts  as  directed  above,  and  add 
the  same  endings  as  for  these  tenses  of  sum.    See  §224. 

These  tenses  can  not  be  conjugated  until  the  principal 
parts  are  known. 


LESSON   XXVII' 


93 


244.     Learn  thoroughly  the  principal  parts  of  the  follow- 
ing verbs,  and,  their  meanings. 

laudo,  laudare,  lauddvi,  laudatuhi,  prai&e 
do,  dare,  dedi,  DATum,  give 

moneo,  monere,  monul,  MONiTum,  warn 
video,  videre,  vidi,  visum,  see 

duco,  ducere,  dilxi,  DucTum,  lead 
gero,  gerere,  gcssi,  GESTum,  carry  on 

audio,  audire,  audlvi,  AUDiTum,  hear 
venio,  venire,  veni,  VENTum,  come 

capio,  capere,  cepl,  CAPTum,  talce 
facio,  facere,  fen.,  rACTum,  maTce,  do 


245.  Perfect 

/  praised,  I  have  praised,  etc. 
-i,  -isti,  -it;        -imus,  -istis,  -erunt  or  -ere 


lauddv 

monu 

dux 

audlv 

cep 

laudav   "" 

monu 

dux 

audiv 

cep 

lauddv 

monu 

dux 

audiv 

cep 


Pluperfect 

I  had  praised,  etc. 

>-eram,  -eras,  -erat;      -eramus,  -eratis,  -erant 

Future  Perfect 

7  shall  have  praised,  etc. 

^-ero,  -eris,  -erit;      -erimus,  -eritis,  erint 


For  the  full  conjugation  of  these  tenses  see  App.  67-71. 


94  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

246.      -^^  ^^6   same  way  give  the  conjugation   of  these  tenses  of 
do,  video,  gero,  venio,  facio. 


247.  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES  FROM  LATIN  VERBS 

It  will  be  a  great  help  in  learning  the  principal  parts  of 
Latin  verbs  to  think  of  English  words  derived  from  the 
present  and  supine  bases.  Thus  from  the  present  bases 
of  the  verbs  in  §244  are  derived  laud,  e-vident,  pro-duce, 
helli-gerent,  audience,  con-venient ;  from  the  supine  bases, 
laudatory,  date,  monitor,  vision,  pro-duction,  gesture,  auditor, 
auditory,  auditorium,  con-vention,  capture,  captive,  fact,  fac- 
tion, factory,  etc. 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

248.  Give  a  synopsis  throughout  the  indicative  active 
in  the  first  singular,  third  singular,  and  third  plural,  of 
do,  video,  gero,  venio,  faci5. 

249.  1.  Laudavit ;  monueram ;  duxerint.  2.  Audiet ;  audi- 
verit.  •  3.  Capit ;  cepit.  4.  Dabunt ;  dederunt.  5.  Vldisti ; 
videramus.     6.  Gerentur;  mittebamini.     7.  Venit;  venit. 

250.  1.  I  gave  (perf.)  ;  he  has  carried  on;  they  made 
(perf.).  2,  You  (sing.)  had  warned;  you  (plu.)  will  have 
warned.  3.  They  are  coming;  they  have  come.  4.  We  are 
carrying  on;  we  carried  on  (perf.).  5.  I  had  been;  I  had 
made.     6.  They  were  giving;  they  were  being  given. 

251.  VOCABULARY 

at-tingo,  at-tingere,  at-tigi,  at-tactum,  touch  upon,  "border  on. 
per-tineo,  per-tinere,  per-tinui,  per-tentum,  extend. 
vergo,  vergere, , ,  literally,  slope;   lie,  he  situated. 


LESSON    XXVIIl  95 

septentrio,  septentrionis,  m.;  generally  plural,  septentriones,  septen- 
trionum,  literally,  the  seven  plow-oxen,  i  e.,  the  seven  stars  that  form 
the  constellation  of  the  Great  Bear;  hence  regularly  translated 
the  north. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

252.  1.  Una  pars  Galliae  flumen  Rhenum  attingit.  2. 
Haec  pars  ad  septentriones  vergit.  3.  Belgae  ad  septen- 
triones pertinent.  4.  GallT  tinam  partem  obtinent  quae  ini- 
tium  capit  a  flumine  Rhodano.  5.  IJna  pars,  quae  a  Gallis 
obtinetur,  Garumna  flumine,  Oceano,  finibus  Belgarum 
continetur. 

253.  1.  These  towns  will  be  taken.  2.  We  saw  (perf.) 
the  Gauls  across  the  Rhine.  3.  The  Germans  had  led  them 
to  that  river.  4.  The  enemy  will  have  taken  the  hill.  5. 
"Who  gave  (perf.)  them  the  control  of  Gaul? 


LESSON   XXVIIl 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS— Continued 

254.  TEXT 

Horum  omnium  una  pars,  quam  Galli  obtinent,  initium 
capit  a  flumine  Rhodand ;  continetur  Garumna  flumine, 
Oceano,  finibus  Belgarum ;  attingit  etiam  flumen  Rhenum ; 
vergit  ad  septentriones.     (14-18,  Ch.  1.) 

255.  PRINCIPAL   PARTS 

Learn  the  principal  parts  and  meanings  of  the  following 
verbs ;  give  the  bases  of  each  one,  and  tell  to  what  conjuga- 
tion it  belongs. 


96  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

Like  laudo: 

appello,  appellare,  appelldvi,  appellatuiii,  call. 
comparo,  comparare,  etc.,  prepare. 
importo,  etc.,  import. 
occupo,  etc.,  seize. 
specto,  etc.,  face,  stretch. 
supero,  etc.,  conquer,  overcome. 

at-tingo,  at-tingere,  at-tigl,  AT-TACTum,  toucli  upon,  horder  on. 
con-tendo,  con-tendere,  con-tendl,  con-tentuhi,  fight,  hasten. 
divido,  dividere,  dlvisi,  Divisum,  divide,  separate. 
habeo,  habere,  hahui,  HABiTum,  have,  hold. 
im-pediS,  im-pedire,  im-pedivi,  iM-PEDiTum,  hinder. 

in-col6,  in-colere,  in-colui, ,  inhabit,  live  in. 

mitto,  mittere,  misi,  Missum,  send. 
munio,  munire,  mUnivi,  MUNiTum,  fortify. 
teneo,  tenere,  tenul,  TENTum,  hold. 
verg5,  vergere, , ,  slope;   lie. 

Give  one  English  word  from  the  present  base,  and  another 
from  the  supine  base,  of  importo,  occupo,  contendo,  dividd, 
and  per-mitto. 

DBILL  EXERCISES 

256.  Give  a  synopsis  throughout  the  indicative  active, 
in  the  first  singular,  third  singular,  and  third  plural,  of 
importo,  teneo,  attingd,  munio. 

257.  1.  Attingebat;  contenderat;  divisimus.  2.  Impe- 
diam;  impedientur;  incoluerant.  3.  Mlsimus;  mittimur; 
mittemur.  4.  MunlvistT;  muniveris;  superavimus.  5.  Mi- 
lites  venerant.     6.  Iter  fecimus. 

258.  1.  He  had  seized;  they  will  seize.  2.  You  will  be 
sent;    it  was  being  fortified.     3.  We  have  hindered;    you 


LESSON   XXIX  97 

had  given.     4.  We  shall  have  conquered;   we  were  hasten- 
ing;   they  had  divided.     5.  We  inhabit;    we  shall  inhabit. 

259.  VOCABULARY 

angustus,  -a,  -um,  narrow,  limited. 
inferus,  -a,  -um,  low. 

cupiditas,  cupiditatis,  f.,  desire,  fondness. 
regnum,  -i,  royal  power,  sovereignty. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

260.  1.  Nostra  cupiditas  regni*  fuit  magna.  2.  Belgae 
ad  inferiorem  partem  fltiminis  Rheni  pertinent.  3.  Fines 
Helvetiorum  fuerunt  angustl.  4.  Gallia  ad  septentriones 
spectat.     5.  Solem  orientem  vidimus. 

261.  1.  We  sent  men  to  the  lower  hills.  2.  The  enemy 
(plu.)  fortified  (perf.)  the  town.  3.  You  (sing.)  did  not 
seize  (perf.)  the  royal  power.  4.  We  shall  praise  his  fond- 
ness for  royal  power  (gen.).  5.  That  legion  will  be  sent  to 
our  state. 


LESSON   XXIX 

PERFECT,    PLUPERFECT,    AND    FUTURE    PERFECT 
INDICATIVE    PASSIVE 

262.  TEXT 

Belgae  ab  extremis  Galliae  f Inibus  initium  capiunt ;  perti- 
nent ad  Inferiorem  partem  fltiminis  RhenI;  spectant  in 
septentriones  et  orientem  solem.     (18-20,  Ch.  1.) 

*After  cupiditas  a  genitive  may  be  translated  by  for. 


98 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


263.  PERFECT,  PLUPERFECT,  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT 
INDICATIVE  PASSIVE 

Perfect 
I  was  praised,  or  I  have  been  praised 


SINGULAB 

LAUDATus  (-a,  -um)  sum 

LAUDATUS  eS 
LAUDATUS  est 


PLURAL 

LAUDATi  (-ae,  -a)  sumus 

LAUDATl   eStiS 
LAUDATi   sunt 


Pluperfect 

I  had  teen  praised 

LAUDATUS  (-a,  -um)  eram  laudati  (-ae,  -a)  eramus 


LAUDATUS  eras 
LAUDATUS  erat 


LAUDATi  eratis 
LAUDATi  erant 


Future  Perfect 

I  shall  have  been  praised 

LAUDATUS  (-a,  -um)  ero  LAUDlTi  (-ae,  -a)  erimus 

LAUDATUS  eris  LAUDATi  critls 

LAUDATUS  erit  LAUDATi  cruut 


MONiTUS,  -a,  -um 
DUCTUS,  -a,  -um 
AUDiTus,  -a,  -um 
CAPTUS,  -a,  -um 


Perfect 


sum,  es,  est 


MONiTi,  -ae,  -a 
DucTi,  -ae,  -a 
AUDiTi,  -ae,  -a 
CAPTi,  -ae,  -a 


-  sumus,  estis,  sunt 


MONITUS,  -a,  -um 
DUCTUS,  -a,  -um 
AUDiTUS,  -a,  -um 
CAPTUS,  -a,  -um 


Pluperfect 


eram,  eras,  erat 


MONITI,  -ae,  -a 
DucTi,  -ae,  -a 
AUDiTi,  -ae,  -a 
CAPTi,  -ae,  -a 


eramus,  eratis, 

erant 


LESSON    XXIX  ,  99 

Future  Perfect 


MONITUS 

-a 

-um 

DUCTUS, 

-a, 

-um 

AUDiTUS, 

-a, 

-um 

CAPTUS, 

-a, 

■um 

ero,  eris,  erit 


MONiTi,  -ae,  -a 
DucTi,  -ae,  -a 
AUDiTi,  -ae,  -a 
CAPTi,  -ae,  -a 


erimus,  eritis, 

erunt 


264.  The  perfect  passive  participle  of  all  verbs,  which 
constitutes  the  first  part  of  the  compound  tenses  in  the 
above  table,  is  formed  on  the  supine  base,  and  its  nominative 
singular  masculine  is  the  same  as  the  fourth  principal  part, 
but  with  final  s  instead  of  m. 

This  participle  is  a  predicate  adjective  and  agrees  with 
the  subject  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 


DRILL  EXERCISES 

265.  Give  a  synopsis  throughout  the  indicative,  active 
and  passive,  in  the  first  singular,  third  singular,  and  third 
plural,  of  supero,  video,  mittd,  impedio. 

266.  1.  Moneor;  monitus  sum.  2.  Videbitur;  visus  erit. 
3.  Miserant;  miss!  erant.  4.  Impedltus  erat;  impedita 
erat.  5.  Capiemini;  venistis.  6.  Oppidum  munltum  erat; 
oppida  munita  erant.  7.  Attingit;  attigit.  8.  Contendit;* 
contendimus.* 

267.  1.  I  was  praised  (perf.) ;   we  were  praised  (perf.). 

2.  You  (sing.)  were  sent  (perf.) ;  you  (sing.)  will  be  sent. 

3.  You  (plu.)  had  been  hindered;  you  (plu.)  will  have  been 
hindered.  4.  He  has  conquered;  he  has  been  conquered. 
5.  You  (sing.)  made  (perf.)  ;  you  (sing.)  will  make.  6.  It 
will  have  been  given.     7.  They  have  been  separated. 


♦What  two  tenses  may  these  forms  be? 


100  BELLUM    IIELVETICUM 

268.  VOCABULARY 

Aquitania,  -ae,  f.,  Aquitania,  the  southwestern  part  of  Gaul,  inhabited 

by  the  Aquitanians. 
Hispania,  -ae,  f.,  Spain. 

occidens,  genitive  occidentis,  adjective,  falling,  setting. 
Pyrenaeus,  -a,  -um,  Pyrenees. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

269.  1.  Aquitania  ad  Hispaniam  pertinet.  2.  Montes 
PyrenaeT  proximi  Aqultaniae  sunt.  3.  Occidentem  s5lera 
vidimus.  4.  Aquitania  inter  occidentem  solem  et  septen- 
trionem  spectat.  5.  Belgae  in  extremis  Galliae  partibus 
fuerunt. 

270.  1.  These  towns  had  been  fortified.  2.  All  the  roads 
were  narrow.  3.  The  rivers  which  you  will  see  are  large. 
4.  Control  was  being  seized  by  the  Helvetians.  5.  A  con- 
spiracy had  been  made. 


LESSON   XXX 

SIMPLE    AND    COMPOUND   VERBS 

271.  TEXT 

Aquitania  a  Garumna  flumine  ad  Pyrenaeos  montes  et 
eam  partem  OceanT  quae  est  ad  Hispaniam  pertinet ;  spectat 
inter  occidentem  solem  et  septentrionem.     (20-23,  Ch.  1.) 

272.  SIMPLE   AND    COMPOUND   VERBS 

The  verbs  do  and  over  do,  rate  and  under-rate,  illustrate 
what  may  be  called  simple  and  compound  verbs  in  English ; 
other  examples  are  out-run,  up-hold,  hack-slide.  Such  modi- 
fications of  verbs  by  particles  are  very  common  in  Latin. 


LESSON  xx:^,   ,  ',',  r^ ',\  :  ;    -101 

With  some  verbs  the  preposition  is  simply  prefixed  to  the 
verb  in  all  its  forms : 

cedo,  cedere,  cessi,  cessum,  go  {from) 

prae-cedd,  prae-cedere,  prae-cessi,  prae-cessum,  go  before,  go  ahead  of, 

i.  e.,  precede,  surpass 
sum,  esse,  fui,  futurus,  he 

ab-sum,  ab-esse,  a-fui,        a-futurus,  he  away  from 

With  many  other  verbs,  however,  a  vowel  in  the  principal 
parts  of  a  simple  verb  may  be  weakened  when  the  verb  is 
compounded : 

tened,  tenere,         tenui,           tentum,  hold 

con-tineo,  con-tinere,  con-tinui,  con-tentum,  hold  together,:!. e.,  hound 

per-tineo,  per-tinere,  per-tinui,  per-tentum,  hold  through,  i.  e.,  extend 

ob-tineo,  ob-tinere,    ob-tinui,      ob-tentum,  aold  (against  someone) 

habeo,  habere,        habui,         habitum,  have,  hold 

pro-hibeo,    pro-hibere,  pro-hibui,  pro-hibitum,  holdoff ,  i.e.,  Tceep  away 

As  a  rule,  all  compounds  of  the  same  simple  verb  have  similar 
principal  parts.  For  example,  the  principal  parts  of  any  other  com- 
pounds of  teneo  and  habed  are  like  contineo,  probibeo,  etc. 

Learn  the  principal  parts  and  meanings  of  the  above 
verbs. 


DRILL   EXERCISES 

273.  1.  Conjugate  prohibeo  in  the  perfect  tense,  active 
and  passive.  2.  Conjugate  capio  in  the  future  perfect  tense, 
active  and  passive. 

274.  1.  Continetur;  continebantur.  2.  Prohibebiminl  ; 
prohibitus  est.  3.  Praecedebatis ;  praecessistis.  4.  Habet; 
habuit;  habuerat.  5.  Tenebatur;  tenebitur;  tenebuntur. 
6.  Tentus  erit ;  tentum  erat ;  tenta  erit. 


102  BSLLUM    HELVETICUM 

275.  1.  He  surpassed;  we  had  surpassed.  2.  You  (sing.) 
will  be  held;  you  (sing.)  have  held.  3.  It  was  bounded;  they 
are  bounded.  4.  You  (plu.)  will  be  kept  away;  they  had  been 
kept  away.  5.  They  have  been  away;  they  had  been  away. 
6.  I  shall  come;  you  (sing.)  will  come.  7.  I  shall  be  sent; 
you  (sing.)  will  be  sent.  8.  You  (sing.)  have  been  brave; 
you  (plu.)  have  been  brave. 

276.  VOCABULARY 

apud,  preposition  with  ace,  among. 

dives,  genitive  divitis,  rich.    Superlative  ditissimus. 

inductus,  -a,  -um,  participle,  influenced. 

Orgetorix,  Orgetorigis,  m.,  Orgetorix,  a  chief  of  the  Helvetians. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

277.  1.  Apud  Helvetios  Orgetorix  fuit  ditissimus.  2.  Orge- 
torix, inductus  a  nobilitate,  coniiirationem  fecit.  3.  Orgetorix 
regni  cupiditate  inductus,  coniiirationem  fecit.  4.  Fines 
Aqultanorum  mare  attigit.  5.  Orgetorix  fuit  nobilissimus 
Helvetiorum. 

278.  1.  Orgetorix  will  make  these  conspiracies.  2.  He 
is  the  most  prominent  among  the  Helvetians.  3.  The  trad- 
ers will  be  taken  by  the  enemy.  4.  You  will  see  that  part 
which  is  nearest  to  the  sea  (dat.).  5.  What  had  been  given 
to  the  soldiers? 


FOURTH   EEVIEW   LESSON 

279.     Translation. 

Translate  the  text  of  Chapter  I,  page  317.     Look  up  on 
the  map,  page  204,  the  proper  names  used  in  the  descrip- 


FOURTH    REVIEW    LESSON 


103 


tion.      Try   to   think  of  it  as  an  account  of  a  country,   its 
geography  and  its  inhabitants,  not  as  an  exercise  in  language. 

This  chapter  is  the  general  geographical  introduction  to  Caesar  ^s 
narrative  of  his  extraordinary  campaigns  in  Gaul.  Such  a  chapter 
was  especially  necessary  at  the  time  he  wrote,  because  the  Eomans 
then  knew  almost  nothing  of  the  geography  of  Gaul,  except  the  parts 
nearest  to  Italy  and  the  Mediterranean.  Gaul  was  to  them  only  a 
vast  unknown  country  whose  inhabitants  had  once  taken  and  sacked 
Rome,  and  had  several  times  defeated  Roman  armies  with  fearful 
slaughter.  Note  especially  the  position  of  the  Helvetians  and  what 
Caesar  has  to  say  about  them;  for  it  is  with  them  that  the  narrative 
is  now  most  concerned. 


280.  Memory  Work. 

Review  the   conjugation  of  the  entire  indicative  mood. 

(App.  66-71.) 

281.  Latin-English  Vocabulary. 

1.  Give  the  memoranda  of  the  following  nouns: 
Actuitania,  Hispania,  Oceanus,  Orgetorix,  regmim,  septentri5. 

2.  Compare  angustus,  and  give  its  meaning.  Give  the 
meaning  of  etiam,  extremus,  inferus,  Pyrenaeus.  Give  the 
meaning  of  apud,  and  the  case  used  with  it. 

3.  Give  the  principal  parts  in  full,  and  the  meaning  of 
the  following  verbs: 


absum 

divido 

incolo 

prohibeS 

append 

do 

laudd 

spectd 

attingo 

contineo 

mitto 

sum 

audio 

importo 

moned 

super5 

capio 

impedio 

niuni5 

teneo 

cedo 

duco 

obtineo 

veni5 

compare 

facio 

occupo 

vergO 

contendo 

gero 

pertineo 

video 

habed 

praecedo 

104 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


282.     English-Latin  Vocabulary. 

Give  the  first  form  of  the  Latin  for  the  following: 


also 

bound 

limited 

ocean 

among 

even 

low 

royal  power 

border  on 

extend 

narrow 

touch  upon 

lie 

north 

LESSON   XXXI 


ADJECTIVES   WITH   GENITIVE   IN   -lUS 

283.  Nine  adjectives  of  the  first-and-second  declension 
have  the  genitive  singular  in  -ius  (in  alter  usually  -ius)  and 
the  dative  singular  in  -i,  in  all  genders,  but  are  otherwise 
regular.    These  are: 


alius, 

another 

ullus,  any 

uter,  which 

solus,  only 

alter, 

the  other 

nuUus,  no 

(of  two) 

totus,  whole 

(of  two) 

neuter,  neither 

unus,  one 

284. 

SINGULAR 

If  as. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom, 

unus 

iina 

unum 

totus 

tota 

totum 

Gen. 

unius 

unius 

unius 

totius 

totius 

totius 

Dat, 

uni 

uni 

uni 

toti 

toti 

toti 

Ace. 

unum 

unam 

unum 

totum 

totam 

totum 

Abl. 

uno 

una 

lino 

toto 

tota 

toto 

SINGULAR 

Nom. 

alius 

alia 

aliud 

alter 

altera 

alterum 

Gen. 

alius 

alius 

alius 

alterlus 

alterlus       alterlus 

Dat. 

alii 

alii 

alii 

alteri 

alteri 

alteri 

Ace. 

alium 

aliam 

aliud 

alterum 

alteram      alterum 

Abl. 

alio 

alia 

alio 

altero 

altera 

altero 

LESSON   XXXI  105 

Notes.  .  1.  Observe  that  the  genitive  and  dative  singular  have  the 
same  endings  as  ille,  is  and  qui;  that  the  neuter  aliud  is  like  illud; 
that  other  forms  are  like  longus. 

2.  All  these  adjectives  have  a  plural,  declined  like  that  of  longus. 
The  plural  of  tinus  means  only,  alone. 


285.  VOCABULARY 

alius,  -a,  -ud,  another;   plural,  other,  others. 
alter,  altera,  alterum,  the  other  (of  two)  ;  the  second. 
totus,  -a,  -um,  whole  {of). 
unus,  -a,  -um,  one. 

prae-sto,   -stare,   -stiti,   -statum,   literally,   stand   before,  i.  e.,  surpass. 
This  verb  governs  the  dative,  which  is  translated  by  a  direct  object. 

Give  definitions  for  alternate,  total,  and  unit,  which  are 
suggested  by  the  Latin  words  above. 


DRILL  EXERCISES 

286.  1.  Decline  hie.  2.  "Write  the  three  bases  of  laudo, 
moneo,  duco,  audio,  capio.  3.  Conjugate  the  future  indica- 
tive, active  and  passive,  of  do  and  of  duco.  4.  Give  the 
principal  parts  of  atting5,  and  a  synopsis  in  the  first  singular, 
active  and  passive. 


TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

287.  1.  Gallia  est  omnis  divisa  in  partes  tres,  quarum 
unam  incolunt  Belgae,  aliam  AquitanI,  tertiam  Celtae.  2.  Ab 
Orgetorlge  imperium  totius  Galliae  occupabitur.  3.  Omnibus 
Gallis^  praestamus.  4.  Helvetii  una  ex^  parte^  flumine 
Rheno    continentur;     altera    ex^    parte^    flumine    Rhodano 


1  See  praesto  in  vocabulary.  ^  on.  ^  side. 


106 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


continentur.  5.  Haec  oppida  a  militibus  unms  civitatis 
capta  sunt.  6.  Orgetorix,  regni  cupiditate  inductus,  con- 
iurationem  fecit.  7.  Alter!  legion!  praestatis.  8.  Un!  viro 
totum  agrum  dedit.  9.  Conitiratio  nobilitatis  omnis  facta 
erat.    10.  Aliud  flumen  v!dimiis. 


1.  Of  the  whole  state.  2.  Of  one  ship.  3.  They 
had  surpassed  (praesto).  4.  "We  shall  come  to  (ad)  another 
road.  5.  I  shall  give  the  grain  to  the  other  soldier.  6.  The 
towns  of  another  part  of  Gaul  will  be  fortified. 


289. 


LESSON   XXXII 

FOURTH   DECLENSION 
TEXT 


Apud    Helvetios    longe    nobilissimus~  fuit    et    d!tissimus 
Orgetor!x.     (24,  25,  Ch.  2.) 

290.  FOURTH    DECLENSION 

passus,  M.,  pace  comu,  n.,  horn;  wing 


CASE 

CASE 

SINGULAR 

ENDINGS 

SINGULAR 

ENDINGS 

Norn. 

passus 

-US 

cornu 

-ft 

Gen. 

passus 

-US 

cornus 

-us 

Bat. 

passu! 

-ui 

cornu 

-11 

Ace. 

passum 

-una 

cornu 

-a 

Voc. 

passus 

-us 

cornu 

-a 

ALL 

passu 

-u 

cornu 

-a 

LESSON 

XXXII 

PLURAL 

Norn. 

passtis 

-US 

cornua 

-na 

Gen. 

passuum 

-uum 

cornuum 

-uum 

Dat. 

passibus 

-ibus 

cornibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

passus 

-us 

cornua 

-ua 

Voc. 

passus 

-us 

cornua 

-ua 

AU. 

passibus 

-ibus 

cornibus 

-ibus 

107 


The  bases  of  these  nouns  are  pass  and  com. 

291.  RVLE  FOR  GENDER.  Nouns  of  the  fourth  declension 
ending  in  =us  are  masculine,  except  domus,  manus,  and  Idus, 
which  are  feminine;  those  ending  in  =u  are  neuter. 


292.  VOCABULARY 

cornu,  -us,  n.,  horn;   of  an  army,  wing. 
cultus,  -us,  m.,  civilization. 

lacus,  -us,  m.,  Ia1{e.     Dative  and  ablative  plural  lacubus. 
occasus,  -us,  m.,  literally,  falling;   setting. 

passus,  -us,  m.,  pace,  which  with  the  Eomans  was  a  double  step,  about 
five  of  our  feet. 

Lemannus,  -i,  m.,  (Lalce)  Geneva. 


DRILL   EXERCISES 

293.  1.  Decline  mille.  2.  Decline  ille.  3.  Give  the  three 
bases  of  comparo,  ced6,  and  contineo.  4.  Give  the  princi- 
pal parts  of  ger5,  and  a  synopsis  in  the  third  person  singu- 
lar, active  and  passive. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

294.  1.  Passu;  cornus;  lacuum.  2.  Occasum  soils  vidi. 
3.  Belgae  a  cultu  atque  humanitate  provinciae  longissime 
absunt.    4.  Helvetii  continentur  una  ex  parte  lacu  Lemanno 


108 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


et  flumine  Rhodano.     5.  Unum  hostium  cornu  superatum 
est.     6.  Coniurationem  nobilitatis  laudavimus. 

295,  1.  Of  the  other  wing;  on  these  lakes.  2.  A  thou- 
sand paces ;  thousands  of  paces.  3.  We  shall  make  another 
march.  4.  The  men  of  the  whole  state  are  coming.  5.  The 
soldiers  of  one  legion  conquered  the  Gauls.  6.  We  saw  the 
setting  of  the  sun. 


LESSON   XXXIII 

FIFTH   DECLENSION 

296.  TEXT 

Apud  Helvetios  longe  nobilissimus  fuit  et  ditissimus 
Orgetorix.  Is,  regni  cupiditate  inductus,  coniurationem 
nobilitatis  fecit.     (24-26,  Ch.  2.) 


297. 


FIFTH    DECLENSION 


dies,  M., 

day 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Nom 

.    dies 

dies 

Gen. 

diei 

dierum 

Bat. 

diei 

dietous 

Ace. 

diem 

dies 

Voc. 

dies 

dies 

Abl 

die 

diebus 

res,  F.,  i 

•Jung,  affair 

CASE  ENDINGS 

SINGULAR 

PJ.URAL 

SING. 

PLU. 

res 

res 

•es 

-es 

rei 

rerum 

-ei 

-erum 

rei 

rebus 

-ei 

-ebus 

rem 

res 

-em 

-es 

res 

res 

-es 

-es 

re 

rebus 

-§ 

-ebus 

The  bases  of  these  nouns  are  di  and  r. 

The  e  is  short  in  the  accusative  singular  of  all  nouns,  and  in  the 
genitive  and  dative  singular  of  fides,  spes,  and  res. 


LESSON   XXXIII  109 

Dies  and  res  are  the  only  nouns  of  this  declension  which  are  fully 
declined  in  the  plural.  Spes  and  acies  have  in  the  plural  only  the 
nominative  and  accusative. 

298.  RULE  FOR  GENDER.  Nouns  of  the  fifth  dectension 
are  feminine,  except  dies,  which  is  usually  masculine. 


299.  VOCABULARY 

acies,  aciei,  f.,  line-of -battle,  battle-line. 

dies,  diei,  usually  masculine,  sometimes  feminine  in  the  singular,  day. 

fides,  fidei,  f.,  pledge. 

res,  rei,  f.,  thing. 

spes,  spei,  f.,  hope. 

f acilis,  facile,  easy. 

per-suadeo,  -suadere,  -suasi,  -suasum,  persuade.    This  verb  governs  the 
dative,  which  is  translated  by  a  direct  object. 

Fides  also  means  loyalty;  can  you  think  of  an  English 
word  from  fides  that  means  the  same?  What  noun  comes 
from  f acilis?  What  verb  from  the  present  base,  and  what 
noun  from  the  supine  base,  of  persuadeo? 


DRILL  EXERCISES 

300.  1.  Decline  is.  2.  Decline  the  Latin  for  another 
wing;  any  lake.  3.  Give  the  principal  parts  of  teneo  and 
miinio,  and  a  synopsis  of  each  in  the  third  person  plural, 
active  and  passive. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

301.  1.  Trium  dierum;  ilia  re.  2.  Fidem  huic  viro 
dedisti.  3.  Magnam  spem  habeo.  4.  Homines  his  rebus 
moniti  erant.  5.  Acies  nostra  superabitur.  6.  Militibus 
persuasimus.    7.  Hae  res  faciles  sunt. 


110  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

302.  1.  The  days  are  long.  2.  This  pledge  will  be  given. 
3,  Our  hopes  were  great.  4.  The  enemy  had  seen  our 
line-of-battle.    5.  These  things  ^vere  heard  by  other  traders. 


LESSON   XXXIV 

ABLATIVE    OF    AGENT 

303.  TEXT 

Apud  Helvetios  longe  nobilissimus  fuit  et  ditissimus 
Orgetorix.  Is,  regni  cupiditate  inductus,  coniurationem 
nobilitatis  fecit  et  civitatl  persuasit  ut^  de  flnibus  suTs 
cum  omnibus  copils  exTrent.-     (24-27,  Ch.  2.) 

NOTES 

1.  that. 

2.  they  should  go  out. 

304.  USE    OF   PREPOSITIONS 

It  has  been  seen  that  ablatives  are  used  sometimes  with 
and  sometimes  without  a  preposition.  The  use  or  omis- 
sion of  a  preposition  depends  upon  the  particular  force 
which  the  expression  has  in  the  sentence.  In  some  uses  a 
preposition  is  employed,  in  others  not.  It  is  alw^ays,  there- 
fore, the  use  of  an  ablative  in  a  sentence  that  determines 
whether  or  not  a  preposition  is  used,  and  what  preposition 
it  is,  if  any. 

305.  ABLATIVE    OF    AGENT 

Model 
Belgae  a  Gallis  visi  sunt,  the  Belgians  were  seen  hy  the 


LESSON   XXXIV  111 

Notes,  a.  This  use  of  the  ablative  answers  the  question,  ''By 
whom?" 

b.  This  use  of  the  ablative  always  designates  a  person. 

c.  This  use  of  the  ablative  always  has  the  preposition  9,  or  ab. 

d.  This  use  of  the  ablative  is  found  only  with  the  passive  voice. 

e.  The  same  thought  expressed  by  the  active  voice  would  be  writ- 
ten:— Gain  Belgas  viderunt.  Here  the  agent  of  the  passive  verb 
becomes  the  subject  of  the  active  verb,  and  the  subject  of  the  passive 
verb  becomes  the  object  of  the  active  verb. 

306.  RULE.  Agency  with  the  passive  voice  Is  expressed  by 
the  ablative  with  a  or  ab. 

307.  VOCABULARY 

pater,  patris,  m.,  father. 

mater,  matris,  f.,  mother. 

frater,  fratris,  m.,  brother. 

sorer,  sororis,  f.,  sister. 

filius,  filii,  m.,  son. 

filia,  niiae,  f.,  daughter.    Dative  and  ablative  plural,  fUiS^bus. 

Give  an  English  derivative  from  each  of  the  vrords  above. 


DBILL  EXERCISES 

308.  1.  Decline  qui.  2.  Decline  the  Latin  for  another 
thing;  the  whole  line-of-hattle.  3.  Give  the  principal  parts 
of  supero,  video,  vergo,  venio,  and  conjugate  their  present 
and  future  indicative  active. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

309.  1.  Pater  puerum  misit.  2.  Puer  a  patre  suo  missus 
est.  3.  Mater  a  filiabus  suis  laudatur.  4.  Aquitania  flu- 
minibus  et  montibus  continetur.  5.  Haec  sorori  a  fratribus 
dabantur.  6.  Helvetii  omnibus^  praestant.  7.  Vir  a  filiis 
vTsus  est.     8.  Initium  itineris  facile  fuit. 


^See  §285. 


112  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

310.  1.  The  boy  saw  (his)  mother.  2.  The  soldier's 
mother  was  seen  by  the  men.  3.  The  town  had  been  taken 
by  the  soldiers.  4.  The  town  was  being  fortified  (by)  walls. 
5.  The  brothers  liad  been  sent  by  (their)  sister.  6.  The  men 
will  be  praised  by  (their)  sons  and  daughters. 


LESSON   XXXV 

ABLATIVE   or   MEANS 

311.  TEXT 

Orgetorix,  ''Facile  est,"  inquit/  ''quod  virtute  omnibus 
praestamus,  totlus  Galliae  imperium  occupare."^  (27-29, 
Ch.  2.) 

NOTES 

1.  said. 

2.  occupare,   the  second  principal  part  of  occupo,   is  the  present 


312.  ABLATIVE  OF  MEANS 

Model 
Fliimine  continetur,  it  is  hounded  hy  a  river. 

Notes,     a.   This   use   of  the   ablative   answers   the   question,  *'By 
what?"   ''With  whatf   "By  means  of  what?" 

h.  This  use  of  the  ablative  almost  always  designates  a  thing, 
c.  This  use  of  the  ablative  never  has  a  preposition. 

313.  RULE.     Means  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  without  a 
preposition. 


LESSON   XXXV 


113 


314. 


VOCABULAEY 


carrus,  -i,  m.,  cart. 

co-emo,  -emere,  -emi,  -emptum, 
l)uy  up,  purchase. 

iumentum,  -i,  n.,  ieast  of  bur- 
den, pacTc  animal;  applied 
to  oxen  and  horses. 

locus,  -i,  m.,  plural  loca,  loco- 
rum,  n.;  place. 

multus,  -a,  -um,  much;  plural 
many. 

natura,  -ae,  f.,  character. 


CARRUS 
(From   Trajan's   Column) 


Give  a  noun,  a  verb  and  an  adjective  from  locus,  and  a 
verb  from  multus. 

DBILL  EXERCISES 

315.  1.  Compare  angustus  in  the  nominative  singular,  all 
genders.  2.  Give  the  ablative  singular  and  genitive  plural 
of  facilis,  and  of  the  comparative  of  facilis.  3.  Give  the 
principal  parts  of  importo  and  mitto,  and  conjugate  them  in 
the  perfect  and  pluperfect  indicative  active. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

316.  1.  Frumentum  ab  amicTs  nostris  missum  est.  2. 
Frumentum  carrTs  et  iumentls  missum  est.  3.  Haec  loca  a 
multis  hominibus  visa  sunt.  4.  Ea  a  mercatoribus  magno 
carrorum  numero  importabantur.  5.  Magnum  numerum 
carrorum  coemebamus.    6.  Helvetii  natura  loci  continentur. 


317.  1.  This  place  was  being  fortified  by  walls.  2.  These 
places  were  bounded  by  rivers.  3.  The  men  were  hindered 
by  the  carts.  4.  The  carts  were  drawn  (duco)  by  pack 
animals  (iumentum).  5.  They  had  been  bought  by  the 
Helvetians.     6.  Gaul  was  inhabited  by  the  Celts. 


114  BELLUM   HELVETICUM 

LESSON   XXXVI 

ABLATIVE    OF    TIME 

318.  TEXT 

Helvetiis  persuasit  quod  undique  loci  natura  continentur. 
(29,  30,  Ch.  2.) 

319.  ABLATIVE    OF   TIME 

Models 

1.  Eo  tempore  venit,  he  came  at  that  time. 

2.  Tribus  annis  veniet,  he  will  come  withi7i  three  years. 

Notes,     a.   In   sentences   such    as   these   the   ablative   answers   the 
question,  "When?" 

b.  In  sentences  like  Model  1,  the  ablative  is  translated  by  at  or  on, 
and  denotes  "time  when." 

c.  In  sentences  like  Model  2,  the  ablative  is  translated  by  within, 
and  denotes  "time  within  which." 


320.      RULE.     Time,   when  or  within   which,  is  denoted  by 
the  ablative  without  a  preposition. 


321.  VOCABULARY 

annus,  -i,  m.,  year. 

biennium,  -i,  n.,  literally,  tJie  space  of  two  years,  i.  e.,  two  years. 

mensis,  mensis,  m.,  month. 

lura,  -ae,  m.,  the  Jura  mountain  range,  or  the  Jura  mountains,  which 
extend  from  the  Ehine  to  the  Ehone. 

What  is  an  annual  election?  A  biennial  election? 


LESSON    XXXVII  '  115 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

322.  1.  Decline  the  Latin  for  this  place:  a  month  and  a 
day.  2.  Give  the  principal  parts  of  coemo  and  conjugate 
it  in  the  future  indicative,  active  and  passive.  3.  Give  the 
principal  parts  of  persuaded,  and  conjugate  it  in  the  future 
and  future  perfect  indicative  active. 

TRANSLATION   EXERCISES 

323.  1.  Illo  die  legio  nostra  in  Hispaniam  missa  est.  2. 
Hoc  mense  in  Galliam  mittemur.  3.  Oppidum  biennio  miini- 
tum  erit.  4.  Legiones  alterius  cornus  ab  hostibus  superatae 
erant.  5.  lura  mons  est  inter  Sequanos  et  Helvetios.  6. 
Tertio  anno  iter  de  finibus  nostris  faciemus. 

324.  1.  At  that  time  we  came  to  a  hill.  2.  Within  three 
months  they  prepared  a  supply  of  grain.  3.  All  the  work 
had  been  done  by  the  soldiers  of  one  legion.  4.  This  year 
(there)  are  many  Germans  in  our  territory.  5.  Gaul  was 
divided  by  rivers. 


LESSON  xxxvn 

ACCUSATIVE  OF  EXTENT 
325.  TEXT 

Helvetiis  persuasit  quod  undique  loci  nattira  continentur : 
una  ex^  parte^  flumine  Eheno,  latissimo  atque  altissimo, 
qui  agrum-^  Helvetium*  a  GormanTs  dividit.     (29-32,  Ch.  2.) 


116  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

NOTES 

1.  on.  3.  territory. 

2.  side.  4.  adjective:  Helvetian. 

326.  ACCUSATIVE    OF   EXTENT 

Models 

1.  Multos  annos  in  Gallia  erit,  he  will  he  in  Gaul  many  years. 

2.  Tria  milia  passuum  missus  est,  he  was  sent  three  miles. 

Notes,     a.  The    words    underlined    are    accusatives    or    objectives, 

but  are  not  objects. 

h.  They  answer  the  question,  "How  long?"    "How  far?" 

c.  While   in  English  we  may  say  "for  many  years,"  "for  three 

miles,"  no  preposition  is  used  in  Latin. 

327.  RULE,     The  accusative  without  a  preposition  is  used 
to  express  duration  of  time  and  extent  of  space. 

328.  VOCABULARY 

pateo,  patera,  patui,  ,  literally,  be  open;   extend, 

pes,  pedis,  m.,  foot. 

spatium,  -i,  n.,  space,  of  time  or  distance. 

quadraginta,  indeclinable  cardinal  (numeral)  adjective,  forty. 
octoginta,  indeclinable  cardinal  (numeral)  adjective,  eighty. 
centum,  indeclinable  cardinal  (numeral)  adjective,  one  hundred. 
ducenti,  -ae,  -a,  cardinal  (numeral)  adjectiv.e,  two  hundred. 


mille  passus,  a  thousand  voces 
milia  passuum,  thousands 


aces,  I  e.,  a  mile  1     gee  §96. 

of  paces,  1.  e.,  miles.        J 


Give  two  English  words  from  centum,  and  two  from  the 
base  of  pes. 


LESSON   XXXVIII  117 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

329.  1.  Give  the  rules  for  gender  in  all  the  declensions. 

2.  Give  the  principal  parts  of  impedio,  and  a  synopsis  in  the 
third  singular,  active  and  passive. 

TRANSLATION   EXERCISES 

330.  1.  Fines  nostri  centum  mllia  passuum  patebant.  2. 
Dies  quadraginta  frumentum  comparabamus.  3.  Ager  erat 
pedes  ducentos  latus.  4.  Tertio  die  milites  in  haec  loca 
venerunt.  5.  Silva  octoginta  milia  passuum  patet.  6.  Hoc 
spatium  erat  centum  pedes  latum.  7.  Frumentum  magno 
iumentorum  numero  mittetur. 

331.  1.  We  marched  (made  a  march)  the  whole  distance 
in  one  day.    2.   (For)  three  days  we  kept  away  the  enemy. 

3.  That  year  you  fought  with  all  the  Germans.  4.  Our 
line-of-battle  was  seen  by  the  enemy.  5.  The  town  had 
been  fortified  with  very-high  walls. 


LESSON   XXXVIII 

SUBJUNCTIVE    OF    SUM 

332.  TEXT 

Helvetiis  persuasit  quod  undique  loci  nattira  continentur: 
una  ex  parte  fltimine  Rheno,  latissimo  atque  altissimo, 
qui  agrum  Helvetium  a  Germanis  dividit;  altera^  ex  parte 
monte  lura  altissimo,  qui  est  inter  Sequanos  et  Helvetios. 
(29-33,  Ch.  2.) 

NOTE 

1.  the  second. 


118 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


333. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  SUM 


Present 


Perfect 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Sim 

simus 

sis 

sltls 

sit 

sint 

Imperfect 

essem 

essemus 

esses 

essetis 

esset 

assent 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

fuQiim 

fuetis 

fueiit 

/"Merimus 

fweritis 

fuerint 

Pluperfect 

fuissem 

fuisses 

fuisset 

fwissemus 

/•wissetis 

/Missent 

334.  Note  the  following  facts  about  the  subjunctive 
mood  of  all  verbs: 

1.  There  is  no  future  or  future  perfect  tense. 

2.  All  the  tenses  are  conjugated  regularly ;  that  is,  in  the 
conjugation  of  any  tense,  nothing  changes  but  the  personal 
ending.  Therefore,  if  the  first  person  singular  is  known,  the 
entire  tense  can  be  conjugated. 

3.  The  vowel  before  the  personal  ending  is  always  long 
in  every  tense,  where  it  can  he;  that  is,  everywhere  except 
before  the  personal  endings  m,  t,  nt;  r,  ntur. 

4.  The  perfect  and  pluperfect  tenses  are  formed  on  the 
perfect  base  like  the  same  tenses  of  the  indicative. 

5.  The  translation  of  the  subjunctive  varies  with  its  use, 
so  that  no  general  set  of  meanings  can  be  given  for  it. 


335. 


VOCABULARY 


altittido,  altitudinis,  f.  [altus],  height;   depth. 
fortitudo,  fortltudinis,  f.  [fortis],  hravery. 
latitudo,  latitudinis,  f.  [latus],  width,  Ijreadth. 
longitudo,  longitudinis,  f.  [longus],  length. 

multitudo,    multitudinis,    f.    [multus,    much'],    literally,    ** muchness " ; 
muUitude;   great  number. 


LESSON    XXXIX  119 

It  will  be  noticed  that  these  nouns  are  all  abstract;  that 
is,  they  are  formed  from  adjectives  and  denote  qualities. 
Give  the  English  words  derived  from  the  first  four. 

DRILL  EXEECISES 

336.  1.  Decline  the  Latin  for  a  great  height;  many  feet. 
2.  Review  the  conjugation  of  the  indicative  mood  of  sum, 
and  give  a  synopsis  through  the  indicative  and  subjunctive, 
in  the  first  singular. 

TRANSLATION   EXERCISES 

337.  1.  Mons  lura  erat  magnae  altitudinis.  2.  Fortitudo 
Helvetiorum  est  magna.  3.  Haec  loca  a  multitudine  homi- 
num  incolebantur.  4.  Ad  Rhenum  venimus,  qui  est  flumen 
magnae  latittidinis  et  longitudinis.  5.  Tres  dies  cum  Ger- 
manls  contendimus. 

338.  1.  The  length  of  the  march  was  great.  2.  You  often 
praised  (perf.)  the  Helvetians'  bravery.  3.  (For)  three 
years  we  inhabited  (pei*f.)  those  places.  4.  The  sword  was 
given  by  the  soldier  to  a  friend.  5.  The  field  was  bounded 
by  a  forest. 


LESSON   XXXIX 

SUBJUNCTIVE   ACTIVE    OF    THE   FIRST   AND    SECOND 
CONJUGATIONS 

339.  TEXT 

Helvetiis  persuasit  quod  undique  loci  natura  continentur: 
una  ex  parte  flumine  Rheno,  latissimo  atque  altissimo,  qui 
agrum  Helvetium  a  Germanis  dividit ;  altera  ex  parte  monte 


120 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


Itira  altissimo,  qui  est  inter  Sequanos  et  Helvetios;  tertia^ 
lacu  Lemanno  et  flumine  Rhodano,  qui  nostram  provinciam 
ab  Helvetiis  dividit.     (29-35,  Ch.  2.) 

^      NOTE 
1.  With  tertia  supply  ex  parte. 


340. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   ACTIVE 

FIRST   CONJUGATION 


Present 


SINGUT.AB 

PLURAL 

laudem 

laudemus 

laudes 

laudetis 

laudet 

laudent 

Imperfect 

laudarem 

laudaremus 

laudares 

laudaretis 

laudaret 

laudarent 

Perfect 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

lauddveiim  lauddveTimns 

lauddveiis  lauddveiitis 

lauddveiit  lauddverint 

Pluperfect 

lauddvissem  lauddvissemus 


lauddvisses 
lauddvisset 


lauddvissetis 
lauddvissent 


341. 


SECOND  CONJUGATION 


Present 


Perfect 


moneam                moneamus 

monuerim             monuerlmus 

moneas                 moneatis 

monueris               monueiitis 

moneat                 moneant 

monueTit              monuerint 

Imperfect 

Pluperfect 

monerem              moneremus 

monuissem            monuissemus 

moneres                moneretis 

mo7iuisses              monuissetis 

moneret                monerent 

monuisset             monuissent 

342.     Review  what  was  said  about  the  subjunctive  mood 
in  §334,  and  note  the  following  points  also: 


LESSON   XXXIX  121 

1.  The  sign  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive  in  regular  verbs 
is  re,  and  the  following  rule  may  be  used  to  remember  the 
forms  of  this  tense  for  any  verb : 

Imperfect  subjunctive  =  present  active  infinitive  +  per- 
sonal endings. 

2.  The  perfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  have  the  same 
endings  as  these  tenses  of  sum. 

343.  VOCABULARY 

amicitia,  -ae,  f.  [amicus],  friendship ;  which  in  foreign  relations  meant 
practically  alliance. 

con-firmo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [con-,  intensive],  literally,  maJce  firm;  i.e., 

establish;    declare. 
end,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  wander. 

finitimus,   -a,   -um    [finis],  neighboring;    near.       Masculine   as  noun, 

neighbor. 

facile,  adverb,  easily. 
late,  adverb,  widely. 
minus,  adverb,  less. 

"What  English  verb  comes  from  the  present  base  of 
confirmo,  and  what  noun  from  the  supine  base?  *'He  erred 
greatly  in  doing  this." — What  does  *'err"  mean?  What 
is  the  noun  formed  from  errd? 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

344.  1.  Decline  the  expressions  tdtus  dies ;  pater  et  puer. 
2.  Give  the  synopsis  in  the  subjunctive  active,  first  singular, 
of  do  and  of  video. 

TRANSLATION   EXERCISES 

345.  1.  AmTcitiam  confirmabimus.  2.  Ob  eas  res  Helve- 
tii  minus  late  errabant.     3.  IVIinus  facile  cum  finitimis  bel- 


122  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

lum    gerebant.     4.  Nostri    fines    erant    fmitiml    Germanis. 
5.  Silva  multa  milia  passuum  pertinet. 

346.  1.  Friendship  will  be  established  by  the  Germans. 
2.  These  places  were  near  to  the  Germans  (dat.).  3.  The 
enemy  were  hindered  by  these  walls.  4.  Within  one  year 
we  established  friendship  with  all  the  states.  5.  Men  of 
great  bravery  will  be  kept  away  less  easily. 


LESSON   XL 

SUBJUNCTIVE  ACTIVE  OF  THE  THIRD  AND  FOURTH 

CONJUGATIONS  ,  S 

347.  TEXT 

Ob  eas  res  HelvetiT   et^  minus  late   errabant  et^   minus 
facile  cum  finitimls  bellum  gerebant.     (35-37,  Ch.  2.) 


NOTE 

1.  et  .  .  .  et,  both  .  .  .  and. 

♦ 

SUBJUNCTIVE  ACTIVE 

348.  THIRD  CONJUGATION 

Tresent  Perfect 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

due  am 

ducamus 

duxeTim 

duxeiimus 

ducas 

ducatis 

diixetis 

diixerltis 

ducat 

ducant 

duxerit 

duxennt 

LESSON 

XL 

Imperfect 

Pluperfect 

ducerem          duceremus 

duod^sQTQ.               diZoissemns 

duceres            duceretis 

dwarisses                dwaissetis 

duceret            ducerent 

dwarisset                dwaissent 

123 


349. 


FOURTH  CONJUGATION 


Fresent 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

audiam  audiamus 

audias  audiatis 

audiat  audiant 


Perfect 


SINGULAR 

audlvetivd 

audivens 

audlv&nX 


PLURAL 

audivenams 

audivenXi^ 

audivetinX 


Imperfect 

audirem  audiremus 

audires  audiretis 

audiret  audirent 


Pluperfect 


audivissem 

audivisBQS 

audivi&Eet 


aw^i/issemus 

awditissetis 

audXviaseii\. 


350. 


THIRD  CONJUGATION  IN  -16 


Present 


Perfect 


SINGULAB 

1                PLURAL 

SINGULAR                           PLURAL 

capiam 

capiamus 

ceperim                 ceperimus 

capias 

eapiatis 

ceperis                  ceperitis 

capiat 

eapiant 

ceperit                  ceperint 

Imperfect 

Pluperfect 

caperem 

caperemus 

cepissem                ceplssemus 

caperes 

caperetis 

cepisses                 cepissetis 

caperet 

caperent 

cepisset                ceplssent 

Review  what  was  said  about  the  subjunctive  mood  in  §§334  and 
342,  and  see  how  those  statements  apply  to  the  conjugations  above. 


124  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

351.  VOCABULARY 

af-ficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fectum  [ad,  to,  facio,  do],  literally,  do  to;  a  feet. 
cupidus,  -a,  -um,  desirous,  fond. 
dolor,  doloris,  m.,  distress. 

maximus,  -a,  -um  [irregular  superlative  of  magnus],  greatest,  very  great. 
pax,  pacis,  f.,  peace. 

quam,    adverb;    when    preceding    a    superlative,    it    is    translated   by 
possible  placed,  after  the  superlative  in  English. 

What  English  word  does  the  supine  base  of  afRcio  form? 
What  does  it  mean  to  do  the  maximum  amount  of  work? 
What  does  pacify  mean? 


DBILIi  EXERCISES 

352.  1.  Decline  the  expressions  omnis  locus  (see  §314) ; 
filius  et  filia  (see  §307).  2.  Give  the  synopses  in  the  sub- 
junctive active,  first  singular,  of  gero,  veni5,  facio. 


TRANSLATION   EXERCISES 

353.  1.  Helvetii  erant  cupidl  belli.  2.  Quod  loci  natura 
continebantur,  magn5  dolore  afficiebantur.  3.  Quam  maxi- 
mum numerum  carrorum  coemerunt.  4.  Numerus  iumen- 
torum  quoque  coemptus  est.  5.  Pacem  et  amicitiam  cum 
finitimls  civitatibus  confirmaverunt. 


354.  1.  In  the  third  year  we  established  peace.  2.  For 
three  years  we  bought  carts.  3.  These  were  drawn  (diico) 
a  hundred  miles.  4.  The  height  of  these  mountains  was 
very  great.  5.  Friendship  was  less  easily  established  by  the 
Helvetians. 


LESSON   XLI 


125 


LESSON   XLI 

SUBJUNCTIVE  PASSIVE  OF   ALL  CONJUGATIONS 

355.  TEXT 

Ob  eas  res  Helvetii  et  minus  late  errabant  et  minus  facile 
cum  finitimis  bellum  gerebant.  Ob  eam  causam  hi  homines, 
qui  erant  belli  cupidi,  magno  dolore  afficiebantur.  (35-38, 
Ch.  2.) 

SUBJUNCTIVE   PASSIVE 


356. 


FIRST   CONJUGATION 


Present 


SINGULAR 

lauder 

lauderis  or  -re 
laudetur 


PLURAL 

lau  demur 
laudemini 
laudentur 


Perfect 


SINGULAB 
LAUDATUS  Sim 
LAUDATUS  sis 
LAUDATUS  sit 


PLURAL 
LAUDATl  SimUS 
LAUDATi  SitiS 
LAUDATl  Sint 


Imperfect 

laudarer  laudaremur 

laudareris  or  -re     laudaremini 
laudaretur  laudarentur 


Pluperfect 


LAUDATUS  essem       laudAti  essemus 
LAUDATUS  esses        LAUDlTi  essctis 
LAUDATUS  esset        LAUDATi  csseiit 


357. 


SECOND  CONJUGATION 


Present 


monear 

monearis  or  -re 
moneatur 


moneamur 
moneamini 
moneantur 


Perfect 


MONITUS  Sim 

MONiTus  sis 

MONITUS  sit 


MONiTi  simus 
MONiTi  sitis 
MONiTi  sint 


Imperfect 


monerer 
monereris  or  -re 
moneretur 


moneremur 
moueremini 
monerentur 


Pluperfect 


MONITUS  essem        moniti  essemus 
MONITUS  esses         MONiTi  essetis 
MONITUS  esset         moniti  essent 


126 

BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

358. 

THIRD   CONJUGATION 

Present 

Perfect 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL                              SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

ducar 

ducamur                   ductus  sini 

DucTi  simus 

ducaris  or  -re 

ducamini                  ductus  sis 

DucTi  sitis 

ducatur 

ducantur                  ductus  sit 

DucTi  sint 

Imperfect 


ducerer 
ducereris  or  -re 
duceretur 


duceremur 
duceremini 
ducerentur 


Pluperfect 


DUCTUS  essem 
DUCTUS  esses 
DUCTUS  esset 


DUCTI  essemus 
DucTi  essetis 
DUCTI  essent 


359. 


FOURTH   CONJUGATION 


Present 


audiar 

audiaris  or  -re 
audiatur 


audiamur 
audiamini 
audiantur 


Perfect 


AUDITUS  Sim 
AUDITUS  sis 

AUDiTus  sit 


AUDiTi  simus 
AUDiTi  sitis 
AUDIT!  sint 


Imperfect 


audirer 

audireris  or  -re 
audiretur 


audiremur 
audiremini 
audirentur 


Pluperfect 


AUDITUS  essem 
AUDITUS  esses 

AUDITUS 


AUDITI  essemus 
AUDiTi  essetis 
AUDlTi  essent 


360. 


THIRD   CONJUGATION   IN   -io 


Present 


capiar 

capiaris  or  -re 
capiatur 


capiamur 
capiamini 
capiantur 


Perfect 


CAPTUS  sim 
CAPTus  sis 
CAPTUS  sit 


cAPTi  simus 
CAPTi  sitis 
CAPTi  sint 


Imperfect 


caperer 
capereris  or  -re 
caperetur 


caperemur 
caperemini 
caperentur 


Pluperfect 


CAPTUS  essem        capti  essemus 
CAPTUS  esses  CAPTi  essetis 

CAPTUS  esset         CAPTi  essent 


LESSON    XLl  127 

361.  Observe  that  in  the  present  and  imperfect  tenses, 
the  active  and  passive  subjunctive  differ  only  in  the  per- 
sonal endings,  just  as  do  the  same  tenses  of  the  indicative 
(§§200,  212). 

Note  that  the  perfect  and  pluperfect  are  formed  by  com- 
bining the  present  and  imperfect  tenses  of  the  subjunctive 
of  sum  v^ith  the  perfect  passive  participle,  on  the  same 
principle  as  the  same  tenses  of  the  indicative  passive. 

362.  The  formation  of  the  subjunctive  tenses  can  best  be 
learned  by  inspection  of  a  synopsis,  as  follows: 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

laudem 
lauder 
laudarem 
laudarer 


lauddveTim 

LAUDATUS  Sim 

lauddvissem 
LAUDATUS  essem 


363 

autem,  adverb,  moreover. 

existimo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  think. 

gloria,  -ae,  f.,  reputation. 

pro,  preposition  with  ablative,  for;   in  view  of. 

ut,  conjunctive  adverb  with  indicative,  as. 

DEILL  EXERCISES 

364.  1.  Decline  the  Latin  for  a  great  lake  (§292).  2. 
Give  the  synopsis  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  active  and  pas- 
sive, first  singular,  of  praesto,  teneo,  attingo,  munio. 


INDICATIVE 

Pres. 

Act. 

laudo 

Pass. 

laudor 

Imp. 

Act. 

laudabam 

Pass. 

laudabar 

Fut. 

Act. 

laudabo 

Pass. 

laudabor 

Perf. 

Act. 

lauddvl 

Pass. 

LAUDATUS  sum 

Plup. 

Act. 

laudaveT3Lm 

Pass. 

LAUDATUS  eram 

F.  P. 

Act. 

lauddvero 

Pass. 

LAUDATUS  ero 

VOCABULARY 

128  BELLUM.   HELVETICUM 

TRANSLATION   EXERCISES 

365.  1.  Helvetil  non  late  errabant,  propterea  quod  eoruiii 
fines  erant  angusti.  2.  Magn5  dolore  autem  afficiebantur 
quod  pro  multitudine  Helvetiorum  fines  angustos  habebant. 
3.  Eorum  gloria  belli^  atque  fortitudinis^  erat  magna.  4. 
Pr5  multitudine-  autem  hominum-  atque  gloria  belli^  et 
fortitudinis\  fines  nostri  sunt  angusti.  5.  Angustos  fines 
habemus,  ut  existimamus. 

366.  1.  Peace  will  be  established  by  our  consuls.  2. 
Friendship  had  been  established  by  these  things.  3.  At 
that  time  their  bravery  was  great.  4.  For  many  days  we 
were  very  near  to  these  lakes  (dat.).  5.  There  is  another 
river  at  (ad)  this  end  of  the  town. 


LESSON   XLII 

INDIRECT    QUESTIONS  SEQUENCE    OF    TENSES 

367.  TEXT 

Pro  multitudine  autem  hominum  et  pro  gloria  belli  at- 
que fortitudinis,  angustos  fines  habebant,  ut  existimabant. 
(38-40,  Ch.  2.) 

368.  DIRECT    QUESTIONS 

Models 

(a)  Quis  venit.     Who  is  coming? 

{b)  Quis  venit.     Who  came  (has  come)? 


1  These  words,  though  genitive,  may  be  translated  with  the  preposition 
for.  ^multitudo  hominum^  literally,  multitude  of  human  beings,  here  large 
population. 


LESSON    XLII  129 

369.  INDIRECT    QUESTIONS 

Models 

fquisveniat,  (who  is  coming? 

1.  Quaerit      j^^^^  ^^^^^.^^    he  is  asMng  |^^^  ^^^^  ^^^^^  ^^^^^  , 

f quis  veniret,  Civho  was  coming? 

2.  Quaesivit  |^„j^ ^^„j^^^^_  A.  a«M        |^,^^  „^^  ^^^^, 

Notes.  «.  Subordinate  clauses  in  Latin  like  the  above,  which  are 
introduced  by  an  interrogative  word  and  have  their  verb  in  the 
subjunctive  mood,  are  called  Indirect  Questions. 

h.  The  verb  of  an  indirect  question,  while  subjunctive  in  Latin,  is 
indicative  in  English. 

c.  The  tense  of  the  verb  in  the  subordinate  clause  depends  partly 
upon  the  tense  of  the  main  verb  and  partly  upon  the  kind  of  action 
denoted. 

d.  The  rule  below  (§371)  is  the  general  rule  for  the  tense  of  the 
subjunctive  mood  in  all  uses.  The  subjunctive  does  not  express  time 
like  the  indicative,  but  its  tenses  represent  action  as  incomplete  or 
completed  at  the  time  denoted  by  the  main  verb. 


370.     RULE.     The   verb  of  an  indirect  question  Is  In   tlie 
subjunctive. 


371.  RULE.  If  the  main  verb  is  present,  future,  or  future 
perfect,  a  subordinate  subjunctive  verb  is  present  or  perfect; 
if  the  main  verb  is  imperfect,  perfect,  or  pluperfect,  a  sub" 
ordinate  subjunctive  verb  is  imperfect  or  pluperfect.  The 
present  and  imperfect  subjunctive  denote  incomplete  action; 
the  perfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  denote  completed  action. 

Note  1.  The  present,  future,  and  future  perfect  indicative,  and 
the  present  and  perfect  subjunctive,  are  called  principal  (or  primary) 
tenses;  while  the  imperfect,  perfect,  and  pluperfect  indicative,  and 
the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  are  called  historical  (or 
secondary)  tenses. 

Note  2.     The  rule  is  therefore  sometimes  stated: 


130  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

371.  a*  Principal  tenses  are  followed  by  principal  tenses, 
and  historical  by  historical. 

Note  3.  This  rule  applies  only  to  complex  sentences  whose  sub- 
ordinate verbs  are  subjunctive.  There  are  certain  exceptions  which 
will  be  noted  as  examples  occur. 

372.  VOCABULARY 

cur,  adverb,  why. 
ubi,  adverb,  where. 

e-nuntio,  -nuntiare,  -nuntiavi,  -nuntiatum,  literally,  tell  out;  regularly, 

disclose,  report. 
quaero,  quaerere,  quaesivi,  quaesitum,  asic  (a  question). 

The  words  inquire  and  inquisitive  come  from  the  present 
and  supine  bases  of  the  compound  of  in  and  quaerd.  What 
do  they  mean? 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

373.  1.  Give  the  principal  parts  of  confirmo,  and  a 
synopsis  in  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  moods,  active  and 
passive,  first  singular.  2.  Give  the  principal  parts  of  coemo, 
and  a  synopsis  in  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  moods, 
active  and  passive,  third  plural. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

374.  1.  Audimus  cur  hoc  faciat;  audivimus  cur  hoc 
faceret.  2.  Video  cur  hoc  f ecerit ;  vidi  cur  hoc  fecisset.  3. 
Quaerunt  quis  mittatur;  quaerebant  quis  mitteretur.  4. 
Enuntiabitur  ubi  hostes  sint;  enuntiatum  erat  ubi  hostes 
essent.     5.  N5n  audivi  quem  misisses;  audies  quem  miserim. 

375.  1.  They  are  asking  vi^here  you  are ;  they  were  ask- 
ing where  you  were.     2.  They  see  why  you  have  come; 


LESSON   XLIII  131 

they  saw  why  you  had  come.  3.  The  consul  reported  what 
he  had  done;  he  will  report  what  he  is  doing.  4.  We  had 
heard  what  was  being  sent;  we  heard  what  had  been  sent. 
5.  We  asked  who  had  come;  you  are  asking  who  has 
come. 


LESSON   XLIII 

INFINITIVES 

376.  TEXT 

Pro  multitudine  autem  hominum  et  pro  gloria  bell!  atque 
fortittidinis,  angustos  fines,  ut  existimabant,  habebant,  qui 
in^  longitudinem  milia  passuum  ducenta  et  quadraginta,  in* 
latitiidinem  centum  et  octoginta,  patebant.     (38-42,  Ch.  2.) 

NOTE 

1.  in. 

377.  INFINITIVES 

ActWe  Passive 

sum 

Pres.     esse,  to  he 

Perf.     fuisse,  to  have  been 

Put.       FUTurus  esse,  to  he  going-to-he 

FIRST     CONJUGATION 

Pres.     laudare,  to  praise  laiidari,  to  he  praised 

Perf,     lauddvisse,  to  have  praised  laudatus  esse,  to  have  been  praised 

Put.      LAUDATurus  csse,  LAUDATum  iri, 

to   he  going-to-praise  to  he  going-to-he-praised 


132  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

SECOND     CONJUGATION 

Pres.     monere,  to  warn  moneri,  to  he  warned 

Perf.     momiisse,  to  liave  warned  monitus  esse,  to  have  been  warned 

Put.       MONiTurus  esse,  MONiTum  iri, 

to  he  going-to-warn  to  he  going-to-he-warned 

THIED     CONJUGATION 

Pres.     ducere,  to  lead  duci,  to  he  led 

Perf.     duxisse,  to  have  led  ductus  esse,  to  have  heen  led 

Put.      DucTurus  esse,  DucTum  iri, 

to  he  going-to-lead  to  he  going-to-he-led 

FOUETH     CONJUGATION 

Pres.     audire,  to  hear  audiri,  to  he  heard 

Perf.     audlvi8se,  to  have  heard  auditus  esse,  to  have  heen  heard 

Put.      AUDlTurus  esse,  AUDiTum  iri, 

to  he  going-to-hear  to  he  going-to-he-heard 

THIRD     CONJUGATION     IN     -16 

Pres.     capere,  to  taTce  capi,  to  he  taTcen 

Perf.     cepisse,  to  have  taTcen  captus  esse,  to  have  heen  taken, 

Put.      CAPTums  esse,  CAPTum  iri, 

to  he  going-to-taTce  to  he  going -to-he-taTcen 

378.  Note  the  following  facts  about  the  infinitives  given 
above : 

1.  The  present  infinitives  are  formed  on  the  present  base. 

2.  The  perfect  active  infinitive  is  formed  on  the  perfect 
base. 

3.  The  compound  forms  (the  perfect  passive  and  both  the 
future  infinitives)  are  formed  on  the  supine  base. 

4.  In  the  perfect  passive  infinitive  the  first  word  is  the 
perfect  passive  participle  (which  is  used  in  the  perfect  in- 
dicative and  perfect  subjunctive  passive).  This  form  may, 
therefore,  be  in  any  gender  and  number. 


LESSON   XLIII  133 

5.  In  the  future  active  infinitive,  the  first  form  is  the 
future  active  participle.  This  form  may  also  be  in  any 
gender  and  number. 

6.  In  the  future  passive  infinitive,  the  first  word  is  the 
supine  (the  fourth  principal  part),  and  this  form  does  not 
change. 

379.  VOCABULARY 

cdg5,  cogere,  coegi,  coactum,  collect;  with  complementary  infinitive, 

compel. 
c6n-stitu6,   -stituere,  -stitui,  -stitutum,  decide;  determine. 
debeo,  debere,  debui,  debitum,  ought. 
iubeo,  iubere,  iussi,  iussum,  order. 
mature,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  hasten. 

What  English  verb  and  noun  are  from  the  supine  base 
of  constituo?    What  is  a  cogent  reason? 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

380.  Give  the  principal  parts,  bases,  and  all  the  infini- 
tives, with  their  translation,  of  do,  teneo,  mitto,  impedio, 
facio. 

TRANSLATION   EXERCISES 

381.  1.  Tenuisse;  tentus  esse.  2.  Venturus  esse ;  vSnisse. 
3.  Confirmare ;  confirmari.  4.  Misisse ;  missiirus  esse.  5. 
Mitti;  missum  iri.  6.  Constituerunt  ea  comparare.  7. 
Eum  maturare  iussimus.  8.  Garros  coemere  debemus. 
9.  Ilelvetii  errare  cogebantur.  10.  Oppidum  munire 
maturaverunt.  11.  Gonstitueramus  rogare  ubi  esses.  12. 
Omnes  audient  cur  carrT  coemptT  sint. 

382.  1.  To  be  going-to-have.  2.  To  have  been  seen.  3. 
To  have  carried  on ;  to  have  been  carried  on.    4.  To  be  seen ; 


134 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


to  be  sent.  5.  To  be  compelled;  I  have  compelled.  6.  He 
ordered  the  town  to  be  fortified.  7.  He  asked  what  we  had. 
8.  They  will  hear  where  we  have  been.  9.  They  were 
compelled  (perf.)  to  fight. 


FIFTH   REVIEW   LESSON 

383.     Give  an  account  of  the  events  narrated  in  Chapter 
n,  and  translate  it. 


384.     Memory  work. 

1.  Adjectives  with  genitive  in  -ins  (§284). 

2.  Fourth  and  fifth  declensions  (§§290,297). 

3.  Subjunctive  mood  and  infinitives  (App.  66-71). 


385.     Latin-English  vocabulary. 

1.  Give  the  memoranda  of  the  following  nouns 


acies 

fides 

longitude 

pater 

altitudo 

filia 

mater 

pax 

amicitia 

filius 

mensis 

pes 

annus 

frater 

multitud5 

res 

carrus 

lacus 

natura 

soror 

comu 

latitude 

occasus 

spatium 

dies 

locus 

passus 

spes 

2.  Give   the    meaning    of   the    following   adjectives,    and 
show  how  each  is  declined : 

alius,  alter,  centum,  cupidus,  ducenti,  finitimus,  maximus,  multus, 
quadraginta,  octoginta,  totus,  unus.     Compare  cupidus. 


FIFTH   REVIEW   LESSON 


135 


3.  Give  the  principal  parts  and  meaning  of  the  following 
verbs : 

coemo,  cogo,   confirmo,   constitud,  debeo,   enuntio,  existimS,  iubeo, 
mature,  pateo,  persuadeo,  praesto,  quaero. 

4.  Give  the  meanings  of  the  following  words: 

autem,  cur,  facile,  late,  minus,  ubi,  ut  with  the  indicative.     Give 
the  meaning  of  pro  and  the  case  which  it  governs. 


386.     Give  the  first  form  of  the  Latin  for  the  following 


announce 

disclose 

less 

report 

another 

distance 

line  of  battle 

setting 

appoint 

easily 

many 

sister 

as 

eighty 

mile 

son 

ask 

establish 

miles 

space 

breadth 

extend 

month 

sunset 

brother 

father 

moreover 

surpass 

buy 

foot 

mother 

thing 

cart 

forty 

much 

think 

character 

friendship 

multitude 

two  hundred 

collect 

great  number 

neighbor  (ing) 

in  view  of 

compel 

greatest 

one 

west 

daughter 

hasten 

order 

where 

day- 

(not  contends) 

the  other 

whole 

decide 

height 

ought 

why 

declare 

hope 

pace 

widely 

depth 

horn 

peace 

width 

desirous 

hundred 

persuade 

wing 

determine 

lake 

place 

year 

length 

pledge 

387  Give  complete  Latin  sentences,  with  translation,  illus- 
trating the  expression  of  agency,  means,  time  (three  uses), 
extent  (two  uses)  ;  and  a  direct  and  an  indirect  question. 


136  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

LESSON   XLIV 

388.  PARTICIPLES 

Active  Passive 

sum 

Pres.    yheing 

Perf.     ,  having  been 

Fut.      FUTurus,  going-to-be 

FIRST     CONJUGATION 

Pres.     laudans,  praising  ,  being  praised 

Perf.     ,  having  praised  TjAvdatus,  (having  been)  praised 

Fut.       LAUDATurus,  going-to-praise        laudandus,  to-be-praised 

SECOND     CONJUGATION 

Pres.     monens,  warning  ,  being  warned 

Perf.     ,  having  warned  MotiiTUS,  (having  been)  warned 

Fut.       MO^iTUius,  going-to  warn  monejidus,  to-be-war7ied 

THIRD     CONJUGATION 

Pres.     diicens,  leading  ,  being  led 

Perf.     ,  having  led  ductus,  (having  been)  led 

Fut.       DUCTurus,  going-to-lead  ducendus,  to-be-led 

FOURTH     CONJUGATION 

Pres.     audiens,  hearing  ,  being  heard 

Perf.     ,  having  heard  audItus,  (having  been)  heard 

Fut.       AVDiTivocvL^j  going -to-hear  audiendus,  to-be-heard 

THIRD     CONJUGATION     IN     -io 

Pres.     capiens,  talcing  ,  being  taTcen 

Perf.     ,  having  taJcen  caftus,  (having  been)  taken 

Fut.       CAPTurus,  going-to-talce  capiendus,  to-be-tahen 


LESSON   XLIV 


137 


389.  Note  the  following  facts  about  the  participles  given 
in  §388: 

1.  The  present  active  and  future  passive  participles  are 
formed  on  the  present  base. 

2.  The  future  active  and  perfect  passive  participles  are 
formed  on  the  supine  base. 

3.  The  future  active  participle  is  the  first  part  of  the 
future  active  infinitive. 

4.  The  perfect  passive  participle  is  the  first  part  of  the 
compound  tenses  of  the  passive,  e.  g.,  laudatus  sum,  lauda- 
tus  sim,  laudatus  esse,  etc. 

5.  All  the  participles  ending  in  -us  are  declined  like  longus. 

6.  The  present  active  participles  are  declined  like  laudans, 
§390. 


390. 


DECLENSION    OF    PRESENT   PARTICIPLES 


laudans,  praising 

MAS. 

FEM. 

ITEUT. 

Nom. 

laudans 

laudans 

laudans 

Gen. 

laudantis 

laudantis 

laudantis 

Bat. 

laudanti 

laudanti 

laudanti 

Ace. 

laud  an  tern 

laudantem 

laudans 

Voc. 

laudans 

laudans 

laudans 

Ahl. 

laudante 

laudante 

laudante 

Nom. 

laudantes 

laudantes 

laudantia 

Gen. 

laudantium 

laudantium 

laudantium 

Dat. 

laudantibus 

laudantibus 

laudantibus 

Ace. 

laudantes  (-is) 

laudantes  (-is) 

laudantia 

Voc. 

laudantes 

laudantes 

laudantia 

Ahl. 

laudantibus 

laudantibus 

laudantibus 

Notiee  that  this  is  declined  like  the  adjective  oriens  (§103),  except 
for  the  ablative  singular. 


138  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

391.  TRANSLATION    OF    PARTICIPLES 

Remember  that  participles  are  verbal  adjectives.  All 
forms  of  the  same  adjective  (e.  g.,  longus,  longa,  longos, 
longis,  etc.),  are  translated  alike,  and  in  the  same  way 
all  forms  of  the  same  participle  are  translated  the  same. 
Thus  laudans,  laudantes,  or  any  other  form  of  this  par- 
ticiple would  be  translated  praising.  But  in  translating  a 
sentence  it  is  as  necessary  with  a  participle  as  it  is  with 
an  adjective  to  observe  with  what  the  participle  agrees. 

A  participle  is  usually  placed  in  English  next  to  the  word 
which  it  modifies. 

392.  VOCABULARY 

ad-duc6,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -ductum,  lead  on,  induce. 

auctoritas,  auct5ritatis,  f.,  influence. 

per-moveo,  -movere,  -movi,  -motum,  literally,  move  thoroughly;   arouse, 

profectio,  profectionis,  f.,  departure. 

sup-petd,  -petere,  -petivi,  -petitum  [peto,  seelc'],  he  on  hand. 

Give  English  words  from  moveo,  motum,  petitum. 
DRILL  EXERCISES 

393.  Give  the  principal  parts,  bases,  and  all  the  parti- 
ciples, of  do,  teneo,  mitto,  munio,  faci5,  with  their  transla- 
tion. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

394.  Give  the  gender,  number,  and  case  of  the  participles 
in  the  following  exercises,  and  translate  them  in  the  proper 
voice  and  tense: 

1.  Cogens;  coaetiirus;  coactus;  cogendus.  2.  lubentes; 
iubendi;  iussi;  iussuri.  3.  Adductus;  adductl.  4.  Ilelve- 
tii,  his  rebus  adductl,  e  suTs  flnibus  venerunt.  5.  Helvetii, 
auctoritate   Orgetorlgis  permotT,  frumentum  coemere  con- 


LESSON   XLV  139 

stituerunt.  6.  Copia  frumenti  in  itinere  suppetebat.  7. 
Helvetil  omnia  ad  profectionem  comparaverunt.  8.  Magnus 
numerus  itimentorum,  ab  HelvetiTs  coemptorum,  in  itinere 
captus  est.  9.  Copias  filio  suo  dedit  ducendas  in  Galliam. 
10.  Tria  milia  hominum,  a  legato  captorum,  magno  dolore 
affect!  sunt.     11.  Vidimus  ubi  homines  essent. 

395.  1.  Thinking  (mas.  sing.  dat.).  2.  Going-to-fight 
(mas.  plu.  ace.).  3.  Having  been  bought  (neut.  plu.  gen.). 
4.  One  part  of  the  Helvetians,  separated  from  the  rest,  was 
hastening  to  make  a  march  into  Gaul.  5,  The  men,  coming 
from  the  fields,  were  taken  by  the  Germans.  6.  The  Helve- 
tians were  not  going-to-divide  their  troops.  7.  Part  of  the 
field  given  to  these  men  is  across  that  river.  8.  We  shall 
hear  why  they  have  decided  to  do  this. 


LESSON  XLV 

ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE 
396.  TEXT 

Helvetil,  adducti  et  permoti,  omnia  ad  profectionem  cora- 
parare  constituerunt.  Helvetil,  his  rebus  adducti  et  aucto- 
ritate  Orgetorlgis  permotT,  omnia  comparare  constituerunt. 
Constituerunt  omnia  comparare  atque  iumenta  et  carros 
cocmere.  Constituerunt  omnia  ad  profectionem  comparare, 
iumentorum  et  carrorum  auam  maximum  numerum  coemere. 


His  rebus  adducti  et  auctoritate  Orgetorlgis  permoti, 
Helvetil  constituerunt  omnia  ad  profectionem  comparare, 
iumentorum  et  carr5rum  quam  maximum  numerum  coemere. 
(43-46,  Ch.  3.) 


140  BELI-UM    HELVETICUM 

397.  ABLATIVE    ABSOLUTE 

IMODEL 

Oppido  occupato,  ad  flumen  contendimus,  the  town  having 
been  seized,  we  hastened  to  the  river. 

Notes,  a.  In  this  sentence  the  noun  oppidd  and  the  participle 
occupato,  agreeing  with  it,  are  in  the  ablative  case  and  are  gram- 
matically independent  of  the  rest  of  the  sentence.  In  the  English 
translation  the  construction  is  called  the  nominative  absolute. 

b.  While  in  a  single  sentence  this  construction  is  good  English, 
it  is  not  good  style  to  use  it  frequently.  It  is  very  common  in  Latin, 
however,  and  it  is  therefore  often  necessary,  for  the  sake  of  good 
English,  to  translate  it  freely,  e.  g.,  by  a  clause.  Thus  the  sense 
of  the  above  might  be  expressed  in  this  way:  "After  the  town 
had  been  seized,  we  hastened;"  or  "After  seizing  the  town  we 
hastened. ' ' 

c.  The  ablative  absolute  is  used  only  when  the  participle  agrees 
with  a  noun  which  is  not  connected  in  syntax  with  the  rest  of  the 
sentence. 

398.  RULE.  A  noun  and  an  agreeing  participle  (or  their 
equivalents)  are  used  in  the  ablative  independently. 

Note.  The  equivalents  may  be, — a  pronoun  for  the  noun,  and  an 
adjective  or  a  second  noun  for  the  participle.  Where  no  participle 
is  expressed,  the  lacking  present  participle  of  sum  may  be  understood. 

399.  VOCABULARY 

ante,  adverb,  or  preposition  with  ace,  before. 

con-ficio,   -ficere,  -feci,  -fectum   [con,  intensive,  facio,  do],  literally, 

do  up,  do  completely,  i.  e.,  finish,  complete. 
de-ligo,  -ligere,  -legi,  -lectum  [de,  from,  lego,  choose],  select. 
satis,    adverb,   sufficiently;    considered   as    an   indeclinable   adjective, 

sufficient,  enough. 
sementis,  sementis,  f.,  sowing,  planting. 

Give  an  English  verb,  noun  and  adjective  from  satis-facio. 


LESSON    XLVI  141 

DRILL  EXERCISES 

400.  1.  Give  the  principal  parts  of  c5go,  its  bases,  and 
all  its  infinitives,  with  their  translation.  2.  Give  the  prin- 
cipal parts  of  iubeo,  its  bases,  and  all  its  participles,  with 
their  translation. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

401.  1,  Multis  carris  coemptis,  Helvetil  iter  facere  con- 
stituerunt.  2.  Quam  maximis  sementibus  factis,  copia  fru- 
menti  suppetet.  3.  Orgetorlge  delecto,  ad  profectionem 
omnia  comparavimus.  4.  Casticus,  hostibus  a  patre  suo 
superatis,  coniurationem  fecit.  5.  His  rebus  confectis,  satis 
magnus  numerus  iumentormn  et  carrorum  coemetur.  6. 
Copia  frtimenti  suppetente,  iter  facere  debemus.  7.  Galli 
quaesiverunt  cur  Orgetorix  delectus  esset. 

402.  1.  The  town  having  been  fortified,  we  came  to  our 
territory.  2.  These  men  having  been  chosen,  the  work  was 
finished.  3.  Peace  having  been  established,  the  consul  came 
into  Gaul.  4.  Having  finished  the  war  (the  war  having 
been  finished),  the  troops  came  into  their  (own)  towns. 
5.  The  enemy  having  been  seen,  the  consul  asked  where 
our  legions  were. 


LESSON   XLVI 

THE  INTENSIVE  AND   REFLEXIVE  PRONOUNS 

403.  TEXT 

Helvetil  constituerunt  omnia  ad  profectionem  comparare, 
iumenta  et  carros  coemere,  sementes  facere,  pacem  et  araici- 
tiam   confirmare.     Constituerunt   sementes   quam  maximas 


142  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

facere.     Cdnstituerunt  pacem   et   amieitiam   cum   proximis 
cTvitatibus  confirmare. 


His  rebus  adducti  et  auctoritate  Orgetorigis  permoti, 
Helvetii  constituerunt  omnia  ad  profectionem  comparare, 
iumentorum  et  carrorum  quam  maximum  numerum  coemere, 
sementes  quam  maximas  facere,  cum  proximis  civitatibus 
pacem  et  amieitiam  confirmare.     (43-47,  Ch.  3.) 

404.  THE    INTENSIVE    AND    REFLEXIVE    PRONOUNS 

The  compounds  of  self  in  English  have  two  different  uses. 

1.  A  form  of  self  may  be  in  apposition  with  another  noun 
or  pronoun  and  make  it  more  emphatic.  E.  g.,  he  himself 
came;  they  saw  the  man  himself ;  they  saw  the  man  them" 
selves,  etc.    This  is  called  the  intensive  use. 

2.  A  form  of  self  may  refer  to  the  subject.  E.  g.,  he  hurt 
himself;  they  saw  themselves  in  the  glass;  they  brought  food 
for  themselves,  etc.    This  is  called  the  reflexive  use. 

405.  Latin  has  two  different  pronouns  for  these  two 
uses — (1)  ipse,  the  intensive  pronoun;  (2)  sui,  the  reflexive 
pronoun  of  the  third  person.  Since  a  reflexive  pronoun 
refers  to  the  subject,  it  can  not  itself  be  nominative ;  for  the 
same  reason  its  gender  and  number  are  always  apparent 
and  need  not  be  indicated  by  different  forms. 

406.  ipse,  self 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Nom. 

ipse 

ipsa 

ipsum 

ipsi 

ipsae 

ipsa 

Gen. 

ipsius 

ipsius 

ipsius 

ipsorum 

ipsarum 

ipsorum 

Dat. 

ipsi 

ipsi 

ipsi 

ipsis 

ipsis 

ipsis 

Ace. 

ipsum 

ipsam 

ipsum 

ipsos 

ipsas 

ipsa 

Ahl. 

ipso 

ipsa 

ipso 

ipsis 

ipsis 

ipsis 

LESSON    XLVI  143 

407.  sui,  of  himself 

SINGULAR     AND     PLURAL 

Gen.  sui,  of  himself,  herself,  itself,  themselves 

Dat.  sibi,  to  or  for  himself,  etc. 

Ace.  se  (sese),  himself,  etc. 

Al)l.  se  (sese),  from,  with,  hy  himself,  etc. 

With  se,  as  with  quibus  (§175),  cum  is  enclitic  (secum). 

408.  VOCABULARY 

ipse,  ipsa,  ipsum,  self;   see  §405. 
sui,  sibi,  se,  of  himself,  etc.,  see  §405. 

Diviciacus,  -i,  m.,  Diviciacus,  a  very  influential  Aeduan. 

legatio,  legationis,  f.  [legatus,  ambassador],  embassy. 

populus,  -i,  m.,  people;   plural,  peoples. 

R5manus,  -a,  -um,  Roman. 

senatus,  -us,  m.,  senate. 

sus-cipio,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -ceptum  [sub,  under,  capid,  tafce],  undertake. 

Give  and  define  an  adjective  from  populus.    What  is  the 
American  legation  in  London?     What  does  sui-cide  mean? 


DRILL   EXERCISES 

409.  1.  Review  the  declension  and  meanings  of  suus,  -a, 
-um,  §205.  2.  Give  the  principal  parts  of  deligo,  its  bases, 
and  a  synopsis  through  the  indicative  and  subjunctive,  in 
the  first  singular.  3.  Give  the  principal  parts  of  conficio, 
and  all  its  infinitives  and  participles. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

410.  1.  Homo  se  vidit.  2.  Homo  ipse  visus  est.  3.  Ipsi 
bellum  gerunt.  4.  Helvetil  se  fortissimos  appellabant.  5. 
Helvetii   ipsT-  fortissiml   appellabantur.      6.  Aedui   eos   for- 


144  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

tissimos  appellabant.  7.  Helvetii  a  se  fortissimi  appella- 
bantur.  8.  Ab  Helvetiis  ipsis  fortes  appellabamur.  9.  Le- 
gatione  suscepta,  populus  Romanus  bellum  gerere  constituit. 
10.  Diviciacus  amicus  populi  Romani  a  senatu  appellatus 
erat.     11.  Non  entintiatur  cur  haec  legatio  mittatur. 

411.  1.  The  man  himself  came.  2.  The  man  praised 
himself.  3.  The  consul  sent  the  troops  himself.  4.  The 
troops  were  sent  by  the  consul  himself.  5.  They  will  take 
(dtico)  the  carts  with  them  (i.  e.,  with  themselves).  6.  This 
bridge  having  been  made,  he  decided  to  send  the  legion  to  the 
town.  7.  Coming  to  this  town  we  saw  a  hundred  carts.  8. 
It  was  asked  why  Dumnorix  undertook  this  mission? 


LESSON   XLVII 

PURPOSE    CLAUSES 

412.  TEXT 

Ad  eas  res  conficiendas^  biennium  satis  esse  duxeru^;^ 
in^  tertium  annum  profectionem  lege  confirmant.^  Ad  eas 
res  conficiendas  OrgetorTx  deligitur.*  Is  sibi^  legationem  ad 
civitates  suscipit.*     (47-51,  Ch.  3.)  ,      . 

NOTES 

1.  ad  eas  res  conficiendas:  literally,  for  these  things  to-he-completed; 
i.  6.,  for  completing  these  things. 

2.  duco  has  here  its  less  usual  meaning,  consider. 

3.  for. 

4.  The  present  tense  is  often  used  instead  of  the  perfect  for  vivid- 
ness; in  such  cases  it  is  called  the  ''historical  present,"  and  may- 
be translated  by  the  past  tense. 

5.  sibi,  with  sus-  of  sus-cipit,  means  upon  himself. 


LESSON    XLVII  145 

413.  SUBJUNCTIVE    OF    PURPOSE 

Models 

f  ut  veniat,  f  in-order-that  he  may  come 

1.  Idfacio   |ne  veniat,  ^^^^oingit  ^in-order-that  he  may  not  come 

j  ut  veniret,         .    .  j  in-order-ihat  he  might  come 

®^^     ine  veniret,        *    *  \in-order-that  he  might  not  come 

Notes,  a.  In  these  complex  sentences  the  subordinate  verb  ex- 
presses the  intention  or  purpose  for  which  the  action  of  the  main  verb 
was  done.  Latin  uses  the  subordinate  verb  in  the  subjunctive  intro- 
duced by  ut,  affirmative,  ne,  negative. 

h.  When  the  tense  of  the  verb  upon  which  the  subordinate  clause 
depends  is  present  or  future,  English  uses  may  (present  potential)  as 
an  auxiliary,  and  Latin  the  present  subjunctive  (§371). 

c.  When  the  tense  of  the  verb  upon  which  the  subordinate  clause 
depends  is  past,  English  uses  might  (past  potential)  as  an  auxiliary, 
and  Latin  the  imperfect  subjunctive  (§371). 

414.  I^ULE.  The  subjunctive  is  used  to  express  purpose, 
introduced  by  ut   (affirmative),  ne   (negative), 

415.  VOCABULARY 

acceptus,    -a,    -um    [perfect   passive    participle    of    ac-cipio,    receive] ^ 

acceptable. 
Casticus,  -i,  m.,  Casticus,  a  powerful  chief  of  the  Sequanians. 
Catamantaloedes,    Catamantaloedis,    m,,    Catamantaloedes,    father    of 

Casticus. 

Dumnorix,   Dumnorigis,   m.,  Dumnorix,   a  troublesome   Aeduan   chief. 

matrimonium,  -i,  n.,  marriage. 

maxime,  adverb  [maximus,  greatest,  very  great],  most,  especially. 

ne,  negative  subordinate  conjunction,  in-order-that  .  .  .  not,  that  .  .  .  not. 

plebs  [for  pronunciation  see  §6],  plebis,  f.,  the  common  people,  corre- 
sponding to  the  plebeians  at  Rome. 

principatus,  -us,  m.,  leadership. 

-que,  coordinate  conjunction,  and;  a  closer  connective  than  et.  An  en- 
clitic;   see  §12. 

Ut,  subordinate  conjunction,  in-order-that;   that. 


146  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

416.  1.  Decline  the  Latin  for  father  himself ;  the  thing 
itself ;  the  work  itself.  2.  Give  the  infinitives  and  participles 
of  moveo  and  pet5  (see  per-moveo  and  sup-peto,  §392). 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

417.  1.  Oppidum  munimus  ut  hostes  prohibeantur.  2. 
Oppidum  munlvimus  ut  hostes  prohiberentur.  3.  Oppidum 
mtiniemus  ne  occupetur.  4.  Oppidum  miiniebamus  ne  occu- 
paretur.  5.  Ilelvetil  sementes  fecerunt  ut  copia  frumenti 
in  itinere  suppeteret.  6.  Casticus,  Catamantaloedis  filius, 
coniiirationem  facit  ut  principatum  habeat.  7.  OrgetorTx 
filiam  suam  Dumnorigi  in  matrimonium  dedit  ut  regnum 
teneret.  8.  Filil  flliaeque  venerunt  ne  pax  confirmaretur. 
9.  Dumnorix  ipse  erat  maxime  acceptus  plebi.  10.  Hel- 
vetii  sese  ad  profectionem  comparaverunt. 

418.  1.  He  is  sending  this  in-order-that  we  may  see  it. 
2.  He  sent  this  in-order-that  we  might  see  it.  3.  They  are 
fortifying  the  town  in-order-that  it  may  not  be  seized.  4. 
They  fortified  it  that  it  might  not  be  seized.  5.  They  will 
choose  Orgetorix  that  peace  may  be  made  (confirmo).  6. 
They  had  chosen  him  that  peace  might  be  made.  7.  They 
did  these  things  that  they  might  not  be  hindered  on  the 
march.  8.  We  shall  do  other  things  in  order  that  we  may 
not  be  hindered. 


LESSON   XLVIII  147 

LESSON  XLVIII 

DEPONENT   VERBS 

419.  TEXT 

In  eo  itinere  Orgetorix  Castico/  Catamantaloedis  filio, 
Sequano,  persuasit.  CasticT  pater  regnum  in^  Sequanis 
multos  annos  obtinuerat,  et  a  senatti  amicus  populi  Romani 
appellatus  erat.  Orgetorix  Castico  persuasit  ut^  regnum 
in  sua  civitate  occuparet.^  Ei  persuasit  ut  regnum  (quod* 
pater  ante  habuerat)  occuparet.  Castico  persuasit,  cuius 
•pater  amicus  appellatus  erat,  ut  regnum  occuparet. 


In  eo  itinere  persuadet^  Castico,  Catamantaloedis  filio, 
Sequano,  cuius  pater  regnum  in  Sequanis  multos  annos 
obtinuerat  et  a  senatu  populi  Romani  amicus  appellatus 
erat,  ut  regnum  in  sua  civitate  occuparet,  quod  pater  ante 
habuerat.     (51-55,  Ch.  3.) 

NOTES 

1.  See  what  was  said  about  persuaded  in  §299. 

2.  among. 

3.  ut  .  .  .  occuparet:    that  he  should  seize. 

4.  Kelative  pronoun. 

5.  See  §412,  4. 

420.  DEPONENT  VERBS 

Deponent  verbs  are  those  which  have  mostly  passive 
forms  but  active  meanings.  They  are  conjugated  like  the 
passive  voice  of  other  verbs  in  the  indicative  and  subjunc- 
tive;  their  infinitives  and  participles  are  partly  active  and 
partly  passive  in  form.  They  have  both  a  future  active  and 
a  future  passive  participle. 


148  ■       BELLUM   HELVETICUM 

421.     Principal  Parts:    conor,  conari,  conatus  sum,  try,  attempt. 
Infinitives 

Pres.  Act.      conari,  to  try 

Perf.  Act.     CONATUS  esse,  to  have  tried 

Fut.  Act.        coNATurus  esse,  io  he  going-to-try 

Participles 

Pres.  Act.  conans,  trying 

Perf,  Act.  CONATUS,  having  tried 

Fut.  Act,  coNATiirus,  going-to-try 

Fut.  Pass,  conandus,  to-he-tried 

422.      Principal  Parts:    vereor,  vereri,  veritus  sum,  fear,  he  afraid 
sequor,  sequi,  SECutus  sum,  follow 
potior,  potiri,  pcti'tus  sum,  get  possession  of 
patior,  pati,  passus  sum,  suffer,  allow 


Infinitives 

SECOND  CONJUGATION 

Pros.  Act.     vereri 
Perf.  Act.    \^ritus  esse 
Put.    Act.    VERiTiirus  esse 


THIRD    CONJUGATION 

sequi 

SECuTus  esse 
sECtJTurus  esse 


FOURTH   CONJUGATION 

Pres.  Act.     potiri 


Perf.  Act. 
Fut.   Act. 


poTiTus  esse 
POTiTiirus  esse 


THIRD    CONJUGATION   IN   -15 

pati 

PASSUS  esse 
PASsdrus  esse 


Participles 

SECOND   CONJUGATION 

Pres.  Act.     verens 
Perf.  Act.     VERITUS 
Fut.    Act.     VERiTiirus 
Fut.    Pass,  verendus 


THIRD    CONJUGATION 

sequens 

SECUTUS 

sEctJTiirus 
sequendus 


LESSON   XLVIII  149 


FOURTH   CONJUGATION  THIRD   CONJUGATION   IN   -iO 

Pres.  Act.    potiens  patiens 

Perf.  Act.     POTiTus  passus 

Put.  Act.    POTiTurus  PAssurus 

Put.  Pass,  potiendus  patiendus 


423.  SUBJUNCTIVE    CLAUSES— Continued 

Models 

1.  Homines  missi  sunt  qui  oppidum  munirent,  men  were 

sent  {ivho  were)  to  fortify  the  town. 

2.  Civitati  persuasit  ut  proficiscerentur,  he  persuaded  the 

state  that  they  should  start  out,  i.  e.,  to  start  out. 

3.  Civitati  persuadet  ne  proficiscantur,  he  is  persuading 

the  state  not  to  start  out. 

Notes,  a.  Model  1  is  another  example  of  a  purpose  clause.  The 
relative  pronoun  is  used  in  place  of  ut  to  introduce  a  purpose  clause 
when  there  is  a  convenient  antecedent  for  it,  especially  after  such 
verbs  as  mitto,  venio,  etc. 

h.  The  subordinate  clauses  of  Models  2  and  3  may  be  regarded  as 
complementary  purpose  clauses,  their  construction  being  the  same  as 
those  of  §413.     They  are  sometimes  called  volitive  clauses. 

c.  In  English,  purpose  is  often  expressed  by  the  infinitive. 

424.  VOCABULARY 

Aeduus,    -a,    -um,   Acduan.     Masculine   used   as   a   noun,   singular,   an 
Aeduan,  the  Aeduan;  plural,  the  Aeduans,  the  leading  tribe  of  Gaul. 

item,  adverb,  likewise. 

Conor,  conari,  conatus  sum,  try,  attempt. 
patior,  pati,  passus  sum,  suffer,  allow. 
proficiscor,  proficisci,  profectus  sum,  start  out. 
sequor,  sequi,  secutus  sum,  follow. 
vereor,  vereri,  veritus  sum,  fear,  he  afraid. 


150  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

DBILL   EXERCISES 

425.  1.  Give  the  principal  parts  of  suscipid,  and  all  its 
infinitives  and  participles,  with  their  translation.  2.  Give 
the  principal  parts  of  proficiscor,  and  all  its  infinitives  and 
participles,  with  their  translation. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

426.  1.  Homines  profecti  sunt  qui  carros  iumentaque 
coemerent.  2.  Helvetils  persuadere  conabimur  ut  sequan- 
tur.  3.  Eos  in  fines  nostros  venire  non  patiemur.  4.  Or- 
getorix  item  Dumnorigl  Aeduo  persuasit  ut  regnum  occu- 
paret.  5.  Diviciacus  ipse  fratrem  Dumnorlgem  maxime 
verebatur.  6.  His  rebus  induct!  eramus  ne  pacem  c5nfirma- 
remus.  7.  Legationem  suscipit  ut  has  res  conficiat.  8. 
Helvetii  ab  Orgetorlge  proficTscI  iussi  sunt.  9.  Orgetorix 
delectus  erat  ut  amicitiam  cum  civitatibus  confirmaret. 

427.  1.  "We  do  not  fear  this  road.  2.  We  were  starting 
out  to  seize  (i.e.,  in  order  that  we  might  seize)  this  bridge. 
3.  Men  came  (who  were)  to  establish  peace.  4.  Induced  by 
the  influence  of  Orgetorix,  Dumnorix  tried  to  seize  the 
royal-power,  5.  We  asked  why  the  Helvetians  were 
starting  out. 


LESSON   XLIX 

SUBJUNCTIVE   WITH   VERBS   OF   FEARING 
428.  TEXT 

Dumnorix  erat  Aeduus,  frater  DiviciacT.  Diviciacus  eo 
tempore  prmcipatum  in  Aedua  civitate  obtinebat  ac^  maxi- 
me  acceptus  plebi   erat.     Orgetorix   item  Dumnorigl  per- 


LESSON    XLIX 


151 


suasit  ut  regnum  in  sua  civitate  occuparet,  et  ei  flliam  suam 
in^  matrimonium  dedit. 


In  eo  itinere  persuade!  Castico,  Catamantaloedis  filio, 
Sequano,  cuius  pater  regnum  in  Sequanis  multos  annos 
obtinuerat  et  a  senatu  populi  Romani  amicus  appellatus 
erat,  ut  regnum  in  civitate  sua  occuparet,  quod  pater  ante 
habuerat;  itemque  Dumnorigi  Aeduo,  fratri  Diviciaci,  qui 
eo  tempore  principatum  in  civitate  obtinebat  ac  maxime 
plebi  acceptus  erat,  persuadet  ut  hoc  in  civitate  sua  faceret, 
eique  filiam  suam  in  matrimonium  dat.     (51-59,  Ch.  3.) 


NOTES 

1.  a  form  of  atque,  used  before  some  consonants. 

2.  in. 


429.     subjunctive  with  verbs  of  fearinq 

Models 

1.  Vereor  ne  bellum  gerat,  /  /ear  that  he  is  carrying  on 

war  (or  that  he  will  carry  on  war). 

2.  Veritus  sum  ut  bellum  gereret,  I  feared  that  he  was  not 

carrying  on  war  (or  that  he  would  not  carry  on  war). 

Notes,  a.  The  substantive  clauses  ne  bellum  gerat  and  ut  bellum 
gereret  are  the  direct  objects  of  the  verhs  of  fearing. 

h.  In  this  construction  ne  and  ut  have  meanings  which  are  the 
reverse  of  those  used  in  purpose  clauses. 

c.  The  rule  for  sequence  of  tenses  is  applied  here. 

430  RULE.  Verbs  expressing  fear  take  the  subjunctive 
with  ne   (affirmative),  ut   (negative). 


152  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

431.  VOCABULARY 

conatum,  -i,  n.  [conor],  attempt. 

concilid,  conciliare,  conciliavi,  conciliatum,  win,  gain. 

exercitus,  -us,  m.,  (trained)  arviy. 

meus,  -a,  -um,  possessive  adjective,  my. 

per-ficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fectum   [per,  through,  facio,  do},  literally,  do 

through,  i.  e.,  complete,  accomplish. 
potens,  genitive  potentis,  adjective,  powerful.    Declined  like  oriens. 

Give  and  define  words  from  the  base  of  potens. 


DRILL   EXERCISES 

432.  1.  Decline  the  Latin  for  the  whole  senate;  a  power- 
ful man  (vir).  2.  Conjugate  the  perfect  indicative  active 
of  c5go.  3.  Conjugate  the  future  indicative,  active  and 
passive,  of  deligo. 


TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

433.  1.  Verebatur  ne  venirent.  2.  Veremur  ut  veniant. 
3.  Vereor  ut  conata  nostra  perficiamus.  4.  Cum  exercitu 
potentissim5  veniam  ut  regnum  conciliem.  5.  Exercitum 
meum  mittam  qui  conata  nostra  perficiat.  6.  HelvetiT  vere- 
bantur  ne  OrgetorTx  coniurationem  faceret.  7.  Proficlsci 
conati  sumus  ut  principatum  occuparemus. 

434.  1.  We  are  afraid  that  this  will  be  seen.  2.  We 
were  afraid  that  this  would  not  be  seen.  3.  Orgetorix  feared 
that  the  Helvetians  had  heard-of  this  conspiracy.  4.  Orget- 
orix undertook  the  mission  in-order-that  the  Helvetians 
might  not  accomplish  their  attempts.  5.  We  saw  why  he 
was  not  sent.     6.  Who  was  afraid  that  we  would  not  come  ? 


LESSON  L  153 


LESSON   L 

SUBJUNCTIVE    OF   RESULT 

435.  TEXT 

Orgetorix,  ''Facile  est/'  inquit\  ''conata  nostra  perficere, 
propterea  quod  meae  civitatis  imperium  obtenturus  sum; 
atque  Helvetii  potentissimi  sunt  omnium  Gallorum;  meis 
copiis  meoque  exercitu  vobls^  regna^  coneiliabo."  (59-63, 
Ch.  3.) 

NOTES 

1.  said. 

2.  for  you. 

3.  Plural  because  referring  to  regnum  in  each  state.  Translate  by 
the  singular. 

436.  SUBJUNCTIVE    OF    RESULT 

Models 

1.  Finis  nostri  angustissimi  sunt,  ut  in  Galliam  iter  facere 

constituerimus,  oi^r  territory  is  very  Ihnited,  so-that 
we  have  decided  to  march  into  Gaul. 

2.  Tarn  fortes  sunt  ut  hostes  non  vereantur,  they  are  so 

brave  that  they  do  not  fear  the  enemy. 

Notes,     a.  In  these  sentences  the  fact  stated  in  the  subordinate 
clause  is  the  result  of  the  statement  contained  in  the  main  clause. 
&.  The  introductory  word  is  ut  (affirmative);  ut  non  (negative). 

c.  A  result  clause  is  often  preceded  by  tarn,  ita,  so,  tantus,  so  great, 
and  similar  words;  after  them  ut  is  translated  that;  without  them,  if 
the  clause  is  result,  ut  is  often  translated  so  that. 

d.  The  subjunctive  in  a  result  clause  is  translated  by  the  indicative. 

e.  When  a  question  arises  as  to  whether  a  subordinate  subjunctive 
verb  denotes  purpose  or  result,  remember 


154  BELLUM   HELVETICUM 

1.  that  an  ut-clause  may  denote  either  purpose  or  result.    It  is 

purpose  if  any  icill  or  intention  is  implied;  otherwise  it 
is  result. 

2.  that  ne-clauses  must  be  purpose;  ut  nan-clauses  must  be 

result. 

437.     RULE.     Result  is  expressed  by  the  subjunctive  with 
ut   (affirmative),  ut  non   (negative). 


438.  VOCABULARY 

firmus,  -a,  -um,  strong. 

fortiter,  adverb  [fortis],  hravely. 

ita,  adverb,  fo,  in  the  sense  of  in  such  a  manner. 

ius  iurandum,  gen.  iuris  iurandi,  n.,  compound  noun,  each  part  declined, 

dat.  iuri  iurando,  abl.  lure  iurando,  oath,  given  as  a  pledge  for  the 

sacredness  of  some  promise  or  declaration. 
oratio,  orationis,  f,,  speech. 
per,  preposition  with  accusative,  through. 
spero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  hoiie,  hope  for. 
tam,  adverb,  so,  in  the  sense  of  to  such  a  degree. 
tantus,  -a,  -um,  so  great. 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

439.  1.  Decline  and  compare  potens  (see  §111).  2.  De- 
cline the  Latin  for  my  army.  3.  Give  the  tense,  mood,  voice, 
person,  and  number  of  the  following  forms:  coemeris; 
coemeris;  coemeris;  coemeris. 


TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

440.  1.  Virtus  Germanorum  tanta  erat  ut  omnes  Gallos 
superarent.  2.  Hostes  tam  fortiter  contenderunt  ut  non 
superarentur.  3.  Hostes  fortiter  contendunt  ne  superen- 
tur.  4.  Hostes  verebantur  ne  superarentur.  5.  Oratidnc 
Orgetorigis   adducti,   Casticus   et   Dumnorix   ius   iurandum 


LESSON   LI  155 

dederunt.  6.  Hoc  itire  itirandd  coniurationem  firmiorem 
fecerunt.  7.  Hoc  fecerunt  propterea  quod  imperium  totlus 
Galliae  sperabant.  8.  Monies  undique  erant,  ut  Helvetii 
continerentur.  9.  Dumnorix  tarn  aceeptus  Orgetorigi  erat 
ut  flliam  in  matrimonium  ei  daret.  10.  Tarn  angusti  erant 
Helvetiorum  fines  ut  magno  dolore  afficerentur. 

441.  1.  The  mountains  are  so  high  that  the  Helvetians 
are  shut-in  (contineo).  2.  The  river  was  so  wide  that  we 
did  not  hear  him,  3.  They  led  the  men  many  miles  so  that 
they  might  not  be  seen  in  the  province.  4.  This  was  done 
(perf.)  so  that  they  were  not  seen  in  the  province.  5.  They 
were  afraid  that  they  would  not  be  seen  in  the  province. 
6.  Their  hope  was  so  great  that  they  started  out  into  Gaul 
with  all  their  forces. 


LESSON   LI 

GERUNDS     IMPERSONAL  VERBS 

442.  TEXT 

Hac  oratione  adductl,  inter  se  fidem  et  itis  iurandum 
dant,  et,  regno  occupato,  per  tres  potentissimos  ac  firmissi- 
mos  populos  totius  Galliae  imperium  occupare  conantur. 
(63-66,  Ch.  3.) 

443.  GERUNDS 

The  gerund  is  a  verbal  noun,  corresponding  to  the  English 
gerund  or  verbal  noun  ending  in  -inq,  except  that  the  Latin 


156  BELLUM    HELVETIC UM 

gerund  has  no  nominative.     It  is  of  the  second  declension, 
neuter  gender.    It  is  formed  on  the  present  base. 


FIRST   CONJUGATION  SECOND   CONJUGATION      THIRD   CONJUGATION 

Gen.     laudandi,  of  praising  monendi,  of  warning    ducendi,  of  leading 

Dot.     laudando,  for  praising  monendo,  for  warning  dticendo,  for  leading 

Ace.     laudandum,  praising  monendum,  naming     ducendum,  leading 

Ahl.     laudando,  hy,  from,  monendo,    hy,    from,   ducendo,    hy,   from, 
in,  with  praising  in,  with  warning  in,  with  leading 


FOURTH  CONJUGATION  THIRD  CONJUGATION  IN  -16 

Gen.     audlendi,  of  hearing  capiendi,  of  taling 

Bat.     audiendo,  for  hearing  capiendo,  for  talcing 

Ace.     audiendum,  hearing  capiendum,  talcing 

Abl.     audiendo,   by,   from,  capiendo,  hy,  from, 

in,  with  hearing  in,  with  talcing 


Note.  It  will  be  seen  that  these  forms  are  like  the  neuter  of 
the  future  passive  participle  (see  §388),  which  is  also  called  the 
gerundive.  Kecall  its  translation,  and  distinguish  it  from  the  gerund 
in  sentences  4  and  5,  §447. 


444.  IMPERSONAL   VERBS 

Model 

Hoc  facere  ei  licet    {to  do  this  is  permitted  to  him),  it  is 
permitted  him  to  do  this. 

Note.  Impersonal  verbs  correspond  to  English  impersonals  with  it 
as  subject.  They  have  no  personal  subject,  but  most  of  them  take  as 
subject  a  noun  clause,  or  infinitive,  or  sometimes  a  neuter  pronoun. 
They  are  used  only  in  the  third  person  singular  of  the  indicative  and 
subjunctive,  and  in  the  present  and  perfect  infinitives.  Almost  all  of 
them  are  of  the  second  conjugation,  like  licet. 


445. 


LESSON    Ll 

licet,  licere,  licuit,  it  is  permitted 

INDICATIVE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

INFINITIVES 

Pres. 

licet 

liceat 

licere 

Imp. 

licebat 

liceret 

Fut. 

licebit 

Perf. 

licuit 

licuerit 

licuissG 

Plup. 

Hcwerat 

licuisset 

157 


Fut.  Perf.      licuetit 


446. 


VOCABULARY 


licet,  licere,  licuit,  it  is  permitted. 

oportet,  oportere,  oportuit,  it  is  fitting,  it  is  right;  freely,  ought. 


DRILL   EXERCISES 

447.  1.  Give  the  gerunds  of  do,  teneo,  mitto,  munio, 
facio.  2.  Give  the  ablative  singular  and  genitive  plural  of 
potens  and  of  its  comparative.  3.  Conjugate  the  perfect 
and  future  perfect  indicative  and  the  perfect  subjunctive  of 
perficio. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

448.  1.  Exercitus  erat  cupidus  occupandl  hoc  oppidum. 
2.  CarrI  ad  proficlscendum  coementur.  3.  Ad  hoc  fiumen 
mature  jdo  iter  fecimus.  4.  Has  copias  legato  dedimus 
ducendas  in  Galliam.     5.  Hae  res  faciendae  sunt. 


449.  1.  Orgetorigi  licebat  legationem  suscipere.  2.  Apud 
Helvetios  non  licebat  regnum  obtinere.  3.  Oportebit  hostes 
sequl.  4.  Quaerebant  cur  hoc  sibi  liceret.  5.  Ilac  oratione 
adducti  sunt  ne  itis  iurandum  darent.  6.  Tanto  ..^lore 
afificiebantur  ut  in  Galliam  venire  constituerent.  7.  Quis 
verebatur  ut  hoc  facere  oporteret?      8.  Hoc  iure  iurand5 


158  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

dato,  illl  homines  tres  regnum  sperabant.  9.  Hoc  cornti  ex- 
ercitus  superabatiir.  10.  Tres  annos  quam  maximas  sementes 
fecimus. 

450.  1.  It  was  permitted  (to)  the  Helvetians  to  make 
this  journey.  2.  It  is  fitting  to  choose  Orgetorix.  3.  We 
shall  send  men  (who  are)  to  complete  (§423, 1)  our  attempts. 

4.  The  enemy's  army  was  so  great  that  we  did  not  conquer. 

5.  They  asked  where  you  (sing.)  were. 


SIXTH  REVIEW  LESSON 

451.  Give  an  account  of  the  events  narrated  in  Chapter 
III,  and  translate  it. 

452.  Memory  Work. 

1.  Ipse  (§406),  sui  (§407). 

2.  Infinitives  (§377),  participles  (§388),  gerunds  (§442), 
deponents  (§§421,  422),  impersonals  (§444). 

453.  Latin-English  Vocabulary. 

1.  Give  the  memoranda  of  the  following  nouns: 

auctoritas,  conatum,  exercitus,  ius  iurandum,  legatio,  oratio,  populus, 
principatus,  profectio,  senatus. 

2.  Give  the  principal  parts  and  meaning  of  the  following 
verbs : 

adduco,  concilio,  conficio,  conor,  deligo,  patior,  perficio,  permove5, 
proficiscor,  sequor,  spero,  suscipi5,  vereor. 


LESSON   Lll 


159 


3.  Give  the  meaning  of  the  following  words: 


ante,  firmus,  fortiter,  ita,  item,  maxime,  per,  potens,  -que,  satis,  tam, 
tantus.    Compare  firmus  and  potens.    What  case  is  used  with  per? 

454.     English-Latin  Vocabulary. 

Give  the  first  form  of  the  Latin  for  the  following : 


accomplish 

complete 

induce 

speech 

allow 

departure 

influence  (noun) 

start  out 

and  (three  words) 

embassy 

leadership 

strong 

army- 

enough 

mission 

suffer 

arouse 

especially 

oath 

sufficient 

attempt  (noun) 

fear 

people 

through 

attempt  (verb) 

finish 

powerful 

try 

before 

follow 

senate 

undertake 

bravely 

gain 

so  (two  WOl 

-ds) 

win 

choose 

hope  (verb) 

so  great 

455.     Syntax. 

Give  complete  Latin  sentences,  with  translation,  illus- 
trating the  ablative  absolute,  and  clauses  of  purpose  and 
result,  and  with  verbs  of  fearing. 


456. 


LESSON  LH 

DECLENSION    OF    DOMUS 

PLACE   TO   WHICH 

TEXT 


Ea  res  est^  Helvetils  per  indicium  enuntiata.  Orgeto- 
rlgem  ex^  vinculis  causam  dicere  coegerunt.  Poena  eum 
damnatum  sequetur.    Poena  erit  ut  igni  cremetur. 


160  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

Ea  res  est^  Helvetiis  per  indicium  enuntiata.  Moribus 
suTs^  Orgetorlgem  ex^  vinculis  eausam  dicere  coegerunt; 
damnatum*  poenam^  sequi^  oportebat,  ut^  igni  cremaretur. 
(67-69,  Ch.  4.) 

NOTES 

1.  est  enuntiata:  to  be  taken  altogether. 

2.  mdribus  suis:  an  ablative  like  this  is  best  translated  by  the  words 
according  to  or  in  accordance  with. 

3.  We  should  say  in. 

4.  Modifies  Orgetorigem  understood,  the  object  of  sequi.  For  its 
force  here,  compare  the  use  of  the  participle  in  the  English  sentence, 
"Beaten,  we  shall  retreat." 

5.  Subject  of  sequi. 

6.  poenam  sequi  (Orgetorigem)  damnatum,  taken  together,  is  the 
subject  of  oportebat,  and  tells  the  thing  that  was  fitting, 

7.  ut  igni  cremaretur  explains  what  the  punishment  was;  i.  e.,  the 
clause  is  in  apposition  with  poenam.  The  literal  translation  therefore 
is,  yunishment-to- follow  (Orgetorix)  condemned  was  fitting,  that  he  he 
burned  with  fire;  freely,  if  he  was  condemned,  it  was  the  proper  thing 
that  the  punishment  of  being  burned  to  death  should  follow. 

457.  VOCABULARY 

Caesar,  Caesaris,  m.,  a  Roman  "family  name"  (cog-n5men);  (Gaius 
Julius)  Caesar,  the  Roman  general  and  statesman,  author  of  the 
Commentaries. 

cremo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  burn. 

•damno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  condemn. 

died,  dicere,  dixi,  dictum,  say;   eausam  dicere,  plead  a  case. 

domus,  -us,  f.,  home;   for  declension,  see  §458. 

Genava,  -ae,  f.,  Geneva. 

ignis,  ignis,  m.,  abl.  igni,  fire. 

indicium,  -i,  n.,  information,  evidence;   freely,  informers. 

mos,  moris,  m.,  custom.. 

poena,  -ae,  f.,  punishment. 

Roma,  -ae,  f .,  Borne. 

vinculum,  -i,  n.,  chain. 

What  English  words  are  derived  from  cremo,  ignis? 
What  is  the  meaning  of  the  phrase  to  subpoena? 


LESSON   LII  161 

458.  DECLENSION  OF    DOMUS 

The  noun  domus  has  all  the  forms  of  the  fourth  and  several  of  the 
second  declension.  In  the  following  declension  the  more  common  form 
is  given  first,  and  should  be  so  learned.  Remember  also  that  the  gen- 
der of  this  noun  is  irregular,  and  that  it  omits  the  preposition  in  all 
place  constructions. 

domus,  F.,  house,  home 

domus 

domuum,  domSrum 

domibus 

domos,  domus 

domus 

domibus 

The  locative  is  explained  in  §474. 

459.  PLACE   TO   WHICH 

Models 


Nom. 

domus 

Gen. 

domus 

Bat. 

domui,  domo 

Ace. 

domum 

Voc. 

domus 

All. 

domo,  domu 

Log. 

doTTiT,  at  home 

Venit,  he  is  coming  < 


ad  oppidum,  to,  or  toward,  the  town. 

in  oppidum,  to,  or  into,  the  town. 

Romam,  to  Rome. 

domum,  home. 

riis,  to,  or  into,  the  country. 


Notes,  a.  In  these  sentences  the  phrases  answer  the  question,  *Ho 
what  place?" 

b.  The  verbs  with  which  they  are  used  imply  motion  or  extension. 

460.  RULE,  Place  to  which  is  denoted  by  the  accusative 
with  ad  or  in;  but  names  of  towns,  domus,  and  rus,  omit  the 
preposition. 

DRILL    EXERCISES 

461.  1.  Give  all  infinitives  and  participles  of  cogo  and 
sequor  w^ith  their  meanings.     2.  Give  synopsis  of  oportet. 


1G2  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

TRANSLATION   EXERCISES 

462.  1.  In  provinciam ;  ad  mtirum ;  ad  colles ;  in  omnia 
loca.  2.  Ad  fines  nostros  profecti  sunt.  3.  Ad  monies  eum 
sequi  oportet.  4.  Ipse  ex  vinculTs  causam  dicet  ut  domum 
mittatur.  5,  Genavam  multos  homines  sequI  exercitum  cogunt. 
6.  Illo  tempore  in  Galliam  iter  facere  Helvetii  constituerant. 

463.  1.  Into  the  forest;  to  the  river;  into  the  sea;  to 
Spain;  into  Aquitania.  2.  Those  (men)  will  be  compelled 
to  start  out  into  these  mountains.  3.  We  had  followed  him 
to  another  river.  4.  The  oath  having  been  given,  we  shall 
come  to  Rome.  5.  We  are  leading  troops  home  that  the 
town  may  not  be  seized.  6.  Within  three  years,  these  places 
will  be  seized  by  our  army.  7.  It  is  fitting  to  disclose  our 
custom  to  Caesar.  8.  By  this  custom,  we  are  compelled  to 
burn  Orgetorix  by  fire. 


LESSON  Lin 

CONJUGATION   OP    EO 

PLACE   PROM   WHICH 

464.  TEXT 

Dies^  constituta  est  dictionis^  causae.  Ea  die  Orgetorix 
ad  indicium  omnem  suam  familiam  undique  coegit;  omnes 
clientes,  quorum  magnum  numerum  habebat,  eodem  con- 
duxit;  per  eos  se  eripuit  ne  causam  diceret. 


Die^  constituta  causae  dictionis^  Orgetorix  ad  indicium 
omnem  suam  familiam,  ad^  hominum*  milia  decern,  undique 
coegit,  et  omnes  clientes  obaeratosque  suos,  quorum  mag- 


LESSON   LIII  163 

num  numerum  habebat,  eodem  conduxit ;  per  eos,  ne  causam 
diceret,  se  eripuit.     (70-74,  Ch.  4.) 

NOTES 

1.  For  the  gender  see  §298. 

2.  Though  genitive,  this  word  may  be  translated  by  for, 

3.  To-the-numher-of . 

4.  For   the   case   and   translation   compare  passuum   in   the   phrase 
milia  passuum. 

465.  VOCABULARY 

cliens,  clientis,  m.  or  f.,  dependent,  retainer. 

con-duc5,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -ductum,  lead  together;    colled, 

decern,  indeclinable  cardinal   (numeral)   adjective,  ten. 

dictio,  dictionis,  f.   [dico,  say^,  literally,  a  saying ;    causae  dictio,  the 

pleading  of  the  case,  pleading  the  case. 
eo,  ire,  ii  or  ivi,  itum,  go.    For  conjugation,  see  §466. 
eodem,  adverb  [idem,  the  same'],  to  the  same  place. 
e-ripio,  -ripere,  -ripui,  -reptum  [rapid,  rapere,  rapui,  raptum,  snatch'\f 

literally,  snatch  out;    free. 
familia,  -ae,  f.,  literally,  a  body  of  servants,  i.  e.,  retinue, 
iudicium,  -i,  n.,  trial. 
obaeratus,  -i,  m.,  dehtor. 

What  English  words  are  derived  from  conduce,  decern, 
iudicium? 

466.  CONJUGATION    OF   EO 
Eo,  ire,  ii  or  ivi,  itum,  go 


INDICATIVE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

Pres. 

e6,is,it 
imus,  itis,  eunt 

earn 

Imp. 

ibam 

ir«m 

Fut. 

ibo 

Perf. 

ii  (ivi) 

ierim  (iverim) 

Plup. 

ieram  (iveram) 

issem  (ivissem) 

Fut.  Perf. 

iero  (ivero) 

164  BELLUM    HELVETIC UM 


INFINITIVES 

PARTICIPLES 

Pres. 

ire 

Pres. 

iens  (Gen.  euntis) 

Perf. 

isse  (ivisse) 

Fut. 

iturus 

Fut. 

iturus  esse 

Notes.  (1)  Though  eo  is,  in  some  forms,  like  a  fourth  conjugation 
verb,  the  imperfect  and  future  indicative  are  formed  as  in  the  first 
and  second  conjugations.  (2)  Before  a  vowel  the  i  of  the  stem 
becomes  e  in  the  present  indicative  and  subjunctive. 


467.  PLACE   FROM   WHICH 

jModels 


Venit,  he  is  coming 


'  ab  oppido,  (away)  from  the  town. 
de  oppido,  (down)  from  the  town. 
ex  oppido,  (out  of)  from  the  town. 
Roma,  from  Rome. 
domo,  from  home. 
rure,  from  the  country. 


Notes,  a.  In  these  sentences,  the  modifiers  answer  the  question, 
<*From  what  place?" 

h.  The  verbs  with  which  they  are  used  imply  motion. 

468.  RULE.  Place  from  which  is  denoted  by  the  ablative 
with  ab,  de,  or  ex;  but  names  of  towns,  domus,  and  rus,  omit 
the  preposition. 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

469.  1.  Give  memoranda  of  senatus,  imperium.  2.  Give 
synopsis  in  third  person  singular  of  conficid. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

470.  1.  Ex  itinere;  ab  hoc  lacu;  de  montibus.  2.  Ex 
Gallia   in   fines   Helvetiorum   German!   ire   conabuntur.     3. 


LESSON  LIV  165 

Domum  omnes  clientes  nostri  mittentur,  ut  finibus  nostris 
Germanos  prohibeamus.  4.  Hie  se  eripiet  ne  ex  vinculis 
causam  dicere  cogatur.  5.  Genavam  omnem  familiam  con- 
ducere  conatur.  6.  Profectio  ab  Helvetiis  lege  confirmabi- 
tur,  ne  fllil  filiaeque  fines  angustos  habeant. 

471.  1.  Out  of  the  sea;  away  from  the  fields;  down 
from  the  hill.  2.  We  were  going  from  that  river  to  an- 
other. 3.  I  shall  go  from  Rome.  4.  We  have  decided  to 
march  ten  miles  from  home.  5.  His  dependents  started 
down  from  this  mountain.  6.  They  will  be  collected  by 
his  sons  and  daughters. 


LESSON  LIV 

PLACE  IN  WHICH 

472.  TEXT 

Civitas  ob  earn  rem  incitabatur  et  armis  ius  suum  exsequT 
conabatur;  multitudinem  hominum  ex  agris  magistrattis 
cogebant.  Interea  Orgetorlx  mortuus  est.  Et  est  suspicio 
ut  ipse^  sibi  mortem  consciverit. 


Cum^  civitas  ob  eam  rem  incitata  armis  ius  suum  exsequi 
conaretur,  multitudinemque  hominum  ex  agris  magistrates 
cogerent,  Orgetorlx  mortuus  est;  neque  abest  suspicio,  ut^ 
Helvetii  arbitrantur,  quin  ipse^  sibi  mortem  consciverit. 
(74-78,  Ch.  4.) 

NOTES 

1.  cum  with  the  subjunctive  may  mean  when,  ivhile,  since,  although; 
which  makes  the  best  sense  here? 


166  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

2.  ut  with  the  indicative  is  a  conjunctive  adverb  which  here  means  as, 

3.  Used  to  intensify  sibi;  it  may  be  omitted  in  translation. 

473.  VOCABULARY 

arbitror,  arbitrari,  arbitratus  sum,  thinJc. 

anna,  armorum,  n.,  plural  only,  arms. 

cdn-sciscd,  -sciscere,  -scivi,  -scitum,  decree;  sibi  mortem  consciscere, 

literally,  decree  death  to  owe 's  self,  i.  e.,  commit  suicide. 
ex-sequor,  -sequi,  -secutus  sum,  literally,  follow  out;  as  we  say,  follow 

up,  i.  e.,  enforce. 
in-cito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  urge  on;   arouse. 
interea,  adverb,  meanwhile. 
ius,  iuris,  n.,  right. 

maglstratus,  -us,  m.,  literally,  magistracy ;  here,  magistrate. 
morior,  mori  (or  moriri),  mortuus  sum,  future  participle  moriturus,  die. 
mors,  mortis,  f.,  death. 
neque,   negative  coordinate  conjunction,  and  .   .   .  not;    neque  .  .  . 

neque,  neither  .  .  .  nor. 
propter,  preposition  with  ace,  on  account  of. 
quin,  subordinate  conjunction,  that. 
suspicio,  suspicionis,  f.,  suspicion. 
vagor,  vagari,  vagatus  sum,  wander. 

474.  LOCATIVE    CASE 

The  locative  case,  which  is  used  only  to  denote  place  in 
which,  is  confined  to  names  of  towns  and  small  islands  in 
the  singular  of  the  first  declension  (where  it  is  formed  by 
adding  ae  to  the  base),  and  in  the  singular  of  the  second 
and  third  declensions  (where  it  is  formed  by  adding  i  to 
the  base)  ;  and  to  the  following  forms  of  common  nouns, 
domi  {at  home),  ruri  {in  the  country),  hum!  {on  the 
ground),  militiae  and  belli  {in  war). 

Examples:     First  declension;  Genavae,  at  Geneva. 

Second  declension;   Corinthi,  at  Corinth. 
Third  declension;  Carthagini,  at  Carthage. 


LESSON   LIV  167 

475.  PLACE   IN   WHICH 

Models 


Est,  he  is 


'  in  oppido,  m  the  town. 
Romae,  in  Rome,  at  Rome, 
domi,  at  home. 
ruri,  in  the  country. 


Notes,  a.  In  these  sentences  the  modifiers  answer  the  question, 
"In  what  place?"  or  ''Where?" 

ft.  The  verbs  with  which  they  are  used  do  not  imply  motion. 

476.  RULE.  Place  in  which  is  denoted  by  the  ablative 
with  in,  but  names  of  towns,  domus,  and  rus,  omit  the  prepo^ 
sit  ion  and  use  the  locative  if  there  is  one. 


DRILL    EXERCISES 

477.  1.  Give  the  memoranda  of  arma,  ius,  magistratus. 
2.  Give  all  infinitives  and  participles  of  proficiscor  with 
their  meanings. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

478.  1.  In  agris ;  in  silva ;  in  his  montibus ;  Romae ;  in 
illo  itinere.  2.  In  Gallia  sunt  multae  civitates.  3.  Illo 
anno,  Castieus  in  finibus  nostris  vagabatur.  4.  Omnes 
clientes  suos  ad  tria  milia  domI  habebat.  5.  Ex  vinculTs 
ab  amlcis  ereptus,  Orgetorlx  Genavae  mortuus  est.  6.  Ipsi 
magistratus  de  montibus  ad  lacus  ducuntur. 

479.  1.  He  went  to  the  province ;  he  went  into  the  prov- 
ince ;  he  is  in  the  province ;  he  will  go  out  of  the  province ; 
he  will  go  away  from  the  province.  2.  In  the  cart  was  a 
supply  of  arms.  3.  Men  on  the  highest  mountains  were 
being  aroused.     4.  At  that  time  the  magistrates  were  lead- 


168  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

ing  their  army,  which  was  in  the  province.  5.  On  account  of 
(express  with  propter)  this  suspicion,  we  have  not  tried  to 
establish  peace  in  Geneva.  6.  The  Gauls  fought  at  home 
and  in  other  states  that  they  might  snatch  their  friends 
from  death. 


LESSON  LV 

DECLENSION   OF    7dEM 

480.  TEXT 

Helvetii  e  flnibus  suls  exire  constituerant.  Itaque  post 
Orgetorigis  mortem  id  facere  conati  sunt.  Ubi  iam^  ad  eam 
rem  parati  sunt,  oppida  sua  omnia,  numero  ad*  duodecim, 
vicos  ad^  quadringentos,  reliqua  privata  aedificia  incendunt. 


Post  eius  mortem  nihilo  minus  Helvetii  id  quod  constitu- 
erant facere  conantur,  ut^  e  fmibus  suis  exeant.  Ubi  iam^ 
se^  ad  eam  rem  paratos  esse  arbitrati  sunt,  oppida  sua 
omnia,  numero  ad*  duodecim,  vicos  ad*  quadringentos, 
reliqua  privata  aedificia  incendunt.     (79-83,  Ch.  5.) 

NOTES 

1.  ut  exeant,  literally,  that  they  ihould  go  out,  may  be  translated  by 
the  English  infinitive,  to  go  out.    See  §423,  2,  3. 

2.  ubi  iam,  as  soon  as. 

3.  se  esse  arbitrati  sunt,  they  considered  themselves  to  te, 

4.  up  to,  as  many  as. 

481.  VOCABULARY 

aedificium,  -i,  n.,  huilding. 

duo-decim,  indeclinable  cardinal  (numeral)  adjective  [duo,  two,  decern, 
ten'],  twelve. 


.    LESSON   LV  169 

ex-eo,  ex-ire,  ex-il,  ex-itum,  go  out,  go  forth. 

iam,  adverb,  already ;  now. 

idem,  eadeni;  idem,  the  tame.    For  declension,  see  §482. 

in-cendo,  -cendere,  -cendi,  -censum,  set  fire  to,  set  on  fire. 

nihilo,  n.,  ablative  of  defective  noun,  hy  nothing,  nihilo  minus,  liter- 
ally, none  the  less,  i.  e.,  nevertheless. 

paratus,  -a,  -um  [perfect  passive  participle  of  par5,  prepare],  literally, 
prepared;  ready. 

post,  preposition  with  ace,  after. 

privatus,  -a,  -um,  private. 

quadringenti,  -ae,  -a,  cardinal  (numeral)  adjective,  four  hundred, 

vicus,  -i,  m.,  village. 

482.  THE    DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUN  7dEM 

idem,  the  same 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Nom. 

idem         eadem 

idem 

eidem 

eaedem 

eadem 

Gen. 

eiusdem   eiusdem 

eiusdem 

eorundem 

earundem 

eorundem 

Bat. 

eidem       eidem 

eidem 

eisdem 

eisdem 

eisdem 

Ace. 

eundem    eandem 

idem 

eosdem 

easdem 

eadem 

All. 

eodem      eadem 

eodem 

eisdem 

eisdem 

eisdem 

In  the  plural,  idem  and  isdem  are  sometimes  used  instead  of  eidem 
and  eisdem. 

Eeview  the  declension  of  is  (§142).  Idem  is  formed  of  the  demon- 
strative is  and  the  suffix  -dem.  Note  the  changes  undergone  by  is 
before  the  suffix. 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

483.  1.  Give  the  conjugation  in  the  present  indicative, 
and  the  synopsis  in  the  first  plural,  of  the  verb  exeo.  2. 
Give  all  the  infinitives  and  participles  of  conor  with  their 
meanings. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

484.  1.  Eadem  die;  in  eodem  marl;  eiusdem  vici;  eidem 
viro ;    eaedem  domiis.     2.  Ubi  eidem  HelvatiT  omnes  vicos, 


170  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

oppida,  privata  aedificia  incenderunt,  spes  suas  sustulerunt. 
3.  Magistratus  eos  nihil  domo  efferre  iubebant.  4.  Galli  eos 
hostes  suis  navibus  prohibere  conatT  sunt.  5.  Omnibus 
domibus  nostris  incensis,  Romanos  trans  idem  fltimen 
sequemur. 

485.  1.  By  the  same  road;  at  the  same  time;  on  the 
same  ship;  of  the  same  home;  by  means  of  four  hundred 
soldiers.  2.  After  this,  he  ordered  the  twelve  legions  to 
follow  that  they  might  seize  those  villages.  3.  The  same 
buildings  had  been  set-on-fire.  4.  In  Rome  and  in  other 
towns,  the  same  men  had  homes.  5.  As  soon  as  (ubi  iam) 
all  things  were  prepared,  Caesar  ordered  the  soldiers  to 
come  to  him. 


LESSON  LVI 

POSSESSIVE    AND    PARTITIVE    GENITIVES 

486.  TEXT 

Frtimentum  omne,  praeter  quod^  secum  portaturi  erant, 
combtirunt  ut  domum  reditionis^  spes  tolleretur.  Ob  earn 
causam  paratiores  sunt  ut  omnia  perlcula  subirent;^  trium 
mensium^    molita    cibaria    quemque    domo    efferre    iubent. 


Frtimentum  omne,  praeter  quod^  secum  portatur!  erant, 
combtirunt,  ut,  domum  reditionis-  spe  sublata,^  paratiores 
ad  omnia  perlcula  subeunda*  essent;'^  trium  mensium^ 
molita  cibaria  sibi  quemque  domo  efferre  iubent.  (83-87, 
Ch.  5.) 


LESSON   LVI  171 

NOTES 

1.  Supply  id  as  antecedent  and  as  the  object  of  praeter;  then  id 
quod  =  that  which  =  what. 

2.  A  verbal  noun,  as  its  meaning  shows;  therefore  it  is  modified 
by  the  noun  domum,  in  the  construction  of  place  to  which  (§459). 

3.  Omit  the  translation  of  the  ablative  absolute  spe  sublata  and  its 
modifier  domum  reditionis  until  the  rest  of  the  sentence  has  been  worked 
out. 

4.  ad  pericula  subeunda:  subeunda  is  the  future  passive  participle 
of  the  irregular  verb  subeo;  literally,  for  clangers  to-he-undergone,  i.  e., 
to  undergo  dangers. 

5.  An  imperfect  subjunctive  may  be  used  when  the  main  verb  is 
historical  present.    For  the  translation  of  ut  subirent,  see  §423,  2,  3. 

6.  trium  mensium:  literally,  three  months';  i.  e.,  enough  to  last 
three  months. 


487.  VOCABULARY 

cibarius,  -a,  -um,  relating  to  food.  Neuter  plural  used  as  substantive, 
like  English  * 'food-stuffs, "  i.  e.,  provisions. 

com-buro,  -btirere,  -bussi,  -bustum  [con,  intensive],  hum  up;  the  up 
being  intensive  in  English. 

ef-fero,  -ferre,  etc.,  irregular,  literally,  bear  out;  tale. 

molo,  molere,  molui,  molitum,  grind,  molita  cibaria,  literally,  ground 
food-stuffs,  i.  e.,  meal. 

periculum,  -i,  n.,  danger. 

porto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  carry. 

praeter,  preposition  with  accusative,  except. 

quis-que,  quae-que,  quid-que  (quod-que),  genitive  cuius-que,  etc.,  in- 
definite pronoun,  each  one. 

reditio,  reditionis,  f.,  (a)  returning. 

sub-e5,  sub-ire,  sub-ii,  sub-itum,  irregular,  undergo. 

tollo,  tollere,  sus-tuli,  sub-latum,  literally,  raise;  very  often,  talce  away. 


What  is  the  difference  in  meaning  between  incendo  and 
comburo? 


172  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

488.  POSSESSIVE    GENITIVE 

Model 

Fines  Helvetiorum  erant  lati,  ihe  territory  of  the  Helve- 
tians  was  wide. 

Notes,  a.  The  general  use  of  the  genitive  with  nouns  (§35)  is 
divided  into  several  subdivisions,  one  of  which  is  illustrated  in  this 
sentence. 

h.  The  word  Helvetiorum  tells  ichose  territory  is  meant.  Hence 
this  genitive  is  called  the  possessive  genitive;  it  answers  the  question 
"Whosef 


489.      RULE.     The  possessive  genitive  is  used  to  denote  tlie 
person  or  thing  that  possesses  something. 


490.  PARTITIVE   GENITIVE 

Model 

Gallorum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae,  the  bravest  of  all 
the  Gauls  are  the  Belgians. 

Notes,  a.  The  expression  Galldrum  omnium  denotes  the  whole  of 
which  fortissimi  is  a  part. 

b.  Remember  that  the  partitive  genitive  is  used  to  denote  the  whole 
of  which  a  part  is  mentioned — not  the  whole  of  which  the  whole  is 
mentioned;  e.g.,  pars  hominum,  part  of  the  men,  but  omnes  homines, 
all  (of)   the  men. 

c.  Adjectives  (especially  neuter)  and  pronouns  are  often  used  with 
this  construction;  e.g.,  quid  dolorls,  what  (how  much)  grief;  multum 
frumenti,  much  grain. 

491.  RULE.  The  partitive  genitive  (or  genitive  of  the 
whole)  is  used  to  express  the  whole  of  which  a  part  is 
mentioned. 


LESSON   LVII  173 

DRILL   EXEECISES 

492.  Decline  tres,  frumentum  omne,  spes,  quisque. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

493.  1.  Quisque  eorum ;  in  provincia  nostra ;  in  provin- 
ciam  nostram ;  multa  milia  passuum.  2.  Arma  exercitus 
ex  oppidis  ab  hominibus  tollentur.  3.  Multos  menses  fru- 
mentum efferent.  4.  Decem  mllia  hominum  ab  Gallis  mit- 
tentur  qui  ex  finibus  omnia  arma  portent  (§423,  1).  5. 
Vereor  ne  haec  comburantur. 

494.  1.  Part  of  the  grain;  all  (of)  the  grain;  the  Gaul's 
home;  the  Gauls'  home;  the  days  of  this  month.  2.  You 
are  the  best-known  of  all  the  Gauls.  3.  Three  thousand 
men  are  now  ready.  4.  All  of  the  towns  will  be  set-on-fire 
by  the  same  army.  5.  Each  one  was  ordered  to  carry  his 
neighbor's  arms  and  to  undergo  all  dangers.  6.  All  hope 
had  been  taken  away  by  this  fire. 


LESSON  Lvn 

DECLENSION   OF    VlS 

OBJECTIVE    GENITIVE 

495.  TEXT 

Finitimi  Helvetiorum  eodem  consilio*  utuntur.  Hoc  con- 
silium est  utl^  una  cum  Helvetiis  proficiscantur.  Oppidis 
exustis,  proficiscentur.  Helvetil  fmitimis  suTs  persuadent 
ut  proficiscantur.  Eodem  consilio*  usT,"  oppidis  suTs  vicTs- 
que  exustis,  una  cum  Helvetiis  proficiscentur. 


174  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

Persuadent  Rauracis  et  Tulingis  et  LatobrlgTs,  finitimis, 
uti^  eodem-  usi^  consilio,*  oppidis  suis  vicisque  exustis,  una 
cum  eis  proficlscantur.     (87-90,  Ch.  5.) 

NOTES 

1.  Another  form  of  ut.  It  is  distinguished  from  titi,  the  present 
infinitive  of  utor,  by  its  short  u. 

2.  In  translating  the  sentence,  omit  the  words  eodem  .  .  .  exustis, 
until  the  rest  of  the  sentence  is  done. 

3.  Determine  exactly  what  form  this  is  (it  is  plural),  and  its  syntax, 
before  attempting  to  translate. 

4.  Translate  as  though  a  direct  object  of  utuntur  (usi). 

496.  VOCABULARY 

consilium,  -i,  n.,  plan. 

ex-uro,  -urere,  -ussi,  -ustum  [compare  com-buro],  literally,  hum  out; 
we  say,  hum  up. 

Latobrigi,  -orum,  m.,  the  Latohrigi,  a  tribe  living  north  of  the  Hel- 
vetians. 

memoria,  -ae,  f.,  memory,  recollection. 

Rauraci,  -drum,  m.,  the  Eauraci,  a  tribe  living  north  of  the  Helvetians. 

Tulingi,  -orum,  m.,  the  TuUngi,  m.,  a  tribe  living  northeast  of  the  Helve- 
tians. 

una,  adverb  [unus,  one],  together. 

utor,  titi,  tisus  sum,  use;  with  consillo,  adopt.    Governs  ablative. 

vis,  vis,  f.,  force,  strength;  for  declension,  see  §497. 

497,  DECLENSION   OF    VIS 

vis,  F.,  force 

SINGULAR  PLUEAL 

Nom.  vis  vires 

Gen.  vis  virium 

Dat.  vi  viribus 

Ace.  vim  vires  (virls) 

Voc.  vis  vires 

Abl.  vi  viribus 


LESSON    LVII  175 

498.  OBJECTIVE    GENITIVE 

Model 

Orgetorigis  spes  regni  fuit  magna,  Orgetorix's  hope  (of) 
for  royal  power  was  great. 

Note.  The  objective  genitive  may  be  used  with  nouns  that  have 
a  corresponding  verbal  idea.  The  notion  expressed  by  the  noun  and 
limiting  genitive  can  usually  be  expanded  into  a  sentence  containing 
an  active  verb.  If  the  genitive  becomes  the  object  of  such  verb,  it 
is  objective.  In  the  model  above,  the  idea  is  implied  that  Orgetorix 
hoped  for  royal  power  and  therefore  regni  is  objective. 

499.  RULE.  An  objective  genitive  is  used  to  denote  the 
person  or  thing  that  receives  the  act  or  feeling  implied  in  a 
noun  or  adjective. 

DRILL  EXERCISES 

500.  Decline  the  expressions  haec  magna  vis,  acer  vir, 
omne  tempus. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

501.  1.  Causae  dictio ;  Helvetiorum  spes  gloriae.  2. 
GallT  propter  initium  belli  domo  profecti  erant.  3.  Orgeto- 
rix imperium  suae  civitatis  vi  obtinebit.  4.  Galli  propter 
memoriam  virtutis  suae  bellum  parabant.  5.  HelvetiT, 
domum  reditionis  spe  sublata,  profectionem  suam  suscepe- 
runt. 

502.  1.  Many  soldiers ;  many  of  the  soldiers ;  all  the  sol- 
diers ;  all  the  homes  of  the  soldiers.  2.  They  were  not  influ- 
enced by  the  memory  of  these  things.  3.  Caesar  will  make 
a  beginning  of  his  journey  at  the  same  time.  4.  We  have 
not  disclosed  the  cause  of  our  plan.  5.  The  part  of  the  army 
that  has  used  (facio)  force  will  be  conquered. 


176  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

LESSON  LVIII 

DECLENSION    OF    DUO  CONJUGATION   OF    POSSUM 

COMPLEMENTARY   INFINITIVE 

503.  TEXT 

Boi  trans  Rhenum  incoluerant  et  in  agrum  Noricum 
transierant  Noreiamque  oppugnarant.^  Hos  Boios^  recep- 
tos  ad  se  soeios  sibi  Ilelvetii  adscTscunt. 

Boiosque,^  qui  trans  Rhenum  incoluerant  et  in  agrum 
Noricum  transierant  Noreiamque  oppugnarant/  receptos  ad 
se  soeios  sibi  adsciscunt.     (90-92,  Ch.  5.) 

NOTES 

1.  Contracted  from  oppugnaverant.  In  the  tenses  formed  from  the 
perfect  base  the  v  is  sometimes  dropped,  and  the  vowel  following  it 
then  unites  with   the  preceding  vowel. 

2.  Arrange  thus:  adsciscunt  sibi,  soeios,  Boios  receptos  ad  se: 
literally,  they  accept  to  themselves,  (as)  allies,  the  Boii,  (having  been) 
received  to  themselves ;  freely,  the  Boii  .  .  .  they  admit  to  their  number 
and  receive  as  allies. 

504.  VOCABULARY 

ad-scisc6,  -sciscere,  -scivi,  -scitum,  receive  to  anyone;  accept. 

Boi,  Boiorum,  m.,  the  Boii,  a  tribe  living  near  the  Helvetians. 

duo,  duae,  duo,  cardinal  (numeral)  adjective,  two;   for  decl.  see  §505. 

Noreia,  -ae,  f .,  Noreia,  a  town  of  the  Norici. 

Noricus,  -a,  -um,  of  the  Norici,  a  people  living  north  of  the  Alps. 

op-pugno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  [ob,  against],  literally,  fight  against;  regu- 
larly, assault,  attacTc. 

possum,  posse,  potui,  irregular,  he  able,  can;  he  powerful.  For  con- 
jugation, see  §506. 


LESSON  LVIII 


177 


re-cipio,    -cipere,   -cepi,   -ceptum    [capio,   taTce],   literally,   take   hacTc; 

receive. 
socius,  -a,  -um,  associated.     Masculine  used  as  substantive,  ally. 
trans-eo,  -ire,  -ii,  -itum,  irregular,  literally,  go  across,  i.  e.,  cross. 


505. 


DECLENSION    OF    DUO 

duo,  two 


Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Norn. 

duo 

duae 

duo 

Gen. 

duorum 

duarum 

duorum 

Bat. 

duobus 

duabus 

duobus 

Ace. 

duos,  duo 

duas 

duo 

All. 

dudbus 

duabus 

duobus 

506. 


CONJUGATION    OF   POSSUM 

possum,  posse,  potui,  he  ahle,  can 


INDICATIVE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

Fres. 

possum,  potes, 

potest 

possim 

possumus,  potestis, 

possunt 

Imp. 
Put. 

poteram 
potero 

possem 

Perf. 

potui 

potuerim 

Plup. 

potueram 

potuissem 

Fut.  Perf. 

potuero 

INFINITIVES 

PARTICIPLE 

Fres. 

posse 

Fres.       potens 

Perf. 

potuisse 

The  verb  possum  is  a  compound  of  potis,  able  (base,  pot)  and  sum, 
I  am,  and  is  therefore  conjugated  like  sum;  but  note  the  following: 

1.  t  before  s  is  changed  to  s. 

2.  f  in  the  perfect  base  is  dropped. 

3.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  may  be  found  by  adding  the  personal 
endings  to  the  present  infinitive;  see  §342,  1. 


178  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

507.  INFINITIVE  AS  SUBJECT  AND  COMPLEMENT 

An  infinitive  partakes  of  the  nature  of  both  noun  and 
verb.  Its  noun  nature  may  be  seen  from  the  fact  that  it 
may  be  used  in  the  nominative  as  the  subject  of  a  verb. 
Its  verb  nature  may  be  seen  from  the  facts  that  it  has 
tenses,  usually  has  a  subject,  and  may  have  an  object  and 
an  adverbial  modifier. 

508.  Models 

1.  Poenam    sequi   oportebat,    punishment   to   follow   was 

fitting;  i.  e.,  it  was  fiting  that  punishment  follow. 

2.  Duobus  itineribus  exire  poterant,  they  {were  aUe  to) 

could  go  forth  hy  two  roads. 

Notes,  a.  In  Model  1  the  infinitive  phrase  poenam  sequi  is  the 
subject  of  the  impersonal  verb  oportebat. 

h.  In  Model  2  the  infinitive  is  used  to  complete  the  thought  of  the 
verb  poterant,  and  so  is  called  a  complementary  infinitive. 

c.  The  complementary  infinitive  is  used  in  both  English  and  Latin. 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

509.  1.  Decline  unum  iter,  duo  itinera,  tria  itinera.  2. 
Decline  any  third  declension  adjective  of  three  terminations. 

3.  Give  all  infinitives  and  participles  of  recipio,  with  their 
meanings. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

510.  1.  Poteram,  potueram ;  potero,  potuero ;  poterunt, 
potuerunt,  potuerint.  2.  Ad  flumen  Rhodanum  duobus 
annis  ducemini.     3.  Angusto  itinere  exTre  constittitum  est. 

4.  Sequani  itinere  Helvetios  prohibere  potuerunt  quod  mul- 
tos  fmitimos  socios  sibi  adscTverant.  5.  Caesarem  oppidum 
Gallorum  oppugnare  posse  speramus.  6.  Flumen  transire 
constituunt  ut  oppidum  occupetur. 


SEVENTH  REVIEW  LESSON  .     179 

511.  1.  You  were  able,  you  had  been  able ;  you  will  be 
able,  you  will  have  been  able.  2.  Caesar  had  ordered  the 
people  to  prepare  a  supply  of  grain.  3.  You  can  start  out 
by  these  two  roads.  4.  The  Helvetians  were  attempting  to 
assault  the  town,  on  account  of  their  desire  for  royal-power. 
5.  Two  thousand (s)  of  our  allies  were  not  able  to  cross  the 
river. 


SEVENTH  REVIEW  LESSON 

512.     Give  an  account  of  the  events  narrated  in  Chapters 
IV  and  V,  and  translate  those  chapters. 


513.     Memory  work. 

1.  Conjugation  of  eo  (§464),  possum  (§507). 

2.  Declension  of  domus  (§458),  idem  (§482),  vis 

(§495),  duo  (§505). 


514.     Latin-English  vocabulary. 

Give  the  memoranda  of  the  nouns ;  the  entire  nominative 
of  the  adjectives  and  their  comparison;  the  principal  parts 
of  the  verbs;  the  case  used  with  the  prepositions;  and  the 
meanings  of  all  the  words. 


aedificium 

idem 

oppugno 

recipio 

arma 

ignis 

paratus 

socius 

cliens 

incendo 

periculum 

subeo 

conducd 

incito 

porta 

suspicio 

consilium 

interea 

possum 

tollo 

c'.ecem 

ius 

post 

transeQ 

180 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


domus 

magistratus 

praeter 

una 

duo 

memoria 

privatus 

utor 

duodecim 

mors 

propter 

vagor 

eo 

mds 

quadringenti 

vicus 

eodera 

neque 

quisque 

vis  * 

iam 

515.     English-Latin  vocabulary. 

Give  the  first  form  of  the  Latin  for  the  following : 


after 

custom 

meanwhile 

set  fire  to 

ally  (noun) 

danger 

memory 

suspicion 

already 

death 

neither 

take  away 

am  able 

dependent 

nor 

ten 

and  not 

each 

now 

together 

arms 

except 

on  account  of 

twelve 

arouse 

fire 

plan 

two 

assault 

force 

private 

undergo 

building 

four  hundred 

ready 

urge  on 

carry 

go 

receive 

use 

carry  away 

go  across 

right 

village 

collect 

home 

to  the  same 

place 

wander 

cross 

magistrate 

516.     Syntax. 

Give  the  rules  of  syntax  for  the  three  expressions  of  place, 
for  the  possessive  genitive,  objective  genitive,  and  partitive 
genitive. 


517.     Composition. 

Make  up  a  short  English  sentence  illustrating  each  of  the 
constructions  mentioned  in  §516,  and  then  translate  those 
sentences. 


LESSON   LIX  .181 

LESSON  LIX 

INFINITIVE    IN   INDIRECT    DISCOURSE 
SUBJECT    ACCUSATIVE 
518.  TEXT 

Erant  omnino  itinera  duo.  His  itineribus*  domo^  exire 
poterant.  tjniim  iter  erat  per  Sequands,  angustum  et 
difficile,  inter  montem  luram  et  flumen  Rhodanum.  Hoc 
itinere  singulT  carri  vix  duel  poterant.  Mons  autem  altissi- 
mus  impendebat,  ut^  facile  perpauci  eos  prohibere  possent. 


Erant  omnino  itinera  duo  quibus  itineribus*  domo^  exire 
possent:  unum^  per  Sequanos,  angustum  et  difficile,  inter 
montem  luram  et  flumen  Rhodanum,  vix  qua  singull  carri 
ducerentur;*  mons  autem  altissimus  impendebat,  ut^  facile 
perpauci  prohibere^  possent.     (93-97,  Ch.  6.) 

NOTES 

1.  See  §468. 

2.  quibus  itineribus:    see  §313.    quibus  is  here  a  relative  adjective. 

3.  unum  (iter):    supply  erat. 

4.  could  he  drawn. 

5.  Supply  eos,  referring  to  the  Helvetians. 

6.  See  §436,  c. 


519.  VOCABULARY 

diflicilis,  -e,  comparative  difficilior,  superlative  difficillimus  [dis-,  apart, 

facills,  easy],  difjficult,  hard. 
im-pendeo,  im-pendere, ,  [in,  into],  literally,  overhang, 

i.  e.,  in  the  case  of  a  mountain,  tower  above. 


182  BELLUM   HELVETICUM 

omnlnd,  adverb  [omnis,  all],  in  all. 

perpauci,  -ae,  -a,  very  few. 

qua,  relative  adverb,  where. 

singuli,  -ae,  -a,  distributive  numeral  adjective,  one  by  one,  one  at  a  time. 

vix,  adverb,  with  difficulty. 


INDIRECT  DISCOURSE  IN  LATIN  AND  IN  ENGLISH 

520.  We  have  direct  discourse  when  the  exact  words  of 
the  original  statement  are  used.  "We  have  indirect  discourse 
when  the  substance  of  the  statement  is  given,  not  in  the 
original  form,  but  with  a  change  of  construction. 

A.  When  the  original  statement  is  in  the  present  tense: 

Caesar  laudat,  Caesar  praises  (is  praising) 

Dicit  Caesarem   laudare,  he  says  that  Caesar  praises   (is  praising) 
Dixit  Caesarem  laudare,  he  said  that  Caesar  praised  (was  praising) 

B.  When  the  original  statement  is  in  the  past  tense : 

Caesar  laudavit,  Caesar  (has)  praised 

Dicit  Caesarem  laudavisse,  he  says  that  Caesar  (has)  praised 
Dixit  Caesarem  laudavisse,  he  said  that  Caesar  had  praised 

C.  When  the  original  statement  is  in  the  future  tense: 

Caesar  laudabit,  Caesar  will  praise 

Dicit  Caesarem  laudaturum  esse,  he  says  that  Caesar  will  praise 
Dixit  Caesarem  laudatiirum  esse,  he  said  that  Caesar  ivould  praise 

1.  Note  that,  with  the  Latin  verb:  2.  Note  that,  with  the  English  verb ; 

a.  an    infinitive    with    subject  a.  an    indicative   with    subject 
accusative  is  used.  nominative  is  used. 

b.  the    tenses    after    dicit   and  b.  the  tenses  after  he  says  and 
dixit  are  the  same.  he  said  are  not  the  same. 

c.  there  is  no  word  for  ' '  that. ' '  c.  the  word  '  *  that ' '  is  used. 

521.  RULE.  The  accusative  is  used  as  the  subject  of 
infinitives. 


LESSON    LX  183 

522.  RULE.  After  verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  knowing, 
perceiving,  and  the  Nice,  the  main  verb  of  a  statement  is 
in  the  infinitive  mood  with  its  subject  in  the  accusative, 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

523.  Give,  with  meanings,  all  infinitives  of  transeo, 
utor,  cogo. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

524.  1.  Dicit  se  contendere.  2.  Dixit  se  contendere. 
3.  Dicit  se  eontendisse.  4.  Dixit  se  contendisse.  5.  Dicit 
se  contenttirum  esse.  6.  Dixit  se  contenttirum  esse.  7. 
Dicit  eos  appellari.  8.  Dixit  eos  appellarl.  9.  Dixerunt 
eum  appellatum  esse.  10.  Dixit  eos  appellatos  esse.  11. 
Dixerunt  eum  appellavisse.  12.  Dicit  eos  coegisse.  13. 
Dixit  eos  coactos  esse. 

525.  1.  He  says  that  he  is  able.  2.  He  says  that  he  was 
able.  3.  He  knew  that  Caesar  would  go.  4.  He  did  this 
because  (quod)  he  was  able.  5.  (It)  was  decided  to  collect 
two  legions  in  all.  6.  (It)  was  easy  to  set-fire-to  their  towns. 
7.  The  men  were  taken  because  they  tried  to  march  through 
the  province.  8.  The  Helvetians  with  difficulty  drew  their 
carts  one-by-one. 


LESSON  LX 

DATIVE    WITH    SPECIAL   VERBS 
526.  TEXT 

Alteram  iter  erat  per  provinciam  nostram.  Inter  fines 
Helvetiorum  et  Allobrogum,  qui  niiper  a  Romanis  pacati 
erant,    Rhodanus    fluit.     Id    fliimen    nonntillls    locis^    vado 


184  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

transitiir.    Qua  de*  causa  hoc  iter  erat  multo  facilius  atque 
expeditius. 


Alterum^  per  provinciam  nostram,  multo  facilius  atque 
expeditius,  propterea  quod  inter  fines  Helvetiorum  et 
AUobrogum,  qui  nuper  pacati  erant,  Rhodanus  fluit  isque 
nonnullls  locis^  vado  trans! tur.     (97-101,  Ch.  6.) 

NOTES 

1.  Look  at  the  map  on  p.  204  and  notice  the  two  possible  ways  for 
the  Helvetians  to  leave  their  country.  The  one  described  by  Caesar 
as  overhung  by  a  mountain  is  at  Pas  de  PEcluse.  The  easier  way 
was  to  cross  the  Ehone  at  Geneva  or  any  one  of  several  points 
between  Geneva  and  Pas  de  I'Ecluse,  and  march  through  the  country 
of  the  Allobroges. 

2.  Supply  iter. 

3.  By  exception,  used  without  a  preposition. 

4.  for. 

527.  VOCABULARY 

expedio,  -pedire,  -pedivi,  -peditum  [pes,  pedis,  foot],  literally,  get  one's 

foot   out,  i.e.,   extricate   one's   self.     Perfect   passive   participle   as 

adjective,  quicTc;  free. 
fluo,  fluere,  fluxi,  fluxum,  flow. 
impero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  command;  with  dative  and  accusative,  levy 

{upon),  demand  (from). 
multo,  adverb  [multus],  (hy)  much,  {hy)  far. 

noceo,  nocere,  nocui,  ,  harm. 

nonnullus,    -a,    -um    [non,    not,   nuUus,   not  any'],   some,   several.     For 

declension  see  §283. 
nuper,  adverb,  no  comparative,  superlative  nuperrimS,  recently. 
paco,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [pax,  pacis],  literally,  pacify;  regularly,  subdue. 

stude5,  studere,  studui, ,  he  eager,  desire. 

vadum,  -i,  n.,  ford. 

What  English  words  are  derived  from  expedio,  paco, 
impero? 


LESSON   LX  185 

628.  DATIVE    WITH    SPECIAL   VERBS 

Model.     Helvetiis  persuasit,  he  persuaded  the  Helvetians. 

Note  that  the  dative,  Helvetiis,  is  translated  by  the  direct  object, 
Helvetians. 


RULE.  A  dative  which  is  translated  by  a  direct  object 
is  used  with  most  Latin  verbs  signifying  benefit  or  injure, 
please  or  displease,  serve  or  resist,  trust  or  distrust,  com= 
mand  or  obey;  believe,  envy,  favor,  pardon,  persuade,  spare, 
threaten,  and  the  like. 

Examples  of  such  verbs  are:    impero,  noce5,  persuade5,  resisto,  and 
studeo. 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

530.     Form  English  sentences  exemplifying  agent,  means, 
time  when,  extent;  and  tell  how  each  is  expressed  in  Latin. 


TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

531.  1.  Ilostibus  resistere;  nocere  magistratibus ;  dixit 
se  GallTs  nonnuilis  persuadere ;    dicit  se  eldem  rel  studere. 

2.  Boi   frumento   quod   domo   tollebant  maxime   studebant. 

3.  OrgetorTx  Castico  persuaserat  ut  flumen  vado  translret. 

4.  DumnorigT  ut  idem  conetur  persuadebit.  5.  Helvetii 
Rauracos  pacaA^erant  atque  Germanls  nocere  conabantur. 
6.  Flnitimls  eorum  imperavit  ut  ad  flumen  venlrent. 

532.  1.  I  shall  not  harm  his  friends.  2.  He  says  he  does 
not  desire  peace.  3.  They  desired  our  friendship  on  account 
of  our  bravery.  4.  lie  tried  to  resist  his  son's  plan.  5. 
We  had  persuaded  our  friends  to  do  (that  they  should  do) 
this.  6.  Some  rivers  flow  in-such-a-way  that  they  can  not 
be  crossed  bv  fords. 


186  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

LESSON  LXI 

DATIVE    WITH    COMPOUND    VERBS 

533.  TEXT 

Extremum  oppidum  Allobrogum  proximumque  finibus  Hel- 
vetiorum  est  Genava.  Ex  eo  oppido  pons  ad  Helvetios  per- 
tinet.  AUobroges  nondum  bono  animo-  in^  populum  Roma- 
num  esse  videbantur  quod  nuper  pacati  erant.  Qua  de  causa 
Helvetii  existimabant  sese  Allobrogibus  persuasuros^  esse 
ut  per  suos  fines  eos  Ire  paterentur.*  Si  hoc  facere  non 
possent,  sese  vi  eos  coacturos^  esse  existimabant. 


Extremum  oppidum  Allobrogum  est  proximumque  Helve- 
tiorum  finibus  Genava.  Ex  eo  oppido  pons  ad  Helvetios 
pertinet.  Allobrogibus  sese  vel  persuasuros/  quod  nondum 
bono  animo-  in^  populum  Romanum  viderentur,  existima- 
bant vel  vT  coacturos^  ut  per  suos^  fines  eos^  ire  paterentur.* 
(101-106,  Ch.  6.) 

NOTES 

1.  vel  persuastiros  (esse)  and  vel  coacturos  (esse):  future  infini- 
tives with  sese  as  subject.  Translate:  They  thought  they  would  cither 
persuade  .  .  .  or  would  compel. 

2.  bond  animo:  of  friendly  spirit. 

3.  in:  toward. 

4.  ut  .  .  .  paterentur:  to  allow.    See  §423,  2. 

5.  Kefers  to  the  AUobroges. 

6.  Refers  to  the  Helvetians. 

534.  VOCABULARY 

bonus,  -a,  -um,  comparative  melior,  superlative  optimus;  good. 
exterus,    -a,    -um,    comparative    exterior,    superlative    extremus     (or 

extimus);     outside,    comparative    outer,    exterior,    superlative    most 

distant,  farthest. 


LESSON    LXI  187 

non-dum,  adverb,  not  yet. 

prae-ficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fectum   [facio],  place  in  command  of,  put  in 

charge  of. 
vel,  coordinate  conjunction,  or;  vel  .  .  .  vel,  either  .  .  .  or. 

COMPOUNDS    OF    SUM 

535.     Notice   the  following  compounds  of  sum  and  the 
influence  the  prepositions  have  on  the  meaning: 

absum,  be  away,  he  absent 
adsum,  be  near,  be  present,  assist 
intersum,  be  among,  take  part  in 
praesmn,  be  over,  be  in  command  of 


536.  DATIVE   WITH   COMPOUND   VERBS 

Models 

1.  Helvetii  omnibus  praestabant,  the  Helvetians  surpassed 

all. 

2.  Labienum  legioni  praeficit,  he  puts  Labienus  in  charge 

of  the  legion. 

Notes,  a.  Some  Latin  verbs,  because  of  their  meaning,  cannot 
take  an  object,  direct  or  indirect.  These  may  be  so  changed  in 
meaning  by  prefixing  certain  prepositions  that  they  take  an  indirect 
object  in  the  dative.    Example:  praestabant  in  Model  1  above. 

b.  Other  Latin  verbs  which  can  take  only  a  direct  object  are  so 
changed  by  prefixing  certain  prepositions  that  they  may  take  an 
indirect  object  in  addition  to  the  direct  object.  Example:  praeficit 
in  Model  2  above. 

c.  Not  all  verbs,  however,  that  are  compounded  with  these  preposi- 
tions take  a  dative,  because  the  meaning  does  not  always  permit  the  use 
of  the  dative.    Examples :  incendo,  interfici5,  oppugno,  and  many  others. 

d.  The  English  translation  may  require  an  objective  case  or  a 
phrase  with  a  preposition  suggested  by  the  Latin  compound. 

e.  This  dative  of  the  indirect  object  may  be  used  with  any  com- 
pound of  sum  except  absum  and  possum. 


188  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

537.  RULE.  The  dative  of  the  indirect  object  is  used  with 
many  verbs  compounded  with  ad,  ante,  con,  in,  inter,  ob,  post, 
prae,  pro,  sub,  super,  and  sometimes  circum. 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

538.  1.  Give  synopsis  of  eo  in  third  person,  plural;  of 
video  in  second  person,  singular.  2.  Give  all  infinitives 
and  participles  of  vereor  with  meanings. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

539.  1.  Caesari  adest ;  bello  intererat ;  legion!  praefuerat ; 
legion!  praefectus  est.  2.  Caesar  in  Galliam  ibit  ut  Gallis 
persuadeat.  3.  Quern  praefecit  Caesar  exercitui?  4.  Or- 
getorlx  c6pi!s  ab  Helveti!s  non  erat  praefectus.  5.  Existimat 
hanc  legionem  copils  Helvetiorum  praestare. 

540.  1.  To  place  a  lieutenant  in  command  of  the  bridge ; 
to  assist  the  neighbors.  2.  To  be  in  command  of  the  sol- 
diers; to  be  placed  in  command  of  these  men.  3.  He  will 
carry  on  war  with  that  legion  which  has  been  sent  to  Rome. 

4.  Did  the  Helvetians  allow  the  neighbors  to  assist  them? 

5.  This  army  was  so  large  that  it  surpassed  all  the  others. 

6.  Who  persuaded  the  lieutenants? 


LESSON  LXII 

DATIVE    OF   PURPOSE  DATIVE   WITH   ADJECTIVES 

541.  TEXT 

Omnes  res  ad  profectionem  comparant.  Diem  d!cunt^ 
qua^  die*  ad  ripam  Rhodan!  omnes  conveniant.  Is  dies*  erat 
ante  diem  qmntum  Kalendas  Aprlles.  Hoc  tempore  L.  P!so 
et  A.  Gablnius  erant  consules. 


LESSON   LXII  189 

Omnibus  rebus  ad  profectionem  comparatis,*  diem  dicunt^ 
qua^  die*  ad  ripam  Rhodani  omnes  conveniant.  Is  dies*  erat 
a.^  d.  V.  Kal.  Apr.,  L.  Pisone,^  A.  Gabinio  consulibus.  (106- 
109,  Cli.  6.) 

NOTES 

1.  omnibus  rebus  .  .  .  comparatis:  see  §398. 

2.  they  appoint. 

3.  qua  .  .  .  conveniant:  see  §423,  1. 

4.  qua  die;  is  dies:  note  the  change  in  gender  and  see  §298. 

5.  a.  d.  V.  Kal.  Apr.,  the  twenty-eighth  of  March.  From  the  Kalends, 
time  was  reckoned  backwards,  and  both  extremes  included.  Thus,  in 
reckoning  the  fifth  day  before  the  Kalends  of  April,  we  must  include 
both  the  first  of  April  and  the  twenty-eighth  of  March.  Here  the 
logical  construction  would  read  erat  dies  quintus  ante  Kalendas 
Apriles.  The  expression  in  the  text  is  the  regular  idiomatic  way  of 
expressing  dates,  but  it  can  not  be  parsed. 

6.  L.  Pisone  .  .  .  consulibus:  literally,  Lucius  Pisa  and  Aulus  Gabinius 
(being)  consuls;  freely,  in  the  consulship  of,  etc.  See  §398.  The  year 
was  58  B.C. 

542.  VOCABULARY 

a.  d.  V.  Kal.  Apr.  (ante  diem  quintum  Kalendas  AprilSs),  the  fifth  day 

before  the  Kalends  of  April. 
Aprilis,  -e  [abbr.  Apr.],  adjective,  of  April. 

Aulus,  -i,  m.  [abbr.  A.],  Aulus,  a  Koman  ''first  name*'  (prae-nomen). 
auxilium,  -i,  n.,  aid,  help. 
con-venio,     -venire,     -veni,     -ventum,     literally,    come    together,   i.  e., 

assemble. 
Gabinius,  -i,  m.,  [Aulus]  Gabinius. 
impedimentum,  -i,  n.,  [impedio,  hinder],  hindrance. 
inimicus,  -a,  -um  [in-,  not,  amicus,  friendly],  unfriendly. 
Kalendae,    -arum,   f.    [abbr.   Kal.],    the  Kalends,   the   first   day   of   a 

Eoman  month. 
Lucius,  -i,  m.  [abbr.  L.],  Lucius,  a  Eoman  ''first  name'*  (prae-nomen). 
praesidium,  -i,  n.,  garrison,  protection. 
rlpa,  -ae,  f.,  banJc  (of  a  river), 
subsidium,  -i,  n.,  reserve,  reinforcement. 


190  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

What  are  the  meanings  of  auxiliary,  suhsidiary,  inimical, 
convention? 

543.  DATIVE    OF    PURPOSE    (SERVICE) 

Models 

1.  Exercitus  erat  auxilio,  the  army  was  (for)  a  help. 

2.  Aedui  milites  auxilid   Caesari  miserunt,   the  Aeduans 

sent  soldiers  as  a  help  to  Caesar. 

Notes,  a.  This  dative  expresses  the  purpose  or  end  for  which 
something  exists  or  which  it  serves. 

b.  This  dative,  when  used  with  sum,  is  best  translated  by  a 
predicate  noun;  when  used  with  other  verbs,  translate  with  the  word  as, 

c.  This  dative  may  be  accompanied  by  another  dative  denoting 
the  person  (or  thing)  affected,  which  forms  the  (so-called)  double 
dative  construction. 

544.  RULE.  The  dative  is  used  to  denote  the  purpose 
which  a  thing  serves, 

545.  DATIVE   WITH   ADJECTIVES 

Model 
Proximi  sunt  Germanis,  they  are  nearest  (to)  the  Germans. 

546.  RULE.  Adjectives  meaning  near,  also  fit,  friendly, 
similar,  and  the  like,  with  their  opposites,  may  have  a 
modifying  dative. 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

547.  Decline  the  expressions  is  dies,  eadem  res. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

548.  1.  Hoc  est  auxilio ;  illud  est  impedlmento  exercituT. 
2.  Ea  loca  erant  proxima  provinciae;    erit  plebi  acceptus. 


LESSON   LXIIl  191 

3.  Ea  de  causa  Caesar  tribus  legionibus  imperavit  ut  essent 
Aeduis  auxilio.  4.  Quod  omnes  civitates  erant  inimicae 
Helvetils,  multa  bella  his  locis  gerebant.  5.  Exercitus  erat 
subsidio  eis  qui  in  alteram  ripam  conveniebant.  6.  Helvetii 
potentissimi  erant  sed  Romanis  inimlcl. 

549.  1.  He  is  unfriendly  to  the  Helvetians.  2.  Caesar 
will  do  this  as  a  protection  to  the  Aeduans.  3.  The  Aeduans 
had  a  village  very  near  the  bank  of  the  river.  4.  Those  men 
will  be  a  reinforcement  to  our  fathers  and  brothers.  5.  The 
narrow  territory  was  a  (source  of)  distress  to  the  Helvetians. 
6.  Have  you  been  placed  in  command  of  this  legion? 


LESSON  LXm 

PERSONAL  PRONOUNS       POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES 

550.  TEXT 

Helvetii  per  provinciam  nostram  iter  facere^  conaturl 
erant.  Ubi  Caesari  id  nuntiatum  est,  Roma  proficTsci' 
maturat.  Quam^  maximis  potest  itineribus  in  Galliam 
ulteriorem^  contendit  et  ad^  Genavam  pervenit.  Sed  erat 
omnino  in  Gallia  ulteriore  legio^^  una^^  Romana.  Qua  de 
causa  provinciae^  Romanae  quam  maximum  potest  mllitum 
numerum  imperat;  pontem  qui  erat  ad^^  Genavam  iubet 
rescind!. 


Caesari  cum  id  nuntiatum  esset/  eos^  per  provinciam 
nostram  iter  facere^  c5nari,  maturat^  ab  urbe^  proficiscl,^  et 
quam^  maximis  potest  itineribus  in  Galliam  ulteriorem^ 
contendit  et  ad^  Genavam  pervenit.    Provinciae^  toti  quam 


192  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

maximum  potest  mllitum  numerum  imperat^''  (erat  omnlno 
in  Gallia  ulteridre  legio^^  una^-),  pontem  qui  erat  ad'^ 
Genavam  iubet  reseindi.     (110-116,  Ch.  7.) 

NOTES 

1.  ntintiatum  esset:  translate  by  an  indicative. 

2.  Subject  of  conari;  the  phrase  eos  .  .  .  conari  is  in  apposition 
with  id;  that  they  were  trying,  etc. 

3.  See  §508,  6. 

4.  Historical  present  and  hence  may  govern  historical  sequence. 

5.  ab  iirbe:  from  (near)  the  city,  because  the  fact  that  he  held  a 
military  command  prevented  him  from  entering  Kome. 

6.  quam  .  .  .  itineribus:  (by  the  greatest  marches  he  is  able),  hy  the 
greatest  possible  marches.  Compare  §396,  where  no  form  of  possum  was 
used;  the  translation  is  the  same  whether  possum  is  used  or  not. 

7.  Gallia  ulterior  was  Gaul  on  the  farther  side  of  the  Alps  from 
Rome.  What  is  now  called  the  northern  part  of  Italy  was  called 
Gallia  citerior,  hither  Gaul.  Caesar's  province  included  both  Gauls, 
but  only  so  much  of  Transalpine  Gaul  as  had  been  conquered.  The 
Allobroges  belonged  to  his  province,  but  the  Helvetians  did  not.  In 
his  narrative  Caesar  explains  to  the  Eomans  how  necessary  it  was  for 
the  safety  of  the  province  for  him  to  go  outside  of  his  province  and 
do  things  which  the  Eomans  never  thought  of  when  they  sent  him 
there. 

8.  (to)  in  the  vicinity  of. 

9.  See  §529. 

10.  Connect  imperat  with  iubet  by  et  (supplied). 

11.  legio:  it  is  not  known  precisely  what  the  full  strength  of  a 
Roman  legion  was  at  this  time.  The  actual  strength  varied,  just  as  is 
the  case  with  our  regiments.    It  probably  averaged  about  3600  men. 

12.  una:    only  one. 
13.  near. 

551.  VOCABULARY 

nuntio,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  report. 

per-venio,  -venire,  -veni,  -ventum,  literally,  come  through,  i.  e.,  arrive. 
re-scindo,  re-scindere,  re-scidi,  re-scissum,  literally,  cut  back;  cut  down; 
break  ^own. 


LESSON   LXIII  193 

ulterior,  ulterius,  comparative  adjective,  no  positive,  superlative 
ultimus;  farther:  Gallia  ulterior,  farther  Gaul,  i.e.,  the  portion  of 
modern  France  that  had  been  overrun  by  the  Komans. 

urbs,  urbis,  f.,  city.    For  pronunciation  see  §6. 

What  is  the  meaning  of  inter-urban  f    What  is  an  ulterior 
motive  ? 


552.         DECLENSION    OF    PERSONAL   PRONOUNS 


First  person, 

ego,  / 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Norn,     ego 

nos 

Gen.      mei 

r  nostrum 
1^  nostri 

Dat.      mihi 

nobis 

Ace.      me 

nos 

Abl.      me 

nobis 

Second  person,  tu,  you  (thou) 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

tu  vos 


tni 


J  vestrum 
i  vestri 


tibi  vobis 

to  vos 

te  vobis 

a.  There  is  no  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person.  Its  place  is 
taken  either  by  a  demonstrative  pronoun,  usually  is,he,ea,,  she,  id,  it; 
or,  when  him,  them,  etc.,  refer  to  the  subject,  by  the  reflexive  pronoun, 
sui  (§407).     When  they  are  used  as  subjects,  it  is  for  emphasis  only. 

b.  nostrum  and  vestrum  are  the  forms  used  as  partitive  genitives; 
nostri  and  vestri,  as  objective  genitives. 

c.  The  preposition  cum  is  enclitic  with  personal  pronouns;  as, 
ndbiscum,  with  us. 


553.  POSSESSIVE    ADJECTIVES    (PRONOUNS) 

These  are  similar  in  form  to  the  genitives  of  the  corre- 
sponding personal  pronouns,  which  are  never  used  to  denote 
possession. 

Istpers.    meus,  -a,  -um,  my  noster,  -tra,  -trum,  our 

Sdpers.     tuus,  -a,  -um,  your  (of  one)  vester,  -tra,  -trum,  your  (of 

more  than  one) 


194  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


Sd  pers. 


suus,  -a,  -um,  his,  her,  its  suus,   -a,   -um,   their    (when 

(when  referring  to  the  subject)  referring   to   the   subject) 

eius  (gen.  sing,  of  is),  his,  her,  eorum,  earum,  eorura   (gen. 

its  (when  not  referring  to  the  plur.of  is),  </idr  (whennot 

1^     subject)  referring  to  the  subject) 


554.  Meus,  tuus,  noster,  vester,  suus  are  pronominal  adjectives 
and  hence  agree  with  the  nouns  they  modify  and  not  with  the  nouns 
to  which  they  refer.  For  example,  in  the  expression  suas  sorores, 
suas  is  accusative  plural  feminine  to  agree  with  sorores,  but  the 
meaning  may  be  his,  her,  its,  or  their  sisters,  depending  on  the  person 
to  whom  suas  refers;  in  the  sentence  vir  suas  sorores  videt,  the  man 
sees  his  sisters,  suas  agrees  in  gender,  number,  and  case  with  its  noun 
sorores,  but  the  meaning  is  his  because  it  refers  to  vir  (man). 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

555.  1.  Give  infinitives  and  participles  of  conor  and  pro- 
ficiscor  with  meanings.  2.  Give  synopsis  of  possum  in  first 
person  singular. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

556.  1.  Te  moneo.  2.  Id  mihi  ntintiavisti.  3.  Nos  audi- 
veras.  4.  Tibi  persuasl.  5,  Vobis  persuadebo.  6.  Nobis 
persuadebat.  7.  Mecum  proficTscetur.  8.  Noblscum  bella 
gessit.  9.  Domus  tua;  domus  vestra.  10.  Mihi  inimicus 
erit;  nobis  frumentum  imperabitis ;  vobTs  praeficiar.  11. 
Tibi  sum  amicus;  partem  nostrum  vidisti.  12.  Ad  te  Ire 
potero;  vestrl  memoriam  tenebo.  13.  Mllites  eius  ad 
ulteriorem  provinciam  pervenire  maturabunt.  14.  Helvetii 
finis  suos  defendent. 

557.  1.  They  sent  me.  2.  I  shall  order  you.  3.  They 
send  me  v^rith  you  (plu.)  as  an  aid.  4.  You  v^ill  see  us  at 
Rome.  5.  I  saw  you  (plu.)  in  the  farther  part  of  their 
province.  6.  With  their  (own)  friends  they  started  out  to 
your  (sing.)  home.  7.  Our  soldiers  were  hurrying  to  announce 
this  matter  (res)  to  the  other  legion. 


1.  funditor 
2.  levis  armaturae  milites 


3.  legionarii         5.  signiferi  7.  tuhicen 

J.  vexillum  6.  aquilifer  8.  hucinator 

EOMAN  Soldiers 


LESSON  LXIV  195 

LESSOISr  LXIV 

CONJUGATION    OF    VOLO,   NOLO,    MALd 
558.  TEXT 

Ubi  de  Caesaris  adventu  Helvetii  certiores  fact!  sunt, 
legatos  ad  eum,  nobilissimds  civitatis,  mittunt.  Huius  lega- 
tionis  Nammeius  et  Verucloetius  prmcipem  locum  obtine- 
bant.  Hi  legati  dicunt  Helvetiis  esse  in  animo^  sine  ullo 
maleficio  iter  per  provinciam  facere,  propterea  quod  aliud 
iter  nullum  haberent.  Rogant  etiam  ut*  eius^  voluntate  id 
sibi^  facere  liceat. 


Ubi  de  eius  adventii  Helvetii  certiores  fact!  sunt,  legatos 
ad  eum  mittunt,  nobilissimos  civitatis,  cuius  legationis  Nam- 
meius et  Verucloetius  principem  locum  obtinebant,  qui 
dlcerent^  sibi  esse  in  animo^  sine  ullo  maleficio  iter  per  pro- 
vinciam facere,  propterea  quod  aliud  iter  haberent  nullum : 
rogare^  ut*  eius^  voluntate  id  sibi^  facere  liceat.  (116-122, 
Ch.  7.) 

NOTES 

1.  See  §423, 1. 

2.  Helvetiis  (sibi)  esse  in  animo:  (that  it  was  to  the  Helvetians  in 
mind),  that  it  was  the  Helvetians'  intention.  The  subject  of  esse  is  the 
XJhrase  sine  .  .  .  facere. 

3.  (et)  rogare:  supply  se  as  subject.  It  depends  on  dicerent  as 
does  esse  above;  and  {they  also  said)  that  they  requested. 

4.  ut  .  .  .  liceat:  literally,  that  to  do  this  may  (might)  he  permitted 
to  them.,  i.  e.,  that  they  may  (might)  he  permitted  to  do  this.  The  subject 
of  liceat  is  the  phrase  eius  .  .  .  facere;  the  clause  ut  .  .  .  liceat  is  a 
substantive  clause,  the  object  of  rogare. 

5.  i.  e.,  Caesar's. 

6.  sibi:  indirect  object  of  liceat. 


196 


BELLUM   HELVETICUM 


559. 


VOCABULARY 


adventus,  -us,  m.  [ad-venio,  come  ^o],  coming,  approach. 

certus,  -a,  -um,  certain;  eum  certiorem  facio,  literally,  /  malce  him  more 
certain;  regularly,  I  inform  him;  passive,  literally,  I  am  made  more 
certain;   regularly,  I  am  informed. 

legatus,  -i,  m.,  literally,  a  man  delegated  with  power;  hence,  in  diplo- 
macy, an  ambassador,  commissioner;  in  military  language,  a  lieutenant- 
general,  a  lieutenant. 

maleficium,  -i,  n.  [male,  badly,  facid,  do],  wrong-doing. 

malo,  malle,  malui,  prefer. 

Nammeius,  -i,  m.,  Nammeius,  a  Helvetian  ambassador. 

nolo,  nolle,  nolui,  be  unwilling,  not  wish. 

nullus,  -a,  -mn  [ne,  not,  ullus,  any],  literally,  not  any,  i.e.,  no  (adjec- 
tive).   For  declension  see  §283. 

princeps,  principis,  adjective  [primus,  first],  first;  as  a  noun,  chief. 

rogo,  -are,  -avi,  atum,  aslc. 

sine,  preposition  with  ablative,  without. 

ullus,  -a,  -um,  any.    For  declension  see  §283. 

Verucloetius,  -i,  m.,  Verucloetius,  a  Helvetian  noble. 

void,  velle,  volui,  be  willing,  wish. 

voluntas,  voluntatis,   f.    [void,   wish],  literally,  willingness,  i.  e.,  per- 


560.  CONJUGATION   OF   VOLd,  N0L5,  MALd 

Volo,  velle,  volui,  be  willing,  wish 
N516,  nolle,  nolui,  be  unioilling,  not  wish 
Maid,  malle,  malui,  prefer 


INDICATIVE 

Pres. 

void 

n516 

mal5 

vis 

non  vis 

mavis 

vult 

non  vult 

mavult 

volumus 

nolumus 

malumus 

vultis 

non  vultis 

mavultis 

volunt 

nolunt 

malunt 

Imp. 

volebam 

nolebam 

malebam 

Fut. 

volam 

nolam 

malam 

Perf. 

volui 

nolui 

malui 

Plup. 

volueram 

nolueram 

malueram 

Fut.  Perf. 

voluerd 

noluero 

maluero 

LESSON   LXIV 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

Pres. 

velim 

nolim 

mallTn 

Imp. 

vellem 

uollem 

mallem 

Perf. 

voluerim 

noluerim 

maluerim 

Plup. 

voluissem 

noluissem 

INFINITIVES 

maluissem 

Pres. 

velle 

nolle 

maUe 

Perf. 

voluisse 

noluisse 

PARTICIPLES 

maluisse 

Pres. 

volens 

nolens 

197 


DBIIiL   EXEBCISES 

561.     Give  synopsis  of  licet;   decline  niilla  vis,  uUus  vir, 
alia  domus. 


TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

562.  1.  Maluit;  vis;  non  vis;  volebamus.  2.  Volent;*ma- 
vult;  malumus;  males.  3.  Proficisci  vultis.  4.  Tibi  proxi- 
mus  esse  noluit.  5.  Caesar  auxilio  finitimis  esse  vult.  6. 
Mihi  persuadere  vis.  7.  Quis  mecum  Genavam  ire  mavultf 
8.  Caesar  de  Helvetiorum  adventu  ab  hominibus  certior  fac- 
tus  est  qui  illTus  eivitatis  prmcipes  fuerant.  9.  In  fines 
corum  sine  ullo  maleficio  transire  poterimus.  10.  Flumen 
erat  tarn  altum  ut  legatl  sine  voluntate  hostium  transire 
non  possent. 

563.  1.  You  (plu.)  will  be  unwilling;  you  (plu.)  prefer; 
he  had  preferred;  we  have  been  unwilling.  2.  They  wish 
to  cross.  3.  You  (sing.)  wish  to  help.  4.  He  wishes  to  ask 
my  permission.  5.  They  wished  to  do  no  mischief.  6. 
Caesar  prefers  to  appoint  brave  lieutenants.  7.  He  was  not 
certain  about  the  arrival  of  the  army. 


198  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

LESSON  LXV 

COMPARISON    OF    ADJECTIVES    IN    .ER  AND  -LIS 

564.  TEXT 

Sed  L.  Cassius  consul  ab  Helvetiis  occisus  (erat)  exer- 
citusque  eius  pulsus  (erat)  et  sub^  iugum  missus  erat.  Ob 
earn  rem  Caesar  iter  per  provinciam  concedi  debere  non 
putabat.  Homines  inimico  anim5  ab  initiria  et  maleficio 
non  temperabunt.  Facultas  per  provinciam  itineris  faciendl*^ 
els  non  data  est. 


Caesar,  quod  memoria  tenebat^  L.  Cassium  consulem  occi- 
sum-  exercitumque  eius  ab  Helvetiis  pulsum  et  sub^  iugum 
missum,  concedendum  non  putabat  ;*  neque  homines'''  in- 
imico animo,  data  facultate  per  provinciam  itineris  faci- 
endl,^  temperaturos  ab  iniuria  et  maleficio  exTstimabat. 
(122-127,  Ch.  7.) 

NOTES 

1.  memoria  tenebat:  Jie  remembered;  being  equivalent  in  meaning 
to  a  verb  of  thinking,  is  followed  by  the  accusative  and  infinitive. 

2.  occisum  .  .  .  pulsum  .  .  .  missum  .  .  .  temperaturos:  supply  esse 
with  each. 

3.  sub  iugum  missum:  two  spears  were  set  upright  in  the  ground 
and  a  third  fastened  across  their  tops.  A  defeated  army  was  made 
to  march  under  this  in  token  of  submission. 

4.  concedendum  (esse)  non  putabat:  he  did  not  thinh  it  ought  to  he 
granted.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  iter  per  provinciam  facere 
(understood). 

5.  Subject  of  temperaturos  (esse). 

6.  itineris  faciendi:  (of  the  journey  to-he-made),  of  malcing  the 
journey. 


LESSON   LXV  199 

565.  VOCABULARY 

Cassius,  -i,  m.,  a  Eoman  name;  (Lucius)  Cassius  (Longinus),  consul  in 

107  B.C. 
con-cedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -cessum  [con,  intensive],  grant. 
facultas,  facultatis,  f.  [facilis,  easy],  opportunity. 
iniuria,  -ae,  f.  [in,  negative,  ius,  right],  harm,  damage. 
iugura,  -i,  n.,  yoke. 

oc-cido,  -cidere,  -cidi,  -cisum  [ob,  against,  caedd,  cut],  cut  of,  Mil. 
pello,  pellere,  pepuli,  pulsum,  literally,  drive;   beat. 
puto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  literally,  recJcon;   regularly,  thinJc. 
sub,  preposition;  with  accusative  (with  verb  implying  motion),  under; 

with  ablative  (with  verb  implying  rest),  at  the  base  of. 
temper©,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  refrain. 

Give  the  derivation  and  meaning  of  subjugate,  concede, 
temperance. 

566.  COMPARISON    OF    ADJECTIVES    IN    -ER 

Adjectives  in  -er  form  their  comparatives  regularly,  but 
their  superlatives  by  adding  -rimus  to  the  masculine  singular 
nominative  of  the  positive  (not  to  the  base).    E.g., 

aeger,  aegra,  aegrum  (base,  aegr) ;  aegrior,  -ius;  aegerrimus,  -a,  -um; 

liber,  libera,  liberum  (base,  liber);  liberior,  -ius;  liberrimus,  -a,  -um; 

acer,  acris,  acre  (base,  acr);  acrior,  -ius;  acerrimus,  -a,  -um; 

celer,  celeris,  celere  (base,  celer);  celerior,  -ius;  celerrimus,  -a,  -um. 

567.  COMPARISON    OF    SIX   ADJECTIVES   IN  -LIS 

Six  adjectives  in  -lis  form  their  comparatives  regularly, 
but  their  superlatives  by  adding  -limus  to  the  base.  The 
six  are: 

facilis,  easy  similis,  liTce  humilis,  low 

difficilis,  difficult  dissimilis,  unlilce  gracilis,  slender 

Example:    facilis,  -e  (base,  facil);  facilior,  -ius;  facillimus,  -a,  -um. 
Other  adjectives  in  -lis  are  compared  regularly. 


200  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

568.  1.  Compare  paratus,  longus,  nobilis.  2.  Decline  the 
Latin  for  the  deeper  sea,  the  longer  bridge.  3.  Give  the 
synopsis  of  patior  in  the  second  person  plural. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

569.  1.  Acriore  proelio;  ab  aegerrimis  viris.  2.  Altio- 
rum  montium;  angustissimi  fines.  3.  Unum  iter  (esse)  dif- 
ficillimum,  alterum  esse  facillimum  putavit.  4.  Hoc  proe- 
lium  erat  acerrimum  et  ob  earn  causam  Caesar  hostes  superare 
non  poterat.    5.  Forti5res  homines  auxilio  nobis  venient. 

570.  1.  By  a  very  sharp  battle;  (away)  from  the  narrower 
river.  2.  Of  the  easier  roads;  by  the  most  difficult  roads. 
3.  On  this  account  they  have  refrained  from  wrong  for  many 
years.  4.  We  shall  not  be  able  to  make  these  more  difficult 
marches.  5.  An  opportunity  was  granted  you  by  which  you 
sent  the  enemy  under  the  yoke.  6.  The  Helvetians  them- 
selves will  be  either  killed  or  beaten  by  our  forces. 


LESSON  LXVI 

COMPARISON   OF    CERTAIN  IRREGULAR   ADJECTIVES 

571.  TEXT 

Sed  Caesar  spatium  intercedere  voluit  dum*  milites  quos 
imperaverat  convenirent.  Qua  de  causa  legatls  respondit 
diem^  se  ad  deliberandum*  sumpttirum  esse.  lussit  eos  ad 
Idus  Apriles  revert!  sT  quid^  vellent. 


LESSON   LXVl  201 

Tamen,  ut  spatium  intercedere  posset/  dum-  mllites  quos 
imperaverat  convenlrent,  legatis  respondit  diem^  se  ad 
deliberandum^  sumpturum :  si  quid''  vellent,  ad  Id.  Apr. 
reverterentur.^     (127-131,  Ch.  7.) 

NOTES 

1.  See  §414. 

2.  dum  milites  convenirent:  until  the  soldiers  should  muster. 

3.  time. 

4.  Accusative  of  verbal  noun   (gerund),  deliberating. 

5.  si  quid:  if  anything.  Forms  of  quis  are  used  for  forms  of  ali- 
quis,  any,  when  preceded  by  si,  nisi,  ne,  or  num. 

6.  si  .  .  .  reverterentur:  if  they  wished  anything  they  should  come 
hacTc  on  the  Ides  of  April. 

572.  VOCABULARY 

delibero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  deliberate,  consider. 

dum,  subordinate  conjunction,  while;    until. 

idus,  Iduum,  f.,  the  Ides  of  a  month,  the  15th  of  March,  May,  July,  and 

October;  the  13th  of  other  months. 
inter-cedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -cessum,  literally,  go  between,  i.  e.,  intervene. 
quis,  quid,  interrogative  pronoun,  who?  what?    quis,  quae,  quid,  indefinite 

pronoun,  any  one,  any  thing.    See  §§154  and  571,  5. 
re-spondeo,  -spondere,  -spondi,  -sponsum,  answer,  reply. 
re-vertor,  -verti,  -verti,  -versum,  deponent  in  present  system,  literally, 

turn  had',  intransitive;    return. 
si,  subordinate  conjunction,  if. 
sumo,  sumere,  sumpsi,  sumptum,  tgike. 
tamen,  adverb,  nevertheless. 

573.  COMPARISON  OF  CERTAIN  IRREGULAR  ADJECTIVES 

bonus,  -a,  -um;         melior,  -ius;  optimus,  -a,  -um:  good,  letter,  best 

malus,  -a,  -um;         peior,  -ius;  pessimus,  -a,  -um:  bad,  worse,  worst 

magnus,  -a,  -um;      maior,  -ius;  maximus,  -a,  -um:  great,  greater, 

greatest 


202  BELLUM    HELVETIC  UM 

parvus,  -a,  -um;       minor,  minus;       minimus,  -a,  -um:  small,  less,  least 


multus, -a, -um;       plus  (n.); 


plurimus,  -a,  -um:  much  (plu.wawy), 
more,  most 


574.      Of  the  following  the  positive  forms  in  parentheses  are  rare; 

(exterus,  -a,  -um; )         exterior,  -ius;         extremus,  -a,  -um  (or  extimus) : 

outer,  outmost 
(inferus,  -a,  -um; )         inferior,  -ius;         infimus,  -a,  -um  (or  imus) : 

lower,  lowest 
posterns,  -a,  -um;         posterior,  -ius;       postremus,  -a,  -um  (or  postu- 

mus) :  latter,  last 
(superus,  -a,  -um;)         superior,  -ius;        supremus,  -a,  -um  (or  summus) : 

higher,  highest 


575.      Of  the  following  the  positive  forms  are  lacking: 


citerior,  -ius; 
interior,  -ius; 
prior,  -ius; 
propior,  -ius; 
ulterior,  -ius; 


citimus,  -a,  -um: 
intimus,  -a,  -um: 
primus,  -a,  -um: 
proximus,  -a,  -um: 
ultimus,  -a,  -um: 


hither,  hithermost 
inner,  inmost 
former,  -first 
nearer,  next 
farther,  farthest 


576. 


DECLENSION    OF  PLUS 


SINGULAR 


Mas.  and  Fem. 

Nom.     

Gen.      

Dat.       

Ace.       

Abl.       


Neut. 
pliis 
pliiris 

plus 
plure 


PLURAL 

(.  and  Fem. 

Neut, 

plures 

pltira 

plurium 

plurium 

pluribus 

pluribus 

plures  (-is) 

plura 

pluribus 

pluribus 

Note  that  plus  has  no  i  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  neuter  plural. 
Compliires  is  declined  like  the  plural  of  plus,  except  that  it  may 
have  either  compliira  or  compliiria  in  the  neuter. 


LESSON   LXVI  203 

577.  The  comparative  may  be  translated  either  by  the 
English  comparative  or  by  too,  rather,  quite,  or  (when  nega- 
tived) very  with  the  positive ;  and  the  superlative  by  the 
English  superlative  or  by  very  with  the  positive. 


DRILL   EXERCISES 

578.  1.  Decline  complures.  2.  Compare  parvus  in  geni- 
tive singular  feminine ;  multus  in  ablative  singular  neuter ; 
bonus  in  accusative  plural  neuter. 


TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

579.  1.  Citerioris  Galliae;  exercitu  meliore.  2.  Minore 
numero ;  plus  virtutis ;  proximls  Idibus.  3.  Una  legione  et 
multls  militibus  longissimum  murum  perficiet.  4.  lusserunt 
eos  frumentum  ex  citeriore  Gallia  sumere.  5.  Erant  om- 
nlno  tres  legiones  quae  ad  inferiorem  ripam  fluminis  con- 
venerant.  6.  In  Galliam  quam  maximis  itineribus  rever- 
tentur.  7.  Tamen  est  iter  difficillimum  inter  altum  montem 
et  flumen  altum.     8.  Respondit  multos  dies  intercessisse. 

580.  1.  Nearest  to  the  Germans;  the  larger  river.  2. 
Very  many  soldiers;  in  the  least  space.  3.  A  larger  space 
intervenes  between  these  tw^o  hills.  4.  The  enemy  came 
from  the  lowest  place.  5.  "We  shall  build  a  bridge  next 
month.  6.  From  the  most  distant  towns,  they  started  out 
to  farther  Gaul.  7.  Caesar  was  not  able  to  return  from 
Geneva  by  an  easier  road.  8.  Nevertheless  more  soldiers 
will  be  sent  by  Caesar  as  a  reinforcement.  9.  Caesar  wished 
to  return  to  Rome  that  he  might  reply  to  the  senate. 


204 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


LESSON  LXVII 

FORMATION   AND    COMPARISON    OF    ADVERBS 


581. 


TEXT 


Interea  ea  legione/  quam  secum-  habebat,  niTlitibusque, 
qui  ex  provincia  convenerant,  murum  et  fossam  perdticit. 
Murus  et  fossa  a  lacti  Lemanno  (qui  in  fltimen  Rliodanura 
influit)  ad  montem  Itiram  (qui  fines  Sequanorum  ab  Hel- 
vetiTs  dividit)  milia'''  passuum^  decern  novem  pertinent. 
Murus  et  fossa  sunt  in  altitudinem  pedum  sedeeim. 


FOSSA 
CASTELLUM 
POINT  OF  Observation 
Roman  Miles 


Interea  ea  legione^  quam  secum^  habebat  mllitibusque 
qui  ex  provincia  convenerant,  a  lacu^  Lemanno,  qui  in  flu- 
men  Rhodanum  Influit,  ad  montem*  Itiram,  qui  fines  Sequa- 
norum ab  Helvetils  dividit,  mllia^  passuum^  decem  novem 
murum  in  altitudinem  pedum  sedeeim  fossamque  perducit. 
(132-136,  Ck  8.) 


LESSON   LXVII  205 

NOTES 

1.  ea  legione,  militibus:  modify  perducit.  See  §313.  Persons  may- 
be considered  the  means  of  an  act  when  they  are  instruments  in  the 
hands  of  a  superior. 

2.  See  §407. 

3.  a  lacu:  modifies  perducit.    See  §468. 

4.  ad  montem:  modifies  perducit.     See  §460. 

5.  milia  passuum  decern  novem:  for  nineteen  miles.    See  §327. 

6.  See  §491. 


582.  VOCABULARY 

fossa,  -ae,  f.,  ditch,  trench. 

in-flu6,  -fluere,  -fluxi,  -fluxum,  -flow  (into). 

decern  novem,  indeclinable  cardinal  (numeral)  adjective,  nineteen, 

novem,  indeclinable  cardinal  (numeral)  adjective,  nine. 

per-duco,   -ducere,   -dtixi,   -ductum,   literally,   lead  through;   construct; 

extend. 
se-decim    [sex,    decem],    indeclinable    cardinal    (numeral)    adjective, 

sixteen. 

How  did  the  month  of  November  come  to  have  its  name  ? 


583.      FORMATION  AND  COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS 

Most  adverbs  are  formed  from  adjectives  as  follows: 

1.  Positive,  a.  Most  adjectives  of  the  first -and -second 
declension  form  corresponding  adverbs  by  adding  -e  to 
their  bases,  e.  g., 

adjective,  longus,  -a,  -um;   adverb,  longe. 

b.  Most  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  having  two  or 
three  endings  in  the  nominative  singular  form  corresponding 
adverbs  by  adding  -iter  to  their  bases,  e.  g., 

adjective,  fortis,  -e;  adverb,  fortiter. 


206  BELLUM    IIELVETICUM 

c.  Most  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  having  one  end- 
ing in  the  nominative  singular  form  corresponding  adverbs 
by  adding  -ter  to  their  bases;  a  final  t  of  the  base  is 
dropped,  e.  g., 

adjective,  potens,  potentis ;  adverb,  potenter. 

2.  Comparative.  The  comparative  of  an  adverb  is  always 
the  neuter  singular  accusative  of  the  corresponding  adjec- 
tive, e.  g., 

adjective,  longior,  longius;   adverb,  longius. 

3.  Superlative.  The  superlative  of  an  adverb  is  always 
the  base  of  the  superlative  of  the  adjective  -j-  ©>  e-  g-? 

adjective,  longissimus,  -a,  -um;    adverb,  longissime. 

Thus  the  entire  comparison  of  all  the  adjectives  and  ad- 
verbs mentioned  above  would  be  as  follows: 


Adjective 
Adverb 

longus,  -a, 
longe 

-um 

longior,  -ius 
Itngius 

loflgissimus,  -a,  -um 
longissime 

Adjective 
Adverb 

f  ortis,  -e 
fortiter 

fortior,  -ius 
fortius 

fortissimus,  -a,  -um 
fortissime 

Adjective 
Adverb 

potens,  potentis 
potenter 

potentior,  -ius 
potentius 

potentissimus,  -a,  -um 
potentissime 

DRILL    EXERCISES 

584.  Compare  the  following  adjectives,  then  form  and 
compare  their  adverbs:  nobilis,  certus,  angustus,  cupidus, 
latus,  aeger,  liber,  acer,  celer. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

585.  1.  Latissime  multos  annos  vagatus  est.  2.  Quis  tlbi 
nocebit?     3.  Reliquis  Ilelvetils  facillime  praestatis.     4.  Mi- 


LESSON  LXVIII  207 

lites  sunt  cupidissimi  gloriae.  5.  Proximo  die  homines  plu- 
riml  ex  agrls  cupidissime  profecti  sunt.  6.  Flumina,  quae 
in  hoc  mare  influunt,  sunt  angustissima.  7.  Altitudo  murl 
et  fossae  erat  pedum  sedecim.  8.  Mons  impendebat  ut  murum 
perducere  vix  possent.  9.  Interea  illos  montes  transire  non 
conabuntur  quod  sunt  altiores. 


586.     1.  To  help  your  friends;    my  desire  for  glory.     2. 
In  a  sharper  battle;    of  the  larger  army;    of  nineteen  feet. 

3.  The  Helvetians  wandered  too  widely  and  fought  too  often. 

4.  Meanwhile  they  followed  the  troops  of  the  Gauls  very 
bravely.  5.  The  other  Gauls  wandered  more  widely  in  their 
(own)  territory.  6.  He  does  not  wish  to  go  by  this  road 
because  the  height  of  the  mountain  is  very  great.  7.  A 
wall  and  ditch  will  be  constructed  for  sixteen  miles. 


LESSON  LXVin 

COMPARISON   OF    CERTAIN.  IRREGULAR   ADVERBS 

587.  TEXT 

Eo  opere  perfecto  praesidia  disponit,  castella  communit. 
Haec  facit  quo^  facilius  Helvetios  prohibere  possit,  si  se 
invito  transire  conentur.  Ubi  Idus  Aprlles  quas  constituerat 
cum  legatTs  venerunt,  legatT  ad  eum  reverterunt.  Caesar, 
*'n6n  possum,"  inquit,  "more^  et  exemplo  populT  Roman! 
iter^  per  provinciam  tilli  dare;  si  vim  facere*  conabimini, 
prohibebo." 


208  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

Eo  opere  perfects  praesidia  disponit,  eastella  commiinit, 
quo^  facilius,  si  se  invito  transire  conentur,  prohibere  possit. 
Ubi  ea  dies  quam  constituerat  cum  legatis  venit  et  legatl 
ad  eum  reverterunt,  negat  se  more^  et  exemplo  popull  Ro- 
mani  posse  iter^  ullT  per  provinciam  dare ;  et,  sT  vim  f  acere* 
conentur,  prohibiturum^  ostendit.     (137-142,  Ch.  8.) 


NOTES 

1.  quo  .  .  .  possit:  so  that  he  may  he  able  to  checJc  (them)  more 
ea^ly.  If  a  purpose  clause  contains  a  comparative  form,  quo  is  used  in 
place  of  ut. 

2.  more  et  exemplo:  see  §456,  Note  2. 

3.  right  of  way. 

4.  use. 

5.  prohibiturum  (esse):  supply  se  (Caesar)  as  subject. 


588.  VOCABULARY 

castellum,  -i,  n.,  fort. 

com-mtinio,  -munire,  -miinivi,  -munitum  [con,  intensive],  literally, 
fortify  strongly;  eastella  communire,  literally,  to  fortify  forts 
strongly;  i.  e.,  to  construct  strong  forts. 

dls-pdn5,  -ponere,  -posui,  -positum,  literally,  place  apart,  i.  e.,  place  at 
intervals. 

exemplum,  -i,  n.,  example,  precedent. 

inquam,  -is,  -it,  a  defective  verb  used  only  with  direct  quotations,  say. 

invitus,  -a,  -um,  unwilling;  freely,  unwillingly ;  se  invito,  ablative  abso- 
lute, literally,  he  {being)  unwilling,  i.  e.,  without  his  consent. 

nego,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  deny,  say  .  .  .  not,  the  English  negative  belong- 
ing with  the  dependent  verb. 

os-tendo,  -tendere,  -tendi,  -tentum,  show. 

quo,  subordinate  conjunction,  that;  used  to  introduce  a  purpose  clause 
which  contains  a  comparative. 

What  is  the  meaning  of  ostentatious,  negative? 


LESSON   LXVIII 


209 


589.  COMPARISON  OF  CERTAIN  IRREGULAR  ADVERBS 

"bene,  melius,  optime;  well,  better,  hest. 

diti,  diutius,  diutissime;  long  (of  time),  longer,  longest. 

facile,  facilius,  facillime;  easily,  more  easily,  most  easily. 

(magnopere),       magis,  maxime;  greatly,  more,  most. 

male,  peius,  pessime;  ill,  worse,  worst. 

multum,  plfis,  plurimum;  much,  more,  most. 

niiper,  nuperrime;  recently,  most  recently. 

parum,  minus,  minime;  too  little,  less,  least. 

prope,  propius,  proxime;  near,  nearer,  next. 


DRILL   EXERCISES 

590.  Give  synopsis  of  pond  et  munio  in  third  person 
singular.  2.  Decline  facilis.  3.  Conjugate  eo  in  present  in- 
dicative and  give  synopsis  in  second  person  singular. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

591.  1.  Diutius  vagari;  plus  posse;*  plurimum  posse.* 
2.  Diu  bellum  invitus  geret.  3.  De  his  rebus  Caesarem 
certiorem  faciunt.  4.  De  hoc  opere  Helvetil  certiores  fact! 
erant.  5.  Helvetil  ipsi  plurimum  poterant  quod  maximum 
exercitum  habebant.  6.  Sed  agrorum  Gallorum  erant  cupidi 
quod  agri  horum  erant  latissimi.  7.  Maxime  verebantur  ut 
castella  sua  commtinire  possent. 

592.  1.  To  come  nearer;  to  be  much  influenced.  2.  To 
see  very  easily ;  to  inhabit  this  place  longer.  3.  That  town 
will  be  fortified  with  more  walls  and  forts.  4.  The  Helve- 
tians were  not  very  easily  beaten.  5.  They  were  the  least 
desirous  of  more  soldiers.  6.  He  asked  in  what  town  garri- 
sons had  been  placed.  7.  Caesar  willing (ly)  showed  that 
his  friends  were  very  powerful. 


*  See  possum  in  general  vocabulary. 


210  BELLUM    HELVETIC UM 

LESSON  LXIX 

DIRECT    QUESTIONS 

593.  TEXT 

Helvetii  ea  spe  deiecti  erant.  Qua  de  causa  naves  iurix- 
erunt  ratesque  compltires  fecerunt;  alii  vadls  Rhodani,  qua 
minima  altitude  fluminis  erat,  perrumpere  conati  sunt. 
Nonnumquam  interdiu,  saepius  noctu,  conati  sunt  si-  per- 
rumpere possent.  Sed  operis  munltione^  et  militum  concursu 
et  tells  repulsi,  conatu  destiterunt. 


Helvetii  ea  spe  deiecti,  navibus  itinctis^  ratibusque  com- 
pluribus  factis,^  alii  vadis  Rhodani,  qua  minima  altitude  flu- 
minis  erat,  nonnumquam  interdiu,  saepius  noctu,  si^  perrum- 
pere possent  c5natl,  operis  munitione^  et  militum  concursu 
et  tells  repulsi  hoc  conatu  destiterunt.     (142-147,  Ch.  8.) 

NOTES 

1.  navibus  iunctis  and  ratibus  factis:  ablatives  which,  together 
with  vadis,  denote  the  means  of  conati,  while  the  adverbs  interdiu 
and  noctu  denote  the  time. 

2.  si  .  .  .  possent:  (to  see)  if  they  could  force  their  passage:  si  is 
here  used,  in  the  sense  of  whether  or  to  see  if,  to  introduce  an  indirect 
question. 

3.  munitione,  concursu,  telis:  ablatives  of  cause  modifying  repulsi. 


094.  VOCABULARY 

com-plures,    com-plura    (or    com-pluria),    genitive    complurium    [con, 

intensive],  several,  quite  a  number  of. 
c5natus,  -us,  m.  [conor,  attempt],  attempt. 
con-cursus,  -us,  m.,  literally,  a  running  together;   charge. 


LESSON  LXIX  211 

de-icio,  de-icere,  de-ieci,  de-iectum,  literally,  throw  down;    with  sp5, 

cast  down;   disappoint. 
de-sisto,  -sistere,  -stiti,  ,  stop   (intransitive)   from  something,  i.  e., 

cease. 
inter-diu,  adverb  [dies,  day],  during  the  day,  by  day. 
iungo,  iungere,  iunxi,  iunctum,  join. 

munitio,  munitionis,  f.,    [munio,  fortify],  fortification;  strength. 
-ne,  enclitic,  interrogative  particle,  not  hinting  the  answer, 
noctu,  adverb  [nox,  night],  hy  night,  i.  e.,  during  the  night. 
non-ne,  interrogative  particle,  hinting  an  affirmative  answer,  not. 
non-numquam,  adverb,  not  never,  i.  e.,  sometimes. 
num,  interrogative  particle,  hinting  a  negative  answer.     It  cannot  be 

translated  by  any  one  word, 
per-rumpo,  -rumpere,  -rupi,  -ruptum,  hreaTc  through. 
ratis,  ratis,  f .,  raft. 
re-pello,  re-pellere,  rep-puli,  re-pulsum  [pello,  pellere,  pepuli,  pulsum, 

drive],  drive  hacTc. 
telum,  -i,  n.,  missile. 

From  what  are  the  following  words  derived:    dejected, 
junction,  nocturnal,  repulse? 


595.  DIRECT   QUESTIONS 

1.  Questions  which  cannot  be  answered  by  yes  or  no  are  introduced 
in  Latin,  as  in  English,  by  an  interrogative  pronoun,  adjective,  or 
adverb.  Examples:  quis  venit?  who  came?  qui  homo  venit?  what  man 
came?  ubi  est?  where  is  he? 

2.  Questions  which  can  be  answered  by  yes  or  no  are  usually  intro- 
duced by  an  interrogative  particle.  In  written  English*  the  inter- 
rogation point  and  usually  the  order  of  words  show  that  a  sentence 
is  a  question.  The  Eomans  had  no  interrogation  point,  and  the  order 
of  the  words  was  free,  so  that  an  introductory  particle  was  usually 
necessary. 

a.  When  the  question  asks  for  information  without  hinting  whether 
the  answer  will  be  yes  or  no,  the  enclitic  -ne  is  suffixed  to  the  word 
about  which  the  question  centers,  and  that  word  is  placed  first. 
Example:  videtne  hominem?  does  he  see  the  man?  hominemne  videt? 
does  he  see  the  man? 


212  BELLUM    HELVETIC  UM 

h.  When  the  form  of  the  question  hints  that  the  answer  yes  is 
expected,  noune  is  used  as  the  first  word;  i.  e.,  to  hint  the  answer  yes, 
both  Latin  and  English  insert  a  negative.  Example:  nonne  hominem 
videt?  doesn't  he  see  the  man? 

c.  When  the  form  of  the  question  hints  that  the  answer  no  is  expected, 
num  is  used  as  the  first  word.  Example:  num  hominem  videt?  he  does 
not  see  the  man,  does  he?  Notice  that  in  translating  a  num-question 
into  English,  a  negative  statement  is  followed  by  the  question. 

d.  Latin  has  no  words  corresponding  exactly  to  yes  or  no.  Eeplies 
are  made  by  repeating  the  verb  as  a  statement,  or  ita,  sane,  etc.,  may 
be  used  for  yes  and  minime,  non,  etc.,  for  no. 


DRILL   EXERCISES 

596.  1.  Decline  quis,  ipse,  sui,  navis.  2.  Give  all  the 
infinitives  of  repello,  Avith  meanings.  3.  Give  memoranda 
of  conatus,  ratis,  telum. 


TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

597.  1.  Licetne  nobis  sequi?  2.  Nonne  pueros  laudare 
oportet?  3.  Num  hoc  flumen  noctu  transire  erit  facile?  4. 
Quid  Caesarl  enuntiatum  erat?  5.  Num  fines  Helvetiorum 
longe  a  Gallorum  finibus  aberant?  6.  Milites  Caesaris  prae- 
sidia  ostenderunt  quae  erant  disposita.  7.  Num  naves 
iunctas  et  rates  repellere  desistes?  8.  Nonne  concursus 
complurium  militum  opere  mtinitionis  hostes  prohibebit? 

598.  1.  What  raft  is  this?  2.  What  fortification  is  that? 
3.  Whose  missiles  are  these?  4.  Will  you  cease  to  harm 
me?  5.  Diviciacus  was  not  friendly  to  the  Helvetians, 
was  he?  6.  Were  you  driven  back  at  night  by  the  enemy's 
charge?    7.  Will  you  be  greatly  disappointed? 


EIGHTH   REVIEW  LESSON 


213 


EIGHTH  REVIEW  LESSON 


Give  an  account  of  the  events  narrated  in  Chap- 
ters VI,  VII,  and  VIII,  and  then  translate  those  chapters. 


600.  Memory  Work. 

a.  Of  the  verbs  volo,  nolo,  malo  (§560),  give  the  conju- 
gation in  the  present  indicative,  and  the  synopsis  complete 
in  the  third  person  plural. 

h.  Decline  ego,  tu  (§552),  plus  (§576). 

Compare  the  irregular  adjectives  of  §§573-575  and  give 
meanings. 

c.  Compare  the  irregular  adverbs  of  §589  and  give 
meanings, 

601.  Latin-English  Vocabulary. 

Give  the  memoranda  of  the  nouns ;  the  entire  nominative 
and  comparison  of  the  adjectives ;  the  principal  parts  of  the 
verbs ;  and  the  meanings  of  all  the  words. 


adventus 

impero 

omnin5 

si 

Pvuxilium 

iniuria 

ostendo 

sine 

bonus 

intercedo 

pacd 

singuli 

castellum 

invitus 

pello 

studeo 

certus 

iugum 

perduc5 

sub 

complures 

iungo 

pervenio 

subsidium 

concede 

legatus 

praeficio 

sumo 

concursus 

maleficium 

praesidium 

tamen 

convenio 

multo 

princeps 

telum 

deicio 

munitio 

puts 

tempers 

desists 

noceo 

qua 

uUus 

dum 

nol5 

quis 

ulterior 

214 

expedltus 

exterus 

facultas 

fluo 

fossa 

impedimentum 


BELLUM 

HELVETICUM 

nondum 

ratis 

sedecim 

nonnullus 

repello 

vadura 

novem 

responded 

vel 

nuUus 

reverter 

vel— vel 

ntintio 

rip  a 

vix 

occidd 

rogo 

volo 

voluntas 

602.     English-Latin  Vocabulary. 

Give  the  first  form  of  the  Latin  for  the  following: 


aid 

either — or 

missile 

show 

ambassador 

farther 

much  (adv.) 

sixteen 

answer 

first 

nevertheless 

some 

any 

fliow 

nine 

subdue 

approach  (noun) 

ford 

no  (adj.) 

take 

arrival 

fort 

not  yet 

think 

arrive 

fortification 

one  by  one 

throw  down 

assemble 

garrison 

opportunity 

under 

bank 

good 

or 

unhampered 

cease 

grant 

outside 

unwilling 

certain 

harm  (noun) 

place  in  command 

(be)  unwilling 

charge 

harm  (verb) 

prefer 

weapon 

come  together 

hasten 

protection 

where 

command 

hindrance 

raft 

while 

construct 

if 

refrain 

(be)  willing 

depth 

in  all 

reply 

willingness 

desire  (verb) 

injure 

report 

wish 

ditch 

intervene 

reserve 

without 

drive 

join 

return  (verb) 

wrong 

drive  back 

kill 

several 

yoke 

603.     Forms.  # 

Name  the  possessive  pronouns  and  give  their  meanings. 
How  are  adjectives  in  -er  compared?  the  six  in  -lis?  How 
are  adverbs  formed  from  first-and-second  declension  adjec- 
tives?   How  from  third  declension  adjectives?     Illustrate. 


LESSON    LXX  215 

604.  Syntax. 

Give  rule  for  the  subject  of  infinitives ;  for  the  dative  with 
intransitive  verbs;  for  the  dative  with  compound  verbs;  for 
the  dative  of  purpose;  for  the  dative  with  adjectives.  Tell 
how  each  of  the  three  classes  of  yes-ov-no  questions  is 
introduced.     How  are  other  questions  introduced? 

605.  Composition. 

Make  up  a  short  English  sentence  as  an  example  of  each 
of  the  constructions  mentioned  in  §604,  and  then  translate 
those  sentences  into  Latin. 


LESSON  LXX 

ABLATIVE  OF  SEPARATION     ABLATIVE  OF  CAUSE 
606.  TEXT 

Relinquebatur  una^  per  Sequanos  via.  HelvetiT  hac  via, 
Sequanis  invitls,^  propter  angustias  ire  non  poterant.  Se- 
quanls  sua  sponte*  persuadere  non  poterant.  Qua  de  causa 
legatos  ad  Dumnorlgem  Aeduum  mittunt  ut^  a  Sequanis 
impetrarent.  Dumnorige  deprecatore,  se  impetrare  posse 
sperant. 


Relinquebatur  una^  per  Sequanos  via,  qua  Sequanis  in- 
vitis^  propter  angustias  Tre  n5n  poterant.  His  cum^  sua 
sponte*  persuadere  non  possent,  legatos  ad  Dumnorlgem 
Aeduum  mittunt,  ut^  eo  deprecatore  a  Sequanis  impetrarent. 
(148-152,  Ch.  9.) 


216  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

NOTES 

1.  una  via:  only  the  way. 

2.  Sequanis  invitis:  compare  this  with  se  invito,  §588. 

3.  cum  non  possent:  since  they  could  not. 

4.  See  §313. 

5.  ut  .  .  .  impetrarent:  that  they  might  obtain  their  request. 


607.  VOCABULARY 

angustiae,  -arum,  f.   [angustus,  narrow],  narrowness,  narrows;    narrow 

pass. 
deprecator,   deprecatdrls,   m.,   intercessor,  advocate;     eo   deprecatore, 

ablative  absolute,  literally,  he  (being)  intercessor,  i.  e.,  with  him  as 

intercessor. 
impetro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  obtain  one's  request. 
re-linqu6,  -linquere,  -liqui,  -lictum,  leave  {behind). 
sponte,  ablative  of  a  defective  noun,  meaning  free  will;    sua  sponte, 

by  their  own  influence. 
via,  -ae,  f .,  way. 

What  are  the  meanings  of  the  expressions  via  Chicago; 
spontaneous  combustion? 


608.  ABLATIVE    OF   SEPARATION 

Models 

1.  Helvetii  eos  suis  finibus  prohibent,  the  Helvetians  keep 

them  from  their  territory. 

2.  Gallos   ab   Aquitanis   Garumna   dividit,    the    Garonne 

separates  the  Gauls  from  the  Aquitanians. 

Notes,  a.  This  use  of  the  ablative  answers  the  question  "From 
whomf  or  "From  what?"  and  is  employed  with  verbs  (and  adjec- 
tives) meaning  Tceep  out,  deprive,  free,  be  without,  need,  and  the  like. 

b.  When  a  Latin  verb  compounded  with  ab,  de,  or  ex  is  used,  the 
preposition  is  generally  used  also  with  the  ablative. 


LESSON    LXX  217 

c.  The  ablative  of  'place  from  which  is  simply  a  subdivision  of  the 
ablative  of  separation.  Note  the  similarity  in  construction  and  the 
difference  in  meaning  between  the  two  constructions.     See  §468. 

609.  RULE.  Separation  is  expressed  by  the  ablative,  with 
or  without  ab,  de,  or  ex, 

610.  ABLATIVE   OF   CAUSE 

Models 

1.  Spe  regni  hoc  fecit,  he  did  this  because  of  a  hope  of 

royal  power. 

2.  Virtute  sua  erat  nobilis,  he  was  noted  for  (on  account  of) 

his  bravery. 


Notes,     a.  This  use  of  the  ablative  answers  the  question,  "Why?'' 
"For  what   reason?"    "On  account  of  what?" 
h.  It  may  be  translated  by — 

on-account-of ;    as  in  the  sentence,  "He  succeeded  on  account 

of  his  wealth; " 
because-of ;   as  in  the  sentence,  "He  succeeded  because  of  his 

wealth;" 
from;    as  in  the  sentence,  "He  died  from  starvation;" 
with;    as  in  the  sentence,  "He  was  crazed  with  trouble;" 
for;    as  in  the  sentence,  "He  was  noted  for  his  courage." 
c.  Cause  may  also  be  expressed  by  the  accusative  with  ob  or  propter. 

611.  RULE,    Cause    may    be    expressed    by    the    ablative, 
usually  without  a  preposition. 

DRILL  EXEECISES 

612.  1.  Compare  bonus,  malus,  magnus,  parvus,  multus. 
2.  Decline  the  comparatives  of  parvus  and  multus. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

613.  1.  Plures  homines;    plus  virtutis.     2.  Maiore  telo; 
ab  optimis  hominibus ;  plurimis  annis.     3.  Virtute  sua  Belgae 


218  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

nobilissimi  omnium  Gallorum  fuerant.  4.  Ad  hoc  oppidum 
Helvetii  ex  sua  provincia  faciliore  via  venient.  5.  Angus- 
tiae  viae  sunt  tantae  ut  Helvetii  sua  sponte  transire  non 
possint.  6.  Ei  homines,  qui  domi  relinquuntur,  hostes  pro- 
hibere  non  poterunt.  7.  Aquitania  ab  Hispania  altissimis 
montibus  erat  divlsa  ut  adventus  mercatorum  esset  difficilis. 

614.  1.  We  were  left  at  Rome  on  the  same  day.  2.  Do 
you  wish  to  obtain-your-request  ?  3.  Because-of  our  cus- 
toms, we  are  larger  and  braver.  4.  Of  pur  own  free  will, 
we  shall  start  out  from  this  village.  5.  For  his  bravery, 
control  has  been  given  to  him  by  the  Helvetians.  6.  This 
way  is  less  easy  on-account-of  its  narrowness. 


LESSON  LXXI 

ABLATIVE    OF    COMPARISON 

ABLATIVE    OF    MEASURE    OF    DIFFERENCE 
615.  TEXT 

Dumnorlx^  gratia  et  largltione  apud  Sequanos  plurimum 
poterat.  Helvetiis  erat  amicus  quod  ex  ea  civitate  Orgeto- 
rigis  filiam  in  matrimonium  duxerat.  Cupiditate  regni 
adductus  novis  rebus-  studebat.  Quam  plurimas^  civitates 
suo  beneficio  obstringere  volebat. 


Dumnorix^  gratia  et  largitione  apud  Sequanos  plurimum 
poterat,  et  Helvetiis  erat  amicus  quod  ex  ea  civitate  Orgeto- 
rlgis  filiam  in  matrimonium  duxerat;  et  cupiditate  regni 
adductus  novis  rebus^  studebat  et  quam  plurimas^  civitates 
suo  beneficio  habere  obstrictas*  volebat,     (152-157,  Ch.  9.) 


LESSON   LXXI  219 

NOTES 

1.  See  Chap.  III.  This  is  the  Dumnorix  who  had  conspired  with 
Orgetorix.  Although  that  plot  had  failed,  he  was  still  seeking  a 
chance  to  make  himself  king. 

2.  See  §529. 

3.  quam  plurimas:    the  most  possible. 

4.  quam  .  .  .  obstrictas:  to  have  the  most  possible  states  bound  by 
his  Tcindness. 


616.  VOCABULARY 

beneficium,  -i,  n.  [bene,  well,  facio,  do],  Tcindness;    Tcind  deed. 

gratia,  -ae,  f .,  favor,  popularity. 

largitio,  largitionis,  f.,  free  giving. 

nevus,  -a,  -um,  no  comparative,  superlative  novissimus,  new;    novae 

res,  literally,  new  things;    regularly,  change,  revolution. 
ob-stringo,  -stringere,  -strinxi,  -strictum,  bind. 
quam,  coordinate  conjunction,  than. 

What  are  meanings  of  beneficial,  benevolent? 


617.  ablative  of  comparison 

Model 

Helvetu  erant  fortiores   JRoj^anis, f   ^^^^  Helvetians 

were  braver  than  the  Romans. 


Notes,     a.  When  two  persons  or  things  are  compared,  both  nouns 
are  in  the  same  case  if  quam  is  used. 

b.  Quam  may  be  omitted  only  when  the  first  of  the  two  nouns  is 
either  nominative  or  accusative. 

c.  If  quam  is  omitted,  the  second  noun  is  in  the  ablative. 

d.  After  the  comparative  plus,  minus,  amplius  and  longius,  quam 
is  usually  omitted  without  the  ablative  being  used. 

618.      RULE,    A  comparative  without  quam  is  followed  by 
the  ablative. 


220  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

619.  ABLATIVE   OF   MEASURE    (OR   DEGREE)    OF 

DIFFERENCE 

Model 

Hoc  flumen  est  latius  tribus  pedibus,  this  river  is  {wider 
hy  ihree  feet)  three  feet  wider. 

Notes,  a.  This  ablative  answers  the  question,  "How  much?"  and 
is  used  with  comparatives  and  words  implying  comparison. 

fc.  The  English  translation  of  this  ablative  requires  no  preposition. 

620.  RULE.  The  ablative  without  a  preposition  is  used 
with  comparatives  to  express  the  measure  (or  degree)  of 
difference. 

DRILL    EXERCISES 

621.  1.  Decline  vir,  vis.  2.  Conjugate  vol5  in  present 
indicative  and  give  synopsis  in  first  person  plural. 


TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

622.  1.  Munitioni  novae  praefici;  auxilio  esse  tibi.  2. 
Naves  erant  maiores  ratibus.  3.  Dumnorix  plebi  acceptior 
erat  Diviciaco.  4.  Exercitus  Helvetiorum  erit  maior  quam 
Caesaris.  5.  Haec  via  erat  multis  pedibus  latior  ut  hostes 
finibus  nostris  facillime  prohibere  non  possemus.  6.  Fines 
Helvetiorum  sunt  angustiores  multis  milibus  passuum  quam 
reliquorum  Gallorum.  7.  Sequani  beneficiis  Dumnorigis 
studebant  quod  eius  gratia  erat  maior. 

(Express  the  following  sentences  in  two  ways  where  possible.) 

623.  1.  The  Germans  were  larger  than  the  Romans.  2. 
We  had  a  narrower  territory  than  the  others.  3.  They 
fought  more  bravely  than  the  other  soldiers.  4.  Was 
not    Dumnorix 's    popularity    greater    than    his    brother's? 


LESSON    LXXII  221 

5.  Because-of  his  popularity  and  kindness,  Dumnorix  was 
more  powerful  than  his  brother.  6.  Had  he  desired  peace 
more  than  a  revolution  ? 


LESSON  LXXII 

ABLATIVE   OF   MANNER 

624.  TEXT 

Itaque  rem  suscipit  et  a  SequanTs  impetrat  ut  per  fines 
suos  Helvetids  Ire  patiantur.^  Obsides^  uti  inter^  sese  dent^ 
perficit.  Sequani  obsides  dant  ne  itinere  Helvetios  pro- 
hibeant.  Helvetii  obsides  dant  ut  sine  malefieio  et  iniuria 
transeant. 


Itaque  rem  suscipit  et  a  SequanTs  impetrat  ut  per  fines 
suos  Helvetios  Ire  patiantur/  obsidesque-  utI  inter^  se  dent* 
perficit:  Sequani,*  ne  itinere  Helvetios  prohibeant;^  Hel- 
vetii,* ut  sine  malefieio  et  iniuria  transeant.^  (157-160, 
Ch.  9.) 

NOTES 

1.  ut  .  .  .  patiantur  and  uti  .  .  .  dent:  objects  of  impetrat  and 
perficit  respectively;  see  §423,  2. 

2.  Object  of  dent. 

3.  inter  se  dent:  (give  among  themselves),  exchange. 

4.  Sequani  and  Helvetii:  subjects  of  obsides  dent  (understood). 

5.  ne  .  .  .  prohibeant  and  ut  .  .  .  transeant:  clauses  of  purpose 
depending  on  obsides  dent  (understood). 

625.  VOCABULARY 

itaque,  conjunction  and  adverb,  and  so,  therefore. 

obses,  obsidis,  m.  or  f .,  hostage,  a  person  given  by  one  party  to  anothei 
as  security  for  an  agreement.    For  pronunciation  see  §6. 


222  BELLUM    IIELVETICUM 

626.  ABLATIVE    OF    MANNER 

Models 

1.  Cum  virtute  bellum  i^erunt,  they  wage  war  with  bravery 

(or  bravely). 

2.  Magna   (cum)   virtute  bellum  gerunt,  they  wage  war 

with  great  bravery  (or  very  bravely). 

Notes,  a.  Contrast  this  use  of  the  English  preposition  with  and 
those  employed  with  other  ablatives. 

6.  This  use  of  the  ablative  answers  the  question  "How?" 

c.  This  ablative  must  have  cum  or  an  adjective,  and  may  have  both. 
"When  both  the  adjective  and  cum  are  used,  the  cum  is  generally 
placed  between  the  adjective  and  the  noun. 

d.  This  ablative  sometimes  answers  the  question  "Under  what 
circumstances?"  When  so  used,  it  may  be  called  the  ablative  of 
attendant  circumstance. 

e.  Manner  may  be  expressed  in  Latin  by  an  adverb  as  in  English. 

627.  RULE.  Manner  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  with 
either  cum  or  a  modifying  adjective,  rarely  with  both. 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

628.  1.  Give  memoranda  of  obses,  beneficium,  nox,  pes. 
2.  Give  all  infinitives  and  participles  of  iungo,  with  mean- 
ings.   3.  Decline  nova  res. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

629.  1.  Plura  beneficia;  maximum  numerum  obsidum. 
2.  Voluistine  plurimum  posse?  3.  Oppidum  maxima  vi 
oppugnare  voluit  in  quo  erat  magna  copia  frumentl.  4. 
Magno  dolore  reverterunt  quod  oppidum  capere  non  potu- 
erant.  5.  Itaque  Genavam  venerunt  et  magna  fortitudine 
hostes  reppulerunt.  6.  Haec  civitas  erat  multo  paratior  ad 
proficiscendum  quam  reliquae. 


V 

LESSON  Lxxm  223 

630.  1.  The  nearer  river;  the  fort  nearer  the  river. 
2.  The  farthest  hill;  with  greater  bravery.  3.  Eome  is  a 
larger  city  than  Geneva.  4.  Caesar  had  more  hostages 
than  the  others.  5.  And  so  with  great  grief  he  allows  them 
to  return.  6.  The  enemy  tried  very  courageously  to  keep 
them  out  of  the  town.  7.  These  men  who  were  not  friendly 
often  fought  bravely. 


LESSON  LXXIII 

CONJUGATION    OF   Fid 

ABLATIVE    WITH    CERTAIN   DEPONENT   VERBS 

631.  TEXT 

Helvetiis  est^  in  animo^  per  agrum  Sequanorum  et  Aeduo- 
rum  iter  in  Santonum  fines  facere.  Id  Caesarl  nuntiatur. 
Santones  non  longe  a  Tolosatium  finibus  absunt.  Haec 
civitas  est  in  provincia. 


Caesari  nuntiatur^  Helvetiis  esse-  in  animo^  per  agrum 
Sequanorum  et  Aeduorum  iter  in  Santonum  fines  facere,  qui 
non  longe  a  Tolosatium  finibus  absunt,  quae  civitas*  est  in 
provincia.     (161-164,  Ch.  10.) 


NOTES 

1.  nuntiatur:    the  subject  is  Helvetiis  .  .  .  facere. 

2.  esse  (est) :  the  subject  is  per  .  .  .  facere. 

3.  esse  in  animo:  compare  §558,  Note  2. 

4.  quae  civitas:  (which  state),  a  state  which. 


224  BELLUM    IIELVETICUM 

632.  VOCABULARY 

fio,  fieri,  f actus  sum  [passive  of  facio],  he  made,  he  done;   happen, 

potior,  potiri,  potitus  sum,  obtain  control,  gain. 

Santones,  Santonum  (Santoni,  Santonorum),  m.,  the  Santones,  a  tribe 

living  on  the  northern  bank  of  the  Garonne,  in  southwestern  Gaul. 
Tolosates,  Tolosatium,  m.,  the  Tolosates,  a  tribe  in  southwestern  Gaul, 

near  modern  Toulouse. 


633.  CONJUGATION    OF  FIO 

Fio  is  the  irregular  passive  of  facio,  male,  do.     Note  the  i  before 
all  vowels  except  e  in  the  combination  -er. 

fio,  fieri,  factus  sum,  he  made,  he  done;  happen,  hecome. 


SUBJUNCTIVE 

INDICATIVE 

Pres. 

fio,  fis,  fit 
fimus,  fitls,  fiunt 

fiam 

Imp. 

fiebam 

fierem 

Fut. 

fiam 

Perf. 

factus  sum 

factus  Sim 

Plup. 

factus  eram 

factus  essem 

Fut.  Perf. 

factus  ero 

INFINITIVES 

PARTICIPLES 

Pres. 

fieri 

Perf. 

factus 

Perf. 

factus  esse 

(gerundive) 

Fut. 

factum  iri 

Fut. 

faciendus 

634.   ABLATIVE  WITH  CERTAIN  DEPONENT  VERBS 

Models 

1.  Frumento  utor,  I  am  using  the  gram. 

2.  Imperio  potiemur,  we  shall  obtain  control. 

Note.     The    ablatives    in   the    above   sentences    are   translated  by 
direct  objects. 


LESSON  Lxxrv  225 

635.  RULE.  Utor,  fruor,  fungor,  potior,  and  vescor,  and 
their  compounds^  govern  an  ablative  which  is  translated  by  a 
direct  object. 

DRILL  EXERCISES 

636.  Give  all  infinitives  and  participles  of  utor,  potior, 
facio,  with  meanings. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

637.  1.  Hoc  opus  fiet;  haec  itinera  fiunt.  2.  Maior 
pons  fit;  illo  frumento  uti  iubebimini.  3.  Omni  frumento, 
quod  in  oppidls  est,  utemur  in  itinere.  4.  Multos  menses 
Orgetorix  regno  potirl  summa  vi  conatus  est.  5.  Multae 
res  a  Caesare  flent  ne  provincia  hos  homines  f initimos 
habeat.  6.  Nonne  nuntiatum  est  Ilelvetios  angustiores  fines 
quam  alias  civitates  habere? 

638.  1.  What  has  happened?  2.  Where  do  you  wish  this 
to  be  done?  3.  Will  this  building  be  made  much  larger 
than  that?  4.  They  very  often  obtained-control-of  towns 
by  means  of  battles.  5.  They  are  using  the  same  armies 
that  were  in  Gaul.  6.  Where  is  the  bridge  that  is  being 
made  by  Caesar?  7.  When  (at  what  time)  will  these  matters 
(res)  be  reported  to  Caesar? 


LESSON  LXXIV 

ABLATIVE    OF   ACCOMPANIMENT 
639.  TEXT 

Id^  sT  fiet,  provincia  Romana  homines  bellicosos,  populi 
Romani  inimicos,  locis^  patentibus  finitimos^  habebit.  Haec 
loca  sunt  maxime  frtimentaria.     Id  magno  cum  periculo* 


"226  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

provinciae   futurum   esse   intellegebat.^     Ob   eas   eausas  T. 
Labienum  legatum  praeficit  ei  munitioni  quam  fecerat. 


Id^  SI  fieret,  intellegebat-  magno  cum  periculo^  provinciae 
futurum  ut  homines*  bellicosos,  populi  Roman!  inimlcos, 
locis^  patentibus  maximeque  frumentariis  finitimos^  haberet. 
Ob  eas  eausas  ei  munitioni  quam  fecerat  T.  Labienum  legatum 
praeficit.     (164-169,  Ch.  10.) 

NOTES 

1.  Eefers  to  iter  .  .  .  facere  in  §631. 

2.  intellegebat  .  .  .  futurum  (esse):  he  realised  that  it  would  he 
(attended)  with  great  danger  (of)  to  the  province.  The  subject  of 
futurum  (esse)  is  the  clause  ut  .  .  .  haberet. 

3.  magno  cum  periculo:    see  §626,  Note  d. 

4.  homines:  object  of  haberet,  of  which  provincia  (understood)  is 
subject. 

5.  Dative,  modifying  the  adjective  finitimos. 

6.  adjacent.    It  modifies  homines. 

640.  VOCABULARY 

bellicosus,  -a,  -um  [bellum,  u-ar],  literally,  full  of  ivar;  warliTce. 

frumentarius,  -a,  -um  [frumentum,  grain],  literally,  pertaining  to 
grain;    productive  (of  grain). 

intel-lego,  -legere,  -lexi,  -lectum  [inter,  among,  lego,  choose'\,  under- 
stand, realize. 

Labienus,  -i,  m.,  (Titus)  Lahienus,  Caesar's  favorite  officer. 

pateo,  patere,  patui,  ,  he  open,  he  exposed.     Present  participle 

used  as  an  adj.,  open,  exposed. 

Titus,  -i,  m.  [abbr.  T.],  Titus,  a  Koman  *' first-name"  (prae-n5men). 

641.  ABLATIVE    OF    ACCOMPANIMENT 

Model 
Cum  Caesare  profecti  sunt,  they  started  out  with  Caesar. 


LESSON    LXXIV  227 

Notes,  a.  This  use  of  the  ablative  answers  the  question  ''In 
company  with  whom?"  and  always  denotes  persons  (singly  or  in 
bodies). 

&.  In  military  expressions  cum  is  sometimes  omitted. 

c.  Distinguish  this  meaning  of  the  preposition  wi1h  from  those 
used  in  such  sentences  as:  Be  was  crazed  with  (because  of)  grief. 
They  carry  grain  with  (by  means  of)  carts. 


642.      RULE.    Accompaniment  is  expressed  by  the  ablative 
with  cum. 


DRILL   EXERCISES 

643.  1.  Decline  the  Latin  for  the  nearer  road;  the  large 
place.  2.  Compare  magnus  and  maxime.  3.  Give  synopsis 
of  intelleg5  in  second  person  singular. 


TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

644.  1.  Militibus  imperare ;  legatum  exercituT  prae- 
ficere.  2.  Mea  cupiditas  belli;  erit  Romae.  3.  Possuntne 
haec  loca  fieri  maxime  frumentaria?  4.  Nonne  intellegitis 
Helvetios  cum  principibus  suis  Noreiam  iter  facere?  5. 
Legationes  duarum  civitatum  cum  multis  hominibus  Genavam 
iter  faciunt.  6.  Llultl  dolore  afficiuntur  quod  cum  bostibus 
contendere  non  possunt. 

645.  1.  He  goes  with  his  friend.  2.  He  was  killed  with 
a  missile.  3.  He  starts  out  with  great  courage.  4.  They 
asked  whom  he  had  placed  in  command  of  the  army.  5. 
He  did  not  know  whom  they  had  sent  home  with  Labienus. 
6.  This  province  was  so  productive  that  the  soldiers  were 
not  able  to  use  all  the  grain. 


228  BELLUM    IIELVETICUM 

LESSON^  LXXV 

ABLATIVE    AND    GENITIVE    OF    DESCRIPTION 

646.  TEXT 

Ipse  in  Italiam  magnis  itineribus^  contendit  duasque  ibi 
legiones  conscribit.  Tres  legiones,  quae  circum  Aquileiam 
hiemabant,  ex  hibernis  educit.  Proximum  iter  in  ulterio- 
rem  Galliam  per  Alpes  erat.  Hoc  itinere  cum  his  quinque 
legionibus  ire  contendit.  Ibi  Ceutrones  et  Graiocell  et 
Caturiges  locis  superioribus  occupatis  itinere*  exercitum 
prohibere  conantur. 


Ipse  in  Italiam  magnis  itineribus^  contendit  duasque  ibi 
legiones  conscribit,  et  tres,-  quae  circum  Aquileiam  hie- 
mabant, ex  hiberms  educit,  et,  qua^  proximum  iter  in  ulte- 
riorem  Galliam  per  Alpes  erat,  cum  his  quTnque  legionibus 
ire  contendit.  Ibi  Ceutrones  et  Graiocell  et  Caturiges  locTs 
superioribus  occupatis  itinere*  exercitum  prohibere  conan- 
tur.    (169-175,  Ch.  10.) 

NOTES 

1.  magnis  itineribus:  see  §627. 

2.  Supply  legidnes. 

3.  qua  proximum  iter  .  .  .  erat:  where  (there)  was  the  shortest  road, 

4.  See  §609. 

647.  VOCABULARY 

Alpes,  Alpium,  f.,  the  Alps,  a  term  applied  by  the  Eomans  to  all  the 

mountains  in  the  vicinity  of  modern  Switzerland. 
Aquileia,  -ae,  f.,  Aquileia,  a  Roman  city  at  the  head  of  the  Adriatic  Sea. 
Caturiges,  Caturigum,  m.,  the  Caturiges,  an  Alpine  tribe. 
Ceutrones,  Ceutronum,  m.,  the  Ceutrones,  an  Alpine  tribe. 


LESSON   LXXV  229 

circum,  preposition  with  ace,  around,  about. 

con-scribo,  -scribere,  -scripsi,  -scriptum,  literally,  write  together;  enroll, 

e-duco,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -due turn,  lead  out. 

Graioceli,  -drum,  m.,  the  Graioceli,  a  Gallic  tribe  living  in  the  Graian 

Alps. 
hibemus,  -a,  -um,  adjective,  winter.    Neuter  plural  used  as  a  substantive 

(with  castra  understood),  literally,  winter-camp,  i.  e.,  winter-quarters. 
Iiiem5,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  winter,  pass  the  winter. 
ibi,  adverb,  there,  in  that  place. 
Italia,  -ae,  f.,  Italy. 

QUinque,  indeclinable  cardinal   (numeral)   adjective,  five. 
superus,  -a,  -um  (for  comparison  see  §574),  high. 

Mention  English  words  derived  from  circum,  hibernus, 
quinque,  superus. 


ABLATIVE  AND   GENITIVE   OF  DESCRIPTION 

648.  Models 


1.  HominesJ       "^^y  amniv  I  jjjj^ijgjjt^r    men  of  unfriendly 
[inimici  animi   '  >  /       j  ^ 


inimico  animol 


disposition  will  he  sent. 

2.  Fliiminis  altitude  erat  trium  pedum,  the  river's  depth 
was  (of)  three  feet. 

Notes,  a.  This  ablative  (or  genitive)  describes  a  noun  and  hence 
is  an  adjective  phrase.    Most  other  uses  of  the  ablative  are  adverbial. 

h.  This  ablative  (or  genitive)  is  always  modified  by  an  adjective 
or  an  equivalent  genitive. 

c.  When  a  definite  number  is  given,  the  genitive  is  always  used 
and  is  then  called  the  genitive  of  measure. 

d.  The  descriptive  genitive  is  often  used  predicatively,  as  in  Model  2. 

649.  RULE.  The  ablative  or  genitive,  modified  by  an 
adjective,  describes  a  person  or  thing  by  naming  some 
quality. 


230  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

DRILL    EXERCISES 

650.  1.  Decline  ipse,  sui,  duo,  tres.  2.  Conjugate  eo  in 
the  present  indicative  and  give  synopsis  in  third  person 
plural. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

651.  1.  Circum  Genavam  sunt  mult!  montes  magna  alti- 
tudine.  2.  Exercitus  erat  Caesaris.  3.  Exercitus  eius  erat 
magnae  virtutis.  4.  Caesar  ipse  erat  magna  auctoritate. 
5.  Iter  duorum  milium  passuum  facere  coacti  sunt.  6.  Al- 
lobroges,  populus  bono  animo,  ibi  incolunt.  7.  Hi  quinque 
milites  ex  hibernis  educentur  quod  non  sunt  summa  forti- 
tudine. 

652.  1.  A  river  of  great  width;  a  province  of  many- 
mountains.  2.  lie  will  use  the  winter-quarters  which  are 
being  made  there.  3.  With  these  lieutenants,  I  shall  lead 
out  an  army  of  great  bravery.  4.  Within  one  year  we  pre- 
pared five  months'  grain.  5.  They  crossed  two  rivers  with 
very  high  banks.  6.  Garrisons  were  placed-at-intervals  about 
the  town. 


LESSON  LXXVI 

ABLATIVE    OF    SPECIFICATION 

653.  TEXT 

Hae  gentes  compluribus  proeliis  sunt  pulsae.  Ocelum  est 
citerioris  provinciae  extremum  oppidum.  Vocontii  sunt 
ulterioris  provinciae.  Ab  Ocelo^  Caesar  in  fines*  Voconti- 
orum  die  septimo  pervenit.     Inde  in  Allobrogum  fines,  ab 


LESSON   LXXVI  231 

Allobrogibus    in    Segusiavos*    exercitum    ducit.      Segusiavi 
sunt  extra  provinciam  trans  Rhodanum  primi. 


Compluribus  his^  proeliis^  pulsis,  ab  Ocelo,^  quod  est 
oppidum  citerioris  provinciae  extremum,  in  fines  Voconti- 
orum  ulterioris  provinciae  die  septimo  pervenit ;  inde  in 
AUobrogum  fines,*  ab  Allobrogibus  in  Segusiavos*  exer- 
citum dticit.  Hi  sunt  extra  provinciam  trans  Rhodanum 
primi.     (175-180,  Ch.  10.) 

NOTES 

1.  his  .  .  .  pulsis:    ablative  absolute. 

2.  compluribus  .  .  .  proeliis:    ablative  of  means  modifying  pulsis. 

3.  ab  Ocelo:  ab,  with  names  of  towns,  means  from  the  neighborhood  of. 

4.  in  fines:    into  the  country;   in  Segusiavos:    among  the  Segusiavi. 
Look  at  the  map  (p.  204)  and  notice  the  junction  of  the  Rhone  and 

Saone.  Caesar  probably  encamped  just  there,  and  Labienus  must  have 
brought  the  rest  of  the  army  to  the  same  point.  Caesar  had  been 
absent  some  time  in  Italy,  and  in  the  next  chapter  it  will  be  learned 
that  the  Helvetians  had  meanwhile  gone  through  the  pass  and  were 
somewhere  to  the  north. 


654.  VOCABULARY 

citerior,  citerius,  comparative   adjective    (for  comparison  see   §575), 

nearer;  with  provincia,  it  refers  to  the  province  of  Cisalpine  Gaul, 

the  part  of  Italy  north  of  the  Po. 
extra,  preposition  with  ace,  outside, 
gens,  gentis,  f.,  race,  tribe. 
inde,  adverb,  thence,  from  that  place. 

Ocelum,  -i,  n.,  Ocelum,  a  town  of  the  Graioceli  in  Cisalpine  Gaul. 
Segusiavi,  -orum,  m.,  the  Segusiavi,  a  tribe  of  Gauls  to  the  south  of  the 

Aeduans. 
Septimus,  -a,  -um,  ordinal  (numeral)  adjective,  seventh. 
Vocontii,  -drum,  m.,  the  Vocontii,  a  tribe  living  in  the  Eoman  province 

of  farther  Gaul. 


232  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

655.  ABLATIVE    OF   SPECIFICATION 

Models 

1.  Galli  virtute  praestabant,  the  Gauls  excelled  in  bravery, 

2.  Oppida,   numero  duodecim,  habent,   they  have  towns, 

twelve  in  mimher. 

Notes,     a.  This  use  of  the  ablative  answers  the  question,  "In  what 
respect?"  or  "In  respect  to  what?" 

b.  It  may  modify  a  verb    (like  other  ablatives),   an  adjective,  or 
sometimes  a  noun, 

c.  The  English  in  is  translated  into  Latin   only  when  it   denotes 
place,  not  when  it  denotes  time  or  specification. 

656.  RULE.     The  ablative,   without  a  preposition,   is  used 
to  denote  that  in  respect  to  which  a  statement  is  true. 


DEILL   EXERCISES 

657.  1.  Compare  citerior,  ulterior,  primus.  2.  Decline 
citerior.  3.  Give  all  the  infinitives  and  participles  of  pello, 
with  meanings. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

658.  1.  Mons  erat  magnus  altitudine.  2.  Mons  erat 
magna  altitudine.  3.  Num  milites  legionis  septimae  reli- 
quos  virtute  praecedunt?  4.  Facile  erit  citeriorem  Galliam 
occupare  quod  omnibus  fortitudine  praestamus.  5.  Privata 
eorum  aedificia  erant  multa  numero.  6.  Inde  in  oppidum 
primum  trans  flumen  ibimus. 

659.  1.  Caesar's  soldiers  were  very  keen  in  battle.  2. 
We  surpass  our  neighbors  of  the  nearer  towns  in  number 
of   soldiers.     3.  These   men   are   powerful  in   arms.     4.  In 


NINTH   REVIEW  LESSON 


233 


this  respect  (res),  our  first  attempt  will  be  very  easy.  5. 
That  river  is  great  in  length,  not  in  width.  6.  Thence  we 
shall  come  with  you  to  Ocelum  on  the  seventh  day  of  the 
next  month. 


NINTH  EEVIEW  LESSON 

660.  Give  an  account  of  the  events  narrated  in  Chap- 
ters IX  and  X,  and  then  translate  those  chapters. 

661.  Latin-English  Vocabulary. 

Give  the  memoranda  of  the  nouns;  the  entire  nominative 
and  comparison  of  the  adjectives;  the  principal  parts  of 
the  verbs ;  and  the  meanings  of  all  the  words. 


angustiae 

hiberna 

itaque 

quinqiie 

"beneficium 

hiems 

nuntio 

relinquo 

circum 

ibi 

novus 

Septimus 

citerior 

irapetro 

obses 

sponte 

educd 

inde 

pateo 

superus 

frumentarius 

intellegd 

primus 

via 

gratia 

English-Latin  Vocabulary. 
Give  the  first  form  of  the  Latin  for  the  following: 


about 

hostage 

nearer 

report  (verb) 

and  so 

in  that  place 

new 

seventh 

favor 

kindness 

obtain  one's 

;  request 

thence 

first 

know 

(be)  open 

there 

five 

lead  out 

popularity 

therefore 

free  will 

leave 

productive 

way 

from  that 

place 

narrows 

realize 

winter  (verb) 

high 

winter-quarters 

234  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

663.  Syntax. 

Give  the  rules  for  the  following  constructions: 

separation  with  certain  deponents 

cause  accompaniment 

comparison  description 

measure  of  difference  specification 
manner 

664.  Form  a  short  English  sentence  as  an  example  of 
each  of  the  constructions  named  under  §663,  and  then 
translate  those  sentences  into  Latin. 


LESSON  LXXVII 

IMPERATIVE    MOOD  COMMANDS 

665.  TEXT 

Dum  haec  a  Caesare  geruntur,  Helvetii  iam  per  angustias 
et  fines  Sequanorum  suas^  copias  tradtixerant,  et  in  Aedu- 
orum  fines  pervenerant  eoriimque^  agros  populabantur.^ 
AeduT  se  suaque^  ab  HelvetiTs  defendere  non  poterant.  Itaque 
legatos  ad  Caesarem  miserunt  qui  auxilium  rogarent. 


Helvetii  iam  per  angustias  et  fines  Sequanorum  suas^ 
copias  tradtixerant  et  in  Aedudrum  fines  pervenerant 
eorumque^  agros  populabantur.-  AeduT,  cum  se  suaque^ 
ab  eis  defendere  non  possent,  legatos  ad  Caesarem  mittunt 
rogatum*  auxilium.     (181-185,  Ch.  11.) 


LESSON   LXXVII  235 

NOTES 

1.  Eefers  to  whom? 

2.  traduxerant  .  .  .  pervenerant  .  .  .  populabantur:  note  the  change 
of  tenses. 

3.  and  their  property. 

4.  rogatum  auxilium:  to  ash  aid;  rogatum  is  a  supine. 

666.  VOCABULARY 

defends,  -fendere,  -fendi,  -fensum,  literally,  ward  of  from;    usually, 

defend. 
populor,  popular!,  populatus  sum,  ravage. 
tra-dtico,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -ductum,  lead  .  .  .  across. 

667.  IMPERATIVE    MOOD 

The  imperative  mood  has  only  two  tenses,  the  present  and 
the  future.  In  the  present  only  the  second  person  is  found, 
and  in  the  future  only  the  second  and  third.  The  future  is 
rarely  used. 

668.  FIRST  CONJUGATION 

ACTIVE 

Present 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

^nd  Pers.    lauda,  praise  laudate,  praise 

Future 

Bnd  Pers.    laudato,  you  shall  praise  laudatote,  you  shall  praise 

8rd  Pers.    laudato,  he  shall  praise  laudanto,  they  shall  praise 

PASSIVE 

Present 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

Bnd  Pers.    laudare,  he  praised  laudamini,  be  praised 

Future 


Pers.   laudator,  you  shall  be  praised 


8rd  Pers,    laudator,  he  shall  be  praised        laudantor,  they  shall  be  praised 


236  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

669.        PRESENT  IMPERATIVES  SECOND  PERSON 


Active 


Passive 


SINGULAR  PLURAL 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

lauda 

laudate 

praise 

laudare 

laudamini 

he  praised 

mone 

monete 

advise 

monere 

monemini 

he  advised 

due* 

ducite 

lead 

ducere 

ducimini 

he  led 

audi 

audite 

hear 

audire 

audimini 

he  heard 

cape 

capita 

take 

capere 

capimiul 

he  taken 

es 

i 

este 
ite 

he 

go 

ndn 

nolite 

he  unwilling 

*dic6,  duco,  facio,  fero  have  die,  due,  fac,  fer  for  present  active 
singular  imperative,  instead  of  the  regular  forms  which  end  in  -e. 


EXERCISES 

670.  1.  Vide.  2.  Existimate.  3.  Fac.  4.  Este.  5.  Pellite. 
6.  Defende.  7.  Comparamini.  8.  ArbitraminT.  9.  CommunT. 
10.  Patere. 

(Give  both  singular  and  plural.) 

671.  1.  Start  out.  2.  Say.  3.  Come.  4.  Hold.  5.  Receive. 
6.  Try.    7.  Send.    8.  Follow.    9.  Use.    10.  Cross. 


COMMANDS 

672.  Models 

1.  (a)  Laudemus,  let  us  praise. 

(h)  Ne  laudemus,  let  us  not  praise, 

2.  {a)  Lauda,  praise. 

(h)  Noli  laudare,  he  unwilling  to  praise,  douH  praise, 

3.  (a)  Laudet,  let  Mm  praise. 

(&)  Ne  laudet,  let  Mm  not  praise. 


LESSON  LXXVII  237 


Notes,     a.  A  command  in  the  first  person  is  called  an  exhortation 
or  a  hortatory  subjunctive. 

b.  Ne  or  non  with  the  imperative  is  not  used  in  prose  to  express  a 
command. 

c.  A  command  in  the  third  person  is  called  a  jussive  subjunctive. 


673.  RULES.  (1)  A  command  in  the  first  person  Is  ex= 
pressed  by  the  first  person  plural  of  the  present  subjunctive, 
the  negative  being  ne. 

(2)  A  positive  command  in  the  second  person  is  expressed 
by  the  present  imperative.  The  negative  is  usually  expressed 
by  noli  or  nolite  with  the  present  infinitive. 

(3)  A  command  in  the  third  person  is  expressed  by  the 
present  subjunctive,  the  negative  being  ne. 


674.  SUMMARY    OF    COMMANDS 


Affirmative  Negative 

SINGULAR  SINGULAR 

1st  Pers.       (is  not  found)  (is  not  found) 

B7id  Pers.     lauda,  praise  noli  laudare,  don  H  praise 

3rd  Pers.     laudet,  let  him  praise  ne  laudet,  let  him  not  praise 


PLURAL  PLURAL 

1st  Pers.      laudemus,  let  us  praise  ne  laudemus,  let  us  not  praise 

2nd  Pers.     laudate,  praise  nolite  laudare,  don  H  praise 

3rd  Pers.     laudent,  let  them  praise  ne  laudent,  let  them  not  praise 


DRILL  EXERCISES 

675.     Give    all   the    present    imperatives    of   do,    munio, 
sequor,  iubeo,  deligo. 


238  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

676.  1.  Exercitum  educat.  2.  Ne  hlberna  defendamus. 
3.  Nolite  agros  nostros  popular!.  4.  Mihi  obsides  dent.  5. 
Orgetorix  ad  eas  res  conficiendas  deligatur.  6.  Noll  Caesari 
enuntiare  quid  legatl  dicant.  7.  Dixit  se  suTs  auxilium 
dare  non  posse.  8.  Helvetii  per  fines  Sequanorum  copias 
suas  traducent  ut  Aeduorum  agros  populentur. 

677.  1.  Let  us  come.  2.  Let  them  go.  3.  Don't  start 
out.  4.  Let  us  not  follow.  5.  Let  them  all  defend  their 
homes  and  children.  6.  Don't  come  into  Gaul  without  a 
large  army.  7.  Let  him  lead  his  army  across  that  river. 
8.  Let  us  not  fear  that  the  enemy  will  ravage  the  province. 


LESSON  LXXVin 

GERUNDS  AND  GERUNDIVES 
678.  TEXT 

''Ita  n5s,"  inquiunt,  *'omni  tempore  de  populo  Romano 
merit!  sumus  ut  agr!  nostr!  vastar!  non  debuerint.^  Paene 
in  conspectu  exercitus  Roman!,  l!ber!  nostr!  in  servittitem 
abducl,  oppida  nostra  expugnar!  non  debuerunt."  Ambarr! 
erant  necessari!  et  consanguine!  Aeduorum.  Helveti!  agros 
Ambarrorum  depopulat!  sunt.  Ambarr!  Caesar!,  "Non 
facile,'*  inquiunt,  "ab  oppid!s  nostr!s  vim  hostium  pro- 
hibemus. ' ' 


Ita  se^  omn!  tempore  de  populo  Romano  meritos  esse  ut 
paene  in  conspectu  exercitus  nostr!^  agr!^  vastar!,*  l!ber!  in 
servittitem  abduc!,  oppida  expugnar!  non  debuerint.^  Eodem 


LESSON  Lxxvm  239 

tempore  AmbarrI,  necessarii  et  cdnsanguinei  Aeduorum, 
Caesarem  certiorem^  faciunt^  sese^  depopulatis^  agrls  non 
facile  ab  oppidis  vim  hostium  prohibere.     (185-191,  Ch.  11.) 

NOTES 

1.  se  .  .  .  meritos  esse:  the  indirect  discourse  depends  on  the  idea 
of  saying  implied  in  the  previous  words.  In  translating  supply  the 
words,  '' saying  that." 

2.  Modifies  exercitus. 

3.  agri,  liberi,  oppida:    subjects  of  debuerint. 

4.  vastari,  abduci,  expugnari:  infinitives  complementary  to  de- 
buerint. 

5.  The  perfect  tense  is  sometimes  used  in  a  result  clause  depending 
on  a  secondary  tense,  though  this  is  an  exception  to  the  rule  for 
sequence  of  tenses.  See  §371.  Note  the  difference  between  the 
Latin  and  the  English  idiom.  The  present  infinitive  and  the  perfect 
tense  of  debeo  are  here  to  be  translated:  ought  not  to  have  been  laid 
waste,  etc. 

6.  Predicate  adjective  agreeing  with  Caesarem. 

7.  certiorem  faciunt:  equivalent  to  a  verb  of  saying. 

8.  Subject  of  prohibere;  translate  this  by  the  progressive  form. 

9.  depopulatis:  passive  in  meaning  though  the  verb  depopulor  is 
deponent. 

679.  VOCABULARY 

ab-duc6,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -ductum,  lead  away,  carry  away. 

Ambarri,  -drum,  m.,  the  Ambarri,  dependents  of  the  Aeduans,  south- 
east of  them,  near  the  Saone. 

con-sanguineus,  -a,  -um,  literally,  of  common  blood,  i.  e.,  related. 
Masculine  as  substantive,  kinsman. 

conspectus,  -us,  m.,  sight. 

de-populor,  -popular!,  -populatus  sum,  ravage  (completely). 

ex-pugno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  literally,  fight  out;  regularly,  talce  (by 
storm). 

liberi,  -orum,  m.,  (free)  children. 

mereor,  mereri,  meritus  sum,  deserve. 

necessarius,  -a,  -um,  literally,  necessary.  Masculine  plural  as  substan- 
tive, close  friends. 


240 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


paene,  adverb,  almost. 
servitus,  servitutis,  f.,  slavery. 
vasto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  lay  waste. 

What    are    the    meanings    of    consanguinity,    depopulate, 
meritorious,  devastate  f 


680. 


GERUND    AND    GERUNDIVE 


Both  the  gerund  and  the  gerundive  may  be  formed  from 
the  present  participle  by  dropping  the  s  and  adding  -di 
for  the  genitive  Of  the  gerund  and  -dus  for  the  masculine 
singular  nominative  of  the  gerundive,  shortening  the  vowel 
before  the  ending. 


681. 


GERUNDS 


FIRST   CONJUGATION         SECOND   CONJUGATION       THIRD  CONJUGATION 


Gen.  laudandi,  of  praising 
Dat.     laudando,  for 

praising 
Ace.  laudandum,  praising 
Abl.     laudando,  by,  in 

praising 


monendi,  of  warning 
monendo,  for 

warning 
monendum,  warning 
monendo,  hy,  in 

warning 


ducendi,  of  leading 
ducendo,  for 

leading 
ducendum,  leading 
ducend5,  by,  in 

leading 


FOURTH   CONJUGATION 

Gen.  audiendi,  of  hearing 

Bat.  audiendo,  for  hearing 

Ace.  audiendum,  hearing 

Abl.  audiendo,  by,  in  hearing 


THIRD    CONJUGATION   IN    -16 

capiendi,  of  talcing 
capiendo,  for  talcing 
capiendum,  talcing 
capiendo,  by,  in  talcing 


682. 


GERUNDIVES 


The  gerundives  are  the  same  in  form  and  meaning  as  the 
future  passive  participles.    See  §388. 


LESSON   LXXVIII 


241 


First  Conj. 
Second  Conj. 
Third  Conj. 
Fourth  Conj. 
Third  Conj.  in  -io 


laudandus,  -a,  -um; 
monendus,  -a,  -um; 
ducendus,  -a,  -um; 
audiendurf,  -a,  -um; 
capiendus,  -a,  -um; 


to-he-praised 

to-he-warned 

to-he-led 

to-he-heard 

to-he-taTcen 


683.    The  Gerund 

is  active 

is  a  neuter  verbal  noun. 

is  used  like  any  other  noun. 


has  only  four  forms. 


The  Gerundive 

is  passive. 

is  a  verbal  adjective. 

always  agrees  with  a 
noun  in  gender, 
number,  and  case. 

has  all  the  forms  of  any 
regular  adjective. 


684.     In  the  following  sentences,  illustrating  the  uses  of 
the  gerund,  notice : 

1.  That  the  infinitive  is  used  in  place  of  the  nominative 
of  the  gerund  and  also  of  the  accusative  (except 
as  object  of  a  preposition). 

2.  That,  with  an  intransitive  verb,  the  gerund  is  used 
like  the  English  verbal  noun  in  -ing. 


Nom.      proficisci  erat  diflacile,  starting  out  was  difftcult;  it  was  dif- 
ficult to  start  out. 

Gen.       proficiscendi  causa  frumentum  comparaverunt;   they  prepared 

grain  for  the  purpose  of  starting  out. 

Dat.       dies  proficiscendo  constituta  est  (rare) ;  a  day  icas  appointed  for 

starting  out. 

Ace.       dies  ad  proficiscendum  constituta  est;  a  day  was  appointed  for 

starting  out. 
proficisci  conati   sunt;    they  tried  starting  out;   they  tried  to 
start  out. 

Ahl.       eos  pugnando  superavit;  he  conquered  them  hy  fighting. 


242  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

685.  Ill  the  following  sentences,  comparing  the  gerund 
with  the  gerundive,  notice  that,  when  the  English  verbal 
noun  in  -i7ig  is  used  with  a  direct  object: 

1.  The  gerund  is  not  employed,  except  in  the  genitive 
case. 

2.  The  English  direct  object,  retaining  its  gender  and 
number,  takes  the  case  the  gerund  would  have  had, 
and  the  gerundive  is  made  to  agree  with  this  noun 
in  gender,  number,  and  case. 

Gen.  He  came  for  the  purpose  of  huilding  a  ship  = 

(either),  Gerund:     navem  faciendi  causa*  venit; 
(or),  Gerundive:     navis  faciendae  causa*  venit. 
(of  a  ship  to-be-built) 
Dat.  He  came  for  (the  purpose  of)  building  a  ship  = 
Gerundive:     navi  faciendae  venit  (rare), 
(for  a  ship  to-be-built) 
Ace.    He  came  for  (the  piirpose  of)  building  a  ship  = 
Gerundive:     ad*  navem  faciendam  venit. 
(for  a  ship  to-be-built) 
Abl.     He  conquered  the  enemy  by  building  ships  = 

Gerundive:     navibus  faciendis  hostes  superavit. 
(by  ships  to-be-built) 


DRILL   EXERCISES 

686.     Give,  with  meanings,  all  the  participles  of  the  model 
verbs ;  also,  of  proficiscor,  conor,  eo. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

In  distinguishing  the  gerund  from  the  gerundive,  remember: 

1.  That  the  gerund  has  no  endings  except  -i,  -6,  and  -um. 

2.  That  the  gerundive  always  agrees  in  gender,  number,  and  case 
with  some  noun. 


*  causa  with  the  genitive  and  ad  with  the  accusative  express  purpose, 


LESSON    LXXIX  243 

687.  1.  Spes  regni  obtinendi  erat  OrgetorigT.  2.  Mitte 
homines  ad  rates  faciendas.  3.  Helvetii  cupidi  eius  rei  con- 
ficiendae  esse  debent,  4.  Helvetii  erant  cupidissimi  earum 
rerum  c5nficiendarum.  5.  Liberos  nostros  defendendi  facul- 
tatem  meremur.  6.  Nostros  necessaries  consanguineosque 
in  servittitem  abducendi  causa  hoc  fecit. 

688.  1.  Your  children  will  be  sent  to  (ad)  see  their 
(own)  homes.  2.  Their  (close)  friends  will  do  those  things 
that  prepare  them  for  (ad)  resisting.  3.  The  Sequanians 
will  make  war  by  laying  waste  the  territory.  4.  Many 
kinsmen  were  left  to  (ad)  set-fire-to  the  village.  5.  Taking 
the  town  by  storm  will  not  be  easy.  6.  The  army  went 
almost  out  of  sight  by  crossing  the  river.  7.  We  did  not 
deserve  slavery,  did  we  ? 


LESSON  LXXIX 

CAUSAL   CLAUSES    WITH    QUOD    AND   WITH     CUM 

689.  TEXT 

Allobroges  trans  Rhodanum  vicos  possessionesque  habe- 
bant.  Itaque  fuga  se  ad  Caesarem  recipiunt^  et  demonstrant 
sibi^  praeter  agri  solum  nihil  esse  reliqul.^  Quibus  rebus 
adductus  Caesar  non  exspectandum  esse  sibi*  statuit  dum- 
omnes  fortiinae  sociorum  consumerentur.  Statuit  etiam  non 
exspectandum  sibi  dum^  in  Santonos  Helvetii  pervenlrent. 


Item   Allobroges,   qui   trans   Rhodanum   vTcos   possessio- 
nesque habebant,  fuga  se  ad  Caesarem  recipiunt^  et  demon- 


244  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

strant  sibi-  praeter  agri  solum  nihil  esse  reliqui.^  Quibus 
rebus  adductus  Caesar  non  exspectandum  sibi^  statuit  dum,^ 
omnibus  fortunls  sociorum  consumptis,  in  Santonos  Helvetii 
pervemrent.     (191-197,  Ch.  11.) 

NOTES 

1.  With  se:  literally,  laTce  one's  self  haclc,  hetdke  one's  self,  retreat, 
retire  (in  good  order). 

2.  Dative  of  possessor. 

3.  sibi  .  .  .  esse  reliqui:    {that  there  was  to  them  nothing  of  left), 
that  they  had  nothing  left.    For  reliqui,  see  §491. 

4.  non  exspectandum  (esse)  sibi:  {that  it  ought  not  to  he  waited  by 
himself),  that  he  ought  not  to  wait. 

5.  dum  with  the  subjunctive  means  until. 

690.  VOCABULARY 

con-siim5,  -sumere,  -siimpsi,  -sumptum,  literally,  talce  away  altogether, 

i.  e.,  use  up,  consume,  destroy. 
de-m5nstr5,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  point  out,  show. 

ex-specto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  literally,  look  out;  regularly,  wait,  await. 
fortuna,  -ae,  f.,  fortune;  in  plural,  property. 
nihil,  n.,  indeclinable  noun,  nothing. 
possessio,  possessionis,  f.,  possession. 
solum,  -i,  n.,  soil. 
statud,  statuere,  statui,  statiitum,  literally,  station;  decide. 

691.  CAUSAL    CLAUSES   WITH  QUOD,  QUIA,  QUONIAM 

Models 

1.  Reliquos  Gallos  praecedunt  quod  cum  finitimis  saepe 

contendunt,  they  surpass  the  other  Gauls  hecause  they 
fight  often  with  the  neighbors. 

2.  Caesar   milites   laudavit   quod  fortiter   pugnavissent, 

Caesar  praised  the  soldiers  hecause  {as  he  said)  they 
had  fought  bravely. 


LESSON  LXXIX  245 

Notes,  a.  Of  the  two  subordinate  verbs  introduced  by  quod,  the 
first  is  indicative;  the  second,  subjunctive. 

h.  The  reason  in  the  first  is  not  quoted;  the  reason  in  the  second  ia 
quoted. 

692.  RULE.  Quod,  quia,  quoniam  are  used  with  the 
indicative  unless  the  reason  is  quoted. 

693.  CAUSAL   CLAUSES    WITH    CUM 

Model 

His  cum  persuadere  non  possent,  legates  miserunt,  since 
they  were  not  able  to  persuade  them,  they  sent  am- 
bassadors. 

Notes,  a.  The  verb  of  the  subordinate  clause,  though  subjunctive, 
is  translated  by  an  indicative. 

&.  The  rule  for  sequence  applies  here. 

694.  RULE.  Cum,  meaning  since  or  because,  is  used  with 
the  subjunctive. 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

695.  1.  Decline  together  the  Latin  for  our  children,  the 
nearer  province.  2.  Give  the  forms  of  the  present  impera- 
tive of  Conor  and  cdnsumo. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

696.  1.  Noll  adventum  meum  exspectare.  2.  Mitten- 
turne  ad  fortunas  consumendas?  3.  Cum  civitas  ob  eas  res 
incitata  esset,  magistratus  homines  multos  ex  agrls  cogere 
statuerunt.  4.  Cum  Germanos  possessionibus  nostris  pro- 
hibuerlmus,  totius  Galliae  plurimum  poterimus.  5.  Cum 
hanc  fidem  et  ius  iurandum  dederltis,  vobis  obsides  osten- 
dam.  6.  Civitate  incitata,  arma  plura  comparari  oportet. 
7.  VobIs  demonstrabimus  cur  nos  superare  non  possTtis. 


246  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

697.  1.  Let  us  start  out.  2.  Can't  you  decide  who  I  am? 
3.  We  are  more  powerful  because  we  fight  with  the  armies 
of  the  Germans.  4,  Since  all  their  property  had  been 
destroyed,  they  decided  to  await  Caesar's  approach.  5. 
Because  a  beginning  of  war  has  been  made,  we  shall  collect 
more  men.  6.  Will  you  show  me  why  he  praises  his 
children  ? 


LESSON  LXXX 

TEMPORAL    CLAUSES    WITH    CUM 
698.  TEXT 

Fltimen^  est  Arar,  quod  per  fines  Aeduorum  et  SequanS- 
rum  in  Rhodanum  influit.  Hoc  flumen  incredibill  lenitate^ 
fluit  ita  ut  oculTs  in  utram  partem  fluat^  itidicari  non  possit.^ 
Id  Helvetii  ratibus^  ac  lintribus  iunctls  transibant. 


Flumen^  est  Arar,  quod  per  fines  Aeduorum  et  Sequano- 
rum  in  Rhodanum  Tnfluit  incredibill  lenitate^  ita  ut  oculis 
in  utram  partem  fluat^  iudicari  n5n  possit.*  Id  Helvetii 
ratibus^  ac  lintribus  itinctis  transibant.     (198-201,  Ch.  12.) 


NOTES 

1.  flumen  est  Arar:    There  is  a  river,  the  Saone. 

2.  See  §627. 

3.  See  §370. 

4.  See  §437. 

5.  ratibus  and  lintribus:  ablatives  of  means,  not  absolute. 


LESSON  LXXX  247 

699.  VOCABULARY 

Arar,  Araris,  m.,  accusative  Ararim,  ablative  Arari,  the  Saone,  a  river 

of  southern  Gaul  tributary  to  the  Khone. 
in-credibilis,  -e,  literally,  unbelievable,  incredible;   extraordinary. 
iudico,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  judge. 
lenitas,  lenitatis,  f.,  smoothness. 
linter,   lintris,    f.,   genitive   plural   lintrium,    small   boat,  probably   a 

"dug-out." 
oculus,  -i,  m.,  eye. 
uter,  utra,  utrum,  genitive  utrius,  etc.,  interrogative  adjective,  which 

(of  two).    For  declension  see  §283. 

What  English  words  are  derived  from  iudico,  oculus? 

700.  CUM   TEMPORAL 

Models 

1.  Helvetii  contendunt  cum  suis  finibus  eos  prohibent, 

the  Helvetians  fight  when  they  are  keeping  them  out  of 
their  territory. 

2.  Cum  civitas  ius  suum  exsequi  conaretur,   Orgetorix 

mortuus  est,  when  the  state  was  trying  to  assert  its 
right,  Orgetorix  died. 

3.  Caesari  cum  id  niintiatum  esset,  matiiravit  ab  urbe 

proficisci,  when  this  had  been  reported  to  Caesar,  he 
hastened  to  stai't  out  from  the  city. 

Notes,  a.  In  Model  1,  the  main  verb  is  principal  and  cum  is  used 
with  the  indicative;  in  Models  2  and  3,  the  main  verbs  are  historical 
and  cum  is  used  with  the  subjunctive. 

h.  The  subjunctive  is  here  translated  by  the  indicative. 

c.  The  rule  for  sequence  applies  here. 

701.  RULE.  When  the  main  verb  is  historical,  cum  tern' 
poral  takes  the  subjunctive;  otherwise  the  indicative  is 
regularly  used. 


248  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

DRILL   EXEPCISES 

702.  1.  Give  the  synopsis  of  transeo  in  third  person 
singular.    2.  Decline  vis,  vir,  incredibilis. 

TRANSLATION   EXERCISES 

703.  1.  Mains  oppidum;  meliorum  consiliorum.  2.  Duo 
milia  passuum  iit.  3.  Ad  oppidum  oppugnandum  eodem 
die  revertit.  4.  Incredibilis  numerus  militum  auxilio  urbi 
missus  erat.  5.  Cum  Caesar  ab  urbe  profectus  esset,  Gena- 
vam  venit.  6.  Cum  omnia  ad  profectionem  comparata 
essent,  ad  ripam  convenerunt.  7.  Cum  Caesar  Roma  ve- 
nerit,  exercitus  domum  contendet.  8.  Helvetii  cum  popu- 
lum  Romanum  non  esse  amicum  iudicarent,  per  Sequanos 
exierunt. 

704.  1.  With  extraordinary  violence;  with  more  sol- 
diers. 2.  A  river  of  the  greatest  smoothness;  to  excel  in 
number  of  men.  3.  He  does  this  when  he  wishes.  4.  He 
does  this  because  (cum)  he  wishes.  5.  When  they  were 
not  able  to  persuade  the  Allobroges,  they  compelled  them 
by  force.  6.  Can  you  decide  in  what  direction  (pars)  you 
are  going?  7.  When  you  are  willing  (future  perfect)  to 
send  me,  I  shall  go. 


LESSON  LXXXI 

NUMERALS 

705.  TEXT 

Helvetii  tres  iam  partes^  copiarum  id  fltimen^  traduxe- 
rant.  Quarta  fere  pars  citra  flumen  Ararim  reliqua^  erat. 
Ubi  per  exploratores  Caesar  de  his  rebus  certior  factus  est, 


LESSON  LXXXI  249 

de  tertia  vigilia^  cum  legionibus  tribus  e  castrls  profectus 
est.    Ad  earn  partem  pervenit  quae  nondum  flumen  transierat. 


Ubi  per  exploratores  Caesar  certior  factus  est  tres^  iam 
partes-  copiarum  Helvetios  id  flumen^  traduxisse,*  quartam 
fere  partem  eitra  flumen  Ararim  reliquam^  esse,  de  tertia 
vigilia^  cum  legionibus  tribus  e  castrls  profectus  ad  eam 
partem  pervenit  quae  nondum  flumen  transierat.  (201-206, 
Ch.  12.) 

NOTES 

1.  tres  .  .  .  traduxisse:  that  the  Helvetians  had  already  conveyed 
three  parts  (or  fourths)  of  their  troops  across  this  river. 

2.  partes  is  object  of  the  verb  and  flumen  is  accusative  governed 
by  the  preposition  in  the  verb. 

3.  left. 

4.  Connect  with  esse  by  et  (supplied). 

5.  de  tertia  vigilia:  in  the  third  watch. 

706.  VOCABULARY 

castra,  -orum,  n.,  plural  only,  a  (fortified)  camp. 
citra,  preposition  with  ace,  on  this  side  of. 

explorator,  exploratoris,  m.,  literally,  one  who  finds  out;  regularly,  scout. 
quartus,  -a,  -um,  ordinal  (numeral)  adjective,  fourth. 
vigilia,  -ae,  f.,  watch,  one  of  the  four  equal  divisions  into  which  the 
Eomans  divided  the  time  between  sunset  and  sunrise. 


707.  NUMERALS 

Numeral  adjectives  are  of  three  classes: 

1.  Cardinals,  answering  the  question  ''How  many?"  as: 
one,  two,  etc. 

2.  Ordinals,  answering  the  question  ^^  Which  in  order  f 
as :  first,  second,  etc. 

3.  Distributives,  answering  the  question  ''How  many  each?" 
as :  one  each,  two  each,  etc. 


250 


BELLUM   HELVETICUM 


708.     Learn  the  following; 


Cardinals 

Ordinals 

1. 

tinus,  -a,  -um 

11. 

undecim 

1st. 

primus,  -a,  -um 

2. 

duo,  -ae,  -o 

12. 

duodecim 

2nd. 

secundus,  -a,  -um 

3. 

tres,  tria 

13. 

tredecim 

3rd. 

tertius,  -a,  -um 

4. 

quattuor 

14. 

quattuordecim 

4th. 

quartus,  -a,  -um 

5. 

quinque 

15. 

quindecim 

5th. 

quintus,  -a,  -um 

6. 

sex 

16. 

sedecim 

6th. 

sextus,  -a,  -um 

7. 

septem 

17. 

septendecim 

7th. 

Septimus,  -a,  -um 

8. 

octo 

18. 

duodeviginti 

8th. 

octavus,  -a,  -um 

9. 

novem 

19. 

undeviginti 

9th. 

nonus,  -a,  -um 

10. 

decern 

20. 
21. 

(decern  novem) 
viginti 

unus  et  viginti 
(viginti  unus) 

10th. 

decimus,  -a,  -um 

Distributives 

1  each,  singuli,  -ae,  -a 

2  each,  bini. 

-ae,  a 

3  each,  temi 

(trini). 

-ae,  -a 

4  each,  quaterni,  -ae. 

-a 

• 

5  each,  quini, 

6  each,  seni. 

-ae,  -a 
-ae,  -a 

Notes,  a.  Study  (App.  47)  the  formation  of  the  multiples  of 
ten  and  of  a  hundred.  Notice  that  the  multiples  of  ten  above  twenty 
end  in  -inta,  and  the  hundreds  above  one  hundred  end  in  -enti,  -ae,  -a. 

b.  Of  the  cardinals,  unus,  duo,  tres,  all  the  hundreds  (except  centum) 
and  milia  (plural  of  mille)  are  declinable.  See  §§96,  106,  284,  505. 
The  hundreds  are  declined  like  the  plural  of  longus. 

c.  Notice  that  mille  in  the  singular  is  indeclinable,  has  two  I's, 
and  is  usually  an  adjective,  as:  mille  passus,  a  thousand  'paces.  In 
the  plural,  milia  is  declinable,  has  one  1  (usually),  and  is  a  noun,  as: 
duo  milia  passuum,  two  thousands  of  paces. 

d.  The  ordinals  are  declined  like  longus;  the  distributives  like  the 
plural  of  longus. 

DRILL  EXERCISES 

709.  Decline  together  maior  pars;  omnis  civitas;  pater 
noster. 


LESSON    LXXXII  251 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

710.  1.  Duobus  bellTs.  2.  Decern  flumina.  3.  Ab  quln- 
que  mercatoribus.  4.  Tertia  vigilia.  5.  Binae  naves.  6. 
Centum  partium.     7.  Quarto  die.     8.  Septuaginta  homines. 

9.  Septingenti  homines.  10,  Cum  terms  mllitibus.  11.  Aedui 
itidicare  non  poterant  quas  copias  Helvetii  flumen  traduxissent. 
12.  Duos  exploratores  misit  qui  locum  castris  deligerent.  13. 
Diviciacus  Caesari  resistere  non  conabitur  quod  est  ei  amicus. 

711.  1.  By  two  roads.  2.  Two  soldiers  each.  3.  With 
the  tenth  legion.  4.  One  thousand  paces.  5.  Eight  thou- 
sand paces.  6.  Of  the  third  watch.  7.  Two  eyes  (ace). 
8.  In  the  fourth  month.     9.  He  awaited  them  for  six  days. 

10.  Two  villages  and  three  towns  were  being  set-on-fire 
when  I  was  with  the  army.  11.  The  others  w^ere  able  to 
send  men  to  fortify  the  camp.  12.  Caesar  led  his  soldiers 
across  the  river  w^hich  w^as  nearest  the  town.  13.  The 
scout 's  memory  of  these  things  was  extraordinary. 


LESSON  LXXXII 

CONJUGATION  OF  FERO  DECLENSION  OF  DEUS 

712.  TEXT 

Hos  Helvetios  impeditos  et  inopinantes  Caesar  aggressus 
est  et  magnam  partem  eorum  concidit.  ReliquI  sese  fugae^ 
mandarunt^  atque  in  proximas  silvas^  abdiderunt.  Is  pagus 
appellabatur  Tigurlnus;*  nam  omnis  civitas  Helvetia  in 
quattuor  pagos  dlvisa^  est.  Hic  pagus  unus  patrum  nostro- 
rum  memoria'^  domo  exierat  atque  L.  Cassium  consulem 
interfecerat  et  eius  exercitum  sub  iugum  miserat. 


252  BELLUM    IIELVETICUM 

Eos  impeditos  et  inopinantes  aggressus  magnam  partem 
eorum  concidit;  reliqui  sese  fugae^  mandarunt-  atque  in 
proximas  silvas^  abdiderunt.  Is  pagus  appellabatur  Tiguri- 
nus;*  nam  omnis  civitas  Helvetia  in  quattuor  pagos  dlvTsa^ 
est.  Hie  pagus  unus,  cum  domo  exisset^  patrum  nostrorum 
memorial  L.  Cassium  consulem  interfecerat  et  eius  exer- 
citum  sub  iugum  miserat.    (206-213,  Ch.  12.) 


NOTES 

1.  See  §53. 

2.  Shortened  form  of  mandaverunt.     See  §503,  Note  1. 

3.  Accusative,  because  motion  is  implied  in  abdiderunt. 

4.  See  §85. 

5.  Here  an  adjective. 

6.  See  §701. 

7.  See  §320. 


713.  VOCABULARY 

ab-dd,  -dere,  -didi,  -ditum  [do,  dare,  dedi,  datum,  give],  literally,  put 

away;     regularly,    conceal,   hide    (transitive),      se    abdere,    literally, 

conceal  one's  self,  i.e.,  hide  (intransitive),  withdraw. 
ag-gredior,  ag-gredi,  ag-gressus  sum,  literally,  go  toward,  ''go  for"; 

regularly,  attack. 
con-cido,    -cidere,    -cidi,   -cisum    [con,   intensive,   caedo,    cut],   cut  to 

pieces,  slay. 
in-opinans,  -opinantis,  adjective,  literally,  not  expecting,  i.  e.,  unaware; 

when  modifying  a  subject  or  an  object,  it  may  be  translated  by  the 

adverb  unawares,  unexpectedly. 
inter-ficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fectum  [facio,  facere,  feci,  factum,  do,ma7ce], 

literally,  male  away  with;  regularly.  Mil. 
mando,   -are,  -avi,  -atum,  literally,  put  into  the  hands,  i.  e.,  entrust; 

se  fugae  mandare,  take  to  flight,  flee. 
nam,  coordinate  conjunction,  for. 
pagus,  -i,  m.,  canton,  district. 
Tigurinus,  -i,  m.,  Tigurinus,  the  name  of  a  Helvetian  canton. 


714. 


LESSON   LXXXU 

CONJUGATION   OT  FERO 
Fero,  ferre,  tuli,  latum,  lear 

ACTIVE  VOICE 


253 


INDICATIVE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

Pres. 

fero,  fers,  fert 

feram 

ferimus. 

fertis,  ferunt 

Imp. 

ferebam 

ferrem 

Fut. 

feram 

Ferf. 

tuli 

tulerim 

Plup. 

tuleram 

tulissem 

Fut.  Ferf. 

tulero 

IMPERATIVE 

INFINITIVES 

PARTICIPLES 

Fresent 

Fres. 

ferre 

Fres.      ferens 

Snd  Fers.     f  er 

ferte 

Ferf. 

tulisse 

Fut.       laturus 

Fut. 

laturus  esse 

GERUND 

• 

ferendi, 

etc. 

PASSIVE  VOICE 

INDICATIVE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

Fres. 

feror,  ferris,  fertur 

ferar 

ferimur. 

ferimini,  feruntur 

Imp. 

ferebar 

ferrer 

Fut. 

ferar 

Ferf. 

latus  sum 

latus  Sim 

Flup. 

latus  eram 

latus  essem 

Fut.  Ferf. 

latus  ero 

IMPERATIVE 

INFINITIVES 

PARTICIPLES 

Fresent 

Fres. 

ferri 

Ferf.      latus 

Snd  Fers.      ferre, 

ferimini 

Ferf. 

latus  esse 

(gerundive) 

Fut. 

latum  iri 

Fut.       ferendus 

254  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

715.  DECLENSION    OF   DEUS 

SIXOITLAR  PLURAL 

Nom.  deus  dii,  di 

Gen.  dei  deoruiu 

Dat.  deo  diis,  dis 

Ace.  deum  deos 

Voc.  deus  dii,  di 

Abl.  deo  diis,  dis 

Notice  that,  though  deus  is  a  noun  of  the  second  declension  ending 
in  -us,  it  has  a  vocative  singular  like  the  nominative. 

DRILL   EXERCISES 

716.  1.  Give  synopsis  of  facio  in  third  person  plural, 
with  all  infinitives  and  participles.  2.  Give  synopsis  of 
possum  in  second  person  plural. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

717.  1.  Fers.  2.  Tulerant.  3.  Feremus.  4.  Fiebat.  5. 
Factum  est.  6.  Flunt.  7.  Tulisse.  8.  Ferris.  9.  Fereris. 
10.  Fieri.  11.  Ferar.  12.  Ferimini.  13.  Aggredi  poteras. 
14.  Hae  res  fieri  possunt.  15.  Nam  eis  persuadebo  ne  eant. 
16.  Cum  reliqui  interfecti  essent,  homines  huius  pagi  fugae 
se  mandaverunt.  17.  Quattuor  mllibus  hominum  concisis, 
complures  Helvetii  in  montes  se  abdiderunt. 

718.  1.  They  are  made.  2.  They  are  carried.  3.  You 
will  go.  4.  It  will  be  made.  5.  You  (sing.)  will  be  car- 
ried. 6.  You  (plur.)  carry.  7.  They  go.  8.  They  were 
made.  9.  We  are  able.  10.  "Will  you  (sing.)  be  able  to 
persuade  them  to  go?  11.  I  fear  those  four  legions  will 
be  cut  to  pieces.  12.  For  they  attacked  and  killed  all  the 
men  of  that  canton.  13.  "When  will  you  withdraw  into  the 
forest  ? 


LESSON    LXXXIII  255 

LESSON  LXXXIII 

PERIPHRASTIC    CONJUGATIONS 

DATIVE    OF   AGENT 

719.  TEXT 

Ea  pars  cTvitatis  Helvetiae,  quae  pagus  Tigurinus  appel- 
labatur,  insignem  calamitatem  populo^  Romano  intulerat. 
Ita  is  pagus  sive  casu^  sive  c5nsilio  deorum  iinmortalium 
prmceps*  poenas  persolvit.  Qua  in  re  Caesar  non  solum 
ptiblicas  sed  etiam  privatas  initirias  ultus  est.  Nam  Tigu- 
rini  avum  Caesaris  soceri,  L.  Pisonis,  interfeeerant  eodem 
proelio  quo  Cassium  interfeeerant.  L.  Pisonis  avus  erat 
L.  Piso  legatus. 


Ita  sTve  casu^  sTve  consilio  deorum  immortalium,  quae 
pars-  cTvitatis  Helvetiae  Insignem  calamitatem  populo^  Ro- 
mano intulerat,  ea  princeps^  poenas  persolvit.  Qua  in  re 
Caesar  non  solum  publicas  sed  etiam  privatas  iniurias  ultus 
est,  quod^  eius  soceri  L.  Pisonis  avum,  L.  Pisonem  legatum, 
Tigurlnl  eodem  proelio  quo  Cassium  interfeeerant.  (213- 
219,  Ch.  12.) 

NOTES 

1.  casu  and  c5nsilid:  see  §611. 

2.  quae  pars  .  .  .  ea:  literally,  what  part  had  inflicted  .  .  .  that 
(part)  paid,  etc.,  i.  e.,  that  part  which  had  inflicted  .  .  .  paid. 

3.  populo:  see  §537. 

4.  princeps  .  .  .  persolvit:  flrst  paid  the  penalty.  Observe  that  the 
adjective  princeps  has  here  the  force  of  an  adverb. 

5.  An  English  order  from  quod  eius  soceri  would  be:  quod  Tigu- 
rini  eodem  proelio  quo  (interfeeerant)  Cassium  interfeeerant  L. 
Pisonem  legatum,  avum  L.  Pisonis  eius  (i.  e.,  Caesaris)  soceri. 


256  BELLUM    IIELVETICUM 

There  were  two  men  named  Lucius  Piso,  one  the  grandfather  of 
the  other.  Caesar  had  married  as  his  fourth  wife  Calpurnia,  a 
daughter  of  the  younger  Lucius  Piso. 

720.  VOCABULARY 

avus,  -i,  m.,  grandfather. 

calamitas,  calamitatis,  f.,  disaster,  defeat. 

casus,  -us,  m.    [cado,  fall],  literally,  a  falling;    regularly,  chance. 

im-mortalis,  -e  [in,  not,  mors,  death],  immortal. 

in-fero,  in-ferre,  in-tuli,  il-latum,  literally,  dring  upon;   with  calamita- 

tem,  inflict. 
in-signis,  -e,  marJced. 
per-solvo,  -solvere,  -solvi,  -solutum,  literally,  release  completely;    pay 

(in  full). 
publicus,  -a,  -um,  public. 
sed,  coordinate  conjunction,  hut. 

sive,  cocrdinate  conjunction,  or  if:  sive  .  .  .  sive,  either  .  .  .  or. 
socer,  soceri,  m.,  father-in-law. 

solum,  adverb,  only,   non  solum  .  .  .  sed  etiam,  not  only  .  .  .  hut  also, 
ulciscor,  ulciscl,  ultus  sum,  avenge. 

721.  PERIPHRASTIC    CONJUGATIONS 

There  are  two  Periphrastic  Conjugations. 

1.     a.  The   first   periphrastic    conjugation   is    the    future 

active  participle  +  some  form  of  sum,   as :    lauda- 

turus   {going-to-praise) -\- est  {he  is)=he  is  going 

to  praise. 
h.  It  is  always  active  and  has  an  idea  of  futurity  or 

intention. 

c.  The  present  infinitive  of  the  first  periphrastic  con- 
jugation is  the  same  in  form  and  meaning  as  the 
regular  future  active  infinitive. 

d.  The  subjunctive  of  the  first  periphrastic  conju- 
gation is  used  where  a  future  or  future  perfect 
subjunctive  active  of  the  ordinary  conjugations  is 
wanted. 


LESSON   LXXXIII  257 

2.  a.  The  second  periphrastic  conjugation  is  the  future 
passive  participle  (gerundive)  +  some  form  of 
sum,  as:  laudandus  {to-he-praised)  +  est  {he  is)  = 
he  is  to-he-praised,  he  must  {ought  to,  deserves  to, 
has  to)  be  praised, 
h.  It  is  always  passive  and  has  generally  not  so  much 
an  idea  of  futurity  or  intention,  as  of  ohligation, 
necessity,  or  propriety. 


722.  FIRST  (OR  ACTIVE)  PERIPHRASTIC 

CONJUGATION 

INDICATIVE 

Pres.  laudaturus  sum,  I  am  going-to-praise 

Impf.  laudaturus  eram,  /  was  going-to-praise 

Fut.  laudaturus  ero,  I  shall  he  going-to-praise 

Perf.  laudaturus  fui,  I  was,  or  have  been,  going -to -praise 

Plu.  laudaturus  fueram,  I 'had  been  going-to-praise 

Fut.  Perf.  laudaturus  fuero,  I  shall  have  been  going-to-praise 

SUBJUNCTIVE  INFINITIVES 

Pres.  laudaturus  sim  Pres.     laudaturus  esse,  to  be  going-to- 

Impf.  laudaturus  essem  praise 

Perf.  laudaturus  fuerim  Perf.    laudaturus  fuisse,  to  have  been 

Plu.  laudaturus  fuissem  going-to-praise 


723.  Pres.      moniturus  sum,  I  am  going -to -advise 

ducturus  sum,  I  am  gcing-to-lead 
auditurus  sum,  I  am  going-to-hear 
capturus  sum,  I  am  going-to-taTce 

Impf.    moniturus  eram,  I  was  going-to-advise 
etc. 


258  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

724.  SECOND  (OR  PASSIVE)  PERIPHRASTIC 

CONJUGATION 

INDICATR^E 

Pres.      laudandus  sum,  I  am  to  he,  have  to  he,  must  he  praised 

Impf.     laudandus  eram,  I  ivos  to  he,  had  to  he,  praised 

Fut.        laudandus  ero,  I  shall  have  to  he,  shall  deserve  to  he,  praised 

Perf.      laudandus  fui,  I  was  to  he,  had  to  he,  praised 

Plu.        laudandus  fueram,  I  had  deserved  to  he  praised 

Fut.  Perf.       laudandus  fuero,  I  shall  have  deserved  to  he  praised 

SUBJUNCTIVE  INFINITIVES 

Pres.  laudandus  sim  Pres.    laudandus  esse,  to  deserve  to  he 

Impf.  laudandus  essem  praised 

Perf.  laudandus  fuerim  Perf.    laudandus  fuisse,  to  have 

Plu.  laudandus  fuissem  deserved  to  he  praised 

725.  Pres.      monendus  sum,  I  am  to  he,  must  he,  advised 

ducendus  sum,  I  am  to  he,  must  he,  led 
audiendus  sum,  I  am  to  he,  must  he,  heard 
capiendus  sum,"  I  am  to  he,  must  he,  taken 

Impf.    monendus  eram,  I  was  to  he,  had  to  he,  advised 
etc. 

726.  DATIVE   OF   AGENT 

Models 

1.  Caesari  omnia  erant  facienda,  everything  had  to-he-done 

hy  Caesar. 

2.  Pugnandum  erat   Caesari,   it   {the  battle)   had  to-be- 

fought  by  Caesar. 

Notes,  a.  Caesari  here  denotes  the  person  who  had  something  to  do, 
and  answers  the  question  "By  whom?"  It  is  called  the  dative  of 
agent.     Compare  with  the  ablative  of  agent,  §306. 

h.  Intransitive  verbs  in  this  conjugation  must  be  used  impersonally. 
See  Model  2. 


LESSON  LXXXIV  259 

727.  RULE.  The  dative  is  used  with  the  second  (passive) 
periphrastic  conjugation  to  denote  the  person  who  has  the 
thing  to  do. 

DRILL  EXERCISES 

728.  1.  Decline  deus  immortalis ;  quae  pars.  2.  Give 
synopsis  of  fero  in  third  person  singular. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

729.  1.  Nonne  exspectattirus  es?  2.  Exspectandum  est 
Caesari.  3.  Quid  secum  laturl  erant  ?  4.  Orgetorix  ipse  suae 
civitatis  imperium  obtenttirus  erat.  5.  Sed  quattuor  pag5s 
Helvetiae  civitatis  uno  tempore  casti  aggressi  sumus.  6. 
Nonne  illam  calamitatem  msignem  ulturus  es  ?  7.  Non  solum 
public!  sed  etiam  privati  fines  sunt  vastandT. 

730.  1.  The  Helvetians  were  going-to-assault  Noreia.  2. 
We  are  going-to-await  the  man  who  has  been  placed-in- 
command  of  the  town.  3.  He  asked  not  only  what  the  lieu- 
tenant had  done  but  also  what  he  was  going-to-do.  4.  The 
gods  surpass  men  in  influence.  .5.  The  chance  of  a  public 
disaster  ought  not  to-be-awaited  by  you.  6.  Did  he  avenge 
that  extraordinary  private  wrong? 


LESSON  LXXXIV 

SUPINES 

VARIOUS  WAYS  OF  EXPRESSING  PURPOSE 

731.  TEXT 

Hoc  proelio  facto  Caesar  reliquas  copias  Helvetiorum  con- 
sequi  vult.  Itaque  pontem  in^  Arari  faciendum  curat  atque 
ita  exercituro  tradticit     Helvetii  ilium  id  uno  die  fecisse  in- 


260  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

tellegebant.  Helvetii  id,  ut^  fltimen  transirent,  diebus  vigint! 
aegerrime  confecerant.  Repentino  eius  adventu  commoti 
legates  ad  eum  mittunt.  Cuius  legationis  Divico  princeps 
fuit,  qui  bello  Cassiano  dux  Helvetiorum  fuerat. 


Hoc  proelio  facto,  reliquas  c5pias  Helvetiorum  ut  consequi 
posset,  pontem  in^  Arari  faciendum  curat  atque  ita  exerci- 
tum  traducit.  Helvetii  repentino  eius  adventu  commoti, 
cum^  id  quod  ipsi  diebus  vTginti  aegerrime  confecerant,  ut^ 
fltimen  transirent,  illum'^  uno  die  fecisse  intellegerent,  le- 
gates ad  eum  mittunt ;  cuius  legationis  Divico  princeps  fuit, 
qui  bello  Cassiano  dux  Helvetiorum  fuerat.  (220-227, 
Ch.  13.) 

NOTES 

1.  over. 

2.  cum  .  .  .  intellegerent:  English  order,  cum  intellegerent  ilium 
fecisse  uno  die  id  quod,  etc. 

3.  ut  flumen  transirent:  in  apposition  with  id;  translate,  (namely) 
[that  they]  cross  the  river.    See  §414. 

4.  Eefers  to  Caesar. 

732.  VOCABULARY 

aegre,    adverb,   comparative   aegrius,   superlative   aegerrime    [aeger], 

hardly;    with  difficulty;    superlative,  with  the  greatest  difficulty. 
Cassianus,  -a,  -um  [Cassius],  relating  to  Cassius;    bellum  Cassianum, 

the  war  with  Cassius. 
com-moveo,  -movere,  -movi,  -motum   [con,  intensive],  literally,  move 

strongly;    regularly,  alarm. 
c6n-sequor,  -sequi,  -seciitus  sum  [con,  intensive],  literally,  follow  closely, 

i.  e.,  pursue,  overtake. 
euro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  literally,  care  for;    Avith  an  object  modified  by 

gerundive,  cause. 
Divico,  Diviconis,  m.,  Divico,  a  Helvetian  chief, 
dux,  ducis,  m.  orf.  [diico,  lead],  leader. 
repentinus,  -a,  -um,  unexpected. 

What  are  the  meanings  of  commotion,  consecutive? 


LESSON   LXXXIV  261 

733.      PURPOSE  WITH  GERUND  AND   GERUNDIVE 

Models 

^    nir-i-x-      'J.J.  ^   r  ad  puffnandum.   ]  He  will  send  soldiers 
1.  Milites mittet  ^  ,-        -    >  ^   ^  is 

I  pugnandi  causa.  J  to  fight. 


ad  urbem  oppugnandam. 
2.  Milites  mittet  -<|  urbem  oppugnandi  causa, 
urbis  oppugnandae  causa. 


He  will  send 
soldiers  to 
attack  the  city. 


Note.  Notice  that  in  Model  2  either  the  gerund  or  the  gerundive 
is  used  in  the  genitive  case;  after  a  preposition,  tlie  gerund  is  used 
with  intransitive  verbs  and  the  gerundive  with  transitive.     See  §685. 


734.  SUPINES 

The  supine  is  a  verbal  noun  of  the  fourth  declension.  It 
has  two  forms:  the  accusative  in  -um  (which  is  given  as  the 
fourth  principal  part  of  verbs)  and  the  ablative  in  -ti. 

735.  The  following  are  the  supines  of  the  model  verbs : 

Ace.    laudatum     monitum     ductum     auditum     captum 
Ahl.     laudatu       monitu        ductu       auditu        captu 


736.  SUPINE   IN    -UM 

i\IODEL 

Legates  ad  Caesarem  mittunt  auxilium  rogatum,  they  send 
ambassadors  to  Caesar  to  ask  aid. 

Notes,    a.  The  supine  rogatum  =  qui  (or  ut)  rogent. 
b.  The  main  verb  mittunt  implies  motion. 

737.  RULE.     The   accusative   of    the   supine   is   used   with 
verbs  of  motion  to  express  purpose. 


262  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

738.  SUPINE   IN   -I? 

Model 
Facile  factu  est,  it  is  easy  (in-the-doing)  to  do. 

739.  RULE.     The    ablative    of    the    supine    is    used    with 
adjectives  as  an  ablative  of  specification. 

740.  VARIOUS   WAYS   OF  EXPRESSING   PURPOSE 

Purpose  may  be  expressed  in  five  ways. 
The  sentence  he  will  send  soldiers  to  attack  the  city,  may 
be  written  as  follows: 

ut  (or  qui)  urbem  oppugnent.   ut  (ne)  or  a  relative  with 

the  subjunctive. 


Milites  mittet 


ad  urbem  oppugnandam.  Gerundive  with  ad. 

urbem  oppugnandi  causa.        Gerund  with  causa, 
urbis  oppugnandae  causa.        Gerundive  with  causa. 


urbem  oppugnatum.  Supine. 

Notice  that  the  infinitive  is  not  used  in  Latin  to  express  purpose. 

DRILL  EXERCISES 

741.  Give  the  supines  of  statuo,  toUo,  fero,  eo,  sequor. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

742.  1.  Dux  Helvetiorum  copias  aegre  consequetur.  2. 
Aedui  dixerunt  se  Romam  auxilii  rogandl  causa  legatos 
missuros  esse.  3.  Romam  auxilium  ferendum  ctiraverunt. 
4.  LegatI  cTvitatum  viginti  venerunt  Caesarem  visum.  5. 
Propter  amlcitiam  Aeduorum  milites  Caesari  ad  vim  hos- 
tium  prohibendam  mittendi  sunt.  6.  Sed  initium  miiniendi 
fecerunt  cum  repentmo  Caesaris  adventu  commoti  essent. 


TENTH   REVIEW  LESSON  263 

743.  [Write  the  first  three  sentences  in  as  many  ways  as 
possible.]  1.  The  Aeduans  sent  men  to  overtake  the  leader. 
2.  He  went  to  see  the  city.  3.  Ambassadors  came  to  seek 
peace.  4.  They  did  not  wish  to  ask  Caesar  why  his  sudden 
arrival  alarmed  the  Helvetians.  5.  With  difficulty  he  caused 
twenty  men  to-be-sent  (as)  hostages.  6.  Will  the  gods 
bring  us  help? 


TENTH  EEVIEW  LESSON 

744.  Give  an  account  of  the  events  narrated  in  Chapters 
XI,  Xn,  and  XHI  (seven  lines),  and  then  translate  those 
chapters. 

745.  Memory  Work. 

a.  Give  the  present  imperative  of  each  of  the  model  verbs 
and  of  sum,  e5,  fero  (§669). 

&.  Give  the  gerund  and  the  gerundive  of  each  of  the 
model  verbs  (§§681,  682). 

c.  Give  the  first  twenty-one  cardinals;  the  first  ten  ordi- 
nals ;  the  first  six  distributives.  What  is  the  ending  of  the 
tens  above  viginti?   of  the  hundreds  above  centum  (§709)  ? 

d.  Give  the  conjugation  in  the  present  indicative  active 
and  passive  of  fero;  also  the  synopsis  in  the  third  person 
singular  (§714). 

e.  Give  the  synopsis  of  the  first  periphrastic  conjugation 
of  dtico  in  the  third  person  plural;  of  the  second  peri- 
phrastic of  audio  in  the  third  person  singular  (§§722-725). 

/.  Give  the  supines  of  the  model  verbs  (§735). 


264  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

746.     Latin-English  Vocabulary. 

Give  the  memoranda  of  the  nouns;  the  entire  nominative 
and  comparison  of  the  adjectives;  the  principal  parts  of  the 
verbs ;  and  the  meanings  of  all  the  words. 


abdd 

euro 

iudico 

publicus 

aegre 

defends 

liberi 

repentinus 

aggredior 

demonstrd 

mandd 

sed 

calamitas 

dux 

mereor 

servitus 

castra 

explorator 

nam 

solum 

casus 

expugno 

necessarius 

status 

commoveo 

exspecto 

nihil 

traducS 

concido 

fortuna 

non  s51um — 

ulciscor 

coiisanguineus 

incredibilis 

sed  etiam 

uter 

consequor 

infero 

paene 

vasts 

conspectus 

insignis 

pagus 

vigilia 

consumo 

interfici5 

populor 

747.     English-Latin  Vocabulary. 

Give  the  first  form  of  the  Latin  for  each  of  the  following : 


alarm 

consume 

judge 

public 

almost 

cut  to  pieces 

kill 

pursue 

attack  (verb) 

decide 

kinsman 

ravage 

avenge 

defeat  (noun) 

lay  waste 

scout 

await 

defend 

leader 

show 

bring  upon 

deserve 

lead  across 

sight 

but 

disaster 

marked 

slavery 

camp 

entrust 

not  only — 

take  by  storm 

canton 

extraordinary 

but  also 

unexpected 

cause  (verb) 

for 

nothing 

use  up 

chance 

fortune 

only 

watch  (noun) 

children 

hardly 

overtake 

which  (of  two) 

close  friend 

hide 

point  out 

with  difficulty 

conceal 

inflict 

property 

LESSON   LXXXV  265 

748.  Syntax. 

Commands:  How  is  a  command  in  the  first  person  ex- 
pressed?   What  is  it  called? 

How  is  a  command  in  the  second  person  expressed?  How 
is  its  negative  expressed? 

How  is  a  command  in  the  third  person  expressed  ?  What 
is  it  called? 

Name  the  characteristics  of  the  gerund ;  of  the  gerundive. 
When  must  the  gerundive  be  used  rather  than  the  gerund? 
What  is  expressed  by  causa  and  ad  with  the  gerund  or 
gerundive  ? 

Give  the  rule  for  cum  causal;  for  cum  temporal. 

Contrast  the  periphrastic  conjugations  in  form;  in  mean- 
ing. 

Give  the  rule  for  dative  of  agent;  contrast  it  with  the 
ablative  of  agent. 

749.  Composition. 

Translate  in  five  ways  the  following  sentence :  They  went 
to  fortify  the  town. 

Make  up  a  short  English  sentence  as  an  example  of  each 
of  the  following:  command;  use  of  gerundive;  cum  tem- 
poral ;  cum  causal ;  second  periphrastic  conjugation ;  dative 
of  agent. 

Translate  those  sentences  into  Latin. 


LESSON  LXXXV 

INDIRECT    DISCOURSE 

To  the  teacher:  It  is  thought  that,  with  the  completion  of  the  work 
to  this  point,  all  the  subjects  that  can  be  studied  with  profit  during 
the  first  year  and  all  that  are  necessary  for  beginning  the  second 
year's  work  have  been  covered.    The  remainder  of  the  book  is  added: 


266  BELLUM    IIELVETICUM 

1st.  For  those  teachers  who  want  more  translation.  These  may 
omit  Lessons  85-90,  reading  to  their  classes  the  translation  of  the 
intervening  text,  and  pass  immediately  to  the  translation  of  Chapters 
15-29,  which,  with  the  sentences  under  each,  serve  to  apply  and 
review  the  principles  already  taught. 

2nd.  For  those  teachers  who  want  more  drill  in  forms  and  syntax. 
These  may  take  up  the  lessons  in  order  and  then  proceed  with  the 
translation  of  Chapters  15-29. 

INDIRECT    DISCOURSE 

750.  Review:     Infinitive  in  Indirect  Discourse,  §522. 

Sequence  of  Tenses,  §370. 

751.  Models 

1.  Hoc  itinere  venimus  quod  nuUam  aliam  viam  habemus. 

2.  Dicunt  se  hoc  itinere  venire  quod  niillam  aliam  viam 

habeant. 

3.  Dixerunt  se  hoc  itinere  venire  quod  nullam  aliam  viam 

haberent. 

Translation 

1.  We  are  commg  by  this  road  because  we  have  no  other 

way. 

2.  They  say  that  they  are  coming  by  this  road  because  they 

have  no  other  way. 

3.  They  say  that  they  were  coming  by  this  road  because 

they  had  no  other  way. 

Notes.     When  direct  discourse  is  changed  to  indirect,  notice  that: 

a.  The  main  verb  of  the  direct  discourse  becomes  in  the  indirect 
discourse  an  infinitive  with  subject  accusative.     See  §520. 

h.  The  tense  of  the  infinitive  is  not  influenced  by  that  of  the 
introductory  verb,  but  corresponds  to  that  of  the  direct  discourse. 

c.  The  subordinate  verb  becomes  (or  remains)  subjunctive,  the 
tense  depending  on  the  rule  for  sequence   of  tenses.     If  either  the 


LESSON   LXXXV  267 

introductory  verb  or  the  main  verb  of  the  direct  discourse  is  a  past 
tense,  the  subordinate  verb  of  the  indirect  discourse  is  a  historical 
tense. 

d.  The  changes  in  person  and  pronouns  are  the  same  as  in  English. 

752.  RULE.  In  indirect  discourse  wain  clauses  containing 
a  statement  require  the  infinitive  with  subject  accusative; 
subordinate  verbs  require  the  subjunctive, 

753.  Remember  that: 

a.  Latin  indirect  statements 

never  have  an  introductory  word,  like  that  in  English; 

always  have  their  main  verbs  in  the  infinitive. 
h.  Latin  indirect  questions 

always  have  an  interrogative  as  an  introductory  word; 

always  have  their  main  verbs  in  the  subjunctive. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

754.  1.  Dixerunt  hunc  pagum  qui  esset  in  civitate  Hel- 
vetia appellarl  Tigurinum.  2.  Caesar  ab  Aeduls  certior  fac- 
tus  est  eos  vim  hostium  prohibere  velle  qui  iter  in  fines 
eorum  fecissent.  3.  Enuntiatur  Caesarem  Labienum  legion! 
praeficere  noluisse  quae  in  Gallia  hiemaret.  4.  Rogavit  cur 
Ilelvetii  ea  spe  deiecti  essent.  5.  Caesar  non  intellexit  cur 
homines  a  maleficio  temperavissent.  6.  Consul  putavit  mllites 
in  hiberna  reversuros  esse  cum  Caesar  pervenisset. 

755.  1.  I  fear  that  the  scouts  will  not  cross  the  river. 
2.  Translate  1  after  dixit.  3.  The  children  are  being  led 
away  because  the  enemy  are  coming.  4.  Translate  3  after 
intellego.  5.  I  shall  go  when  I  am  able  (future  tense). 
6.  Translate  5  after  respondit.  7.  They  say  that  they  are 
willing  to  choose  Orgetorix  because  he  has  been  friendly  to 
your  state. 


268  BELLUM   HELVETICUM 

LESSON  LXXXVI 

CONDITIONS 

TEXT 

(It  will  be  found  that  pupils  more  readily  understand  Chapters 
XIII  and  XIV  if  the  direct  discourse  is  translated  and  discussed  first; 
then  the  indirect  may  be  translated  and  the  differences  pointed  out.) 

756.  DIRECT    FORM 

Si  pacem  popnlus  Romanus  cum  Helvetiis^  faciet  (inquit 
Divico),  in  earn  partem^  ibunt  atque  ibi  erunt^  Helvetii  ubi 
eos  tu  constitueris  atque  esse  volueris:  sin*  bello  persequi 
perseverabis,  reminiscere^  et^  veteris  incommodr  populi  R5- 
mani  et  pristinae  virtutis  Helvetiorum.  Quod^  improviso 
tinum  pagum^  adortus  es,  cum  ei  qui  fltimen  transierant 
suls^°  auxilium  ferre  non  possent/^  noli^^  ob  earn  rem  aut 
tuae  magnopere  virtuti  tribuere  aut  nos  despicere.  (227- 
235,  Ch.  13.) 

NOTES 

1.  In  the  direct  discourse,  n5biscum,  ibimus,  and  erimus  might  be 
used  instead  of  cum  Helvetiis,  ibunt,  and  erunt  Helvetii.  There  is 
often  a  similar  choice,  but  only  one  form  will  be  printed. 

2.  i.  e.,  of  Gaul. 

3.  will  stay. 

4.  sin  .  .  .  perseverabis:  but  if  you  (Caesar)  continue  to  follow 
them  (the  Helvetians)  up  with  war. 

5.  reminiscere:  second  person  singular  imperative. 

6.  et  .  .  .  et:    both  .  .  .  and. 

7.  incommodi,  virtutis:  verbs  of  remembering  and  forgetting  may 
govern  a  genitive  which  is  translated  as  a  direct  object. 

8.  as  to  the  fact  that,  whereas. 

9.  iinum  pagum:  i.e.,  the  Tigurini. 


LESSON   LXXXVI  26^ 

10.  to  their  comrades. 

11.  See  §693. 

12.  nSn  .  .  .  tribuere  aut  .  .  .  despicere:  do  not  ascribe  it  especially 
to  your  bravery  or  despise  us.    For  the  use  of  noli,  see  §673,  2. 


757.  VOCABULARY 

ad-orior,  -oriri,  -ortus  sum,  literally,  rise  against;  attacTc. 

ago,  agere,  egi,  actum,  literally,  put  in  motion,  drive;  discuss,  talk. 

de-spicio,  -spicere,  -spexi,  -spectum,  literally,  looTc  down  on;  despise. 

improviso,  adverb,  not  compared,  unexpectedly. 

in-commodus,  -a,  -um,  inconvenient.  Neuter  used  as  a  substantive, 
literally,  an  inconvenience ;    disaster. 

per-sequor,  -sequi,  -secutus  sum,  literally,  follow  thoroughly,  i.  e.,  fol- 
low up. 

per-severo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  continue. 

pristinus,  -a,  -um  [prior,  former'],  former. 

re-miniscor,  -minisci,  ,  remember. 

sin,  subordinate  conjunction,  but  if. 

tribuo,  tribuere,  tribui,  tributum,  assign  (it). 

vetus,  veteris,  adjective,  comparative  vetustior,  superlative  veterrimus, 
literally,  old;   former.     For  declension  see  App.  35. 

What  are  the  meanings  of  persecute,  persevere,  pristine, 
reminiscences,  veteran,  improvise? 


758.  INDIRECT  FORM 

Is  ita  cum  Caesare  egit :  Si  paeem  populus  Romanus  cum 
Helvetiis  faceret,^  in  earn  partem  ituros-  atque  ibi  futures 
Helvetios  ubi  eos  Caesar  constituisset  atque  esse  voluisset; 
sin  bello  persequi  perseveraret,  reminlsceretur^  et  veteris 
incommodi  populi  Roman!  et  pristinae  virttitis  Helvetiorum. 
Quod  improviso  unum  pagum  adortus  esset,  cum  el  qui 
flumen  translssent  suis  auxilium  ferre  non  possent,  ne*  ob 
eam  rem  aut  suae  magnopere  virtuti  tribueret  aut  ipsos 
despiceret.     (227-235,  Ch.  13.) 


270  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

NOTES 

1.  faceret,  constituisset,  voluisset,  perseveraret:  see  §371. 

2.  ituros,  futures,  Helvetios:  see  §§521,522. 

3.  A  verb  in  indirect  discourse  expressing  a  command  is  in  the  sub- 
junctive. 

4.  ne  .  .  .  tribueret  aut  .  .  .  despiceret:    that  he  should  not  ascribe 
it,  etc.,  or  despise  them  (the  Helvetians).    See  Note  3,  above. 


759.  CONDITIONAL    SENTENCES 

A  conditional  sentence  is  complex,  having  two  essential 
clauses,  condition  and  conclusion ;  e.  g.,  if  he  asks,  I  reply. 
The  condition  is  introduced  in  Latin  by  the  subordinate 
conjunctions :  si,  if;  nisi,  if  not,  unless;  sin,  but  if. 

760.  Conditional  sentences  are  divided  into  three  classes 
as  regards  time: 

Present. 
Past. 
Future. 
They  are  divided  into  two  classes  as  regards  meaning: 

(1)  Indicative   conditions,  which  include  both  as- 

sumed and  future  more  vivid;   and 

(2)  Subjunctive  conditions,  which  include  contrary 

to  fact  and  future  less  vivid. 


761.  INDICATIVE    CONDITIONS 

Indicative  conditions  are  subdivided  into  two  classes  as 
regards  meaning: 

A.  Assumed. 

B.  Future  More  Vivid. 


LESSON   LXXXVI  271 

762.  A.  Assumed  Conditions. 

Models 

1.  Present:  si  rogat,  responded;  if  he  asks,  I  reply. 

2.  Past:    si  J         -   .^'  ,-         '    lif  he  asked,  I  replied. 

I^rogavit,  respondi;  J 

Note.  Nothing  is  assumed  as  to  the  actual  facts  in  these  condi- 
tions. But  if  the  conditions  are  assumed  as  true,  the  conclusions  are 
also  assumed  as  true. 

763.  B.  Future  More  Vivid  Conditions, 

Model 

Future:   si  |  J^Serit,  }>^e^P<>"dSb6; 

. .  pie  shall  ask,  asks,    \j    -l  jj        j 
'  Yhe  shall  have  asked, j 

Note.  This  form  of  condition  is  of  practically  the  same  nature  as 
assumed  conditions,  but  it  refers  to  the  future  and  vividly  expresses 
confidence  in  the  fulfillment  of  the  condition. 

764.  RULE,  Assumed  and  more  vivid  future  conditional 
sentences  have  both  verbs  in  the  indicative. 

765.  1.  Si  quid  volent,  revertentur.  2.  Eos  prohibere 
poterat,  si  se  invito  transire  conabantur.  3.  Si  vim  facere 
conabuntur,  Caesar  eos  prohibebit.  4.  Si  id  fit,  est  pericu- 
lum.  5.  Si  hostes  impeditos  improviso  aggressi  sunt,  mag- 
nani  partem  eorum  conciderunt.  6.  Nisi  nobiscum  de  pace 
ages,  magno  dolore  afficiar.  7.  Si  vos  adoriri  volent,  prls- 
tina  virtute  pugnabunt.  8.  Despicisne  nos  propter  veterem 
calamitatem  nostram? 


272  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

766.  1.  If  he  does  (fut)  not  talk  with  me  about  the 
former  wrongs,  I  shall  despise  him.  2.  If  Divico  talked 
thus  with  Caesar,  the  ambassador  announced  it.  3.  But  if 
we  (shall)  attack  them  suddenly,  they  will  go  into  Gaul. 
4.  If  I  am  able  to  persuade  my  old  friends,  (there)  is  no 
danger.  5.  If  the  Helvetians  have  decided  to  go  from  their 
state,  they  have  already  started  out.  6.  If  the  depth  of  the 
river  was  great,  the  enemy  were  not  willing  to  cross.  7. 
Caesar  said  he  would  come  when  he  wished. 


LESSON  LXXXVII 

CONDITIONS-Continued 

767.  TEXT 

DIRECT    FORM 

Nos^  ita  a  patribus-  maioribusque  nostris  didicimus  ut 
magis  virtute  contendamus  quam  dolo  aut  msidiis  nitamur. 
Quare  nolP  committere  ut  hic  locus  ubi  constitimus  ex  calami- 
tate  populi  Roman!  et  internecione  exercitus  nomen  capiat 
aut  memoriam  prodat. 

(Caesar  respondit)  :  Eo*  mihi  minus^  dubitationis®  datur, 
quod   eas   res   quas   vos   commemoravistis   memoria   teneo, 


atque'^   eo^  gravius  fero  quo  minus  merito^  populi  Roman! 
acciderunt.     (235-2447Chs.  13  and  14:) 


NOTES 

1.  nos  .  .  .  nitamur:  we  have  so  learned  from  our  fathers  and 
ancestors  that  we  fight  by  (means  of)  bravery  rather  than  depend  on 
deceit  or  ambuscades. 


LESSON   LXXXVII  273 

2.  patribus  maioribusque:  see  §609. 

3.  noli  .  .  .  prodat  =  (literally)  do  not  allow  that  this  place  where 
vje  have  taken  our  stand  shall  take  its  name  from  the  disaster  of  the 
Eoman  people  and  the  destruction  of  the  army  or  hand  down  the  memory 
(of  such  a  disaster  and  destruction);  (freely)  do  not  allow  this  place 
where,  etc.,  to  take,  etc. 

4.  Ablative  of  cause,  explained  by  the  following  quod  clause. 

5.  Used  substantively,  subject  of  datur. 

6.  minus  d'ubitationis;  the  less  hesitation :  see  §491. 

7.  atque  .  .  .  acciderunt:  (literally)  and  I  bear  (it)  more  heavily 
by  that  amount  by  which  they  (these  things)  did  not  happen  by  the  fault 
of  the  Eoman  people;  (freely)  I  am  more  displeased  in  just  the  same 
proportion  as  they  have  not  happened  through  the  fault  of  the  Eoman 
people. 

8.  eo,  quo:  see  §620. 

9.  See  §456,  Note  2. 

768.  VOCABULARY 

ac-cido,  ac-cidere,  ac-cidi,  ,  literally,  fall  to  (any  one);    regu- 
larly, befall,  happen. 
com-memoro,  are,  -avi,  -atum,  literally,  call  to  mind,  i.  e.,  mention. 
com-mitto,    -mittere,    -misi,    -missum    [con,    together],   literally,    send 

together;    allow,  permit. 
c6n-sist6,  c6n-sistere,  con-stiti,  ,  literally,  stand  together;    take 

one's  stand,  halt. 

disco,  discere,  didici,  ,  learn. 

dolus,  -i,  m.,  deceit. 

dubitatio,  dubitationis,  f.,  hesitation. 

graviter,  adverb,  literally,  heavily;    gravius  ferre,  bear  more  heavily, 

i.  e.,  be  more  displeased. 
insidiae,  -arum,  f.,  ambuscades. 
internecid,  interneci5nis,  f.,  destruction. 
maior,  maius   (comparative  of  magnus,  great),  greater;    maior  (natu 

understood),  greater  as  to  birth,  i.e.,  older;    plural  as  a  substantive, 

ancestors. 
meritum,  -i,  n.  [mereor,  deserve],  desert. 
nitor,  niti,  nisus  or  nixus  sum,  literally,  lean,  rest;  rely. 
nomen,  nominis,  n.,  7iame. 
pro-do,   pro-dere,   pro-didi,   pro-ditum    [do,   dare,   dedi,   datum,   give], 

literally,  give  forth;   hand  down  (to  future  generations). 


274  BELLUM    IIELVETICUM 

Give  the  derivations  and  meanings  of  insidious,  majority, 
accident,  commemorate,  disciple. 

769.  INDIRECT   FORM 

Se  ita  a  patribus  maioribusque  suis  didicisse  nt  magis 
virtute  contenderent  quam  dolo  aut  insidiis  niterentur. 
Quare  ne  committeret^  ut  is  locus  ubi  constitissent^  ex 
calamitate  populi  Roman!  et  intemecione  exercittis  nomen 
caperet^  aut  memoriam  proderet. 

His  Caesar  ita  respondit :  Eo  sibi  miiius  dubitationis  dari, 
quod  eas  res  quas  legati  Helvetii  commemorassent*  memoria 
teneret,  atque  eo  gravius  ferre^  quo  minus  merito  populi 
Roman!  accidissent.     (235-244,  Chs.  13  and  14.) 

NOTES 

1.  See  §758,  Note  3. 

2.  See  §751,  Note  c. 

3.  caperet,  proderet:  see  §371. 

4.  commemorassent,  accidissent:    see  §371. 

5.  Supply  se  (Caesar)  as  subject. 

770.  SUBJUNCTIVE   CONDITIONS 

Subjunctive  conditions  are  subdivided  into  two  classes  as 
regards  meaning: 

A.  Contrary  to  Fact. 

B.  Less  Vivid  Future. 

771.  A.  Contrary  to  Fact  Conditions. 

Models 

1.  Present:    si  rogaret,  responderem ;    if  he  were  asking 
(now),  I  should  he  replying  (now). 


LESSON   LXXXVII  275 

2.  Past:   si  rogavisset,  respondissem ;   if  he  had  asked,  I 
should  have  replied. 


Notes,     a.  In  Model  1,  notice  that: 

the    condition    is    evidently   untrue,    hence    the    conclusion   is 
untrue; 

the  imperfect  subjunctive  is  used  in  both  clauses. 
h.  This  is  called  a  present  contrary  to  fact  condition. 

c.  In  Model  2,  notice  that: 

the  condition  is  evidently  untrue,  hence  the  conclusion  is  untrue; 
the  pluperfect  subjunctive  is  used  in  both  clauses. 

d.  This  is  called  a  past  contrary  to  fact  condition. 


772.  RULE.  Contrary  to  fact  conditional  sentences  have 
both  verbs  in  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  if  referring  to  present 
time;   in  the  pluperfect  subjunctive,  if  referring  to  past  time. 


773.     B.  Future  Less  Vivid  Conditions. 

Model 

Future:  si  roget,  respondeam ;  if  he  should  ask,  I  should 
reply. 


Notes,     a.  In  the  model,  notice  that: 

the    condition    is    stated   less    vividly   than    the    other   future 

condition,  or  as  merely  possible, 
the  present  subjunctive  is  used  in  both  clauses, 
the  English  auxiliaries  are  should  and  would. 

b.  This  is  called  a  future  less  vivid  condition. 

c.  Compare  it  with  the  indicative  future  more  vivid  condition,  §763. 


774.      RULE.     Less  vivid  future  conditional  sentences  have 
both  verbs  in  the  present   (or  perfect)   subjunctive. 


276  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

775.  SUMMARY  OF  CONDITIONS 

I.  Indicative: 
a.  Assumed; 

1.  Present,  use  the  present  indicative. 

2.  Past,  use  a  past  tense  of  the  indicative. 
h.  More  Vivid  Future; 

use  the  future  or  future  perfect  indicative. 

II.  Subjunctive : 

a.  Contrary  to  Fact; 

1.  Present,  use  the  imperfect  subjunctive. 

2.  Past,  use  the  pluperfect  subjunctive. 

b.  Less  Vivid  Future ; 

use  the  present  (or  perfect)  subjunctive. 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

776.  1.  Nisi  exercitus  constitisset,  Helvetios  non  super- 
avisset.  2.  Si  Ilelvetil  insidiis  non  nitantur,  nobis  resistere 
non  possint.  3.  Si  Caesar  id  committat,  aut  fugae  se  man- 
dent  aut  interficiantur.  4.  SI  principes  in  hoc  oppidum  Gena- 
vam  nomine  revertantur,  hostes  eos  c5nsequl  conentur.  5. 
Si  muro  et  fossa  castra  communire  voluisset,  civitas  eum 
defendisset.  C.  Si  mllites  Labienum  aggrederentur,  se  de- 
fenderet.    7.  Gravius  tulissem,  nisi  eae  res  accidissent. 

777.  1.  If  I  undertake  a  matter  (res),  I  complete  it. 
2.  If  I  undertook  a  matter,  I  completed  it.  3.  If  I  under- 
take (future)  a  matter,  I  shall  complete  it.  4.  If  I  should 
undertake  a  matter,  I  should  complete  it.  5.  If  you  were 
with  Caesar,  you  would  not  wish  to  go  home.  6.  If  the 
Aeduans  had  been  able  to  defend  their  name,  this  would  not 
have  happened.  7.  If  you  should  allow  this,  I  should  be 
much  displeased.  8.  If  you  had  depended  on  ambuscades, 
you  would  not  have  halted  here.  9.  I  say  that  I  shall  go 
home  if  I  am  able. 


LESSON  LXXXVIII  277 

LESSON  LXXXVIII 

WISHES 

TEXT 

778.  DIRECT    FORM 

Qui  sP  alicuius  initiriae  sibi  conscius^  fuissef,  non  fuit^ 
difficile  cavere,  sed  eo*  deceptus  est,  quod  neque  commissum^ 
a  se  intellegebat  quare^  timeret,  neque  sine  causa  timendum^ 
putabat.  Quod  si  veteris  contumeliae^  oblivisci  velit,  num^ 
etiam  recentium  iniuriarum/^  quod  eo  invito"  iter  per  pro- 
vinciam  per  vim  temptavistis,  quod  Aeduos,  quod  Ambarros, 
quod  Allobroges  vexavistis,  memoriam  deponere  potest? 
(244-251,  Ch.  14.) 

NOTES 

1.  qui  si:  for  if  they,  qui  is  the  subject  of  fuisset,  deceptus  est, 
intellegebat,  timeret,  putabat,  and  refers  to  the  Eoman  people. 

2.  sibi  conscius:  literally,  conscious  to  themselves;  but  English  omits 
to  themselves. 

3.  non  fuit  .  .  .  cavere:  it  uonld  not  have  heen  difficult  to  be  on 
their  guard,    fuit  is  indicative  by  exception. 

4.  See  §611. 

5.  (aliquid)  commissum  (esse):  that  anything  had  been  done. 

6.  quare  timeret:  on  account  of  which  they  should  be  afraid. 

7.  timendum  (esse) :  the  construction  is  impersonal,  it  was  to  be 
feared,  but  it  is  better  to  render  the  impersonal  Latin  verb  by  the 
personal  construction:  nor  did  they  thinlc  they  ought  to  be  afraid 
without  reason. 

8.  See  §756,  Note  7. 

9.  See  §595,  c. 

10.  Objective  genitive,  modifying  memoriam  and  explained  by  the 
quod  clauses  that  follow:  that  you  have  attempted,  etc.,  that  you  have 
troubled  the  Aeduans,  etc. 

11.  60  invito:  see  general  vocabulary  under  invitus. 


278  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

779.  VOCABULARY 

aliqui,  aliqua,  aliquod,  genitive  alicuius,  dative  alicui,  etc.,  indefinite 

adjective,  any.    See  App.  62, 
caveo,  cavere,  cavi,  cautum,  he  on  one's  guard. 
con-scius,  -a,  -um,  conscious,  aware. 
contumelia,  -ae,  f.,  insult,  afront. 
de-cipio,   -cipere,   -cepi,   -ceptum   [capio,   capere,  cepi,   captum,   talce], 

literally,  take  away  (one's  security),  i.e.,  deceive,  '^ talce  in." 
de-pono,  -ponere,  -posui,  -positum,  literally,  place  down,  i.  e.,  lay  aside. 
obliviscor,  oblivisci,  olDlitus  sum,  forget. 
recens,  recentis,  adjective,  recent. 
tempts,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  try,  attempt. 
utinam,  adverb,  may,  I  icish  that,  I  hope  that,  would  that. 
vexo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  trouble,  harass. 

780.  INDIRECT  FORM 

Qui  SI  alicuius  iniuriae  sibi  conscius  fuisset,  non  fuisse 
difficile  cavere;  sed  eo  deceptum,  quod  neque  commissum 
a  se  intellegeret  quare  timeret,  neque  sine  causa  timendum 
putaret.  Quod  si  veteris  contumeliae  oblivisci  vellet,^  num 
etiam  recentium  initiriarum,  quod  eo  invito  iter  per  pro- 
vinciam  per  vim  temptassent,  quod  Aeduos,  quod  Ambar- 
ros,  quod  Allobroges  vexassent,  memoriam  deponere  posse? 
(244-251,  Ch.  14.) 

NOTE 

1.  Not  a  contrary  to  fact  condition.     See  §371. 

781.  SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  WISH  (OPTATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE) 

"Wishes  are  divided  into  three  classes  as  regards  time: 
Present. 
Past. 
Future. 


LESSON   LXXXVIII  279 

They  are  divided  into  two  classes  as  regards  meaning : 
Possible  Wishes  referring  to  the  future  (i.e.,  hopes)  and 
Impossible    Wishes   referring   to   the   present   or  past 
(i.  e.,  regrets). 

Models 

1.  Present:  Utinam  Caesar  veniret,  /  wish  that  Caesar  were 

coming  (now)  ! 

2.  Past:  Utinam  Caesar  venisset,  /  wish  that  Caesar  had 

come  (in  the  past)  ! 

3.  Future:    (Utinam)   Caesar  veniat,  I  hope  that  Caesar 

will  come  (in  the  future) ! 

Notes,  a.  In  Model  1  the  wish,  expressed  by  the  imperfect 
subjunctive,  implies  that  Caesar  is  not  coming  and  so  is  impossible 
of  fulfillment  in  present  time. 

h.  In  Model  2  the  wish,  expressed  by  the  pluperfect  subjunctive, 
implies  that  Caesar  did  not  come  in  the  past  and  so  was  impossible 
of  fulfillment  in  past  time. 

c.  In  Model  3  the  wish,  expressed  by  the  present  subjunctive,  is 
possible  of  fulfillment  in  future  time. 

d.  Compare  wishes  with  subjunctive  conditions  (§§772,774)  and 
note  that: 

1.  Contrary   to   fact   conditions    and   impossible    wishes    (regrets) 

refer  to  present  and  past  time,  and  take  the  imperfect  and 
pluperfect  subjunctive. 

2.  Future  less  vivid  conditions  and  possible  wishes  (hopes)  refer 

to  future  time  and  take  the  present  subjunctive. 

e.  Utinam  is  often  omitted  with  possible  wishes,  but  never  with 
impossible  wishes. 

f.  The  negative  is  ne. 


782.  RULE,  Future  (possible)  wishes  are  expressed  by 
the  present  subjunctive  with  or  without  utinam;  present  and 
past  (impossible)  wishes  are  expressed  by  the  imperfect  and 
pluperfect  subjunctive  with  utinam.     The  negative  is  ne. 


280  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

TRANSLATION    EXERCISES 

783.  1.  Utinam  Cassius  cavisset!  2.  Utinam  ne  Helve- 
tii  ullam  calamitatem  populo  Romano  intulissent!  3.  Si 
Romanis  invitis  per  provinciam  iter  temptavissent,  Caesar 
eos  vexavisset.  4.  Utinam  ne  a  vobis  deceptus  essem !  5. 
Harum  contumeliarum  memoriam  deponere  conemur!  6. 
Nolite  vererl  ne  Helvetii  Caesarem  superent. 

784.  1.  I  wish  I  were  in  Italy!  2.  I  hope  this  may 
happen  often !  3.  I  wish  this  had  not  been  done !  4.  I 
wish  that  we  were  with  Caesar's  army!  5.  I  hope  that 
we  may  live  at  home  for  a  year!  6.  Would  that  we  had 
tried  to  lay  aside  the  memory  of  this  recent  insult !  7.  But 
this  will  not  trouble  me,  if  I  am  (future)  on  my  guard.  8. 
I  fear  that  I  have  been  deceived  by  your  leader.  9.  That 
will  not  happen  if  you  defend  (future)  me. 


LESSON  LXXXIX 

WORD   FORMATION 

TEXT 

785.  DIRECT   FORM 

Quod^  vestra  victoria^  tam  insolenter  gloriamini,  quodque^ 
tarn  diu  vos  impune  initirias  intulisse  admlramini,  eodem 
pertinent.  Consueverunt'"'  enim  di  immortales,  quo*  gravius 
homines  ex  commtitatione  rerum  doleant,  quos  pro  scelere 
eorum  ulcTscT  volunt,  his  secundiores  inter dum  res  et  diii- 
turniorem  impunitatem  concedere.     (251-257,  Ch.  14.) 


LESSON   LXXXIX  281 

NOTES 

1.  quod:  the  fact  that.  The  two  quod  clauses  are  the  subjects  of 
pertinent. 

2.  See  §611. 

3.  quodque  .  .  .  admiramini,  pertinent:  and  the  fact  that  you  are 
surprised  that  you  have  inflicted  these  injuries  so  long  without  punish- 
ment, tend  to  the  same  result :  i.  e.,  that  it  is  now  high  time  that  you 
should  receive  the  punishment  due  you. 

4.  quo  gravius  doleant:  in  order  that  they  may  feel  more  pain,  quo 
is  used  for  ut  when  there  is  a  comparative  in  the  purpose  clause. 

5.  consueverunt,  etc.;  translate  in  the  following  order: 

Enim  qu5  homines,  quos  volunt  ulcTsci  pro  eorum  scelere, 
doleant  gravius  ex  commutatione  rerum,  di  immortales  con- 
sueverunt concedere  interdum  his  (hominibus)  secundiores 
res  et  diuturniorem  imptinitatem :  for,  in  order  that  men 
whom  they  wish  to  punish  for  their  crimes  may  feel  more 
pain  (from)  because  of  a  change  of  circumstances,  the  immor- 
tal gods  are  accustomed  to  grant  sometimes  to  these  (men) 
greater  prosperity  and  longer  freedom  from  punishment. 


786.  VOCABULARY 

ad-miror,  -mirari,  -miratus  sum,  wonder,  be  surprised. 

commutatio,  commutatidnis,  f.,  change. 

c6n-suesc6,   -suescere,   -suevi,  -suetum,   became  accustomed;    perfect,  1 

have  become  accustomed  =  (regularly)  I  am  accustomed. 
diii,   adverb,   comparative  diutius,   superlative  diiitissime,  for  a  long 

time. 
diutiirnus,  -a,  -um  [diu,  adverb,  long],  long,  adjective,  referring  to  time. 

doleo,  dolere,  dolui,  ,  feel  pain,  suffer. 

cn'm,  coordinate  conjunction,  for. 

glorlor,  gloriari,  gloriatus  sum  [gloria,  glory],  boast  (of),  glory  (in). 

imptine,  adverb,  without  punishment,  with  impunity. 

impunitas,  impunitatis,  f.,  freedom  from  punishment,  impunity. 

insolenter,  adverb,  haughtily. 

inter-dum,  adverb,  literally,  between  whiles,  as  we  say;  meanwhile. 


282  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

scelus,  sceleris,  n.,  crime, 

secundus,  -a,  -um  [sequor,  follow'],  second;  favorable;  secundiores  res, 

literally,  more  favorable  things,  i.  e.,  greater  prosperity. 
victoria,  -ae,  f.,  victory. 


787.  INDIRECT    FORM 

Quod  sua  victoria  tarn  msolenter  gloriarentur,  quodque 
tarn  diu  se  impune  iniurias  intulisse  admirarentur,  eodem 
pertinere.  Consuesse  euim  deos  immortales,  quo  gravius 
homines  ex  commutatione  rerum  doleant,  quos  pro  scelere 
eorum  ulcisci  velint,  his  secundiores  interdum  res  et  diti- 
turniorem  impunitatem  concedere.     (251-257,  Ch.  14.) 


COMPOUND   WORDS 

788.  a.  Some  words  in  Latin,  as  in  English,  are  formed 
by  prefixing  certain  particles  to  other  words.  Such  words 
are  called  compounds.  Compound  words  differ  in  meaning 
from  the  simple  words  in  accordance  with  the  meanings  of 
the  prefixes,  as : 

ab,  from  -\-  dtico,  lead  =  abduco,  lead  from. 

ad,  to  (toward)  +  duco,  lead  =  adduc5,  lead  to  (toward). 

b.  The  following  words  that  are  often  used  as  prefixes 
should,  with  their  meanings,  be  carefully  noted: 

a,  ab(abs);  away  from. '^ 

ad;    to,  toward,  at,  near. 

ante;    before,  in  front  of. 

circmn;  around. 

cum   (con-);    together,  with;    often  intensive,  completely. 

de;  do^vn  from. 

e,  ex;    out  froin,  out  of ;   often  intensive,  completely. 

in;  in,  on,  into,  against. 

inter;  among,  between. 

ob;  towards,  against. 


LESSON   LXXXIX  283 

per;  through;  hence  also  intensive,  thoroughly. 

prae;  before,  in  front  of;  sometimes  intensive,  very,  very  much. 

pro;  forth,  before. 

sub;  under,  underneath,  from  under,  up. 

trans  (tra-);  across. 

c.  Words  are  also  formed  by  prefixing  particles  that  are 
never  used  independently,  as: 

dis-;    apart,   between;   as:    dis-,   apart -\- "pono,   place  =  disvond, 

place  at  intervals. 
re-,    red-;    hacTc,   again;    as:    re-,    feacfc  +  pello,    dm-e  =  repello, 

drive  bacTc. 

d.  Some  adjectives  are  formed  by  prefixing  in-;  in-j 
un-;  as: 

in-,  un-  -\-  credibilis,  believable  =  incredibilis,  unbelievable. 

e.  Most  of  these  prefixes  take  on  different  forms  adapted 
to  the  initial  consonants  of  the  words  with  which  they  are 
used.    Notice,  for  example,  the  ad-  in  the  following: 

appello,  attingo,  afficio,  adduc5,  accipio,  aggredior,  ascendo. 

f.  Notice  also  that,  with  verbs  compounded  with  prefixes, 
a  short  a  or  e  in  the  stem  may  be  changed  to  short  i,  as: 

facio,  afficid;  teneo,  retined. 
Other  changes  of  vowels  may  occur. 

EXERCISES 
789.     Give  the  meaning  of  each  of  the  following  words: 

1.  Subeo.  2.  Transport©.  3.  Reddo.  4.  Redeo.  5.  Pro- 
video.  6.  Adeo.  7.  Praefero.  8.  Perfero.  9.  Antep5no.  10. 
Obvenio.  11.  Circumduco.  12.  Interpono.  13.  Commoveo. 
14,  Infirmus.  15.  Impono.  16.  Demitto.  17.  Dimitto.  18. 
Expello. 


284  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

790.     Form  words  by  combining  the  following  prefixes 
with  words  as  indicated,  and  give  their  meanings : 

a,  a"b;  and  sum,  verto,  similis. 
ad;  and  fero,  eo,  sum. 
ante;  and  cedo,  fero,  mitto. 
circum;  and  venio,  eo,  -icio  (iacio). 
cum  (con-);  and  venio,  munio,  voco. 
de;  and  duco,  pello,  fluo. 
e,  ex;  and  venio,  voco,  mitto. 
in;  and  fluo,  sequor,  eo. 
inter;  and  mitto,  pello,  -icio  (iacio). 
ol);  and  duc5,  pono,  pugno. 
•     per;  and  sequor,  eo,  facilis. 
prae;  and  died,  pono,  eo. 
pro;  and  mitto,  sequor,  veniS. 
sub;  and  port5,  sum,  moved, 
trans;  and  eo,  fero,  mitto. 
dis-;  and  pdno,  pello,  cedo. 
re-,  red-;  and  porto,  peto,  fero. 
in-;  and  certus,  firmus,  auditus. 


LESSON  XC 

WORD   FORMATION— Continued 

TEXT 

791.  DIRECT   FORM 

Cum^  ea  ita  sint,  tamen,  si  obsides  a  vobis  mihi  dabuntnr,^ 
utl^  ea  quae  pollieemini  vos  facturos  intellegam,  et  si*  Aeduis 
de  iniuriis  quas  ipsis^  sociisque  eorum^  intulistis,  item  si 
Allobrogibus  satisfacietis,  voblscum  pacem  faciam.  (Divico 
respondit)  :  Ita  Helvetil  a  maioribus  suTs  mstituti  sunt  uti 
obsides  accipere,  non  dare,  consuerint;^  eius  rei^  populus 
Romanus  est  testis.     (257-264,  Ch.  14.) 


LESSON  xc  285 

NOTES 

1.  cum  .  .  .  sint:    although   these   things  are  so.     cum  here   has   a 
concessive  force. 

2.  dabuntur,  satisfacietis,  faciam:  see  §764. 

3.  uti  .  .  .  intellegam:   in  order  that  I  may  Jcnow  that  you  will  do 
those  things  that  you  promise.    See  §414. 

4.  si  Aeduls  .  .  .  item  si  Allobrogibus  satisfacietis:  if  you  will  pay 
damages  to  the  Aeduans  .  .  .  and  likeivise  to  the  Allotroges. 

5.  ipsis  sociisque:  see  §537. 

6.  ipsis  and  e5rum:  refer  to  the  Aeduans. 

7.  Contracted  from  consueverint.    See  §503,  Note  1. 

8.  rei:  see  §499. 


792.  VOCABULARY 

ac-cipio,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -ceptum  [ad,  to,  capio,  taTce],  receive. 

dis-cedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -cessum,  literally,  go  apart;  regularly,  go  away, 

depart. 
in-stitu6,  -stituere,  -stitui,  -stitutum  [statuo,  statuere,  statui,  statiitum, 

statio7i],  literally,  iilace  upon;  establish;  train. 
poUiceor,  poUiceri,  pollicitus  sum,  promise. 
responsum,  -i,   n.    [neuter  of  perfect  passive  participle  of  responded 

used  substantively],  answer,  reply. 
satis-facio,  -facere,  -feci,  -factum,  passive,  satis-fio,  -fieri,  -factus  sum, 

literally,  do  enough,  i.e.,  satisfy;  pay  damages. 
testis,  testis,  m.  or  f .,  witness. 


793.  INDIRECT  FORM 

Cum  ea  ita  sint,  tamen,  si  obsides  ab  eis  sibi  dentur,  utI 
ea  quae  polliceantur  facturos  intellegat,  et  si  Aeduis  de 
iniurils  quas  ipsis  sociisque  eorum  intulerint,  item  si  Allo- 
brogibus satisfaciant,  sese  cum  els  pacem  esse  facturum. 
Divieo  respondit:  Ita  Helvetios  a  maioribus  suls  mstitutos 
esse  utI  obsides  accipere,  non  dare,  cdnsuerint;  eius  rei 
populum  Romanum  esse  testem.  Hoc  responso  dato  discessit. 
(257-264,  Ch.  14.) 


286  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

DERIVATION   OF   NOUNS   AND   VERBS 

794.  The  following  endings  added  to  verb  stems  form 
nouns  with  meanings  as  indicated: 

a.  -tor  (-sor),  agent  or  doer,  i.  e.,  one  who  performs  the  act 
indicated  by  the  verb  stem.  English  equivalents  are  -er, 
-or,  -tor;  as :  maker,  donor,  navigator. 

Model 

explorator  =  stem  of  explore  {find  out)  + -tor  {one  who) 
=  one  who  finds  out,  a  scout. 

h.  -tio  (-sio)  and  -tus  (-sus),  genitive  -us,  act  or  the  result 
of  an  act.  English  equivalents  are  -ing,  -ion,  -tion;  as: 
fastening,  coercion,  direction. 

IMODEL 

munitio  =  stem  of  munio    {f or tify) -\- -iio    {act  or  result 
of  act)  =  fortification  (either  the  act  or  the  result). 

795.  The  following  endings  added  to  noun  and  adjective 
stems  form  nouns  that  denote  abstract  quality: 

-ia,  -tia,  -tas,  -tus,  -tudo.  English  equivalents  are  -ness, 
-ship,  -tude,  -{t)y;  as:  weariness,  friendship,  altitude,  luxury. 

Model 

magnitudo  =  stem   of  magnus    {large) -{- -tudo    {abstract 
quality)  =  largeness,  size. 

EXERCISES 

796.  Give  the  meaning  of  each  of  the  following  in  such 
a  way  as  to  show  the  formation: 

1.  Imperator.  2.  Deditio.  3.  Victoria.  4.  Difficultas.  5. 
Defensor.  6.  Oppugnatio.  7.  Firmitudo.  8.  Potentia.  9. 
Conventus. 


ELEVENTH   REVIEW   LESSON 


287 


797.     Form  words  by  combining  the  following  endings 

and  stems  as  indicated,  and  give  their  meanings : 

1.  -tor;    and  da-,  e-voca-,  due-. 

2.  -ia;    and  audac-,  miser-. 

3.  -tio;    and  profec-  (proficiscor),  existima-,  conten-  (contendo). 

4.  -tia;  and  amici-,  poten(t)-,  perseveran(t)-. 

5o  -tus;    and  mo-  (moved),  adi-  (adeo),  c5na-  (conor). 

6.  -tus;    and  vir-,  servi-,  senec-. 

7.  -tas;    and  ndbili-,  boni-,  pauci-. 
3.  -tudd;  and  firmi-,  soli-,  ampll-. 


ELEVENTH  EEVIEW  LESSON 

798.     Give  an  account  of  Divico's  speech  and  Caesar's 
reply,  and  then  translate. 


799.     Latin-English  Vocabulary. 

Give  the  memoranda  of  the  nouns ;  the  entire  nominative 
and  comparison  of  the  adjectives;  the  principal  parts  of  the 
verbs;   and  the  meanings  of  all  the  words. 


accidd 

consuesco 

improviso 

responsum 

admiror 

contumelia 

insidiae 

recens 

adorior 

decipio 

instituo 

secundus 

ago 

depono 

interdum 

sin 

aliqui 

despiciS 

nitor 

tempts 

caveo 

disced© 

nomen 

vetus 

committo 

diu 

poUiceor 

vexo 

commutatio 

doleo 

pristinus 

victoria 

consists 

enim 

quam  (conj.) 

288  BELLUM    HELVETIC UM 

800.     English-Latin  Vocabulary. 

Give  the  first  form  of  the  Latin  for  the  following: 


allow 

ambuscades 

any 

attack  (verb) 

become 

accustomed 
be  on  one 's  guard 
but  if 
change 
deceive 


depart 

despise 

discuss 

favorable 

for  (conj.) 

for  a  long  time 

former 

happen 

halt 


insult 

lay  aside 

meanwhile 

name 

old 

promise 

recent 

rely 

reply 

suffer 


take  one 's  stand 

talk 

than 

train 

trouble 

try 

unexpectedly 

victory 

wonder 


801.     Syntax. 

When    Latin    direct    discourse    becomes    indirect,    vv^hat 
changes  take  place? 

Conditions :     Define  an  assumed  condition.     Give  rule. 

Define  a  future  more  vivid  condition.  Give  rule. 
Define  a  contrary  to  fact  condition.  Give  rule. 
Define  a  future  less  vivid  condition.   Give  rule. 

Wishes:     Into  what  two   classes   are  wishes   divided 
as  to  meaning? 
Into  what  two  classes  are  impossible  wishes 

divided?    How  is  each  expressed? 
How  is  a  possible  wish  expressed? 


802.     Composition. 

Make  up  short  English  sentences  as  examples  of:  indirect 
discourse ;  each  of  the  four  kinds  of  conditions ;  of  a  possible 
wish ;  of  an  impossible  w4sh. 

Translate  the  sentences  into  Latin. 


CHAPTEB   XV  289 


CHAPTEE  XV-XXIX 

Note. — From  this  point  the  text  is  given  connectedly  with  notes 
instead  of  being  divided  into  lessons  as  heretofore.  The  exercises 
for  writing  are  placed  at  the  end  of  each  chapter,  and  may  be  divided 
in  the  assignment  of  lessons,  at  the  discretion  of  the  teacher. 

15.     Postero  die  castra  ex  eo  loco  movent.    Idem  facit  265 
Caesar    equitatumque    omnem,    ad    numerum    quattuor 
milium,  quem  ex  omni  provincia  et  Aeduis  atque  eorum 
socils  coactum  habebat,  praemittit  qui  videant  quas  in 
partes    hostes    iter    faciant.     Qui    cupidius    novissimum 
agmen   msecutl   alieno   loco    cum   equitatu   Helvetiorum  27o 
proelium  committunt;    et  pauci  de  nostrls  cadunt.     Quo 
proelo   sublati  Helvetii,   quod   quingentis   equitibus  tan- 
tam    multitudinem   equitum   propulerant,    audacius   sub- 
sistere  nonnumquam  et  novissimo  agmine  proelio  nostros 
lacessere   coeperunt.     Caesar  suos   a  proelio   continebat  275 
ac  satis  habebat  in  praesentia  hostem  raplnis,  pabula- 
tionibus,  populationibusque  prohibere.     Ita  dies  circiter 
quindecim  iter  fecerunt,   uti   inter  novissimum  hostium 

.265.  movent:  supply  Helvetii.    idem:  neuter  accusative. 
266.  equitatum:  direct  object  of  praemittit.     quattuor  milium:  see 
§648,  Note  c. 

268.  coactum  habebat:  compare  with  habere  obstrictas,  §615,  Note  4. 
qui  videant:  to  see.  See  §423, 1.  qui:  plural,  because  it  refers  to  the 
individuals  of  the  collective  antecedent,  equitatum.  quas  in  partes: 
in  what  direction. 

269.  faciant:    see  §370.    cupidius:    too  eagerly. 

271.  pauci  de  ncstris:  a  few  of  our  men. 

272.  equitibus:  why  no  preposition?    See  §581,  Note  1. 
274.  novissimo  agmine:  place  in  which,    proelio:  see  §313. 

276.  satis  (esse)  habebat  .  .  .  prohibere:  he  held  that  (it)  was 
enough  .  .  .  to  I'eep  away:  prohibere  is  the  subject  of  the  esse  supplied. 

277.  ita:  correlative  with  uti.  circiter:  an  adverb  modifying  the 
adjective  quindecim. 


290  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

agmen  et  nostrum  primum  non  amplius  quinis  aut  senis 
280  milibus  passuum  interesset. 

279.  primum:  supply  agmen.  amplius:  used  as  a  noun,  the  subject 
of  interesset.  quinis  aut  senis:  the  distributives  are  used  to  indicate 
that  the  two  armies  were  this  distance  apart  each  day. 

280.  interesset:    see  §437. 

EXERCISES 

Eeview:     Time  Constructions,  §§  320,  327. 
Eeflexive  Pronoun,  §407. 
Eelative  Pronoun,  §§  150, 152. 

1.  They  will  come  back  in  ten  days.  2.  Caesar,  on  that 
day,  persuaded  the  soldiers.  3.  For  many  years,  he  tried 
to  hold  the  royal  power.  4.  Orgetorix  died  at  that  time. 
5.  The  rear  of  the  enemy  marched  thus  for  about  fifteen 
days.  6.  In  twenty  days  the  cavalry  will  come  to  that  place 
from  which  they  had  started  out.  7.  At  the  same  time  the 
Helvetians  were  elated  by  a  battle  by  means  of  which  they 
had  begun  to  rout  a  large  number  of  horsemen.  8.  We 
shall  take  with  use  five  or  six  men  each,  if  you  will  take  the 
same  number  with  you.  9.  Caesar  always  kept  the  tenth 
legion  with  him,  because  it  was  most  friendly  to  him. 

16.  Interim  cotidie  Caesar  Aeduos  frumentum  quod 
essent  ptiblice  poUiciti  flagitare.  Nam  propter  frigora, 
quod   Gallia   sub   septentrionibus,   ut   ante   dictum   est, 

281.  Aeduos  frumentum:  grain  from  the  Aeduans;  verbs  of  demand- 
ing govern  two  accusatives. 

282.  essent  .  .  .  polliciti  =  polliciti  essent.  flagitare  =  flagitabat. 
In  animated  description  the  present  infinitive  may  be  used  for  the 
imperfect  or  perfect  indicative,  and  has  its  subject  in  the  nominative. 
This  is  called  the  historical  inpiitive. 

283.  ut:  how  translated?    See  §472,  Note  2. 


CHAPTER   XVI  291 

posita  est,  non  modo  frumenta  in  agris  mattira  non  erant, 
sed  ne  pabull  quidem  satis  magna  copia  suppetebat ;  eo  285 
autem  frtimento  quod  fiumine  Arari  navibus  subvexerat 
propterea  titi  minus  poterat,  quod  iter  ab  Aran  Helvetil 
averterant,  a  quibus  discedere  nolebat.  Diem  ex  die 
dticere  Aedui;  conferri,  comportari,  adesse  dicere.  Ubi 
se  diutius  duel  intellexit  et  diem  instare  quo  die  fru-  290 
mentum  militibus  metiri  oporteret,  convocatis  eorum 
prmcipibus,  quorum  magnam  copiam  in  castris  habebat, 

284.  frumenta:  standing  grain;  frumentum:  (harvested)  grain,  used 
in  the  singular  because  in  bulk. 

285.  ne  .  .  .  quidem:  always  emphasizes  what  comes  between  the 
two  words,     pabuli:    see  §491. 

286.  frumento:  see  §635.    flumine,  navibus:  ablates  of  means. 

287.  minus  =  non. 

288.  diem:  see  §327.  diem  .  .  .  Aedui;  the  Aeduans  Jcept  putting 
him  (Caesar)  off  from  day  to  day. 

289.  diicere,  dicere:  for  form  and  translation,  see  note  on  flagitare, 
line  282,  above,  conferri  .  .  .  dicere:  they  (the  Aeduans)  kept  saying 
it  (the  grain)  was  being  collected,  it  ivas  being  brought,  it  was  close  at 
hand,  ubi:  connects  intellexit  with  acctisat.  Before  trying  to  trans- 
late this  sentence,  render  into  English  the  following  sentences: 

1.  Ubi  se  diutius  duci  intellexit  et  diem  instare  quo  die  frumen- 
tum militibus  metiri  oporteret,  principes  eorum  convocavit.  2.  Eorum 
magnam  copiam  in  castris  habebat.  3.  In  his  Diviciacum  convocavit 
et  Liscum  qui  summo  magistratui  praeerat.  4.  Hunc  vergobretum 
appellant  Aedui  qui  creatur  annuus  et  vitae  necisque  in  suos  habet 
potestatem.  5.  Graviter  eos  principes  acciisat  quod,  cum  friimentum 
neque  emi  neque  ex  agris  siimi  possit,  tam  necessario  tempore,  tam 
propinquis  hostibus,  ab  eis  non  sublevetur. 

291.  se  (understood)  is  the  subject  and  frumentum  the  object  of 
metiri.  friimentum  metiri  is  the  subject  of  oporteret,  but  translate: 
it  was  necessary  to  measure  out  grain  to  the  soldiers,  oporteret:  see 
§751,  Note  c.  convocatis  principibus:  ablative  absolute,  denoting 
time  and  modifying  acciisat:  after  summoning  the  chief  men,  he 
reproached,  etc.     eorum:    the  Aeduans. 

292.  quorum  .  .  .  habebat:  explains  principibus. 


292  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

in  his  Diviciaco  et  Lisco,  qui  summo  magistratuT  praeerat, 
quern  vergobretum  appellant  Aedul,  qui  creatur  animus 

259  et  vitae  necisque  in  suos  habet  potestatem,  graviter  eos 
acctisat,  quod,  cum  neque  emi  neque  ex  agris  sum!  possit, 
tarn  necessario  tempore,  tarn  propinquis  hostibus,  ab  eis 
non  sublevetur;  praesertim  cum  magna  ex  parte  eorum 
precibus  adductus  bellum  susceperit,  mult5  etiam  gravius 

300  quod  sit  destitutus  queritur. 

293.  Diviciaco  et  Lisco:  appositives  of  principibus.  qui  .  .  .  prae- 
erat:   explains  Lisco. 

294.  quern  .  .  .  Aedul:  explains  magistratui:  gee  §527.  qui  .  .  . 
potestatem:  explains  vegobretum.  annuus:  an  adjective,  here  used 
with  the  force  of  an  adverb. 

295.  in  suos:    over  his  subjects. 

296.  possit:    the  subject  is  frumentum  (understood). 

297.  propinquis  hostibus  I   ablative  absolute  denoting  time. 

298.  sublevetur:  see  §692.  In  this  case  the  reason  is  Caesar's  own, 
not  another's.  Yet  he  is  quoting  the  reason  he  gave  for  his  complaint; 
hence  the  subjunctive,  i.  e.,  the  reason  is  given  by  Caesar  the  general 
and  quoted  by  Caesar  the  author,     ex:  in. 

299.  multo:  see  §620. 

EXERCISES 

Review:     Place  Constructions,  §§327,  460,  468,  476. 
Appositive  and  Predicate  Noun,  §85. 
Demonstrative  Pronouns,  §§134,  135,  142,  482. 

1.  The  soldiers  are  in  the  town.  2.  He  hastened  from 
Geneva  to  Gaul.  3.  In  these  places  were  large  forests. 
4.  Their  territory  extends  forty  miles.  5.  The  grain  in 
that  place  will  not  be  ripe  this  month.  6.  Meantime  Caesar 
turns  away  from  the  same  river  because  he  wishes  to  follow 
the  Helvetians.  7.  The  Boii  have  gone  to  Noreia,  but  not 
even  now  are  they  far  from  home.  8.  Caesar  hastened  from 
Aquileia,  a  large  town  of  Italy,  to  Ocelum,  the  last  town  of 
the  nearer  province.     9.  Liscus  had  been  the  chief  of  the 


CHAPTER   XVII  293 

Aeduans,  by  whom  he  was  considered  (habeo)  very  power- 
ful. 10.  He  calls  the  chiefs  from  the  fields  into  that  camp 
in  which  he  himself  has  been  for  many  days. 

17.  Tum  demum  Liscus  oratione  Caesaris  adductus 
quod  antea  tacuerat  proponit:  Esse  nonnullos  quorum 
auctoritas  apud  plebem  plurimum  valeat,  qui  privatim 
plus  possint  quam  ipsi  magistratus.  Hos  seditiosa  atque 
improba  oratione  multitudinem  deterrere  ne  frumentum  305 
conferant  quod  debeant:  praestare,  si  iam  principatum 
Galliae  obtinere  non  possint,  Gallorum  quam  Romanorum 
imperia  perferre;  neque  dubitare  quTn,  si  Helvetios 
superaverint  Roman!,  una  cum  reliqua  Gallia  Aeduis 
libertatem    sint    erepturi.     Ab    eisdem    nostra      eonsilia  310 

302.  quod:  supply  the  antecedent  id,  the  object  of  pr5p6nit.  The 
rest  of  the  chapter  beginning  with  esse  nonnullSs  is  explanatory  of 
(id)  quod. 

303.  qui  .  .  .  possint:  who,  though  private  citizens,  possess  more 
influence  than,  etc. 

305.  ne  .  .  .  conferant:  from  collecting  the  grain.  The  negative 
clause  of  purpose  with  ne  or  quominus  after  a  verb  of  hindering  may 
be  rendered  by  from  with  the  verbal  noun  in  -ing, 

306.  conferant:  plural  because  of  the  plural  idea  in  multitudinem. 
praestare  .  .  .  erepturi:  the  arguments  by  which  these  men  (hos) 
influence  the  multitude,  praestare,  Gallorum  .  .  .  perferre;  neque 
dubitare,  etc.:  {saying  that)  it  was  better  to  endure  the  rule  of  the 
Gauls  than  that  of  the  Eomans;  and  they  did  not  doubt,  etc.  praestare 
is  used  impersonally  and  has  perferre,  line  308,  for  its  subject. 

308.  quin  .  .  .  sint  erepturi:  after  a  negatived  expression  of  douit 
(here  dubitare),  quin,  that,  and  the  subjunctive  must  be  used,  dubitare 
has  hos,  line  304,  for  its  subject. 

309.  superaverint:  the  future  perfect  indicative  in  direct  discourse 
becomes  perfect  subjunctive  in  the  indirect.  Aeduis  .  .  .  sint  erep' 
turi:  they  would  wrest  from  the  Aeduans.  Some  verbs  compounded 
with  ab,  de,  ex  govern  the  dative  (here  Aeduis),  instead  of  the  abla^ 
tive,  of  separation,    sint  erepturi:    see  §722.    Una  cum:    together  with, 

310.  eisdem:   i.  e.,  the  nonnullos  of  line  302. 


294  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

quaeque  in  castris  gerantur  hostibus  enuntiari;  hos  a 
se  coerceri  non  posse.  Quln  etiam,  quod  necessariam  rem 
coactus  Caesari  enuntiarit,  intellegere  sese  quanto  id  cum 
periculo  fecerit,  et  ob  earn  causam  quam  diu  potuerit 
815  tacuisse.  '         . 

311.  quaeque  =  et  (ea)  quae. 

312.  se:  i.  e.,  Liscus.  quod  .  .  .  enuntiarit:  "because  under  compul- 
sion he  disclosed  the  critical  matter  to  Caesar,    enuntiarit  =  enuntiaverit. 

313.  quanto  .  .  .  fecerit:  indirect  question,  the  object  of  intellegere. 
id:  i.  6.,  made  this  disclosure. 

EXERCISES 

Eeview:     Ablative  of  Agent,  §306. 
Ablative  of  Manner,  §627. 
Ablative  of  Accompaniment,  §642. 
Adjectives  with  Genitive  in  -ius,  §283. 

1.  To  which  man  (of  two)  will  you  give  this?  2.  No 
grain  was  brought  in  by  any  (of  the)  traders.  3.  The 
bridge  torn  down  (ablative  absolute),  they  returned  very 
hopefully  to  the  camp,  4.  Are  you  allowed  (is  it  allowed 
to  you)  to  establish  peace  with  your  neighbors?  5.  Liscus, 
who  was  influenced  by  Caesar,  declared  that  some  were  very 
powerful.  6.  Other  things  that  were  being  done  in  the  whole 
camp  were  reported  by  one  man.  7.  I  know  with  how  much 
danger  Liscus  informed  Caesar.  8.  The  people  were  so 
hindered  that  no  grain  was  collected  by  them.  9.  Then  at 
last  a  reply  was  made  (it  was  replied)  by  Caesar.  10.  A 
hundred  towns  were  taken  by  the  men  of  one  legion. 

18.     Caesar  hac  oratione  Lisci  Dumnorigem,  Diviciaci 
fratrem,  designari  sentiebat ;  sed,  quod  pltiribus  praesen- 

317.  pluribus  praesentibus:  (with)  too  many  present;  ablative  ab- 
solute. 


CHAPTER    XVIII  295 

tibus  eas  res  iaetari  nolebat,  celeriter  concilium  dimittit, 
Liscum  retinet.     Quaerit  ex  solo   ea  quae  in  conventu 
dixerat.     Dicit  liberius  atque  audacius.     Eadem  secreto  320 
ab   aliis  quaerit;    reperit  esse  vera:     Ipsum  esse  Dum- 
norlgem,   summa  audacia,  magna  apud  plebem  propter 
liberalitatem    gratia,    cupidum    rerum    novarum.     Com- 
pltires  annos  portoria  reliquaque  omnia  Aeduorum  vecti- 
galia  parvo  pretio  redempta  habere,  propterea  quod  illo  326 
licente  contra  liceri  audeat  nemo.    His  rebus  et  suam  rem 
familiarem  auxisse  et  facultates  ad  largiendum  magnas 
comparasse;    magnum   numerum   equitatus   suo   sumptu 
semper  alere  et  circum  se  habere;    neque  solum  domi, 
sed  etiam  apud  fmitimas  civitates  largiter  posse,  atque  sso 
huius  potentiae  causa  matrem  in  Biturigibus  homini  illic 
nobilissimo  ac  potentissimo  collocasse,  ipsum  ex  Helvetiis 

319.  quaerit:  he  asJcs  about,    solo:  supply  eo,  referring  to  Liseus. 

321.  (ea)  esse  vera:  that  (these  reports)  are  true,  (reperit)  ipsum 
esse  Dumnorigem,  etc.:  (he  discovers)  that  Bumnorix  is  the  very  man, 
etc. 

322,323.  audacia,  gratia:   see  §649. 

324.  annos:  see  §327. 

325.  parvo  pretio:  at  a  small  price;  ablative  of  price,  a  subdivision 
of  ablative  of  means,  redempta  habere:  had  bought  up;  compare  with 
habere  obstrictas,  §615,  Note  4.    iUo  licente:  ablative  absolute. 

326.  contra:  against  him.  audeat:  a  few  verbs  like  auded,  having 
no  perfect  stem,  use  passive  forms  for  tenses  of  completed  action. 
Such  verbs  are  called  semi-deponent.    See  App.  74. 

It  was  the  custom  of  the  Eomans  to  auction  off  the  right  to  collect 
the  taxes  of  the  provinces.  The  tax  collector  often  exacted  much 
more  than  the  legal  amount,  keeping  the  balance  for  himself, 

rebus:  see  §313.   et  .  .  .  et:  both  .  .  .  a7id. 

327.  auxisse  and  comparasse:  supply  se  (Dumnorix)  as  subject. 
329.  neque  =  et  non. 

331.  causa:  for  the  sal^e.  matrem  .  .  .  potentissimo:  translate  in 
the  following  order;  matrem  homini  in  (among)  Biturigibus  nobilis* 
simo  et  potentissimo  illic. 

332.  collocasse:  he  had  married  of.    ipsum:  i.  e.,  Dumnorix. 


296  BELLUM   HELVETICUM 

uxorem  habere,  sororem  ex  matre  et  propinquas  suas  nup- 
tum  in  alias  civitates  collocasse.    Favere  et  cupere  Helve- 

335  tils  propter  earn  affinitatem,  odisse  etiam  su5  nomine 
Caesarem  et  Romanos,  quod  eorum  adventu  potentia 
eius  deminiita  et  Diviciacus  frater  in  antiquum  locum 
gratiae  atque  honoris  sit  restitutus.  Si  quid  accidat 
Romanis,  summam  in  spem  per  Ilelvetios  regnl  obtinendl 

340  venire ;  imperio  populi  Romani  n5n  modo  de  regn5,  sed 
etiam  de  ea  quam  habeat  gratia  desperare.  Reperiebat 
etiam  in  quaerendo  Caesar,  quod  proelium  equestre  adver- 
sum  paueis  ante  diebus  esset  factum,  initium  fugae  factum 
a  Dumnorlge  atque  eius  equitibus  (nam  equitatui,  quem 

345  auxilio  Caesari  Aedui  miserant,  Dumnorix  praeerat)  ; 
eorum  fuga  reliquum  esse  equitatum  perterritum. 


333.  uxorem:  icJio  icas  she?  See  line  58.  ex  matre:  on  his  mother's 
side,  propinquas  suas:  his  female  relatives,  nuptum:  a  supine  with 
collocasse,  which  is  considered  here  as  a  verb  of  motion,  as  is  evident 
from  the  phrase  in  alias  civitates.  Translate:  he  had  married  of  his 
mother,  etc.,  into  other  states. 

334.  Helvetiis:    see  §529. 

335.  suo  nomine:  on  his  own  account  {name). 

337.  deminuta:  supply  sit. 

338.  quid:    the  indefinite  pronoun.     See  §571,  Note  5. 

339.  summam  .  .  .  venire:  he  {came  into)  entertained  the  highest 
hope,  etc.    regni  obtinendi:  see  §§499,  682. 

340.  imperio:  under  the  control;  see  §626,  Note  d. 

342.  quod  .  .  .  factum:  respecting  the  unfortunate  engagement  of 
cavalry  which  had  occurred  a  few  days  before.  For  a  description  of  this 
engagement,  see  Chap.  15. 

343.  ante:  an  adverb,    diebus:  see  §620. 
345.  auxilio:  see  §544. 


CHAPTER   XIX  297 

EXERCISES 

Eeview:     Ablative  of  Separation,  §609. 
Ablative  of  Cause,  §611. 
Conjugation  of  fero,  §714. 

1.  We  shall  ask  whether  they  are  going-to-carry  the  grain. 
2.  Dumnorix  was  very  powerful  because-of  his  property  and 
kindness.  3.  On  this  account  he  had  dared  to  speak  very 
freely  in  the  conference.  4.  No  one  desired  to  increase  the 
price  of  the  taxes.  5.  He  married  off  his  mother  and  sister 
according-to  his  own  will.  6.  Did  you  know  that  he  took  (as) 
wife  the  daughter  of  Orgetorix  from  the  Helvetians  ?  7,  When 
he  was  alone  in  the  council,  he  was  thoroughly  frightened.  8.  He 
will  always  favor  the  Helvetians  and  hate  the  Romans  be- 
cause-of that  cavalry  battle.  9.  The  grain  was  being  very 
quickly  collected  from  the  neighboring  states. 

19.  Quibus  rebus  cognitis,  cum  ad  has  suspiciones 
certissimae  res  accederent,  quod  per  fines  Sequanorum 
Helvetios  tradtixisset,  quod  obsides  inter  e5s  dandos 
curasset,  quod  ea  omnia  non  modo  iniussti  suo  et  civitatis  350 
sed  etiam  inscientibus  ipsTs  fecisset,  quod  a  magistratu 
Aeduorum  accusaretur,  satis  esse  causae  arbitrabatur  qua- 

347.  quibus:  how  translated  here?  cum  .  .  .  accederent:  since  the 
most  clearly  proven  facts  were  added  to  these  suspicions.  These  facts 
(res)  are  stated  in  the  following  quod  clauses. 

348.  accederent:  (ViteraWy,  went  in  addition  to) ;  freely,  were  added  to. 
quod:    the  fact  that. 

349.  traduxisset:  the  subject  is  Dumnorix;  for  mood,  see  §752. 
dandos  curasset:  compare  with  faciendum  curavit,  line  221.  e6s  = 
Helvetios  et  Sequanos. 

350.  iniussu  .  .  .  ipsis:  without  his  oicn  order  and  (that)  of  the 
state  but  also  without  their  (Caesar's  and  the  Aeduans')  Tcnowledge. 

351.  magistratii:  i.  e.,  Liscus. 

352.  satis  esse  causae:  that  it  was  a  sufficient  reason,  satis:  here 
used  as  a  noun,  the  subject  of  esse,  causae:  see  §491.  arbitrabatur: 
the  subject  is  Caesar. 


298  BELLUM   HELVETICUM 

re  in  eum  aut  ipse  animadverteret  aut  civitatem  animad- 
vertere  iuberet.  His  omnibus  rebus  unum  repugnabat, 
quod  Diviciaei  fratris  summum  in  populum  Romanum 
studium,  summam  in  se  voluntatem,  egregiam  fidem, 
itistitiam,  temperantiam  cognoverat;  nam  ne  eius  sup- 
plieio  Diviciaci  animum  offenderet  verebatur.  Itaque 
priusquam  quicquam  conaretur,  Diviciacum  ad  se  vocari 

360  iubet  et,  cotidianTs  interpretibus  remotis,  per  C.  Valerium 
Troucillum,  principem  Galliae  provinciae,  familiarem 
suum,  cui  summam  omnium  rerum  fidem  habebat,  cum  eo 
colloquitur;  simul  commonefacit  quae  ipso  praesente  in 
coneilio    de    Dumnorige    sint    dicta,    et    ostendit    quae 

365  separatim  quisque  de  eo  apud  se  dixerit.  Petit  atque 
hortatur  ut  sine  eius  offensione  animi  vel  ipse  de  eo 
causa  cognita  statuat  vel  civitatem  statuere  iubeat. 

353.  animadverteret:   see  §370. 

354.  rebus:  see  §529.  Ms  .  .  .  repugnabat:  one  consideration  offset 
all  these  facts. 

355.  quod  .  .  .  cognoverat:  explains  unum. 

357.  cognoverat:  (lie  had  learned) ,  he  Tcnew  (of),  ne  .  .  .  oflfenderet 
verebatur:  see  §430.  eius:  refers  to  Dumnorix  and  modifies  suppli- 
cium;  see  §499. 

358.  animum:  feelings. 

359.  conaretur:  priusquam  takes  the  subjunctive  when  the  sub- 
ordinate act  is  foreseen. 

360.  per  .  .  .  Troucillum:    modifies  colloquitur. 

361.  principem:  a  prominent  man.    Galliae:  appositive  to  pr5vinciae. 

362.  cui  .  .  .  habebat:  in  whom  he  had  the  greatest  confidence  in  all 
matters,    fidem  habebat  =  confidebat:    see  §529.    eo:    i  e.,  Diviciacus. 

363.  ipso:  i.  e.,  Diviciacus.  ipso  praesente:  compare  with  pliiribus 
praesentibus,  line  317. 

364.  sint  dicta,  dixerit:    see  §370. 

365.  eo:  i.  e.,  Dumnorix.     se:  i.  e.,  Caesar. 

366.  sine  eius  offensione  animi:  without  hurting  Ms  (Diviciacus*s) 
feelings,  ipse  de  e5  statuat:  that  he  (Caesar)  should  decide  about  him 
(Dumnorix) . 

367.  causa  cognita:  after  investigating  the  case,  statuat,  iubeat: 
see  §423,  2.     civitatem,  i.  e.,  of  the  Aeduans. 


CHAPTER   XX  299 

EXERCISES 

Eeview:     Ablative  of  Means,  §313. 

Ablative  with  Certain  Deponent  Verbs,  §635. 
Ablative  of  Description,  §649. 
Ablative  of  Specification,  §656. 
Ablative  Absolute,  §398. 
Participles,  §§388,390. 

1.  Dumnorix  was  using  the  cavalry  of  the  Aeduans  with- 
out their  knowledge.  2.  His  brother,  Diviciacus,  was  (a 
man)  of  eminent  justice.  3.  No  one  was  so  remarkable  in 
zeal  and  good  will.  4.  Having  learned  these  things,  Caesar 
urged  that  Diviciacus  call  his  brother  to  him.  5.  But 
Diviciacus  feared  that  he  would  be  unable  to  win  over 
Dumnorix  with  this  speech.  6.  To  his  brother,  whom  he 
was  going-to-defend,  he  sent  this  messenger.  7.  He  had  not 
dared  to  favor  these  men.  8.  Caesar  said  that  Dumnorix 
was  increasing  the  dangers  of  the  state  by  heavy  (great) 
taxes.  9.  He  did  not  attempt  to  do  anything  until  Dumnorix 
should  decide  (subj.)  about  his  brother.  10.  After  these 
things  were  done,  Caesar  returned  to  his  home. 

20.     Diviciacus   multis   cum   lacrimis    Caesarem   com- 
plexus    obsecrare    coepit    ne    quid    gravius    in    fratrem 
statueret :     Scire  se  ilia  esse  vera,  nee  quemquam  ex  eo  370 
plus  quam  se  doloris  capere,  .propterea  quod,  cum  ipse 

[Throughout  this  chapter  use  proper  names  in  place  of  pronouns 
wherever  the  meaning  would  not  otherwise  be  clear.] 

368.  multis  cum  lacrimis:  denotes  the  manner  of  obsecrare. 

369.  quid:  form  and  meaning?  see  §571,  Note  5.  gravius:  too  severe. 
in:  against. 

370.  ilia:  refers  to  the  charges  made  in  Chap.  19.  nee  quemquam: 
and  nohody.    ex  eo:    from  that  fact. 

371.  doloris:  modifies  plus;  see  §491.  propterea  quod:  connects 
crevisset  with  capere.  cum  connects  posset  with  crevisset.  se  (in  line 
370)  and  ipse  refer  to  Diviciacus. 


300  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

gratia  plurimum  domi  atque  in  reliqua  Gallia,  ille  mini- 
mum propter  adulescentiam  posset,  per  se  crevisset; 
quibus  opibus  ac  nervis  non  solum  ad  minuendam  gra- 

375  tiam,  sed  paene  ad  perniciem  suam  uteretur.  Sese  tamen 
et  amore  fraterno  et  existimatione  vulgi  commoverT. 
Quod  SI  quid  ei  a  Caesare  gravius  aceidisset,  cum  ipse 
eum  locum  amicitiae  apud  eum  teneret,  neminem  existi- 
mattirum  non  sua  voluntate  factum;   qua  ex  re  futurum 

880  uti  tdtlus  Galliae  animi  a  se  averterentur."  Haec  cum 
pluribus  verbis  flens  a  Caesare  peteret,  Caesar  eius  dex- 
tram  prendit;  consolatus  rogat  finem  orandi  faciat; 
tanti  eius  apud  se  gratiam  esse  ostendit  utI  et  rei  publicae 

372.  gratia:  see  §611.  plurimum:  modifies  posset.  Between  Gallia 
and  ille,  insert  et.  ille,  i.  e.,  Dumnorix.  minimum  posset:  had  very 
little  influence. 

373.  per  se  crevisset:  means  that  Dumnorix  had  gained  power 
through  Diviciacus. 

374.  opibus,  nervis:   see  §635. 

375.  suam:  refers  to  Diviciacus.    uteretur:  the  subject  is  Dumnorix. 

376.  et  .  .  .  et:   both  .  .  .  and. 

377.  si:  connects  aceidisset  with  existimaturum  (esse),  ei:  i.e., 
Dumnorix.    ipse:  i.  e.,  Diviciacus. 

378.  eum  locum:  such  a  position,    apud  eum:  with  him  (Caesar). 

379.  sua:  i.  e.,  Diviciacus.  voluntate:  see  §611.  futiirum  (esse) 
ula  .  .  .  averterentur:  the  result  would  he  that  the  sympathies,  etc., 
would  he  turned  from,  etc.  futiirum  esse  with  the  subjunctive  is  here 
used  for  the  future  passive  infinitive,  which  rarely  occurs.  The  same 
form  is  necessarily  used  when  the  given  verb  has  no  future  active 
participle. 

380.  averterentur:  see  §437.    cum:  while. 

381.  peteret:  see  §701. 

382.  rogat  .  .  .  faciat:  he  aslcs  him  to  malce,  etc.  The  substantive 
clause  of  purpose  without  an  introductory  ut  may  follow  verbs  of 
ashing,  urging,  and  desiring,  including  volo  and  its  compounds. 

383.  tanti  .  .  .  ostendit:  he  shows  that  his  (Diviciacus 's)  favor  with 
him  (Caesar)  is  of  so  great  value.  The  genitive  tanti  is  used  to  express 
indefinite  price  or  value. 


CHAPTER   XX  301 

initiriam  et  simm  dolorem  eius  voluntati  ac  precibus 
condonet.  Dumnorigem  ad  se  vocat,  fratrem  adhibet ;  385 
quae  in  eo  reprehendat  ostendit ;  quae  ipse  intellegat, 
quae  civitas  queratur,  pr5p6nit;  monet  ut  in  reliquum 
tempus  omnes  suspiciones  vTtet;  praeterita  se  Diviciaco 
fratri  condonare  dicit.  Dumnorigi  custodes  ponit,  ut 
quae  agat,  quibuscum  loquatur,  scire  possit.  ^90 

384,  suum:  i.e.,  Caesar's,  eius:  i.e.,  Diviciacus.  voluntati  ac  pre- 
cilDUs:  indirect  object  of  condonat:  literally,  he  freely  gives  the  wrong 
to  his  wish  and  entreaties;  freely,  he  yardons  the  wrong  at  his  wish  and 
entreaties. 

387.  in  reliquum  tempus:  for  the  future. 

388.  vitet:  see  note  on  faciat,  line  382.    praeterita:  the  past. 

389.  fratri:  for  {the  saTce  of)  his  brother.    Dumnorigi:  over  Dumnorix, 

EXERCISES 

Eeview:     Ablative  of  Comparison,  §618. 

Ablative  of  Measure  of  Difference,  §620. 
Comparison  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs, 
§§in,  566,  567,  573,  574,  575,  583,  589. 
Declension  of  Comparatives,  §§112,  576. 

1.  Dumnorix  wept  much  less  than  Diviciacus.  2.  Diviciacus 
especially  wished  Caesar  to  call  Dumnorix  to  him.  3.  I 
know  these  things  and  no  one  feels  (capio)  more  (of)  dis- 
tress than  I.  4.  You  are  using  this  power  for  the  sake 
(causa)  of  obtaining  royal  power.  5.  On  the  same  day  he 
talked  a  very  long  time  with  many  others.  6.  If  anything 
rather  severe  happens  (future  perfect)  to  him,  the  people 
will  think  I  did  it.  7.  For  this  reason  very  many  (of)  my 
friends  will  not  pardon  me.  8.  The  common  people  of  the 
state  had  not  dared  to  complain  very  much.  9.  Not  even 
Caesar  was  able  to  speak  more  freely  to  Dumnorix  than  to 
Diviciacus.  10.  Diviciacus  was  the  first  wath  whom  Caesar 
talked. 


302  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

21.  Eodem  die  ab  exploratdribus  certior  factus  hostea 
sub  monte  consedisse  milia  passuum  ab  ipslus  castris 
octo,  qualis  esset  natura  montis  et  qualis  in  circuitu 
ascensus     qui     cognoscerent     misit.       Renuntiatum     est 

395  facilem  esse.  De  tertia  vigilia  T.  Labienum,  legatum 
pro  praetore,  cum  duabus  legionibus  et  eis  ducibus  qui 
iter  cognoverant,  summum  iugum  montis  ascendere  iubet ; 
quid  sul  e5nsilil  sit  ostendit.  Ipse  de  quarta  vigilia 
eodem  itinere  quo  hostes  ierant  ad  eos  contendit  equi- 

400  tatumque  omnem  ante  se  mittit.  P.  Considius,  qui  rei 
mllitaris  perltissimus  habebatur  et  in  exercitu  L.  Sullae 
et  postea  in  M.  Crassi  fuerat,  cum  exploratoribus  prae- 
mittitur. 

391.  factus:  agrees  with  Caesar  (understood),  subject  of  misit. 
hostes  consedisse:  indirect  statement  with  certior  factus:  hemg  in- 
formed that  the  enemy  had  encamped  at  the  foot  of  the  mountain. 

392.  milia:  see  §288. 

393.  qualis  .  .  .  ascensus:  object  of  cognoscerent,  which  is  a  purpose 
clause  depending  on  misit:  he  sent  {men)  to  find  out  what  the  nature,  etc. 

395.  esse:  supply  ascensum  as  subject,  de:  (after  the  beginning  of ) , 
in,  Labienum:  subject  of  ascendere.  legatum  pro  praetore:  his  lieu- 
tenant-general; literally,  a  general  in  place  of  the  commander,  i.  e.,  with 
special  delegated  powers. 

396.  ducibus:  as  guides. 

398.  quid  sui  consilii  sit:  what  his  plan  is.  consilii:  see  §491.  sit: 
see  §370. 

399.  quo:  see  §313. 

400.  qui  .  .  .  habebatur:  who  was  regarded  as  very  sJcillful  in 
military  science. 

402.  Crassi:  supply  exercitu.  Both  in  reading  the  Latin  and  in 
translating  give  the  names  in  full. 


CHAPTER  XXII  303 

EXERCISES 

Eeview:     Genitive  with  Nouns,  §35. 
Objective  Genitive,  §499. 
Possessive  Genitive,  §489. 
Conjugation  of  void,  nolo,  maid,  §560. 

1.  Diviciacus's  love  for  his  brother  was  (for)  a  great 
help  to  Caesar.  2.  Caesar's  scouts  afterwards  learned 
what  the  character  of  the  mountain  was.  3.  One  wished  to 
report  that  the  road  was  very  easy,  but  the  other  was 
unwilling.  4.  They  prefer  not  to  hinder  Caesar's  plan. 
5.  The  Helvetians'  army  will  encamp  at  the  foot  of  the 
mountain.  6.  What-sort-of  an  army  can  Caesar  make  with 
these  legions?  7.  After  the  flight  of  the  enemy  was  seen 
(ablative  absolute),  Caesar  returned  to  Noreia.  8.  The  scouts 
informed  Caesar  that  the  beginning  of  the  flight  had  been 
made  by  Dumnorix.  9.  Considius  was  so  skillful  that  Caesar 
preferred  to  send  him  against  the  enemies'  forces.  10. 
Caesar  wanted  to  use  all  the  power  that  he  had. 

22.  Prima  luce,  cum  summus  mons  a  Labieno 
teneretur,  ipse  ab  hostium  castrTs  non  longius  mille  et  405 
quTngentls  passibus  abesset,  neque,  ut  postea  ex  captivis 
comperit,  aut  ipsius  adventus  aut  Labieni  cognitus  esset, 
Considius  equo  admisso  ad  eum  accurrit,  dicit  mon- 
tem  quem  a  Labieno  occupari  voluerit  ab  hostibus 
teneri ;  id  se  a  Gallicis  armis  atque  msignibus  cognovisse.  410 
Caesar  suas  copias  in  proximum  collem  subducit,  aciem 

404.  prima  luce:  at  daybreak,  cum  connects  teneretur,  abesset  and 
cognitus  esset  with  accurrit.  See  §701.  summus  mons:  the  summit  of 
the  mountain.  Adjectives  denoting  order  and  succession  are  used  in 
agreement  with  the  noun  to  designate  a  particular  part. 

405.  ipse:  i.e.,  Caesar. 

406.  passibus:  see  §618.  neque  ==  et  non,  the  non  modifying  cogni- 
tus esset. 


304  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

instruit.  Labienus,  ut  erat  el  praeceptum  a  Caesare  ne 
proelium  committeret,  nisi  ipsius  copiae  prope  hostium 
castra  visae  essent,  ut  undique  uno  tempore  in  hostes 

4i5impetus  fieret,  monte  occupatd  nostr5s  exspeetabat 
proelioque  abstinebat.  Mult5  denique  die  per  ex- 
ploratores  Caesar  cognovit  et  montem  a  suis  tenerl  et 
Helvetios  castra  movisse  et  Considium  timore  perterritum 
quod  non  vidisset  pro  viso  sibi  rentintiavisse.     Eo  die, 

42oqu6  consuerat  intervallo,  hostes  sequitur  et  milia  pas- 
suum  tria  ab  eorum  castrls  castra  ponit. 

412.  ut  erat  ei  praeceptum:  as  he  had  been  directed;  the  verb  is 
intransitive  and  so  used  impersonally  in  the  passive,  the  subject 
being  the  clause,  ne  committeret. 

413.  committeret:  see  §423,  3.   ipsius  =  Caesaris. 

415.  fieret:  see  §414.  exspeetabat  and  abstinebat:  note  the  tense. 
See  §161. 

416.  multo  die:  in  broad  day,  contrasted  with  prima  luce. 

417.  et  .  .  .  et  .  .  .  et:  in  translating,  omit  the  first. 

419.  quod  .  .  .  renuntiavisse:  had  reported  to  him  (for)  as  if  seen 
what  he  had  not  seen;  supply  id  as  the  antecedent  of  quod  and  object 
of  renuntiavisse.    viso:  a  participle  used  as  a  noun. 

420.  quo  consuerat  intervallo:  (at  which  interval  he  was  accustomed), 
at  the  usual  interval. 

EXERCISES 

Review:     Partitive  Genitive,  §491. 

Genitive  of  Description,  §649. 
Genitive  of  Measure,  §648,  Note  c. 

1.  I  will  tell  you  what  my  plan  is.  2.  He  sent  ahead 
Publius  Considius,  who  had  been  considered  rather  skillful. 
3.  It  was  said  that  Considius  was  too  desirous  of  making  an 
attack.  4.  Caesar  drew  up  a  battle  line  of  five  hundred 
soldiers.  5.  A  large  number  of  cavalrymen  was  sent  to  the 
hill  by  Labienus  to  make  an  attack.  6.  The  fear  of  Con- 
sidius for  the  enemy  was  finally  reported  to  Caesar.     7.  At 


CHAPTER   XXIII  305 

daybreak  two  thousand  horses  were  seen  near  the-top-of  the 
mountain.  8.  They  ran  from  place  to  place  and  finally 
returned  to  the  bank  of  the  river.  9.  A  battle  line  of  great 
length  had  been  seen  by  Considius.  10.  Considius  had  been 
considered  (a  man)  of  remarkable  bravery. 

23.  Postridie  eius  diei,  quod  omnino  biduum  supererat 
cum  exercitui  frumentum  metiri  oporteret,  et  quod  a 
Bibracte,  oppido  Aeduorum  longe  maximo  et  copiosis- 
sim5,  non  amplius  mllibus  passuum  xviii  aberat,  rel  425 
frumentariae  prospiciendum  existimavit;  itaque  iter 
ab  Helvetiis  avertit  ac  Bibracte  ire  contendit.  Ea  res 
per  fugitives  L.  AemiliT,  decurionis  equitum  Gallorum, 
hostibus  nuntiatur.  Helvetii,  seu  quod  timore  per- 
territos  Romanes  discedere  a  se  existimarent,  eo  magis  430 
quod  pridie  superioribus  locis  oecupatTs  proelium  non 
commlsissent,    sive    eo,   quod   re   frumentaria   intercltidl 

422.  diei:  see  §489. 

423.  cum  .  .  .  oporteret:  (when)  within  which  it  was  necessary  to 
measure  out  grain  to  the  army,  oporteret:  the  subject  is  frumentum 
metiri. 

425.  aberat:  the  subject  is  Caesar,  rei  .  .  .  prospiciendum:  the  verb 
is  intransitive  and  therefore  used  impersonally  in  the  passive;  (it 
must  he  provided  for  the  supplies),  that  he  must  provide  for  supplies. 
rei:  see  §537. 

427.  Bibracte:  see  §460. 

428.  fugitives  L.  Aemilii:  i.  e.,  those  that  had  been  members  of  his 
force.   Gallorum:  here  an  adjective. 

429.  quod  .  .  .  existimarent:  gives  the  first  reason  for  insequi 
coeperunt,  line  435. 

430.  eo  magis,  quod:  the  more  for  this  reason,  giving  the  reason  for 
existimarent.    See  §611. 

431.  superioribus  .  .  .  occupatis:  ablative  absolute,  denoting  eon- 
cession;  though  they  had  seised  the  higher  positions. 

432.  sive  eo:  or  for  this  reason,  quod  .  .  .  confiderent:  gives  the 
second  reason  for  insequi  coeperunt.  re  .  .  .  posse:  that  they  (the 
Romans)  could  he  cut  off  from  supplies  (at  Bibracte).   re  frumentaria: 


306  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

posse  confiderent,  commutato  consilio  atque  itinere  con- 
verso    nostros    a    novissimo    agmine    insequi    ac    laces- 
435  sere    coeperunt. 

EXERCISES 

Review:     Indirect  Object,  §53. 

Dative  with  Special  Verbs,  §529. 
Dative  with  Compound  Verbs,  §537. 
Conjugation  of  fio,  §633. 

1.  Caesar  turned  aside  iiis  line-of -march  (iter)  so  that  he 
might  seek  grain.  2.  He  started  out  for  Bibracte  because 
that  town  was  full  of  grain.  3.  Caesar  did  not  attack  the 
enemy  on  the  day  before,  because  he  had  trusted  Considius. 
4.  Caesar  thought  it  was  fitting  to  give  grain  to  his  (men) 
on  the  next  day.  5.  He  had  always  favored  the  plan  of 
starting  out  at  daybreak.  6.  Labienus  had  been  placed-in- 
command  of  the  rear  line.  7.  But  the  enemy  had  made  war 
upon  them  the  same  year.  8.  On  this  account  he  easily  per- 
suaded them  to  harass  (see  §423,  2)  our  (men)  on  the  rear. 
9.  Caesar's  army  did  not  have  enough  (of)  grain.  10.  A 
cavalry  attack  will  be  made  by  the  Helvetians. 

24.     Postquam  id  animum  advertit,  copias  suas  Caesar 

in  proximum  collem  subduxit  equitatumque  qui  sustineret 

hostium  impetum  misit.     Ipse  interim  in  colle  medio  tri- 

plicem  aeiem  mstruxit  legionum  quattuor  veteranarum;   in 

440  summo  iugo  duas  legiones  quas  in  Gallia  citeriore  pro- 

436.  advertit:  iurned  his  attention  to;  for  construction  of  animum 
and  id,  compare  that  of  partes  and  flumen,  §705,  Note  2. 

437.  qui  sustineret:  to  checJc.    See  §423, 1. 

438.  in  colle  medio:  midway  up  the  slope. 

439.  legionum:  see  §649. 

440.  legiones:  one  of  the  subjects  of  collocari,  line  441. 


CHAPTER   XXIV  307 

xime  conscrlpserat  et  omnia  auxilia  collocarT,  ac  totum 
montem  hominibus  complerT,  et  interea  sarcinas  in  tinum 
locum  conferri,  et  eum  ab  eis  qui  in  superiore  acie  con- 
stiterant  muniri  iussit.  Helvetil  cum  omnibus  suis  carrls 
sectiti  impedimenta  in  unum  locum  contulerunt ;  ipsT  445 
confertissima  acie,  reiecto  nostro  equitatu,  phalange  facta, 
sub  primam  nostram  aciem  successerunt. 

441-444.  collocari,  compleri,  conferri,  muniri:  all  depend  on  iussit. 
ac:  and  thus. 

442.  hominibus:  ablative  of  means;  see  §581,  Note  1. 

443.  eum:  supply  locum. 

444.  cum  .  .  .  cams:  not  only  the  fighting  men,  but  the  baggage 
and  the  women  and  children.  This  was  to  make  the  men  fight  more 
desperately. 

446.  acie:  see  §627. 

447.  sub  .  .  .  successerunt:  came  up  .  .  .  near  to. 


EXERCISES 

Review:     Dative  of  Agent,  §727. 
Dative  of  Purpose,  §544. 
Dative  with  Adjectives,  §546. 
Periphrastic  Conjugations,  §§721-725. 

1.  Caesar  thought  his  troops  ought-to-be-led  away.  2.  He 
was  going-to-draw  up  a  triple  line-of-battle  midway  up  the 
slope.  3.  When  he  had  filled  the  mountain  with  men,  he 
sent  soldiers  as  aid  to  the  four  legions.  4.  This  very  com- 
pact battle-line  was  a  (source  of)  hindrance  to  the  Helvetians. 
5.  The  baggage  had-to-be-carried  into  one  place  by  these 
legions.  6.  This  place  was  very  near  our  van  (first  line). 
7.  Our  cavalry  was  very  friendly  to  the  cavalry  of  the 
Gauls.  8.  The  mountain  on  which  the  battle  line  had  been 
drawn  up  was  an  excellent  place  for  a  conference.    9.  All 


308 


BELLUM    PIELVETICUM 


the  wagonu  had-to-be-brought  from  this  place  by  the  Helve- 
tians. 10,  Caesar  said  he  was  going-to-enroll  these  legions 
in  hither  Gaul. 


25.  Caesar  primum  su5,  deinde  omnium  ex  conspectu 
remotls  equTs,  ut  aequato  omnium  perlculo  spem  fugae 

450  tolleret,  cohortatus  suos  proelium  commTsit.  Milites  e 
loco  superiore  pilis  missis  facile  hostium  phalangem  per- 
fregerunt.  Ea  disiecta  gladiis  destrictis  in  eos  impetum 
fecerunt.  Gallis  magno  ad  pugnam  erat  impedimento 
quod,  pluribus  eorum  scutTs  uno  ictu  pilorum  transflxTs 

455  et   colligatis,   cum  ferrum   se  inflexisset,  neque  evellere 


448.  suo    (equo   remote) :    sending   away   his   own   horse,     omnium: 
refers  to  staff-officers  only.  /l 


449.  aequato 
means. 


.   .  periculo:    ablative   absolute  denoting 

450.  tolleret:  see  §414.  e  loco:  modifies 
missis. 

451.  pilis  missis:  ablative  absolute  de- 
noting means. 

452.  gladiis  destrictis:  with  drawn  swords, 

453.  fecerunt:  supply  nostri  as  subject. 
erat:  the  subject  is  the  following  quod 
clause.  Gallis  .  .  .  impedimento  quod:  it 
was  a  great  hindrance  to  the  Gauls  for 
fighting  that.  For  the  two  datives,  see  §544, 
543,  c. 

454.  pluribus  .  .  .  colligatis:  ablative 
absolute,  denoting  cause  and  modifying 
poterant;  inany  of  their  shields  having 
been  pierced  through  and  fastened  together 
by  one  blow  of  the  javelins,  ictu:'  ablative 
of  means,  modifying  transfixis  et  colligatis. 

455.  cum  .  .  .  inflexisset:  when  the  iron      |     \ 
GLADros              point   had   become    bent,     evellere:    supply     pila 

pilium  as  object,     evellere   and  pugnare:    complementary  infinitives^ 
depending  on  poterant:  supp'y  Galli  as  subject. 


CHAPTER  XXV  309 

neque  sinistra  impedlta  satis  commode  pugnare  poterant, 
multi  ut  diu  iactat5  bracchio  praeoptarent  scutum 
manu  emittere  et  nudo  corpore  pugnare.  Tandem  vul- 
neribus  defessi  et  pedem  referre  et,  quod  mons  aberat 
circiter  niTlle  passtis,  eo  se  recipere  coeperunt.  Capto  460 
monte  et  succedentibus  nostris,  Boi  et  Tulingi,  qui  homi- 
num  milibus  circiter  xv  agmen  hostium  claudebant  et 
novissimis  praesidio  erant,  ex  itinere  nostros  ab  latere 
aperto  aggressi  circumvenire,  et  id  conspicati  HelvetiT, 
qui  in  montem  sese  receperant,  rursus  instare  et  proe-  465 
lium  redintegrare  coeperunt.  R5mani  conversa  signa 
bipertito  intulerunt:  prima  et  secunda  acies,  ut  victis  ae 
submotis  resisteret;  tertia,  ut  venientes  sustineret. 

• 

457.  multi  ut  .  .  .  praeoptarent:  so  that  many  preferred.    See  §437, 

multi,  being  emphatic,  precedes  ut,  which  usually  stands  first  in  its 
clause. 

458.  manu:  see  §609.   nudo  corpore :  icitlihocly  unprotected.  See  §627. 

459.  aberat  .  .  .  passtis:  was  about  a  mile  distant. 

460.  mille:  an  adjective,  passus:  see  §?27.  capto  monte  et  suc- 
cedentibus nostris:  after  the  mountain  was  talen  and  while  our  men 
were  coming  up. 

463.  novissimis  praesidio:  a  protection  to  the  rear:  see  §§543,  c,  544. 

ex  itinere:  turning  aside  from  their  march. 

464.  aggressi:  modifies  Boi  et  Tulingi.  circumvenire:  depends  on 
coeperunt. 

466.  conversa  signa  intulerunt:  literally,  carried  forward  their 
reversed  standards;  freely,  wheeled  about  and  advanced. 

467.  acies:  supply  verb  from  intulerunt.  victis  ac  submotis:  the 
conquered  and  dislodged  (Helvetians).    See  §529. 

468.  ut  venientes  sustineret:  to  ivithstand  those  (the  Boii  and 
Tulingi)  who  were  advancing.  Observe  that  the  present  participle  is 
here  equivalent  to  a  relative  clause. 


310  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

EXERCISES 

Eeview:     Subject  Accusative,  §521. 
Infinitives,  §377. 
Declension  of  domus,  §458. 

1.  The  shield  and  javelin  were  chosen  by  the  Romans  (as) 
their  arms.  2.  Caesar  had  removed  from  sight  all  (of)  the 
horses.  3.  At  length  they  began  to  ask  (for)  the  aid  of 
Caesar.  4.  Did  the  first  line  try  to  resist  those  who  had 
gone  out  from  home?  5.  He  says  one  side  of  their  bodies 
was  covered  (compleo)  with  wounds.  6.  The  shields  which 
were  carried  in  one  hand  served-as  (were)  a  hindrance  for 
battle.  7.  He  said  he  would  follow  them  home  and  readily 
conquer  them.  8.  He  ordered  the  Gauls  to  remain  at  home 
and  not  to  complain.        • 

26.  Ita  ancipiti  proelio  diu  atque  acriter  pugnatum 
470  est.  Diutius  cum  sustinere  nostrorum  impetus  non  pos- 
sent,  alter!  se,  ut  coeperant,  in  montem  receperunt,  alter! 
ad  impedimenta  et  carros  suos  se  contulerunt.  Nam  hoc 
toto  proelio,  cum  ab  hora  septima  ad  vesperum  pugnatum 
sit,  aversum  hostem  videre  nemo  potuit.  Ad  multam 
475  noctem  etiam  ad  impedimenta  pugnatum  est,  propterea 
quod  pro  vallo  carros  obiecerant  et  e  loco  superiore  in 

469.  ancipiti  proelio:  in  a  double  {-headed)  tattle.  See  §313.  pug- 
natum est:   {it  icas  fought),  they  fought. 

470.  possent:  supply  as  subjects  Helvetii,  B6i,  Tulingi. 

471.  alter!  .  .  .  alter!:  the  one  party  (Helvetians)  .  .  .  the  other 
party  (Boii  and  Tulingi). 

473.  cum  pugnatum  sit:  although  they  fought,  hora  septima:  about 
one  o'clock  (reckoned  from  sunrise). 

474.  aversum:  {turned  away)  in  flight,  ad  multam  noctem:  till  late 
at  night. 

475.  etiam  ad:  close  to. 

476.  in  nostros  venientes:  upon  our  men  as  they  came  up. 


CHAPTER    XXVI  311 

nostros  venientes  tela  coniciebant,  et  nonnuUi  inter 
carros  raedasque  mataras  ac  tragulas  subiciebant  nos- 
trosque  vulnerabant.  Diu  cum  esset  pugnatum,  impedi- 
mentls  castrisque  nostri  potiti  sunt.  Ibi  Orgetorigis  480 
filia  atque  unus  e  flliis  captus  est.  Ex  eo  proelio  cir- 
eiter  hominum  milia  cxxx  superfuerunt  eaque  tota  nocte 
continenter  ierunt;  nullam  partem  noctis  itinere  inter- 
misso  in  fines  Lingonum  die  quarto  pervenerunt,  cum  et 
propter  vulnera  militum  et  propter  sepulttiram  occiso-  ^^ 
rum  nostri  triduum  morati  eos  sequi  non  potuissent. 
Caesar  ad  Lingones  litteras  nuntiosque  misit  ne  eos  fru- 
raento  neve  alia  re  iuvarent;  qui  si  itivissent,  se  eodem 
loco  quo  Ilelvetios  habiturum.  Ipse  triduo  intermisso 
cum  omnibus  copiis  eos  sequT  coepit.  ^^ 

477.  coniciebant:  note  the  imperfect  tenses  here  and  in  the  next 
line,  nonnulli  .  .  .  subiciebant:  some  among  the  carts  and  wagons 
were  casting  pikes  and  darts. 

479.  cum  essot  pugnatum:  when  they  had  fought;  see  §701. 
impedimentis:  see  §635. 

481.  atque:  and  aUo.  unus  e  filiis:  one  of  his  sons;  the  partitive 
genitive  might  have  been  used,  circiter:  an  adverb  modifying  the 
numeral  adjective. 

482.  ea  tota  nocte:  during  the  entire  night. 

483.  partem:  see  §327. 

483-486.  nullam  .  .  .  potuissent:  translate  in  the  following  order: 

Itinere  intermisso  nullam  partem  noctis,  pervenerunt  in  fines 
Lingonum  die  quarto,  cum  nostri  non  potuissent  sequi  eos,  morati 
triduum  et  propter  vulnera  militum  et  propter  sepulturam  occisorum. 

485.  occisorum:  of  (the)  slain. 

486.  triduum:  see  §327. 

487.  eos  =  Helvetios.  ne  .  .  .  habiturum:  this  is  all  indirect  state- 
ment quoting  the  purport  of  the  letter,  ne  .  .  .  iuvarent:  {ordering 
them)  not  to  help,  etc. 

488.  alia:  see  vocabulary,  qui  si:  for  if  they,  itivissent:  for  the 
future  perfect  indicative  of  the  direct  statement,  se  eodem  .  .  . 
habitiirum  (esse):  he  would  regard  them  in  the  same  position  as  (he 
regarded)  the  Helvetians. 


312  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

EXERCISES 

Review:     Complementary  Infinitive,  §508,  Note  h. 
Indirect  Discourse,  §§752,  753. 
Declension  of  Personal  Pronouns,  §552. 
Conjugation  of  possum,  §506. 

1.  You  will  be  able  to  help  me  within  an  hour.  2.  Caesar 
had  always  been  unwilling  to  delay  at  home  longer  than  one 
night.  3.  The  Helvetians  did  not  desire  to  receive  the 
attacks  of  Caesar's  troops  until  (ad)  evening.  4.  It  was 
reported  to  Caesar  that  you  had  fought  very  fiercely  in  a 
double  (-headed)  battle.  5.  I  said  I  would  be  friendly  to 
you  if  you  would  be  friendly  to  me.  6.  He  says  they  took 
Orgetorix's  son  and  daughter  who  were  in  the  camp.  7.  It 
is  said  that  the  Romans  are  not  able  to  follow  them  because 
about  a  hundred  soldiers  are  wounded.  8.  Caesar  said  he 
would  send  a  dispatch  and  message  to  the  Lingones,  if  they 
tried  to  help  the  Helvetians.  9.  I  replied  that  a  retreating 
(turned-away)  army  was  seen  by  no  one.  10.  After  this 
battle  the  Romans  got-possession-of  the  Gauls'  property. 

27.  Helvetii  omnium  rerum  inopia  adducti  legatos  de 
deditione  ad  eum  miserunt.  Qui  cum  eum  in  itinere 
convenissent  seque  ad  pedes  proiecissent  suppliciterque 
locuti  flentes  pacem  petissent,  atque  e5s  in  eo  loco  quo 
495  tum  essent  suum  adventum  exspectare  iussisset,  paru- 
erunt.  Eo  postquam  Caesar  pervenit,  obsides,  arma, 
servos  qui  ad  eos  perfugissent  poposcit.      Dum  ea  con- 


491.  remm:  see  §499. 

492.  qui    cum:    a^id   when    these    (ambassadors),     cum:    introduces 
convenissent,  proiecissent,  petissent  and  iussisset. 

494.  eos:  i.  e.,  the  Helvetians. 

495.  iussisset:  the  subject  is  Caesar. 


CHAPTER   XXVII  313 

quiruntur  et  conferuntur,  nocte  intermissa,  circiter  honii- 
num  milia  vi  eius  pagi  qui  Verbigenus  appellatur,  sive 
tiinore  perterriti  ne  armis  traditls  supplicio  afficerentur,  500 
sIve  spe  salutis  inducti,  quod  in  tauta  multitudirie  dedi- 
ticiorum  suam  fugam  aut  occultari  aut  omnino  ignorarl 
posse  existimarent,  prima  nocte  e  castrls  Ilelvetiorum 
egress!  ad  Rhenum  finesque  Germanorum  contenderunt. 

498-504.  circiter  hominuin  .  .  .  contenderunt:  alout  six  thousand 
men  .  .  .  either  overwhelmed  with  fear  lest,  after  their  arms  were  surren- 
dered, they  would  he  afflicted  with  punishment  or,  influenced  hy  a  hope 
of  safety,  because  in  so  great  a  number  of  prisoners  they  thought  their 
flight  would  either  be  concealed  or  entirely  unobserved,  after  going 
out  .  .  .  ,  hastened. 

499.  Verbigenus:  see  §85. 

500-505.  perterriti,  inducti,  egressi:  agree  with  the  subject  of 
contenderunt,  which  is  supplied  from  hominum. 

501.  quod,  etc.:  states  the  reason  for  spe  .  .  .  inducti. 

503.  prima  nocte:  in  the  first  part  of  the  night. 


EXERCISES 

Eeview:     Gerund,  §681. 

Gerundive,  §G82. 

Supine  in  -um,  §737. 

Five  ways  of  denoting  purpose,  §740. 

Declension  of  deus,  §715. 

1.  The  soldiers  were  sent  to  hunt  up  the  slaves.  {Translate 
in  five  ways.)  2.  The  Helvetians  obeyed  Caesar  because 
they  feared  him.  3.  Caesar  demanded  all  who  had  fled 
to  the  Helvetians.  4.  The  hope  of  safety  was  taken  away  by 
the  scarcity  of  grain.  5.  The  Helvetians  thought  that  the  gods 
were  a  help  to  the  Romans.  6.  Those  things  that  Caesar 
demanded  were  brought. because  of  their  fear  of  the  Romans. 


314  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

505  28.  Quod  ubi  Caesar  resciit,  quorum  per  fines  ierant, 
his  uti  conquTrerent  et  redticerent,  si  sibi  purgati  esse 
vellent,  imperavit;  reduetos  in  hostium  numero  habuit; 
reliquos  omnes  obsidibus,  armls,  perfugis  traditis  in 
deditionem   accepit.     Helvetios,   Tulingos,  Latobrigos  in 

510  fines  suos,  unde  erant  prof ecti,  reverti  iussit :  et,  quod 
omnibus  frugibus  amissTs  domi  nihil  erat  quo  famem 
tolerarent,  Allobrogibus  imperavit  ut  els  frumenti  copiam 
facerent;  ipsos  oppida  vieosque  quos  incenderant  resti- 
tuere   iussit.     Id   ea  maxime  ratione  fecit,   quod  noluit 

515  eum  locum  unde  Ilelvetii  discesserant  vacare,  ne  propter 
bonitatem  agrorum  German!,  qui  trans  Rhenum  incolunt, 
ex  suTs  finibus  in  Helvetiorum  fines  transTrent  et  fmitimi 
Galliae  provinciae  Allobrogibusque  essent.     Boios  peten- 

505.  quod:  and  .  .  .  this,  quorum:  the  antecedent  is  his,  the  in- 
direct object  of  imperavit. 

506.  uti  conquirerent  et  reducerent:  to  search  out  and  hring  hack 
(the  six  thousand  men  who  had  escaped),  uti:  how  distinguished  from 
the  present  infinitive  of  utor?  si  sibi  .  .  .  vellent:  if  they  wished  to 
he  hlameless  he  fore  him  (or  in  his  eyes).  The  dative  sibi  indicates  the 
person  in  reference  to  whom  the  statement  is  made. 

507.  reductds:  supply  eos;  render  by  a  temporal  clause,  after  they 
had  heen  hrought  hack,  in  .  .  .  habuit:  he  treated  them  as  enemies,  i.  e., 
he  put  them  to  death. 

508.  obsidibus  .  .  .  traditis:  after  the  hostages,  etc.,  had  heen  given  over. 

511.  omnibus  .  .  .  amissis:  noiv  that  all  the  produce  was  lost,  quo 
famem  tolerarent:  on  which  they  could  live. 

512.  ut  eis  .  .  .  facerent:  to  provide  them  (the  Helvetians,  etc.) 
with,  etc. 

513.  ips5s:  i.  e.,  the  Helvetians,  etc. 

514.  ea  ratione:  for  this  reason. 

515.  eum  locum:  the  subject  of  vacare. 

517.  suis  ==  Germanorum. 

518.  provinciae:  see  §546.  Boios  .  .  .  concessit:  translate  in  the 
following  order:  concessit  Aeduis  petentibus  ut  collocarent  Boios  in 
suis  finibus  quod  erant  cogniti  egregia  virtiite. 

B5ids  is  placed  first  for  emphasis. 


CHAPTER  XXIX  315 

tibus  Aeduis,  quod  egregia  virtute  erant  cognitT,  ut  in 
finibus    suTs    collocarent,    concessit ;    quibus    ill!    agros  ^20 
dederunt    quosque    postea    in    parem    iuris    libertatisque 
condicionem  atque  ipsi  erant  receperunt. 

519.  virtute:  see  §611. 

520.  concessit:  he  gave  permission,  quibus  and  quos:  i.  e.,  the  Boil; 
translate  by  demonstratives. 

521.  parem  .  .  .  atque  .  .  .  erant:  the  same  as  they  themselves  iccre  in. 

522.  atque  (ac)  generally  means  as  or  than  after  words  of  likeness 
and  comparison. 

EXERCISES 

Review:     Subjunctive  of  Result,  §437. 

Subjunctive  after  Verbs  of  Fearing,  §430, 
Sequence  of  Tenses,  §371. 
Questions,  Direct  and  Indirect,  §§3,68,370. 
Interrogative  Pronoun  and  Adjective,  §595. 
Possessive  Adjectives,  §553. 

1.  Their  hunger  has  very  recently  been  so  great  that  they 
are  not  able  to  fight.  2.  I  am  afraid  that  the  Helvetians 
have  lost  everything.  3.  They  feared  that  the  Romans 
w^ould  not  leave  them  anything.  4.  Were  not  the  Helve- 
tians equal  to  the  Romans  in  bravery?  5.  The  Helvetians 
were  not  equal  to  the  Romans,  were  they?  6.  Caesar  asked 
from  what  place  the  Tulingi  had  started  out.  7.  I  do  not 
remember  whether  the  Helvetians  got  back  their  property. 

8.  I  do  not  know  who  has  set-fire-to  my  home  and  yours. 

9.  The  Helvetians  were  so  cast  down  tliat  they  returned  to 
their  homes.  10.  Do  you  think  they  made  war  on  the 
Romans  afterward? 

29.  In  castrls  Helvetiorum  tabulae  repertae  sunt 
litterTs  Graecis  confectae  et  ad  Caesarem  relatae,  quibus 
in  tabulis  nominatim  ratio  c5nfecta  erat,  qui  numerus  ^^ 

524.  et:  connects  repertae  and  relatae.    quibus  in  tabulis:  in  which. 

525.  ratio  confecta  erat  qui:  a  list  had  been  made  up  (telling)  what. 


316  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

domo  exisset  eorum  qui  arma  ferre  possent,  et  item 
separatim  quot  pueri,  senes  mulieresque.  Summa  erat 
capitum  Helvetiorum  milium  cclxiii,  Tulingorum  milium 
XXXVI,  Latobrigorum  xiiii,  Rauracorum  xxiii,  Boiorum 
530  xxxii ;  ex  his,  qui  arma  ferre  possent,  ad  milia  nona- 
ginta  duo.  Summa  omnium  fuerunt  ad  milia  ccclxviii. 
Eorum  qui  domum  redierunt  censu  liabito,  ut  Caesar 
imperaverat,  repertus  est  numerus  milium  c  et  x. 

526.  eorum:  modifies  numerus. 

527.  summa  erat  capitum:  the  aggregate  of  persons  was. 

528.  milium:  genitive  of  measure. 

530.  ex  his:  supply  erant,  of  which  nonaginta  duo  is  subject. 

In  reading  the  numerals,  give  the  Latin  words  representing  them, 
instead  of  the  abbreviations:  CCLXIII,  ducenta  sexaginta  tria; 
XXXVI,  triginta  sex;  XIIII,  quattuordecim;  XXIII,  viginti  tria; 
XXXII,  triginta  duo;  CCCLXVIII,  trecenta  sexaginta  octo;  C  et  X, 
centum  et  decem.    See  App.  47  and  50. 

531.  ad:  about;  here  an  adverb  modifying  the  numeral  adjective. 
fuerunt:  agrees  with  the  plural  predicate. 

533.  milium:  see  §648,  c. 

EXERCISES 

Eeview:     Cum  Causal,  §694. 

Cum  Temporal,  §701. 
Quod,  quia,  quoniam,  §692. 
Numerals,  §708. 

1.  When  the  Helvetians  went  out  to  the  war,  there  were 
three  hundred  sixty  eight  thousand  men,  women,  and  chil- 
dren. 2.  When  they  had  returned,  there  were  one  hundred 
ten  thousand.  3.  All  these  persons  (caput)  had  been  lost 
because  (as  they  said)  Orgetorix  had  been  desirous  of 
royal  power.  4.  Since  the  Helvetians  had  a  narrow  terri- 
tory, they  desired  to  go  out  of  their  territory.  5.  But  they 
were  conquered  because  they  did  not  have  enough  (of)  men. 


C.  lULII   CAESARIS 
BELLI  GALLICI 

LIBEE  PEIMUS 
{The  first  three  chapters  are  given  in  simplified  form.) 

1.  Gallia  est  omnis  divlsa  in  partes  tres ;  iinam  partem 
incolunt  Belgae,  aliam  Aquitani,  tertiam  Celtae.  Nostra 
lingua  Celtas  Gallos  appellamus.  HI  omnes  lingua,  Insti- 
tutls,  legibus  differunt.  Gallos  ab  Aquitanis  Garumna 
flumen  dividit;  Gallos  a  Belgis  Matrona  et  Sequana  5 
dividit.  Horum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae,  prop- 
terea  quod  ab  humanitate  provinciae  longissime  absunt, 
et  non  saepe  mercatores  ad  eos  commeant  et  ea  quae 
animos  effeminant  important ;  et  proximi  sunt  Germanis, 
qui  trans  Khenum  incolunt,  quibuscum  continenter  bellum  lo 
gerunt.  Ob  earn  causam  Helvetii  quoque  reliquos  Gallos 
virtute  praecedunt,  quod  fere  cotldianTs  proeliTs  cum 
Germanis  contendunt,  cum  aut  suls  finibus  eos  prohibent, 
aut  in  Germanorum  finibus  bellum  gerunt.  Horum  om- 
nium una  pars,  quam  Galll  obtinent,  initium  capit  a  15 
fltimine  Rhojiano ;  continetur  Garumna  flumine,  Oceano, 
finibus  Belgarum ;  attingit  etiam  flumen  Rhenum ;  vergit 
ad  septentriones.  Belgae  ab  extremis  Galliae  finibus 
initium  capiunt ;  pertinent  ad  Inferiorem  partem  fluminis 
RhenI ;  spectant  in  septentriones  et  orientem  solem.  AquI-  20 
tania  a  Garumna  flumine  ad  Pyrenaeos  montes  et  eam 
partem  OceanI  quae  est  ad  Hispaniam  pertinet;  spectat 
inter  occidentem  solem  et  septentrionem. 

317 


318  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

2.  Apud  Helvetios   longe   nobilissimus   fuit   et   ditis- 
25  simus  Orgetorix.     Is,   regni   cupiditate  inductus,   coniti- 

rationem  nobilitatis  fecit,  et  civitati  persiiasit  ut  de 
finibus  suTs  cum  omnibus  copiis  exirent.  Orgetorix, 
** Facile  est,''  inquit,  *'quod  virtute  omnibus  praestamus, 
totius  Galliae  imperium  occupare."     Helvetils  persuasit 

80  quod  undique  loci  natura  continentur :  una  ex  parte 
fltimine  Rheno,  latissimo  atque  altissimo,  qui  agrum 
Ilelvetium  a  GermanT^  dividit;  altera  ex  parte  monte 
lura  altissimo,  qui  est  inter  Sequanos  et  Helvetios ;  tertia 
lacti  Lemanno  et  flumine  Rhodano,  qui  nostram  provin- 

35  ciam  ab  Helvetils  dividit.  Ob  eas  res  HelvetiT  et  minus 
late  errabant  et  minus  facile  cum  fmitimls  bellum  gere- 
bant.  Ob  earn  eausam  hi  homines,  qui  erant  belli  cupidi, 
magno  dolore  afficiebantur.  Pro  multitudine  autem 
hominum  et  pro  gloria  belli  atque  fortitudinis,  angustos 

40  fines,  ut  existimabant,  habebant,  qui  in  longitudinem 
milia  passuum  ducenta  et  quadraginta,  in  latitudinem 
centum  et  octoginta  patebant. 

3.  His  rebus  adducti  et  auctoritate  Orgetorigis  per- 
moti,  Helvetii  constituerunt  omnia  ad  profectionem  com- 

45  parare,  iumentorum  et  carrorum  quam  maximum  nume- 
rum  coemere,  sementes  quam  maximas  facere,  cum 
proximis  civitatibus  pacem  et  amicitiam  confirmare.  Ad 
eas  res  conficiendas  biennium  satis  esse  duxerunt ;  in  ter- 
tium  annum  profectionem  lege  confirmant.  Ad  eas  res  c5n- 

50  ficiendas  Orgetorix  deligitur.  Is  sibi  legationem  ad  civi- 
tdtes  suscipit.  In  eo  itinere  persuadet  Castico,  Cataman- 
taloedis  filio,  Sequano,  cuius  pater  regnum  in  Sequanis 
multos  annos  obtinuerat  et  a  senatii  populi  Eomani 
amicus  appellatus  erat,  ut  regnum  in  sua  civitate  occu- 

55  paret,  quod  pater  ante  habuerat ;  itemque  Dumnorigi 
Aeduo,  fratri  Diviciaci,  qui  ^6  tempore  principatum  in 


BOOK  ONE  319 

civitate  obtinebat  ac  maxime  plebi  acceptus  erat,  per- 
{juadet  ut  hoc  in  civitate  sua  faceret,  eique  filiam  suam 
in  matrimonium  dat.  Orgetorix,  "Facile  est,"  inquit, 
''conata  nostra  perficere,  propterea  quod  meae  cTvitatis  eo 
imperium  obtenturus  sum;  atque  Helvetil  potentissimi 
sunt  omnium  Gallorum ;  meis  copiis  meoque  exercitu 
vobis  regna  conciliabo."  Hac  oratione  adducti,  inter  se 
fidem  et  itis  iurandum  dant,  et,  regno  occupato,  per 
tres  potentissimos  ac  firmissimos  populos  totius  Galliae  65 
imperium  occupare  conantur. 

4.  Ea  res  est  Helvetiis  per  indicium  enuntiata.  Moribus 
suTs  Orgetorlgem  ex  vinculis  causam  dicere  coegerunt; 
damnatum  poenam  sequi  oportebat,  ut  ignl  cremaretur. 
Die  constituta  causae  dictionis  Orgetorix  ad  indicium  70 
omnem  suam  familiam,  ad  hominum  milia  decem,  undique 
coegit,  et  omnes  clientes  obaeratosque  suos,  qu5rum  mag- 
num numerum  liabebat,  eodem  conduxit;  per  eos,  ne 
causam  diceret,  se  eripuit.  Cum  civitas  ob  eam  rem 
incitata  armis  ius  suum  exsequi  conaretur,  multitudi-  75 
nemque  hominum  ex  agris  magistratus  cogerent,  Orgeto- 
rix mortuus  est;  neque  abest  suspicio,  ut  Helvetil  arbi- 
trantur,  quin  ipse  sibi  mortem  cunsciverit. 

5.  Post  eius  mortem  nihilo  minus  Helvetil  id  quod 
constituerant  facere  conantur,  ut  e  finibus  suTs  exeant.  go 
Ubi  iam  se  ad  eam  rem  paratos  esse  arbitrati  sunt,  oppida 
sua  omnia,  numero  ad  duodecim,  vicos  ad  quadringentos, 
reliqua  privata  aedificia  incendunt ;  frumentum  omne, 
praeter  quod  secum  portaturi  erant,  combtirunt,  ut, 
domum  reditionis  spe  sublata,  paratiores  ad  omnia  85 
pericula  subeunda  essent;  trium  mensium  molita  cibaria 
sibi  quemque  domo  efferre  iubent.  Persuadent  RauracTs 
et  TulingTs  et  LatobrigTs,  fmitimis,  uti  eodem  usi  con- 
silio,  oppidis  suTs  vTcTsque  exustis,  una  cum  els  profici- 


320  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

90  scantur ;  Boiosque,  qui  trans  Rhenum  incoluerant  et  in 
agrum  Noricum  transierant  >l5reiamque  oppugnarant, 
receptos  ad  se  socios  sibi  adsciscunt. 

6.  Erant  omnino  itinera  duo  quibus  itineribus  domo 
exire  possent:  unum  per  Sequan5s,  angustum  et  difficile, 
95  inter  montem  luram  et  flumen  Rhodanum,  vix  qua  singuli 
carri  ducerentur;  mons  autem  altissimus  impendebat, 
ut  facile  perpauci  prohibere  possent :  alterum  per  provin- 
ciam  nostram,  multo  facilius  atque  expedltius,  propterea 
quod  inter  fines  Helvetiorum  et  Allobrogum,  qui  nuper 

100  pacati  erant,  Rhodanus  fluit  isque  nonnullis  locis  vado 
transitur.  Extremum  oppidum  Allobrogum  est  proxi- 
mumque  Helvetiorum  finibus  Genava.  Ex  eo  oppido 
pons  ad  Helvetios  pertinet.  Allobrogibus  sese  vel  per- 
suasuros,  quod  n5ndum  bono  animo  in  populum  Roma- 

105  num  viderentur,  exTstimabant  vel  vi  coacturos  ut  per 
suos  fines  eos  Ire  paterentur.  Omnibus  rebus  ad  profec- 
tionem  comparatis,  diem  dicunt  qua  die  ad  ripam  Rhodani 
omnes  conveniant.  Is  dies  erat  a.  d.  V.  Kal.  Apr.,  L. 
Pisone,  A.  Gablnio  consulibus. 

110  7.  Caesarl  cum  id  nuntiatum  esset,  eos  per  provin- 
ciam  nostram  iter  facere  conari,  maturat  ab  urbe  pro- 
ficlsci,  et  quam  maximis  potest  itineribus  in  Galliam 
ulteriorem  contendit  et  ad  Genavam  pervenit.  Provin- 
ciae  toti  quam  maximum  potest  militum  numerum  im- 

115  perat  (erat  omnino  in  Gallia  ulteriore  legio  una),  pontem 
qui  erat  ad  Genavam  iubet  rescindl.  Ubi  de  eius  adventti 
Helvetii  certiores  fact!  sunt,  legat5s  ad  eum  mittunt, 
nobilissimds  eivitatis,  cuius  legationis  Nammeius  et 
Verucloetius   principem   locum   obtinebant,   qui   dicerent 

120  sibi  esse  in  animo  sine  iillo  malefici5  iter  per  provinciam 
facere,  propterea  quod  aliud  iter  haberent  nullum: 
rogare  ut  eius  voluntate  id  sibi  facere  liceat.     Caesar, 


BOOK  ONE  321 

quod  memoria  tenebat  L.  Cassium  consulem  occlsum 
exercitumque  eius  ab  Helvetiis  pulsum  et  sub  iugum  mis- 
sum,  concedendum  non  putabat ;  neque  homines  inimico  125 
animo,  data  facultate  per  provinciam  itineris  faciendi, 
temperatures  ab  iniuria  et  maleficio  exTstimabat.  Tamen, 
ut  spatium  intercedere  posset,  dum  milites  quos  im- 
peraverat  convenirent,  legatis  respondit  diem  se  ad 
deliberandum  sumpttirum :  si  quid  vellent,  ad  Id.  Apr.  i30 
reverterentur. 

8.  Interea  ea  legione  quam  secum  habebat  militi- 
busque  qui  ex  provincia  convenerant,  a  lacu  Lemanno, 
qui  in  fltimen  Rhodanum  influit,  ad  montem  luram,  qui 
fines  Sequanorum  ab  Helvetiis  dividit,  milia  passuum  xviiii  135 
tnurum  in  altitiidinem  pedum  sedecim  fossamque  perdiicit. 
Eo  opere  perfecto  praesidia  disponit,  castella  communit, 
quo  facilius,  si  se  invito  transire  c5nentur,  prohibere 
possit.    Ubi  ea  dies  quam  constituerat  cum  legatis  venit 

et  legati  ad  eum  reverterunt,  negat  se  more  et  exempl5  140 
populi  Romani  posse  iter  ulli  per  provinciam  dare;  et, 
si  vim  facere  conentur,  prohibitiirum  ostendit.  Helvetii 
ea  spe  deiecti,  navibus  itinctis  ratibusque  compliiribus 
factis,  alii  vadis  Rhodani,  qua  minima  altitude  fliiminis 
erat,  nonnumquam  interdiu,  saepius  noctii,  si  perrumpere  145 
possent  conati,  operis  miinitione  et  militum  concursii  et 
telis  repulsi,  hoc  conatii  destiterunt. 

9.  Reliniquebatur  una  per  Sequanos  via,  qua  Sequanis 
invitis  propter  angustias  ire  non  poterant.  His  cum 
sua  sponte  persuadere  n5n  possent,  legatos  ad  Dum- 150 
norigem  Aeduum  mittunt,  ut  eo  deprecatore  a  Sequanis 
impetrarent,  Dumnorix  gratia  et  largitione  apud  Sequa- 
nos plurimum  poterat,  et  Helvetiis  erat  amicus  quod  ex 
ea  civitate  Orgetorigis  filiam  in  matrimonium  dtixerat; 

et   cupiditate   regni    adductus   novis   rebus   studebat   et  155 


322  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

quam  plurimas  civitates  suo  beneficio  habere  obstrictas 
volebat.  Itaque  rem  suscipit  et  a  Sequams  impetrat  ut 
per  fines  suos  Helvetios  Tre  patiantur,  obsidesqiie  uti 
inter  se  dent  perficit:  Sequani,  ne  itinere  Helvetios  pro- 
160  hibeant ;   Helvetii,  ut  sine  maleficio  et  initiria  transeant. 

10,  Caesari  ntintiatur  Helvetiis  esse  in  animo  per 
agrum  Sequanorum  et  Aeduorum  iter  in  Santonum  fines 
facere,  qui  non  longe  a  Tolosatium  finibus  absunt,  quae 
civitas  est  in  provincia.     Id  sT  fieret,  intellegebat  magno 

165  cum  perlculo  provinciae  futurum  ut  homines  bellicosos, 
populT  Roman!  inimicos,  locis  patentibus  maximeque 
frumentariis  finitimos  haberet.  Ob  eas  causas  ei 
munltioni  quam  fecerat  T.  Labienum  legatum  prae- 
ficit;      ipse     in     Italiam     magnis     itineribus     contendit 

170  duasque  ibi  legiones  conscribit,  et  tres,  quae  circum 
Aquileiam  hiemabant,  ex  hibernis  educit,  et,  qua  proxi- 
mum  iter  in  ulteriorem  Galliam  per  Alpes  erat,  cum  his 
quinque  legionibus  Tre  contendit.  Ibi  Ceutrones  et 
Graiocell     et     Caturiges     locis     superioribus     occupatis 

175  itinere  exercitum  prohibere  conantur.  Compltiribus  his 
proeliis  pulsis,  ab  Ocelo,  quod  est  oppidum  citerioris 
provinciae  extremum,  in  fines  Vocontiorum  ulterioris 
provinciae  die  septimo  pervenit;  inde  in  Allobrogum 
fines,    ab   Allobrogibus   in   Segusiavos    exercitum    ducit. 

180  Hi  sunt  extra  provinciam  trans  Rhodanum  primi. 

11.  Helvetii  iam  per  angustias  et  fines  Sequanorum 
suas  copias  tradtixerant  et  in  Aeduorum  fines  per- 
venerant  eorumque  agros  populabantur,  Aedui,  cum  se 
suaque     ab     eis     defendere    non    possent,    legatos    ad 

185  Caesarem  mittunt  rogatum  auxilium :  Ita  se  omni  tem- 
pore de  populo  Romano  meritos  esse  ut  paene  in  con- 
spectu  exercitus  nostri  agri  vastari,  liberi  in  servittitem 
abduci,  oppida  expugnari  non  debuerint.     Eodem  tern- 


BOOK   ONE  323 

pore  Ambarri,  necessarii  et  consanguinei  Aeduorum, 
Caesarem  certiorem  faciunt  sese  depopulatis  agris  non  190 
facile  ab  oppidTs  vim  hostium  prohibere.  Item  Allobroges, 
qui  trans  Rhodanum  vic5s  possessionesque  habebant,  fuga 
se  ad  Caesarem  recipiunt  et  demonstrant  sibi  praeter 
agri  solum  nihil  esse  reliqui.  Quibus  rebus  adductus 
Caesar  non  exspectandum  sibi  statuit  dum,  omnibus  195 
fortHnls  sociorum  eonsumptis,  in  Santonos  Helvetii 
pervenirent. 

12.  Flumen  est  Arar,  quod  per  fines  Aeduorum  et 
Sequanorum  in  Rhodanum  influit  incredibili  lenitate  ita 
ut  oculis  in  utram  partem  fluat  iudicari  non  possit.  Id  200 
Helvetii  ratibus  ac  lintribus  iunctis  transTbant.  Ubi  per 
exploratores  Caesar  certior  factus  est  tres  iam  partes 
copiarum  Helvetios  id  flumen  traduxisse,  quartam  fere 
partem  citra  flumen  Ararim  reliquam  esse,  de  tertia 
vigilia  cum  legidnibus  tribus  e  castrls  profectus  ad  eam  205 
partem  pervenit  quae  nondum  flumen  transierat.  Eos 
impeditos  et  inoplnantes  aggressus  magnam  partem 
eorum  concidit;  reliqui  sese  fugae  mandarunt  atque  in 
proximas  silvas  abdiderunt.  Is  pagus  appellabatur 
Tigurinus ;  nam  omnis  civitas  Helvetia  in  quattuor  210 
pagos  divisa  est.  Hic  pagus  unus,  cum  domo  exisset 
patrum  nostrorum  memoria,  L.  Cassium  consulem  inter- 
fecerat  et  eius  exercitum  sub  iugum  miserat.  Ita  sive 
casu  sive  consilio  deorum  immortalium,  quae  pars  cTvitatis 
Helvetiae  msignem  calamitatem  populo  Romano  intulerat,  215 
ea  prmceps  poenas  persolvit.  Qua  in  re  Caesar  non  solum 
piiblicas  sed  etiam  privatas  iniurias  ultus  est,  quod  eius 
soceri  L.  Pisonis  avum,  L.  Pisonem  legatum,  Tigurmi 
eodem  proelio  quo  Cassium  interfecerant. 

13.  H5c  proelio  facto,  reliquas  copias  Helvetiorum  ut  220 
consequi  posset,  pontem  in  Arari  faciendum  curat  atque 


324  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

ita  exercitum  traducit.  Helvetii  repentino  eius  adventu 
commotl,  cum  id  quod  ipsi  diebus  xx  aegerrime  con- 
fee  erant,   ut  flumen  translrent,    ilium    un5    die    fecisse 

225  intellegerent,  legatos  ad  eum  mittunt;  cuius  legationis 
Divico  princeps  fuit,  qui  bello  Cassiano  dux  Ilelvetiorum 
fuerat.  Is  ita  cum  Caesare  egit:  Si  pacem  populus 
Romanus  cum  Helvetils  faceret,  in  eam  partem  ituros 
atque  ibi  futuros  Helvetios  ubi  eos  Caesar  constituisset 

230  atque  esse  voluisset ;  sin  bello  persequi  perseveraret, 
reminisceretur  et  veteris  incommodi  populT  Roman!  et 
pristinae  virtutis  Helvetiorum.  Quod  improviso  unum 
pagum  adortus  esset,  cum  ei  qui  flumen  transissent  suis 
auxilium    ferre    non    possent,  ne  ob  eam  rem  aut  suae 

235  magnopere  virtuti  tribueret  aut  ipsos  despiceret ;  se  ita 
a  patribus  maioribusque  suis  didicisse  ut  magis  virtute 
contenderent  quam  dolo  aut  insidiis  niterentur.  Quare 
ne  committeret  ut  is  locus  ubi  constitissent  ex  calamitate 
populi  Roman!  et  internecione  exercittis  nomen  caperet 

240  aut  memoriam  proderet. 

14.     His  Caesar  ita  respondit:     Eo  sibi  minus  dubita-_ 
tionis  dar!,  quod  eas  res  quas  legat!Helveti!  commemoras- 
sent  memoria  teneret,  atque  eo  gravius  ferre  quo  minus 
merito  popul!  Roman!  accidissent ;  qui  s!  alicuius  iniuriae 

245  sibi  conscius  fuisset,  non  fuisse  difficile  cavere ;  sed  eo 
deceptum,  quod  neque  commissum  a  se  intellegeret 
quare  timeret,  neque  sine  causa  timendum  putaret. 
Quod  SI  veteris  contumeliae  oblivisci  vellet,  num  etiam 
recentium  iniuriarum,  quod  eo  invito  iter  per  provinciam 

250  per  vim  temptassent,  quod  Aeduos,  quod  Ambarros,  quod 
AUobroges  vexassent,  memoriam  deponere  posse?  Quod 
sua  victoria  tam  Insolenter  gloriarentur,  quodque  tam 
diu  se  impune  initirias  intulisse  admlrarentur,  e5dem 
pertinere.     Consuesse  enim  de5s  immortales,  qu5  gravius 


BOOK   ONE  325 

homines  ex  commutatione  rerum  doleant,  quos  pro  255 
scelere  eorum  ulcisci  velint,  his  secundiores  interdum  res 
et  dititurniorem  impunitatem  concedere.  Cum  ea  ita  sint, 
tamen,  si  obsides  ab  eis  sibi  dentur,  uti  ea  quae  pollice- 
antur  facturos  intellegat,  et  si  Aeduis  de  iniurils  quas 
ipsis  sociisque  eorum  intulerint,  item  si  Allobrogibus  260 
satisfaciant,  sese  cum  eis  pacem  esse  faeturum.  Divico 
respondit:  Ita  Helvetios  a  maioribus  suls  mstitutos  esse 
uti  obsides  accipere,  non  dare,  consuerint ;  eius  rei  popu- 
lum  Romanum  esse  testem.    Hoc  response  dato  discessit. 

15.  Postero  die  castra  ex  eo  loco  movent.  Idem  facit  265 
Caesar  equitatumque  omnem,  ad  numerum  quattuor 
milium,  quem  ex  omni  provincia  et  Aeduis  atque  eorum 
sociis  coactum  habebat,  praemittit  qui  videant  quas  in 
partes  hostes  iter  faciant.  Qui  cupidius  novissimum 
agmen  insectiti  alieno  loco  cum  equitatu  Helvetiorum  270 
proelium  committunt;  et  pauci  de  nostrls  cadunt.  Quo 
proelio  sublati  Helvetii,  quod  quingentls  equitibus  tan- 
tam  multitudinem  equitum  propulerant,  audacius  sub- 
sistere  nonnumquam  et  novissimo  agmine  proelio  nostros 
lacessere  coeperunt.  Caesar  suos  a  proelio  continebat  275 
ac  satis  habebat  in  praesentia  hostem  rapinis,  pabula- 
tionibus,  populationibusque  prohibere.  Ita  dies  circiter 
quindecim  iter  fecerunt,  uti  inter  novissimum  hostium 
agmen  et  nostrum  primum  non  amplius  quinls  aut  senis 
mllibus  passuum  interesset.  28O 

16.  Interim  cotidie  Caesar  Aeduos  frumentum  quod 
essent  publice  polliciti  flagitare.  Nam  propter  frigora, 
quod  Gallia  sub  septentrionibus,  ut  ante  dictum  est, 
posita  est,  non  modo  frumenta  in  agris  matura  non  erant, 
sed  ne  pabuli  quidem  satis  magna  copia  suppetebat ;  eo  285 
autem  frumento  quod  flumine  Arari  navibus  subvexerat 
propterea  uti  minus  poterat,  quod  iter  ab  Arari  Helvetii 


326  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

averterant,  a  quibus  discedere  nolebat.  Diem  ex  die 
dtieere  Aedui;    conferri,  comportari,  adesse  dicere.    Ubi 

290  se  diutius  duel  intellexit  et  diem  instare  quo  die  fru- 
mentum  militibus  metiri  oporteret,  convocatis  eorum 
principibus,  quorum  magnam  copiam  in  castris  habebat, 
in  his  Diviciaco  et  Lisco,  qui  summo  magistratui  praeerat, 
quern  vergobretum  appellant  Aedui,  qui  creatur  annuus 

295  et  vitae  necisque  in  suos  habet  potestatem,  graviter  eos 
accusat,  quod,  cum  neque  em!  neque  ex  agrls  sum!  possit, 
tam  necessario  tempore,  tam  propinquls  hostibus,  ab  els 
non  sublevetur;  praesertim  cum  magna  ex  parte  e5rum 
precibus  adductus  bellum  susceperit,  multo  etiam  gravius 

800  quod  sit  destitutus  queritur. 

17.  Tum  demum  Liscus  oratione  Caesaris  adductus 
quod  antea  tacuerat  proponit:  Esse  nonnullos  quorum 
auctoritas  apud  plebem  plurimum  valeat,  qui  privatim 
plus  possint  quam  ipsi  magistratus.    Hos  seditiosa  atque 

805  improba  oratione  multittidinem  deterrere  ne  frumentum 
conferant  quod  debeant:  praestare,  si  iam  principatum 
Galliae  obtinere  non  possint,  Gallorum  quam  Romanorum 
imperia  perferre;  neque  dubitare  quin,  si  Helvetios 
superaverint   RomanI,    una    cum   reliqua    Gallia   Aeduls 

810  libertatem  sint  erepturl.  Ab  elsdem  nostra  consilia 
quaeque  in  castris  gerantur  hostibus  enuntiarl;  hos  a 
se  coercerl  non  posse.  QuIn  etiam,  quod  necessariam  rem 
coactus  Caesarl  enuntiarit,  intellegere  sese  quanto  id  cum 
perlculo  fecerit,  et  ob   cam  causam  quam  diu  potuerit 

815  tacuisse. 

18.  Caesar  hac  oratione  LiscI  Dumnorlgem,  Dlviciaci 
fratrem,  designarl  sentiebat;  sed,  quod  pluribus  praesen- 
tibus  eas  res  iactarl  nolebat,  celeriter  concilium  dimittit, 
Liscum  retinet.     Quaerit  ex  solo   ea  quae  in  conventu 

aaodixerat.     Dicit  llberius  atque  audacius.     Eadem  secreto 


BOOK  ONE  327 

ab  alils  quaerit;  reperit  esse  vera:  Ipsum  esse  Dum- 
norigem,  summa  audacia,  magna  apud  plebem  propter 
liberalitatem  gratia,  cupidum  rerum  novarum.  Com- 
pltires  annos  port5ria  reliquaque  omnia  Aeduorum  vecti- 
galia  parvo  preti5  redempta  habere,  propterea  quod  1116  325 
licente  contra  licerl  audeat  nemo.  His  rebus  et  suam  rem 
familiarem  auxisse  et  facultates  ad  largiendum  magnas 
comparasse;  magnum  numerum  equitatus  suo  sumptu 
semper  alere  et  circum  se  habere;  neque  solum  domi, 
sed  etiam  apud  finitimas  civitates  largiter  posse,  atque  330 
huius  potentiae  causa  matrem  in  Biturigibus  homini  illic 
nobilissimo  ac  potentissimo  collocasse,  ipsum  ex  Helvetiis 
uxorem  habere,  sororem  ex  matre  et  propinquas  suas  nup- 
tum  in  alias  civitates  collocasse.  Favere  et  cupere  Helve- 
tils  propter  eam  affinitatem,  odisse  etiam  suo  nomine  335 
Caesarem  et  Romanos,  quod  eorum  adventu  potentia 
eius  deminuta  et  Diviciacus  frater  in  antiquum  locum 
gratiae  atque  honoris  sit  restitutus.  Si  quid  accidat 
Romanis,  summam  in  spem  per  Helvetios  regni  obtinendi 
venire ;  imperio  populi  Roman!  non  modo  de  regno,  sed  340 
etiam  de  ea  quam  habeat  gratia  desperare.  Reperiebat 
etiam  in  quaerendo  Caesar,  quod  proelium  equestre  adver- 
sum  panels  ante  diebus  esset  factum,  initium  fugae  factum 
a  Dumnorige  atque  eius  equitibus  (nam  equitatuT,  quern 
auxilio  Caesari  Aedui  miser  ant,  DumnorTx  praeerat) ;  345 
eorum  fuga  reliquum  esse  equitatum  perterritum. 

19.  Quibus  rebus  cognitis,  cum  ad  has  suspiciones 
certissimae  res  accederent,  quod  per  fines  Sequanorum 
Helvetios  tradtixisset,  quod  obsides  inter  eos  dandos 
ctirasset,  quod  ea  omnia  non  modo  iniussu  suo  et  civitatis  350 
sed  etiam  Inscientibus  ipsTs  fecisset,  quod  a  magistratu 
Aeduorum  accusaretur,  satis  esse  causae  arbitrabatur  qua- 
re  in  eum  aut  ipse  animadverteret  aut  civitatem  animad- 


328  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

vertere  iuberet.     His  omnibus  rebus  unum  repugnabat, 

355  quod  Diviciaci   fratris   summum   in  populum  Romanum 

studium,    summam    in    se    voluntatem,    egregiam    fidem, 

iustitiam,  temperantiam  cognoverat;  nam  ne   eius   sup- 

plicio    Diviciaci    animum    offenderet   verebatur.     Itaque 

priusquam  quicquam  conaretur,  Diviciacum  ad  se  vocari 

360  iubet  et,  cotidianis  interpretibus  remotis,  per  C.  Valerium 

Troucillum,    principem    Galliae    provinciae,    familiarem 

suum,  cui  summam  omnium  rerum  fidem  habebat,  cum  eo 

colloquitur;    simul  commonefacit  quae  ipso  praesente  in 

concilio    de    Dumnorige    sint    dicta,    et    ostendit    quae 

365  separatim  quisque  de  eo  apud  se  dixerit.     Petit  atque 

hortatur  ut   sine   eius   offensione   animi   vel  ipse   de   eo 

causa  cognita  statuat  vel  civitatem  statuere  iubeat. 

20.  Diviciacus  multis  cum  lacrimis  Caesarem  com- 
plexus    obsecrare    coepit    ne    quid    gravius    in    fratrem 

370  statueret :  Scire  se  ilia  esse  vera,  nee  quemquam  ex  eo 
plus  quam  se  doloris  capere,  propterea  quod,  cum  ipse 
gratia  plurimum  domi  atque  in  reliqua  Gallia,  ille  mini- 
mum propter  adulescentiam  posset,  per  se  crevisset; 
quibus  opibus  ac  nervis  non  solum  ad  minuendam  gra- 

375  tiam,  sed  paene  ad  perniciem  suam  uteretur.  Sese  tamen 
et  amore  fraterno  et  exTstimati5ne  vulgT  commoverT. 
Quod  SI  quid  ei  a  Caesare  gravius  accidisset,  cum  ipse 
eum  locum  amicitiae  apud  eum  teneret,  neminem  existi- 
maturum  non  sua  voluntate  factum;   qua  ex  re  futurum 

380  uti  totlus  Galliae  animi  a  se  averterentur.  Haec  cum 
pluribus  verbis  flens  a  Caesare  peteret,  Caesar  eius  dex- 
tram  prendit;  consolatus  rogat  flnem  orandi  faciat; 
tanti  eius  apud  se  gratiam  esse  ostendit  uti  et  rei  publicae 
iniuriam   et   suum   dolorem   eius   voluntatT   ac  precibus 

385  condonet.  Dumnorigem  ad  se  vocat,  fratrem  adhibet  ; 
quae  in  eo  reprehendat  ostendit;    quae  ipse  intellegat, 


BOOK   ONE  329 

quae  civitas  queratur,  proponit;  monet  ut  in  reliquum 
tempus  omnes  susplciones  vitet;  praeterita  se  Diviciaco 
fratri  condonare  dicit.  Dumnorigi  custodes  ponit,  ut 
quae  agat,  quibuscum  loquatur,  scire  possit.  390 

21.  Eodem  die  ab  exploratoribus  certior  faetus  hostes 
sub  monte  consedisse  milia  passuum  ab  ipsius  castrls 
octo,  qualis  esset  nattira  montis  et  qualis  in  circuitu 
ascensus  qui  cognoscerent  misit.  Rentintiatum  est 
facilem  esse.  De  tertia  vigilia  T.  Labienum,  legatum  395 
pro  praetore,  cum  duabus  legionibus  et  eis  ducibus  qui 
iter  cognoverant,  summum  iugum  montis  ascendere  iubet ; 
quid  sul  cdnsilii  sit  ostendit.  Ipse  de  quarta  vigilia 
eodem  itinere  quo  hostes  ierant  ad  eos  contendit  equi- 
tatumque  omnem  ante  se  mittit.  P.  Considius,  qui  rei  400 
mllitaris  peritissimus  habebatur  et  in  exercitti  L.  Sullae 

et  postea  in  M.  Crassi  fuerat,  cum  exploratoribus  prae- 
mittitur. 

22.  Prima     luce,     cum     summus     mons     a     Labieno 
teneretur,  ipse  ab  liostium  castrls  non  longius  mille  et  405 
quTngentis  passibus  abesset,  neque,  ut  postea  ex  captivTs 
comperit,  aut  ipsius  adventus  aut  LabienI  cognitus  esset, 
Considius    equo    admisso    ad   eum    accurrit,    dIcit    mon- 
tem    quem    a    Labieno    occuparl    voluerit    ab    hostibus 
tenerl ;  id  se  a  Gallicis  armis  atque  Insignibus  cognovisse.  410 
Caesar  suas  copias  in  proximum  collem  subducit,  aciem 
instruit.     Labienus,  ut  erat  el  praeceptum  a  Caesare  ne 
proelium  committeret,  nisi  ipsius  copiae  prope  hostium 
castra  visae  essent,  ut  undique  uno   tempore  in  hostes 
impetus     fieret,    monte     occupato     nostros     exspectabat  415 
proelioque     abstinebat.       Multo     denique     die     per     ex- 
ploratores   Caesar  cognovit  et  montem  a   suls  tenerl  et 
ITelvetios  castra  movisse  et  Considium  timore  perterritum 


330  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

quod  non  vidisset  pro  viso  sibi  renuntiavisse.     Eo  die, 
420  quo   consuerat  intervallo,  hostes  sequitur  et  milia  pas- 
suum  tria  ab  eorum  castrls  castra  ponit. 

23.  Postiidie  eius  diel,  quod  omnino  biduum  supererat 
cum  exercitui  frumentum  metiri  oporteret,  et  quod  a 
Bibracte,   oppido   Aedudrum  longe   maximo   et  copiosis- 

425  simo,  non  amplius  milibus  passuum  xviii  aberat,  rei 
frumentariae  prospieiendum  existimavit ;  itaque  iter  ab 
Helvetils  avertit  ac  Bibracte  ire  eontendit.  Ea  res  per 
fugitivos  L.  Aemilii,  decurionis  equitum  Gallorum, 
hostibus    nuntiatur.      Helvetii,    seu    quod    timore    per- 

430  territos  Romanos  discedere  a  se  existimarent,  eo  magis 
quod  prldie  superioribus  locis  occupatis  proelium  non 
commTsissent,  sive  eo,  quod  re  frumentaria  intercludi 
posse  confiderent,  commutato  consilio  atque  itinere  con- 
verso    nostros    a    novissimo    agmine    insequi    ac    laces- 

4S5  sere  coepenint. 

24.  Postquam  id  animum  advertit,  copias  suas  Caesar 
in  proximum  collem  subdilxit  equitatumque  qui  sustineret 
hostium  impetum  misit.  Ipse  interim  in  colle  medio  tri- 
plicem  aciem  instruxit  legi5num  quattuor  veteranarum ;  in 

440  summo  iugo  duas  legiones  quas  in  Gallia  citeriore  pro- 
ximo conscrTpserat  et  omnia  auxilia  collocarl,  ac  totum 
montem  hominibus  compleri,  et  interea  sarcinas  in  unum 
locum  conferri,  et  eum  ab  eis  qui  in  superiore  acie  con- 
stiterant  munlri  iussit.    Helvetii  cum  omnibus  suTs  c arris 

445  secuti  impedimenta  in  unum  locum  contulerunt ;  ipsi 
confertissima  acie,  reiecto  nostro  equitatu,  phalange  facta, 
sub  primam  nostram  aciem  successerunt. 

25.  Caesar  primum  suo,  deinde  omnium  ex  conspectu 
remotis  equis,  ut  aequato  omnium  perTculo  spem  fugae 

150  tolleret,   cohortatus  suos  proelium   commTsit.     Milites  e 


BOOK   ONE  331 

loco  superiore  pills  missis  facile  hostium  phalangem  per- 
fregerunt.  Ea  disiecta  gladiis  destrictis  in  eos  impetum 
fecerunt.  Gallis  magn5  ad  pugnam  erat  impedimento 
quod,  pluribus  eorum  scutis  uno  ictu  pilorum  transfixis 
et  Golligatis,  cum  ferrum  se  inflexisset,  neque  evellere  455 
neque  sinistra  impedita  satis  commode  pugnare  poterant, 
multi  ut  diu  iactato  bracchio  •  praeoptarent  scutum 
manti  emittere  et  nudo  corpore  pugnare.  Tandem  vul- 
neribus  defessi  et  pedem  referre  et,  quod  mons  aberat 
circiter  mille  passus,  eo  se  recipere  coeperunt.  Capto  460 
monte  et  succedentibus  nostris,  Boi  et  TulingT,  qui  homi- 
num  milibus  circiter  xv  agmen  hostium  claudebant  et 
novissimis  praesidio  erant,  ex  itinere  nostros  ab  latere 
aperto  aggressi  circumvenire,  et  id  conspicati  Helvetil, 
qui  in  montem  sese  receperant,  riirsus  instare  et  proe-  455 
Hum  redintegrare  coeperunt.  Roman!  conversa  signa 
bipertito  intulerunt:  prima  et  secunda  acies,  ut  victis  ac 
submotis  resisteret;  tertia,  ut  venientes  sustineret. 

26.     Ita  ancipiti  proelio   diu  atque  acriter  pugnatum 
est.     Dititius  cum  sustinere  nostrorum  impetus  non  pos-  470 
sent,  alter!  se,  ut  coeperant,  in  montem  receperunt,  alter! 
ad  imped!menta  et  carros  suos  se  contulerunt.    Nam  hoc 
toto  proelio,  cum  ab  hora  septima  ad  vesperum  pugnatum 
sit,   aversum   hostem  vldere  nemo   potuit.     Ad  multam 
noctem  etiam  ad  imped!menta  pugnatum  est,  propterea  475 
quod  pro  vallo  carros  obiecerant  et  e  loco  superiore  in 
nostros    venientes    tela    coniciebant,    et    nonnulli    inter 
carros  raedasque  mataras   ac  tragulas  subiciebant  nos- 
trosque  vulnerabant.     Diu  cum  esset  pugnatum,  impedi- 
ment!s    castrisque    nostr!    pot!t!    sunt.     Ibi    Orgetor!gis  480 
f!lia  atque  unus  e  filils  captus  est.     Ex  eo  proelio  cir- 
citer hominum  m!lia  cxxx  superfuerunt  eaque  tota  noete 
continenter  ierunt;    nullam  partem  noctis  itinere  inter- 


332  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

misso  in  fines  Lingonum  die  quarto  pervenerunt,  cum  et 
485  propter  vulnera  militum  et  propter  sepulturam  occiso- 
rum  nostrl  triduum  morati  eos  sequi  non  potuissent. 
Caesar  ad  Lingones  litteras  nuntiosque  misit  ne  eos  frti- 
mento  neve  alia  re  iuvarent;  qui  si  iuvissent,  se  eodem 
loco  quo  Helvetios  habitiirum.  Ipse  triduo  intermisso 
490  cum  omnibus  copils  eos  scqui  eoepit. 

27.  Helvetil  omnium  rerum  inopia  adducti  legatos  de 
deditione  ad  eum  miserunt.  Qui  cum  eum  in  itinere 
convenissent  seque  ad  pedes  proiecissent  suppliciterque 
loctitl  flentes  pacem  petlssent,  atque  eos  in  eo  loco  quo 

495  tum  essent  suum  adventum  exspectare  iussisset,  paru- 
erunt.  Eo  postquam  Caesar  pervenit,  obsides,  arma, 
serv5s  qui  ad  eos  perfugissent  poposcit.  Dum  ea  con- 
qulruntur  et  conferuntur,  nocte  intermissa,  circiter  homi- 
num  milia  vi  eius  pagi  qui  Verbigenus  appellatur,  sive 

500  timore  perterriti  ne  armis  traditis  supplicio  afficerentur, 
sive  spe  salutis  inducti,  quod  in  tanta  multitudine  dedi- 
ticiorum  suam  fugam  aut  occultarl  aut  omnino  ignorari 
posse  existimarent,  prima  nocte  e  castrls  Helvetiorum 
egress!  ad  Rhenum  finesque  Germanorum  contenderunt. 

505  28.  Quod  ubi  Caesar  resciit,  quorum  per  fines  ierant, 
his  uti  eonquirerent  et  reducerent,  si  sibi  purgati  esse 
vellent,  imperavit;  reductos  in  hostium  numero  habuit; 
reliquos  omnes  obsidibus,  armIs,  perfugis  traditis  in 
deditionem  accepit.     Helvetios,  Tulingds,  LatobrIg5s  in 

510  fines  suos,  unde  erant  profecti,  reverti  iussit :  et,  quod 
omnibus  frugibus  amissis  domi  nihil  erat  quo  famem 
tolerarent,  Allobrogibus  imperavit  ut  eis  frumenti  copiam 
facerent;  ipsos  oppida  vicosque  quos  incenderant  resti- 
tuere   iussit.     Id   ea  maxime   ratione  fecit,   quod  noluit 

515  eum  locum  unde  Helvetil  discesserant  vacare,  ne  propter 
bonitatem  agrorum  German!,  qu!  trans  Rhenum  incolunt, 


BOOK   ONE  333 

ex  suls  finibus  in  Helvetiorum  fines  transTrent  et  fmitiml 
Galliae  provinciae  Allobrogibusque  essent.  Boios  peten- 
tibus  Aeduls,  quod  egregia  virtute  erant  cogniti,  ut  in 
finibus  suls  collocarent,  concessit ;  quibus  illi  agros  520 
dederunt  quosque  postea  in  parem  iuris  libertatisque 
condicionem  atque  ipsi  erant  receperunt. 

29.  In  castrls  Helvetiorum  tabulae  repertae  sunt 
litterls  Graecis  T^onfectae  et  ad  Caesarem  relatae,  quibus 
in  tabulls  nominatim  ratio  c5nfecta  erat,  qui  numerus  525 
dom5  exisset  eorum  qui  arma  ferre  possent,  et  item 
separatim  quot  pueri,  senes  mulieresque.  Summa  erat 
capitum  Helvetiorum  milium  cclxiii.  Tulingorum  milium 
XXXVI,  Latobrlgorum  xiiii,  Rauracdrum  xxiii,  Boiorum 
XXXII ;  ex  his,  qui  arma  ferre  possent,  ad  milia  nona-  530 
ginta  duo.  Summa  omnium  fuerunt  ad  mIlia  ccclxviii. 
Eorum  qui  domum  redierunt  censu  habito,  ut  Caesar 
imperaverat,  repertus  est  numerus  milium  c  et  x. 


334  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


SELECTED  EULES 

GENDER 

GENERAL  RULES 

Masculine. — The  names  of  male  beings,  rivers,  winds,  and  months  are 
masculine.     App,    13,   a. 

Feminine. — The  names  of  female  beings,  countries,  towns,  islands, 
plants,  and  trees  are  feminine.     App.  13,  5. 

Neuter. — Indeclinable  nouns,  and  infinitives,  phrases,  and  clauses  used 
as  nouns  are  neuter.    App.  13,  c. 

SPECIAL   RULES 

First  Declension. — Nouns  of  the  first  declension  are  feminine,  except 
names  of  male  beings.     §59. 

Second  Declension. — Nouns  of  the  second  declension  ending  in  -um 
are  neuter;   others  are  masculine.      §60. 

Third  Declension. — a.  Masculine  are  names  of  male  beings  and  nouns 
ending  in  -or,  -6s,  -er,  -es.     §98,  1. 

fc.  Feminine  are  names  of  female  beings  and  nouns  ending  in 
-6,  -as,  -es,  -is,  -us,  -x,  and  ' '  consonant-and-s. ' '    §98,  2. 

c.  Neuter  are  all  others;  namely,  nouns  in  -c,  -i,  -t,  -y,  -1,  -a,  -n,  -e; 
-ar, -ur, -us.     §98,  3. 

Fourth  Declension. — Nouns  of  the  fourth  declension  ending  in  -us  are 
masculine,  except  domus,  manus,  and  Idus,  which  are  feminine; 
those  ending  in  -u  are  neuter.     §291. 

Fifth  Declension. — Nouns  of  the  fifth  declension  are  feminine  except 
dies,  which  is  usually  masculine.     §298. 

AGREEMENT 
Verb. — A  finite  verb  agrees  with  its  subject  in  person  and  number.     §34. 

Adjective. — Adjectives  agree  with  their  nouns  in  gender,  number,  and 
case.     §63. 

Appositive. — An  appositive  or  a  predicate  noun  agrees  in  case  with 
the  word  it  explains.     §85. 


SELECTED    RULES  335 

Relative  Pronoun. — A  relative  pronoun  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in 
gender  and  number,  but  its  case  depends  on  its  construction  in 
its  own  clause.     §152. 

CASES 

NOMINATIVE 

Subject. — The  subject  of  a  finite  verb  is  put  in  the  nominative  case.   §32. 

GENITIVE 

General  Use. — A  noun  which  modifies  another  noun  and  does  not  mean 
the  same  person  or  thing  is  put  in  the  genitive.     §35. 

Possessive. — The  possessive  genitive  is  used  to  denote  the  person  or 
thing  that  possesses  something.     §489. 

Partitive. — The  partitive  genitive  (or  genitive  of  the  whole)  is  used 
to  express  the  whole  of  which  a  part  is  mentioned.     §491. 

Objective. — An  objective  genitive  is  used  to  denote  the  person  or 
thing  that  receives  the  act  or  feeling  implied  in  a  noun  or  ad- 
jective.    §499. 

Description. — The  ablative,  or  genitive,  modified  by  an  adjective, 
describes  a  person  or  thing  by  naming  some  quality.     §649. 

DATIVE 

Indirect  Object. — The  indirect  object  of  a  verb  is  put  in  the  dative.    §53. 

With  Special  Verbs. — A  dative  which  is  translated  by  a  direct  object 
is  used  with  most  Latin  verbs  signifying  benefit  or  injure,  please 
or  displease,  serve  or  resist,  trust  or  distrust,  command  or  chcy; 
believe,  envy,  favor,  pardon,  persuade,  spare,  threaten,  and  the 
like.     §529. 

With  Compound  Verbs. — The  dative  of  the  indirect  object  is  used  with 
many  verbs  compounded  with  ad,  ante,  con,  in,  inter,  ob,  post, 
prae,  pro,  sub,  super,  and  sometimes  circum.     §537. 

Purpose. — The  dative  is  used  to  denote  the  purpose  which  a  thing 
serves.     §544. 

With  Adjectives. — Adjectives  meaning  near,  also  fit,  friendly,  similar, 
and  the  like,  with  their  opposites,  may  have  a  modifying  da- 
tive.    §546. 


336  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

Agent. — The  dative  is  used  with  the  second  (passive)  periphrastic 
conjugaltion  to  denote  the  person  who  has  the  thing  to  do.     §727. 

ACCUSATIVE 

Direct  OlDJect. — The  direct  object  of  a  verb  is  put  in  the  accusative 
case.     §38. 

Extent. — The  accusative  without  a  preposition  is  used  to  express 
duration  of  time  and  extent  of  space.     §327. 

Place  to  Which. — Place  to  which  is  denoted  by  the  accusative  with 
ad  or  in;  but  names  of  towns,  domus,  and  rus,  omit  the  preposi- 
tion.    §460. 

Subject  of  Infinitive. — The  accusative  is  used  as  the  subject  of 
infinitives.     §521. 

ABLATIVE 

Agent. — Agency  with  the  passive  voice  is  expressed  by  the  ablative 

with  a  or  ab.     §306. 
Means. — Means  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  without  a  preposition.    §313. 
Time. — Time,    when    or    within    which,    is    denoted    by    the    ablative 

without  a  preposition.     §320. 

Absclute. — A  noun  and  an  agreeing  participle  (or  their  equivalents) 
are  used  in  the  ablative  independently.     §398. 

Place  from  Which. — Place  from  which  is  denoted  by  the  ablative  with 
ab,  de,  or  ex;  but  names  of  towns,  domus,  and  rus,  omit  the 
preposition.     §468. 

Place  in  Which. — ^Place  in  which  is  denoted  by  the  ablative  with  in, 
but  names  of  towns,  domus,  and  rus,  omit  the  preposition  and  use 
the  locative  if  there  is  one.     §476. 

Separation. — Separation  is  expressed  by  the  ablative,  with  or  without 
ab,  de,  or  ex.     §609. 

Cause. — Cause  may  be  expressed  by  the  ablative,  usually  without  a 
preposition.     §611. 

Comparison. — A  comparative  without  quam  is  followed  by  the  abla- 
tive.    §618. 

Measure  of  Difference. — The  ablative  without  a  preposition  is  used 
with  comparatives  to  express  the  measure   (or  degree)   of  differ- 
ence.    §620. 


SELECTED    RULES  337 

Manner. — Manner  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  with  either  cum  or  a 
modifying  adjective,  rarely  with  both.     §627. 

With  Certain  Deponent  Verbs. — Utor,  fruor,  fungor,  potior,  and  vescor, 

and  their  compounds,  govern  an  ablative  which  is  translated  by  a 
direct  object.     §635. 

Accompaniment. — Accompaniment  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  with 
cum.     §642. 

Description. — The  ablative,  or  genitive,  modified  by  an  adjective, 
describes  a  person  or  thing  by  naming  some  quality.     §649. 

Specification. — The  ablative,  without  a  preposition,  is  used  to  denote 
that  in  respect  to  which  a  statement  is  true.     §656. 

MOODS 
INFINITIVES 

With  Verbs  of  Saying,  etc. — After  verbs  of  saying,  thinlcing,  Jcnowing, 
perceiving,  and  the  like,  the  main  verb  of  a  statement  is  in  the 
infinitive  mood  with  its  subject  in  the  accusative.     §522. 

Indirect  Discourse. — In  indirect  discourse  main  clauses  containing  a 
statement  require  the  infinitive  with  subject  accusative;  subordinate 
verbs  require  the  subjunctive.     §752. 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

Sequence  of  Tenses. — If  the  main  verb  is  present,  future,  or  future 
perfect,  a  subordinate  subjunctive  verb  is  present  or  perfect; 
if  the  main  verb  is  imperfect,  perfect,  or  pluperfect,  a  subordinate 
subjunctive  verb  is  imperfect  or  pluperfect.  The  present  and 
imperfect  subjunctive  denote  incomplete  action;  the  perfect  and 
pluperfect  subjunctive  denote  completed  action.     §371. 

Indirect  Question. — The  verb  of  an  indirect  question  is  in  the 
subjunctive.     §370. 

Purpose. — The  subjunctive  is  used  to  express  purpose,  introduced  by 
ut  (affirmative),  ne  (negative).     §414. 

With  Verbs  of  Fearing. — Verbs  expressing  fear  take  the  subjunctive 
with  ne  (affirmative),  ut  (negative).     §430. 

Result. — Result  is  expressed  by  the  subjunctive  with  ut  (affirmative), 
ut  non  (negative).    §437. 


338  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

Commands. — (1)  A  command  in  the  first  person  is  expressed  by  the 
first  person  plural  of  the  present  subjunctive,  the  negative  be- 
ing ne.     §673,  1. 

(2)  A  command  in  the  third  person  is  expressed  by  the  present 
subjunctive,  the  negative  being  ne.     §673,  3. 

Wishes. — Future  (possible)  wishes  are  expressed  by  the  present 
subjunctive  with  or  without  utinam;  present  and  past  (impos- 
sible) wishes  are  expressed  by  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect 
subjunctive  with  utinam.    The  negative  is  ne.     §782. 

IMPERATIVE 

Commands. — A  positive  command  in  the  second  person  is  expressed 
by  the  present  imperative.  The  negative  is  usually  expressed  by 
noli  or  nolite,  the  present  infinitive.    §673,  2. 

CAUSAL   CLAUSES 

With  Quod,  Quia,  Quoniam. — Quod,  quia,  quoniam  are  used  with  the 
indicative  unless  the  reason  is  quoted.     §692. 

With  Cum. — Cum,  meaning  since  or  hecause,  is  used  with  the  subjunc- 
tive.    §694. 

TEMPORAL   CLAUSES 
With  Cum. — When  the  main  verb  is  historical,  cum  temporal  takes  the 
subjunctive;    otherwise  the  indicative  is  regularly  used.     §701. 

CONDITIONAL   CLAUSES 

Assumed. — Assumed  and  more  vivid  future  conditional  sentences  have 
both  verbs  in  the  indicative.     §764. 

Contrary  to  Fact. — Contrary  to  fact  conditional  sentences  have  both 
verbs  in  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  if  referring  to  present  time; 
in  the  pluperfect  subjunctive,  if  referring  to  past  time.     §772. 

Less  Vivid  Future. — Less  vivid  future  conditional  sentences  have  both 
verbs  in  the  present  (or  perfect)  subjunctive.     §774. 

SUPINES 
Accusative. — The    accusative    of   the   supine   is   used   with   verbs   of 
motion  to  express  purpose.     §737. 

Ablative. — The  ablative  of  the  supine  is  used  with  adjectives  as  an 
ablative  of  specification.     §739. 


APPENDIX 
INTEODUCTION 

In  this  Appendix  the  regular  paradigms  are  given  in  full, 
with  only  such  exceptional  forms  as  are  needed  for  the  reading 
of  Caesar  and  Cicero. 


PEONUNCIATION 

QUANTITY  OF  VOWELS 

1.  A  vowel  is  usually  short: 

a.  Before  another  vowel,  or  h;  as  eo,  nihil. 
h.  Before  nd  and  nt;  as  laudandus,  laudant. 
c.  In  words  of  more  than  one  syllable,  before  any  other  final 
consonant  than  s;  as  laudem,  laudat. 

2.  A  vowel  is  long: 

a.  Before  nf,  ns,  nx,  and  net;  as  infero,  c5nsul,  iunxi,  iunctum. 
h.  When  it  results  from  contraction;  as  isset,  for  iisset. 

3.  A  vowel  is  usually  long: 

a.  In  monosyllables  not  ending  in  b,  d,  1,  m,  or  t;  as  me,  Mc;  but 
ab,  ad. 

SOUNDS  OF  VOWELS 

4.  Long  vowels,  whether  accented  or  not,  should  be  given  twice  the 
time  given  to  short  vowels.  This  is  the  chief  difficulty  in  the  Roman 
pronunciation,  because  in  English  only  accented  syllables  are  commonly 
given  more  time  than  others. 

339 


340  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


a  =    a  in  Cuba 

3i  =  ahf 

e=    e  in  net 

e  =  e  in  ihcy 

i=    t  in  pin 

i  =  i  in  machine 

0  =    0  in  for  (not  as  in  got) 

6  =  oh! 

u  =  00  in  foot 

u  =  00  in  boot 

y  =   French  u  or  German  w;  it  rarely  occurs. 


SOUNDS   OF   DIPHTHONGS 

5.  The  following  are  the  commonly  recognized  diphthongs  which 
appear  in  classical  Latin: 

ae  =  at  in  aisle 
oe  =  oi  in  oil 
au  =  ow  in  how 

eu  has  no  English  equivalent.  Run  together  in  one  syllable  the 
sounds  eh'-oo. 

ui  has  no  English  equivalent.  Eun  together  in  one  syllable  the 
sounds  oo'-ee.    The  diphthong  appears  in  cut,  huic,  cuius,  and  huius. 

a.  When  the  consonant  1  (=  j )  stands  between  two  vowels,  as  in 
maior,  eius,  Troia,  and  cuius,  though  i  was  written  only  once,  it  was 
pronounced  twice,  as  if  the  spelling  were,  mailer,  elius,  Troiia,  and 
cuiius.     The  second  i  is  the  consonant,  pronounced  like  y  in  yet. 

The  first  i  makes  a  diphthong  with  the  preceding  vowel.    In  such  cases, 

ai  =  ai  in  aisle 

ei  =  ey  in  they 

oi  =  oi  in  oil 

ui  as  indicated  above. 

SOUNDS   OF   CONSONANTS 

6.  The  consonants  are,  in  general,  pronounced  as  in  English;  but 
the  following  points  should  be  noted: 

c  and  g  are  always  hard,  as  in  can,  go 

i  (consonant,  sometimes  printed  j)  =y  in  yet 

n  before  c,  g,  q,  and  x  =  n^  in  sing 

r  pronounced  distinctly 

s  as  in  this,  never  as  in  these 

t  as  in  tin,  never  as  in  nation 


APPENDIX  341 

V  =  w 

x  =  ks 

ch,  ph,  th  =  c,  p,t 

bs,  ht  =  ps,  pt 

qu  =  qu  in  quart 

ngu  =  ngu  in  anguish 

su  =  sw  in  suadeo,  suavis,  suesco,  and  their  compounds. 

a.  When  consonants  are  doubled,  as  in  mitto,  annus,  both  consonants 
should  be  soundedj  as  they  are  in  out-talk,  pen-knife.  We  sound  only 
one  consonant  in  ditty,  penny 

7.  i  is  generally  a  consonant  between  vowels,  and  at  the  beginning 
of  a  word  before  a  vowel.  In  compounds  of  iacio,  the  form  icio  was 
written.  It  is  commonly  believed  that  in  these  words  consonant  i  was 
pronounced,  though  not  written,  before  vowel  i;  as  deicld,  pronounced 
as  if  deiicio;  abicio,  as  if  abiicio. 

SYLLABLES 

8.  Every  Latin  word  has  as  many  syllables  as  it  has  vowels  or 
diphthongs. 

a.  A  single  consonant  between  two  vowels  is  pronounced  with  the 
second  vowel;  as  fe-ro,  a-go,  mo-ne. 

h.  The  combination  of  a  mute  and  a  liquid  (b,  c,  d,  g,  p,  t,  ch,  ph, 
or  th,  followed  by  1  or  r)  is  pronounced  together  so  easily  that  it  goes 
with  the  second  vowel  like  a  single  consonant;  as  pa-tris,  a-gri.  But 
in  poetry  such  a  combination  was  often  divided;  as  pat-ris,  ag-ri. 

c.  Any  other  combination  of  two  or  more  consonants  is  divided 
before  the  last  consonant,  or  before  the  combination  of  a  mute  and  a 
liquid;  as  mit-to,  dic-tus,  magis-ter,  magis-tri. 

QUANTITY   OF    SYLLABLES 

9.  A  syllable  is  long: 

a.  If  it  contains  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong;  as  both  syllables  of 
laud5,  and  the  first  syllable  of  eius  (5,  a). 

h.  If  its  vowel  is  followed  by  any  two  consonants  except  a  mute 
and  a  liquid,  or  by  one  of  the  double  consonants  x  and  z.  The  quan- 
tity of  a  short  vowel  is  not  changed  by  this  position:  est  is  est,  not 
est.  The  time  taken  in  pronouncing  a  consonant  at  the  end  of  the 
syllable  before  the  consonant  at  the  beginning  of  the  next  syllable 
(8,  e)  lengthens  the  syllable.    This  will  be  felt  if  the  consonants  are 


342  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

pronounced  distinctly  in  mit-to  (6,0),  an-nus,  dic-tus,  par-tes,  nos-ter. 
c.  Often  in  poetry  when  a  short  vowel  is  followed  by  a  mute  and  a 
liquid.     The  pronunciation  is  then  pat-ris,  ag-ri  (8,  h).    In  prose  such 
a  syllable  is  always  considered  short. 

ACCENT 

10.  Words  of  two  syllables  are  accented  on  the  first  syllable;  as 
om'nis. 

11.  Words  of  more  than  two  syllables  are  accented  on  the  penult 
if  it  is  long,  otherwise  on  the  antepenult;  as  divi'sa,  appel'lo,  in'colunt. 

12.  When  an  enclitic  is  joined  to  another  word,  the  accent  falls 
on  the  syllable  immediately  preceding  the  enclitic;  as  Gallia'que. 


INFLECTIONS 

NOUNS 
GENERAL  RULES  OF  GENDER 

13.  The  gender  of  most  nouns  is  determined  by  the  nominative 
ending  or  must  be  learned  for  the  individual  words;  but  the  following 
rules  will  prove  helpful. 

a.  The  names  of  male  beings,  rivers,  winds,  and  months  are  masculine. 

b.  The  names  of  female  beings,  countries,  towns,  islands,  plants, 
trees,  and  of  most  abstract  qualities  are  feminine. 

c.  Indeclinable  nouns,  and  infinitives,  phrases,  and  clauses  used  as 
nouns  are  neuter. 

DECLENSIONS 

14.  There  are  five  declensions  of  Latin  nouns,  distinguished  from 
each  other  by  the  final  letter  of  the  stem,  and  the  ending  of  the 
genitive  singular. 

ENDING   OF    GENITIVE    SINGULAB 

-ae 

-I 

-is 

-fis 

-ei  or  -ei 


ILENSION 

r       FINAL   LETTER   OF    STEM 

L 

a 

n. 

0 

m. 

f  consonant 

IV. 

u 

V. 

fi 

APPENDIX 


343 


a.  Strictly  speaking,  the  cases  are  usually  formed  by  adding  case- 
endings  to  the  stem.  But  when  the  stem  ends  in  a  vowel,  that  vowel 
is  often  modified  in  some  way,  or  is  so  combined  with  the  true  case- 
ending  that  neither  the  stem-vowel  nor  the  true  case-ending  can  be 
seen.  Therefore  it  is  more  convenient  to  apply  the  name  case-ending 
to  the  combined  stem-vowel  and  true  case-ending,  and  to  say  that  the 
cases  are  formed  by  adding  case-endings  to  the  base.  The  base  of  a 
noun  is  found  by  dropping  the  ending  of  the  genitive  singular. 


FIRST    DECLENSION 

15.     The  stem  ends  in  -a;   the  nominative  in  -a.     The  gender  is 
usually  feminine. 

lingua,  F.,  tongue,  language 


SINGULAR 

ENDINGS 

Nom. 

lingua 

a  language  {as  subject) 

-a 

Gen. 

linguae 

of  a  language,  language's 

-ae 

Bat. 

linguae 

to  or  for  a  language 

-ae 

Ace. 

linguam 

a  language  {as  object) 

-am 

Foe. 

lingua 

0  {or  thou)  language 

-a 

AU. 

lingua,  by. 

from, 

in,  or  with  a  language 
PLURAL 

-a 

Nom. 

linguae 

languages  {as  subject) 

-ae 

Gen. 

linguarum 

of  languages,  languages' 

-arum 

Bat. 

Unguis 

to  or  for  languages 

-is 

Ace. 

linguas 

languages  {as  object) 

-as 

Voc. 

linguae 

0   {or  ye)  languages 

-ae 

AU. 

Unguis,  by 

,  from 

,  in,  or  with  languages 

-is 

a.  Exceptions  in  gender  are  shown  by  meanings  (13);  as  Belgae,  m., 
the  Belgae;   Matrona,  m.,  the  {river)  Marne. 

b.  The  locative  singular  ends  in  -ae;  as  S&m&ro'hTiY&e,  at  Samarobriva. 


SECOND    DECLENSION 

16.     The  stem  ends  in  -o;    the  nominative  masculine  in  -us,  -er,  -ir; 
the  nominative  neuter  in  -um. 


344 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


animus,  m., 

puer,  M., 

ager,  m., 

vir,  M., 

bellum,  N., 

mind 

boy 

field 

SINGULAR 

man 

war 

Norn, 

animus 

puer 

ager 

vir 

bellum 

Gen. 

animi 

pueri 

agri 

viri 

belli 

Bat. 

animo 

puero 

agro 

viro 

bello 

Ace. 

animum 

puerum 

agrum 

virum 

bellum 

Voc. 

anime 

puer 

ager 

vir 

bellum 

AU. 

animo 

puero 

agro 

PLURAL 

viro 

bello 

Nom. 

animi 

pueri 

agri 

viri 

bella 

Gen. 

animorum 

puer  drum 

agrorum 

virorum 

bellorum 

Bat. 

animis 

pueris 

agris 

viris 

bellis 

Ace. 

animos 

pueros 

agros 

viros 

bella 

Voc. 

animi 

pueri 

agri 

viri 

bella 

AU. 

animis 

pueris 

agris 

viris 

bellis 

fUius,  M., 

Gains,  m., 

Boi,  M., 

deus,  M., 

son 

Gains 

the  Boil 

god 

SINGULAR 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Nom. 

filius 

Gaius 

Boi 

deus 

dii,  di 

Gen. 

fili 

Gai 

Boiorum 

dei 

deorum 

Bat. 

filio 

Gaio 

Bois 

deo 

diis,  dis 

Ace. 

filium 

Gaium 

Boios 

deum 

deos 

Voc. 

fili 

Gai 

Boi 

deus 

dii,  di 

AU. 

filio 

Gaio 

Bois 

deo 

diis,  dis 

a.  Exceptions  in  gender  are  usually  shown  by  the  meanings  (13). 
Vulgus,  crowd,  is  usually  neuter.  Locus,  m.,  place,  has  plural  loca,  N., 
places. 

h.  The  locative  singular  ends  in  -i;  as  Agedinci,  at  Agedincum. 

c.  Nouns  in  -ius  regularly  form  the  genitive  and  vocative  singular 
in  -i  instead  of  -ii  and  -ie,  and  nouns  in  -ium  form  the  genitive  in  -i. 
The  words  are  accented  as  if  the  longer  form  were  used;  consi'li,  of  a 
plan;  Ini'ti,  of  a  beginning. 

d.  Proper  names  ending  in  -aius,  -elus,  and  -oius  are  declined  like 
Gaius  and  Boi. 

e.  A  few  words  have  -um  instead  of  -orum  in  the  genitive  plural; 
socium  (or  soclorum),  of  allies. 


APPENDIX 


345 


THIBD    DECLENSION 

17.  Third  declension  stems  end  in  a  consonant  or  in  -i.    Nominative 
case-ending  for  masculines  and  feminines,  -s  or  none;  for  neuters,  none. 

A.     CONSONANT  STEMS 

18.  Stems  ending  in  a  labial  mute,  b  or  p.   The  nominative  ending  is  -s. 


SINGULAR 

Nom.  princeps 

Gen.  principis 

Dat.  principi 

Ace.  principem 

Voc.  princeps 

Ahl.  principe 


princeps,  m.,  chief 
Stem  priucip- 


PLUEAL 

prmcipes 

principum 

principibus 

principes 

principes 

principibus 


19.  Stems  ending  in  a  dental  mute,  d  or  t.  The 
for  masculines  and  feminines  is  -s,  and  the  final  d 
dropped  before  it. 


nominative  ending 
or  t  of  the  stem  is 


laus,  F 

,  praise 

miles,  M.,  soldier 

caput, 

N.,  head 

Stem 

laud- 

Stem  miUt- 

Stem 

i  capit- 

SING. 

PLUR. 

SING.              PLUR. 

SING. 

PLUR. 

Nom. 

laus 

laudes 

miles        milites 

caput 

capita 

Gen. 

laudis 

laudum 

militis      militum 

capitis 

capitum 

Dat. 

laudi 

laudibus 

militi        militibus 

capiti 

capitibus 

Ace. 

laudem 

laudes 

militem    milites 

caput 

capita 

Foe, 

laus 

laudes 

miles        milites 

caput 

capita 

Ahl 

laude 

laudibus 

milite       militibus 

capite 

capitibus 

20.     Stems  ending  in  a  guttural  mute,  g  or  c.     The  nominative 
ending  is  -s,  which  unites  with  the  final  g  or  c  of  the  stem  to  form  x. 


lex,  p.,  law 

dux,  M. 

leader 

Stem  leg- 

Stem 

duc- 

SINGULAR           PLURAL 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Nom. 

lex               leges 

dux 

duces 

Gen. 

legis            legum 

ducis 

ducum 

Dat. 

legi              legibus 

duel 

ducibus 

Ace. 

legem           leges 

dueem 

duces 

Voc. 

lex                leges 

dux 

duces 

Abl. 

lege             legibus 

duce 

ducibus 

346 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


21.     Stems  ending  in  a. liquid,  1  or  r.    There  is  no  nominative  case- 
ending. 

consul,  M.,  consul         pater,  m.,  father  aequor,  n.,  sea 

Stem  c5usul-  Stem  patr-  Stem  aequor- 


SING. 


PLUR. 


SING.  PLUR. 

Nom.     consul  consules  pater  patres 

Gen.       consults  consulum  patris  patrum 

consul!  consulibus  patri  patribus 

consulem  consules  patrem  patres 

consul  consules  pater  patres 

consule  consulibus  patre  patribus 


SING. 


PLUR. 


Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
All. 


aequor  aequora 

aequoris  aequorum 

aequori  aequoribus 

aequor  aequora 

aequor  aequora 

aequore  aequoribus 


22.  Stems  ending  in  a  nasal,  m  or  n.  There  is  no  nominative  case- 
ending,  except  in  hiems,  the  only  stem  in  -m.  The  nominative  of  the 
masculines  and  feminines  usually  drops  the  final  n  and  changes  the 
preceding  vowel  to  6. 

homo,  M.,  P.,  human  being        ratid,  f.,  reason  flumen,  n.,  river 


Stem  homin- 

Stem  ration- 

Stem  flumin- 

SING.                 PLUB. 

SING. 

PLUR. 

SING.              PLUR. 

Nam. 

homo         homines 

ratio 

rationes 

flumen     flumina 

Gen. 

hominis    hominum 

rationis 

rationum 

fluminis  fluminum 

Dat. 

homini      hominibus 

ration! 

rationibus 

flumin!    fluminibus 

Ace. 

hominem  homines 

rationem 

rationes 

flumen     flumina 

Voc. 

homo         homines 

ratio 

rationes 

flumen     flumina 

Abl 

homine      hominibus 

ratione 

rationibus 

flumine    fluminibus 

23.  Stems  ending  in  s  (apparently  r,  "because  s  changes  to  r 
between  two  vowels).  The  nominative  has  no  case-ending,  but  usually 
ends  in  s,  sometimes  in  r. 


mos,  M. 

,,  custom 

honor,  m.,  honor 

tempus,  N.,  time 

Stem 

L  mds- 

Stem  honos- 

Stem 

tempos- 

SING. 

PLUR. 

SING.             PLUR. 

SING. 

PLUR. 

Nom. 

mos 

mores 

honor         honores 

tempus 

tempora 

Gen. 

moris 

morum 

honoris      hondrum 

temporis 

temporum 

Dat. 

mori 

moribus 

honor!        honoribus 

tempor! 

temporibus 

Ace. 

morem 

mores 

honorem    honores 

tempus 

tempora 

Voc. 

mos 

mores 

honor         honores 

tempus 

tempora 

Ahl. 

more 

moribus 

honore       honoribus 

tempore 

temporibus 

APPENDIX 


3^7 


B.    i-STEMS 

« 

24.  Here  belong  (1)  masculine  and  feminine  nouns  ending  in  -i3 
or  -es  if  they  have  the  same  number  of  syllables  in  the  genitive  as  in 
the  nominative,  and  (2)  neuters  in  -e,  -al,  -ar. 

25.  Theoretically  the  i  should  appear  in  all  cases  except  the 
nominative  and  vocative  plural  of  masculines  and  feminines,  and 
the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  singular  of  some  neuters; 
but  this  declension  became  confused  with  that  of  consonant  stems, 
and  no  absolute  rule  can  be  given  for  the  endings.  Masculine  and 
feminine  nouns  usually  have  accusative  -em,  ablative  -e,  accusative 
plural  either  -es  or  -is.    Neuters  have  ablative  -i. 


turris,  f.,  tower 

hostis,  M.,  F.,  enemy    caedes,  F.,  sZai 

Stem  turri- 

Stem  liosti- 

SINGULAR 

Stem  caec 

Norn. 

turris 

hostis 

caedes 

Gen. 

turris 

hostis 

caedis 

Bat. 

turri 

host! 

caedi 

Ace. 

turrim  or  -em 

hostem 

caedem 

Voo. 

turris 

hostis 

caedes 

Am. 

turri  or  -e 

hoste 

PLUBAL 

caede 

Nom. 

turres 

hostes 

caedes 

Gen. 

turrium 

hostium 

caedium 

Dat. 

turribus 

hostibus 

caedibus 

Ace. 

turris  or  -es 

hostes  or 

-is               caedes  or 

Voc. 

turres 

hostes 

caedes 

Ahl. 

turribus 

hostibus 

caedibus 

cubile,  N.,  couch 

vectigal,  n.,  tax 

Stem  cubili- 

SINGULAR 

Stem  vectigali- 

Nom.    cublle 

vectlgal 

Gen.      cubilis 

vectlgalis 

Dat.      cubili 

vectigali 

Ace.      cubile 

vectigal 

Voo.     cubile 

vectigal 

Am.      cubm 

vectigali 

-is 


348 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


PLURAL 

vectlgalia 

vectigalium 

vectigalibus 

vectlgalia 

vectlgalia 

vectigalibus 

a.  Most  nouns  in  -is  are  declined  like  hostis.  Arar  (for  Araris),  M., 
the  Saone,  and  Liger  (for  Ligeris),  m.,  the  Loire,  are  declined  in  the 
singular  like  turris.  Ignis,  m.,  p-e,  and  navis,  f.,  ship,  often  have 
ablative  -i.  Mare,  n.,  sea,  is  declined  like  cubile,  but  commonly  has 
no  other  plural  cases  than  nominative  and  accusative. 


Norn. 

cubilia 

Gen. 

cubilium 

Bat. 

cubilibus 

Ace. 

cubilia 

Voc. 

cubilia 

All. 

cubilibus 

C.     MIXED  STEMS 

26.  Some  consonant  stems  have  borrowed  from  -i  stems  the 
genitive  plural  in  -ium  and  the  accusative  plural  in  -is.  Here  belong 
most  monosyllables  in  -s  and  -x  preceded  by  a  consonant;  most  nouns 
in  -ns  and  -rs;  and  a  few  nouns  in  -tas,  -tatis. 


cUens, 

M.,  retainer 

urbs,  r 

■.,  city 

Stem  client- 

Stem 

urb- 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Norn. 

cliens 

clientes 

urbs 

urbes 

Gen. 

clientis 

clientium 

urbis 

urbium 

Bat. 

client! 

clientibus 

urbi 

urbibus 

Ace. 

clientem 

clientes  or  -is 

urbem 

urbes  or  -is 

Voc. 

cliens 

clientes 

urbs 

urbes 

AU. 

cliente 

clientibus 

urbe 

urbibus 

27. 


B.     lEKEGULAR  NOUNS 
The  following  nouns  present  peculiarities  of  inflection; 


senex,  m., 

OS,  N., 

vis,  F., 

bos,  M.,  p.,  ] 

iuppiter,  M.. 

old  man 

lone 

force 

SINGULAR 

ox,  cow 

Jupiter 

Norn. 

senex 

OS 

vis 

bos 

luppiter 

Gen. 

senis 

ossis 

vis 

bovis 

lovis 

Bat. 

seni 

ossi 

vi 

bovi 

lovi 

Ace. 

senem 

OS 

vim 

bovem 

lovem 

Voc. 

senex 

OS 

vis 

bos 

luppiter 

All. 

sene 

osse 

vi 

bove 

love 

APPENDIX 

PLURAL 

Nom. 

senes 

ossa 

Vires 

boves 

Gen. 

senum 

ossiura 

virium 

bovum  or  bourn 

Bat. 

senibus 

ossibus 

viribus 

bobus  or  biibus 

Ace. 

senes 

ossa 

vires 

boves 

Voe. 

senes 

ossa 

vires 

boves 

Am. 

senibus 

ossibus 

viribus 

bobus  or  biibus 

349 


28.  The  gender  of  many  nouns  is  shown  by  the  meaning  (13). 
There  are  numerous  exceptions  to  the  following  rules: 

a.  Masculine  are  nouns  in  6  (except  those  in  -do,  -go,  -io),  -or,  -os, 
-er,  -es. 

6.  Feminine  are  nouns  in  -do,  -go,  -16,  -as,  -es,  -is,  -us,  -ys,  -x,  and 
in  -s  when  preceded  by  a  consonant. 

c.  Neuter  are  all  others;  namely,  nouns  in  -a,  -e,  -i,  -y,  -c,  -1,  -n,  -t, 
-ar,  -ur,  -us. 

FOURTH    DECLENSION 

29.  Stem  ends  in  -u;  nominative  masculine  in  -us;  nominative 
neuter  in  -u. 


passus, 

M.,  pace 

cornu, 

N.,  horn 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Norn. 

passus 

passus 

cornu 

cornua 

Gen. 

passus 

passuum 

cornus 

cornuum 

Bat. 

passu! 

passibus 

cornu 

cornibus 

Aoc. 

passum 

passus 

cornu 

cornua 

Voc. 

passus 

passus 

cornu 

cornua 

All. 

passu 

passibus 

cornu 

cornibus 

a.  Domus,  house,  manus,  Tiand,  Idds,  Ides,  are  feminine. 

h.  The  dative  singular  of  nouns  in  -us  sometimes  ends  in  -ii. 

c.  The  dative  and  ablative  plurals  of  a  few  nouns  sometimes  end 
in  -ubus. 

d.  Domus,  F.,  house,  has  some  second  declension  forms.     The  forms 
in  common  use  are: 


350  BELLUM   HELVETICUM 


SINGULAR 

Norn. 

domus 

Gen. 

domus 

Bat. 

domui  or  domo 

Ace. 

domum 

Voc. 

domus 

All. 

domo  or  domu 

Loe. 

domi  (at  home) 

Norn. 

dies 

Gen. 

diei 

Vat. 

diei 

Ace. 

diem 

Voc. 

dies 

AU. 

die 

PLURAL 

domus 

domuum 

domibus 

domos 

domus 

domibus 


FIFTH    DECLENSION 

30.  Stem  ends  in  -e;  nominative  in  -es.    Usually  feminine. 
dies,  M.,  day  res,  f.,  thing 

SINGULAR     PLURAL  SINGULAR    PLURAL 

dies  res  res 

dierum  rei  rerum 

diebus  rei  rebus 

dies  rem  res 

dies  res  res 

diebus  re  rebus 

a.  Dies  in  the  singular  is  either  masculine  or  feminine  (feminine 
usually  in  the  sense  of  an  appointed  day  or  a  long  space  of  time);  in 
the  plural  it  is  masculine.     Its  compounds  are  masculine. 

h.  The  ending  of  the  genitive  and  dative  singular  is  -ei  after  a 
vowel,  -ei  after  a  consonant,     -e  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  either. 

c.  Dies  and  res  are  the  only  nouns  of  this  declension  that  are 
declined  throughout  the  plural.  Acies,  spes,  and  a  few  others  have 
nominative  and  accusative  plural  forms. 

ADJECTIVES 

31.  ADJECTIVES   OF  THE  FIRST  AND  SECOND 

DECLENSIONS 

magnus,  large 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

Mas.         Fern.         Neut.  Mas.  Fern.  Neut. 

Nom.  magnus  magna  magnum  magni  magnae  magna 

Gen.  magni  magnae  magni  magnorum  magnarum  magnorum 

Dat.  magno  magnae  magno  magnis  magnis  magnis 

Ace.  magnum  magnam  magnum  magnos  magnas  magna 

Voc.  magna  magna  magnum  magni  magnae  magna 

Ahl.  magno  magna  magno  magnis  magnis  magnis 


Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
AM. 


Norn. 

Gen. 

Bat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Ahl. 


APPENDIX 

351 

liber, 

free 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

liber 

libera 

liberum 

liberi 

libera© 

libera 

liberi 

liberae 

liberi 

liberorum  liberarum 

liberorum 

libero 

liberae 

libero 

liberis 

liberis 

liberis 

liberum 

liberam 

liberum 

liberos 

liberas 

libera 

liber 

libera 

liberum 

liberi 

liberae 

libera 

libero 

libera 

SINGULAR 

libero 

noster 

liberis 
',  our 

liberis 
PLURAL 

liberis 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut, 

noster 

nostra 

nostrum 

nostri 

nostrae 

nostra 

nostri 

nostrae 

nostri 

nostrorum 

nostrarum 

nostrorum 

nostrd 

nostrae 

nostro 

nostris 

nostris 

nostris 

nostrum 

,   nostram 

nostrum 

nostros 

nostras 

nostra 

noster 

nostra 

nostrum 

nostri 

nostrae 

nostra 

nostro 

nostra 

nostrd 

nostris 

nostris 

nostris 

ADJECTIVES  WITH  GENITIVE  IN  -TUS 

32.  Nine  adjectives  of  the  first  and  second  declensions  have  the 
genitive  singular  in  -ius  (in  alter,  usually  -ius)  and  the  dative 
singular  in  -i  in  all  genders.  These  are  alius,  another,  solus,  ojily, 
totus,  whole,  ullus,  any,  nullus,  no,  tinus,  one,  alter,  the  other,  uter, 
which  (of  two),  neuter,  neither.  In  the  plural  the  case-endings  of 
these  adjectives  aie  exactly  the  same  as  in  magnus.  Note  the  ending 
-ud  in  the  neuter  of  alius. 


Mas.       Fern. 


SINGULAR 

Neut.  Mas. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Nam. 

iinus 

lina 

iinum 

totus 

tota 

totum 

Gen. 

unius 

vinius 

unius 

totius 

totius 

totius 

Dat. 

uni 

lini 

uni 

toti 

toti 

toti 

Ace. 

iinum 

unam 

iinum 

totum 

totam 

totum 

Abl. 

lino 

i"ina 

uno 

toto 

tota 

toto 

352 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


Nom. 

alius 

alia 

aliud 

alter 

altera 

alterum 

Gen. 

alius 

alius 

alius 

alterius 

alterius 

alterius 

Bat. 

alii 

alii 

alii 

alteri 

alteri 

alteri 

Ace. 

alium 

aliam 

aliud 

alterum 

alteram 

alterum 

AU. 

alio 

alia 

alio 

alters 

altera 

altero 

ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  THIRD  DECLENSION 

33.  There  are  both  consonant  stems  and  i-stems.  Adjectives  of 
three  terminations  have  a  special  form  in  the  nominative  singular  for 
each  gender;  adjectives  of  two  terminations  have  one  form  in  the 
nominative  singular  for  the  masculine  and  feminine,  another  for  the 
neuter;  adjectives  of  one  termination  have  the  same  form  in  the 
nominative  singular  for  all  genders.  Except  comparatives,  all  adjectives 
of  two  or  three  terminations  have  only  -i  in  the  ablative  singular. 

A.     CONSONANT   STEMS 

34.  Two  Terminations. 


fortior, 

hraver 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Mas.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas.  and  Fem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

fortior 

fortius 

fortiores 

fortiSra 

Gen. 

fortioris 

fortioris 

fortiorum 

fortiorum 

Bat. 

fortiori 

fortiori 

fortioribus 

fortioribus 

Ace. 

fortiorem 

fortius 

fortiores 

fortiora 

Voc. 

fortior 

fortius 

fortiores 

fortiora 

AU. 

fortiore 

fortiore 

fortioribus 

fortioribus 

a.  Here  belong  all  comparatives;  but  plus,  more,  is  irregular  and 
defective.    In  the  singular  it  is  used  only  as  a  noun. 


SINGUI-AR 

PLURAL 

Neut. 

Mas.  and  Fem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

plus 

plures 

plura 

Gen. 

pluris 

plurium 

plurium 

Bat. 

pluribus 

pluribus 

Ace. 

plus 

plures  or  -is 

plura 

AU. 

plure 

pluribus 

pluribus 

APPENDIX 

353 

35.     One  Termination. 

vetus,  old 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Mas.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Norn,    vetus 

vetus 

veteres 

Vetera 

Gen.      veteris 

veteris 

veterum 

veterum 

Dat.      veteri 

veteri 

veteribus 

veteribus 

Ace.      veterem 

vetus 

veteres 

Vetera 

Voc.      vetus 

vetus 

veteres 

Vetera 

Abl.      vetere 

vetere 

veteribus 

veteribus 

a.  Here  belongs  princeps,  chief.    Dives,  rich,  also  belongs  here,  but 
has  ditia  for  the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  neuter  plural. 


36.  Three  Terminations. 

SINGULAR 

Mas.  Fern.  Neut. 

Nom.  acer  acris  acre 

Gen.  acris  acris  acris 

Dat.  acri  acri  acri 

Ace.  acrem  acrem  acre 

Voc.  acer  acris  acre 

Ahl.  acri  acri  acri 

a.  Here    belong    celeber,     famous, 
pedestrian;    names  of  months  in  -ber; 

37.  Two  Terminations. 


?.    i-STEMS 

acer,  sharp 

PLURAL 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

acres 

acres 

acria 

acrium 

acrium 

acrium 

acribus 

acribus 

acribus 

acres  or 

-is   acres  or  -is   acria 

acres 

acres 

acria 

acribus 

acribus 

acribus 

equester,     equestrian, 
and  a  few  others. 


pedester, 


omnis,  all 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Mas.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas.  and  Fem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

omnis 

omne 

omnes 

omnia 

Gen. 

omnis 

omnis 

omnium 

omnium 

Vat. 

omni 

omni 

omnibus 

omnibus 

Ace. 

omnem 

omne 

omnes  or  -is 

omnia 

Voc. 

omnis 

omne 

omnes 

omnia 

Ahl. 

omni 

omni 

•  omnibus 

omnibus 

35^ 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


a.  Here  belong  all  adjectives  in  -is,  e. 


38.     One  Termination. 


audax, 

hold 

SINGUT.AR 

PLURAL 

Mas.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

audax 

audax 

audaces 

audacia 

Gen. 

audacis 

audacis 

audacium 

audacium 

Bat. 

audaci 

audaci 

audacibus 

audacibus 

Ace. 

audacem 

audax 

audaces  or  -is 

audacia 

Voc. 

audax 

audax 

audaces 

audacia 

Ahl 

audaci 

audaci 

oriens. 

audacibus 
rising 

audacibus 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Mas.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

oriens 

oriens 

orientes 

orientia 

Gen. 

orientis 

orientis 

orientium 

orientium 

Bat. 

orient! 

orienti 

orientibus 

orientibus 

Ace. 

orientem 

oriens 

orientes  or 

-is 

orientia 

Voc. 

oriens 

oriens 

orientes 

orientia 

4hl 

oriente  or  -i 

oriente  or  -i 

orientibus 

orientibus 

a.  Here  belong  most  adjectives  of  one  termination,  and  all  participles 
in  -ans  and  -ens.  Participles  usually  have  the  ablative  singular  in  -i 
only  when  used  as  adjectives;  in  e  when  used  as  participles  or  nouns. 

COMPARISON    OF   ADJECTIVES 

39.  The  regular  comparative  endings  are  -ior,  -ius;  superlative, 
-issimus,  -a,  -um.  They  are  added  to  the  base  of  the  positive  (found 
by  removing  the  case-ending  from  the  genitive  singular).  Examples: 
altus,  high;  altior,  -ius,  higher;  -^Jtissimus,  -a,  -um,  highest;  fortis, 
hrave;  fortior,  braver;  fortissimus,  bravest. 


40.  Adjectives  in  -er  form  the  comparative  regularly,  but  form 
the  superlative  by  adding  -rimus  to  the  nominative  of  the  positive. 
Example:  acer,  sharp  (base,  acr-),  acrior,  acerrimus. 


APPENDIX  355 

41.  Most  adjectives  in  -ills  are  compared  regularly.  Six,  while 
forming  the  comparative  regularly,  form  the  superlative  by  adding 
-limus  to  the  base  of  the  positive.  They  are  facilis,  easy;  difficilis, 
difficult;  similis,  ^iA;e;  dissimilis,  unlike ;  hximilis,  loic;  gxsicilis,  slender. 
Example:    facilis,  facilior,  facillimus. 


42.  IREEGULAK  COMPARISON 

bonus,  melior,  optimus,  good,  hetter,  best. 

malus,  peior,  pessimus,  bad,  worse,  worst. 

magnus,  maior,  maximus,  great,  greater,  greatest. 

parvus,  minor,  minimus,  small,  less,  least. 

multus,  plus,  pltirimus,  much,  more,  most. 

dexter,  dexterior,  dextimus,  on  the  right,  dexterous,  etc. 


DEFECTIVE   COMPARISON 

43.  The  following  comparatives  and  superlatives  appear  without  a 
positive  because  formed  from  stems  not  used  as  adjectives: 

(citra,  adv.,  on  this  side)  citerior,  citimus,  hither,  hithermost. 
(de,  prep.,  down)  deterior,  deterrimus,  worse,  worst. 
(intra,  prep.,  in,  within)  interior,  intimus,  inner,  inmost. 
(prae,  prep.,  before)  prior,  primus,  former,  first. 
(prope,  adv.,  near)  propior,  proximus,  nearer,  next. 
(ultra,  adv.,  beyond)  ulterior,  ultimus,  farther,  farthest. 

44.  Of  the  following,  the  positive  forms  are  rare,  except  when 
used  as  nouns  (generally  in  the  plural): 

exterus,  exterior,  extremus  (extimus),  outer,  outmost. 
inferus,  inferior,  infimus  (imus),  lower,  lowest. 
posterus,  posterior,  postremus  (postumus),  latter,  last. 
superus,  superior,  supremus  (summus),  higher,  highest. 


COMPARISON  BY  ADVERBS 

45.  Most  adjectives  in  -us  preceded  by  a  vowel,  and  many  others, 
form  the  comparative  and  superlative  by  using  the  adverbs  magis, 
more,  and  maxime,  most.  Example:  idoneus,  suitable;  magis  idoneus, 
more  suitable;  maxime  idoneus,  most  suitable. 


356 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS 

46.  Most  adverbs  are  formed  from  adjectives  in  all  the  degrees  of 
comparison. 

a.  The  positive  is  formed  from  adjectives  of  the  first  and  second 
declensions  by  adding  -e  to  the  base;  as  latus,  wide,  late,  widely;  from 
adjectives  of  the  third  declension  by  adding  -ter  or  -iter  to  the  base, 
except  that  adjectives  whose  base  ends  in  nt  add  only  -er;  as  audax, 
audacis,  &oW,  audacter,  6o?di^;  f ortis,  brare,  ioriitQT,  bravely ;  prudens, 
prudentis,  prudent,  prudenter,  prudently.  But  the  neuter  accusative 
singular  of  adjectives  of  all  declensions  may  be  used  adverbially;  as 
multum,  much,  facile,  easily. 

h.  The  comparative  is  the  accusative  singular  neuter  of  the  com- 
parative of  the  adjective;  as  latius,  more  widely;  audacius,  more  loldly ; 
fortius,  more  bravely;  prudentius,  more  prudently;  plus,  more,  facilius, 
more  easily. 

c.  The  superlative  is  formed  by  adding  -e  to  the  base  of  the  super- 
lative of  the  adjective;  or,  less  often,  is  its  accusative  singular  neuter; 
as  latissime,  most  ividely ;  audacissime,  most  boldly;  fortissime,  most 
bravely;  prudentissime,  most  prudently;  plurimum,  most,  facillime, 
most  easily. 

NUMERALS 

47.  Numeral  adjectives  are  of  three  classes:  cardinals,  answering 
the  question,  how  many?  as  one,  two,  etc.;  ordinals,  answering  the 
question  which  in  order?  as  iirst,  second,  etc.;  and  distributives,  answer- 
ing the  question  how  many  each?  as  one  each,  two  each,  etc. 

"Roman 
Numerals     Cardinal 

I.  unus,  -a,  -um 

II.  duo,  -ae,  -o 

III.  tres,  tria 

IV.  quattuor 
V.  quinque 

VI.  sex 

VII.  septem 

VIII.  oeto 

IX.  novem 

X.  decern 

XI.  iindeeim 


Ordina 

I 

Distributive 

primus,  -a,  - 

um 

singuli,  -ae,  -a 

secundus  or 

•  alter 

bini 

tertius 

terni  or  trlnl 

quartus 

quaterni 

quintus 

quini 

sextus 

sen! 

Septimus 

septeni 

octavus 

octoni 

nonus 

noveni 

decimus 

deni 

undecimus 

iindeni 

.    APPENDIX 

357 

XII. 

duodecim 

duodecimus 

duodeni 

Xill. 

tredecim 

tertius  decimus 

terni  deni 

XIV. 

quattuordecim 

quartus  decimus 

quaterni  deni 

XV. 

quindecim 

quintus  decimus 

quini  deni 

XVI. 

sedecim 

sextus  decimus 

seni  deni 

XVII. 

septendecim 

Septimus  decimus 

septeni  deni 

XVIII. 

duodeviginti 

duodevlcesimus 

duodeviceni 

XIX. 

undeviginti 

undevicesimus 

undeviceni 

XX. 

viginti , 

vicesimus 

viceni 

XXI. 

unus  et  vlginti 
(viginti  unus) 

vicesimus  primus 

viceni  singuli 

XXVIII. 

duodetriginta 

duodetricesimus 

duodetriceni 

XXIX. 

undetriginta 

undetricesimus 

iindetriceni 

XXX. 

triginta 

tricesimus 

triceni 

XL. 

quadraginta 

quadragesimus 

quadrageni 

L. 

quinquaginta 

qulnquagesimus 

quinquageni 

LX. 

sexaginta 

sexagesimus 

sexageni 

LXX. 

septuaginta 

septuagesimus 

septuageni 

LXXX. 

octoginta 

octogesimus 

octogeni 

XC. 

nonaginta 

nonagesimus 

nonageni 

C. 

centum 

centesimus 

eenteni 

CI. 

centum  (et) 

centesimus  (et) 

centeni  (et) 

unus 

primus 

singuli 

cc. 

ducentl,  -ae,  -a 

ducentesimus 

duceni 

ccc. 

trecenti 

trecentesimus 

treceni 

cccc. 

quadringenti 

quadringentesimus 

quadringeni 

D. 

quingenti 

quingentesimus 

quingeni 

DC. 

sescenti 

sescentesimus 

sesceni 

DCC. 

septingenti 

septingentesimus 

septingeni 

DCCC. 

octingenti 

octingentesimus 

octingeni 

DCCCC. 

nongenti 

nongentesimus 

nongeni 

M. 

mille 

millesimus 

singula  milia 

MM. 

duo  milia 

bis  millesimus 

bina  milia 

a.  The  ending  -ensimus  is  often  used  for  -esimus. 


48.  Of  the  cardinals,  iinus,  duo,  and  ties  are  declined;  quattuor  to 
centum,  inclusive,  are  indeclinable;  ducenti  to  nongenti,  inclusive,  are 
declined  like  the  plural  of  magnus  (31);  mille  as  an  adjective  is  inde- 
clinable, as  a  substantive  is  declined  like  the  plural  of  cuMle  (25)  and 


358 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


generally  spelled  milia.     Ordinals  are  declined  like  magnus,  distribu- 
tives like  the  plural  of  magnus. 

49.  For  the  declension  of  unus,  see  32.  Its  plural  usually  means 
only  or  alone,  but  is  used  in  the  sense  of  one  with  nouns  used  only  in  the 
plural;    as,  una  castra,  one  camp.   Duo  and  tres  are  declined  as  follows: 


duo,  two 

tres,  three 

Mas. 

Few. 

Neut. 

Mas.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Norn. 

duo 

duae 

duo 

tres 

tria 

Gen. 

duorum 

duarum 

duorum 

trium 

trium 

Bat. 

du5bus 

duabus 

duobus 

trlbus 

tribus 

Ace. 

duos,  duo 

duas 

duo 

tres,  tris 

trla 

AU. 

duobus 

duabus 

duobus 

tribus 

tribus 

50.  The  numbers  intermediate  between  those  given  in  the  table  are 
expressed  as  follows:  In  a  combination  of  tens  and  units  the  units 
may  precede,  followed  by  et;  as  tres  et  quadraginta,  three  and  forty; 
or  the  tens  may  precede  without  an  et;  as  quadraginta  tres,  forty  three. 
In  other  combinations  of  two  numerals  the  higher  precedes,  with  or 
without  et;  as  ducenti  (et)  viginti,  two  hundred  and  twenty.  In  com- 
binations of  three  or  more  numerals,  the  order  is  as  in  English  without 
et;  as  duo  milia  sescenti  viginti  sex,  two  thousand  six  hundred  and 
twenty  six. 


51. 


PRONOUNS 
PERSONAL  PRONOUNS 


First  person,  ego,  I 


Second  person,  tu,  you  (thou) 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Norn,  ego 

nos 

Gen.     mei 

fnostrum 
l^nostri 

Dat.     mihi 

nobis 

Ace.     me 

nos 

AM.    me 

nobis 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

tu 

VOS 

tui 

f  vestrum 

\vestri 

tibi 

vobls 

te 

VOS 

te 

vobis 

a.  There  is  no  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person.  Its  place  is 
taken  either  by  a  demonstrative  pronoun,  usually  is,  he,  ea,  she,  id,  it, 
57;   or,  when  him,  them,  etc.,  refer  to  the  subject,  by  the  reflexive  pro- 


APPENDIX 


359 


J),  nostrum  and  vestrum  are  the  forms  used  as  partitive  genitives; 
nostri  and  vestri,  as  objective  genitives. 

c.  The  preposition  cum  is  enclitic  with  personal  pronouns j  as,  ndbis- 
cum,  with  us. 

REFLEXIVE    PRONOUNS 

52.  A  reflexive  pronoun  can  neither  be  the  subject  of  a  finite  verb 
nor  agree  with  such  a  subject:  therefore  there  can  be  no  nominative. 
For  the  first  and  second  persons  the  personal  pronouns  are  used  as  re- 
flexives.    For  the  third  person  there  is  a  special  pronoun. 


First  person,  mei, 

Second  person,  tui, 

Third  person,  sui, 

of  myself 

of  yourself 

of  himself, 

etc. 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

SINGULAR      PLURAL 

Gen.  mei 

(-nostrum 
1  nostri 

tui      -< 

^  vestrum 
^  vestri 

sui 

sui 

Dat.  mihi 

nobis 

tibi 

vobis 

sibi 

sibi 

Ace.  me 

nos 

te 

vos 

86 

se 

Abl.  me 

nobis 

te 

vobis 

se 

se 

a.  The  preposition  cum  is  enclitic  with  reflexive  pronouns;    as,  seciim, 
with  himself. 


53. 

1st  pers. 
Sd  pers. 


3d 
pers. 


POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS 


meus,  -a,  -um,  my 

tuus,  -a,  -um,  your  (of  one) 

suus,  -a,  -um,  his,  her,  its  (when 
referring  to  the  subject) 

eius  (gen.  sing,  of  is)  his,  her, 
its  (when  not  referring  to  the 
subject) 


noster,  -tra,  -trum,  our 

vester,  -tra,  -trum,  your  (of 
more  than  one) 

suus,  -a,  -um,  their  (when  re- 
ferring to  the  subject) 

eorum,  earum,  e5rum  (gen. 
plur.  of  is)  their  (when  not 
referring  to  the  subject) 


54. 


DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS 

hie,  this  (near  the  speaker) 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

hie 

haee 

hoc 

hi 

hae 

haec 

Gen. 

huius 

huius 

huius 

horum 

harum 

horum 

Dat. 

huic 

huic 

huic 

his 

his 

his 

Ace. 

hunc 

hanc 

hoe 

h5s 

has 

haec 

All. 

hoc 

hac 

hoc 

his 

his 

his 

360 


BELLUM   HELVETICUM 


a.  The  nominative  and  accusative  neuter,  hoc,  is  pronounced  hocc 
when  the  next  word  begins  with  a  vowel.  The  syllable  is  therefore 
long.     See  6,  a. 


55. 


iste,  that  (near  the  person  spoken  to) 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 


Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

iste 

ista 

istud 

Gen, 

istius 

istius 

istius 

Dat. 

isti 

isti 

isti 

Ace. 

istum 

istam 

istud 

Abl. 

ist5 

ista 

isto 

Mas.  Fern.  Neut. 

isti  istae  ista 

istorum  istarum  istorum 

istis  istis  istis 

istos  istas  ista 

istis  istis  istis 


56.     Hie,  that  (something  more  remote)  is  declined  like  iste. 


57. 


is,  this,  that,  he,  she,  it  (unemphatic) 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut, 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

is 

ea 

id 

ii,ei 

eae 

ea 

Gen. 

eius 

eius 

eius 

eorum 

earum 

eorum 

Dat. 

ei 

ei 

ei 

iis,  eis 

iis,  eis 

iis,  eis 

Ace. 

eum 

earn 

id 

eos 

eas 

ea 

AU. 

eo 

ea 

60 

iis,  eis 

iis,  eis 

iis,  eis 

58. 

idem,  the  same 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Mas, 

Fern. 

Neut, 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

idem 

eadem 

idem 

idem  or 
eidem 

eaedem 

eadem 

Gen. 

eiusdem 

L    eiusdem   eiusdem 

eorundem 

earundem 

eorundem 

Dat, 

eidem 

eidem 

eidem 

isdem  or 
eisdem 

isdem  or 
eisdem 

isdem  or 
eisdem 

Ace. 

eundem 

eandem 

idem 

eosdem 

easdem 

eadem 

Abl. 

eodem 

eadem 

eodem 

isdem  or 
eisdem 

isdem  or 
eisdem 

isdem  or 
eisdem 

APPENDIX 


361 


59. 


THE   INTENSIVE   PRONOUN 


ipse,  self 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

ipse 

ipsa 

ipsum 

ipsi 

ipsae 

ipsa 

Gen, 

ipsius 

ipsius 

ipsius 

ipsorum 

ipsarum 

ipsorum 

Dat, 

ipsi 

ipsi 

ipsi 

ipsis 

ipsis 

ipsis 

Ace. 

ipsum 

ipsam 

ipsum 

ipsos 

ipsas 

ipsa 

AU, 

ipso 

ipsa 

ipso 

ipsis 

ipsis 

ipsis 

60. 


THE   RELATIVE    PRONOUN 


qui,  who 


SINGUl  AU 

PLURAL 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Neut, 

Nom. 

qui 

quae 

quod 

qui 

quae 

quae 

Gen. 

cuius 

cuius 

cuius 

quorum 

quarum 

qu5rum 

Dat. 

cui 

cui 

cui 

quibus 

quibus 

quibus 

Ace, 

quem 

quam 

quod 

quos 

quas 

quae 

Ahl. 

quo 

qua 

quo 

quibus 

quibus 

quibus 

a.  Qmcumque  and  quisquis,  whoever,  are  generalizing  relatives.  The 
qui  of  quicumque  is  declined  regularly.  Quisquis,  quicquid  (quid- 
quid)/ and  quoquo  are  the  only  common  forms  of  quisquis. 

h.  The  preposition  cum  is  usually  enclitic  with  the  relative  pronoun; 
as  quibuscum,  with  whom. 


61. 


INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS 


Qui,  quae,  quod,  the  adjective  what?  is  declined  like  the  relative. 
Quis,  quid,  the  substantive  who?  what?  is  used  in  the  singular. 

quis,  who.^ 


SINGULAR 

Mas.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom.    quis 

quid 

Gen.      cuius 

cuius 

Dat.      cui 

cui 

Ace,      quem 

quid 

Ahl.      qu5 

quo 

362  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

a.  The  enclitic  -nam  is  sometimes  added  to  an  interrogative  to 
strengthen  it;  quisnam,  ivho,  pray? 

h.  Cum  is  usually  enclitic  with  the  interrogative  pronoun. 

62.  INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS 

The  indefinite  pronouns  are  quis,  qui,  and  their  compounds.  Quis 
and  qui  in  this  sense  are  in  general  declined  like  the  interrogatives. 

SUBSTANTIVE  ADJECTIVE 

quis,  quid,  anyone  qui,  quae  (qua),  quod,  any 

aliquis,  aliquid,  some  one  aliqui,  aliqua,  aliquod,  some 

quispiam,  quidpiam,  some  one  quispiam,  quaepiam,  quodpiam, 

some 

quisquam,  quicquam  (quidquam),  (adjective  supplied  by  ullus) 
any  one  (abl.  singular  and  entire 
plural  supplied  by  ullus, -a, -um) 

quivis,  quaevis,  quidvis            ^  quivis,  quaevis,  quodvis          ^ 

quilibet,  quaelibet,  quidlibet  J  quilibet,  quaelibet,  quodlibet  J 

any  one,  etc.,  you  like  any  you  like 
quidam,  quaedam,  quiddam,  a  cer-  quidam,  quaedam,  quoddam,  a  cer- 
tain man  tain 
quisque,  quidque,  each  quisque,  quaeque,  quodque,  each 

a.  In  qui  and  aliqui  the  nominative  and  accusative  plural  neuter 
are  qua  (or  quae)  and  aliqua. 

h.  In  the  declension  of  quidam,  m  becomes  n  before  d;   as  quendam. 

VERBS 

63.  There  are  four  conjugations  of  Latin  verbs,  distinguished  from 
one  another  by  the  final  vowel  of  the  stem,  best  seen  in  the  present 
infinitive- 


CONJUGATION 

FINAL 

VOWEL    OF    STEM 

PRESENT   INFINITIVE 

I. 

a 

-are 

n. 

e 

-ere 

m. 

e(i,u) 

-ere 

IV. 

i 

-ire 

64.  All  forms  of  a  verb  are  formed  on  one  or  another  of  three 
stems, — the  present  stem,  the  perfect  stem,  and  the  supine  stem.  In 
regular  verbs  the  perfect  and  supine  stems  are  based  on  the  present 
stem,  but  in  some  irregular  verbs  they  are  formed  on  distinct  roots. 


APPENDIX  363 

a.  On  the  present  stem  are  formed:  active  and  passive, — ^present, 
imperfect,  and  future  indicative;  present  and  imperfect  subjunctive; 
imperative;  present  infinitive:  active, — present  participle;  gerund: 
passive, — gerundive. 

h.  On  the  perfect  stem  are  formed:  active, — perfect,  pluperfect, 
and  future  perfect  indicative;  perfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive; 
perfect  infinitive. 

c.  On  the  supine  stem  are  formed:  active  and  passive, — future  in- 
finitive; active, — future  participle;  supine:  passive, — ^perfect,  pluper- 
fect, and  future  perfect  indicative;  perfect  and  pluperfect  subjunc- 
tive;   perfect  infinitive;    perfect  participle. 

65.  The  principal  parts  are  forms  which  show  to  which  conjuga- 
tion a  verb  belongs  and  what  each  of  its  stems  is.  They  are,  in  the 
active,  (1)  the  first  person  singular  present  indicative  (as  the  first 
form  of  the  verb),  (2)  the  present  infinitive  (to  indicate  the  conju- 
gation and  give  the  present  stem),  (3)  the  first  person  singular  per- 
fect indicative  (to  give  the  perfect  stem),  (4)  the  supine  (to  give  the 
supine  stem). 

For  example,  the  principal  parts  of  laudo  are: 

laudo,  laudare  (present  stem,  lauda). 
laudavi,  (perfect  stem,  laudav). 
laudatum  (supine  stem,  laudat). 

The  supine  of  the  majority  of  verbs  is  not  found  in  Latin  litera- 
ture, so  that  other  forms  of  the  verb  are  often  given  instead  of  the 
supine.  But  no  one  form  is  found  for  every  verb,  and  it  is  simpler 
to  give  the  supine  always. 

In  the  passive  the  principal  parts  are  (1)  the  first  person  singular 
present  indicative,  (2)  the  present  infinitive,  (3)  the  first  person  sin- 
gular perfect  indicative. 

66.  CONJUGATION  OF  SUM  (irregular  verb) 

Principal  parts:    sum,  esse,  fui 


INDICATIVE 

Present 

SINGULAR                 PLURAL 

sum 

sumus 

es 

estis 

est 

sunt 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

Present 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Sim 

simus 

SIS 

sitis 

sit 

sint 

a64 

BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

Imperfect 

Imperfect 

eram             eramus 

essem    (or  forem)      essemus  {or  foremus) 

eras               eratis 

esses      {or  fores)        essetis     {or  foretis) 

erat              erant 

esset     {or  foret)        assent      {or  forent) 

Future 


erd 

erimus 

eris 

eritis 

erit 

enint 

Perfect 


Perfect 


fui 

fuimus 

fuisti 

fuistis 

fuit 

fuerunt  or-6re 

Pluperfect 

fueram 

fueramus 

fueras 

fueratis 

fuerat 

fuerant 

Future 

Perfect 

fuero 

fuerimus 

fueris 

fueritis 

fuerit 

fuerint 

IMPEEATIVE 

Present 

Sd 

pers.     es        este 

Future 

Sd 

pers.    esto     estote 

3d 

pers.    esto     sunto 

fuerim 

fuerimus 

fueris 

fueritis 

fuerit 

fuerint 

Pluperfect 

fuissem 

fuissemus 

fuisses 

fuissetis 

fuisset 

fuissent 

PAETICIPLE 

Fut.      futHrus    - 

INFINITIVE 
Pres.     esse 
Perf.     fuisse 
Fut.     fu turns  (esse)   or  fore 


APPENDIX 


365 


67. 


FIRST    CONJUGATION 


ACTIVE   VOICE 
Principal  parts:  laudo,  laudare,  laudavi,  laudatum 
INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 


Present 

Present 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

laudo 

laudamus 

laudem 

laudemus 

laudas 

laudatis 

laudes 

laudetis 

laudat 

laudant 

laudet 

laudent 

Imperfect 


Imperfect 


laudabam              laudabamus 

laudarem              laudaremus 

laudabas                laudabatis 

laudares                laudaretis 

laudabat               laudabant 

laudaret                laudarent 

Future 

laudabo                  laudabimus 

laudabis                 laudabitis 

laudabit                 laudabunt 

Perfect 

Perfect 

laudavi                  laudavimus 

laudaverim            laudaverimus 

laud^visti              laudavistis 

laudaveris             laudaveritis 

laudavit                laudaverunt 

laudaverit             laudaverint 

or  -ere 

Pluperfect 

Pluperfect 

laudaveram           laudaveramus 

laudavissem          laudavissemus 

laudaveras            laudaveratis 

laudavisses           laudavissetis 

laudaverat            laudaverant 

laudavisset           laudavissent 

Future  Perfect 

laudavero              laudaverimus 

laudaveris             laudaveritis 

laudaverit             laudaverint 

366  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

IMPERATIVE  INFINITIVE 


Present 
Sd  pers.    lauda        laudate 

Future 
M  pers.    laudato     laudatote 
3d  pers.     laudato     laudanto 


Fres.    laudare 

Ferf.     laudavisse 

Fuf.      laudattirus  (esse) 


PARTICIPLE 

SUPINE 

Fres.    laudans 

Ace. 

laudatum 

Fut.      laudaturus 

All. 

GERUND 
Gen.     laudandi 
Bat.      laudando 
Ace.      laudandum 
AU.      laudando 

laudatu 

FIEST    CONJUGATION 
PASSIVE    VOICE 
Pri  ncipal  parts :    laudor,  laudari,  laudatus  sum 
INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 


Present 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

laudor  laudamur 

laudaris  or  -re       laudamini 
laudatur  laudantur 

Imperfect 

laudabar  laudabamur 

laudabaris  or  -re  laudabamini 
laudabatur  laudabantur 

Future 

laudabor  laudabimur 

laudaberis  or  -re  laudabimini 
laudabitur  laudabuntur 


Present 


SINGULAR 

lauder 

lauderis  or  -re 
laudetur 


PLURAL 

laudemur 
laudemini 
laudentur 


Imperfect 


laudarer 
laudareris  or  -re 
laudaretur 


laudaremur 
laudaremini 
laudarentur 


APPENDIX 


367 


Perfect 

laudatus  sum        laudati  sumus 
laudatus  es  laudati  estis 

laudatus  est  laudati  sunt 

Pluperfect 

laudatus  eram      laudati  eramus 
laudatus  eras        laudati  eratis 
laudatus  erat        laudati  eraut 

Future  Perfect 
laudatus  ero         laudati  erimus  • 
laudatus  eris         laudati  eritis 
laudatus  erit        laudati  erunt 

IMPEKATIVE 

Present 

Sd  vers,    laudare  laudamini 

Future 
£d  pers.    laudator 
3d  pers.    laudator  laudantor 


Perfect 

laudatus  sim  laudati  simus 

laudatus  sis  laudati  sitis 

laudatus  sit  laudati  sint 

Pluperfect 

laudatus  essem      laudati  essemus 
laudatus  esses        laudati  essetis 
laudatus  esset       laudati  esseut 


INFINITIVE 


Pres.    laudari 
Perf.     laudatus  esse 
Fut.      laudatum  iri 


PAKTICIPLE 

Perf.     laudatus 
Fut.      laudandus 

68.  SECOND    CONJUGATION 

ACTIVE    VOICE 
Principal  parts:  moneo,  monere,  monui,  monitum 

INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 


Present 

Present 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

moneo 

monemus 

moneam 

moneamus 

mones 

monetis 

moneas 

moneatis 

monet 

monent 

moneat 

moneant 

368 


BELLUM   HELVETICUM 


Imperfect 
monebam  monebamus 

monebas  monebatis 

monebat  monebant 


Imperfect 
monerem  moneremus 

moneres  moneretis 

moneret  monerent 


Future 
monebo  monebimus 

monebis  monebitis 

monebit  monebunt 


Perfect 
monui  monuimus 

monuisti  monuistis 

monuit  monuerunt 

or  -ere 


Perfect 
monuerim  monueriinus 

monueris  monueritis 

monuerit  monuerint 


Pluperfect 
monueram       monueramus 
monueras         monueratis 
monuerat         monuerant 


Pluperfect 
monuissem         monuissemus 
monuisses  monuissetis 

monuisset  monuissent 


Future  Perfect 
monuero  monuerimus 

monueris  monueritis 

monuerit  monuerint 

IMPEEATIVE 

Present 
Sd  pers.     mone         monete 

Future 
Sd  pers.     moneto     monetote 
3d  pers.     moneto     monento 


INFINITIVE 

Pres.    monere 

Verf.     monuisse 

Fut.      monitiirus  (esse) 


PAETICIPLE 
Pres.    monens       Fut.    moniturus 


Ace. 


SUPINE 
monitum    Abl.     monitu 


GERUND 
Gen.     monendi 
Bat.      monendo 
Ace.     monendum 
Ahl.     monendo 


APPENDIX 


369 


SECOND    CONJUGATION 


PASSIVE    VOICE 
Principal  parts:    moneor,  moneri,  monitus  sum 
INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

Fresent  Present 


SINGULAR 

moneor 
moneris  or  -re 
monetur 


PLURAL 

monemur 
monemini 
monentur 


SINGULAR 

monear 
monearis  or  -re 
moneatur 


PLURAL 

moneamur 
moneamini 
moneantur 


Imperfect 

monebar  monebamur 

monebaris  or  -re      monebamini 
monebatur  monebantur 


Imperfect 


monerer 
monereris  or  -re 
moneretur 


moneremur 
moneremini 
monerentur 


Future 
monebor  monebimur 

moneberis  or  -re      monebimini 
monebitur  monebuntur 


Ferfect 


monitus  sum 
monitus  es 
monitus  est 


moniti  sumus 
moniti  estis 
moniti  sunt 


Perfect 

monitus  sim  moniti  simus 

monitus  sis  moniti  sitis 

monitus  sit  moniti  sint 


Pluperfect 

monitus  eram  moniti  eramus 

monitus  eras  moniti  eratis 

monitus  erat  moniti  erant 


Pluperfect 

monitus  essem        moniti  essemus 
monitus  esses         moniti  essetis 
monitus  esset         moniti  essent 


Future  Perfect 
monitus  ero  moniti  erimus 

monitus  erls  moniti  eritis 

monitus  erit  moniti  erunt 


370 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


IMPERATIVE 

Present 

2d  pers.    monere  monemini 

Future 
Sd  pers.     monetor 


3d  pers.    monetor 


INFINITIVE 

Pres.     moneri 
Ferf.     monitus 
Fut.      monitum  iri 


monentor 


PARTICIPLE 

Ferf.  monitus 
Fut.    monendus 


69.  THIRD    CONJUGATION 

ACTIVE    VOICE 
Principal  parts:   duco,  ducere,  duxi,  ductum 
INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

Present  Present 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

duco 

ducimus 

ducam 

ducamus 

ducis 

ducitis 

ducas 

ducatis 

ducit 

ducunt 

ducat 

ducant 

Imperfect 

Imperfect 

duceham 

ducebamus 

ducerem 

duceremus 

ducebas 

ducebatis 

duceres 

duceretis 

ducebat 

ducebant 

duceret 

ducerent 

Future 

ducam  ducemus 

duces  ducetis 

ducet  ducent 


Perfect 


duxi 

duxist^ 

duxit 


duximus 
duxistis 
duxerunt 
or  -6re 


Perfect 


duxerim 

duxeris 

duxerit 


duxerimus 

duxeritis 

duxerint 


APPENDIX 

3YJ. 

Pluperfect 

Pluperfect 

duxeram 

duxeramus 

duxissem                 duxissemus 

duxeras 

duxeratis 

duxisses                   duxissetis 

duxerat 

duxerant 

duxisset                  duxissent 

Future  Perfect 

duxero 

duxerimus 

duxeris 

duxeritis 

duxerit 

duxerint 

IMPEEATIVE 

INFINITIVE 

Present 

2d  pers. 

due*                    ducite 

Pres.    ducere 

Future 

Perf.    duxisse 

M  pers. 

dueito                 ducitote 

Fut.      ductunis  (esse) 

3d  pers. 

ducito                  ducunto 

PAETIOIPLE 

SUPINE 

Pres. 

ducens 

Ace.    duetum 

Put. 

ductunis 

All.    duetu 

GERUND 

Gen. 

ducendi 

Bat. 

ducendo 

Ace. 

ducendmn 

AU. 

ducendo 

THIRD    CONJUGATION 


PASSIVE    VOICE 
Principal  parts :    ducor,  duci,  ductus  sum 


INDICATIVE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

Present 

Present 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

ducor 

dueimur 

ducar 

ducamur 

diiceris  or  -re 

duciminT 

ducaris  or  -re 

ducamini 

ducitur 

ducuntur 

ducatur 

ducantur 

*  Irregular  for  duce. 


372 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


Imperfect 

ducebar  ducebamur 

ducebaris  or  -re       ducebamini 
ducebatur  ducebantur 


Imperfect 

ducerer  duceremur 

ducereris  or  -re        duceremini 
ducerStur  ducerentur 


Future 

ducar  ducemur 

duceris  or  -re  ducemini 

ducetur  ducentur 


ductus  sum 
ductus  es 
ductus  est 


Perfect 


ducti  sumus 
ducti  estis 
ducti  sunt 


Perfect 

ductus  sim  ducti  simus 

ductus  sis  ducti  sitis 

ductus  sit  ducti  sint 


Pluperfect 

ductus  eram  ducti  eramus  ductus  essem 

ductus  eras  ducti  eratis  ductus  esses 

ductus  erat  ducti  erant  ductus  esset 


Pluperfect 

ducti  essemus 

ducti  essetis 

ducti  essent 


Future  Perfect 

ductus  ero  ducti  erimus 

ductus  eris  ducti  eritis 

ductus  erit  ducti  erunt 


IMPERATIVE 

Present 

2d  pers.    ducere  ducimini 

Future 
M  pers.    ducitor 
3d  pers.    ducitor  ducuntor 


INFINITIVE 

Pres.     duci 

Perf.    ductus  esse 

Fut.      ductum  iri 


PARTICIPLE 

Perf.  ductus 
Fut.    ducendus 


APPENDIX 


373 


70.  FOURTH    CONJUGATION 

ACTIVE    VOICE 

Principal  parts:   audio,  audire,  audivi,  auditum 
INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

Present  Present 


SINGULAR 

PLUEAL 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

audio 

audimus 

audiam 

audiamus 

audis 

auditis 

audias 

audiatis 

audit 

audiunt 

audiat 

audiant 

Imperfect 

Imperfect 

audiebam 

audiebamus 

audirem 

audiremus 

audiebas 

audiebatis 

audires 

audiretis 

audiebat 

audiebant 

audiret 

audirent 

Future 
audiam  audiemus 

audies  audietis 

audiet  audient 

Perfect  Perfect 

audivi  audlvimus  audiverim  audiverimus 

audlvisti  audlvistis  audiveris  audiveritis 

audivit  audiverunt  or  -ere  audiverit  audiverint 


Pluperfect 

audiveram  audiveramus 

audiveras  audiveratis 

audiverat  audiverant 


Pluperfect 

audivissem  audivissemus 

audivisses  audivissetis 

audivisset  audivissent 


Future  Perfect 

audlvero 
audiveris 
audiverit 


audiverimus 

audiveritis 

audiverint 


374 


BELLUM   HELVETICUM 


IMPEKATIVE 
Present 
Sdpers.    audi  audite 

Future 
2d  pers.     audito  auditote 

3d  pers.     audito  audiunt5 

PARTICIPLE 
Pres.    audiens       Fut.     auditurus 


Ace. 


SUPINE 
auditmn       AM.    auditu 


INFINITIVE 

Pres.     audire 

Perf.     audivisse 

Fut.      auditurus  (esse) 


GERUND 

Gen.  audiendi 

Dat.  audiendo 

Ace.  audiendum 

Ahl  audiendo 


FOUETH    CONJUGATION 

PASSIVE   VOICE 

Principal  parts:    audior,  audiri,  auditus  sum 

INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

Present  Present 


SINGULAR 

audior 

audiris  or  -re 
auditur 


PLURAL 

audimur 
audimini 
audiuntur 


Imperfect 
audiebar  audiebamur 

audiebaris  or  -re     audiebamini 
audiebatur  audiebantur 


audiar 
audieris  or 
audietur 


Future 

audiemur 

-re         audiemini 

audientur 


Perfect 


auditus  sum 
auditus  es 
auditus  est 


audit!  sumus 
audit!  estis 
audit!  sunt 


SINGULAR  PLURAL 

audiar  audiamur 

audiaris  or  -re  audiamini 

audiatur  audiantur 

Imperfect 

au  direr  audiremur 

audireris  or  -re  audiremini 

audiretur  audirentur 


Perfect 
auditus  Sim  auditi  simus 

auditus  sis  auditi  sitis 

auditus  sit  auditi  sint 


APPENDIX 


375 


Pluperfect 
auditus  eram  audit!  eramus 

auditus  eras  audit!  eratis 

auditus  erat  audit!  erant 

Future  Perfect 
auditus  ero  audit!  erimus 

auditus  eris  audit!  eritis 

auditus  erit  audit!  erunt 

IMPEEATIVE 

Present 
2d  pers.     aud!re  audimini 

Future 
2d  pers.     aiiditor 


Pluperfect 

auditus  essem        audit!  essemus 

auditus  esses         audit!  essetis 

auditus  esset  audit!  essent 


INFINITIVE 

Pres.     aud!r! 
Perf.     auditus  esse 
Fut.      auditum  iri 


3d  pers.     aud!tor 


audiuntor 

PAETICIPLE 
Perf.  auditus 
Fut.    audiendus 


71.  THIRD  CONJUGATION  IN  /O 

ACTIVE    VOICE 
Principal  parts :  capio,  capere,  cepi,  captum 
INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

Present  Present 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

capio 

capimus 

capis 

capitis 

capit 

capiunt 

Imperfect 

capiebam 

capiebamus 

eapiel)as 

capiebatis 

capiebat 

capiebant 

Future 

capiam 

capiemus 

capies 

capietis 

capiet 

capient 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

capiam 

capiamus 

capias 

capiatis 

capiat 

capiant 

Imperfect 

caperem 

caperemus 

caperes 

caperetis 

caperet 

caperent 

376 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


Perfect 
cepi  cepimus 

cepisti  cepistis 

cepit  ceperunt  or  -ere 

Pluperfect 
ceperam  ceperamus 

ceperas  ceperatis 

ceperat  eeperant 


Perfect 
ceperim  ceperimus 

ceperis  ceperitis 

ceperit  ceperint 

Pluperfect 
cepissem  cepissemus 

cepisses  cepissetis 

cepisset  cepissent 


Future  Perfect 

cepero 

ceperimus 

ceperis 

ceperitis 

ceperit 

ceperint 

IMPERATIVE 

INt^INITIVE 

Present 

2d  pers. 

cape              capite 

Pres.    capere 

Future 

Perf.     cepisse 

2d  pers. 

capito            capitote 

Fut.      capturus  (esse) 

3d  pers.     capito  capiunto 

PAETICIPLE 

Pres.    capiens         Fut.    capturus 

SUPINE 
Ace.      captum        Ahl.    captu 


GERUND 

Gen.  capiendi 

Dat.  capiendo 

Ace.  capiendum 

AH.  capiendo 


THIRD    CONJUGATION    IN    10 

PASSIVE    VOICE 

Principal  parts:    capior,  capi,  captus  sum 

INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 


Present 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

capior  capimur 

caperis  or  -re  capimini 

capitur  capiuntur 


Present 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

capiar  capiamur 

capiaris  or  -re         capiamini 
capiatur  capiantur 


APPENDIX 


377 


Imperfect 


capiebar 
capiebaris  or  -re 
capiebatur 


capiebamur 
capiebamini 
capiebantur 


Imperfect 


caperer 
capereris  or 
caperetur 


■re 


caperemur 
caperemini 
caperentur 


Future 


capiar 

eapieris  or  -re 
capietur 


capiemur 
capiemini 
capientur 


captus  sum 
captus  es 
captus  est 


Perfect 


capti  sumus 
capti  estis 
capti  sunt 


captus  Sim 
captus  sis 
captus  sit 


Perfect 


capti  simus 
capti  sitis 
capti  sint 


Pluperfect 


captus  eram 
captus  eras 
captus  erat 


capti  eramus 
capti  eratis 
capti  erant 


captus  essem 
captus  esses 
captus  esset 


Pluperfect 

capti  essemus 

capti  essetis 

capti  essent 


Future  Perfect 

captus  ero 
captus  eris 
captus  erit 


capti  erimus 
capti  eritis 
capti  erunt 


IMPERATIVE 
Present 
Sdpers.    capere  capimini 

Future 
Sd  pers.     capitor 
3d  per s.     capitor  capiuntor 


INFINITIVE 

Pres.     capi 
Perf.     captus 
Fut.      captum  iri 


PARTICIPLE 

Pcrf.  captus 
Fut.    capiendus 


378 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


CONTRACTED    FORMS 

72.  When  the  perfect  stem  ends  in  v,  the  v  is  sometimes  dropped, 
and  usually  the  two  vowels  thus  brought  together  contract  into  one. 

a.  Perfects  in  -avi,  -evi,  and  -ovi,  and  the  other  tenses  based  on 
the  same  stem,  sometimes  (apparently)  drop  ve,  ve,  or  vi  before  r  or  s. 

Examples:  laudastiforlaudavisti;  laudasse  forlaudavisse;  delerunt 
for  deleverunt;    norim  for  noverira. 

6.  Perfects  in  -ivi,  and  the  other  tenses  based  on  the  same  stem, 
sometimes  drop  v  in  all  forms.  When  the  resulting  combination  is 
iis  it  usually  contracts  to  is. 

Examples:  audil  for  audivi;  audieram  for  audiveram;  audisse  for 
audivisse. 

DEPONENT   VERBS 

73.  Deponent  verbs  have  passive  forms  with  active  meanings. 
But  the  future  passive  participle  is  passive  in  sense,  and  the  perfect 
participle  is  sometimes  so.  On  the  other  hand  they  have  the  follow- 
ing active  forms:  future  infinitive,  present  and  future  participles, 
gerund,  supine. 

Of  the  following  verbs  the  principal  parts,  indicative,  subjunctive, 
and  imperative  are  precisely  the  same  as  those  for  the  passive  voice 
of  the  verbs  already  given  for  the  corresponding  conjugations. 


hortor,  urge  vereor,  fear         sequor,  follow 

INFINITIVE 
Pres.    hortari  vereri  sequi  . 

Terf.  hortatus  esse  veritus  esse  secutus 

Fut.    hortatums  (esse)   veriturus  (esse)    secuturus 


partior,  share 


partiri 
partltus  esse 
partiturus 
)  (esse) 


PARTICIPLE 


Tres.  hortans 
Perf.  hortatus 
Fut.     hortaturus 
Fut.  Pass,  hortandus 


verens 
veritus 
veriturus 
verendus 


sequens 
secutus 
secuturus 
sequendus 


partiens 
partltus 
partiturus 
partiendus 


GERUND 
hortandi,  -6,  etc.    verendi,  etc.         sequendi,  etc.  partiendi,  etc. 

SUPINE 
hortatum,  -tu         veritum,  -tu         secutum,  -tu     partitum,  -tfl 


APPENDIX  379 

SEMI-DEPONENT    VERBS 

74.  Semi-deponent  verbs  have  active  forms  for  the  tenses  based 
on  the  present  stem,  passive  forms  for  those  based  on  the  perfect 
stem. 

They  are: 

audeo,  audere,  ausus  sum,  dare 
gaudeo,  gaudere,  gavisus  sum,  rejoice 
soleo,  solera,  solitus  sum,  he  accustomed 
fido,  fidere,  fisus  sum,  trust 

PERIPHRASTIC    CONJUGATION 

75.  The  active  periphrastic  conjugation  expresses  future  or  intended 
action.  It  is  formed  by  combining  the  future  active  participle  with 
the  verb  sum:    thus, 

Fres.  laudaturus  sum,  I  am  about  to  praise,  I  intend  to  praise. 
Imp.  laudaturus  eram,  I  was  about  to  praise,  I  intended  to  praise,  etc. 

76.  The  passive  periphrastic  conjugation  expresses  obligation  or 
necessity.  It  is  formed  by  combining  the  future  passive  participle 
with  the  verb  sum:    thus, 

Pres.  laudandus  sum,  I  am  to  be  (must  be)  praised,  I  have  to  be  praised. 
Imp.  laudandus  eram,  I  was  to  be  praised,  I  had  to  be  praised,  etc. 

IRREGULAR    VERBS 
SUM  AND    ITS    COMPOUNDS 

77.  For  the  conjugation  of  sum,  see  66.  Sum  is  inflected  in  the 
same  way  when  compounded  with  the  prepositions  ad,  de,  in,  inter, 
ob,  prae,  sub,  super.    Praesum  has  a  present  participle,  praesens. 

78.  In  absum,  sum  is  inflected  in  the  same  way,  but  a  is  used  for 
ab  before  f,  giving  afui,  afuturus,  etc.  There  is  a  present  participle 
absens. 

79.  In  prosum,  sum  is  inflected  in  the  same  way,  but  the  preposi- 
tion pro  has  its  original  form  prod  before  all  forms  of  sum  beginning 
with  e;  as,  prodesse,  proderam.  The  present  tense  is,  prosum,  prodes, 
prodest,  prosumus,  prodestis,  prosunt. 

80.  Possum,  be  able,  can,  is  a  compound  of  pot-  and  sum. 

Principal  parts :    possum,  posse,  potui 


380 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


INDICATIVE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

Pres. 

possum,  potes,  potest 
possumus,  potestis,  possunt 

possim 

Imp. 

poteram 

possem 

Fut. 

potero 

Perf. 

potui 

potuerim 

Plup. 

potuerara 

potuissem 

Fut.  Perf. 

potuero 

INFINITIVE 

PAETICIPLE 

Pres. 

posse 

Pres.    potens 

Perf. 

potuisse 

81. 


f  ero,  f  erre,  tuU,  latum,  bear 
ACTIVE  VOICE 


INDICATIVE 


Pres.  fero,  fers,  fert, 

ferimus,  fertis,  ferunt 

Imp,  ferebam 

Fut.  feram 

Perf.  tull 

Plup.  tiileram 

Fut.  Perf.  tulero 


IMPEKATIVE 
Pres.    fer  ferte 

Fut.     ferto       fertote 
ferto       ferunto 

GEEUND 
f  erendi,  etc. 


INFINITIVE 
Pres.    ferre 
Perf.   tulisse 
Fut.     laturus  (esse) 


PASSIVE    VOICE 


INDICATIVE 
Pres.  feror,  ferris,  fertur, 

ferimur,  ferimini,  feruntur 
Imp.  ferebar 

Fut.  ferar 

Perf.  latus  sum 

Plup.  latus  eram 

Fut.  Perf.        latus  ero 


SUBJUNCTIVE 
feram 

ferrem 

tulerim 
tulissem 

PAETICIPLE 
Pres.  ferens 
Fut.     laturus 

SUPINE 
latum,  -tu 

SUBJUNCTIVE 
ferar 

ferrer 

latus  sim 
latus  essem 


IMPEKATIVE 

Pres.    ferre,         ferimini 
Fut.     fertor 

fertor,       feruntor 


APPENDIX 
INFINITIVE 

Pres.   ferri 
Perf.  latus  esse 
Fut.     latum  iri 


82. 


volo,  velle,  volui,  he  willing 
nolo,  nolle,  nolui,  he  U7iwilling 
malo,  malle,  malui,  prefer 


381 
PAKTICIPLE 
Perf.  latus 

FuU    ferendus 


INDICATIVE 

Pres. 

volo 

nolo 

malo 

vis 

non  vis 

mavis 

vult 

non  vult 

mavult 

volumus 

nolumus 

malumus 

vultis 

non  vultis 

mavultis 

volunt 

nolunt 

malunt 

Imp. 

volebam 

nolebam 

malebam 

Fut. 

volam 

nolam 

malam 

Perf. 

volui 

nolui 

malui 

Plup. 

volueram 

nolueram 

malueram 

Fut.  Perf. 

voluero 

n61uer5 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

maluero 

Pres. 

velim 

nolim 

malim 

Imp. 

vellem 

nollem 

mallem 

Perf. 

voluerim 

noluerim 

maluerim 

Plup, 

voluissem 

noluissem 
IMPEEATIVE 

maluissem 

Pres 

.     noli            nolite 

Fut. 

nolito         nolitote 
nolito         nolunto 

INFINITIVE 

Pres.   velle 

nolle 

malle 

Perf.  voluisse 

noluisse 

maluisse 

PAETICIPLE 

Pres,   volens 

nolens 

382 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


83.  Fio,  be  made,  1)6  done,  'become,  happen,  is  the  irregular  passive 
of  facio,  male.  Note  the  i  before  all  vowels,  except  before  e  in  the 
combination  -er. 

Principal  parts:    fio,  fieri,  f actus  sum 


INDICATIVE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

Pres. 

fio,  fis,  fit, 
fimus,  fitis,  fiunt 

fiam 

Imp. 

fiebam 

fierem 

Fut. 

fiam 

Perf. 

factus  sum 

factus  sim 

Plup. 

factus  eram 

factus  essem 

Fut.  Perf. 

factus  ero 

IMPERATIVE            INFINITIVE 

PARTICIPLE 

Pres.     fi,  fite                     Pres.     fieri 

Perf.     factus 

Perf.    factus  esse 

Fut.      faciendus 

Fut.      factum  Iri 

84. 

eo,  ire,  ii,  itum,  go 

INDICATIVE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

Pres. 

eo,  is,  it, 
imus,  itis,  eunt 

earn 

Imp. 

ibam 

irem 

Fut. 

ibo 

Perf. 

ii  {for  ivi) 

ierim 

Plup. 

ieram 

iissem  or  issem 

Fut.  Perf. 

ier5 

IMPERATIVE                         INFINITIVE 

PARTICIPLE 

Pres.     i, 

ite               Pres.     ire 

Pres.     iens  {Gen.  euntis) 

Fut.      ltd, 

itote           Perf.     iisse  or  isse 

Fut.      itiirus 

ito, 

eunto          Fut.      itiirus  (esse) 

GERUND 

SUPINE 

eundi,  etc. 

itum,  -tii 

a.  In  the   tenses  based    on  the  perfect  stem,  ii   usually  contracts 
to  i  before  s. 


APPENDIX 


383 


85.  Do,  dare,  dedi,  datum,  give,  is  conjugated  like  a  verb  of  the 
first  conjugation,  except  that  the  stem-vowel  is  regularly  short  a.  a 
appears  only  in  the  following  active  forms, — das,  da,  dans. 


86. 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS 


The  most  important  of  these  are  the  perfects  memini,  I  remember; 
odi,  I  hate;  and  coepi,  I  have  begun.  Notice  that  memini  and  odi  have 
the  meanings  of  presents.  Their  pluperfects  and  future  perfects  have  the 
meanings  of  imperfects  and  futures. 


INDICATIVE 

Perf. 

memini 

odi 

coepi 

Plup. 

memineram 

oderam 

coeperam 

Fut.  Perf. 

meminero 

odero 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

coeperd     . 

Perf. 

meminerlm 

oderim 

coeperim 

Plup. 

meminissem 

odissem 
IMPEEATIVE 

coepissem 

Sing. 

memento 

Plur. 

mementote 

INFINITIVE 

Perf. 

meminisse 

odisse 

coepisse 

Fut. 

osurus  (esse) 
PARTICIPLE 

coepturus  (esse) 

Perf. 

osus 

coeptus 

Fut. 

osurus 

coepturus 

a.  Instead  of  coepi  the  passive  form  coeptus  sum  is  regularly  used 
when  a  passive  infinitive  depends  on  it.  Example:  laudari  coeptus 
est,  he  began  to  be  praised. 


87. 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS 


Impersonal  verbs  correspond  to  English  impersonals  with  it.  They 
have  no  personal  subject,  but  most  of  them  take  as  subject  a  substantive 
clause  or  sometimes  a  neuter  pronoun.     They  appear  only  in  the  third 


384  BELLUM    HELVETICUM 

person  singular  of  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  tenses,  the  present 
and  perfect  infinitives,  and  occasionally  in  the  participles  and  gerund. 
They  are: 

a.  Most  verbs  expressing  actions  of  nature;    as  pluit,  it  rains. 

J).  The  following,  which  are  exclusively  impersonal:  decet,  it  te- 
comes;  libet,  it  pleases;  licet,  it  is  permitted;  miseret,  it  causes  pity; 
oportet,  it  is  right;  paenitet,  it  repents;  piget,  it  displeases;  pudet, 
it  shames;  refert,  it  concerns;  taedet,  it  wearies.  All  of  these  except 
refert  belong  to  the  second  conjugation. 

c.  Personal  verbs  used  impersonally  with  a  special  meaning;  as 
accedit,  it  is  added,  from  accedo,  I  approach. 

d.  The  passives  of  most  intransitive  verbs;  as  puguatur,  it  is  fought. 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


References  to  the  body  of  the  book  are  thus:  §736;  to  the  Appendix 
thus:  App.  86.  The  numerals  refer  to  the  lines  as  numbered  in  the 
continuous  text,  pages  317-333. 


A.,  the  abbreviation  for  Aulus, 
a  Roman  ''first  name"  [prae- 
nomen] 

a,  ab,  abs,  preposition  with  abla- 
tive, away  from,  from;  express- 
ing agency  with  passive  verbs, 
hy;  with  verbs  of  happening,  at 
the  hands  of,  line  377;  at,  on, 
e.  g.,  line  463.  In  composition 
with  verbs  it  means  away,  from 

ab-do,  ab-dere,  ab-didi,  ab-ditum 
[do,  dare,  dedi,  datum,  give, 
which  in  composition  often 
means  put],  literally,  put  away; 
regularly,  conceal,  hide  (transi- 
tive), se  abdere,  literally,  con- 
ceal one's  self,  i.e.,  hide  (in- 
transitive), withdraw 

ab-duc6,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -ductum, 

.     lead  away,  carry  away 

abs-tineo,  -tinere,  -tinui,  -tentum 
[teneo,  tenere,  tenui,  tentum, 
hold],  literally,  hold  away,  i.e., 
refrain 

ab-sum,  ab-esse,  a-fui,  (a-futurus), 
present  participle  absens,  he 
away,  he  from;  in  translating 
any  adverbial  modifier  of  this 
verb,  put  it  before  the  word 
away  or  from  in  English;   e.  g., 


longe  abesse,  to  he  far  away; 
neque  abest  suspicio,  literally, 
and  the  suspicion  is  not  away,  or 
is  not  lacking,  i.  e.,  there  is  good 
reason  to  suspect 

ac,  a  form  of  atque,  used  before 
some  consonants 

ac-cedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -cessum 
[ad,  to],  literally,  go  to  or 
toward;  approach;  he  added, 
line  348. 

acceptus,  -a,  -um,  participle  of 
acciplo 

ac-cido,    ac-cidere,    ac-cidi,    , 

[ad,  to,  cado,  cadere,  cecidi, 
casum,  fall],  literally,  fall  to 
(anyone);  regularly,  he  fall,  hap- 
pen 

ac-cipio,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -ceptum 
[ad,  to,  capio,  capere,  cepi,  cap- 
turn,  take],  literally,  take  to 
(one's  self);  regularly,  receive; 
acceptus,  -a,  -um,  perfect  pas- 
sive participle  used  as  an  ad- 
jective, literally,  having  heen 
received;  acceptahle 

ac-curro,  -currere,  -cucurri  or 
-curri,  -cursum  [ad,  to],  liter- 
ally, run  to;    ride  up,  hasten 

ac-cus6,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [ad,  to, 
and  a  verb  derived  from  causa. 


385 


386 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


caiisel,  literally,  call  to  account; 
reproach,  line  296;  accuse,  line 
352 

ficer,  acris,  acre,  comparative 
acrior,  superlative  acerrimus, 
sharp,  leeii 

acies,  aciei,  f.,  plural  limited  to 
nominative  and  accusative  [acer, 
s/iar2)],  literally,  sharpness,  point, 
edge;  regularly,  line  of  battle, 
battle  line,  line  467 

acri-ter,  adverb,  comparative  5cri- 
us,  superlative  acerrime  [acer, 
sharp],  sharply 

ad,  preposition  with  accusative; 
with  verb  denoting  motion,  to, 
toward,  or  in  hostile  sense, 
against;  with  verbs  denoting 
situation,  in  the  vicinity  of,  near, 
at,  on,  e.  g.,  ad  Hispaniam,  line 
22;  before  numerals,  as  many 
as,  to  the  number  of,  about,  e.  g., 
line  71;  denoting  purpose  or 
design,  for,  e.  g.,  ad  earn  rem, 
line  81,  and  so  with  gerund  and 
gerundive,  e.g.,  line  47;  in  ex- 
pressions of  time,  to,  till,  e.  g., 
ad  vesperum,  ad  multam  noc- 
tem,  lines  473,  474;  in  composi- 
tion with  verbs  it  means  to, 
toward,  near 

ad-diico,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -ductum, 

literally,  lead  on,  induce;  regu- 
larly, in  perfect  passive  parti- 
ciple modified  by  ablative,  in- 
duced 
ad-hibeo,  -hibere,  -hibui,  -hibitum 
[habeo,  habere,  habui,  habi- 
tum,  have,  hold],  literally,  hold 
near;  have  .  .  .  present,  line  385 


ad-miror,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  wonder, 
be  surprised 

ad-mltto,  -mittere,  -misi,  -missum, 
literally,  let  go  toward  Sinjthmg; 
equo  admisso,  literally,  his  horse 
having  been  let  go,  i.  e.,  at  full 
speed,  on  the  gallop 

ad-orior,  -oriri,  -ortus  sum,  liter- 
ally, rise  against;  regularly,  at- 
tach 

ad-scisc6,  -sciscere,  -scivi,  -scitum 
[scio,  Mow,  receive  as  true],  lit- 
erally, receive  to  anyone;  accept 

ad-sum,   ad-esse,  af-fui,  ,  be 

near 

adulescentia,  -ae,  f.  [adulescens, 
a  youth],  youth,  youthfulness 

adventus,  -us,  m.  [ad-venio,  confie 
to],  literally,  a  coming  to  any- 
one; i.e.,  coming,  arrival,  ap- 
proach 

adversus,  -a,  -um,  participle  of 
ad-verto 

ad-verto,  -vertere,  -verti,  -versum, 
literally,  turn  to;  animum  ad- 
vertere,  literally,  turn  the  mind 
to,  i.  e.,  notice;  see  animadverts. 
Perfect  passive  participle  used 
as  an  adjective,  literally,  turned 
against,  i.  e.,  unsuccessful,  ad- 
verse 

aedificium,  -i,  n.  [aedifico,  build, 
from  aedes,  dwelling,  and  facio, 
maJce],  building 

Aeduus,  -a,  -um,  adjective,  Aeduan  ; 
of  the  Aeduans,  relating  to  the 
Aeduans.  Masculine  used  as  a 
substantive:  singular,  an  Aedu- 
an, the  Aeduan,  lines  56,  151; 
plural,  the  Aeduans,  the  Aedui, 
the  leading  tribe  of  Gaul 


VOCABULARY 


387 


aeger,  aegra,  aegrum,  comparative 
aegrior,  superlative  aegerrimus, 
ill,  sick 

aegre,  adverb,  comparative  aegrius, 
superlative,  aegerrime,  [aeger, 
ill'\,  literally,  illy;  regularly, 
hardly,  with  difficulty;  superla- 
tive, with  the  greatest  difficulty 

Aemilius,  -i,  m.  (Lucius)  Aemilius, 
a  Koman  decurion  of  cavalry 

aequo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [aequus, 
even],  literally,  maTce  even,  i.e., 
equalize 

af-ficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fectum  [ad, 
to,  facio,  facere,  feci,  factum 
do],  literally,  do  to;  affect,  fill, 
line  38;  visit,  line  500 

affinitas,  affinitatis,  f.  [ad,  to, 
finis,  boundary],  connection,  re- 
lationship by  marriage 

ager,  agri,  m.,  literally,  cultivated 
land;  regularly,  field;  territory, 
lines  31,  91,  162;    land,  line  520 

ag-gredior,  ag-gredi,  ag-gressus 
sum  [ad,  to,  gradior,  gradi, 
gressus  sum,  step],  literally,  go 
toward,  ''go  for";  regularly, 
attacTc 

agmen,  agminis,  n.  [ago,  drive], 
army  on  the  march;  line  of 
march,  line  462 ;  novissimum  ag- 
men, literally,  the  newest  part  of 
the  line  of  march,  i.  e.,  the  rear 

ago,  agere,  egi,  actum,  literally, 
put  in  motion,  drive;  speaTc,  dis- 
cuss, line  227;  do,  line  390 

alienus,  -a,  -um  [alius,  another], 
literally,  belonging  to  another; 
unfavorable,  line  270 

aliqui,    aliqua,    aliquod,    genitive 


alicuius,  dative  alicui,  etc.,  in- 
definite adjective   (some),  any 

alius,  alia,  aliud,  genitive  alius, 
dative  alii,  etc.;  singular,  an- 
other; plural,  other  or  others. 
Masculine  used  as  a  substantive 
with  the  same  meanings,  alia  res, 
literally,  another  thing,  i.  e.,  any- 
thing else,  line  488.  As  correl- 
atives, alius  .  .  .  alius,  one  .  .  . 
another;  plural,  alii  .  .  .  alii, 
some  .  .  .  others.     See  §283 

Allobroges,  Allobrogum,  m.,  the 
Allohroges,  a  tribe  in  that  part 
of  Italy  beyond  the  Po,  which 
was  called  Cisalpine  Gaul 

alo,  alere,  alui,  alitum  or  altum, 
literally,  nourish;  support,  line 
329 

Alpes,  Alpium,  p.,  the  Alps,  a  term 
applied  by  the  Romans  to  all 
the  mountains  in  the  vicinity 
of  modern  Switzerland 

alter,  altera,  alterum,  genitive 
alterius,  dative  alteri,  etc.,  regu- 
larly, the  other  (of  two),  line  97; 
the  second  (of  more  than  two), 
line  32.  As  correlatives,  alter 
.  .  .  alter,  the  one  .  .  .  the  other; 
plural,  alteri  .  .  .  alteri,  the  one 
party  .  .  .  the  other  party;  the 
one  force  .  .  .  the  other  force, 
line  471.     See  §283 

altitude,  altitudinis,  r.  [altus, 
high,  deep],  height,  depth 

altus,  -a,  -um,  high,  deep 

Ambarri,  -orum,  m.  [ambi,  about, 
Arar,  the  Saone],  the  Ambarri, 
kinsmen  of  the  Aeduans,  south- 
east of  them,  near  the  Saone 

amicitia,  -ae,  f.  [amicus,  friendly], 


388 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


literally,  friendliness ;  regularly, 
friendship,  which  in  foreign  re- 
lations practically  meant  alliance^ 
line  47 

amicus,  -a,  -um,  friendly,  line  153. 
Masculine  used  as  a  substantive, 
friend,  line  54 

a-mitto,  -mittere,  -misi,  -missum, 
literally,  let  go  away;  regularly, 
lose 

amor,  amoris,  m.  [amo,  love'],  love 

amplus,  -a,  -um,  large, great.  Neuter 
comparative  used  as  a  substan- 
tive, more 

anceps,  genitive  ancipitis,  adjec- 
tive [ambo,  loth,  two,  caput, 
head],  literally,  two-headed; 
doubtful,  line  469 

angustiae,  -arum,  f.  [angustus, 
narrow],  literally,  narrowness, 
line  149;  narrow  pass,  line  181 

angustus,  -a,  -um,  literally,  nar- 
row, line  94;  small,  limited,  line 
39 

anim-ad-verto,  -vertere,  -verti, 
-versum  [animum,  accusative  of 
SLUimus,  mind],  literally,  turn  the 
mind  to;  in  eum  animadvertere, 
attend  to  him,  punish  him 

animus,  -i,  m.,  literally,  mind;  en- 
ergy, courage ;  feelings, lines  358, 
366 ;  sympathies,  line  380 

annus,  -i,  m.,  year 

annuus,  -a,  -um  [annus, year],  year- 
ly, annual;  translated  by  adverb, 
annually,  line  294 

ante,  adverb  and  preposition  with 
accusative,  "before;  ante  diem 
quintum,  the  fifth  day  before 

antea,  adverb,  before 


antiquus,  -a,  -um  [ante,  before], 
former 

a-perio,  -perire,  -perui,  -pertum, 
open.  Perfect  passive  participle, 
used  as  an  adjective,  literally, 
opened;  regularly,  exposed,  open, 
unprotected 

apertus,  -a,  -um,  participle  of 
aperio 

appello,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  call  (by 
name) 

Aprilis,  -e,  abbreviation  Apr.,  ad- 
jective, of  April 

apud,  preposition  with  accusative; 
with  plural  object,  regularly 
among;  with  singular  object, 
with,  lines  378,  383;  apud  se, 
literally,  before  himself,  i.  e.,  in 
his  presence,  line  365 

Aquileia,  -ae,  f.,  Aquileia,  a  Roman 
city  at  the  head  of  the  Adriatic 
sea 

Aquitania,  -ae,  f.  [Aquitani], 
Aquitania,  the  southern  of  the 
three  parts  into  which  Caesar 
divided  Gaul 

Aquitanus,  -a,  -um,  of  Aquitania, 
Aquitanian.  Masculine  used  as  a 
substantive,  an  Aquitanian,  one 
of  the  Aquitani;  plural,  the  Aqui- 
tanians,  the  Aquitani,  inhabit- 
ants of  Aquitania 

Arar,  Araris,  m.,  accusative  Ara- 
rim,  ablative  Arari,  the  Saone, 
a  river  of  southern  Gaul,  tribu- 
tary to  the  Rhone 

arbitror,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  thinh 

arma,  -orum,  n.,  arms 

a-scendo,  -scendere,  -scendi,  -scen- 
sum   [ad,  to,  scando,  scandere. 


VOCABULARY 


389 


scandi,  scansum,  climh],  literallj, 
climb  to;    climb  up,  ascend 

ascensus,  -us,  m.  [ascendo,  ascend], 
ascent 

atque,  coordinate  conjunction,  and, 
usually  emphasizing  what  fol- 
lows; after  words  which  imply 
comparison  it  means  thayi,  as, 
from  what,  etc.,  according  to  the 
English  requirement;  e.  g,,  par 
atque,  the  same  as,  lines  521, 
522 

at-tingo,  at-tingere,  at-tigi,  at- 
tactum  [ad,  to,  tango,  tangere, 
tetigi,  tactum,  touch],  literally, 
tonch  upon;    border  on 

auctoritas,  auctoritatis,  f.,  in- 
fluence 

audacia,  -ae,  f.  [audax,  audacis, 
daring,  bold],  daring,  boldness 

audac-ter,  adverb,  comparative 
audacius,  superlative  audacis- 
sime  [audax,  genitive  audacis, 
comparative  audacior,  superla- 
tive audacissimus  (from  aude5, 
dare),  daring],  daringly,  boldly 

auded,  audere,  ausus  sum,  semi- 
deponent,  dare 

audio,  audire,  audivi,  auditum, 
hear 

augeo,  augere,  auxi,  auctum,  in- 
crease 

Aulus,  -i,  M.,  abbreviation  A., 
Aulus,  a  Eoman  *^ first  name'' 
[prae-nomen] 

aut,  coordinate  conjunction,  or; 
aut  .  .  .  aut,  correlative,  either 
.  .  ,  or 

autem,  coordinate  conjunction, 
moreover 

auxilium,  -i,  n.  [augeo,  increase], 


aid,  help;  reinforcement,  line 
345;  plural,  auxiliary  forces, 
auxiliaries 

a  versus,  -a,  -um,  participle  of 
averto 

a-verto,  -vertere,  -verti,  -versum, 
turn  away.  Perfect  passive  parti- 
ciple used  as  an  adjective,  liter- 
ally, turned  away,  i.  e.,  with  his 
bach  turned,  fleeing,  retreating 

avus,  -i,  M.,  grandfather 


Belga,  -ae,  m.,  Belgian,  an  inhab- 
itant of  the  northern  of  the 
three  divisions  of  Gaul 

bellicosus,  -a,  -um  [bellum,  war], 
literally,  full  of  war;    warlilce 

bello,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [bellum, 
war],  make  war;  fight 

bellum,  -i,  n.,  locative  belli,  war 

beneficium,  -i,  n.  [bene,  well,  f acio, 
do],  Mndness,  hind  deed 

Bibracte,  Bibractis,  n.,  locative 
ablative  Bibracte  or  Bibracti, 
Bibracte,  the  most  important 
town  of  the  Aeduans 

biduus,  -a,  -um  [bis,  twice,  dies, 
day],  literally,  of  the  space  of 
two  days,  two  days.  Neuter  used 
as  a  substantive,  with  tempus 
understood,  literally,  two  days' 
time,  i.  e.,  tivo  days 

biennium,  -i,  n.  [bis,  twice,  annus, 
year],  literally,  the  space  of  two 
years,  i.  e.,  two  years 

bipertito,  adverb  [bis,  twice,  pars, 
part],  literally,  in  two  parts;  in 
two  divisions 

Bituriges,  Biturigum,  m.,  the  Bi- 
turiges,  a  tribe  of  central  Gaul 


390 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


Boi,  -oruin,  m.,  the  Boii,  a  tribe 
that  migrated  with  the  Helve- 
tians.   See  App.  16 

"bonitas,  bonitatis,  f.  [bonus,  good] , 
literally,  goodness;  of  land,  fer- 
tility 

bonus,  -a,  -um,  comparative  me- 
lior,  superlative  optimus,  good 

bracchium,  -i,  n.,  forearm,  arm 


C,  the  abbreviation  for  Gaius, 
a  Eoman  "first  name''  [prae- 
nomen] 

cado,  cadere,  cecidi,  casum,  fall 

Caesar,  Caesaris,  m.,  a  Eoman 
family  name  [cog-nomen] ;  es- 
pecially (Gains  Julius)  Caesar, 
the  Roman  general  and  states- 
man, author  of  the  Commentaries 
on  the  Gallic  War 

calamitas,  calamitatis,  f.,  disaster, 
defeat 

capid,  capere,  cepi,  captum,  regu- 
larly, talce;  feel,  line  371 ;  occupy, 
line  460 

captivus,  -a,  -um  [capio,  talce], 
captive.  Masculine  used  as  a 
substantive,  a  captive 

caput,  capitis,  n.,  head 

carrus,  -i,  m.,  cart 

Cassianus,  -a,  -um  [Cassius],  re- 
lating to  Cassius;  bellum  Cassi- 
anum,  the  war  with  Cassius 

Cassius,  -i,  m.,  a  Roman  name 
(nomen) ;  (Lucius)  Cassius  (Lon- 
ginus,  consul  in  107  B.C.,  who 
was  attacked  and  defeated  by 
the  Helvetians 

castellum,  -i,  n.  [diminutive  of 
castrum,  fortress],  fort 


Casticus,  -i,  m.,  Casticus,  a  power- 
ful chief  of  the  Sequanians 

castra,  -drum,  n.  [castrum,  -i,  i 
singular,  fortress,  not  used  by  i 
Caesar],  a  (fortified)  camp 

casus,  -us,  M.  [cado,  faZZ],  literally, 
a  falling;    regularly,  chance 

Catamantaloedes,  Catamantaloe- 
dis,M., Catamantaloedes,  a  power- 
ful Sequanian,  father  of  Casticus 

Caturiges,  Caturigum,  m.,  the 
Caturigcs ;  an  Alpine  tribe 

causa,  -ae,  f.,  regularly,  reason, 
cause;  in  legal  matters,  case, 
lines  68,  74,  367;  ablative  of 
cause,  for  the  salce,  line  331 

caveo,  cavere,  cavi,  cautum,  he  on 
one's  guard 

cedo,  cedere,  cessi,  cessum,  go 
(from)  ;    yield 

celer,  celeris,  celere,  comparative 
celerior,  superlative  celerrimus, 
quicTc,  swift 

celeri-ter,  adverb,  comparative 
celerius,  superlative  celerrime, 
[celer,  quicTc],  quicldy 

Celta,  -ae,  m.,  Celt;  as  used  by 
Caesar,  the  local  name  for  the 
people  of  central  Gaul 

census,  -us,  m.  [censeo,  estimate], 
estimate,  enumeration,  census 

centum,  indeclinable  cardinal  (nu- 
meral)  adjective,  one  hundred 

certus,  -a,  -um,  literally,  certain, 
undoubted,  line  348;  eum  certio- 
rem  facio,  literally,  I  maTce  him 
more  certain;  regularly,  I  inform 
him;  passive,  certior  fio,  liter- 
ally, I  am  made  more  certain, 
regularly,  /  am  informed 


VOCABULARY 


391 


Ceutrones,  Ceutronum,  m.,  the 
Ceutrones,  an  Alpine  tribe 

cibarius,  -a,  -urn  [cilDUS,  food^,  re- 
lating to  food.  Neuter  plural  used 
as  substantive  (like  English 
food-stufs),  provisions 

circiter,  adverb,  al)out 

circuitus,  -us,  m.  [circum-eo,  go 
around], Uterally, a  going  around; 
in  circuitu,  hy  a  roundabout  route 

circum,  preposition  with  accusa- 
tive, around,  about 

circum-venio,  -venire,  -veni,  -ven- 
tum,  literally,  come  around;  in 
military  expressions,  outflanTc 

citerior,  citerius,  comparative  ad- 
jective (no  positive),  superla- 
tive citimus  [citra,  on  this  side], 
nearer;  with  provincia  or  Gallia 
it  refers  to  the  province  of 
Cisalpine  Gaul,  the  part  of  Italy 
north  of  the  Po 

citra,   preposition  with  accusative, 

on  this  side  of,  this  side 
civitas,  civitatis,  f.  [civis,  citizen], 
literally,    citizenship ;    regularly, 
state;  as  collective  noun,  citizens 

claudo,  claudere,  clausi,  clansum, 

close;  agmen  claudere,  literally, 

close  the  line  of  march,  i.  e.,  bring 

up  the  rear 

cliens,  clientis,  M.orr.,  dependent, 

retainer 
co-emo,  -emere,  -emi,  -emptum 
[con,  intensive],  buy,  purchase, 
the  compound  resembles  the 
English  "buy  up" 
coepi,  coepisse,  coeptus,  defective 
verb,  began  (or  have  begun) ; 
pluperfect,  had  begun,  etc,  pres- 


ent system  supplied  by  incipio, 
begin.  See  App.  86 
co-erceo,  -ercere,  -ercui,  -ercitum 
[con,  together,  arceo,  arcere, 
arcui,  arcitum,  enclose],  liter- 
ally, confine;   restrain 

cognitus,  -a,  -um,  participle  of 
cognosce 

co-gnosc6,  -gnoscere,  -gnovi,  co- 
gnitum  [(g)n6sc6,  (g)noscere, 
(g)n6vi,  (g)n6tum,  come  to 
Icnow],  literally,  become  acquaint- 
ed with,  regularly,  ascertain; 
when  the  perfect  means  I  have 
ascertained,  it  may  be  translated 
I  Jcnow,  and  similarly  the  phi- 
perfect  I  Tcnew,  etc.  Perfect  pas- 
sive participle  used  as  an  adjec- 
tive, noted,  line  519 

cogo,  cogere,  co-egi,  co-actum 
[con,  together,  ago,  agere,  egl, 
actum,  drive],  literally,  drive  to- 
gether, collect;  [con,  intensive] 
compel;    with  infinitive 

co-hortor,  -ari,  -atus  sum  [con,  in- 
tensive, hortor,  urge],  regularly, 
address;  i.  e.,  speak  a  few  words 
of  encouragement  and  appeal  be- 
fore a  battle 

col-ligo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [con, 
together],  fasten  together 

coUis,  collis,  M.,  hill 

col-loco,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [con,  in- 
tensive, locus,  place],  place; 
give  in  marriage,  marry  off,  line 
332,  and  the  same  with  nuptum, 
line  334  (literally,  place  to 
marry) 

col-loquor,  col-loqui,  col-locutus 
sum  [con,  together],  talk  with 

com-buro,  -burere,  -bussi,  -bustum 


392 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


[con,  intensive],  hum  up,  the 
up  being  intensive  in  English 

com-memoro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum 
[con,  intensive,  memor,  mijid- 
ful],  literally,  call  to  mind,  i.e., 
mention 

com-me5,  -meare,  -meavi,  -meatum 
[con,  intensive],  literally,  go 
bacTi  and  forth,  i.  e.,  resort 

com-mitt5,  -mittere,  -misi,  -missum 
[con,  together],  literally,  send 
together;  with  proelium,  begin, 
Join;  allow,  permit,  line  238 ;  do, 
line  246 

commode,  adverb,  compared  regu- 
larly [commodus,  convenient], 
conveniently,  well 

com-mone-facio,  -facere,  -feci, 
-factum  [con,  intensive,  moneo, 
warn],  passive  com-mone-fio, 
-fieri,  -factus  sum,  literally, 
make  warned,  i.  e.,  impress  upon 

com-moveo,  -movere,  -movi,  -mo- 
tum  [con,  intensive],  literally, 
move  strongly;  regularly,  alarm; 
influence,  line  376 

com-munio,  -munire,  -munivi, 
-munitum  [con,  intensive],  lit- 
erally, fortify  strongly;  castella 
communire,  literally,  fortify 
forts  strongly,  i.  e.,  construct 
strong  forts 

commutatio,  commutationis,  f. 
[com-muto,  change],  a  change 

com-muto,  -are,  -avi,  -atmn  [con, 
intensive],  change  completely 

com-paro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [con, 
intensive],  prepare,  provide 

com-perio,  -perire,  com-peri,  -per- 
tum  [con,  intensive],  find  out 

com-plector,   -plecti,   -plexus  sum 


[con,  together],  literally,  weave 
together;    regularly,  embrace 

com-pleo,  -plere,  -plevi,  -pletum 
[con,  intensive],  completely  fill; 
cover 

com-plures,  com-plura  (or  com- 
pluria),  genitive  com-plurium 
[con,  intensive],  several,  quite 
a  number  of.  Used  also  sub- 
stantively 

com-porto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [con, 
together],  bring  together,  bring 
to  one  place 

con-,  form  of  cum  [com]  in  com- 
position, meaning  with  or  to- 
gether; very  often  merely  in- 
tensive 

conatum,  -i,  n.  [really  the  neuter 
of  the  perfect,  here  passive, 
participle  of  conor],  literally,  a 
thing  attempted,  i.  e.,  an  attempt 

conatus,  -us,  m.  [conor,  attempt], 
attempt 

con-cedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -cessum 
[con,  intensive],  grant 

con-cido,  -cidere,  -cidi,  -cisum 
[con,  intensive,  caedo,  caedere, 
cecidi,  caesum,  cut  down],  cut 
to  pieces,  Mil 

con-cilio,  -ciliare,  -ciliavi,  -cilia- 
tum  [concilium,  council],  liter- 
ally, bring  together;  regularly, 
win,  gain 

concilium,  -i,  n.,  assembly,  council 

concursus,  -us,  m,  [con-curro,  run 
together],  literally,  a  running  to- 
gether;    charge 

condicio,  condicionis,  f.  [con-dico, 
say  together],  literally,  a  saying 
together,  i.  e.,  terms 

con-ddno,   -are,   -avi,   -atum   [con, 


VOCABULARY 


393 


intensive,  donum,  gift],  forgive; 
the  dative  accompanying  this 
verb  may  be  translated  out  of 
regard  for 

con-duco,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -ductum, 
lead  together,  bring  together, 
collect 

confectus,  -a,  -urn,  participle  of 
conficio 

con-fero,  con-ferre,  con-tuli,  col- 
latum,  bring  together,  collect ;  se 
conferre,  literally,  convey  one's 
self,  regularly,  retire 

confertus,  -a,  -um,  crowded 

con-ficio,    -ficere,    -feci,    -factum 

•  [con,  intensive,  facio,  facere, 
feci,  factum,  do],  literally,  do 
completely,  ' '  do  up, ' '  i.  e.,  finish, 
complete;  malce  out,  write,  lines 
524,  525 

edn-fido,  -fidere,  -fisus  sum,  semi- 
deponent  [con,  intensive],  trust; 
governs  dative 

con-firmo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [con, 
intensive],  literally,  maTce  firm, 
confirm,  i.  e.,  establish;  affirm, 
declare,  line  49 

con-icio,  -icere  [pronounced  as  if 
spelled  coniicio,  coniicere],  -ieci, 
-tectum  [con,  intensive,  iacio, 
iacere,  ieci,  iactum,  throw], 
throic 

coniuratio,  coniurationis,  f.,  liter- 
ally, a  swearing  together,  i.  e.,  a 
conspiracy 

Conor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  fry,  attempt; 
idem  conari,  literally,  attempt 
the  same  thing,  i.  e.,  maTce  the 
same  attempt 

con-quiro,  -quirere,  -quisivi,  -qui- 
situm    [con,    intensive,    quaero. 


quaerere,    quaesivi,    quaesitum, 

seelc],  seelc  out,  search  out 

con-sanguineus,  -a,  -um  [con,  to- 
gether, sanguis,  blood],  literally, 
of  common  blood,  i.  e.,  related. 
Masculine  used  as  a  substantive, 
Mnsman 

con-scisco,  -sciscere,  -scivi,  -sci- 
tum  [scio,  ]c7iow],  literally,  de- 
cree; sibi  mortem  c5nsciscere, 
literally,  decree  death  to  one's 
self,  i.  e.,  commit  suicide 

con-scius,  -a,  -um  [con,  with,  scio, 
Inow],  literally,  Tcnowing  with 
some  one,  i.  e.,  conscious,  aware 

con-scribo,  -scribere,  -scripsi, 
-scriptum,  literally,  write  to- 
gether, i.  e.,  enroll 

con-sequor,  con-sequi,  con-secutus 
sum  [con,  intensive],  literally, 
follow  closely,  i.  e.,  pursue  or 
overtale 

Considius,  -i,  m.  (Publius)  Con- 
sidius,  an  oflScer  in  Caesar 's  army 

con-sido,  -sidere,  -sedi,  -sessum 
[related  to  seded,  sit],  literally, 
sit  down  together,  settle;  regu- 
larly,  encamp 

consilium,  -i,  n.,  plan 

con-sisto,   -sistere,   con-stiti,  

[con,  together],  literally,  stand 
together;  regularly,  take  one's 
stand 

c6n-s61or,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  comfort, 
console 

conspectus,  -iis,  m.,  sight 

con-spicor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  see 

c5n-stituo,  -stituere,  -stitui,  -sti- 
tutum  [con,  intensive,  statuo, 
statuere,  statui,  statiitum,  sta- 
tion     (transitive),      from      sto, 


394 


BELLUM    UELVETICUM 


Stand  (intransitive)],  with  com- 
plementary infinitive,  decide; 
with  direct  object  or  in  pas- 
sive, determine;  appoint,  lines 
70,  139 

con-suesco,  -suescere,  -suevi,  -sue- 
tum,  become  accustomed ;  perfect, 
I  have  become  accustomed  = 
(regularly)  I  am  accustomed; 
pluperfect,  /  had  become  accus- 
tomed =  I  was  accustomed,  etc. 

consul,  consulis,  m.,  consul,  the 
title  given  to  one  of  the  two  co- 
ordinate chief  executive  officers 
of  the  Eoman  republic 

con-sumo,  -sumere,  -sumpsi,  -sump- 
tum,  literally,  take  away  alto- 
gether, i.  e.,  use  up,  destroy,  con- 
sume 

con-tendo,  -tenders,  -tendi,  -ten- 
turn  [con,  intensive,  tendo, 
stretchl,  literally,  strain,  strug- 
gle; regularly,  either  (1)  fight, 
contend,  or   (2)   hurry,  hasten 

continenter,  adverb  [continens, 
present  participle  of  contineo, 
hold  together],  continually ;  with- 
out stopping,  line  483 

con-tineo,  -tinere,  -tinui,  -tentum 
[con,  intensive,  teneo,  tenere, 
tenui,  tentum,  hold],  literally, 
hold  fast;  bound,  lines  16,  30; 
Tceep,  line  275 

contra,  adverb,  against;  against 
him,  line  326 

contumelia,  -ae,  f.,  insult,  afront 

con-venio,  -venire,  -veni,  -ventum, 
literally,  come  together,  i.  e.,  as- 
semble (intransitive) ;  meet,  line 
493 

conventus,  -us,  m.  [convenio,  come 


together],  literally,  a  coming  to- 
gether; assembly 

conversus,  -a,  -um,  participle  of 
convert© 

con-verto,  -vertere,  -verti,  -ver- 
sum  [con,  intensive],  literally, 
turn  completely,  turn  around; 
reverse,  line  433 

con-voco,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  call  to- 
gether 

copia,  -ae,  f.,  singular,  plenty, 
supply;  number, line  292;  plural, 
forces,  troops 

copiosus,  -a,  -um  [copia,  supply], 
literally,  full  of  supplies,  i.  e'., 
well  supplied,  wealthy,  prosperous 

cornu,  cornus,  n.,  horn;  of  an 
army,  uHng 

corpus,  corporis,  n.,  body 

cotidianus,  -a,  -um  [cotidie,  daily], 
daily;   regular,  usual,  line  360 

cotidie,  adverb  [quot,  each,  dies, 
day],  daily 

Crassus,  -i,  m.,  a  Eoman  family 
name  [cog-nomen] ;  (Marcus 
Licinius)  Crassus,  the  wealthy 
Eoman,  who,  with  Caesar  and 
Pompey,  formed  the  first  trium- 
virate 

cremo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  burn,  used 
of  persons 

creo,  creare,  creavi,  creatum,  liter- 
ally, produce;    elect,  line  294 

cresco,  crescere,  crevi,  cretum, 
literally,  groic,  increase;  become 
powerful,  line  373 

cultus,  -Us,  M.  [colo,  cultivate], 
civilisation,  comfort 

cum,  preposition  with  ablative, 
with.   Enclitic  with  personal  pro- 


VOCABULARY 


395 


nouns,  and  often  with  quis  and 
qui 

cum,  subordinate  conjunction, 
when,  since,  or  although;  if  it 
introduces  a  verb  in  the  indica- 
tive it  means  when;  if  it  intro- 
duces a  verb  in  the  subjunctive, 
it  is  necessary  to  consider  which 
one  of  the  three  meanings  makes 
the  best  sense.  For  more  exact 
description  of  uses,  see  §§693, 
700 

cupide,  adverb,  compared  regularly 
[cupidus,  desirous,  eager],  eager- 
ly; comparative,  too  eagerly,  line 
269 

cupiditas,  cupiditatis,  f.  [cupidus, 
desirous,  fond],  desire,  fondness 

cupidus,  -a,  -um  [cupio,  desire], 
desirous,  fond;  modified  by  a 
genitive 

cupio,  cupere,  cupivi,  cupitum, 
regularly,  desire;  wish  well,  line 
334;  governs  dative 

cur,  adverb,  why 

cHro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  literally, 
care  for;  with  object  modified  by 
a  gerundive,  cause 

custos,  custodis,  m.  or  f.,  regu- 
larly, guard,  watch;  watchers, 
''secret  service  men,"  line  389 


damno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  condemn 
de,  preposition  with  ablative,  regu- 
larly (1)  down  from,  down;  or 
(2)  concerning,  of;  with  causa, 
for;  in  expressions  of  time,  dur- 
ing;  taking  place  of  partitive 
genitive,  of,  line  271.     In  com- 


position with  other  words,  away, 
down,  thoroughly  (intensive) 

debeo,  debere,  debui,  debitum, 
(1)  oive  or  (2)  ought  (which 
was  the  past  of  owe  in  old 
English) 

decern,  indeclinable  cardinal  (nu- 
meral) adjective,  ten 

de-cipio,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -ceptum 
[capio,  capere,  cepi,  captum, 
taJce],  literally,  taJce  away  (one's 
security),  i.e.,  deceive;  compare 
the  English  ''take  in'' 

decurio,  decurionis,  m.  [decern, 
ten],  decurion,  the  officer  in  com- 
mand of  a  small  squad  of  cavalry 
(originally  ten  men) 

dediticius,  -a,  -um,  literally,  given 
up.  Masculine  used  as  a  sub- 
stantive, prisoner,  captive 

deditio,  deditionis,  f.  [de-do,  give 
up],  a  giving  up,  i.e.,  surrender 

de-f  endo,  -f  endere,  -f  endi,  -f  ensum, 
literally,  tvard  of  from;  usually, 
defend 

defessus,  -a,  -um,  exhausted;  vul- 
neribus  defessi,  literally,  ex- 
hausted with  wounds,  i.  e.,  many 
being  wounded,  on  account  of 
their  heavy  losses 

de-icio,  -icere  (pronounced  as  if 
spelled  deiicid,  deiicere),  -ieci, 
-iectum  [iacio,  iacere,  ieci,  iac- 
tum,  throw],  literally,  throw 
dotvn,cast  down;  disappoint, line 
143 

de-inde,  adverb,  literally,  thence, 
regularly,  then 

delibero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  delib- 
erate, consider 


396 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


de-ligo,    -ligere,    -legi,    -lee turn, 

choose  {from),  select 

de-minu6,  -minuere,  -minui,  -mi- 
nutum  [de,  from,  minus,  less], 
lessen,  diminish 

de-monstro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  point 
out,  show 

demum,  adverb,  at  length 

denique,  adverb,  finally 

de-pono,  -ponere,  -posui,  -positum, 
literally,  2)lace  down;    lay  aside 

de-populor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  ravage 
(completely) 

dgprecator,  deprecatoris,  m.,  iti- 
tercessor,  advocate;  eo  depreca- 
tore,  ablative  absolute,  he  (being) 
intercessor,  i.  e.,  with  him  as  in- 
tercessor 

de-signd,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [signum, 
marJc],  literally,  marlc  down,  i.  e., 
designate,  mean 

de-sisto,    -sistere,    de-stiti,    , 

literally,  stop  (intransitive)  from 
something,  i.  e.,  cease 

de-spero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [spes, 
hope],  literally,  hope  away,  i.  e., 
despair.  With  this  verb  an  accom- 
panying preposition  de  means  of 

de-spicio,  -spicere,  -spexi,  -spec- 
tum,  literally,  look  down  on,  i.  e., 
despise 

de-stitu6,  -stituere,  -stitui,  -stitll- 
tum  [statuo,  statuere,  statui, 
statutum,  station  (transitive), 
from  sto,  stand  (intransitive)], 
literally, sta/ion  (transitive)  down, 
put  aside,  i.  e.,  desert 

destrictus,  participle  of  destringo 

de-stringo,  -stringere,  -strinxi, 
-striatum,  draw  (from) 

de-terreo,  -terrere,  -terrui,  -terrl- 


tum,  frighten  (from),  deter,  pre- 
vent; ne  with  subjunctive  fol- 
lowing is  translated  by  from 
with  the  English  verbal  in  -ing 

deus,  -i,  M.,  god.  For  declension 
see  §713 

dexter,  dextra,  dextrum,  some- 
times dexter,  dextera,  dexterum, 
right  (opposite  of  left).  Femi- 
nine used  as  a  substantive,  with 
manus  understood,  right  hand 

died,  dicere,  dixi,  dictum,  say ;  ap- 
point, line  107;  causam  dicere, 
plead  a  case 

dictio,  dictionis,  f.  [dico,  say],  lit- 
erally, a  faying;  causae  dictio, 
the  pleading   (of)  the  case 

didici,  perfect  of  disco 

dies,  diei,  usually  masculine,  some- 
times feminine  in  the  singular 
(when  referring  to  a  definite 
day),  day;   time,  line  129 

dif-fero,  dif-ferre,  dis-tuli,  di-la- 
tum  [dis-,  apart],  literally,  bear 
apart,  i.  e.,  differ,  be  different 

dif-ficilis,  -e,  comparative  dif- 
ficilior,  superlative  difficillimus 
[dis-,  apaH,  facilis,  easy],  diffi- 
cult, hard 

di-mitto,  -mittere,  -misi,  -missum 
[dis-,  apart],  literally,  send  opart, 
i.  e.,  dismiss,  adjourn 

dis-,  inseparable  prefix  meaning 
apart,  having  also  the  forms  di- 
and  dif- 

dis-cedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -cessum, 
literally,  go  apart,  regularly,  go 
away,  depart 

disco,  discere,  didici, ,  learn 

dis-icio,  -icere  (pronounced  as  if 
spelled  disiicid,  disiicere),  -lea, 


VOCABULARY 


397 


-iectum  [iacio,  iacere,  ieci,  iac- 

tum,     throw],     literally,     throw 

apart;  break 
dis-pono,  -ponere,  -posui,  -positum, 

literally,  place  apart,  i.  e.,  place 

at  intervals 
ditissimus,  -a,  -um,  superlative  of 

dives 
diu,  adverb,  comparative  diutius, 

superlative  diutissime,  long,  for 

a    long    time;     comparative    too 

long,  line  290 
diuturnus,   -a,   -um    [diu,   adverb, 

long],   long,  adjective,  referring 

to  time 
dives,  genitive  divitis,  adjective, 

(for  declension  see  App.  35,  a), 

comparative  divitior  or  ditior, 

superlative  divitissimus  or  ditis- 
simus, rich 
Diviciacus,    -i,    m.,     Diviciacus,    a 

very  influential  Aeduan 
Divico,    Diviconis,    m.,    Divico,    a 

Helvetian  chief 
divide,    dividere,    divisi,  divisum 

[dis-,  apart,  video,  see],  divide, 

separate 
divisus,  -a,  -um   [perfect  passive 

participle  of  divide],  divided 
do,  dare,  dedi,  datum,  give;  allow, 

line  242.    See  §52,  last  part 
doled,  dolere,  dolui, ,  feel  pain, 

suffer 
dolor,  doloris,  m.  [doled,  feel  pain], 

distress 
dolus,  -i,  M.,  deceit 
domus,    -us,    F.,    home.      For    de- 
clension, see  §457 
dubitatio,  dubitationis,  r.  [dubito, 

hesitate],  hesitation 
dubitd,  -are,  -avi,  -atum, .  [dubius, 


doubtful],  hesitate;  when  fol- 
lowed by  quin,  usually,  doubt 

dubius,  -a,  -um  [duo,  two],  doubtful 

ducenti,  -ae,  -a  [duo,  two,  centum, 
hundred],  two  hundred 

duco,  dticere,  duxi,  ductum,  regu- 
larly, lead;  sometimes  consider, 
as  line  48;  draw,  line  ^Q;  put 
of,  lines  289,  290;  in  matri- 
monium  ducere,  literally,  lead 
into  marriage,  i.  e.,  marry 

dum,  subordinate  conjunction, 
while;  until 

Dumnorix,  Dumnorigis,  m.,  Dum- 
norix,  a  troublesome  Aeduan 
chief 

duo,  duae,  duo,  cardinal  (numeral) 
adjective  two.  For  declension,  see 
§504 

duo-decim,  indeclinable  cardinal 
(numeral)  adjective  [duo,  two, 
decem,  ten],  twelve 

duo-de-viginti,  indeclinable  car- 
dinal (numeral)  adjective,  lit- 
erally, two  from  twenty,  i.  e., 
eighteen 

dux,  ducis,  M.  or  f.  [duc5,  lead], 
leader;    guide,  line  396 


e,  form  of  the  preposition  ex,  be- 
fore many  of  the  consonants 

e-duco,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -ductum, 
lead  out 

ef-femino,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [femi- 
na,  woman],  literally,  malce  wom- 
anish, i,  e.,  weaken 

ef-fero,  ef-ferre,  ex-tuli,  e-latum, 
literally,  bear  out;    talce 

ego,  mei,  first  personal  pronoun,  I. 
For  declension,  see  §551 


398 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


e-gredior,  e-gredi,  e-gressus  sum 
[gradior,  gradi,  gressus  sum, 
step],  go  out 

egregius,  -a,  -um  [e,  out,  grex, 
floclc],  literally,  out  of  the  com- 
mnon  herd,  i.  e.,  conspicuous,  pre- 
eminent 

e-mitto,  -mittere,  -misi,  -missum, 
literally,  let  go  out  of ;    drop 

emo,  emere,  emi,  emptum,  liter- 
ally, take;    regularly,  huy 

enim,  coordinate  conjunction,  for 

e-nuntio,  -nuntiare,  -nuntiavi, 
nuntiatum  [nuntius,  messen- 
ger], liteTally,  tell  out;  regularly, 
disclose,  report,  announce 

eo,  ire,  ii,  or  ivi,  itum,  go;  travel, 
line  481.  For  conjugation,  see 
§465 

eo,  adverb,  literally,  thither,  i.  e.,  to 
that  point,  or,  less  exactly,  there 

eodem,   adverb,  to  the  tame  point 

eques,  equitis,  m.  [equus,  horse], 
horseman;  plural,  horsemen,  cav- 
alry 

equester,  equestris,  equestre 
[eques,  horseman],  literally,  per- 
taining to  cavalry,  i.  e.,  cavalry 
(adjective) 

equitatus,  -us,  m.  [eques,  horse- 
man], (body  of)  cavalry 

equus,  -i,  m.,  horse 

e-rlpio,  -ripere,  -ripui,  -reptum 
[rapid,  rapere,  rapui,  raptum, 
snatch], literally, snatch  out;  talce 
away,  line  310;  free;  se  eripere, 
literally,  free  one's  self,  i.  e., 
escape,  line  74 

erro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  wander 

et,  coordinate  conjunction,  and; 
et  .  .  .  et,  both  .  .  .  and 


etiam,  adverb  [et,  and,  iam,  al- 
ready], even;   also 

e-vell6,  -vellere,  -velli,  -vulsum, 
pull    out 

ex,  preposition  with  ablative,  out 
from,  out  of,  or  merely  from; 
taking  place  of  partitive  geni- 
tive, of,  lines  481,  530;  giving 
point  of  view,  on,  lines  30,  32; 
in,  line  68;  diem  ex  die,  from 
day  to  day.  In  composition  with 
verbs,  from,  out,  completely 

exemplum,  -i,  n.,  example,  prece- 
dent 

ex-eo,  ex-ire,  ex-ii  or  ex-ivi,  ex- 
itum,  go  out 

exercltus,  -us,  m.  [exerceo,  exer- 
cise], literally,  exercise,  train- 
ing; regularly,  (a  trained,  i.  e., 
Eoman)    army 

existimatio,  existimati5nis,  f. 
[existimo,  thiiilc],  opinion,  judg- 
ment 

existimo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  thinTc 

ex-pedio,  -pedire,  -pedivi,  -pedi- 
tum  [pes,  pedis,  foot],  literally, 
get  one's  foot  out,  i.  e.,  extricate 
one's  self.  Perfect  passive  par- 
ticiple as  adjective,  quicTc,  free 

expeditus,  -a,  -um,  participle  of 
expedio 

explorator,  exploratoris,  m.  [ex- 
ploro,  find  out],  literally,  one 
who  finds  out,  i.  e.,  regularly, 
scout 

ex-pugno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [pug- 
na,  fight],  literally,  fight  out; 
regularly,  talce  by  storm 

ex-sequor,  ex-sequi,  ex-secutus 
sum,  literally,  follow  out;  we  say 
follow  up,  i.  e.,  enforce,  line  75 


VOCABULARY 


399 


ex-specto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  liter- 
ally, looTc  out  (intransitive),  looJc 
out  for  (transitive);  regularly, 
wait  (intransitive),  wait  for  or 
await  (transitive) 

exterus,  -a,  -um,  comparative  ex- 
terior, superlative  extremijs  (or 
extimus),  outside,  comparative 
outer,  exterior,  superlative  most 
distant,  farthest 

extra,  preposition  with  accusative, 
outside 

extremus,  -a,  -um,  superlative  of 
exterus 

ex-uro,  -iirere,  -ussi,  -ustum,  liter- 
ally, hum  out;   we  say,  hum  up 


facile,  adverb,  comparative  faci- 
lius,  superlative  facillime,  [fa- 
cilis,  easy],  easily 

facilis,  -e,  comparative  facilior, 
superlative  facillimus  [faci5, 
do],  literally,  do-ahle;  regularly, 
easy 

facid,  facere,  feci,  factum,  regu- 
larly malce  or  do  ;  with  vis,  use ; 
withproelium, /i^7i<;  wath  pons, 
huild;  with  copia,  ^{i;e;  iter  fa- 
cere,  literally,  make  a  march, 
i.  e.,  march;  with  certior,  see 
certus;  with  satis,  see  that  word. 
Passive,  fio,  fieri,  factus  sum, 
regularly,  he  made  or  he  done; 
happen,  line  379.  For  conjuga- 
tion, see  §632 

facultas,  facultatis,  f.  [facilis, 
easy],  opportunity;  plural,  re- 
sources 

fames,  famis,  f.,  ablative  fame, 


hunger;  famem  tolerare,  liter- 
ally, satisfy  hunger,  i.  e.,  live 

familia,  -ae,  f.  [famulus,  servant] ^ 
literally,  a  hody  of  servants,  i.  e., 
retinue 

familiaris,  -e  [familia,  hody  of 
servants],  literally,  belonging  to 
the  household,  res  familiaris, 
private  property.  Masculine  used 
as  a  substantive,  literally,  one 
belonging  to  the  household,  i.  e., 
personal  friend 

faveo,  favere,  favi,  fautum,  he 
favorable,  favor;   governs  dative 

fere,  adverb,  almost;   nearly 

fero,  ferre,  tuli,  latum,  bear,  carry; 
with  auxilium,  bring;  gravius 
ferre,  literally,  hear  more  heavily^ 
i.  e.,  be  more  displeased.  For 
cinjugation,  see   §714 

fides,  fidei,  f.,  plural  limited  to 
nominative  and  accusative, 
pledge;  fidelity,  loyalty,  line 
356;    confidence,  line  362 

filia,  -ae,  f.,  dative  and  ablative 
plural  filiabus;    daughter 

filius,  filii,  m.,  son 

finis,  finis,  m.;  ablative  fini  or 
fine;  singular,  end;  plural  regu- 
larly territory,  sometimes  bound- 
aries 

finitimus,  -a,  -un^  [finis,  end, 
boundary],  literally,  neighboring, 
near,  lines  330,  517.  Masculine 
used  as  a  substantive,  neighbor 

fio,  fieri,  factus  sum,  see  faciS 

firmus,  -a,  -um,  strong 

flagito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  demand 
(strongly);  governs  two  accusa- 
tives 

fleo,  flere,  flevi,  tetum,  weep,  cry. 


400 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


Present  participle,  literally, 
weeping,  better  translated,  with 
tears 

flumen,  fluminis,  n.  [fluo,  flow], 
river 

fluo,  fluere,  fluxi,  fluxum,  flow 

fortis,  -e,  hrave 

forti-ter,  adverb,  compared  regu- 
larly [fortis,  irave],  bravely 

fortitudo,  fortitudinis,  r.  [fortis, 
brave],  bravery 

fortuna,  -ae,  f.,  fortune;  plural  in 
the  sense  of  possessions,  property, 
line  195 

fossa,  -ae,  f.  [fodid,  dig],  ditch, 
trench 

frater,  fratris,  m.,  brother 

f raternus,  -a,  -um  [ frater,  b  rother] , 
brotherly 

frigus,  frigoris,  n.,  cold;  plural, 
literally,  cold  ipclls 

friimentarius,  -a,  -um  [frumen- 
tum,  grain],  literally,  pertaining 
to  grain;  productive  (of  grain), 
line  167;  res  friimentaria,  grain 
supply,  supply  of  grain 

frumentum,  -i,  n.  [fruor,  enjoy], 
literally,  the  means  of  enjoyment; 
regularly,  grain;  plural,  stand- 
ing grain,  grain  in  the  fields 

frux,  frugis,  f.,  usually  plural, 
crops,  produce 

fuga,  -ae,  f.  [fugio,  flee],  flight 

fugitivus,  -a,  -um  [fugio,  flee], 
fleeing,  fugitive.  Masculine  used 
as  substantive,  deserter 


Gabinlus,  -i,  m.  (Aulus)  Gabinius, 

consul  58  B.C. 
Gallia,   -ae,   f.    [Gallus,   a   Gaul], 


Gaul,  the  country,  a  name  used 
by  Caesar  in  two  senses  (1)  the 
territory  comprising  what  is  now 
France  with  all  the  country  north 
of  it  to  the  Khine;  used  thus,  line 
1;  (2)  the  central  division  of  the 
above,  described  in  lines  2-5 

Gallicus,  -a,  -um  [Galli,  the  Gauls], 
pertaining  to  the  Gauls,  i.e.,  Gallic 

Gallus,  -a,  -um,  relating  to  Gaul, 
i.  e.,  Gallic,  line  428.  Masculine 
used  as  a  substantive,  singular, 
a  Gaul,  plural,  the  Gauls,  terms 
used  in  two  senses  as  in  the  case 
of  Gallia  above 

Garumna,  -ae,  m.,  the  Garonne 
river,  in  southwestern  Gaul 

Genava,  -ae,  f.,  modern  Geneva,  a 
city  of  the  Allobroges 

gens,  gentis,  f.,  race,  tribe 

Germanus,  -a,  -um,  relating  to  Ger- 
many, i.  e.,  German.  Masculine 
used  as  a  substantive,  German 

gero,  gerere,  gessi,  gestum,  usually 
with  bellum,  carry  on,  ivage;  do, 
line  311 

gladius,  -i,  m.,  sword 

gloria,  -ae,  f.,  reputation 

glorior,  gloriari,  gl5riatus  sum 
[gloria,  glory],  boast  (of),  glory 
(in) 

Graecus,  -a,  -um,  Greelc 

Graioceli,  -orum,  m.,  the  Graioceli, 
a  Gallic  tribe  living  in  the  Graian 
Alps 

gratia,  -ae,  f.,  favor,  popularity 

gravis,  -e,  literally,  heavy;  compar- 
ative, too  serious,  lines  369,  377 

graviter,  adverb,  compared  regu- 
larly [gravis,  heavy],  literally, 
heavily;    bitterly;    see  also  fero 


VOCABULARY 


401 


habeo,    habere,    habui,    habitum, 

have;  have  means  hold,  and  in 
the  passive  the  regular  meaning 
of  this  verb  is  be  held,  in  the 
sense  of  he  considered 

Helveticus,  -a,  -um,  Helvetian 

Helvetius,  -a,  -um,  Helvetian 
(Swiss).  Masculine  used  as  a 
substantive,  singular,  a  or  the 
Helvetian  (Swiss),  plural,  the 
Helvetians,  Helvetii  (Swiss),  the 
ancient  inhabitants  of  part  of 
modern  Switzerland 

hibernus,  -a,  -um,  winter.  Neuter 
plural  used  as  a  substantive  with 
castra  understood,  literally,  win- 
ter camp,  i.  e.,  winter  quarters 

hie,  haec,  hoc,  demonstrative  ad- 
jective and  pronoun,  this,  plural, 
these.  For  declension,  see  §134, 
and  for  uses,  §136 

hiemo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [hiems, 
winter'],  winter,  pass  the  winter 

Hispania,  -ae,  f.,  /Spain 

homo,  hominis,  m.  or  f.,  literally, 
a  human  being  (as  distinguished 
from  an  animal);  usually  man 
(in  the  above  sense) 

honor  or  honos,  honoris,  m.,  o^ce, 
distinction,  honor 

hora,  -ae,  f.,  hour,  among  the 
Eomans  one  of  the  twelve  equal 
divisions  of  the  daylight 

hortor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  urge 

hostls,  hostis,  M,,  a  public  enemy; 
singular,  an  enemy,  one  of  the 
enemy;  usually  plural,  the  enemy, 
which  is  generally  a  collective 
noun  in  English 


humanitas,  humanitatis,  f.  [huma- 
nus,  human,  from  homo,  mani, 
refinement 

I  (vowel) 

ibi,  adverb,  there,  in  that  place 

ictus,  -us,  M.,  blow 

idem,  eadem,  idem,  the  same.  For 
declension,   see   §482 

idus,  Iduum,  plu.,  f.,  the  Ides  of 
a  month,  the  15th  of  March,  May, 
July,  and  October,  the  13th  of 
other  months 

ignis,  ignis,  m.,  ablative  igni,  fire 

ignoro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  he  un- 
acquainted with,  ignore ;  passive, 
he  unknown,  be  overlooJced 

ille,  ilia,  illud,  demonstrative  ad- 
jective and  pronoun,  that,  plural, 
those.  For  declension,  see  §135, 
and  for  uses,  §136 

illic,  adverb  [ille,  that],  there 

im-mortalis,  -e  [in-,  not,  mors, 
death],  literally,  not  liable  to 
death,  i.  e.,  immortal 

impedimentum,  -i,  n.  [impedio, 
hinder],  hindrance,  impediment; 
plural,  regularly,  baggage  of  an 
army 

im-pedio,  -pedire,  -pedivi,  -peditum 
[in,  in,  pes,  pedis,  foot],  liter- 
ally, cause  a  man  to  "get  his 
foot  into  it,"  i.  e.,  hinder;  im- 
pede, interfere  with,  line  456; 
perfect  passive  participle,  at  a 
disadvantage,  line  207 

impeditus,  -a,  -um,  participle  of 
impedid 

im-pende6,    -pendere,    ,   

[in,    into],    literally,    overhang, 


402 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


i.  e.,  in  the  case  of  a  mountain, 
tower  above 

imperium,  -i,  n.  [impero,  rule}, 
control,  rule 

im-pero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  with  da- 
tive and  ut  clause,  command,  the 
dative  being  translated  by  an 
objective  J  with  dative  and  ac- 
cusative, demand  (from),  levy 
(upon) 

im-petro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  ohtain 
one's  request 

impetus,  -us,  m.  [in,  for,  peto, 
seeJc],  attack  or  charge 

im-porto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  bring 
in,  import 

im-probus,  -a,  -um  [in-,  not,  probus, 
approved],  reclless,  malicious 

im-proviso,  adverb,  not  compared 
[in-,  not,  provisus,  participle  of 
pro-video,  fore-see],  unexpectedly 

impune,  adverb  (im-punis,  unpun- 
ished), without  punishment,  with 
innpunity 

impunitas,  impunitatis,  f.  [im-pti- 
nis,  un-punished],  freedom  from 
punishment,  impunity 

in,  preposition  with  accusative  and 
ablative.  (1)  With  accusative, 
into;  to,  toward;  with  latitudi- 
nem,  longitudinem,  altitudinem, 
in,  and  so  with  many  verbs  that 
imply  motion  in  Latin  but  not  in 
English;  also  upon,  on  to.  (2) 
With  ablative,  i??;  on,  at;  among. 
(3)  In  composition  with  verbs  it 
means  in,  on,  into,  against 

in-,  an  inseparable  negative  par- 
ticle, used  chiefly  with  adjec- 
tives,  meaning   not;    like   the 


English  ''incapable,"  "unbear- 
able," etc. 

in-cendo,  -cendere,  -cendi,  -censum, 
set  fire  to,  set  on  fire 

in-cito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  urge  on, 
arouse 

in-colo,  -colere,  -colui  (-cultum), 
literally,  live  in;  transitive,  in- 
habit, line  2;  elsewhere  intran- 
sitive, live 

in-commodus,  -a,  -um,  in-convenient. 
Neuter  used  as  a  substantive, 
literally,  an  inconvenient  thing, 
an  inconvenience ;  disaster,  line 
231 

in-credibilis,  -e,  literally,  un-believ- 
able;    incredible,  extraordinary 

inde,  adverb,  thence,  from  that 
place;  in  colloquial  English, 
"from    there" 

indicium,  i,  n.,  information,  evh 
dence ;  freely,  informers,  line  67 

in-duco,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -ductumf 
lead  on,  induce,  influence 

inductus,  -a,  -um  [perfect  passive 
participle  of  induco],  influenced 

in-fero,  in-ferre,  in-tuli,  il-latum, 
literally,  bring  upon;  with  ca- 
lamitatem,  iniurias,  inflict  .  .  . 
upon 

inferus,  -a,  -um,  comparative  in- 
ferior, superlative  infimus  or 
imus,  low 

in-flecto,  -flectere,  -flexl,  -flexum, 
bend  (in),  bend  over 

in-flu6,  -fluere,  -fluxi,  -fluxum,  flow 
(into) 

in-imicus,  -a,  -um  [in,  not,  amicus, 
friendly],  unfriendly,  lir.e  125. 
Masculine  used  as  a  substantive, 
(personal)  enemy,  line  166 


VOCABULARY 


403 


initium,  -i,  n.  [in-eo,  go  into,  begin], 
beginning 

iniuria,  -ae,  f.  [in-iurus,  not  right, 
from  ius,  right],  wrong;  harm, 
damage,  lines  127,  160 

in-iussu,  adverb  [in-,  not,  iussu, 
ablative,  by  order],  without  com- 
mand 

in-opia,  -ae,  f.,  lacJc 

in-opinans,  -opinantis,  adjective, 
literally,  not  expecting,  unaware ; 
when  modifying  a  subject  or  an 
object,  it  may  be  translated  by 
the  adverb,  unawares,  unexpect- 
edly 

inoLuam,  inquis,  inquit,  and  per- 
fect tense,  third  person  singu- 
lar, inquit,  a  defective  verb, 
used  only  within  a  direct  quo- 
tation, say 

in-sciens,  -scientis,  adjective  [in-, 
not,  sciens,  present  participle  of 
scio,  "know],  literally,  not  Jcnoiv- 
ing,  unwitting 

in-sequor,  in-sequi,  in-secutus  sum, 
follow  (close)  upon,  follow  closely, 
fellow  up 

insidiae,  -arum,  f.,  amhiiscades 

in-signis,  -e  [signum,  marlc],  liter- 
ally, having  a  mark  upon  one, 
i.  e.,  marled.  Neuter  used  as  a 
substantive,  a  sign,  signal;  plural, 
decorations 

insolenter,  adverb,  compared  regu- 
larly [in-solens,  unaccustomed], 
literally,  unwontedly ;    haughtily 

in-stituo,  -stituere,  -stitui,  -stitu- 
tum  [statuo,  statuere,  statui, 
statutum,  station  (transitive), 
from  sto,  stand   (intransitive)]. 


literally,  station  upon,  establish; 
train,  line  262 

instittitum,  -i,  n.  [neuter  of  perfect 
passive  participle  of  instituo, 
establish],  literally,  a  thing  estab- 
lished, i.  e.,  custom 

in-sto,  -stare,  -stiti,  -statum  [sto, 
stare,  steti,  statum,  stand  (in- 
transitive)], literally,  stand  on; 
draw  near,  line  290;  press  for- 
ward, line  405 

in-stru6,  -struere,  -struxi,  -struc- 
tum,  literally,  build  on,  con- 
struct;   with  aciem,  draw  up 

intel-lego,  -legere,  -lexi,  -lectum 
[inter,  among,  lego,  legere,  legi, 
lectum,  choose],  understand; 
realize 

inter,  preposition  with  accusative; 
used  with  reference  to  two  ob- 
jects, between;  with  reference 
to  more  than  two,  among,  inter 
se  (eos)  dare,  literally,  give 
among  themselves  (them),  i.  e., 
exchange 

inter-cedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -cessum, 
literally,  go  between,  i.  e.,  inter- 
vene 

inter-cludo,  -cludere,  -clusi,  -clu- 
sum  [claudo,  claudere,  clausi, 
clausum,  close],  literally,  close 
something  between  two  objects, 
regularly,  cut  of 

inter-diu,  adverb  [dies,  day],  dur- 
ing the  day,  by  day 

inter-dum,  adverb,  literally,  as  we 
say,  between  whiles;  regularly, 
meamvhile 

inter-ea,  adverb  (ea,  some  old  case 
form  of  is),  meanwhile 

inter-ficio,    -ficere,    -feci,    -fectum 


404 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


[facio,  facere,  feci,  factum,  do, 
maJce],  literally,  malce  to  be 
among  other  things,  as  we  say, 
maTce  away  with;    regularly,  Tcill 

interim,  adverb  [inter,  'between, 
among],  meanwhile 

interior,  interius,  comparative  ad- 
jective (no  positive),  superlative 
intimus  [inter,  inside],  inner, 
inmost 

inter-mitto,  -mittere,  -misi,  -mis- 
sum,  literally,  send  into  the  midst 
of  something,  i.  e,,  interrupt,  line 
483;  passive,  intervene,  line  489; 
come  on,  line  498 

internecio,  intemecionis,  f.  [inter- 
neco,  destroy],  destruction 

inter-pres,  inter-pretis,  m.  or  f., 
literaUj,  one  who  explainshetween 
two  parties,  i.  e,,  an  interpreter 

inter-sum,  inter-esse,  inter-f  m,  — , 
he  between 

inter-vallum,  -i,  n.  interval 

in-vitus,  -a,  -um,  un-willing.  se 
(eo)  invito,  ablative  absolute, 
literally,  he  (being)  unwilling, 
1.  e.,  without  his  consent.  Simi- 
larly, Sequanis  invitis,  without 
the  consent  of  the  Sequanians 

ipse,  ipsa,  ipsum,  intensive  pro- 
noun, himself,  herself,  itself, 
plural  themselves.  For  declen- 
sion, see  §404,  and  for  uses, 
§406.  The  genitive  may  often 
be  used  instead  of  an  agreeing 
form  of  suus,  a,  um,  for  empha- 
sis or  contrast,  e.  g.,  ipsius,  his 
own,  lines  407,  413.  Sometimes 
translated  in  other  ways,  e.  g., 
ipsum,  the  very  one,  line  321 

is,  ea,  id,  demonstrative  adjective 


and  pronoun,  this,  that,  he,  she, 
it,  etc.  For  declension,  see  §142, 
and  for  uses,  §143 

ita,  adverb,  so,  in  the  sense  of  in 
such  a  manner ;  as  follows,  lines 
227,  241.  Contrast  the  meaning 
of  tam 

Italia,  -ae,  f.,  Italy 

ita-que,  conjunction  and  adverb, 
and  so,  therefore 

item,  adverb  [idem,  the  same], 
likewise 

iter,  itineris,  n.  [eo,  go],  literally, 
a  going;  journey;  route;  pas- 
sage; march;  iter  facere,  liter- 
ally, maTce  a  march,  i.  e.,  march; 
ex  itinere,  on  the  march 

I  (consonant) 

iacto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [frequenta- 
tive or  intensive  verb  of  iacio, 
throw],  literally,  Tceep  throwing, 
toss;    jerJc  about,  line  457 ;    figur- 
atively, discuss,  line  318 
iam,  adverb,  already;    now 
iubeo,  iubere,  iussi,  iussum,  order 
iudicium,    -i,    n.    [iudico,    judge], 

trial 
iudico,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  judge 
iugum,  -i,  N.  [iug,  stem  of  iungo, 
join],yo'ke;    of  a  hill,  the  ridge 
iumentum,  -i,  n.  [iugum,  yolce],  lit- 
erally, a  yoke  animal,  i.  e.,  beast 
of  burden,  pack  animal,  applied 
to  oxen  and  horses 
iungo,    iungere,    iunxi,    iunctum, 

join 
lura,   -ae,   m.,   the  Jura  mountain 
range,  the  Jura  mountains,  which 
extend    from    the   Ehine   to    the 
Rhone 


VOCABULARY 


405 


iuro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  swear,  in  the 

sense  of  taJce  an  oath 
ius,  iuris,  n.,  right 
ius   iurandum,    iuris   iurandi,    n., 

compound  nonn,  used  only  in  the 

singular,  oath 
itistitia,  -ae,  f.  [iiistus,  just,  from 

ius,  right],  justice 
iuvo,  iuvare,  iuvi,  iiitum,  help 


Kalendae,  -arum,  f.,  abbreviation 
Kal.,  the  Kalends,  the  first  day 
of  the  Eoman  month 


L.,  abbreviation  for  Lucius,  a 
Roman  '^  first  name"  [prae- 
nomen] 

Labienus,  -i,  m.  (Titus)  Ldhienus, 
Caesar's  favorite  officer. 

lacesso,  lacessere,  lacessivi,  laces- 
situm,  literally,  prorofce;  in  mili- 
tary language,  harass 

lacrima,  -ae,  f.,  tear 

lacus,  -us,  M.,  dative  and  ablative 
plural  lacubus,  lalce 

largior,  largiri,  largitus  sum,  liter- 
ally, give  freely;    hrihe 

largiter,  adverb,  comparative  lar- 
gius,  superlative  largissime,  lit- 
erally, ahundantlii ;  largiter  pos- 
se, literally,  he  abundantly  able, 
i.  e.,  have  great  influence 

largitio,  largitionis,  f.  [largior, 
give  freely],  free  giving 

late,  adverb,  compared  regularly 
[latus,  ivide,  broad],  widely, 
broadly 

latitudo,  latitudinis,  f.  flatus. 
wide,  broadl,  width,  breadth 


Latobrigi,  -orum,  m.,  the  Latobrigi, 
a  tribe  living  north  of  the  Hel- 
vetians 

latus,  -a,  -um,  wide,  broad 

latus,  lateris,  n.,  side;  in  military 
language,  flanlc 

laudo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  praise 

legatio,  legationis,  f.  [legatus,  am- 
bassador], embassy 

legatus,  -i,  m.  [lego,  -are,  seiid  as 
one's  representative],  literally,  a 
man  delegated  with  power  ;  hence 
in  military  language,  lieutenant 
of  any  rank,  especially  a  lieu- 
tenant-general or  staf -officer;  in 
diplomatic  relations,  ambassador, 
commissioner 

legio,  legionis,  f.  [lego,  -ere, 
choose],  legion,  a  division  of  the 
Roman  army  of  about  3600  men 

Lemannus,  i,  m.,  (Lalce)  Geneva 

lenitas, lenitatis,  f.  [lenis, smooth], 
smoothness 

lex,  legis,  f.,  law 

liber,  libera,  liberum,  comparative 
liberlor,  superlative  liberrimus, 
free 

liberalitas,  liberalitatis,  f.  [libera- 
lis,  generous],  generosity 

libere,  adverb,  comparative  liberius, 
superlative  liberrime  [liber,  li- 
berior,  liberrimus,  free],  freely 

liberi,  -orum,  m.  [liber,  free],  free 
children 

libertas,  libertatis,  f.  [liber,  free], 
freedom 

liceor,  liceri,  licitus  sum,  bid  at 
auction;    line  326 

licet,  licerO;  licuit,  impersonal  verb, 
it  is  permitted 

Lingones,   -um,   m.,  the  Lingones, 


406 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


a  Gallic  tribe  north  of  the 
Aeduans 

lingua,  -ae,  f.,  literally,  tongue,  but 
often  in  the  sense  of  language 

linter,  lintris,  f.,  genitive  plural 
lintrlum,  small  boat,  probably  a 
"dug-out^' 

Liscus,  -i,  M.,  Lisciis,  a  chief  of 
the  Aeduans 

littera,  -ae,  f.,  a  letter  of  the  al- 
phabet; plural,  literally,  letters 
of  the  alphabet,  regularly  a  letter 
in  the  sense  of  an  epistle;  dis- 
patch 

locus,  -i,  M.,  place,  plural  loca, 
-orum,  N.,  places.  [The  regular 
masculine  plural  is  used  (not  in 
Caesar)  in  the  sense  of  places  in 
a  hooTc,  passages,  topics^ 

longe,  adverb,  compared  regularly 
[longus,  long^,  far;    hy  far 

longituda,  longitudinis,  r.  [longus, 
long],  length 

longus,  -a,  -um,  long 

loquor,  loqui,  locutus  sum,  talk, 
speaJc 

Lucius,  -i,  M.,  Lucius,  a  Eoman 
"first  name"  [prae-nomen] 

lux,  lucis,  F.,  light;  prima  lux,  lit- 
erally, the  first  part  of  the  light, 
regularly,  daybreaJc 

M 

M.,  abbreviation  for  Marcus,  a 
Eoman  ''first  name"  [prae- 
ndmen] 

magis,  comparative  adverb,  positive 
supplied  by  magnopere,  superla- 
tive maxime  [magnus,  maior, 
maximus,   great],  more^  rather; 


superlative  most,  mostly,  es- 
pecially 

magistratus,  -us,  m.,  literally,  mag- 
istracy, line  293;  elsewhere,  mag- 
istrate 

magno  opera,  a  phrase  often  con- 
tracted into  magnopere,  literally, 
with  great  work ;  especially,  line 
235.    See  magis 

magnus,  -a,  -um,  comparative  maior, 
superlative  maximus,  great,  large 

maior,  comparative  of  magnus; 
with  natii  understood,  lines  236, 
262,  comparative  of  senex 

maleficium,  -i,  n.  [male,  hadly, 
facio,  do],  wrong-doing 

malo,  malle,   malui,  ,  prefer. 

For  conjugation,   see    §560 

malus,  -a,  -um,  comparative  peior, 
superlative  pessimus,   l)ad 

mando,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [manus, 
hand,  do,  give,  put],  literally, 
put  into  the  hands,  i.  e.,  entrust ; 
se  fugae  mandare,  entrust  one's 
self  to  flight,  i.  e.,  take  to  flight, 
flee 

manus,  -lis,  f.,  harid 

Marcus,  -i,  m.,  Marcus,  a  Eoman 
' '  first  name ' '  [prae-nomen] 

mare,  maris,  n.,  sea 

matara,  -ae,  f.,  a  Gallic  javelin 

mater,  matris,  f.,  mother 

matrimonium,  -i,  n.^  [mater,  moth- 
er], marriage,  in  with  the  ac- 
cusative of  this  word  is  trans- 
lated in 

Matrona,  -ae,  m.,  the  Marne,  a 
tributary  of  the  Seine  from  the 
northeast 

mature,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [matu- 
rus,  ripe,  early],  hasten 


VOCABULARY 


407 


maturus,  -a,  -um,  superlative  ma- 
turissimus   or  maturrimus,   ripe 

maxime,  superlative  of  magis 

maximus,  -a,  -um,  superlative  of 
magnus 

me,  accusative  of  ego 

medius,  -a,  -um,  middle;  usually 
having  partitive  force,  the  mid- 
dle of;  hence,  in  coUe  medio, 
in  the  middle  of  the  hill,  i.  e., 
half  way  up  the  hill 

memoria,  -ae,  f.,  memory,  recollec- 
tion 

mensis,  mensis,  m.,  month 

mercator,  mercatoris,  m.,  trader 

mereor,  mereri,  meritus  sum,  de- 
serve 

meritum,  -i,  n.  [neuter  of  perfect 
participle  of  mereo,  deserve],  de- 
sert 

metior,  metiri,  mensus  sum,,  meas- 
ure, measure  out 

meus,  -a,  -um,  possessive  adjective, 
masculine  singular  vocative  mi; 
my 

mihi,  flative  of  ego 

miles,  militis,  m.,  soldier 

militaris,  -e  [miles,  soldier],  liter- 
ally, pertaining  to  a  soldier,  i.  e, 
military;  res  militaris,  military 
affairs 

mille,  indeclinable  in  the  singular, 
which  is  usually  an  adjective, 
a  thousand,  plural,  milia,  milium, 
milibus,  n.,  thousands,  mille  pas- 
siis,  literally,  a  thousand  paces, 
regularly,  a  mile;  milia  passuum, 
literally,  thousands  of  paces,  regu- 
larly, miles.    See  passus 

minime,  superlative  of  parum 

minimus,  superlative  of  parvus 


minor,  comparative  of  parvus 

minuo,  minuere,  minui,  minutum 
[minus,  less],  lessen 

minus,  adverb,  comparative  of 
parum 

miser,  misera,  miserum,  poor 

mitto,  mittere,  misi,  missum,  send; 
throw,  line  451.  In  composition 
it  often  means  let  (something)  go 

mode,  adverb,  only,  lines  284,  340, 
350 

mold,  molere,  molui,  molitum, 
grind;  molita  cibaria,  literally, 
ground  food  stuffs,  i.  e.,  meal 

moneo,  monere,  monui,  monitum, 
icarn;    advise,  line   387 

mons,  montis,  m.,  mountain;  not 
necessarily  as  high  as  our  strict 
use  of  the  term  requires,  and 
often  best  translated  hill 

morior,  mori  (or  moriri),  mortuus 
sum,  future  participle  morittirus, 
die 

moror,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  delay 

mors,  mortis,  f.,  death 

m5s,  moris,  m.,  custom 

moveo,  movere,  movi,  motum, 
move;    with  castra,  break 

mulier,  mulieris,  r.,  woman 

multitude,  multittidinis,  f,  [mul- 
tus,  much^,  literally,  "much- 
ness," multitude;  numher,  lines 
273,  501;  great  numher,  line  75; 
common  people,  line  305;  multi- 
tude hominum,  literally,  multi- 
tude of  human  beings,  i.  e.,  large 
population,  lines  38,  39 

multum,  adverb,  comparative  plus, 
superlative  plurimum  [multus], 
much,  more,  most;  pliis posse,  be 
more  powerful,  line  304;    pluri- 


408 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


mum  posse  or  valere,  he  the  most 
powerful,  he  very  powerful 

multus,  -a,  -um,  much;  plural, 
many;  multa  nocte,  late  at 
night;  multo  die,  late  in  the  day. 
mult5,  ablative  used  as  an  ad- 
verb, (6y)  much,  (hy)  far,  lines 
98,  299;  see  §619.  Comparative, 
plus;  for  declension,  see  §575; 
more,  lines  371,  381;  plural, 
several,  many,  lines  317,  454.  Su- 
perlative plurimus,  -a,  -um,  most 

mtinio,  munire,  munivi,  munitum, 
fortify 

munitio,  munitionis,  r.  [munio, 
fortify],  fortification;  strength, 
line  146 

murus,  -i,  m.,  wall 

N 

nam,   coordinate   conjunction,  for 

Nammeius,  -i,  m.,  Nammeius,  a  Hel- 
vetian ambassador 

natura,  -ae,  f.,  character 

navis,  navis,  f.,  accusative  navem 
or  navim,  ablative  navi  or  nave 
(ship)  ;    boat 

ne,  negative  subordinate  conjunc- 
tive or  adverb,  in  order  that 
.  .  .  not,  that  .  .  .  not;  after 
verbs  of  fearing,  that;  some- 
times for  fear  that,  line  515 

-ne,  enclitic  interrogative  particle  j 
see  §593,  2,  a 

nee,  a  form  of  neque 

necessarius,  -a,  -um,  literally,  nec- 
essary; critical,  lines  297,  312. 
Masculine  used  as  a  substan- 
tive, close  friend 

nego,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  deny;  or 
say  .  .  .  not,  the  English  nega- 


tive belonging  with  the  objec- 
tive verb 
nemo,   nuUius,   nemini,   neminem, 
nuUo,    M.    or   f.    [ne,    negative, 
homd,  man],  no  one 

ne-que,  negative  coordinate  con- 
junction, and  not;  neque  .  .  . 
neque,  neither  .  .  .  nor 

nervus,  -i,  m.,  literally,  sinew,  ten- 
dan;    plural,  poicers 

ne-ve,  a  continuing  negative  sub- 
ordinate conjunction,  used  in  sec- 
ond member  of  clause  introduced 
by  ne,  literally,  or  not;  or 

nex,  necis,  f.,  death 

nihil,  N.,  indeclinable  noun  used 
only  in  the  nominative  and  ac- 
cusative, other  cases  supplied 
from  (nihilum),  -i,  n.,  nothing. 
nihilo  minus,  literally  none  the 
less  (see  §619),  i.  e.,  nevertheless 

nisi,  subordinate  conjunction  [ne, 
not,  si,  if],  literally,  if  not,  often, 
unless 

nitor,  niti,  nisus  or  nixus  sum,  lit- 
erally, lean,  rest;    rely 

nobilis,  -e  [nosco,  Jcnow],  well 
known,  also  noble  in  the  sense 
of  luell-born;  superlative,  most 
prominent 

nobilitas,  nobilitatis,  f.  [nobilis, 
7ioble],  nobility,  in  the  sense  of  a 
collective  noun,  i.  e.,  nobles 

nobis,  dative  and  ablative  plural 
of  ego 

noceo,  nocere,  nocui,  ,  harm; 

governs  dative 

noctu,  adverb  [nox,  night],  by 
night,  i.  e.,  during  the  night 

nolo,  nolle,  nolui, [ne  or  non, 

n/)t,  void,  wish] J  be  unwilling,  not 


VOCABULAET 


409 


luish.    For  conjugation,  see  §560 

ndmen,  nominis,  n.  [nosed,  Tcnow], 
name 

nominatim,  adverb  [ndmen,  name], 
hy  name 

non,  adverb,  not 

nonaginta,  indeclinable  cardinal 
(numeral)   adjective,  ninety 

non-dum,  adverb,  not  yet 

non-ne,  interrogative  particle,  hint- 
ing an  affirmative  answ^er,  not. 
See  §593,  2 

non-nullus,  -a,  -um,  literally,  not 
not  any,  regularly,  some.  For  de- 
clension, see  §283 

non-numquam,  adverb,  literally, 
not  never,  regularly,  sometimes 

Noreia,  -ae,  f.,  Noreia,  a  town  of 
the  Norici 

Noricus,  -a,  -um,  of  the  Norici,  a 
people  living  north  of  the  Alps 

nos,  plural  of  ego 

noster,  nostra,  nostrum  [nos,  we], 
possessive  adjective,  our.  Mas- 
culine plural  used  as  a-  substan- 
tive, our  (men),  i.  e.,  our  soldiers, 
i.  e.,  in  Caesar's  narrative,  the 
Koman  forces 

novem,  indeclinable  cardinal  (nu- 
meral) adjective,  nine 

novus,  -a,  -um,  no  comparative, 
superlative  novissimus,  new. 
novae  res,  literally,  new  things, 
regularly,  change,  revolution. 
novissimum  agmen,  literally,  the 
newest  part  of  a  marching  col- 
umn; regularly,  the  rear,  and  so 
novissimi,  the  masculine  superla- 
tive used  substantively,  line  463 

nox,  noctis,  f.,  night 

nub5,  nubere,  nupsi,  nuptum,  lit- 


erally, veil  one's  self ;  regularly, 
marry,  used  of  the  woman 

nudus,  -a,  -um,  literally,  hare;  un- 
protected, line  458 

nuUus,  -a,  -um  [ne,  not,  ullus,  any], 
literally,  not  any,  i.  e.,  no  (adjec- 
tive).  For  declension,  see  §283 

num,  interrogative  particle  hinting 
a  negative  answer,  not  translat- 
able by  any  one  word.  For  uses, 
see  §593,  2,  c 

numerus,  -i,  m.,  number 

numquam,  adverb  [ne,  not,  um- 
quam,  ever],  literally,  not  ever, 
i.  e.,  never 

nuntio,  ntintiare,  nuntiavi,  nun- 
tiatum  [nuntius,  messenger],  re- 
port 

nuntius,  -i,  m.,  messenger ;  message 

nuper,  adverb,  no  comparative, 
superlative  nuperrime,  recently 


ob,  preposition  with  accusative, 
used  in  Caesar  only  with  forms 
of  res  and  causa,  on  account  of. 
In  composition  with  other  words 
it  means  against,  toward 

ob-aeratus,  -i,  m.,  debtor 

ob-icio,  -icere  (pronounced  as  if 
spelled  obiicio,  obiicere),  -ieci, 
-iectum  [iacio,  iacere,  ieci,  iac- 
tum,  throw],  literally,  throw 
toward;    throiv  up 

ob-liviscor,  -livisci,  -litus  sum, 
forget;    governs  the  genitive 

ob-secro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  implore 

obses,  obsidis,  m.  or  f.,  hostage,  a 
person  given  by  one  party  to  an- 
other as  security  for  an  agree- 
ment 


410 


BELLUM    IIELVETICUM 


ob-stringo,  -stringere,  -strinxi, 
-strictum,  hii^d 

ob-tiueo,  -tinere,  -tinui,  -tentum 
[teneo,  tenere,  tenui,  tentum, 
hold],  hold;  stronger  than  teneo, 
For  pronunciation,  see  §6 

occasus,  -us,  M.  [oc-cido,  fall  iipon, 
from  cado,  fall],  literally,  a  fall- 
ing, occasus  solis,  literally,  the 
setting  of  the  sun,  1.  e.,  sunset, 
1.  e.,  the  west 

occidens,  occidentis,  adjective 
[present  participle  of  occidd, 
fall,  sef],  literally,  falling,  i.  e., 
setting,  occidens  sol,  literally, 
the  setting  sun,  i.  e.,  the  west 

oc-cido,  -cidere,  -cidi,  -cisum  [ob, 
intensive,  caedo,  caedere,  cecidi, 
caesum,  cause  to  fall,  cut,  Icill], 
cut  of,  kill,  occisi,  occisorum, 
masculine  plural  of  perfect  pas- 
sive participle  used  as  a  sub- 
stantive, the  slain,  the  dead 

oc-culto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  hide 

oc-cup6,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  seize 

Oceanus,  -i,  m.,  the  ocean 

Ocelum,  -i,  n.,  Ocelum,  a  town  of 
Cisalpine  Gaul 

octo,  indeclinable  cardinal  (nu- 
meral) adjective,  eight 

octo-decim,  indeclinable  cardinal 
(numeral)  adjective  [octo,  eight, 
decem,  ten],  eighteen 

octoglnta,  indeclinable  cardinal  (nu- 
meral) adjective  [octo,  eight], 
eighty 

oculus,  -i,  M.,  eye 

odi,  odisse,  osus,  defective  verb, 
hate.   For  conjugation,  see  App.  86 

of-fendo,  -f endere,  -f endi,  -f ensum, 


literally,  ivard  off  against  some 

one;    regularly,  offend 
offensio,   offensionis,   f.    [offendo, 

offend],  offence 
omnino,  adverb  [omm.B,all],in  all; 

entirely,  line  502 
omnis,  -e,  all;  singular  often  in  the 

sense  of  as  a  whole 
oportet,  oportere,  oportuit,  imper- 
sonal verb,  it  is  fitting,  it  is  right; 

freely  translated  by  the  auxiliary 

ought 
oppidum,  -i,  n.,  town 
op-pugno,    -are,   -avi,   -atum    [ob, 

against],  literally,  fight  against; 

regularly,  assault,  attach,  storm 
(ops),  opis,  F.,  no  dative  singular, 

poiver;    plural,    resources 
opus,  operis,  n.,  work;  in  the  sense 

of  fortification,  line  146 
oratio,  5rati6nis,  f.   [oro,  speak], 

speech 
Orgetorix,  Orgetorigis,  m.,  Orgeto- 

rix,  a  chief  of  the  Helvetians 
oriens,  orientis,  adjective  [present 

participle  of  orior,  rise],  rising. 

oriens   sol,   literally,   the  rising 

sun,  i.  e.,  the  east 
orior,  oriri,  ortus  sum,  future  par- 
ticiple oriturus,  rise 
oro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  speak;    en- 
treat 
os-tendo,  -tendere,  -tendi,  -tentum, 

show 


P.,  abbreviation  for  Publius,  a 
Eoman  ''first  name"  [prae- 
n5men] 

pabulatid,  pabulationis,  f.  [pabu- 


VOCABULARY 


411 


lor,  forage,  from  pabulum,  fod- 
der],  foraging 

pabulum,  -i,  n.,  fodder 

paco,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [pax,  pacis, 
peace],  literally,  pacify;  regu- 
larly, subdue 

paene,  adverb,  almost 

pagus,  -i,  M.,  canton,  district 

par,  paris,  adjective,  equal,  same. 
For  declension,  see  App,  38 

paratus,  -a,  -um  [perfect  passive 
participle  of  paro,  prepare],  lit- 
erally, prepared,  i.  e.,  ready 

pareo,  parere,  parui,  ,  obey; 

governs  dative 

paro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  prepare 

pars,  partis,  f.,  part;  side,  lines  30, 
32,  -where  ex  is  translated  on; 
direction,  lines  200,  269 

parum,  adverb,  too  little,  compar- 
ative minus,  less,  superlative 
minime,  least,  very  little 

parvus,  -a,  -um,  little,  small;  com- 
parative minor,  minus,  less,  line 
241;  superlative  minimus,  -a, 
-Vim,lcast  (very  Utile) ;  minimum 
posse,  literally,  be  very  little 
powerful,  i.  e.,  have  very  little 
power 

passus,  -us,  M.,  pace,  which  with 
the  Eomans  was  a  double  step,  a 
little  over  five  of  our  feet.  See 
mille 

pateo,  patere,  patui,  ,  liter- 
ally, he  open,  be  exposed;  extend, 
line  42.  Present  participle  used 
as  an  adjective,  open,  exposed, 
line  166 

pater,  patris,  m.,  father 

patior,   pati,   passus   sum,   sufer, 


usually  in  the  sense  of  allow  or 
permit 

pauci,  -ae,  -a,  few 

pax,  pacis,  r.,  peace 

pello,  pellere,  pepuli,  pulsum,  liter- 
ally, drive;    beat 

per,  preposition  with  accusative, 
through.  In  composition,  through 
or  thoroughly ,  intensive 

per-duco,  -ducere,  -dtixi,  -ductum, 
literally,  lead  through;  construct, 
extend 

per-fero,  per-ferre,  per-tuli,  per- 
latum,  literally,  bear  through, 
i.  e.,  endure 

per-ficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fectum 
[facio,  facere,  feci,  factum,  do], 
literally,  do  thoroughly,  i.  e.,  com- 
plete;   arrange,  line  159 

per-fring5,  -fringere,  -fregi,  -frac- 
tum  [frango,  frangere,  fregi, 
fractum,  brealc],  breaTc  through 

per-fuga,  -ae,  m.  [per-fugio,  de- 
sert], deserter 

per-fugio,  -fugere,  -ftigi,  -fugitum, 
literally,  flee  through,  i.e.,  desert 

periculum,  -i,  n.,  danger 

peritus,  -a,  -um,  sMlled;  a  modi- 
fying genitive  is  translated  by 
the  preposition  in 

per-move5,  -movere,  -movi,  -mo- 
tum,  literally,  move  thoroughly, 
i.  e.,  arouse 

pernicies,  pemiciei,  f.,  no  plural, 
destruction 

per-pauci,  -ae,  -a,  very  few 

per-rumpo,  -rumpere,  -riipi,  -rup- 
tum,  brealc  through 

per-sequor,  per-sequi,  per-secutus 
sum,  literally,  follow  thoroughly, 
i.  e.,  follow  up 


412 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


per-severo,  -axe,  -avi,  -atum,  con- 
tinue 
per-solvo,  -solvere,  -solvi,  -solutum, 

literally,  release  completely;  pay 
{in  full) 

per-suadeo,  -suadere,  -suasi,  -sua- 
sum,  literally,  urge  through,  1.  e., 
persuade;    governs  dative 

per-terreo,  -terrere,  -terrui,  -terri- 
tum,  frighten  thoroughly;  (tim5- 
re)  perterritus,  literally,  terrified 
{hy  fear),  i.  e.,  demoralized, 
panic-stncJcen 

per-tineo,  -tinere,  -tinui,  -tentum 
[teneo,  tenere,  tenui,  tentum, 
hold],  literally,  hold  through; 
usually,  extend;  pertain,  he  nec- 
essary; e5dem  illo  (adverbs)  per- 
tinere,  literally,  hold  through  to 
that  same  {point),  i.e.,  amount 
to  the  same  thing 

per-venio,  -venire,  -veni,  -ventum, 
literally,  come  through,  i.  e.,  arrive 

pes,  pedis,  m.,  foot 

peto,  petere,  petivi,  petitum,  seeTc 

phalanx,  phalangis,  f.,  phalanx,  a 
closely  massed  body  of  troops 

pilum,  -i,  N.,  spear,  javelin 

Piso,  Pisonis,  m.,  a  Eoman  "last 
name"  [cog-nomen].  In  lines  109 
and  217,  Lucius  {Calpurnius)  Piso 
{Caesonius),  consul  58  B.C.  In 
line  218,  Lucius  {Calpurnius) 
Piso,  consul  112  B.C.,  grandfather 
of  the  last  mentioned 

plebs,  plebis  [also  plebes,  plebei], 
F.,  the  common  people,  correspond- 
ing to  the  plebeians  at  Kome. 
For  the  pronunciation  of  the 
nominative,  see  §6 


plurimum,  adverb,  superlative  of 
multum 

plurimus,  -a,  -um,  superlative  of 
multus 

plus,  pluris,  etc.,  comparative  of 
multus;  for  declension,  see  §501 

poena,  -ae,  f.,  punishment;  yvith 
persolvere,  penalty 

poUiceor,  poUiceri,  poUicitus  sum, 
promise 

pono,  ponere,  posui,  positum, 
place;  with  castra,  pitch;  pas- 
sive, he  situated,  line  284 

pons,  pontis,  m.,  hridge 

populatio,  populationis,  f.  [popu- 
lor,  ravage],  ravaging 

populor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  ravage 

populus,  -i,  M.,  people;  plural, 
peoples 

porta,  -ae,  f.,  gate 

ports,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  carry 

portorium,  -i,  n.  [porto,  carry], 
literally,  a  duty  on  imports; 
translate,  customs  taxes 

posco,  poscere,  poposci,  ,  de- 
mand 

possessio,  possessionis,  f., 


possum,  posse,  potui, [potis, 

able,  sum,  h e],  h e  ahle;   with    an 
infinitive  it  is  translated  by  the 
auxiliary,  can,  could.    For  conju- 
gation, see  §505 
post,   preposition   with   accusative, 

after 
postea,  adverb,  afterwards 
posterns,     -a,     -um,     comparative 
posterior,  superlative  postremus 
or  postumus  [post,  after],  fol- 
lowing 


VOCABULARY 


413 


postquam,  subordinate  conjunc- 
tion, after 

postridie,  adverb  [posterus,  folloiv- 
ing,  dies,  day^,  the  following 
day;  postridie  eius  diei,  literally, 
on  the  following  day  of  this  day, 
i.  e.,  the  next  day 

potens,  potentis,  adjective  [present 
participle  of  possum,  he  aUe^, 
powerful 

potentia,  -ae,  f.  [potens,  'power- 
ful^, power 

potestas,  potestatis,  f.  [potis,aZ)Ze], 
literally,  ability;    power 

potior,  potiri,  potitus  sum  [potis, 
able],  literally,  become  powerful, 
obtain  control  of  or  over,  gain; 
governs  ablative  which  is  trans- 
lated by  an  objective 

prae,  preposition  with  ablative. 
Tn  composition,  before,  very 

prae-cedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -cessum, 
literally,  go  before,  i.  e.,  surpass; 
governs  accusative 

prae-cipio,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -ceptum 
[capio,  capere,  cepi,  captum, 
taTce],  literally,  tahe  in  advance, 
give  precepts  to;    usually,  direct 

prae-ficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -factum 
[facio,  facere,  feci,  factum, 
malce],  literally,  malce  to  be  be- 
fore; regularly, 2? i!ace  .  .  .  in  com- 
mand of,  put  .  .  .  in  charge  of 

prae-mitto,  -mittere,  -misi,  -mis- 
sum,  se7id  in  advance,  send  ahead 

prae-opto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  liter- 
ally, choose  before,  i.  e.,  prefer 

praesens,  praesentis,  present  par- 
ticiple of  praesum 

praesentia,  -ae,  f.  [praesens,  pres- 


ent], the  present;  in  praesentia, 
for  th'e  present 

prae-sertim,  adverb,  especially 

prae-sidium,  -i,  n.,  garrison,  protec- 
tion, line  137;  guard,  line  463 

prae-sto,  prae -stare,  prae-stiti, 
prae-statum  [sto,  stare,  steti, 
statum,  stand],  literally,  stand 
before;  i.  e.,  surpass,  with  dative, 
line  28;  impersonal  (direct  dis- 
course, prae-stat),  it  is -better, 
line  306 

prae-sum,  prae-esse,  prae-f  ui, , 

literally,  be  before,  usually,  be  in 
command  of;  hold,  line  293. 
Present  participle,  praesens, 
praesentis,  present 

praeter,  preposition  with  accusa- 
tive, except.  In  composition,  past 

praeter-eo,  praeter-ire,  praeter-ii 
or  praeter-ivi,  praeter-itum,  go 
past,  praeter-ita,  neuter  plural 
of  perfect  passive  participle, 
literally  (things)  gone  past,  i.  e., 
the  past 

praeterita,  see  praeter-eo 

praetor,  praetoris,  m.  [prae-eo,  go 
ahead] ,  general,  legatus  pro  prae- 
tore,  literally,  lieutenant  for  gen- 
eral, i.  e.,  lieutenant-geiieral 

prehendo,  prehendere,  prehendi, 
prehensum,  often  contracted  to 
prendo,  prendere,  prendi,  pren- 
sum,  grasp 

pretium,  -i,  n.,  price 

prex,  precis,  f.,  prayer 

pridie,  adverb  [prior,  former,  dies, 
day],  the  day  before 

primum,  adverb,  superlative  of  prius 

primus,  -a,  -um,  superlative  of  prior 

princeps,  principis,  adjective  [pri^ 


414 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


mus,  first],  first,  lines  119,  216. 
Masculine  used  as  a  substantive, 
literally,  the  first  man,  i.  e.,  chief, 
leader,  lines  226,  292,  361 

principatus,  -us,  m.  [princeps, 
leader],  leadership 

prior,  prius,  comparative  adjective 
(no  positive),  former,  superlative 
primus,  first 

pristinus,  -a,  -um  [prior,  former] 
former 

prius,  comparative  adverb  (no  posi 
tive),  sooner,  superlative  primunij 
first 

priusquam,  subordinate  conjunc 
tion,  literally,  sooner  than,  i.  e. 
before 

privatim,  adverb  [privatus,  pri 
vate],  personally 

privatus,  -a,  -um,  private;  per 
sonal,  line  216 

pro,  preposition  Mith  ablative,  for 
in  view  of,  lines  38,  39.  In  compo- 
sition with  other  words  it  means 
forth,  forward 

probo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  prove 

pro-do  -dare,  -didi,  -ditum  [do, 
dare,  dedi,  datum,  give],  liter- 
ally, give  forth;  hand  down  (to 
future  generations) 

proelium,  -i,  n.,  hattle 

profectio,  profectionis,  f.  [profi- 
ciscor,  depart],  departure 

proficiscor,  proficisci,  profectus 
sum,  start  out 

pro-hibeo,  -hibere,  -hibui,  -hibitum 
[habeo,  habere,  habui,  habitum, 
have,  hold],  literally,  hold  forth; 
keep  away,  lines  13,  191;  checTc 
(them),  lines  97,  138,  142;  pre- 
vent, line  277,  and  lines  160  and 


175,  where  itinere  means  from 
passing 

pro-icio,  -icere  (pronounced  as  if 
spelled  proiicio,  proiicere),  -ieci, 
-iectum  [iacio,  iacere,  ieci,  iac- 
tum,  throw],  literally,  throw  for- 
ward; throw  on  the  ground,  line 
493 

prope,  adverb  and  preposition  with 
accusative,  near;  comparative 
propius,  nearer;  superlative 
proxime,  nearest;    last,  line  440 

pro-pello,  -pellere,  pro-puli,  -pul- 
sum  [pello,  pellere,  pepuli,  pul- 
sum,  drive],  drive  off 

propinquus,  -a,  -um,  near.  Feminine 
used  as  a  substantive,  female 
relative 

propior,  propius,  comparative  ad- 
jective (no  positive),  nearer; 
superlative  proximus,  -a,  -um, 
nearest,  next,  very  near 

pr6-p6n6,  -p5nere,  -posui,  -positum, 
literally,  place  before,  i.  e.,  set 
forth 

propter,  preposition  with  accusative, 
on  account  of 

propterea,  adverb  [propter,  on  ac- 
count of,  and  some  case  form  of 
is],  on  this  account.  With  a  fol- 
lowing quod,  because,  the  transla- 
tion of  propterea  may  be  omitted 

pro-spicio,  -spicere,  -spexi,  -spec- 
turn,  looJc  out 

provincia,  -ae,  f.,  province 

proxime,  superlative  of  prope 

proximus,  -a,  -um,  superlative  of 
propior 

publico,  adverb  [piiblicus,  public], 
officially 


VOCABULARY 


415 


publicus,  -a,  -um,  -public,   res  puT)- 

lica,  public  interests 
Publius,  -i,  M.,  Publius,  a  Roman 

''first  name''  [prae-nomen] 
puer,  pueri,  m.,  boy;    child 
pugna,  -ae,  f.,  fight,  fighting 
pugno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum   [pugna, 

fight],  fight 
purgo,   -are,   -avi,   -atum,   cleanse. 

Perfect  passive  participle  used  as 

an  adjective,  literally,  cleansed, 

i.  e.,  blameless 
puts,   -are,   -avi,   -atum,  literally, 

reckon;    regularly,  thinlc 
Pyrenaeus,  -a,  -um,  Pyrenees 


qua,  relative  adverb,  where  lines 
95,   144,   171 

quadraginta,  indeclinable  cardinal 
(numeral)  adjective  [quattuor, 
four],  forty 

quadringenti,  -ae,  -a,  cardinal  (nu- 
meral) adjective  [quattuor, /owr, 
centum,  hundred],  four  hmidred 

quaero,  quaerere,  quaesivi  or 
quaesii,  quaesitum,  asl; 

quails,  -e,  interrogative  adjective, 
of  what  sort,  what 

quam,  adverb;  preceding  superla- 
tive, translated  by  possible  placed 
after  superlative  in  English 

quam,  coordinate  conjunction  with 
words  implying  a  comparison, 
than,  quam  diu,  line  314,  as 
long  as 

quantus,  -a,  -um,  interrogative  ad- 
jective, how  great 

quare,  see  res 

quartus,  -a,  -um,  ordinal  (numeral) 
adjective  [quattuor,  four],  fourth 


quattuor,  indeclinable  cardinal 
(numeral)  adjective,  four 

quattuor-decim,  indeclinable  cardi- 
nal (numeral)  adjective  [quat- 
tuor, four,  decem,  teii],  fourteen 

-que,  enclitic  coordinate  conjunc- 
tion, a7id;  appended  to  the  initial 
word  of  the  second  of  two  con- 
nected expressions.  For  the  place 
of  accent,  see  §12 

queror,  Queri,  questus  sum,  com- 
plain, complain  of 

qui,  quae,  quod,  as  relative  pro- 
noun or  adjective,  and  interroga- 
tive adjective,  who,  which,  etc. 
See  §§150, 154.  As  indefinite,  any. 
See  §570,  Note  5 

quidem,  adverb,  indeed,  ne  .  .  . 
quidem,  not  .  .  .  even,  always 
separated,  and  emphasizing  what 
intervenes 

quin,  conjunction;  introducing  sub- 
junctive, that,  quin  etiam,  liter- 
ally, nay,  more,  i.  e.,  indeed,  in 
fact 

quin-decim,  indeclinable  cardinal 
(numeral)  adjective,  [quinque, 
five,  decem,  ten],  fifteen 

quin-genti,  -ae,  -a,  cardinal  (nu- 
meral) adjective  [quinque,  five, 
centum,   hundred],  five  hundred 

quini,  -ae,  -a,  distributive  (nu- 
meral) adjective  [quinque,  five], 
literally,  five  by  five;  five  each, 
line  279 

quinque,  indeclinable  cardinal  (nu- 
meral) adjective,  five 

quintus,  -a,  -um,  ordinal  (numeral) 
adjective  [quinque,  five],  fifth 

quis,  quae,  quid,  (1)  interrogative 
pronoun,  who,  what.     (2)  indefi- 


416 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


nite  pronoun,  when  used  after 
si,  nisi,  ne,  or  num,  anyone,  any- 
iliing 

quis-quam,  no  feminine,  quid-quam 
or  qiiic-quam,  indefinite  pronoun, 
anyone,  anything 

quis-que,  quae-que,  quid-que 
(quod-que),  indefinite  pronoun, 
each  one 

quo,  subordinate  conjunction,  used 
to  introduce  a  purpose  clause 
that  contains  a  comparative, 
that;    lines   138,  254 

quod,  subordinate  conjunction,  he- 
cause.    See  §690 

quoque,  adverb,  also.  Notice  the 
short  o 

quot,  indeclinable  interrogative  ad- 
jective, how  many 


raeda,  -ae,  f.,  wagon 

rapiua,  -ae,  f.,  plundering 

ratio,  rationis,  f.,  reckoning 

ratis,  ratis,  f.,  raft 

Rauraci,  -drum,  m.,  the  Eauraci, 
a  tribe  living  north  of  the  Hel- 
vetians 

re-,  red",  an  inseparable  prefix, 
meaning  iaclc  or  again 

recens,  recentis,  adjective,  recent 

re-cipio,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -ceptum 
[capio,  capere,  cepi,  captum, 
take],  literally,  take  hack,  i.  e., 
receive;  with  reflective,  se  re- 
cipere,  literally,  take  one's  self 
hack,  hetake  one's  self,  usually, 
retreat,  retire,  in  good  order 

red-eo,  red-ire,  red-ii  or  red-ivi, 
red-itum,  go  hack,  i.  e.,  return 

red-imo,    -imere,    -emi,    -emptum 


[emo,  eraere,  emi,  emptum, 
hity],  literally,  buy  hack,  i.  e., 
hiiy  up 

red-integro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum 
[integer,  whole,  fresh],  literally, 
make  fresh  again,  i.  e.,  renew 

reditio,  reditionis,  f.  [redeo,  re- 
turn], (a)  returning 

re-duc6,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -ductum, 
literally,  lead  lack;    hring  hack 

re-fero,  re-ferre,  ret-tuli,  re-latum, 
carry  (hack);  pedem  referre,  lit- 
erally, carry  hack  the  foot,  i.  e., 
retreat,  retire,  under  pressure 

regnum,  -i,  n.  [rex,  king],  literally, 
royal  power,  sovereignty 

re-icio,  -icere  (pronounced  as  if 
spelled  reiicio,  reiicere),  -ieci, 
-iectum  [iacio,  iacere,  ieci,  iac- 
tum,  throw],  literally,  throw 
hack;    drive  hack 

re-linqu6,  -linquere,  -liqui,  -lictum, 
leave  (behind) 

reliquus,  -a,  -um  [relinquo,  leave 
hehind] ,  literally,  remaining;  reg- 
ularly, the  rest  of,  the  remain- 
ing; in  the  sense  of  left,  line 
204;  nihil  reliqui,  literally,  noth- 
ing of  left,  i.  e.,  nothing  left. 
Masculine  used  as  a  substantive, 
the  rest,  lines  208,  508 

re-miniscor,  -minisci, ,  remem- 

her 

re-moveo,  -movere,  -movi,  -motum, 
literally,  move  hack;    remove 

re-nuntio,  -nuntiare,  -nuntiavi, 
nuntiatum,  [nun  tins,  messen- 
ger], literally,  anjiounce  hack, 
i.  e.,  report 

re-pelI6,    re-pellere,    rep-puli,    re- 


VOCABULARY 


417 


pulsum  [pello,  pellere,  pepuli, 
pulsum,  drive],  drive  haclc 

repentinus,  -a,  -um,  unexpected 

re-perio,  re-perire,  rep-peri,  re- 
pertum,  find  out 

re-prehendo,  -prehendere,  -pre- 
hendi,  -prehensum,  hlame 

re-pugno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [pugna, 
fight],  literally,  fight  had:;  oif- 
set,  outweigh;    governs  dative 

res,  rei,  f.,  thing,  matter,  afair, 
consideration,  etc.  qua-re,  lit- 
erally, on  account  of  which  thing  ; 
and  therefore;  introducing  a 
questi'  why.  For  resptibllca, 
see  publicus 

re-scindo,  -scindere,  re-scidi,  -scis- 
sum,]*terally,  cut  hack;  cut  down, 
hreaTc  down 

re-scisc6,  -sciscere,  -scivi  or  re-scii, 
-scitum  [scio,  Icnow],  literally, 
hegin   to   know   again;    find  out 

re-sisto,   re-sistere,  re-stiti,  , 

literally,  stand  hack;  resist,  gov- 
erns dative 

re-spondeo,  -spondere,  -spondi, 
-sponsum,  answer,  reply 

responsum,  -i,  n.  [neuter  of  perfect 
passive  participle  of  responded], 
literally,  a  thing  replied,  i.  e., 
answer,  reply 

respublica,  see  publicus 

re-stitu6,  -stituere,  -stitui,  -stitu- 
tum  [statuo,  statuere,  statui, 
statutum,  station  (transitive), 
from  sto,  stand  (intransitive)], 
literally,  put  up  again  (transi- 
tive) ;  restore 

re-tineo,    tinere,    -tinui,    -tentum 


[teneo,    tenere,    tenui,   tentum, 
hold],  literally,  hold  hack ;  retain 
re-vertor,    re-verti,    re-verti,    re- 
versum,     deponent    in    present 
system,  literally,  turn  hack,  in- 
transitive;   return 
Rhenus,  -i,  m.,  the  Ehine 
Rhodanus,  -i,  m.,  the  Bhone 
ripa,  -ae,  f.,  hank  (of  a  river) 
rogo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  ask 
R5ma,  -ae,  f.,  Rome 
Romanus,  -a,  -um  [Roma,  Borne] , 
Eoman.   Masculine  used  as  a  sub- 
stantive,  a  Roman,  plural,   the 
Romans 
rursus,  adverb  [contracted  from  re- 
versus,  turned  hack],  again 

S 

saepe,  adverb,  comparative  saepius, 
superlative  saepissime,  often 

salus,  salutis,  f.,  safety 

Santones,  Santonum,  line  162,  and 
Santoni,  Santonorum,  line  196; 
M.,  the  Santones,  a  tribe  living 
on  the  northern  bank  of  the 
Garonne,  in  southwestern  Gaul 

sarcinae,  -arum,  f.,  soldiers'  packs, 
corresponding  to  our  knapsacks 

satis,  adverb,  sufficiently,  enough; 
e.  g.,  satis  magna,  sufficiently 
large  or  large  enough;  satis 
commode,  literally,  sufficiently 
conveniently,  i.  e.,  very  well; 
considered  as  an  indeclinable 
adjective,  sufficient,  enough,  lines 
48,  276;  satis  causae,  sufficient 
(of)  reason;    §589,  c 

satis-facio,  -facere,  -feci,  -factum, 
passive  satis-fio,  -fieri,  -f actus 


418 


BELLUM    HELVETICIJM 


sum,  literally,  do  enough,  i.  e., 
satisfy;    pay  damages 

scelus,  sceleris,  n.,  crime 

scio,  scire,  scivi,  scitum,  Tcnow 

scutum,  -i,  N.,  shield 

secrets,  adverb,  secretly 

secundus,  -a,  -mn,  [sequor,  follow'], 
second;  favorable;  secundidres 
res,  literally,  more  favorable 
things,  i.  e.,  greater  prosperity 

sed,  coordinate  conjunction,  but 

se-decim  (or  sex-decim),  indeclin- 
able cardinal  (numeral)  adjec- 
tive [sex,  six,  decern,  ten],  sixteen 

seditiosus,  -a,  -um,  seditious,  trea- 
sonable 

Segusiavi,  -orum,  m.,  the  Segusiavi, 
a  tribe  of  Gaul  to  the  south  of 
the  Aeduans 

sementis,  sementis,  f.,  sowing, 
planting 

semper,  adverb,  always 

senatus,  -us,  m.  [senex,  an  old 
7nan],  literally,  a  collection  of 
elders,  regularly,  senate,  in  the 
sense  of  a  governing  body  of 
prominent  men 

senex,  senis,  adjective,  comparative 
senior  or  maior  (natu),  super- 
lative maximus  (natu),  old.  Mas- 
culine used  as  a  substantive,  old 
man.  maiores  (with  natu  under- 
stood), literally,  (those)  greater 
(as  to  or  because  of  their  birth), 
i.  e.,  ancestors,  lines  236,  262 

seni,  -ae,  -a,  distributive  (numeral) 
adjective  [sex,  six],  literally,  six 
by  six;    six  each,  line  279 

sentio,  sentire,  sensi,  sensum, 
perceive 

separatim,  adverb,  separately 


septen-trio,  -trionis,  m.,  generally 
plural,  septen-triones,  -trionum, 
M.,  literally,  the  seven  plow-oxen, 
i.  e.,  the  seven  stars  that  form 
the  constellation  of  the   Great 
Bear;    i.  e.,  the  north 
Septimus,    -a,    -um,    ordinal    (nu- 
meral) adjective  [septem,  seven], 
seventh 
sepultura,  -ae,  f.,  burial 
Sequana,  -ae,  m.,  the  Seine 
Sequanus,   -i,   m.,  a  Sequanian  or 
one  of  the  Sequani,  plural  the 
Sequanians    or    the    Sequani,    a 
tribe  living  north  of  the  Aeduans 
sequor,  sequi,  secutus  sum,  follow 
servitus,    servitutis,    f.,    [servus, 

slave],  slavery 
servus,  -i,  m.,  slave 
seu,  another  form  of  sive 
sex,  indeclinable  cardinal  (numeral) 

adjective,  six 
sex-aginta,    indeclinable    cardinal 
(numeral)    adjective    [sex,  six], 
sixty 
si,  subordinate  conjunction,  if 
signum,  -i,  n.,  standard 
silva,  -ae,  f.,  forest 
simul,  adverb,  at  the  same  time 
sin,  subordinate  conjunction,  but  if 
sine,    preposition    vs^ith    ablative, 

without 
singuli,   -ae,   -a,   distributive    (nu- 
meral) adjective,  one  by  one,  one 
at  a  time 
sinister,  sinistra,  sinistrum,  left 
sive,  coordinate  conjunction,  or  if ; 
sive  (seu)  .  .  .  sive,  either  .  .  .  or 
socer,  -soceri,  m.,  father-in-law 
socius,   -a,   -um,  associated.     Mas- 
culine used  as  a  substantive,  ally 


VOCABULARY 


419 


sol,  solis,  M.,  no  genitive  plural,  sun 

solum,  -i,  N.,  soil,  line  194.  Notice 
the  short  o 

sdlum,  adverb  [solus,  alone,  only], 
only,  lines  216,  329,  374 

solus,  -a,  -um,  genitive  solius,  etc., 
alone,  line  319.  For  declension, 
see  §283 

soror,  sororis,  f.,  sister,  soror  ex 
matre,  literally,  sister  from  (his) 
mother,  i,  e.,  his  half-sister  (from 
the  same  mother) 

spatium,  -i,  n.,  space,  of  time,  line 
128;    distance 

spect5,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  literally, 
ZooA:,  face;  of  countries,  lie,  be 
situated 

spero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [spes 
hope],  hope,  hope  for 

spes,  spei,  f.,  plural  limited  to 
nominative  and  accusative,  hope 

sponte,  ablative  of  a  defective 
noun,  meaning  free  will,  whose 
only  other  form  is  spontis,  geni- 
tive; sua  sponte,  hy  their  own 
influence 

status,  statuere,  statui,  statutum 
[sto,  stand,  intransitive],  liter- 
ally, station,  stand,  transitive; 
decide,  line  195;  talce  measures, 
line  367;  ne  quid  gravius  statu- 
eret,  literally,  not  to  decide  any- 
thing too  severe,  i.  e.,  not  to  taTce 
any  too  severe  measures 

studeo,  studere,  studui,  ,  he 

eager,  desire;  governs  dative 

studium,  -i,  n.,  [studeo,  desire], 
literally,  desire;    devotion,  356 

sub,  preposition  with  accusative 
(with  verb  implying  motion)  or 
ablative    (with    verb    implying 


rest),  binder;  toicard,  line  283; 
at  the  foot  of,  line  392;  close  to, 
line  447.  In  composition  with 
other  words  it  means  under,  from 
under  (which  often  means  up) 

sub-dtico,  --ducere,  -du2d,  -ductum, 
literally,  lead  from  under ;  regu- 
larly, withdraw 

sub-eo,  sub-ire,  sub-ii,  sub-itum, 
under-go 

sub-icio,  -icere  (pronounced  as  if 
spelled  subiicio,  subiicere),  -ieci, 
-iectum  [iacio,  iacere,  ieci,  iac- 
tum,  throw],  throw  (from  under) 

sublatus,  -a,  -um,  perfect  passive 
participle  of  tollo 

sub-lev6,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  liter- 
ally, lift  from  under;  help,  line 
298 

sub-moveo,  -movere,  -movi,  -mo- 
tum,  literally,  move  from  under; 
plural  of  perfect  passive  parti- 
ciple used  as  a  substantive,  liter- 
ally, the  hHving-been-moved-from- 
under,  i.  e,,  those  who  had  been 
dislodged,  line  468 

sub-sidium,  -i,  n.,  reserve,  reinforce- 
ment 

sub-sisto,  -sistere,  sub-stiti,  , 

literally,  stand  under  (an  at- 
tack) ;    i.  e.,  malce  stands,  stop 

sub-veho,  -vehere,  -vexi,  -vectum, 
literally,  carry  from  under;  we 
say,  bring  up 

suc-cedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -cessum, 
literally,  go  under ;   approach 

sui,  sibi,  se,  reflexive  pronoun,  of 
himself,     herself,     itself,     them- 

•    selves,  etc.    See  §§404,  405,  407 

Sulla,  -ae,  m.,  a  Eoman  ''last 
name ' '    [cog-nomen] ;     {Lucius 


420 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


Cornelius)  Sulla,  consul  88  B.C., 
and  dictator 

sum,  esse,  fui,  futurus,  be 

summa,  -ae,  r.  [feminine  of  sum- 
mus,  superlative  of  superus, 
high,  with  res  understood],  sum 

cummus,  -a,  -um,  superlative  of 
Euperus 

Lum5,  sumere,  sumpsl,  sumptum, 
tal'e 

Eumptus,  -a,  -um,  participle  of 
sumo 

Eumptus,  -us,  M.  [sumo,  taTce],  ex- 
pense 

super-,  in  composition,  over 

superd,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [super, 
over] J  literall}',  get  over,  as  we 
say,  "get  on  top";  regularly, 
overcome,  conquer 

super-sum,  super-esse,  super-fui, 
literally,  he  (left)  over,  i.  e.,  re- 
main, line  422;   survive,  line  482 

superus,  -a,  -um,  comparative  su- 
perior, superlative  supremus  or 
£ummus,  high;  summus  mons, 
the  highest  part  of  the  mountain, 
the  top  of  the  mountain 

sup-peto,  -petere,  -petivi,  -petitum, 
literally,  seeic  from  under,  seeTc 
to  help;   regularly,  he  on  hand 

suppliciter,  adverb,  humhly 

supplicium,  -i,  n.,  punishment 

sus-cipio,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -ceptum 
[capio,  capere,  cepi,  captum, 
talce],  undertake 

suspicio,  suspicionis,  f.,  suspicion 

sus-tineo,  -tinere,  -tinui,  -tentum 
[teneo,  tenere,  tenui,  tentum, 
hold],  literally,  hold  under;  sus- 
tain 

suuS;  -a,  -um,  reflexive,  possessive 


adjective,  his  (own),  her  (own), 
its  (own),  their  (own),  accord- 
ing to  the  subject  of  the  clause 
or  sentence 


T.,  abbreviation  for  Titus,  a  Eoman 
"first  name"  [prae-nomen] 

tabula,  -ae,  f.,  literally,  writing 
tablet;  list 

taceo,  tacere,  tacui,  tacitum,  he 
silent 

tam,  adverb,  so,  in  the  sense  of  to 
such  a  degree.     Contrast  ita 

tamen,  adverb,  nevertheless 

tandem,  adverb,  at  length 

tantus,  -a,  -um,  so  great 

telum,  -i,  N.,  missile,  line  147 ;  spear, 
line  477 

temperantia,  -ae,  f.  [tempero,  re- 
frain], moderation 

tempero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  refrain 

tempto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  try, 
attempt 

tempus,  temporis,  n.,  time 

tene5,  tenere,  tenui,  tentum,  hold; 
memoria  tenere,  literally,  hold  in 
memory,  i.  e.,  remember 

tertius,  -a,  -um,  ordinal  (numeral) 
adjective  [tres,  three],  third 

testis,  testis,  m.  or  f.,  witness 

Tigurinus,  -i,  m.,  Tigurj,nus,  the 
name  of  one  canton  of  the  Hel- 
vetians; plural,  the  Tigurini,  the 
name  of  the  individuals  of  this 
canton 

timed,  timere,  timui, ,  fear 

timer,  timoris,  m.  [timed,  fear], 
fear 

Titus,  -i,  M.,  Titus,  a  Eoman  ' '  first 
name"  [prae-nomen] 


VOCABULARY 


421 


tolerd,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  endure 
tolld,  toUere,  sus-tuli,  sub-latum, 

literally,  raise;  very  often,  talce 
away,  lines  85,  450;  elate,  line 
272 

Tolosates,  Tolosatium,  m.,  the  Tol- 
osates,  a  tribe  in  southwestern 
Gaul  near  modern  Toulouse 

tdtus,  -a,  -um,  genitive  totius,  etc., 
the  whole,  whole;  tota  Gallia, 
the  whole  (of)  Gaul.  For  declen- 
sion, see  §283 

tra-,  form  of  trans  in  composition 

tra-do,  -dere,  -didi,  -ditum  [do, 
dare,  dedi,  datum,  give],  liter- 
ally, give  over;   give  up 

tra-duc6,  -ducere,  -duxi,  -ductum, 
lead  .  .  .  across 

tragula,  -ae,  f.,  a  Gallic  lance 

trans,  preposition  with  accusative, 
across,  over.  In  composition  it 
often  has  the  form,  tra- 

trans-eo,  trans-ire,  trans-ii,  trans- 
itum,  literally,  go  across,  i.  e., 
cross 

trans-figo,  -figere,  -fixi,  -fixum, 
pierce  (across) 

tre-centi,  -ae,  -a,  cardinal  (numeral) 
adjective  [tres,  three,  centum, 
hundred],  three  hundred 

tres,  tria,  cardinal  (numeral)  ad- 
jective, three.  For  declension 
see  §106 

tribuo,  tribuere,  tribui,  tribtitum, 
assign  (it) 

triduum,  -i,  n.,  [tres,  three,  dies, 
day],  (the  space  of)  three  days 

triginta,  indeclinable  cardinal  (nu- 
meral) adjective  [tres,  three], 
thirty 

triplex,  triplicis,   adjective   [tres. 


three],  literally,  three- fold;  regu- 
larly, triple 

Troucillus,  -i,  m.  (Gaius  Valerius) 
Troucillus,  a  Gallic  leader 

Tulin^,  -orum,  m.,  the  Tulingi,  a 
tribe  north  of  the  Helvetians 

tum,  adverb,  then 

tu,  tui,  tibi,  te,  personal  pronoun, 
you;  sometimes  reflexive  (except 
in  the  nominative),  of  yourself, 
etc.    See  §551 

tuus,  -a,  -um,  possessive  adjective, . 
your,  referring  to  one  person 

U 

ubi,  relative  or  interrogative  ad- 
verb, where ;   relative,  when 

ulciscor,  ulcisci,  ultus  sum,  avenge, 
line  217;  punish,  line  256 

uUus,  -a,  -um,  genitive  ullius,  etc., 
any ;  as  substantive,  any  one,  line 
141.    See  §283 

ulterior,  ulterius,  comparative  ad- 
jective (no  positive),  farther; 
superlative  ultimus.  Gallia  ul- 
terior, farther  Gaul,  i.  e.,  the  por- 
tion of  modern  France  that  had 
been  overrun  by  the  Eomans, 
contrasted  with  Gallia  citerior 
or  Cisalpina,  which  was  a  part 
of  northern  Italy 

iina,  adverb  [unus,  owe],  together; 
lines  89,  309 

unde,  relative  and  interrogative  ad- 
verb, literally,  whence,  i.  e.,  from 
which 

un-de-viginti,  indeclinable  cardi- 
nal (numeral)  adjective,  liter- 
ally, one  from  twenty,  i.  e.,  nine- 
teen 

undipue,  adverb,  literally,  from  all 


422 


BELLUM    HELVETIC  UM 


sides;  on  all  sides,  lines  30,  414; 
from  all  directions,  line  71 

unus,  -a,  -um,  genitive  unius,  etc., 
one;   only,  line  148.     See  §283 

urbs,  urbis,  f.,  city,  i.  e.,  Rome,  line 
111.    For  pronunciation,  see  §6 

Ut  or  uti,  subordinate  conjunction; 
witli  subjunctive  of  purpose,  that 
or  in  order  that;  see  §414;  with 
subjunctive  of  result,  (so)  that; 
see  §436,  c;  as  conjunctive  ad- 
verb with  indicative,  as 

uter,  utra,  utrum,  genitive  utrius, 
etc.;  interrogative  adjective, 
which  (of  two).    See  §283 

uti,  see  ut 

uti,  infinitive  of  utor 

utinam,  adverb,  may,  would  that, 
I  wish  that,  I  hope  that,  used  in 
the  expression  of  a  wish.  See 
§778 

utor,  uti,  usus  sum,  use;  with  con- 
silio,  adopt;    governs  ablative 

utrum,  conjunction,  whether 

uxor,  uxdris,  f.,  wife 


vaco,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  he  vacant 
vadum,  -i,  n.,  ford 
vagor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  tcander 
valeo,   valere,   valui,   valitum,   he 

strong ;  plurimum  valere,  he  very 

strong 
Valerius,     -i,     m.,     Valerius;    see 

Troucillus 
vallum,  -i,  n,,  rampart,  wall 
vasts,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  lay  waste 
vectigal,  vectigalis,  n.,  tax,  revenue 
vel,    coordinate    conjunction,    or; 

vel .  .  .  vel,  either  .  .  .  or 
venio,  venire,  veni,  ventum,  come 


Verbigenus,  -i,  m.,  Verhigenus,  the 
name  of  a  canton  of  the  Helve- 
tians 

verbum,  -i,  n.,  word 

vereor,  vereri,  veritus  sum,  fear 

vergo,  vergere, , ,  literally, 

slope;  stretch 

vergobretus,  -i,  m.,  vergohret,  the 
title  of  the  chief  magistrate  of 
the  Aeduans 

Verucloetlus,  -i,  m.,  Verucloetius, 
a  Helvetian  ambassador 

verus,  -a,  -um,  true 

vesper,  vesperis,  or  vesper,  vesperi, 
M.,  evening 

vester,  vestra,  vestrum,  possessive 
adjective  [vos,  you,  plural],  your, 
referring  to  more  than  one  person 

veteranus,  -a,  -um  [vetus,  old], 
veteran 

vetus,  veteris,  adjective,  literally, 
old;  former;  comparative  vetus- 
tior,  superlative  veterrimus.  For 
declension,  see  App.  35 

vexo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  trouhle, 
harass 

via,  -ae,  f.,  icay 

victus,  -a,  -um,  participle  of  vinco 

victoria,  -ae,  f.  [victor,  victor]  ^ 
victory 

vicus,  -i,  M.,  village 

video,  videre,  vidi,  visum,  see;  in 
passive,  he  seen;  seem,  appear 

vigilia,  -ae,  f.,  watch,  one  of  the 
four  equal  divisions  into  which 
the  Eomans  divided  the  time  be- 
tween sunset  and  sunrise 

viginti,  indeclinable  cardinal  (nu- 
meral) adjective,  twenty 

vinco,  vincere,  vici,  victum,  con- 
quer;   plural   of  perfect  passive 


VOCABULARY 


423 


participle  used  as  a  substantive, 
literally,    the    having -been    con- 
quered, i.  e.,  those  who  had  'been 
conquered 
vinculum,  -i,  n.,  chain 
vir,  viri,  m.,  wan- 
virtus,    virtutis,    F.     [vir,    man^y 
literally,     manliness;     regularly, 
bravery 
vis,  vis,  plural  vires,  virium,  f., 
singular,  force;  -plnral,  strength; 
per  vim,  literally,  through  force, 
i.e.,   forcibly;  vim  facere,   use 
force.    See  §496 
vita,  -ae,  f.,  life 
vito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  avoid 
vix,  adverb,  with  difficulty 
vobis,  dative  and  ablative  plural 
of  tu 


voco,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  call 

Vocontii,  -orum,  m.,  the  Vocontii,  a 
tribe  living  in  farther  Gaul 

void,  velle,  volui,  ,  wish,  be 

willing.     See  §560 

voluntas,  voluntatis,  f.,  [volens, 
present  participle  of  volo,  will- 
ing], literally,  icillingness ;  per- 
mission, line  122;  goodwill,  line 
356;  consent,  line  379;  wish,  line 
384 

vos,  plural  of  tu 

vulgus,  -i,  N.,  no  plural,  the  common 
people;  existimatio  vulgi,  liter- 
ally, the  thought  of  the  common 
people,  i.  e.,  public  opinion 

vulnero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum  [vulnus, 
wound],  wound 

vulnus,  vulneris,  n.,  wound 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULAEY 


(able)  be  able,  possum 

about,  circum,  preposition;  cirei- 
ter,  adverb 

abundant,  copiosus 

accomplish,  conficio 

(account),  on  account  of,  propter; 
with  forms  of  res  and  causa, 
ob;  also  expressed  by  ablative  of 
cause;  on  this  account,  prop- 
terea 

(accustomed)  be  accustomed,  con- 
suevi;  see  consuesco 

across,  trans;  lead  across,  traduco 

affect,  afl&cio 

after,  post,  preposition  and  ad- 
verb; postquam,  subordinate  con- 
junction ;  day  after,  postridie 

afterwards,  postea 

again,  rursus 

(ahead)  send  ahead,  praemitto 

aid,  auxilium 

alarm,  commoveo 

all,  omnis 

allow,  patior;  it  is  allowed,  licet 

ally,  socius 

almost,  fere;  paene 

alone,  solus;  unus  (one) 

already,  lam 

also,  quoque 

although,  quamquam;  etsi;  cum   . 

always,  semper 

ambassador,  legatus 

ambuscades,  insidiae 


among,  inter  (amid),  apud  (with) 
and,  et;  atque,  emphasising  what 

follows;  -que,  co7inecting  closely; 

and  not,  neque;  and  so,  itaque 
another,  alius 
announce,  enuntio 
answer,  respondeo 
any,   aliquis;    quis,  after  si,  nisi, 

ne,  num 
anyone,    aliquis;    quis,    after    si, 

nisi,  ne,  num 
anything,  aliquid;  quid,  after  si, 

nisi,  ne,  num 
appoint,  constituo 
approach,  adventus 
arms,  arma 
army,  exercitus 
around,  circum 
arouse,  commoveS 
arrange,  colloco 
arrival,  adventus 
arrive,  pervenio 
as,  ut  with  indicative 
ask,  rogo;  quaero  (asTc  a  question) 
assault,  oppugno 
assemble,  convenio 
assert,  exsequor 
at  first,  primo;  at  last,  demum;  at 

length, tandem;  denique  (finally) 
attack,    aggredior;    oppugno    (as- 
sault);  impetum  facio  (maTce  a 

charge) 
attempt,    conor,    verb;     conatum, 
.    noun 
avenge,  ulciscor 


424 


VOCABULARY 


425 


await,  exspecto 

(away)  be  away,  absum;  carry 
away,  take  away,  tollo;  keep 
away,  prohibeo;  away  from,  ab 


(back)  come  back,  r^de5  (go 
back) ;  revertor  {turn  hack) ; 
drive  back,  repello;  reicio 
{throw  hack) 

baggage,  impedimenta,  'plural 

bank,  ripa 

battle,  proelium;  pugna  {liand  to 
hand;  battle  line,  acies 

be,  sum ;  be  away,  be  from,  absum ; 
be  near  at  hand,  insto;  be  on 
hand,  suppeto;  be  over,  be  in 
command  of,  praesum 

because,  quod 

become,  fid 

before,  ante,  preposition  and  ad- 
verb; antea,  adverb;  antequam, 
priusquam,  subordinate  conjunc- 
tion; day  before,  pridie 

began,  coepi 

begin,  incipio;  coepi,  perfect,  plu- 
perfect, and  future  perfect  tenses 

beginning,  initium 

between,  inter 

block,  impedio 

boat,  navis 

body,  corpus 

bound,  contineo 

boy,  puer 

brave,  fortis 

bravery,  virtus;  fortitiid5 

bravest,  fortissimus 

breadth,  latitude 

bridge,  pons 

bring  in,  importo 


bring  together,  conduco,  of  men; 

confero,  of  things 
bring  upon,  inf  ero 
broad,  latus 
brother,  frater 
build,  f  acio 
building,  aedificium 
but,  sed;  but  if,  sin 
buy,  coemo 
by,  ab,  or  ablative 


call,  appello  {address);  voco;  call 

together,  eonvoco 
camp,  eastra,  plural 
can,  possum  {he  able),  with  infini- 
tive 
canton,  pagus 
carry,   porto;   carry  away,   tollo; 

carry  on,  gero;  carry  through, 

perfero 
cart,  carrus 

cause,  causa,  noun;   euro,  verb 
cavalry,  equitatus,  collective;  equi- 

tes  {horsemen) 
cavalryman,  eques 
cease,  desisto 
certain,  certus 
chance,  casus 
change,  commutatiS 
character,  natiira 
charge,  concursus 
chief,  princeps 
child,  puer;  children,  pueri;  liberi 

{free) 
choose,  deligS 
close  friend,  necessarius 
city,  urbs 
collect,  conduco  {lead  together),  of 

men;   cogo    {drive  together),  of 


426 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


men;    confero   (bring  together), 

of  things 
come,  venio;  come  back,  redeo  (go 

back) ;    reverter   (turn  back) 
come  together,  convenio 
(command)  be  in  command,  prae- 

siim;  place  in  command,  praeficio 
common  people,  vulgus;  multitudo 

(the  multitude) 
compact,  confertus 
compel,  c5g6 
complain,  queror 
complete,  cdnficio 
conceal,  abdo 
concerning,  de 
conference,  concilium 
conquer,  supero;    vinco 
conspiracy,  eoniuratio 
construct,  perdiico 
consul,  consul 
consume,  consumo 
continually,  continenter 
control,  imperium 
conveniently,  commode 
com,  frumentum 
council,  concilium 
courage,  virtus 
cross,  transeo 
custom,   institutum ;     mos 
cut  to  pieces,  concido 


daily,  eotidianus,  adjective;    coti- 

die,  adverb 
danger,  periculum 
dare,  audeo 
daughter,  f  ilia 
day,    dies;    day   after,   postridie; 

day  before,  pridie 
daybreak,  prima  lux 
death,  mors 


deceive,  decipio 

decide,  eonstituo 

declare,  confirmo 

deep,  alius 

defeat,  calamitas 

defend,  defendo 

delay,  moror 

demand,  posed 

depart,  discedo 

departure,  profectio 

dependent,  cliens 

depth,  altitfido 

deserve,  mereor 

desire,  studeo,  with  dative;  cupio, 

ivith   dative   or   with   accusative 

and  infinitive 
desirous,  cupidus 
despise,  despicid 
determine,  eonstituo 
difficult,  difficilis 
disappoint,  deicio 
disaster,  calamitas 
disclose,  enuntio 
discuss,  ago 
dispatch,  litterae 
distance,  spatium 
(distant)  most  distant,  extremus 
distress,  dolor 
ditch,  fossa 
divide,  divido 
do,  f  acio 

doubleheaded,  anceps 
doubtful,  dubius 
down  from,  de 
draw  up,  Instruo 
drive,  ago;  drive  back,  repello; 

reicio  (throw  back) 


each,  quisque 
eagerness,  studium 


VOCABULARY 


427 


easily,  facile 

easy,  facilis 

eight,  octo 

eighty,  octdginta 

either,  aut,  excluding  other  alter- 
native; vel 

elate,  tollo 

embassy,  legatio 

eminent,  egregius 

encamp,  consido 

end,  finis 

endure,  perf ero 

enemy,  hostis,  hostes 

enough,  satis 

enroll,  conscribo 

entrust,  mando 

equal,  par 

especially,   maxime;    praesertim 

establish,  confirms 

even,  etiam;  not  even,  ne  .  .  .  qui- 
dem,  emphasizing  the  intervening 
word 

evening,  vesper 

except,  praeter 

extend,  pertineo,  pate5 

extraordinary,  incredibilis 

eye,  oculus 


fact,  res 

faith,  fides 

fall,  cado 

far,  longe 

farther,  ulterior,  ad j ective  ;  longius, 

adverb 
farthest,  extremus,  adjective;  lon- 

gissime,  adverh 
father,  pater 
favor,  gratia,  noun;    faveo,  verb, 

with  dative 
favorable,  secundus 


fear,  timer,  noun;  timeo,  verb  (he 
timid  about  anything) ;  vereor, 
verb  (fear  reasonably) 

feel,  sentio 

few,  pauci 

field,  agar 

fiercely,  acriter 

fifteen,  quindecim 

fight,  contendo 

fill,  compleo 

finally,  denique 

find,  reperio 

finish,  conficio 

fire,  ignis;  set  fire  to,  set  on  fire, 
incendo 

first,  primus,  princeps,  adjectives; 
primum,  adverb;  at  first,  prirao 

(fitting)  it  is  fitting,  oportet 

five,  quinque;  five  each,  quini;  five 
hundred,  quingenti 

flee,  fugio 

flight,  fuga 

flow,  fluo 

follow,  sequor 

following,  posterus 

foot,  pes 

for,  conjunction,  nam;  enim,  post- 
positive 

force,  vis;  forces,  copiae 

ford,  vadum 

forest,  silva 

forget,  obliviscor 

former,  vetus 

fort,  castellum 

fortification,  miinitio 

fortify,  miiniS 

fortune,  fortuna 

forty,  quadraginta 

four,  quattuor;  four  each,  quater- 
ni;  four  hundred,  quadringenti 

fourth,  quartus 


428 


BELLUM    liELVETICUM 


free,  liber,  adjective;  eripio,  verl) 

freely,  libenter 

free  will,  sponte 

friend,  amicus 

friendly,  amicus,  -a,  -um 

friendship,  amicitia 

frighten  away,  deterreo;  frighten 

thoroughly,  perterreo 
from,    ab;    de;    ex;    from    there, 

inde;    from  all  sides,  undique 


gain,  concilio 

garrison,  praesidium 

gate,  porta 

get  hack,  recipio;   get  possession 

of,  potior,  with  ablative 
give,  do 

go,  eo;  go  across,  transeo 
god,  deus 
good,  bonus 
grain,  frumentum 
grant,  concede 
great,  magnus;  great  number,  mul- 

titiido 
guard,    praesidium;    be   on   one's 

guard,  caveo 


half-way,  medius 

halt,  consist© 

hand,  manus;  be  near  at  hand, 
insto;  be  on  hand,  suppeto 

happen,  accido  (befall);  fio  (be- 
come) 

harm,  iniuria,  noun;    uoceo,  verb 

harass,  lacesso 

hardly,  aegre 

hasten,  contendo  (strive) ;  ma- 
ture;   ivitJi  object  infinitive 


hate,  odi 

have,  habe5 

he,  is 

head,  caput 

hear,  hear  of,  audid 

heavily,  graviter 

height,  altitiido 

help,  auxilium 

her,  earn,  objective,  when  not  re- 
flexive; her  (self),  se;  her,  eius, 
when  not  reflexive;  her  (own), 
suus,  -a,  -um 

here,  hie 

hide,  abdo  (init  away) ;  occulto 
(conceal) 

high,  altus;  higher,  altior;  supe- 
rior, ichen  not  definitely  compared 
with  something  else 

hill,  collis 

him,  eum,  whe7i  not  reflexive 

hinder,  prohibeo  (Iceep  away  from); 
deterreo  (frighten  from);  impe- 
dio  (impede) 

hindrance,  impedimentum 

his,  eius,  when  not  reflexive;  his 
(own),  suus,  -a,  -um 

hither,  citerior,  adjective 

hold,  teneo;    obtineo 

home,  domus 

hope,  spes,  noun;    spero,  verb 

horn,  cornii 

horse,  equus 

horseman,  eques 

hostage,  obses 

hour,  hora 

how  large,  quantus 

hundred,  centum;  for  two  hun- 
dred, etc.,  see  two,  etc. 

hunger,  fames 

hunt  up,  conquiro 


VOCABULARY 


429 


I,  ego 

if,  si;  if  not,  nisi,  when  the  entire 

condition  is  negatived;  but  if,  sin 
ill,  aeger 
import,  importo 
in,  in,  with  ablative;    in  all,  om- 

nino;  in  view  of,  pro;  in  that 

place,  ibi 
increase,  augeo 
induce,  adduc5 
inflict,  infero 
influence,    auctoritas,    noun;     ad- 

diico,  verb 
inform,  certior(-em)  facio 
inhabit,  incolo 
injure,  noceo 
injury,  iniiiria 
insult,  contumelia 
intervene,  intercedo 
into,  in,  with  accusative 
iron,  ferrum 
it,  id;  also  is,  ea  (accusative  eum, 

earn),  if  the  gender  of  the  Latin 

noun  represented  is  masculine  or 

feminine 
its,    eius,   tchen   not  reflexive;   its 

(own),  suus,  -a,  -um 


javelin,  telum,  general  term  (mis- 
sile);  pilum 
join,  iungo 
journey,  iter 
judge,  iudico 


keen,  acer 

keep  away,  prohibeo 
kill,  interficio    (maJce  way  with) 
occTdo  (slay) 


kindness,  gratia 

kinsman,  consanguineus 

know,  intellego  (understand)  ;  cog- 
novi  (I  have  ascertained) 

(knowing)  not  knowing,  insciens 

(knowledge)  without  the  knowl- 
edge of,  insciens  (7iot  Tcnowing) 

(known)  well  known,  nobilis 


lack,  inopia 

lake,  lacus 

language,  lingua 

large,  magnus 

(last)  at  last,  demum 

lately,  nuper 

law,  lex 

lay  aside,  dep6n5 

lay  waste,  vasto 

lead,  duco;  lead  across,  traduco; 
lead  out,  ediico 

leader,  dux 

leadership,  prineipatus 

learn,  cognosco 

least,  minimus,  adjective;  minimo, 
adverb 

leave,  relinquo 

legion,  legio 

length,  longitude ;  at  length,  deni- 
que 

less,  minor,  adjective;  minus,  ad- 
verb 

letter,  littera  (letter  of  the  alpha- 
bet) ;    litterae  (epistle) 

levy,  conscrlbo 

lie,  verg5 

lieutenant,  legatus 

light,  lux 

likewise,  item 

limited,  angustus 


430 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


line  of  march,  iter;  line  of  battle, 

acies 
(little)  too  little,  parum 
live  (in),  incolo 
long,  longus 

long,  for  a  long  time,  diu 
lose,  amitto 
love,  amor 
low,  inferus 

M 

(made)  be  made,  fid 

make,  facio 

magistrate,  magi  stratus 

man,  homo;  vir 

manliness,  virtus 

many,  multl 

march,  line  of  march,  iter;  march, 

iter  facio    {malce  a  march) 
marked,  insignis 
marry  off,   colloco,  uitli  niiptum, 

expressed  or  understood 
meanwhile,  interim 
memory,  memoria 
message,  nuntius 
messenger,  nuntius 
mile,  mllle  passus 
miles,  milia  passuum 
military,  militaris 
mind,  animus 
mine,  mens 
mischief,  maleficium 
missile,  telum 
mission,  legatio 
month,  mensis 
moreover,  autem 
most,  plurimus,  adjective;  maxime, 

adverb;   also  hy  superlative 
mother,  mater 
mountain,  mons 
move,  moveo 


much,  multus;    adverb,  multo 
multitude,  multitude 
my,  mens 


i 


name,  nomen,  noun;  appello,  verb 
narrow,     angustus ;      narrowness, 

narrows,  angustiae 
near,    prope,    preposition   and   ad- 
verb;    nearer,    citerior    {nearer 
Borne) ;  propior,  adjective;  pro- 
pius,    preposition    and    adverb; 
nearest,  proximiis;    be  near  at 
hand,  insto 
neighbor,  finitimus 
neighboring,  finitimus,  -a,  -um 
neither,  neque 
nevertheless,  nihilo  minus 
new,  nevus 

night,  nox;    night  watch,  vigilia 
nine,  novem 
nineteen,    undeviginti,    {one  from 

twenty) 
ninety,  nonaginta 
no,  adjective,  nullus;  in  answering 
a    question,    minime;     no    one, 
nemo 
noble,  nobilis 
nobility,  nobilitas 
none,   nihil    {nothing);    niilli   {no 

persons) 
nor,  neque 

north,  septentrio(-nes) 
not,  non;    sometimes  ne  with  sub- 
junctives, according  to  use;   not 
even,  ne  .  .  .  quidem,  emphasiz- 
ing  the  intervening   word;    not 
yet,  nondum;  not  only  .  .  .  but 
also,  non  s51ura  .  .  .  sed  etiam 
noted,  nobilis;    cognitus 
nothing,  nihil 


VOCABULARY 


431 


now,  lam 

number,  numerus;    great  number, 

miiltitudd 


oath,  ius  iurandum 

obey,  pareo 

obtain  one's  request,  impetro 

ocean,  Oceanus 

often,  saepe 

old,  vetus  (former) ;  senex  (ad- 
vanced  in  years) 

on,  in  with  ablative;  sometimes  ex 
wJien  denoting  the  point  of  view ; 
on  account  of,  propter;  ob 
with  forms  of  res  and  causa; 
also  expressed  hy  ablative  of 
cause;  on  all  sides,  undique;  on 
the  other  hand,  contra;  carry 
on,  gero;  on  this  account,  prop- 
terea 

one,  unus ;  one  by  one,  singuli 

only, solum  (alone)  ;  mode  (merely) 

(open),  be  open,  pateo 

opportunity,  facultaa 

or,  aut,  excluding  other  alternative ; 
vel 

order,  iubeo,  with  accusative  and 
infinitive;  imper5,  with  accusa- 
tive and  dative,  or  dative  and  ut 
clause 

O  that,  expression  of  wish  (Jiope  or 
regret) 

other,  alii  (of  more  than  two),  the 
other,  alter  (of  tivo) ;  the  others 
reliqui 

ought,  oportet  (it  is  fitting)  ;  debeo 
(owe) 

our,  ours,  noster 

cut  of,  out  from,  ex 

outer,  exterior' 


outmost,  extremus 
(over)  be  over,  praesum 
overcome,  superd 
overtake,  consequor 


pace,  passus 

pardon,  condono 

part,  pars 

pay,  persolvo 

peace,  pax 

people,  populus;  common  people, 
vulgus;  multitiido  (the  multi- 
tude) 

persuade,  persuaded 

place,  locus,  noun;  colloco,  verb; 
place  in  command,  praeficio 

plan,  consilium 

pledge,  fides 

plenty,  copia 

point  out,  demonstro 

popularity,  gratia 

population,  multitiido  hominum 
(multitude  of  human  beings) 

possible,  quam,  with  superlatives 

power,  potestas;  royal  power,  reg- 
num 

powerful,  potens 

praise,  laud5 

prefer,  malo  (wish  more) ;  prae- 
opt5  (choose  in  preference) 

prepare,  comparo;  paro 

price,  pretium 

private,  privatus 

productive,  frumentarius 

prominent,  nobilis 

promise,  polliceor 

property,  f  ortiiiiae 

protection,  praesidium 

province,  provincia 

public,  publieus 


432 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


Q 

(quarters)    winter    quarters,    hi- 

berna 
quickly,  celeriter 

raft,  ratis 

ravage,  populor 

ready,  paratus 

realize,  intellego 

rear,  novissimum  agmen  (the  last 

part  of  the  marching  column;  no- 

vissimi  (the  last  ones) 
reason,  causa 
receive,  reeipio 
recent,  recens 
recently,  nuper 
reckoning,  ratio 
refinement,  humanitas 
refrain,  tempero 
rely,  nitor 
remaining,  reliquus 
remarkable,  incredibilis 
remember,  reminiscor 
reply,    respondeo,    verlj;    respon- 

sum,  noun 
report,  enunti5 
republic,  res  public  a 
(request)    obtain    one's    request, 

impetro 
reserve,  subsidium 
resort,  commeo 
resources,  opes 
(rest)  the  rest  of,  reliquus 
retreat,  se  recipere 
return,  reverter  (turn  hacTc) ;  red- 

eo   {go  iaclc) 
revolution,  novae  res 
right,  ius 
ripe,  maturus 


rise,  orior 
rising,  oriens 
river,  fliimen 
road,  iter;   via 
rout,  pello;   propello 
royal  power,  regnum 
rule,  imperium 
run,  aceurro 

S 

safety,  salus 

same,  idem;    to  the  same  place, 

eodem 
say,  dico 
scarcely,  vix 
scarcity,  inopia 
scout,  explorator 
sea,  mare 

second,  the  second,  alter 
see,  video 
seek,  pet5 
seise,  oecupo 
senate,  senatus 
send,    mitto;*   send   ahead,    prae- 

mitto 
separate,  divid5 
servant,  servus 
set  fire  to,  set  on  fire,  ineendo; 

set  out,  proficiscor 
setting,  oecasus 
seven,  septem 
seventh,  septimus 
several,  compliires 
she,  ea 

shield,  scutum 
ship,  navis 
show,  ostendo   (declare);    demon- 

stro  (point  out) 
sick,  aeger 
side,  latus 


VOCABULARY 


433 


sight,  conspectus 

signal,  insignis 

sister,  soror 

six,  sex 

sixteen,  sedecim 

skillful,  peritus 

slay,  occido 

slave,  servus 

slavery,  servitus 

(slope)  half  way  up  the  slope,  in 

colle  medio 
snatch,  eripio 
so,   ita    (in  such  a  manner);  tarn 

{to  such  a  degree);    so  great, 

tantus. 
soldier,  miles 
some,  nonnulli;    aliqui 
son,  f  ilius 
space,  spatium 
speech,  oratio 
(stand),   take   one's   stand,   con- 

sisto 
Start  out,  proficiscor 
state,  civitas,  {body  of  citizens); 

res  piiblica  {commonwealth) 
sternly,   graviter 
storm,  oppugno 
strong,  firmus 
struggle,  contends 
subdue,  paco 
sudden,  subitus 
suffer,  patior 

sufficient,  sufficiently,  satis 
sun,  sol 

sunset  =  the   setting  of  the   sun 
supply,  copia 
surpass,  praecedo  {get  ahead  of), 

u-ith     accusative;     praesto     {he 

ahead  of),  with  dative 
suspicion,  susplcio 
sword,  gladius 


take,  capio;  sumo  {tal-e  away); 
take  away,  toll5  {raise);  take 
by  storm,  expugno 

talk,  ago  {discourse) ;  loquor  {con- 
verse) 

tax,  vectigal 

tear  down,  rescinds 

ten,  decem 

territory,  fines 

than,  quam 

that,  is;   ille 

their,  eorum,  earum,  when  not  re- 
flexive; their  (own),  suus,  -a, 
-um 

them,  eos,  eas,  ea 

thence,  inde 

there,  ibi 

these,  hi,  hae,  haec 

they,  61,  eae,  ea 

thing,  res 

think,  arbitror  (judge) ;  existimo 
(estimate) ;    puto    (reckon) 

third,  tertius 

this,  hie 

though,  quamquam;    etsi;    cum 

those,  ei,  illi 

thousand,  mille,  usually  an  adjec- 
tive;   thousands,  milia 

three,  ires 

through,  per;  carry  through,  per- 
fero 

throw,  eonicio;  throw  down,  de- 
icio 

thus,  ita 

time,  tempus;  for  a  long  time,  diu 

to,  ad;  also  expressed  by  indirect 
object 

together,  una, ;  bring  together,  con- 
duco, of  men;  ednfero, of  things; 
call  together,  convoco 


434 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


too  little,  parum 

(top)  the  top  of,  summus 

touch  upon,  attingo 

toward,  ad 

town,  oppidum 

trader,  mercator 

train,  institud 

triple,  triplex 

troops,  copiae 

trouble,  vexo 

trust,  confido 

try,  Conor 

turn  aside,  turn  away,  averto 

twelve,  duodecim 

twenty,  viginti 

two,  duo;  two  hundred,  ducenti 


under,  sub,  with  accusative  or  alia- 

tive 
undergo,  subeo 
undertake,  suscipio 
unexpected,  repentinus 
unexpectedly,  improviso 
unfavorable,  adversus 
unhampered,  expeditus 
unless,  nisi 
until,  dum 
unwilling,  invitus;    be  unwilling, 

nolo 
urge  (on),  hortor 
use,  utor;   use  up,  consumo 


very,  translated  by  Latin  superla- 
tive;  very  few,  perpauci 
victory,  victoria 
(view)  in  view  of,  pr5 
village,  vicus 
violence,  vis 


W 

wall,  murus;    vallum  (rampart) 
wander,  erro;    vagor 
war,  bellum 
warn,  moneo 

(watch)  night  watch,  vigilia 
way,  via;    iter 
weapon,  telum 
wearied,  defessus 
we,  nos 
weep,  fleo 

well  known,  nobilis 
west  =  the  setting  of  the  sun 
what?     quid?     qui,     quae,     quod, 
when  adjective;    what  sort  of? 
qualis 
when,  cum;  ubi,  relative;  quando, 

interrogative 
whence,  unde 
where,  ubi,  qua 
whether,  utrum;   si 

which,  quod;   which  (of  two),  uter 

while,  dum 

who,  qui,  relative;    quis,  interrog- 
ative 

whole,  totus 

whom,  quem 

whose,  cuius 

why,  cur 

wide,  latus 

widely,  late 

width,  latitudo 

wife,  uxor 

will,  sponte 

(willing)  be  willing,  volo 

willingness,  voluntas 

win,  concilio 

wing,  cornu 

winter,  pass  the  winter,  hiemo 

winter  quarters,  hiberna 


VOCABULARY 


435 


wish,  volo ;  wish  that,  optative  suJ)- 

junctive 
with,  cum;   with  difficulty,  vix 
withdraw,  disc  e do 
without,  sine 
woman,  mulier 
wonder,  admiror 
work,  opus 
would  that,  optative  subjunctive 


wound,    vulnus,    noun;     vulnero, 

verb 
wrong,  iniOria 

Y 
year,  annus 
(yet)  not  yet,  nondum 
yield,  conced5 
yoke,  iugum 

you,  tu,  singular;    vos,   plural 
your,  tuus,  singular;  vester,  plural 


INDEX 

(Eeferences  are  to  Sections;  light  faced  figures  refer  to  the  body 
of  the  book;  heavy  figures  to  the  Appendix.) 


Ablative,  absolute,  397,  398;  agent, 
305,  306;  accompaniment,  641,  642; 
accordance,  456,  2;  cause,  610, 
611;  certain  deponent  verbs,  634, 
635;  comparison,  617,  618;  descrip- 
tion, 648,  649;  manner,  626,  627; 
measure  of  difference,  619,  620; 
means,  312,  313;  place  from  which, 
467,  468;  place  in  which,  475,  476; 
separation,  608,  609;  specification, 
655,  656;  time,  319,  320;  with 
prepositions,   113 

absum,  78 

Accent,   10-12,   10-12 

Accusative,  extent,  326,  327;  object, 
32;  to  which,  459,  460;  subject, 
520,   521;   with  prepositions,   113 

Active,  see  Voices 

ad,  expressing  purpose,   733,  740 

Adjectives,  declension  of,  first  and 
second  declension,  61,  63;  in  -er, 
67,  85,  31;  third  declension,  103, 
33-38;  comparatives.  111.  34;  with 
genitive  in  -Tus,  283,  284,  32 
comparison;  566,  567,  573-575,  39- 
45 

demonstrative,  134,  135,  142;  In- 
terrogative, 154;  numeral,  707,  70S, 
47-50 

possessive,   648,  53 
Use  of;  agreement,   63;   with  da- 
tive, 545,  546 

Adjective  pronouns,   63 

Adverbs,  formation  and  comparison 
of,  583,  46;  comparison  of  irregu- 
lar adverbs,  589;  numerals,  47 

Adversative   clauses,    see   Clauses 

Agreement,  adjectives,  63;  apposi- 
tive  and  predicate  noun,  85;  verb, 
34 

aliquis,  52 

Alphabet,    1 

Answers,  595,  d 

Antecedent,  152 

Appositive,   85 

atque,  ==  as,  note  Ch.  28,  16 

B 

Base,  18,  40,  45,  290,  297 
bos,  27 


Caesar,  page  14 

Calends,  541,  5 

Cardinal  numbers,  707,  708,  48 

Case  endings,  19 

Cases,    14;    with    prepositions,    113, 
114 
See  also  nominative,  genitive,  etc. 

causa,  685 

Causal  clauses,  see  Clauses 

Cause,  .see  Ablative,  and  Clauses 

Characterizing  or  characteristic 
clauses,  see  Clauses 

Clauses, 

subordinate:  after  verbs  of  fear- 
ing, 429,  430;  causal,  691,  692,  693, 
694;  conditional,  759-764;  (sub- 
stantive of)  desire  (purpose),  558, 
Ji',  indirect  discourse,  520-522,  751, 
752;  indirect  questions,  369,  370; 
(of)  purpose,  413,  414;  result 
(fact),  436,  437;  temporal,  700,  701 

coepi,  86 

Commands,   672-674 

Comparative  adjectives,  meaning 
of,  583 

Comparison,  of  adjectives,  111,  566, 
567,  573-575,  39-45;  of  adverbs, 
583,  589;  46 

Complementary  infinitive,  507 

complures,   576 

Conclusions,  see  Conditional  sen- 
tences 

Conditional  sentences,  759-764 

Conjugations,  25,  63; 

first,  25,  30,  167,  188,  198,  243,  245, 
263,    340,   356,   377,   388,   421,   443, 

668,  67; 

second,  46,  167,  189,  198,  243,  245, 
263,   341,    357,    377,    388,    422,   443, 

669,  68; 

third,    118,    178,    209,   243,    245,    263, 

348,  358,    377,    388,    422,    443,    669, 
69; 

third  in  lo,  124,  180,  211,  243,  245, 
263,  350,  360,  377,'  388,  422,  443, 
669,  71; 

fourth,  123,  179,  210,  243,  245,  263, 

349,  359,   377,   388,    422,    443,    669, 
70; 

periphrastic,  721-725,  75,  76 
Consonants,  6 


437 


438 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


Contingent  futurity,  see  Subjunctive 
Coordinate   clauses,   see   Clauses 
cum,  conjunction,    205,   694;   causal, 

693,  694;  temporal,  700,  701 
cum,  preposition,  552,  c 


Dative,  agent,  726,  727;  indirect  ob- 
ject, 53;  with  intransitive  verbs, 
536,  537;  with  compound  verbs, 
536,  537;  of  purpose,  543,  544;  of 
separation,  note  on,  Ch.  17,  8; 
two  datives  (double  dative),  543, 
c,  with  adjectives,  545,  546 

Declarative  sentences,  see  State- 
ments 

Declension:  of  nouns,  15,  14;  first 
declension.  16.  17,  15;  second  de- 
clension, 40,  45,  51,  16;  third  de- 
clension, 77,  90,  17-28;  fourth  de- 
clension, 270,  29;  fifth  declension, 
297,  30;  declension  of  adjectives, 
61;  first  and  second  declension, 
55,  31;  ending  in  -er,  67,  31;  with 
genitive  in  -Tus,  283,  284,  32;  third 
declension,  103,  33-38;  compara- 
tives. Ill,  34 

Defective  verbs,  see  Verbs 

Demonstrative  adjectives,  134,  135, 
142,   54-58 

Dependent  clauses,  see  Clauses 

Deponent,  see  Verbs 

Descriptive  cases,  see  genitive  and 
ablative  under  Cases 

Desire,  subjunctive  of,  see  Subjunc- 
tive; substantive  clauses  of,  see 
Clauses 

deus,  16 

dies,  30,  a 

Diphthongs,  5,  5 

Distributives.  707,  708,  47 

do,  52,  end;  85 

domus,  declension  of,  392,  29,  d; 
syntax  of.   460,   468,   476 

(louhtinff,  expressions  of,  note  on 
Ch.  17,  8 

dum,  571,  2 

duo,  505,   49 


ego,  552,  51 

Enclitics,   12,   12 

Endings,    personal,   active,    30,    225; 

passive,  190 
eo,  verb,  446,  84 
Exhortations,  672,  a 


Gender,  57-60,  98,  291,  298,  13,  and 
see  rules  under  each  declension 

Generalizing,  relative,  60,  a 

Genitive,  attributive,  35;  descriptive 
(of  description  or  quality),  648, 
649;  objective,  498.  499;  of  meas- 
ure, 648,  c;  partitive  (of  the 
whole),  490,  491;  possessive,  488, 
489;   with  nouns,  35 

Gerund,  443,  680-685 

Gerundive,  680,  682-685 

H 

Helvetians,  page  14 

hic,  134,  54 

hindering,  verbs  of,  note  on  Ch.  17, 

6 
Historical,    infinitive,    note   on,    Ch. 

16.  2 


i,  consonant  and  vowel,  7,  7 
i-   stems,  90,  24-26,  36-38 
idem.  482,  58 
ille,  135,  136,  2 
Imperative  mood,   667-669 
Imperfect,  see  Tenses 
Impersonal  verbs,  444,  445,  87 
in,  114 

Indefinite  pronouns,  see  Pronouns 
Indirect  discourse,  522,  751,  752 
Indirect  object,   see  Dative 
Indirect  questions,   369,   370 
Infinitives,  subject  of,  507,  521,  522; 
tenses  of.  520;  periphrasis  for  fu- 
ture,  note  on,    Ch.    20,   12;   in   in- 
direct discourse,  520-522;  as  sub- 
ject,  507;   historical,   note  on  Ch. 
16,  2 
Intensive  pronouns,  see  Pronouns 
Interrogative    adjectives,    see    Pro- 
nouns 
Interrogative  particles.  595,  2 
Interrogative     pronouns,     see    Pro- 
nouns 
Interrogative   sentences,    see  Ques- 
tions 
Ipse,  406,   59 
Irregular  verbs,  77-85 
is,  142,  143,  157  note,  552,  57 
iste,  55 

J  (I  consonant) 

i,   consonant  and  vowel,   7,  7 
Juppiter,  27 


Fact,  clauses  of,  see  Clauses 

fearinfj,  expressions  of,   429,  430 

Feminine,  see  Gender 

fero,  714.  81 

fid,   633,   83 

Future,  see  Tenses 

Future  perfect,  see  Tenses 


Kalends,  541.  5 


Legion,   550,   11 
Locative,  474 


INDEX 


439 


M 

Malo,  560,  82 

Masculine,  sec  Gender 

Memoranda,  131,  I 

Mile,  Roman,  96,   328 

MTIIe,  mllia,  96,  328,  48 

Mixed  stems,  91,  97,  98 

Modes,  see  Indicative,  Subjunctive, 

Imperative 
Moods,  see  Modes 

N 

-nam,  61,  a 

ne,  with  clauses  of  purpose,  413, 
414,  740;  after  verbs  of  fearing, 
429,  430;  with  hortatory  (and  jus- 
sive) subjunctive,  673;  with  opta- 
tive  subjunctive,   782 

ne quidem,  note  on  Ch.  16,  5 

-ne,  595,   o 

Neuter  nouns,  rule  for  declension 
of,  84;  see  Gender 

nisi,  759 

nolT,  672,  673 

nolo,  560,  82 

Nominative,  32 

nonne,    595,    & 

nos,  552 

Noun,  predicate,  85 

Nouns,  irregular,  27;  see  also  De- 
clensions,  Gender,   Stems 

num,  595,  c 

Numerals,  707,  708;  47-50 


Object,   direct,   33;   indirect,   53 
Optative  subjunctive.  781-782 
Ordinal  numbers,  707,  708,  47 


Pace,  Roman,  292 

Participles,  388;  present,  390,  38; 
perfect,  264;  translation  of,  391; 
agreement  of,  see  Adjectives 

Passive,  see  Voices 

Perfect,  see  Tenses 

Perfect  stem,  see  Stems 

Periphrastic  conjugation,  active, 
721-723.  38;  and  see  Tenses;  pas- 
sive,  723-727,  76 

Personal  endings,  active,  30,  225; 
passive,  190 

Personal  Pronouns,  see  Pronouns 

Place,  from  which,  467.  468;  in 
which,  475.  476;  to  which,  459,  460. 

Pluperfect,  see  Tenses 

plus,  576,  34,  a 

Possessive  adjectives  (pronouns), 
see  Pronouns 

possum,  506,  80 

Potential  subjunctive,  see  Subjunc- 
tive 

potior,  634,   635 

Predicate  adjectives,  83-85;  nouns, 
S5 


Prepositions,  use  of,  113;  with  abla- 
tive,  163,   164;   verbs  compounded 

with,  536,  537 
Present,  see  Tenses 
Present  stem,  see  Stems 
Principal  parts,  234-242,  65 
Principal  tenses,  371 
Prohibitions   (negative  commands), 

672-674 
Pronouns,    51-62;    in    indirect    dis- 
course, 751,  d 

demonstrative,   135,    136,    142,    143. 

482,   54-58 

indefinite,  571,  d 

intensive,   (ipse)   404-407,  59 

interrogative,   154,   61 

personal,  552,  51 

possessive,     including     possessive 

adjectives,  553.   53 

reflexive,  404-407,  52 

relative,  149-153.  60;  generalizing, 

60,  a,  and  see  Clauses 
Pronunciation,  1-13,  1-12 
propior,  589 
prosum,  79 
proximus,  589 
Purpose,    expressions    of,    413,    414, 

733 

Q 

quam,  617,  618;  omitted,  618 

Quantity,  of  vowels,  3,  3;  of  sylla- 
bles. 9,  3 

Questions,  direct,  595;  indirect,  369, 
370 

qui,  relative,  150;  indefinite,  571,  5; 
interrogative,  154 

quia,  692 

quicumque,   60 

quidam,  62 

quTlibet,  62 

quis,  indefinite,  571,  5;  62;  inter- 
rogative, 154,  61 

quispiam,  62 

quisquam,    62 

quisque,  62 

quisquis,  60,  a 

quivis,   62 

quod,  692 

quoniam,  692 


Reflexive  pronouns,  see  Pronouns 
Relative  clauses,  of  purpose,  413,   a 
Relative  pronouns,   see  Pronoun 
Result,  see  Clauses 
Rhetorical  question,  see  Questions 

S 

saying,  verbs  of,  522 

Semi-deponent  verbs,  note  on,  Ch. 
18,  11,  74 

senex,  27 

Sentences,  see  Statements,  Ques- 
tions, Commands,  Prohibitions, 
Wishes;  compound,  complex 


440 


BELLUM    HELVETICUM 


Separation,  see  Dative  and  Ablative 

Sequence  of  tenses,  371 

si,  759 

similis,  567 

sin,  759 

Sounds  of  consonants,  6,  6;  of  Diph- 
thongs, 5,  5;  of  vowels,  4,  4 

Stems  of  verbs,  64,  a,  6,  c 

Subject,  nominative,  32;  accusative, 
521,  522 

Subjunctive,  hortatory,  672-673; 
jussive,  673;  of  purpose,  413,  414; 
of  result,  436,  437;  of  wish  (opta- 
tive), 781-782;  with  verbs  of  fear- 
ing, 429,  430;  with  cum,  casual, 
693,  694;  with  cum,  .temporal,  700, 
701 

Subordinate  clauses,  see  Clauses 

Substantive  clauses,  558,  4;  and  see 
Clauses  of  Desire,  Purpose,  Re- 
sult, Fact,  quod,  Indirect  ques- 
tions. Infinitive  clauses,  under 
Clauses 

Substantives,  see  Nouns.  Pronouns, 
Adjectives  used  substantively; 
agreement  of,  see  Agreement 

suT,  suus,   205,   405.   407,   52 

sum,  69,  160.  224.  333,  66;  com- 
pounds of,  535,  77-80 

Superlative,  meaning  of,  583,  3 

Supine.   734-739 

Supine  Stem,  see  Stems 

Syllables,  8,  9,  8,  9 


Temporal  clauses,  see  Clauses 
Tenses,   sequence  of,   371;   principal 

and  historical.  371;  imperfect,  161, 

169;  perfect,  225,  226 

of  subjunctive,   sequence  of,   371; 

in  indirect  discourse,  520 


of  periphrastic   conjugations,   in- 
dicative,   721,    1,    a;    subjunctive, 
721;  1,  d 
of  infinitive,   678 

Tense  signs,  169,   226,   201,  342,  361, 
362 

Time,    expressions    of,    cases,    320, 
327;  clauses,  701 

tres,   708.   49 

to,  552,  51 


uiius,  283 

Onus,   283 

ut,  413,  414,  472,  2;  436,  437 

ut  non,  437 

utinam,  782 

utor,  635 


Verbs,    63-87,    and    see    Agreement, 
Clauses,    Gerund,    Gerundive,    In- 
finitive,  Modes,    Participles,    Sen- 
tences, Supine,  Tenses,  Voices 
compound,    272 
defective,  86 

deponent.   420-422,   72,  73 
impersonal,  444,  445,  87 
irregular,    77-85 

semi-deponent,    see    note    on    Ch. 
18,  10,  74 

vTs,  497,  27 

void,  560,  82 

vos,  552,   51 

vowels,  4,  4 

W 

V/atches  of  the  night,  706 
Wishes,  781,  782 


UNIVERSITY   OF   CALIPORNIA   LIBRARY, 
BERKELEY 

THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 

STAMPED   BELOW 

Books  not  returned  on  time  are  subject  to  a  fine  of 
50c  per  volume  after  the  third  day  overdue,  increasing 
to  $1.00  per  volume  after  the  sixth  day.  Books  not  in 
demand  may  be  renewed  if  application  is  made  before 
expiration   of  loan  period. 


WAY   1    VJ3 


w^tiiti 


•^      28Sep 
RECD  LD 

SEP  17  1?56 


75m-7,'30 


YB  41214 


417J90 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CAUFORNIA  LIBRARY 


^^Ji 


